Control and

protection
components
Catalogue

2010/2011

Product reference index

490 NAD 911 pp

1/95
and 6/89
490 NTW 000 ppp
6/89

50437 to 50442

6/88

DE1 DSpppp

6/88

DE1 LT315

50485 and 50486

AB1 Gpp
AB1 Rpp

AB1 AB8ppp
AB1 AC6BL
AB1 BCppppp

4/68

GS1 Fpp

4/55

GS1 Gpp

4/55

2/52
and 2/60
4/29
4/30
and 4/33

GS1 Jpp

4/55

GS1 Kppp

4/55

GS1 Lppp

4/55

GV AXppp

GS1 Npp

4/55

GV NGCpppp

2/18

GV7 ADpppp

GS1 Qppp

4/55

GV1 F03

3/57

GV7 AE11

3/63

GS2 ADL2

4/61

GV1 Gpp

3/65

GS2 AEpp

4/60
and 4/70
4/59

4/39,
1/66,
3/57
and 5/85
3/55

GV7 APpp
GV7 ASpppp

3/63

GV7 AUpppp

3/63

DF8pppp

4/72
to
4/75
4/72
and 4/74
4/73
and 4/75
4/29

GV7 RE100

3/49

DFCCpp

4/33

GV7 RE150

3/49

GV7 RE220

3/49

GV7 RE25

3/49

GV7 REpp

3/49

GV7 RSppp

3/49

GV7 V01

3/65

DF1pppp

A
AB1 DVppppppp

GS1 Eppppp
6/51
and 6/88
2/41

DA1 Tpppp

1/213
4/30,
4/33
and 7/7
1/213,
4/30
and 4/33
7/7
1/41
and 1/49
2/12
and 2/14
1/41
and 1/49
1/213,
6/89,
5/25
and 6/51
5/25

DF2 pppppp
DF3 ppppp
DF4 pppppp

DGK
DK1 ppppp

4/37

1/213,
6/51
and 6/89
AB1 VV635UBL
2/12
and 2/14
ABF H20pppp
1/77
and 1/199
ACM GVpppp
1/49

DR5 TE1S

DR5 TF4V

5/138,
5/139,
5/188,
5/189,
5/190
and 5/191
5/133,
5/135,
5/188,
5/189,
5/190
and 5/191
5/135

AE3 FX122

1/49

DV1ppppp

5/259

AF1 CDppp

1/49
and 5/186
1/41

DX1 AP25

6/25,
7/7
and 5/25
1/49,
1/41
and 5/124

AB1 Gp

AB1 Pp
AB1 Rp

AF1 VAppp
AF1 VC820
AK5 BT01
AK5 GF1

1/49
and 5/186
1/213

DR2 SCpppp

5/103

DZ3 ppp
E

1/212

ER1 XA2p

6/42

1/66
and 1/212
AK5 PAppppppp
1/213

ET1 KB50

5/259

AK5 JBpppp

AK5 PCppppp
AK5 PEpp
AK5 SB1
AM1ppppp

AM3 PA65

1/66
and 1/212
1/213
1/213
1/212,
1/49,
4/41
and 5/186
1/41

APE pppppp

1/199

APP 2AH40H060

1/199

ASI pppppp
ATSUpppppppp

1/78
and 1/79
1/128

GB2pppp

GC ppppppp
GF 16pppp

5/286

GS1 AHppp

7/4
7/12

7/12

CADppppp

GAPpp

GS1 AFpp

7/4

CA2 SKppppp

CA4 KNppppp

GACpppp

7/5

CR1 Bpppppp

1/41,
1/47
and 7/21
5/250

CR1 Fpppppp

5/250

GK2pppp

GS2 AHpppp

GS2 AX1

4/60,
4/61,
4/70
and 4/71
4/61
and 4/71
4/61

GS2 Dpp

4/57

GS2 Eppp

4/68

GS2 Fpp

4/53

GS2 G3

4/53

GS2 APpp

GS2 Gpp

GS2 Jpp
GS2 Kppp
GS2 Lppp

GS2 Mppp

GS2 Npp

GS2 Pppp
5/279
and 5/293
5/279
and 5/293
5/279
and 5/293
1/41,
1/47,
3/90
and 3/91
5/278

GK3 AV01

1/77

CA2 KNppppp

CA3 SKpppp

GA1pp

1/30,
4/36
and 4/37
3/57
and 3/61
3/61

CA3 KNppppp

5/186
and 5/251

GK1pppp

B
BMX FCCpppp

EZ2 LB0601

GS2 AFpp

GS2 Qppp

GS2 Sppp

GS2 Tppp
GS2 Vppp

GSp F

1/32,
1/33,
4/53,
4/57
and 4/68
4/53,
4/57
and 4/68
4/53
1/32,
1/33,
4/53
and 4/57
1/32,
1/33,
4/57
and 4/68
1/32,
1/33,
4/53
and 4/57
4/57
1/32,
1/33,
4/53,
4/57
and 4/68
1/30
to 1/33,
4/53,
4/55,
4/57
and 4/68
4/57
and 4/68
1/31,
4/53,
4/55
and 4/57
1/31

GSp J

1/31

4/59

GSp K

1/30

4/61

GSp L

GS1 AMppp

4/59

GSp N

GS1 ANppp

GS1 AVpp

4/59
and 4/69
4/61
and 4/71
4/61

GS1 AWpp

4/61

1/30
and 1/31
1/30
and 1/31
1/30
and 1/31
3/55
and 3/59
4/37,
3/47,
3/55
and 3/59

GS1 APppp

GS1 Dppp

1/31 to
1/33,
4/53,
4/55,
4/57
and 4/68

GSp QQ
GV ADpppp
GV AEppppp

GV AM11
GV ANppp
GV Apppp

GV1 L3
GV1 V02
GV2 AFpp

GV2 AK00
GV2 APpp
GV2 Apppp

3/55
and 3/59
3/47,
3/55
and 3/59
3/55
and 3/59
3/55

80

3/61
1/6,
1/7,
4/39
and 3/57
3/55
3/51
and 3/57
2/15

GV2 AXppp

2/15

GV2 CP21

2/12

GV2 DMpppppp
GV2 DPppppp
GV2 Epp
GV2 Gppp

GV2 K0pp

GV2 Lpp
GV2 LCppppp
GV2 LEpp
GV2 MCpppp
GV2 MEpppppp

GV2 MP0p
GV2 Ppp
GV2 RTpp

1/8
and 1/9
1/10
and 1/11
2/12,
2/14
and 2/30
1/66,
3/57,
4/39
and 5/85
2/12,
2/14,
2/15
and 2/30
3/53
3/52
2/12,
2/14
and 2/15
1/6,
1/7,
1/39,
2/15,
3/46,
and 3/47
2/12
3/48

GV3 Bpp
GV3 Dpp

3/61

GV2 AF3

GV2 AF4

GV3 Appp

GV3 Gpppp
GV3 Lpp

3/48

GV3 S

5/85

GV3 Ppp

3/48

GV3 PCpp

2/13

GV7 AB11

3/63

GV7 ACppp

5/85
and 3/59
3/53

3/65
and 5/84
3/63

GW ppp

5/279
and 5/293
GY 1611pppppp
5/292

K
KAC 1BZ

4/19

KAD 1PZ

4/11
and 4/17
4/19

KAE 1BZ
KAF pppp

4/17

KBD 1PZ

4/19

KBF pppp

4/19

KCC ppp

KCF ppp

4/19
and 4/11
4/11
and 4/17
4/17
and 4/19
4/17

KDD 1PZ

4/19

KCD 1PZ
KCE ppp

2/18

3/51
and 3/50
2/12,
2/14,
2/30,
3/57,
3/59,
and 4/39
1/8,
1/9,
1/10
and 1/11
1/8,
1/9,
1/10
and 1/11
3/61
and 3/59
3/61

GV2 V0p

GV3 ME80

KDF pppp
KZ ppp

LA1 KNpppp
LA1 LCpppp

LA1 LB021
LA1 LDppppp
LA1 SK01

LA1 VNpppp
LA2 KTpp
LA4 DApp
LA4 DBpp

4/19
4/11,
4/20
and 4/21

L
LA1 Dpppp

2/45,
2/49,
5/79
and 5/123
7/6
and 5/23
1/165,
2/59,
1/167
and 1/170
1/165

1/169
5/34,
5/35
and 7/13
5/235
5/23
and 7/6
5/81

LA4 DC3U

5/81
and 5/83
5/81

LA4 DEpp

5/81

LA4 DFB

5/83

LA4 DTpp

5/83

LA4 DWB

5/83

10

Product reference index

LA4 FSRE

5/123

LA4 FDp

5/124

LA4 FRpp

5/124

LA4 FTp

5/124

LA4 FVp

5/124

LA9 F100

7/7
and 5/24
5/43,
5/35
and 7/13
5/85

LA9 F103

LA4 Kpppp
LA4 SKppp

LA5 Dppppppp
LA5pppppppppp

LA6 DK20p
LA7 Dppppp

3
LA7 Fppp

LA7 K0064
LA9 B103
LA9 D0975
LA9 D09907

5
LA9 D09966
LA9 D11ppppp

LA9 D6ppppp
LA9 D730
LA9 D8pppp

LA9 D9pp

5/76
5/76
and 5/77
5/76,
5/77
and 5/85
5/76
and 5/77
5/85
5/76,
5/77
and 5/84
2/45,
2/49,
3/47,
3/57,
5/85,
6/25,
6/37,
7/7
and 7/23

LA9 E0p

5/25

LA9 E07

3/57
and 4/39
6/37

LA9 Fppp
LA9 FGpppppppp

10

5/186
and 5/251
2/45
and 2/49
2/21,
2/25,
2/45
and 2/49
5/84

5/84

LA9 D5pppp

1/47,
6/36,
6/37
and 5/125
6/12

LA9 D3260
LA9 D4002

1/39,
1/41,
1/169,
5/25,
5/124,
6/25,
6/36
and 6/37

LA9 D2561
LA9 D32974

LA9 Zpppppp

LA9 F15ppp
LA9 F18517
LA9 F2100
LA9 F22510

5/80

5/76,
5/77
and 5/84
2/45,
5/76
and 5/84
5/84

LA9 D12ppp

5/127,
5/177
and 5/258

LA9 LB920

LA9 Fppp

LA9 FFpppp

LA9 FGpppp

LA9 FHpppp

LA9 FJ4F

LA9 FK982

LA9 FL982

LA9 Fp4p4p
LA9 FX970
LA9 K09pp
LA9 LCppp

LA9 LDppp
LA9 Lppppp

5/126,
6/25,
5/176
and 5/251
5/119
and 5/121
1/47

LAD 7ppppp

LAD 6K10p

LAD 8Npp
LAD 90

5/125
1/47,
5/119
and 5/121
5/116,
5/126,
5/176
and 5/251
5/119,
5/121,
5/125,
5/150
and 5/253
1/41,
1/47,
5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/128,
5/150
and 5/253

LAD 909pp
LAD 91217
LAD 918pp
LAD 92560

5/84

LAD 93217

1/39
and 5/76
3/59,
5/84
and 6/25

LAD 96ppp

LAD 99
LAD 9Apppp
LAD 9ETp
LAD 9Pppp

1/47,
5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/128,
5/150,
5/153
and 5/253

LAD 9Rpp

1/47,
5/119,
5/121,
5/125,
5/128,
5/150
and 5/253
5/121,
5/119,
5/124,
5/129,
5/150
and 5/253
5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/125,
5/150,
5/253
and 5/253
5/253

LAD ALLEN4

5/119,
5/153
and 5/121
5/25

LAD Tp

LAD 9SD3
LAD 9T4
LAD 9Vpppp

LAD C22
LAD Npp

LAD Rp

LAD S2

1/170,
2/52
and 2/60

LAD T9R1p

1/170

LAD 4Tppp

2/87
5/234

5/176
5/150

LA9 FJpp

5/150

LAD 2p

LA9 FKpp

5/253
and 5/150
5/150

LAD 3ppppp

2/99
5/85
and 7/23
1/197,
3/57,
4/39
and 5/76

5/81,
5/83,
5/76,
5/77
and 7/22
5/80
and 7/22
3/59,
5/85,
6/25
and 6/58
5/79
and 7/21
1/66,
5/85,
6/25
and 7/23
2/40
1/39
and 5/76
2/40

LB1 LD03ppp
LA9 V974

LA9 FH4H

LAD 4VU

LAZ Rppp

LA9 Zppppp

LA9 FLpp

1/66
and 3/55
1/187,
1/181,
1/183
and 1/185
1/49

LB6 LD03ppp
LC1 BP32p13

4/39
1/199
7/23
and 5/85
5/76
and 5/84
5/76
and 5/77
5/76
2/40
5/76
and 5/77
3/59,
5/85
and 6/25
5/79,
5/123
and 7/21
1/41,
1/47,
5/79,
5/123,
5/175,
5/251
and 7/21
5/123,
5/175,
7/22
and 5/80
5/123,
5/175,
7/22
and 5/80
1/41,
1/47,
5/123,
5/175,
7/22
and 5/80
5/77
7/22
5/156
and 5/157
1/161,
1/163
,2/57
and 2/58
1/161 and
2/57
5/185

LC1 Dppppppp

1/132,
1/139,
5/102
and 5/62
to
5/67
LC1 DTppppppp
5/66,
5/67,
5/74,
5/75,
5/188,
and 5/190
5/191
LC1 Fpppppp

LC1 K0901pp
LC1 SKppppppp
LC1 BLppppp
LC1 BMppppp
LC1 BPppppp
LC1 BRppppp
LC1 Vppppp
LC2 Dppppp

LC2 Kppppppp
LC2 Fpppp
LC2 Vpppppp
LC3 Dppppp
LC3 Fppppp
LC3 Kpppp
LC4 Dppppp
LC7 Kppppppp

1/32,
1/47,
5/114,
5/115,
5/127,
5/153,
and 5/174
6/60
5/14,
5/16
and 2/28
5/34
and 5/42
5/184
5/184
and 5/185
5/184
and 5/185
5/184
and 5/185
5/234
5/73
to
5/75
5/18
and 5/20
5/116
and 5/117
5/234
1/30
and 1/37
1/30
and 1/45
1/30
and 1/37
1/34

LD1 LC030p

5/14
and 5/16
5/18
and 5/20
1/163

LD1 LD030p

1/160

LD4 LDpppp

2/56
2/58,
1/163,
and 1/160
1/160

LC8 Kpppppp

LD5 LD130p
LE1 Dppppp
LE1 GVppppppp
LE1 M35pppp
LE2 Dppppp
LE2 K0pppp
LE3 Dppppp
LE3 Fppppp
LE4 Dppppp
LE4 Kppppp

2/20
and 2/44
2/30

LE8 Kppppp
LF3 Mppp
LF3 Pppp

2/84
and 2/85
2/84

LF4 M02E

2/85

LF4 Ppppp

2/84

LG1 Kppppppp

2/63

LG7 Dpppppp

2/62

LG7 Kpppppp

2/62
and 2/64
2/64

LG8 K06pp02
LJ7pppppp

2/68

LJ8 Kpppppp

2/69

LP1 Dppppppp

5/66

LP1 Kppppppp

5/15
and 5/17
LP1 DT20pppppp
5/189
LP1 SK0600pp
LP2 K0ppppp
LP4 Kpppppp
LP5 Kpppppp
LR2 Dpppp
LR2 K0301
LR9 D5ppp
LR9 Dpp
LR9 Fpppp

LR97 Dppppp
LRD pppp

LS1 D32ppp

2/24

1/31,
1/32,
6/34
and 6/35
6/54
and 6/58
1/30,
1/31,
6/20
and 6/21
1/30,
4/36
and 4/37
6/58

LT47 30ppp

6/58

LT47 60ppp

6/58

LT6 CTpppp

6/88

LTM 9TCS

6/87

LTM EVpppp

6/87

LTM R08CBD

6/86

LTM R08ppp

6/86

LTM R100ppp

6/86

LTM R27ppp

6/86

LU6M B0pp

LE8 Dpppp

1/30
and 6/12
1/31,
1/32
and 6/23
6/23

6/50

2/20
and 2/24
2/20

2/36

5/19
and 5/21
5/15
and 5/17
5/19
and 5/21
6/22

LT47 06ppp

LU2B 12FU

LE6 Dpppp

5/34

LT3 Sppppp

2/28

2/32
and 2/36
2/32
and 2/42
2/24
and 2/48
2/24

2/24

LU9 App
LU9 CD1
LU9 Gpp
LU9 M1
LU9 Rpp
LU9 SP0
LU9 APpp

1/60
and 1/63
1/63
1/67
and 1/81
1/70
and 1/95
1/77
and 1/81
1/63
1/77
and 1/199
1/67
1/67
and 3/59

Product reference index

LU9 CD1
LU9 Gpp
LU9 Rppppp
LU9Bpppp

LU9Cp
LU9Mppp

LUApppp
LUBppp
LUCApppp
LUCBpppp
LUCCpppp
LUCDpppp
LUCLpppp
LUCMpppp

LUFpppp

1/79
and 1/93
1/93
and 1/199
1/91,
1/81
and 6/87
1/61,
1/62,
1/65
and 1/81
1/65

LX4 D8pp

5/91

VBF pppp

LX4 F8pp

VBFX ppp

2/4
and 4/13
2/5

LX4 FF020

5/133
and 5/137
5/139

VCp GUN

2/10

LX4 FF024

5/136

VCCDppp

LX4 FFppp

1/63,
1/77,
1/79,
1/81,
1/85,
1/87,
1/91
and 1/93

LX4 FJppp

5/136
and 5/139
5/136
5/139
5/136
and 5/139
5/136

4/8
and 4/12
4/12

LX4 FKppp

5/137

LX4 FLppp

5/137

LX4 FXppp

5/137

LX5 FJppp

5/139

VVDp

2/5
and 4/9
4/13

1/65
and 1/66
1/58
and 1/62
1/58,
1/60
and 1/69
1/69
and 6/64
1/69
and 6/64
1/69
and 6/64
1/134

LX9 FFppp

5/134

VVEp

4/13

LX9 FGppp

5/134

VW3 A1 104Rpp

6/87

LX9 FHpppp

5/134

VW3 A8 306 D30

1/95

5/135
and 5/138
5/135
and 5/138
5/135
and 5/138
5/86
and 7/23
5/87

VW3 A8 306 Rpp

1/95
6/89
1/61
6/89
1/128

1/61,
1/70,
6/60
and 6/64

LX1 D6ppp

1/65,
1/61,
1/71
and 1/95
1/61,
1/81,
1/85,
1/87,
6/60
and 1/93
6/60
and 6/64
5/254
and 5/255
5/130
and 5/178
5/130
and 5/178
5/131
and 5/179
5/131
and 5/179
5/132
5/133
and 5/179
5/132
and 5/179
5/88

LX1 D8ppp

5/89

LX1 FXppp

5/133

LULpppp

LUTpppp
LX0pppp
LX1 FFppp
LX1 FGppp
LX1 FHpppp
LX1 FJppp
LX1 FKppp
LX1 FLppp

LX1 LDppppp
LX1 V1ppppp

1/169
and 1/171
5/235

LX1 V320ppp

5/235

LX1 V610ppp

5/235

LX1 FH3802

5/131

LX2 FJppp

5/139

LX4 D7pp

5/90
and 5/91

LX4 FGppp
LX4 FHppp

LX9 FJppp
LX9 FKppp
LX9 FLppp
LXD 1ppp
LXD 3ppp
N
NS 250HMA

PA1 PB50
PA1 RB50
PN1 FBpppp
PV1 FA80

5/186
and 5/259
5/186
and 5/259
5/186
and 5/259
5/259
5/259

R
RHZ 66
RM1 XApppp

6/51

RM1 ZG21

6/41
and 6/42
6/41

RM1 ZH21

6/42

S
SR2 CBL06

6/88

STB EPI 2145

1/199

STB XBEpppp

1/91

T
TSX CAN pppppp
TSX CDP ppp
TSX FP ACC12
TSX PBSCAppp

VCDpp
VCDNpp
VCFpppp
VCFNpppp
VCFXppp
VNpp

VW3 A8 306TFpp
VW3 G4104

1/85
and 6/89
1/77
and 1/199
1/95
1/81
and 6/89

Vpp
VBD pp
VBDN pp

4/12
4/8

2/4
and 4/12
2/4
2/5

1/74
and 6/88
VW3 A8 306 Rpp
1/61,
6/89
and 1/93
VZpp

2/6,
4/14
and 4/20

VZN pp

2/7,
4/9
and 4/11

W
WB1 KBppp

5/188,
5/189,
5/190,
5/191
and 5/256

X
XB5 AA86102

6/25

XB5 AL84101

6/25

XBT N410

6/87

XBT NU400

1/70

XBT Z938
XBY 2U
XGS Z24

1/70
and 6/87
5/85
and 7/23
1/74

XZ CG0142

1/79

XZ MC11

1/79

XZ MG12

1/79
and 2/99

Z
Z01

4/21

ZA2pppp

6/36

ZB5 AAppp

2/40

ZB5 ADp

2/40

ZB5 AL432

2/40

ZBA 639
V

VW3 A8 ppp

6/60

P
PA1 LBpp

VCCFpp

80

ZC4 GMp
2/5
and 4/14
4/13
4/8
ZEN L11pp

2/40
5/186,
5/188,
5/189,
5/190,
5/191
and 5/259
2/40

10

Contents

1 - TeSys motor starters:

open version

b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

Combination automatic motor starters

b D.O.L starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
1

b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
b Star-delta starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 1/26
page 1/28
page 1/30
page 1/32

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34

Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37

b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . . page 1/41
1

b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

b 90 to 375 kW, on chassis for customer assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47

TeSys U starter-controllers

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52

b Application examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58
b Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/62
1

b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64

b Control units and function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/68

b PowerSuite software workshop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72
b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . . page 1/76
b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/78
1

b Profibus DP communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80

b CANopen communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84

b DeviceNet communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
b Advantys STB communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/90
b Modbus communication modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92

10

b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/94

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96
b Tripping Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/104

1/0
0

b Selection curves according to categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/108

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/110
b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/112

b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers

and soft start/soft stop units
v Altistart U01 and TeSys U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/124
v Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers
and soft start/soft stop units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/134
b Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/138

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor

breakers
b General, terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/140
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/150
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/160
b Accessories and coils references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/165
b Dimensions, schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/174

Adaptators for use with busbar systems

b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/178

TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter

components
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/192
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/197
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200

b Dimensions, schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/202

AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/207

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208

b Mounting (equipment possibilities). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/210
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/212
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/214

8
9
10

1/1
1

TeSys motor starters

General

Levels of service

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is
to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the
components after testing:
type 1,
type 2.
To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the
equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current
values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions.

1
2

Type 1 coordination
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.

Type 2 coordination
Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently
be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case,
the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the
equipment.

Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

t

Current values

Overload zone

Low-level
short-circuit zone

Short-circuit zone

5
1

Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies the 2 current values to be used for checking
coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection
device:
b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip,
b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate.

2
5

Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)

The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines an intermediate short-circuit current r. This test
current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing
protection against low-level short-circuits.

7
8

1
In

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

10

Current Ico (overload I < 10 In)

The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against
this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defined by the manufacturer.

0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico

Ico

Ir

50
Iq

Thermal overload relay curve.

Fuse.
Tripping of thermal overload relay only.
Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker.
Thermal overload relay limit.
Current broken by the SCPD (1).
Circuit breaker magnetic trip.

Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A)

Ie y 16
16 < Ie y 63
63 < Ie y 125
125 < Ie y 315
315 < Ie y 630
630 < Ie y 1000

Current r (kA)
1
3
5
10
18
30

Current Iq (short-circuit > current r)

This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused
by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided
by fast operating devices.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines a current Iq. The coordination tables supplied by
Schneider Electric are based on a current Iq that is generally u50 kA.

(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.

10

1/2

General (continued)

TeSys motor starters

Levels of service

Selection
No coordination

Type 1 coordination

Considerable risks to both persons and

equipment.

Not authorised by standards:

v NF C 15-100 and IEC60364-1, article 133-1
(installation regulations),
v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7
(electrical equipment in machines),
v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters)

The most frequently used solution.

b Equipment costs are lower.
b Reliability of operation is not a requirement.
b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the
motor starter.
Consequences:
v significant amount of machine downtime,
v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair,
check, obtain supplies.
Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.

Type 2 coordination

This solution ensures reliability of operation.

Consequences:
v reduced machine downtime,
v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit.

Example: escalators.
Total coordination

With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is

permissible and reliability of operation is
guaranteed.

Consequences:
v immediate return to service,
v no special precautions required.
Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.

7
8
9
10

1/3

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys motor starters - open version

Pre-assembled starters
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Starter type

D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker

Level of service

Type 1 coordination

Power at 400 V

Up to 5.5 kW

Type of components

Pages

Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters

D.O.L. starters with

fuse protection

Soft start units or

star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker or
fuses

Up to 37 kW

Up to 132 kW

Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection

built into the circuit-breaker

Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
contactor

3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)

1/6 and 1/7

1/34

1/37

3
4
5
6

9
10

1/4

Type 2 coordination

Up to 37 kW

1/8 and 1/9

1/10 and 1/11

Starters for customer assembly

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters

D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers

D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses

2
3
4
5

Total coordination

Type 1 and type 2 coordination

Up to 15 kW

Up to 110 kW

Up to 315 kW

Starter-controller

Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)

Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay

Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay

Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay

1/62 and 1/63

1/16 and 1/17, 1/26

and 1/27

1/18 and 1/19,

1/28 and 1/29

1/22
1/31

1/23, 1/31
1/32 and 1/33

Up to 355 kW

7
8
9
10

1/5

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 K,
b 1 combination block GV2AF01.

Characteristics

2
3

Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

References

GV2
400/415 V

kA

ME06K1
50

ME07K1
50

ME08K1
50

ME10K1
50

ME14K1
50

ME16K1
15

440 V

kA

50

50

50

50

15

500 V

kA

50

50

50

50

10 (4 kW)
6 (5.5 kW)

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

4
5
6

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

GV2ME10K1pp

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)

Weight

kW
0.37
0.55

kW
0.37
0.55

kW
0.37
0.55
0.75

A
11.6

A
22.5

GV2ME06

LC1K06

GV2ME06K1pp

kg
0.460

0.75

0.75
1.1

1.1

1.62.5

33.5

GV2ME07

LC1K06

GV2ME07K1pp

0.460

1.1
1.5

1.5

1.5
2.2

2.54

51

GV2ME08

LC1K06

GV2ME08K1pp

0.460

2.2

2.2
3

46.3

78

GV2ME10

LC1K06

GV2ME10K1pp

0.460

3
4

4
5.5

610

138

GV2ME14

LC1K09

GV2ME14K1pp

0.460

5.5

5.5

7.5

914

170

GV2ME16

LC1K12

GV2ME16K1pp

0.460

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

10

GV2AF01

Add-on blocks

Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor

Weight
kg
0.020

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/11
(2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3

(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.

8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12

1/6

Schemes :
page 1/14

380/400
Q7

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 K,
b 1 combination block GV2AF01.

Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

References

GV2
400/415 V

kA

ME06K2
50

ME07K2
50

ME08K2
50

ME10K2
50

ME14K2
50

ME16K2
15

440 V

kA

50

50

50

50

15

500 V

kA

50

50

50

50

10/4 kW
6/5.5 kW

D.O.L. starters, reversing

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

GV2ME10K2pp

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)

Weight

kW
0.37
0.55

kW
0.37
0.55

kW
0.37
0.55
0.75

A
11.6

A
22.5

GV2ME06

LC2K06

GV2ME06K2pp

kg
0.460

0.75

0.75
1.1

1.1

1.62.5

33.5

GV2ME07

LC2K06

GV2ME07K2pp

0.460

1.1
1.5

1.5

1.5
2.2

2.54

51

GV2ME08

LC2K06

GV2ME08K2pp

0.460

2.2

2.2
3

46.3

78

GV2ME10

LC2K06

GV2ME10K2pp

0.460

3
4

4
5.5

610

138

GV2ME14

LC2K09

GV2ME14K2pp

0.460

5.5

5.5

7.5

914

170

GV2ME16

LC2K12

GV2ME16K2pp

0.460

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

10

GV2AF01

Add-on blocks
Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor

Weight
kg
0.020

3
4
5
6
7

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/11.
(2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3

(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.

380/400
Q7

8
9
10

Dimensions :
page 1/12

Schemes :
page 1/14

1/7

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2ME,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

Characteristics

Starter type

Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

References

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

400/415 V
440 V
500 V

kA
kA
kA

5
GV2DM102pp

DM 102 to
DM 110

DM 114

DM 116

DM 120

DM 121

DM 122

DM 132

50
50
50

50
15
6

15
8
6

15
8
6

15
6
4

15
6
4

10
6
4

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

GV2

kW
0.06
0.09

0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5
7.5

9
11
15

kW
0.06
0.09
0.12

0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75
1.1

1.5
2.2
3

4
5.5
7.5
9
11

15

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

kW

A
0.160.25
0.250.40

0.37
0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5
7.5

9
11
15
18.5

Weight

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(2)

A
2.4
5

GV2ME02
GV2ME03

LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp

GV2DM102pp (3)
GV2DM103pp (3)

kg
0.596
0.596

0.400.63

GV2ME04

LC1D09pp

GV2DM104pp (3)

0.596

0.631

13

GV2ME05

LC1D09pp

GV2DM105pp (3)

0.596

11.6

22.5

GV2ME06

LC1D09pp

GV2DM106pp (3)

0.596

1.62.5

33.5

GV2ME07

LC1D09pp

GV2DM107pp (3)

0.596

2.54

51

GV2ME08

LC1D09pp

GV2DM108pp (3)

0.596

46.3

78

GV2ME10

LC1D09pp

GV2DM110pp (3)

0.596

610

138

GV2ME14

LC1D09pp

GV2DM114pp (3)

0.596

914
1318

170
223

GV2ME16
GV2ME20

LC1D12pp
LC1D18pp

GV2DM116pp
GV2DM120pp

0.601
0.606

1723
2025
2432

327
327
416

GV2ME21
GV2ME22
GV2ME32

LC1D25pp
LC1D25pp
LC1D32pp

GV2DM121pp
GV2DM122pp
GV2DM132pp

0.646
0.646
0.651

Add-on blocks
Description

Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Mounting plate 10
GV2-AF4
0.016
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/11.

(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (4)
BD

(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17

(4) Only available for GV2DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard.

9
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12

1/8

Schemes :
page 1/14

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

References

400/415 V

kA

DM202 to
DM210
50

440 V

kA

50

15

500 V

kA

50

10

DM216

DM220

DM221

DM222

DM232

50

15

15

15

15

10

D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

GV2DM202pp

DM214

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed (3)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (4)

Weight

kW
0.06

kW
0.06

kW

A
0.160.25

A
2.4

GV2ME02

LC2D09pp

GV2DM202pp

kg
0.963

0.09

0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5

0.09
0.12

0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75
1.1

1.5
2.2
3

4
5.5

0.250.40

GV2ME03

LC2D09pp

GV2DM203pp

0.963

0.37
0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5
7.5

0.400.63

GV2ME04

LC2D09pp

GV2DM204pp

0.963

0.631

13

GV2ME05

LC2D09pp

GV2DM205pp

0.963

11.6

22.5

GV2ME06

LC2D09pp

GV2DM206pp

0.963

1.62.5

33.5

GV2ME07

LC2D09pp

GV2DM207pp

0.963

2.54

51

GV2ME08

LC2D09pp

GV2DM208pp

0.963

46.3

78

GV2ME10

LC2D09pp

GV2DM210pp

0.963

610

138

GV2ME14

LC2D09pp

GV2DM214pp

0.963

914

170

GV2ME16

LC2D12pp

GV2DM216pp

0.973

7.5

7.5
9
11

9
11

1318

223

GV2ME20

LC2D18pp

GV2DM220pp

0.983

1723

327

GV2ME21

LC2D25pp

GV2DM221pp

1.063

11

15

2025

327

GV2ME22

LC2D25pp

GV2DM222pp

1.063

15

15

18.5

2432

416

GV2ME32

LC2D32pp

GV2DM232pp

1.073

2
3
4
5
6
7

Add-on blocks
Description

Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
Combination block between
5 rail
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
circuit-breaker and contactor
Mounting plate 10
GV2-AF4
0.016
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page 3/11.
(2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/20.
(3) See page 5/62.
(4) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD

(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.

8
9
10

Dimensions :
page 1/12

Schemes :
page 1/14

1/9

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

Characteristics

Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

References

kA

130

130

50

50

50

50

440 V

kA

130

130

50

20

20

20

20

500 V

kA

130

50

42

10

10

10

10

GV2DP102pp

6
7
8

DP114

DP116

DP120

DP121

DP122

DP132

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

4
5

400/415 V

DP102 to
DP110
130

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)

Weight

kW
0.06

kW
0.06

kW

A
0.160.25

A
2.4

GV2P02

LC1D09pp

GV2DP102pp

kg
0.686

0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5

7.5

0.09
0.12

0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75
1.1

1.5
2.2
3

4
5.5
7.5
9

0.250.40

GV2P03

LC1D09pp

GV2DP103pp

0.686

0.37
0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5
7.5
9

0.400.63

GV2P04

LC1D09pp

GV2DP104pp

0.686

0.631

13

GV2P05

LC1D09pp

GV2DP105pp

0.686

11.6

22.5

GV2P06

LC1D09pp

GV2DP106pp

0.686

1.62.5

33.5

GV2P07

LC1D09pp

GV2DP107pp

0.686

2.54

51

GV2P08

LC1D09pp

GV2DP108pp

0.696

46.3

78

GV2P10

LC1D09pp

GV2DP110pp

0.736

610

138

GV2P14

LC1D09pp

GV2DP114pp

0.736

914

170

GV2P16

LC1D25pp

GV2DP116pp

0.741

1318

223

GV2P20

LC1D25pp

GV2DP120pp

0.736

11

11

1723

327

GV2P21

LC1D25pp

GV2DP121pp

0.741

11

15

2025

327

GV2P22

LC1D25pp

GV2DP122pp

0.741

15

15

18.5

2432

416

GV2P32

LC1D32pp

GV2DP132pp

0.741

18.5

3040

560

GV3 P401 (4)

LC1D50App

1.725

18.5

22

3040

560

GV3 P401 (4)

LC1D65App

1.730

22

3750

700

GV3 P501 (4)

LC1D50App

1.725

22

30

3750

700

GV3 P501 (4)

LC1D65App

1.730

30

37

4865

910

GV3 P651 (4)

LC1D65App

1.730

Add-on blocks
Description

GV3P651
+
LC1D65App

10
Dimensions :
page 1/12

1/10

Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
Combination block between
5 rail
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
circuit-breaker and contactor
Mounting plate 10
GV2-AF4
0.016
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD

(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes :
page 1/14

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters with overload

protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P,
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
b 1 combination block GV2AF3.

Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)

GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

References

400/415 V

kA

DP202 to
DP210
130

440 V

kA

130

130

50

20

20

20

20

500 V

kA

130

50

42

10

10

10

10

DP216

DP220

DP221

DP222

DP232

130

130

50

50

50

50

D.O.L. starters, reversing

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415V

GV2DP202pp

DP214

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

For customer assembly

Pre-assembled

Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference

Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)

Weight

kW
0.06

kW
0.06

kW

A
0.160.25

A
2.4

GV2P02

LC2D09pp

GV2DP202pp

kg
1.053

0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5

7.5

0.09
0.12

0.18
0.25
0.37

0.55

0.75
1.1

1.5
2.2
3

4
5.5
7.5
9

0.250.40

GV2P03

LC2D09pp

GV2DP203pp

1.053

0.37
0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5
2.2

3
4
5.5
7.5
9

0.400.63

GV2P04

LC2D09pp

GV2DP204pp

1.053

0.631

13

GV2P05

LC2D09pp

GV2DP205pp

1.053

11.6

22.5

GV2P06

LC2D09pp

GV2DP206pp

1.053

1.62.5

33.5

GV2P07

LC2D09pp

GV2DP207pp

1.053

2.54

51

GV2P08

LC2D09pp

GV2DP208pp

1.073

46.3

78

GV2P10

LC2D09pp

GV2DP210pp

1.153

610

138

GV2P14

LC2D09pp

GV2DP214pp

1.153

914

170

GV2P16

LC2D25pp

GV2DP216pp

1.163

1318

223

GV2P20

LC2D25pp

GV2DP220pp

1.153

11

11

1723

327

GV2P21

LC2D25pp

GV2DP221pp

1.163

11

15

2025

327

GV2P22

LC2D25pp

GV2DP222pp

1.163

15

15

18.5

2432

416

GV2P32

LC2D32pp

GV2DP232pp

1.163

18.5

3040

560

GV3 P401 (4)

LC2D50App

2.750

18.5

22

3040

560

GV3 P401 (4)

LC2D65App

2.760

22

3750

700

GV3 P501 (4)

LC2D50App

2.750

22

30

3750

700

GV3 P501 (4)

LC2D65App

2.760

30

37

4865

910

GV3 P651 (4)

LC2D65App

2.760

3
4
5
6
7
8

Add-on blocks
Description

GV3P651
+
LC2D65App

Dimensions :
page 1/12

Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Mounting plate 10
GV2-AF4
0.016
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD

(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes :
page 1/14

1/11

9
10

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSys motor starters - open

version

Combination automatic motor starters

GV2 MEppKppp
GV2MEppK1pp

152

GV2MEppK2pp

11

66
87

152

On mounting rail AM1DE200

45

90

4
GV2DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200

With adapter plate LAD311

GV2DM1pppp

GV2DM2pppp

5
6
c1

45

c1
c
d1
d
GV2
b
c
c1

DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
176.4
99.6
94.1

9
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11

1/12

DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
186.8
105.9
100.4

GV2
c
c1
d
d1

DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
135.6
130.1
112.5
107

234

125 3

DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
141.9
136.4
112.5
107

90

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open

version

Combination automatic motor starters

GV2DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200

With adapter plate LAD311

GV2DP1pppp

GV2DP2pppp

c1
c
d1
d

GV2
b
c
c1
d
d1

b
234

125 3

45

90

c1
c

DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
176.4
105.6
100.1
100.5
95

DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
186.8
111.9
106.4
100.5
95

GV2

DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
141.6
136.5

c
c1

DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
147.9
142.4

GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)

Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)

231

120

+3
0

138

Vertical mounting (1)

136

119

141
120

136

55

141

(1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V.
Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association.
(2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.

9
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11

1/13

1/14

10

References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
A2
A1

21/NC

A2

14
A1

13/NO

5/L3
T3/6

22

13/NO

14

3/L2

5/L3

T3/6

T2/4

3/L2

T2/4

13/NO

14

1/L1

A1

5/L3

T3/6

T1/2

A2

3/L2

T2/4

13/NO

GV2DM2pppp
1/L1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

4
T1/2

14

21/NC

22

L3 6/T3

13/NO

6
14

L2 4/T2

8
L1 2/T1

22

5/L3

3/L2

GV2DM1pppp

A1

13/NO
21/NC

14

6/T3

4/T2

1/L1

T1/2

A1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

GV2MEppK1pp

A2

5/L3

T3/6

7
3/L2

1/L1

T2/4

6
2/T1

3
A2

1/L1

A1

T1/2

A2

Schemes
Combination automatic motor starters

TeSys motor starters - open

version

GV2MEppK2pp

GV2DM2-SCH-2-M

Schemes (continued) 

TeSys motor starters - open

version

Combination automatic motor starters

5/L3

A1
A2

13/NO

21/NC
22

5
6

14

3
4

3
4

1
2

5
6

3
4

21/NC

1
2

A2

A1

22

L3 6/T3

13/NO

3/L2

14

L1 2/T1

21/NC
22

14

T3/6

T2/4

T1/2

A2

L2 4/T2

1/L1

5/L3
6/T3
5/L3

13/NO

4/T2

3/L2

2/T1

3/L2

GV2DP2pppp

A1

1/L1

1/L1

GV2DP1pppp

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

A2

A1

02

01

01
A1

KM2

02

KM1

A1

01

02

01

A1

A1

GV2DP2-SCH-2-M

A2

Control circuit c

A1

Control circuit a

KM1

KM2

A2

A2

KM2

A2

A2

02

KM1

7
8
9
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11

1/15

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker

and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

Circuit-breaker
Reference

500 V

Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips

Reference (2)

Ie

Iq (1)

Ie

Iq (1)

Ie

Iq (1)

kW

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

0.06

0.2

50

0.06

0.19

50

GV2 ME02

0.160.25

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.09

0.3

50

0.09
0.12

0.28
0.37

50
50

GV2 ME03

0.250.40

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.12
0.18

0.44
0.6

50
50

0.18

0.55

50

GV2 ME04

0.400.63

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.25
0.37

0.85
1.1

50
50

0.25
0.37

0.76
0.99

50
50

GV2 ME05

0.631

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.55

1.5

50

0.55

1.36

50

0.37
0.55

0.88
1.2

50
50

GV2 ME06

11.6

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.75

1.5

50

GV2 ME06

11.6

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

0.75

1.9

50

0.75
1.1

1.68
2.37

50
50

1.1

2.2

50

GV2 ME07

1.6.2.5

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

1.1
1.5

2.7
3.6

50
50

1.5

3.06

50

1.5
2.2

2.9
3.9

5050

GV2 ME08

2.54

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

2.2

4.9

50

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

50
50

5.2

50

GV2 ME10

46.3

LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

3
4

6.5
8.5

50
50

7.9

15

4
5.5

6.8
9.2

10
10

GV2 ME14

610

LC1 K09 or LC1 D09

5.5

11.5

15

5.5

10.4

7.5

12.4

GV2 ME16

914

LC1 K12 or LC1 D12

7.5

15.5

15

7.5
9

13.7
16.9

8
8

13.9

GV2 ME20

1318

LC1 D18

18.1

15

11

20.1

11

17.6

GV2 ME21

1723

LC1 D25

11

22

15

15

23

GV2 ME22

2025

LC1 D25

15

29

10

15

26.5

18.5

28

GV2 ME32

2432

LC1 D32

18.5

35

50

18.5

32.8

50

22

33

10

GV3 P40

3040

LC1 D40A

22

41

50

22

39

50

30

44

10

GV3 P50

3750

LC1 D50A

37

55

50

37

51.5

50

37

53

10

GV3 P65

4865

LC1 D65A

37

64

25

45

64

18

GV7 RE80

4880

LC1 D65A

37

66

15

45

76

10

55

78

GV3 ME80

5680

LC1 D80

37

66

25

45

76

25

55

78

18

GV7 RE80

4880

LC1 D80

45

80

25

GV7 RE100

60100

LC1 D95

50

90

25

GV7 RE100

60100

LC1 D115

55

97

25

75

106

30

GV7 RE150

90150

LC1 D115

75

132

35

75

125

35

90

128

30

GV7 RE150

90150

LC1 D150

90

146

35

GV7 RE150

90150

LC1 F185

90

160

35

110

156

30

GV7 RE220

132220

LC1 F185

110

178

35

132
160

184
224

30
30

GV7 RE220

132220

LC1 F265

110

195

35

132

215

35

GV7 RE220

132220

LC1 F225

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

10

1/16

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker

and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

Circuit-breaker
Reference

500 V

Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips

Reference (2)

Ie

Iq (1)

Ie

Iq (1)

Ie

Iq (1)

kW

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

0.06

0.2

130

0.06

0.19

130

GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02

0.160.25

LC1 D09

0.09

0.3

130

0.09
0.12

0.28
0.37

130
130

GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03

0.250.4

LC1 D09

0.12
0.18

0.44
0.6

130
130

0.18

0.55

130

GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04

0.40.63

LC1 D09

0.25
0.37

0.85
1.1

130
130

0.25
0.37

0.76
0.99

130
130

GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05

0.631

LC1 D09

0.55

1.5

130

0.55

1.36

130

0.37
0.55

0.88
1.2

130
130

GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06

11.6

LC1 D09

0.75

1.5

130

GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06

11.6

LC1 D09

0.75

1.9

130

0.75
1.1

1.68
2.37

130
130

1.1

2.2

130

GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07

1.62.5

LC1 D09

1.1
1.5

2.7
3.6

130
130

1.5

3.06

130

1.5
2.2

2.9
3.9

130
130

GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08

2.54

LC1 D09

2.2

4.9

130

GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10

46.3

LC1 D09

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

50
50

5.2

50

GV2 ME10

46.3

LC1 D09

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

130
130

5.2

130

GV2 P10

46.3

LC1 D09

3
4

6.5
8.5

130
130

GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14

610

LC1 D09

7.9

15

4
5.5

6.8
9.2

10
10

GV2 ME14

610

LC1 D09

7.9

130

4
5.5

6.8
9.2

50
50

GV2 P14

610

LC1 D12

5.5

11.5

130

5.5
7.5

10.4
13.7

50
50

7.5
9

12.4
13.9

42
42

GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16

914

LC1 D25

7.5

15.5

50

16.9

20

GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20

1318

LC1 D25

18.1

50

11

20.1

20

11

17.6

10

GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21

1723

LC1 D25

11

22

50

GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22

2025

LC1 D25

15

23

10

GV2 P22

2025

LC1 D32

15

29

35

15

26.5

25

18.5

28

10

GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32

2540

LC1 D32

18.5

35

50

GV3 P40

3040

LC1 D50A

18.5

32.8

50

22

33

10

GV3 P40

3040

LC1 D65A

22

41

50

GV3 P50

3750

LC1 D50A

22

39

50

30

44

10

GV3 P50

3750

LC1 D65A

37

55

50

37

51.5

50

GV3 P65

4865

LC1 D65A

37

53

10

GV3 P65

4865

LC1 D80

22

39

65

GV7 RS40

2540

LC1 D80

30

44

50

GV7 RS50

3050

LC1 D80

37

53

50

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D80

22

41

70

GV7 RS50

3050

LC1 D80

30

55

70

30

51.5

65

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D80

37

66

70

37

64

65

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D80

45

76

65

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D80

45

64

50

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D115

55

78

50

GV7 RS80

4880

LC1 D115

45

80

70

55

90

65

GV7 RS100

60100

LC1 D115

55
75

97
132

70
70

75
90

125
146

65
65

90

128

50

GV7 RS150

90150

LC1 D150

90

160

70

110

178

65

110

156

50

GV7 RS220

132220

LC1 F185

110

195

70

132

215

65

GV7 RS220

132220

LC1 F225

132
160

184
224

50
50

GV7 RS220

132220

LC1 F265

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
(3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

1/17

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

500 V

Circuit-breaker
Reference

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

kW

Contactor
Rating

Irm (1)

Thermal overload relay

Reference (2) Reference

Setting
range

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

0.06

0.2

50

0.06

0.19

50

GV2 LE03

0.4

LC1 K06

LR2 K0302

0.160.23

0.09

0.28

50

GV2 LE03

0.4

LC1 K06

LR2 K0303

0.230.36

0.09

0.3

50

0.12

0.37

50

GV2 LE03

0.4

LC1 K06

LR2 K0304

0.360.54

0.12

0.44

50

GV2 LE04

0.63

LC1 K06

LR2 K0304

0.360.54

0.18

0.6

50

0.18

0.55

50

GV2 LE04

0.63

LC1 K06

LR2 K0305

0.540.8

0.25

0.76

50

GV2 LE05

13

LC1 K06

LR2 K0305

0.540.8

0.25
0.37

0.85
1.1

50
50

0.37

50

0.37

0.88

50

GV2 LE05

13

LC1 K06

LR2 K0306

0.81.2

0.55

1.5

50

0.55

1.36

50

0.55
0.75

1.2
1.5

50
50

GV2 LE06

1.6

22.5

LC1 K06

LR2 K0307

1.21.8

0.75

1.68

50

GV2 LE07

2.5

33.5

LC1 K06

LR2 K0307

1.21.8

0.75
1.1

1.9
2.7

50
50

1.1

2.37

50

1.1

2.2

50

GV2 LE07

2.5

33.5

LC1 K06

LR2 K0308

1.82.6

1.5

3.6

50

1.5

3.06

50

1.5

2.9

50

GV2 LE08

51

LC1 K06

LR2 K0310

2.63.7

2.2

3.9

50

GV2 LE08

51

LC1 K06

LR2 K0312

3.75.5

2.2

4.9

50

2.2

4.4

50

5.2

50

GV2 LE10

6.3

78

LC1 K06

LR2 K0312

3.75.5

5.77

50

GV2 LE10

6.3

78

LC1 K06

LR2 K0314

5.58

7.9

15

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 K09

LR2 K0314

5.58

6.5

50

6.8

10

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 K09

LR2 K0314

5.58

8.5

50

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 K09

LR2 K0316

811.5

5.5

11.5

15

5.5

10.4

7.5

12.4

GV2 LE16

14

170

LC1 K12

LR2 K0321

1014

7.5

13.7

13.9

GV2 LE16

14

170

LC1 D18

LRD 21

1218

7.5

15.5

15

16.9

GV2 LE20

18

223

LC1 D18

LRD 21

1218

18.1

15

11

17.6

GV2 LE22

25

327

LC1 D25

LRD 22

1624

11

22

15

11

20.1

15

23

GV2 LE22

25

327

LC1 D25

LRD 22

1624

15

29

10

15

26.5

18.5

28

GV2 LE32

32

416

LC1 D32

LRD 32

2332

18.5

35

50

18.5

32.5

50

22

33

10

GV3 L40

40

560

LC1 D40A

LRD 340

3040

22

41

50

22

39

50

30

44

10

GV3 L50

50

700

LC1 D50A

LRD 350

3750

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

9
10

1/18

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

(continued)

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

Circuit-breaker

500 V

Reference

Contactor
Rating

Irm (1)

Thermal overload relay

Reference (2) Reference

Setting
range

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

kW

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

37

55

50

37

51.5

50

37

53

10

GV3 L65

65

910

LC1 D65A

LRD 365

4865

37

64

50

37

53

10

GV3 L65

65

910

LC1 D65A

LRD 365

4865

45

64

50

GV3 L65

65

910

LC1 D80

LRD 3361

4865

37

66

70

45

76

65

55

78

25

NS80HMA

80

1040

LC1 D80

LRD 3363

6380

45

80

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

1300

LC1 D95

LRD 3365

80104

50

90

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

1200

LC1 D115

LRD 4365

80104

75

106

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1500

LC1 D115

LRD 4367

95120

55

97

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1350

LC1 D115

LRD 4367

95120

75

132

(3)

75

125

(3)

90

128

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1800

LC1 D150

LRD 4369

110140

90

146

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1950

LC1 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

90

160

(3)

110

156

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2200

LC1 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

110

195

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2640

LC1 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

110

178

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2420

LC1 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

132

184

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2640

LC1 F265

LR9 F5371

132220

132

215

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2860

LC1 F265

LR9 F5371

132220

132

230

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3200

LC1 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

160

224

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

2860

LC1 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

160

256

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3520

LC1 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

160

280

(3)

200

321

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

4160

LC1 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

200

280

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3840

LC1 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

220

310

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

4160

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

200

350

(3)

220

353

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5000

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

250

401

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5550

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

250

344

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5000

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

220

388

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5500

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

250

430

(3)

280

470

(3)

315

432

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

6000

LC1 F500

LR9 F7379

300500

355

488

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

6500

LC1 F500

LR9 F7381

380630

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA)

NS100pMA

NS160pMA and NS250pMA

NS400pMA and NS630pMA

400/415 V

25

70

36

70

70

130

440 V

25

65

35

65

65

130

500 V

18

50

30

50

50

70

660/690 V

10

10

20

35

Code

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/19

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

(continued)

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

500 V

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

kW

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

Reference

Rating Irm (1)

Thermal overload relay

Reference (2) Reference

Setting
range

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

0.06

0.2

130

0.06

0.19

130

GV2 L03 or LE03

0.4

LC1 D09

LRD 02

0.160.25

0.09

0.3

130

0.09
0.12

0.28
0.37

130
130

GV2 L03 or LE03

0.4

LC1 D09

LRD 03

0.250.40

0.12
0.18

0.44
0.6

130
130

0.18

0.55

130

GV2 L04 or LE04

0.63

LC1 D09

LRD 04

0.40.63

0.25
0.37

0.85
1.1

130
130

0.25
0.37

0.76
0.99

130
130

GV2 L05 or LE05

13

LC1 D09

LRD 05

0.631

0.37

0.88

130

GV2 L05 or LE05

13

LC1 D09

LRD 06

11.7

0.55

1.5

130

0.55

1.36

130

0.55
0.75

1.2
1.5

130
130

GV2 L06 or LE06

1.6

22.5

LC1 D09

LRD 06

11.7

0.75

1.9

130

0.75

1.68

130

1.1

2.2

130

GV2 L07 or LE07

2.5

33.5

LC1 D09

LRD 07

1.62.5

1.1
1.5

2.7
3.6

130
130

1.1

2.37

130

1.5
2.2

2.9
3.9

130
130

GV2 L08 or LE08

51

LC1 D09

LRD 08

2.54

1.5

3.06

130

GV2 L08 or LE08

51

LC1 D09

LRD 10

46

2.2

4.9

130

5.2

13

GV2 L10 or LE10

6.3

78

LC1 D09

LRD 10

46

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

50
50

5.2

50

GV2 LE10

6.3

78

LC1 D09

LRD 10

46

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

130
130

5.2

130

GV2 L10

6.3

78

LC1 D09

LRD 10

46

6.5

130

GV2 L14 or LE14

10

10

LC1 D09

LRD 12

5.58

6.8

10

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 D12

LRD 12

5.58

6.8

50

GV2 L14

10

138

LC1 D12

LRD 12

5.58

8.5

130

GV2 L14 or LE14

10

138

LC1 D09

LRD 14

710

7.9

15

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 D09

LRD 14

710

7.9

130

GV2 L14

10

138

LC1 D09

LRD 14

710

5.5

9.2

10

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC1 D09

LRD 14

710

5.5

9.2

50

GV2 L14

10

138

LC1 D09

LRD 14

710

5.5

11.5

130

5.5

10.4

50

7.5

12.4

42

GV2 L16

14

170

LC1 D25

LRD 16

913

7.5

13.7

50

GV2 L16

14

170

LC1 D25

LRD 21

1218

7.5

15.5

50

16.9

20

13.9

42

GV2 L20

18

223

LC1 D25

LRD 21

1218

9
11

18.1
22

50
50

11

20.1

20

GV2 L22

25

327

LC1 D25

LRD 22

1624

11
15

17.6
23

10
10

GV2 L22

25

327

LC1 D32

LRD 22

1624

15

29

50

15

26.5

50

GV3 L32

32

448

LC1 D40A

LRD 332

2332

18.5

28

10

GV3 L32

32

448

LC1 D65A

LRD 332

2332

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

10

1/20

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

(continued)

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

440 V

Circuit-breaker

500 V

Reference

Rating Irm (1)

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

Reference (2)

Reference

Setting
range

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

kW

kA

kW

kA

kW

kA

18.5

35

50

GV3 L40

40

560

LC1 D50A

LRD 340

3040

18.5

32.5

50

GV3 L40

40

560

LC1 D65A

LRD 340

3040

22

41

50

GV3 L50

50

700

LC1 D50A

LRD 350

3750

22

39

50

30

44

10

GV3 L50

50

700

LC1 D65A

LRD 350

3750

37

55

50

37

51.5

50

GV3 L65

65

910

LC1 D65A

LRD 365

4865

37

64

50

37

53

10

GV3 L65

65

910

LC1 D80

LRD 3359

4865

37

66

70

45

76

65

NS80HMA

80

1000

LC1 D80

LRD 3363

6380

55

78

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

1040

LC1 D80

LRD 3363

6380

45

80

(3)

55

90

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

1300

LC1 D115

LR9 D5367

60100

55

97

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1500

LC1 D115

LR9 D5369

90150

75

106

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1050

LC1 D115

LR9 D5369

90150

75

132

(3)

75

125

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1950

LC1 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

90

146

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1950

LC1 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

90

128

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1200

LC1 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

90

160

(3)

110

178

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2420

LC1 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

110

156

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

1540

LC1 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

110

195

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2860

LC1 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

132

215

(3)

132

184

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

2200

LC1 F265

LR9 F5371

132220

132

230

(3)

160

256

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3520

LC1 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

160

224

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

2200

LC1 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

160

280

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

4000

LC1 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

200

321

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

4000

LC1 F330

LR9 F7379

300500

200

280

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3500

LC1 F400

LR9 F7375

200330

220

310

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

3500

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

200

350

(3)

220
250

353
401

(3)
(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5500

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

250
315

344
432

(3)
(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

4500

LC1 F500

LR9 F7379

300500

220
250

388
430

(3)
(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

6250

LC1 F500

LR9 F7379

300500

355

488

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

5000

LC1 F630

LR9 F7381

380630

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
NS160pMA and NS250pMA

NS400pMA and NS630pMA

400/415 V

Breaking performance Iq (kA)

NS100pMA
25

70

36

70

70

130

440 V

25

65

35

65

65

130

500 V

18

50

30

50

50

70

660/690 V

10

10

20

35

Code

10

1/21

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.06 to 55 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz

in category AC-3

Fuse carrier (1)

(basic block)

aM fuses

400/415 V

Reference

Size

Ie

kW

440 V

500 V

Ie

kW

Ie

kW

Rating

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

class 10

Reference (2)

Reference

Setting
range
A

0.06

0.2

0.06

0.19

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0302

0.160.23

0.09

0.28

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0303

0.230.36

0.09
0.12

0.3
0.44

0.12

0.37

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0304

0.360.54

0.18

0.6

0.18
0.25

0.55
0.76

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0305

0.540.8

0.25
0.37

0.85
1.1

0.37

0.37

0.88

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0306

0.81.2

0.55

1.5

0.55
0.75

1.36
1.68

0.55
0.75

1.2
1.5

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0307

1.21.8

0.75
1.1

1.9
2.7

1.1

2.37

1.1
1.5

2.2
2.9

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0308

1.82.6

1.5

3.6

1.5

3.06

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0310

2.63.7

2.2

4.9

2.2
3

3.9
5.2

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0312

3.75.5

2.2

4.42

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K06

LR2K0312

3.75.5

6.5

5.77

6.8

LS1D32

10 x 38

LC1K09

LR2K0314

5.58

8.5

7.9

5.5

9.2

LS1D32

10 x 38

12

LC1K09

LR2K0316

811.5

(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.

(2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

7
8
9
10

1/22

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

(continued)

0.06 to 55 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3

Fuse carrier (1)

(basic block)

aM fuses

400/415 V

Reference

Size

440 V

500 V

Ie

Ie

Ie

kW

kW

kW

Rating

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

classe 10

Reference (2)

Reference

Setting
range

5.5

11.5

5.5

10.4

7.5

12.4

LS1D32

10 x 38

16

LC1K12

LR2K0321

1014

7.5

15.5

7.5

13.7

13.9

LS1D32

10 x 38

16

LC1D18

LRD21

1218

16.9

LS1D32

10 x 38

20

LC1D25

LRD21

1218

9
11

18.1
22

11

20.1

11
15

17.6
23

GK1EK

14 x 51

25

LC1D25

LRD22

1624

15

29

15

26.5

18.5

28

GK1EK

14 x 51

32

LC1D32

LRD32

2332

18.5

35

18.5

32.8

22

33

GK1EK

14 x 51

40

LC1D40

LRD3355

3040

22

41

22

39

30

44

GK1FK

22 x 58

50

LC1D50

LRD3357

3750

30

51.5

GK1FK

22 x 58

80

LC1D50

LRD3359

4865

37

53

GK1FK

22 x 58

80

LC1D65

LRD3359

4865

30

55

37

64

GK1FK

22 x 58

80

LC1D65

LRD3361

5570

45

64

GK1FK

22 x 58

80

LC1D80

LRD3361

5570

37 (3)

66

45

76

GK1FK

22 x 58

100

LC1D80

LRD3363

6380

45

80

55

78

GK1FK

22 x 58

100

LC1D95

LRD3365

8093

55

90

GK1FK

22 x 58

125

LC1D115

LRD4365

80104

55

97

75

106

GK1FK

22 x 58

125

LC1D115

LRD4367

95120

(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.

(2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
(3)400 V maximum.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/23

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

(continued)

0.06 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz

in category AC-3

Switchdisconnector

aM fuses

400/415 V

Reference (1)

Size

Ie

kW

440 V

500 V

Ie

kW

Ie

kW

Rating

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

classe 10

Reference (2)

Reference

Setting
range
A

0.06

0.2

0.06

0.19

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD02

0.160.25

0.09

0.28

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD03

0.250.4

0.09
0.12

0.3
0.44

0.12

0.37

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD04

0.40.63

0.18

0.6

0.18
0.25

0.55
0.76

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD05

0.631

0.25
0.37
0.55

0.85
1.1
1.5

0.37
0.55

1
1.36

0.37
0.55
0.75

0.88
1.2
1.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD06

11.7

0.75

1.9

0.75
1.1

1.68
2.37

1.1

2.2

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD07

1.62.5

1.1
1.5

2.7
3.6

1.5

3.06

1.5
2.2

2.9
3.9

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD08

2.54

2.2

4.9

2.2

4.42

5.2

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD10

46

6.5

5.77

6.8

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LRD12

5.58

8.5

7.9

5.5

9.2

GS1DD

10 x 38

10

LC1D09

LRD14

710

5.5

11.5

5.5

10.4

7.5

12.4

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

LC1D12

LRD16

913

7.5

15.5

7.5

13.7

13.9

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

LC1D18

LRD21

1218

16.9

GSpF

14 x 51

20

LC1D25

LRD21

1218

9
11

18.1
22

11

20.1

11
15

17.6
23

GSpF

14 x 51

25

LC1D25

LRD22

1624

15

29

15

26.5

18.5

28

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D32

LRD32

2332

18.5

35

18.5

32.8

22

33

GSpF

14 x 51

40

LC1D40A

LRD340

3040

22

41

22

39

30

44

GSpJ

22 x 58

50

LC1D50A

LRD350

3750

30

51.5

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D65A

LRD365

4865

37

53

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D65A

LRD365

4865

30

55

37

64

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D65A

LRD365

4865

45

64

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D95

LRD3361

5570

37

66

45

76

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

LC1D80

LRD3363

6380

55

78

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

LC1D115

LR9D5367

60100

45

80

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

LC1D95

LRD3365

8093

55

97

55

90

75

106

GSpL

T0

125

LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

75

132

75

125

90

128

GSpL

T0

160

LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

90

160

90

146

110

156

GSpN

T1

200

LC1F185

LR9F5371

132220

110

195

110

178

132

184

GSpN

T1

250

LC1F225

LR9F5371

132220

132

230

132

215

160

224

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC1F265

LR9F7375

200330

160

256

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC1F330

LR9F7375

200330

160

280

200

321

200

280

GSpQQ

T2

400

LC1F330

LR9F7375

200330

220

310

GSpQQ

T2

400

LC1F400

LR9F7375

200330

200
220

350
388

220

353

250

344

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F400

LR9F7379

300500

250

430

250

401

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F500

LR9F7379

300500

315
355

432
488

GS2S

T3

630

LC1F500

LR9F7381

380630

315

540

315

505

GS2S

T3

630

LC1F630

LR9F7381

380630

355
400

549
611

400

552

GS2V

T4

800

LC1F630

LR9F7381

380630

(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.

(2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

9
10

1/24

Combination starters
for customer assembly
(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

0.75 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3

Switchdisconnector

aM fuses

Ie

Reference (1)

Size

kW

Rating

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

classe 10

Reference (2)

Reference

Setting range
A

0.75

1.1

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD06

11.6

1.1

1.6

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD06

11.6

1.5

2.1

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD07

1.62.5

2.2

2.8

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD08

2.54

3.8

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD08

2.54

4.9

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD10

46

5.5

6.7

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LRD12

5.58

7.5

8.9

GSpF

14 x 51

10

LC1D25

LRD16

913

11

12.8

GSpF

14 x 51

16

LC1D25

LRD16

913

15

17

GSpF

14 x 51

20

LC1D25

LRD22

1624

18.5

21

GSpF

14 x 51

25

LC1D32

LRD22

1624

22

24

GSpF

14 x 51

32

LC1D40A

LRD332

2332

30

32

GSpF

14 x 51

40

LC1D40A

LRD340

3040

37

39

GSpF

14 x 51

50

LC1D65A

LRD350

3750

45

47

GSpJ

22 x 58

63

LC1D80

LR2 D3357

3750

55

57

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D115

LR2 D3359

4865

75

77

GSpKK

T00

100

LC1D115

LR2 D3363

6380

90

93

GSpKK

T00

125

LC1D150

LR9 D5369

90150

110

113

GSpKK

T00

125

LC1F185

LR9 D5369

90150

132

134

GSpL

T0

160

LC1F265

LR9 F5371

132220

160

162

GSpN

T1

200

LC1F265

LR9 F5371

132220

200

203

GSpN

T1

250

LC1F330

LR9 F7375

200330

220

224

GSpQQ

T2

250

LC1F400

LR9 F7375

200330

250

250

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC1F400

LR9 F7375

200330

315

313

GSpQQ

T2

355

LC1F500

LR9 F7379

300500

355

354

GSpQQ

T2

400

LC1F630

LR9 F7379

300500

400

400

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F630

LR9 F7379

300500

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.

(2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

10

1/25

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and

overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

1.5 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50-60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

P
kW

Circuit-breaker

440 V

Ie

IrD (1)

Iq (2)

Reference
Ie

IrD (1)

Iq (2)

Stardelta
contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips

Reference

kA

kW

kA

1.5

3.6

50

1.5

3.06

1.8

50

GV2 ME08

A
2.54

LC3 K06

2.2

4.9

2.9

50

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

2.6
3.3

50
50

GV2 ME10

46.3

LC3 K06

3
4

6.5
8.5

3.8
4.9

50
50

7.9

4.6

15

GV2 ME14

610

LC3 K06

5.5

11.5

6.4

15

5.5

10.4

GV2 ME16

914

LC3 K06

7.5

15.5

8.6

15

7.5

13.7

7.9

GV2 ME20

1318

LC3 K09

16.9

9.8

GV2 ME20

1318

LC3 D12A

18.1

10

15

11

20.1

12

GV2 ME21

1723

LC3 D12A

11

22

12

15

GV2 ME22

2025

LC3 D12A

15

29

17

10

15

26.5

15

GV2 ME32

2432

LC3 D18A

18.5

35

20

50

18.5

32.8

19

50

GV3 P40

3040

LC3 D18A

22

39

23

50

GV3 P50

3750

LC3 D32A

22

41

24

50

30

51.5

30

50

GV3 P50

3750

LC3 D32A

30

55

33

50

30

51.5

30

50

GV3 P65

4865

LC3 D32A

37

66

40

50

37

64

37

50

GV3 P65

4865

3 x LC1 D40A (3)

37

66

40

25

37

64

37

25

GV7 RE80

4880

3 x LC1 D40A (3)

45

76

44

10

GV3 ME80

5680

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)

45

76

44

25

GV7 RE80

4880

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)

45
55

80
97

47
58

25
25

55

90

52

25

GV7 RE100

60100

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)

75

132

78

35

75

125

72

35

GV7 RE150

90150

LC3 D80

90

146

84

35

GV7 RE150

90150

LC3 D115

90
110

160
195

95
115

35
35

110

178

103

35

GV7 RE220

132220

LC3 D115

132

215

124

35

GV7 RE220

132220

LC3 D150

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

(2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.

9
10

1/26

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters or
customer assembly

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and

overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

(continued)

1.5 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds.

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3

Circuit-breaker

400/415 V

Reference

440 V

Stardelta contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips

Reference

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq (1)

kW

kA

kW

kA

1.5

3.6

130

1.5

3.06

130

GV2 P08

2.54

3 x LC1 D09 (2)

2.2

4.9

130

2.2

4.42

130

GV2 P10

46.3

3 x LC1 D18 (3)

5.77

130

GV2 P10

4...6.3

3 x LC1 D18 (3)

6.5

130

GV2 P14

610

3 x LC1 D18 (3)

8.5

130

7.9

130

GV2 P14

610

3 x LC1 D18 (3)

5.5

11.5

130

5.5

10.4

50

GV2 P16

914

3 x LC1 D25 (3)

7.5

13.7

50

GV2 P16

914

3 x LC1 D25 (3)

7.5

15.5

50

16.9

20

GV2 P20

1318

3 x LC1 D25 (3)

18.1

50

11

20.1

20

GV2 P21

1723

3 x LC1 D25 (3)

11

22

50

GV2 P22

2025

3 x LC1 D25 (3)

15

29

50

15

26.5

50

GV3 P32

2332

3 x LC1 D40A (4)

18.5

35

50

GV3 P40

3040

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)

18.5

32.8

50

GV3 P40

3040

2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

22

41

50

GV3 P50

3750

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)

22

39

50

GV3 P50

3750

2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

30

55

50

30

51.5

50

GV3 P65

4865

2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

37

66

70

37

64

65

GV7 RS80

4880

3 x LC1 D80 (5)

45

76

65

GV7 RS80

4880

3 x LC1 D80 (5)

45

80

70

GV7 RS100

60100

3 x LC1 D115 (6)

55

97

70

55

90

65

GV7 RS100

60100

3 x LC1 D115 (6)

75

132

70

75

125

65

GV7 RS150

90150

3 x LC1 D150 (6)

90

146

65

GV7 RS150

90150

3 x LC1 D150 (6)

90

160

70

110

178

65

GV7 RS220

132220

3 x LC1 F185 (7)

110

195

70

132

215

65

GV7 RS220

132220

3 x LC1 F225 (7)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41
(7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49

9
10

1/27

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

1.5 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Circuit-breaker

440 V

Reference

Ie

IrD (1)

Iq

Ie

IrD (1) Iq

kW

kA

kW

kA

1.5

3.6

50

1.5
2.2

3.06
4.42

1.8
3

50
50

GV2 LE08

2.2

4.9

50

5.77

50

6.5

50

7.9

8.5

50

5.5

5.5

11.5

15

7.5

15.5

Rating Irm (2)

Star-delta
contactors

Thermal overload relay

Reference

Reference

Setting
range

51

LC3 K06

LR2 K0308

1.82.6

GV2 LE10

6.3

78

LC3 K06

LR2 K0310

2.63.7

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC3 K06

LR2 K0312

3.75.5

50

GV2 LE10

6.3

78

LC3 K06

LR2 K0312

3.75.5

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC3 K06

LR2 K0312

3.75.5

10.4

15

GV2 LE14

10

138

LC3 K06

LR2 K0314

5.58

GV2 LE16

14

170

LC3 K06

LR2 K0314

5.58

7.5

13.7

GV2 LE16

14

170

LC3 K09

LR2 K0316

811.5

15

GV2 LE20

18

223

LC3 K09

LR2 K0316

811.5

16.9

GV2 LE16

14

170

LC3 D12A

LRD 16

913

18.1

10

15

GV2 LE22

25

327

LC3 K12

LR2 K0316

811.5

11

20.1

12

GV2 LE20

18

223

LC3 K12

LR2 K0321

1014

11

22

12

15

GV2 LE22

25

327

LC3 K12

LR2 K0321

1014

15

26.5

15

GV2 LE22

25

327

LC3 D18A

LRD 21

1218

15

29

16

10

GV2 LE32

32

384

LC3 D18A

LRD 21

1218

18.5

35

20

50

18.5

32.8

19

50

GV3 L40

40

560

LC3 D18A

LRD 22

1624

22

41

24

50

22

39

23

50

GV3 L50

50

700

LC3 D32A

LRD 32

2332

30

51.5

30

50

GV3 L65

65

910

LC3 D32A

LRD 32

2332

30

55

33

50

GV3 L65

65

910

LC3 D32A

LRD 35

3038

37

64

37

50

GV3 L65

65

910

3 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 340

3040

45

76

44

65

NS80HMA

80

640

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 350

3750

55

90

52

65

NS80HMA

80

800

2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 365

4865

37

66

40

70

NS80HMA

80

640

3 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 365

4865

75

125

72

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1200

LC3 D80

LRD 3363

6380

45

80

47

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

800

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 350

3750

55

97

58

(3)

NS100pMA (3)

100

1200

2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)

LRD 365

4865

75

132

78

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1200

LC3 D80

LRD 3363

6380

90

146

85

(3)

NS160pMA (3)

150

1200

LC3 D115

LRD 4365

80104

90

160

96

(3)

110

178

103

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

1760

LC3 D115

LRD 4365

80104

132

215

125

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

1760

LC3 D150

LRD 4369

110140

110

195

116

(3)

NS250pMA (3)

220

1760

LC3 D115

LRD 4369

110140

160

256

148

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

2240

LC3 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

200

321

186

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

3150

LC3 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

132

230

139

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

2240

LC3 D150

LRD 4369

110140

160

280

165

(3)

NS400pMA (3)

320

2560

LC3 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

200

350

204

(3)

220

353

204

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

3150

LC3 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

220

388

225

(3)

250

401

233

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

3500

LC3 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

280

480

278

(3)

NS630pMA (3)

500

4000

LC3 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

315

505

295

(3)

C801p+STR35ME

800

4000

LC3 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

315

540

322

(3)

355

518

300

(3)

C801p+STR35ME

800

4500

LC3 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

375

575

334

(3)

C801p+STR35ME

800

5000

LC3 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

(2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.
(3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA)

10

NS100pMA

NS160pMA, NS250pMA

NS400pMA, NS630pMA

C801p+STR35ME

400/415 V

25

70

36

70

70

130

70

150

440 V

25

65

35

65

65

130

65

100

Code

1/28

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

protection by separate thermal overload relay

(continued)

1.5 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC3 D: 30 starts/hour; LC3 F: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
440 V
P
Ie
Iq
P
Ie
kW
A
kA
kW
A
1.5
3.6
130
1.5
3.06

Iq
kA
130

2.2
3

4.9
6.5

130
130

2.2
3
4

4.42
5.77
7.9

8.5

130

5.5

11.5

50

7.5

15.5

Circuit-breaker
Reference

Rating Irm (1)

Star-delta
contactors
Reference

Thermal overload relay

GV2 L08

A
4

A
51

3 x LC1 D18

LRD 08

A
2.54

130
130
20

GV2 L10

6.3

78

3 x LC1 D18

LRD 10

46

GV2 L14

10

138

3 x LC1 D18

LRD 14

710

GV2 L14

10

138

3 x LC1 D18

LRD 16

913

5.5

10.4

20

GV2 L16

14

170

3 x LC1 D25

LRD 16

913

50

7.5

13.7

20

GV2 L20

18

223

3 x LC1 D25

LRD 21

1218

16.9

20

GV2 L22

25

327

3 x LC1 D25

LRD 21

1218

9
11
15

18.1
22
29

50
50
50

11
15

20.1
26.5

20
50

GV2 L22

25

327

3 x LC1 D25

LRD 22

1624

GV3 L32

32

448

3 x LC1 D40A (2)

LRD 332

2332

18.5

35

50

GV3 L40

40

560

LRD 340

3040

18.5

32.8

50

GV3 L40

40

560

LRD 340

3040

22

41

50

GV3 L50

50

700

LRD 350

3750

22

39

50

GV3 L50

50

700

LRD 350

3750

30

55

50

30

51.5

50

GV3 L65

65

910

LRD 365

4865

37

64

50

GV3 L65

65

910

2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
3 x LC1 D80

LRD 3359

4865

37

66

70

45

76

65

NS80HMA

80

640

3 x LC1 D80

LRD 3363

6380

45

80

(2)

55

90

(2)

NS100pMA (2)

100

800

3 x LC1 D115

LR9 D5367

60100

55

97

(2)

NS160pMA (2)

150

1200

3 x LC1 D115

LR9 D5369

90150

75

125

(2)

NS160pMA (2)

150

1200

3 x LC1 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

75

132

(2)

90

146

(2)

NS160pMA (2)

150

1200

3 x LC1 D150

LR9 D5369

90150

90

160

(2)

110

178

(2)

NS250pMA (2)

220

1760

3 x LC1 F185

LR9 F5371

132220

110

195

(2)

NS250pMA (2)

220

1760

3 x LC1 F225

LR9 F5371

132220

132

215

(2)

NS250pMA (2)

220

1760

3 x LC1 F225

LR9 F7375

200330

132

230

(2)

160

256

(2)

NS400pMA (2)

320

2240

3 x LC1 F265

LR9 F7375

200330

160

280

(2)

NS400pMA (2)

320

2560

3 x LC1 F330

LR9 F7375

200330

200

321

(2)

NS400pMA (2)

320

2880

3 x LC1 F330

LR9 F7379

300500

200

350

(2)

220

353

(2)

NS630pMA (2)

500

3150

3 x LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

220

388

(2)

250

401

(2)

NS630pMA (2)

500

3500

3 x LC1 F400

LR9 F7379

300500

250

430

(2)

NS630pMA (2)

500

4000

3 x LC1 F500

LR9 F7379

300500

Reference

Setting
range

2
3

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA)
NS100pMA
NS160pMA, NS250pMA
NS400pMA, NS630pMA
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
Code
E
S
E
S
H
L

1/29

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses)

1.5 to 315 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Maximum operating rate: LC3K and LC3F: 12 starts/hour; LC3D: 30 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC3K and LC3D: 30 seconds; LC3F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
P
Ie
IrD (1) Iq
kW
A
A
kA
1.5
3.5
2
50

Fuse carrier
(basic block)
Reference

440 V
P
kW
1.5

Ie
A
3.06

IrD (1)
A
2

Iq
kA
50

LS1D32

2.2

50

6.5

50

2.2
3

4.42
5.77

3
3

8.4

50

7.9

5.5

11

50

5.5

7.5

14.8

50

18.1

10

11

21

15

Star-delta
contactors
Reference

Thermal overload relay

A
10 x 38 4

LC3K06

LR2K0308

A
1.82.6

LS1D32

10 x 38 6

LC3K06

LR2K0310

2.63.7

50
50

LS1D32
LS1D32

10 x 38 8
10 x 38 8

LC3K06
LC3K06

LR2K0310
LR2K0312

2.63.7
3.75.5

50

LS1D32

10 x 38 12

LC3K06

LR2K0312

3.75.5

10.4

50

LS1D32

10 x 38 16

LC3K06

LR2K0314

5.58

7.5

13.7

50

LS1D32

10 x 38 16

LC3K09

LR2K0316

811.5

100

16.9

10

50

LS1D32

10 x 38 20

LC3D12A

LRD16

913

12

100

11

20.1

12

100

GK1EK

14 x 51 25

LC3D12A

LRD16

913

28.5

16

100

15

26.5

15

100

GK1EK

14 x 51 32

LC3D18A

LRD21

1218

18.5

35

20

100

18.5

32.8

19

100

GK1EK

14 x 51 40

LC3D18A

LRD22

1624

22

39

23

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 50

LC3D18A

LRD22

1624

22

42

24

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 50

LC3D32A

LRD32

2332

30

51.5

30

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 63

LC3D32A

LRD32

2332

30

57

33

100

37

64

37

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 80

LC3D40

LRD3355

3040

37

69

40

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 80

LC3D40

LRD3357

3750

45

76

44

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 80

LC3D50

LRD3357

3750

45

81

47

100

GK1FK

22 x 58 100

LC3D50

LRD3357

3750

55

90

52

100

GSpK

22 x 58 100

LC3D50

LRD3359

4865

55

100

58

100

GSpK

22 x 58 125

LC3D50

LRD3361

5570

75

135

78

100

75

125

72

100

GSpL

T0

160

LC3D80

LRD3363

6380

90

146

84

100

GSpL

T0

160

LC3D115

LRD4365

80104

90

165

95

100

GSpN

T1

200

LC3D115

LRD4367

95120

110

200

115

100

110

178

103

100

GSpN

T1

200

LC3D115

LRD4367

95120

132

240

139

100

132

215

124

100

GSpQQ

T2

250

LC3D150

LRD4369

110140

160

285

165

100

160

256

148

100

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC3F185

LR9F5371

132220

200

321

185

100

GSpQQ

T2

400

LC3F225

LR9F5369

132220

220

388

225

100

GSpQQ

T2

400

LC3F265

LR9F7375

200330

250

401

233

100

GS2S

T3

500

LC3F265

LR9F7375

200330

280

480

278

100

GS2S

T3

500

LC3F330

LR9F7375

200330

315

555

322

100

315
355
375

505
518
575

293
300
334

100
100
100

GS2S
GS2S

T3
T3

630
630

LC3F330
LC3F400

LR9F7375
LR9F7379

200330
300500

(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

1/30

aM fuses
Size

Rating

Reference

Setting
range

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with fuse protection

(NF C or DIN fuses)

1.5 to 355 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
440 V
P
Ie
Iq
P
kW
A
kA
kW
1.5
3.5
50
1.5

SwitchaM fuses
disconnector-fuse
Reference
Size
Rating

Star-delta
contactors
Reference

Thermal overload relay

Ie
A
3.06

Iq
kA
50

GS1DD

10 x 38

A
4

3 x LC1D09

LRD08

A
2.54

2.2

50

2.2

4.42

50

GS1DD

10 x 38

3 x LC1D09

LRD10

46

6.5

50

5.77

50

GS1DD

10 x 38

3 x LC1D09

LRD12

5.58

8.4

50

7.9

50

GS1DD

10 x 38

10

3 x LC1D09

LRD14

710

5.5

11

50

5.5

10.4

50

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

3 x LC1D12

LRD16

913

7.5

14.8

50

7.5

13.7

50

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

3 x LC1D18

LRD21

1218

9
11
15

18.1
21
28.5

100
100
100

9
11
15

16.9
20.1
26.5

100
100
100

GSpF
GSpF

14 x 51
14 x 51

25
32

3 x LC1D25
3 x LC1D32

LRD22
LRD32

1624
2332

18.5

35

100

18.5

32.8

100

GSpF

14 x 51

40

3 x LC1D40

LRD3355

3040

22

42

100

22

39

100

GSpF

22 x 58

50

3 x LC1D50

LRD3357

3750

30

57

100

30

51.5

100

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

3 x LC1D65

LRD3361

5570

37

69

100

37

64

100

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

3 x LC1D80

LRD3363

6380

45

76

100

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

3 x LC1D80

LRD3365

8093

45

81

100

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

3 x LC1D115

LR9D5367

60100

55

90

100

GSpL

T0

125

3 x LC1D115

LR9D5369

90150

55

100

100

GSpL

T0

125

3 x LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

75

125

100

GSpL

T0

160

3 x LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

75

135

100

GSpL

T0

160

3 x LC1F185

LR9D5369

90150

90

165

100

90

146

100

GSpN

T1

200

3 x LC1F185

LR9F5371

132220

110

200

100

110

178

100

GSpN

T1

250

3 x LC1F225

LR9F5371

132220

132

240

100

132

215

100

GSpQQ

T2

315

3 x LC1F265

LR9F7375

200330

160

285

100

160

256

100

GSpQQ

T2

315

3 x LC1F330

LR9F7375

200330

200

321

100

GSpQQ

T2

400

3 x LC1F330

LR9F7379

300500

200
220
250

352
388
437

100
100
100

220
250

353
401

100
100

GS2S
GS2S

T3
T3

500
500

3 x LC1F400
3 x LC1F500

LR9F7379
LR9F7379

300500
300500

315

555

100

315

505

100

GS2S

T3

630

3 x LC1F630

LR9F7381

380630

355

605

100

355
400

549
611

100
100

GS2V
GS2V

T4
T4

800
800

3 x LC1F630
3 x LC1F780

LR9F7381
LR9F7381

380630
380630

Reference

Setting
range

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/31

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

0.06 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
415 V
P

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

440 V

500 V

Switchdisconnectorfuse

BS fuses

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

Reference

Size

Rating

Reference (1)

Reference

Setting
range

Ie

Ie

Ie

kW
0.06

A
0.22

kW
0.06

A
0.19

kA

GS1DDB

A1

A
NIT 2

LC1D09

LRD02

A
0.160.25

0.09

0.28

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 2

LC1D09

LRD03

0.250.4

0.09
0.12

0.36
0.42

0.12

0.37

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 2

LC1D09

LRD04

0.40.63

0.18

0.6

0.18

0.55

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 2

LC1D09

LRD05

0.631

0.25

0.76

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 4

LC1D09

LRD05

0.631

0.25
0.37
0.55

0.88
1
1.5

0.37
0.55
0.75

1
1.36
1.68

0.37
0.55
0.75

1
1.2
1.5

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 6

LC1D09

LRD06

11.7

0.75

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 10

LC1D09

LRD07

1.62.5

1.5

2.6

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 10

LC1D09

LRD08

2.54

1.5

3.5

1.5

3.06

2.2

3.8

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 16

LC1D09

LRD08

2.54

2.2

2.2

4.42

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 16

LC1D09

LRD10

46

6.5

5.77

6.5

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20

LC1D09

LRD12

5.58

8.4

7.9

5.5

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20

LC1D09

LRD14

710

5.5

11

5.5

10.4

7.5

12

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20M25

LC1D12

LRD16

913

7.5

14

7.5

13.7

13.9

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20M32

LC1D18

LRD21

1218

18.1

16.9

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M35

LC1D18

LRD21

1218

11

21

11

20

11
15

18.4
23

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M50

LC1D25

LRD22

1624

15

28.5

15

26.5

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M63

LC1D32

LRD32

2332

22

33

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M80

LC1D40

LRD3355

3040

22

42

22

39

30

45

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M100

LC1D50

LRD3357

3750

30

51.5

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M100

LC1D50

LRD3359

4865

30

57

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M100

LC1D65

LRD3359

4865

45

76

45

65

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M125 LC1D80

LRD3363

6380

45

81

55

80

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M125 LC1D95

LRD3365

8093

55

100

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M160 LC1D115

LR9D5369

90150

55

90

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M160 LC1D115

LR9D5367

60100

80

116

GS2LB

B2

TF 200

LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

80

138

80

132

GS2LB

B2

TF 200M250

LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

100
110

143
156

GS2LB

B2

TF 200M250

LC1F185

LR9F5371

132220

100

182

100

162

GS2MMB

B2

TF 200M250

LC1F185

LR9F5371

132220

110

196

110

178

GS2MMB

B2

TF 200M315

LC1F225

LR9F5371

132220

140

200

GS2NB

B3

TKF 315M355

LC1F265

LR9F5371

132220

140

250

140

226

160

220

GS2NB

B3

TKF 315M355

LC1F265

LR9F7375

200330

160

285

160

256

GS2QQB

B4

TKF 315M355

LC1F330

LR9F7375

200330

220

310

GS2QQB

B4

TMF 400

LC1F400

LR9F7379

300500

220

388

220

353

257

362

GS2QQB

B4

TMF 400M450 LC1F400

LR9F7379

300500

270

380

GS2SB

C2

TTM 500

LC1F500

LR9F7379

300500

257
270

450
460

257
270

412
433

GS2SB

C2

TTM 500

LC1F500

LR9F7381

380630

375

610

375

577

375
425

508
556

GS2SB

C2

TTM 630

LC1F630

LR9F7381

380630

(1) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

9
10

1/32

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination starters
for customer assembly

Star-delta starters with fuse protection

(BS fuses)

(continued)

1.5 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
415 V

440 V

Switchdisconnectorfuse

BS fuses

Contactor

Thermal overload relay

Reference

Size

Rating

Reference

Reference

Setting
range

Ie

Iq

Ie

Iq

kW
1.5

A
3.5

kA
50

kW
1.5

A
3.06

kA
50

GS1DDB

A1

A
NIT 16

3 x LC1D09

LRD08

A
2.54

2.2

50

2.2

4.42

50

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 16

3 x LC1D09

LRD10

46

6.5

50

5.77

50

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20

3 x LC1D09

LRD12

5.58

8.4

50

7.9

50

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20

3 x LC1D09

LRD14

710

5.5

11

50

5.5

10.4

50

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20M25

3 x LC1D12

LRD16

913

7.5

14.8

50

7.5

13.7

50

GS1DDB

A1

NIT 20M32

3 x LC1D18

LRD21

1218

18.1

50

16.9

50

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M35

3 x LC1D18

LRD21

1218

11

21

50

11

20.1

50

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M50

3 x LC1D25

LRD22

1624

15

28.5

50

15

26.5

50

GS2GB

A2

TIA 32M63

3 x LC1D32

LRD32

2332

22

42

50

22

39

50

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M80

3 x LC1D40

LRD3355

3040

30

51.5

50

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M100

3 x LC1D50

LRD3359

4865

30

57

50

GS2GB

A3

TIS 63M100

3 x LC1D65

LRD3359

4865

45

81

50

45

76

50

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M125 3 x LC1D80

LRD3363

6380

55

100

80

55

90

80

GS2LLB

A4

TCP 100M160 3 x LC1D115

LR9D5369

90150

80

138

80

80

132

80

GS2LB

B2

TF 200M250

3 x LC1D150

LR9D5369

90150

100

182

80

100

162

80

GS2MMB

B2

TF 200M250

3 x LC1F185

LR9F5371

132220

110

196

80

110

178

80

GS2MMB

B2

TF 200M315

3 x LC1F225

LR9F5371

132220

140

250

80

140

226

80

GS2NB

B3

TFK 315M355

3 x LC1F265

LR9F7375

200330

160

285

80

160

256

80

GS2QQB

B3

TFK 315M355

3 x LC1F330

LR9F7375

200330

220

388

80

220

353

80

GS2QQB

B4

TMF 400M450 3 x LC1F400

LR9F7379

300500

257
270

450
460

80
80

257
270

412
433

80
80

GS2SB

C2

TTM 500

3 x LC1F500

LR9F7379

300500

375

610

80

375

577

80

GS2SB

C2

TTM 630

3 x LC1F630

LR9F7381

380630

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/33

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled

References

526459

3
4

LC4D09App

Utilisation category AC-3

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
220 V 380 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
4
4
4

500 V
kW
5.5

660 V
690 V
kW

Operational
current
440 V up
to
A
9

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

10

5.5

11

11

11

7.5

15

15

11

18.5

15

Fuses to be
fitted by the
customer

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)

Weight

Size

Type
aM
A
10 x 38 12

LC4D09App

kg
0.870

12

10 x 38 16

LC4D12App

0.870

18

10 x 38 20

LC4D18App

1.150

15

25

10 x 38 25

LC4D25App

1.580

15

18.5

18.5

32

14 x 51 32

LC4D32App

2.630

22

22

22

30

40

14 x 51 40

LC4D40pp

2.930

22

25

30

30

33

50

22 x 58 63

LC4D50pp

3.200

18.5

30

37

37

37

37

65

22 x 58 80

LC4D65pp

3.340

22

37

45

45

55

45

80

22 x 58 80

LC4D80pp

3.650

Specifications
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
3-pole isolating device

(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 to 6/23).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
50/60 Hz B7

42
D7

48
E7

110
F7

220
M7

For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

7
8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 1/35

1/34

Schemes :
page 1/35

230
P7

240
U7

380
Q7

400
V7

415
N7

440
R7

TeSys motor starters - open version

Dimensions,
schemes

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled

LC4D09AD25A

98

LC4
b
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6DK10
with LADT, R, S
with LADT, R, S and sealing cover

50

c1

55

71

33
110

173

63

79

D09AD18A
218
94
96
127
139
147
151

D25A
221
100
102
133
145
153
157

2
3

86

LC4
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6DK10
with LADT, R, S
with LADT, R, S and sealing cover

D32A
100
102
133
145
153
157

36

110

124

LC4D32A

4
5

88

c1
=

90

165

60

b1

100/110

LC4D40D80

c
c1
c2

G
a

LC4
a
b
b1
c
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LA1DN (1 contact)
with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6DK
with LADT, R, S
with LADT, R, S and sealing cover
c2
G

D40D65
281
143
45
130
124
129
149
157
169
177
181
100
263

D80
311
143
48
140
135
140
160
168
180
188
192
178
293

7
8

Scheme

D.O.L. starters

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

LC4D09A to D80

- Q1

10

- KM1

References :
page 1/34

1/35

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

Start-delta starters for motor control

Star-delta starting
Current
7

This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
mains voltage.

6
5

3
2

0,25

0,50

0,75

1
Speed

1 Starting in direct delta connection

2 Starting in star connection

The transition from star to delta

connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
on the machine speed (a characteristic
of centrifugal machines, for example).

Current
2,5

1
1,5

(1)

2
0,5

3
0

0,25

0,50

0,75

1
Speed

1 Starting in direct delta connection

2 Starting in star connection
3 Resistive torque of the machine

Star-delta starting should be used for

motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.

All star-delta starters are supplied with a

special LADS2 or LA2KT2p time delay
relay which imposes a delay on the
delta contactor during the transition
period in order to allow the star
contactor sufficient breaking time.
For ratings D115 and D150, this
function is performed by a time delay
auxiliary contact block LADT2 and a
control relay.

(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).

7
8
9
10

1/36

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters for motor control

5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled

Plate mounted starters

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.

DF526460

Standard power ratings

of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage delta connection
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V

LC3D32App

Auxiliary contacts available

on each contactor
line
KM2

delta
KM3

Star delta
mechanical
interlock

star
KM1

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)

Weight

kW
4

kW
7.5

kW
7.5

kW
7.5

(3)

With

LC3D09App

kg
1.530

5.5

11

11

11

(3)

With

LC3D12App

1.530

11

18.5

22

22

(3)

With

LC3D18App

1.730

15

25

30

30

(3)

With

LC3D32App

2.030

18.5

37

37

37

(3)

Without
With

LC3D40pp
LC3D40ppA64

4.360
4.500

30

55

59

59

(3)

(3)

Without
With

LC3D50pp
LC3D50ppA64

4.360
4.500

37

75

75

75

(3)

(3)

Without
With

LC3D80pp
LC3D80ppA64

5.200
5.400

63

110

110

110

(3)

(3)

Without

LC3D115pp (4)

With
75

132

132

147

(3)

1 (3)

Without
With

2
3
4

11.800

LC3D115ppA64 (4)

12.100

LC3D150pp (4)

12.100

LC3D150ppA64 (4)

12.100

Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage delta connection
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V

415 V

440 V

kW

kW

kW

kW

Auxiliary contacts
available on each contactor
line
KM2

delta
KM3

Star delta
mechanical
interlock

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)

Weight

star
KM1

kg

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.

3

5.5

5.5

5.5

With

LC3K06pp

0.740

7.5

7.5

7.5

With

LC3K09pp

0.740

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4

7.5

7.5

7.5

(3)

With

LC3D090App

1.530

5.5

11

11

11

(3)

With

LC3D120App

1.530

11

18.5

22

22

(3)

With

LC3D180App

1.730

15

25

30

30

(3)

With

LC3D320App

2.030

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20 to 6/23).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz
24
36
42
48
110
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
Star-delta starters LC3K06 and K09
Code
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7

Star-delta starters LC3D09A...D150, LC3D090AD320A

Code
B7

D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LADN can also be fitted, see page 5/79.
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1D115 or D150 without connectors.
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43

Schemes :
page 1/43

1/37

8
9
10

1
2

KM2

3
a

a
1b
1c

5
KM3

KM1

6
7

KM1
KM3
KM2

8
1b

9
10
a

1/38

1c

1a

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)

Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

Standard power
ratings of squirrel
cage motors (3)
Mains voltagedelta connection
400/
415V
440 V
kW
kW
7.5
7.5

9
9
11
11

15
15

Thermal-magnetic
motor
circuit-breaker

Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)

GV2ME20
GV2ME20
GV2ME21
GV2ME22
GV2ME32

line
KM2
LC1D09pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D18pp

delta
KM3
LC1D09pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D18pp

star
KM1
LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp

Illustration
item no.
a

Reference

1
2

Separate component
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
power circuit connections and
1 time delay contact block LADS2

Weight
kg
0.130

LAD912GV

Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.

Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors (3)
Mains voltage - delta connection
220/
380/
230V
400V
415V
440V
kW
kW
kW
kW
4
5.5
11
15
18.5
30
37
63
75

7.5
11
18.5
25
37
55
75
110
132

7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
132

7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
147

Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)

Separate
components
(see below)

line
KM2

delta
KM3

star
KM1

LC1D09pp
LC1D18pp (6)
LC1D25pp (7)
LC1D32pp
LC1D40pp
LC1D50pp
LC1D80pp
LC1D115pp
LC1D150pp

LC1D09pp
LC1D12pp
LC1D25pp (7)
LC1D32pp
LC1D40pp
LC1D50pp
LC1D80pp
LC1D115pp
LC1D150pp

LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp
LC1D09pp
LC1D18pp
LC1D40pp
LC1D40pp
LC1D50pp
LC1D80pp
LC1D115pp

Illustration
item no.

For components
type (5)
D09 and D12

Reference
LAD91217

Weight
kg
0.180

D18 and D32

LAD93217

0.310

D40 and D50

LA9D5017

0.380

D80

LA9D8017

0.680

D09, D12, D18

D32
D40 and D50
D80

LA9D12974
LA9D32974
LA9D40973
LA9D80973

0.150
0.180
0.300
0.300

Component
types
D09
D12
D18
D32
D40
D50
D80
D115 (5)
D150 (5)

3
4
5
6

Separate components
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
- 1 time delay contact block LADS2
(D09D80) (3),
- power circuit connections (D09D80),
- screws and clamps for fixing contactors
to the plate (D40D80).

Equipment mounting plates

1a
1b
1c

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/62.
(5) For LC1 D115 and LC1 D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
(6) A LC1 D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A LC1 D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).

7
8
9
10

Illustrations :
page 1/38

Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43

Schemes :
page 1/43

1/39

13

12

11

10

2
14
6

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/40

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)

Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description

Illustration For
item no.
use on
LC1

No. Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

D115
(star)

LADN10

0.020

D115, D150

CAD32pp (3)

0.320

Time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Lead sealing kit
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker for
control circuit
(200415 V)
Set of 3
connectors for
wider terminations
(optional)
Set of power
connections with
fixing accessories

D115, D150

LADT2

0.060

D115, D150

LA9D901

0.005

D115, D150

GB2CB05

0.060

D115, D150

LA9FG980

0.200

D115

LA9D11517

0.800

D150

LA9D15017

1.050

Spare volt free

terminals

D115, D150

10

DZ3HA3

0.007

10

DZ3GA3

0.006

Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks 1 N/O
Control relay

Weight
kg

Lug-connector
terminal block
End stop

10

D115, D150

10

AB1BC9535

0.236

11

D115, D150

100

AB1AB8M35

0.005

Mounting rail
5 35 mm
Pre-slotted
mounting plate
Screw with
captive washer

12

D115, D150

10

AM1ED021

0.210

13

D115, D150

AM3PA65

1.950

14

D115, D150

12

100

AF1VA618

0.006

100

AF1VA410

0.002

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment.
(3) See page 7/21.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Illustrations :
page 1/40

Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43

Schemes :
page 1/43

1/41

Dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters

Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled

Pre-assembled:

KM3

KM1

110

KM2

110

LC3D09AD32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 to D32

110

LC3K

124

150
175

90

On starters LC3D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper

part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.

LC3
a
b
c
with LADS
with LADS and sealing cover

Pre-assembled: LC3D40, D50

For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 or D50

Pre-assembled: LC3D80
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D80

D12A
143
26.5
139
143

=
=
=
47

=
45

175 (1)

263

183 (1)

281
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
Pre-assembled: LC3D115, D150
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D115 or D150

(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover

8
9

a
LC3D115 or 3 x LC1D with components
LC3D150 or 3 x LC1D with components
References:
pages 1/37 to 1/41

1/42

D115
D150

Schemes :
pages 1/43

293
311

10

D32A
165
32.5
145
149

60

143

60

100/110

143

5
6

D18A
144
26.5
139
143

D09A
143
26.5
139
143

a
450
450

b
555
555

100/110

94

c
205
205

G
425
425

H
525
525

TeSys motor starters - open version

Dimensions (continued),
schemes

Star-delta starters

Dimensions (continued)

Star-delta starters (continued)

On mounting rail AM1DP, pre-assembled
LC3D090A D320A

2x7
KM1

KM3

KM2

160
175

Schemes
KM3/5

95

KM3/5

13

13 22

14
13

KM2

14

21

KM2

KM3

KM1

KM2

A2

KM1

KM3/1

KM3

A2

A1

A1 22

KM2
A2

A2

KM3

A2

A2

A1

A1

A1 16

A1

W2

V2

U2

KM2/1 (N)

KM1

A1 22

21 67

KM2

68

55 14

22

KM1

A2

22
21

KM1

15

W1

V1

U1

W2

V2

KM3
U2

(2)

W1

V1

U1

KM1
54
53

(1)

KM2

13 14

5
6

21 96

3
4

96

1
2

KM1

KM3

KM2

2
3

LC3D

95

L2

LC3K

L3

L1

LC3K, LC3D09A to D80

LC3D090A to D320A

D320A
137
145
149

21 56

D090A D180A
153
139
143

LC3
b
c
with LADS
with LADS and sealing cover

5
6

Note: LC3D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.

95

67

172

KM1

171

55 183

A1 14

A1154

KA1

KA1

KM3
A2

153

KM2
A2

KM1
A2

F2

KM2
A1

A1 162

KM3

13

KM2

A2

5
6

3
4

KM1

161 56

W2

W1

U1

V1
V2

U2

Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).

KM2
68

153

KM1

14

184 154

13

W2

(2)

22

21 96

W1

V1
V2

U2

F1

3
4

F1

KM1
2

KM3
2

KM2

U1

L2

L3

L1

LC3D115 and D150

(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
(2) Remote control.
References:
pages 1/37 to 1/41

1/43

10

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

Start-delta starters for motor control

Star-delta starting
Current

This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
mains voltage.

7
6
5

3
2

0,25

0,50

0,75

1
Speed

1 Starting in direct delta connection

2 Starting in star connection

The transition from star to delta

connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
on the machine speed (a characteristic
of centrifugal machines, for example).

Current
2,5

1
1,5

(1)

2
0,5

3
0

0,25

0,50

0,75

Star-delta starting should be used for

motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.

Switching from star to delta connection

must be completed within a minimum
time.
This function is performed by a control
relay and a time delay auxiliary contact
block.

1
Speed

1 Starting in direct delta connection

2 Starting in star connection
3 Resistive torque of the machine

(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).

8
9
10

1/44

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Pre-assembled starters

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time:
LC3Fppppp: 20 seconds,
LC3FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors).
Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.

Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings
of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage delta connection
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V

511080

kW
90

100

110

LC3FpppppA64

160

185

kW
160

200

220

280

315

kW
160

200

220

280

355

kW
185

220

250

315

375

Auxiliary contacts available

on each contactor
line
KM2

delta
KM3

star
KM1

Star delta
mechanical
interlock

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)

Without

LC3F185pp

kg
16.500

With

LC3F185ppA64

16.625

Without

LC3F225pp

16.500

With

LC3F225ppA64

16.625

Without

LC3F265pp

27.300

With

LC3F265ppA64

27.425

Without

LC3F330pp

37.000

With

LC3F330ppA64

37.125

Without

LC3F400pp

37.000

With

LC3F400ppA64

37.125

(3)
1

Weight

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz
48
110
115
Code
E7
F7
FE7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LADN can be fitted.

220/230
M7

230
P7

240
U7

380/400
Q7

400
V7

415
N7

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation :
page 1/44

Dimensions :
page 1/50

Schemes :
page 1/51

1/45

2
3

1
7

KM1
KM3

KM2

7
8

*
*

10
* See page 1/48
1/46

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Contactors

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)

Contactors (2)

Standard power ratings

of squirrel cage motors
220/
380/
230V
400V
415V
kW
kW
kW
90
160
160

440V
kW
185

line

delta

star

Separate
components
(see below)

KM2
LC1F185pp

KM3
LC1F185pp

KM1
LC1D150pp

Component types
F185

100

200

200

220

LC1F225pp

LC1F225pp

LC1F185pp

F225

110

220

220

250

LC1F265pp

LC1F265pp

LC1F185pp

F265

160

280

280

315

LC1F330pp

LC1F330pp

LC1F265pp

F330

185

315

355

375

LC1F400pp

LC1F400pp

LC1F265pp

F400

Illustration For
item no.
use on
1
F185 to F400

No.
3

Sold in
lots of
1

Unit
reference
LADN22

F185 to F400

CAD32

0.580

F185 to F400

LADT2

0.060

F185 to F400

LA9D901

0.005

Thermal magnetic circuit5

breaker for 5 A control circuit
Sets of 3 connectors
6
for wider terminations
(optional)

F185 to F400

GB2CB10

0.050

F185

LA9FG980

0.200

F225 to F400

LA9FJ980

0.490

Sets of power connections

F185

LA9F18517

0.800

F225

LA9F22510

1.400

F265

LA9FH610

1.400

F330 and F400

LA9FJ610

1.500

F185 to F400

LA7Fppp (Selected according to size

of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/34
and 6/35.

Separate components (4)

Description
Instantaneous auxiliary
contact blocks
2 N/O + 2 N/C
Control relay
Time delay auxiliary
contact blocks
Sealing cover

Set of 3 busbars for

thermal overload
connections

Weight
kg
0.050

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LC1D150
Volts
48
110
115
120
220
230
240
380
400
415
50/60 Hz
E7
F7
FE7
G7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
LC1F185 and F225
Volts
50 Hz (coil LX1)
60 Hz (coil LX1)

48
E5
E6

110
F5
F6

115
FE5

120

G6

220
M5
M6

LC1F185 to F400
Volts
48
110
115
120
220
40 400 Hz (5)
E7 (6)
F7
FE7
G7
M7
Standard voltages, see page 5/114.
For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/130 to 5/139.
(3) For longer starting times, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Other separate components, see page 1/49.
(5) Coil LX1: LC1F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225.
(6) Except for LC1F400.

Presentation :
page 1/44

Illustrations :
page 1/46

Dimensions :
page 1/50

230
P5

240
U5
U6

380
Q5
Q6

400
V5

415
N5

230
P7

240
U7

380
Q7

400
V7

415
N7

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Schemes :
page 1/51

1/47

14

12

10

17

15

2
3

*
9

*
*
KM1
KM3

KM2

*
*

7
8

16

13

* * *
17
11

10
* See page 1/46
1/48

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)

Separate components (continued from page 1/47)

Description
Spare volt free terminals

Neutral terminals
with stop and spare
volt free terminal
(for control circuit)

Illustration
item no.
9

10

For
use on
F185

No.
3

Sold in
lots of
10

Unit
reference
DZ3GA3

F225F400

10

DZ3HA3

0.007

F185

10

AB1BC9535

0.236

100

AB1AB8P35

0.006

10

DZ3HA3

0.007

10

AB1BC15035

0.277

100

AB1AB8M35

0.007

10

DZ3JA3

0.010

10

AB1BC24035

0.287

100

AB1AB8M35

0.007

10

DZ3JA3

0.010

F225 and F265

F330 and F400

Weight
kg
0.006

Reducer bracket

11

F400

LA9F100

0.100

Mounting rails (2)

12

F185F400

10

AM1DE200

0.900

13

F185F400

AM1EC200

2.980

Uprights (2)

14

F115F400

AM1EC200

2.980

1/4 turn sliding clip nuts

and corresponding bolts
for rails AM1DE

15

F185F400

10

AF1CD061

0.020

100

AF1VA618

0.006

1/4 turn sliding clip nuts

and corresponding bolts
for rails AM1DE

16

10

AF1CD081

0.020

10

AF1VC820

0.024

1/4 turn sliding clip nuts

and corresponding bolts
for equipment fixing

17

10

AF1CD061

0.020

100

AF1VA618

0.006

10

AF1CD061

0.020

10

AF1CD081

0.020

100

AF1VA618

0.006

10

AF1VC820

0.024

25 x H6 screws with washers

F185F225

ACMGV763

19.090

F265

ACMGV973

33.310

F330 and F400

ACMGV1084

54.000

AE3FX122

F185F400

F185F330

15

F400

Enclosures:
metal, grey RAL 7032

Fixing lugs
adjustable for enclosure ACM

0.080

(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation :
page 1/44

Illustrations :
page 1/48

Dimensions :
page 1/50

Schemes :
page 1/51

1/49

Dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters

Dimensions

Chassis mounted starters

Pre-assembled: LC3F185 to LC3F400
For customer assembly: 2xLC1Fppp and 1xLC1D150 or 3xLC1Fppp

G
F1 F2

KM2

KM3

KM1

K2

K3

K4

K1

4
c

5
6

a
a
565

b
675

c
235

G
525

H
625

K
160

K1
110

K2
80

K3
110

K4
80

565

675

235

525

625

160

110

80

110

80

LC3F265 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F265

665

775

266

625

725

165

110

100

110

110

LC3F330 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F330

765

975

276

725

825

195

140

100

110

180

LC3F400 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F400

765

975

276

725

925

195

140

100

180

110

LC3F185 or 2 x LC1Fppp + 1 x LC1D

with components F185
LC3F225 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F225

7
8
9
10
Presentation:
page 1/44

1/50

References:
pages 1/47 and 1/49

Schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version

Star-delta starters

Schemes

Star-delta starters

6
W1

V1

2
1
2

2
W2

U2

6
5
6

4
3

2
1

W1
W2

Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation

(standard motor, viewed from shaft end).

KM1

V1
V2

U1
U2

KM3
2

KM2

V2

L2

L3

U1

L1
1

LC3F185 to F400

3
4

F1

95

21

96

F1

67

KM2
68

154

KM1

6
172

184

14

153

13 22

Remote
control

KM1

55

171

183

KM1

KA1

54

61

KM2

14

56

53

13

KM2

KM3

A1

A1

KM3
A2

KA1
A2

KM2
A2

KM1
A2

F2

A1

A1

62

8
9
10

Presentation:
page 1/44

References:
pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49

1/51

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation

107983

TeSys U starter-controllers

Presentation

The TeSys U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following
functions:
b Protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:
v isolation and breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection,
v power switching.
b Control of the application:
v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults,
motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).

1
2

These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which
simply clip into the power base.
This late customisation is even possible after power and control circuit wiring has
been completed.

TeSys U starter-controller

TeSys U is a flexible range that meets the current and future needs of system
builders, panel builders and machine manufacturers, as well as those of additional
systems.
From design through to operation, TeSys U offers many advantages and simplifies
the selection of components in comparison with a traditional solution.
- the breaking, isolation and contactor functions are incorporated in a single block;
this means fewer references to be ordered and easy selection without any risk of
error, because a single reference covers all needs up to 15 Kw.
- the control unit has a wide setting range. It can operate on a d.c. or a.c. supply.
The number of references required is divided by 10, compared with traditional
solutions.

4
5
538849

The compact components in the TeSys U range are mounted on a single rail, so
optimising the amount of space required in enclosures. By eliminating power wiring
between the circuit-breaker and contactor, TeSys U reduces installation times in
enclosures.
Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components
and eliminate the risk of errors.

Starter-controller

Consists of a power base and a control unit.

8
9

Power bases 1
The power base is independent of the control voltage.
It is available from 0 to 15kW at 400 V.
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400V, total
coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to
be protected and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA): satisfies the basic protection requirements for
motor starters: overload and short-circuit.
b Magnetic control unit (LUCL): when fitted upstream of a variable speed drive or
soft start-soft stop unit and used in conjunction with an LUB12 or LUB32 power
base, this unit provides isolation and short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced
functions such as alarm, fault differentiation,...
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control
and protection requirements.
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools.
They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation, due to
the fact that bimetallic overload protection components are no longer used.

10

(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.

1/52

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

538852

Control options

Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller.

Function modules 3
Must be used in conjunction with advanced control units.
4 types are available:
b Thermal overload alarm (LUF W10).
b Thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11).
b Thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10).
b Indication of motor load (LUF V2), which can also be used in conjunction with the
multifunction control unit.

1
2

All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital
contacts.
3

b
v
v
v
v
v
v

538850

Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged:
b Via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00).
Via a serial bus:
AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51),
Profibus DP module (LUL C07),
CANopen module (LUL C08),
DeviceNet module (LUL C09),
Advantys STB module (LUL C15).
Modbus modules (LUL C031 and LUL C033).

They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a

c24V supply voltage.
Connection to other protocols, such as Fipio, is possible via gateway modules
(LUFP) or via the TeSysPort for Ethernet.

Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3

3 possible configurations: 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C.
Auxiliary contacts 4
They provide the following information: fault signalling and rotary knob in "ready"
position.

538851

Power options

Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without
modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block (LU6M) is mounted
separately from the power base when the height available is limited.

Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be
increased up to 130 kA at 400 V, with a visible break.

Setting-up accessories

Plug-in terminal blocks 6

The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared
away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
7

Control circuit pre-wiring system 7

Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections, e.g.
connection of reverser control terminals, ...

10

1/53

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Structure of a motor starter

Mirror auxiliary contacts built-in

as standard, mechanically
linked to the power poles

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Coil cut-out contact built into

the handle as standard

Disconnection and breaking

A2

A1

6/T3

22/NC

21/NC

14/NO

Low consumption
technology coil

5/L3

1/L1

2/T1

Power switching

4/T2

Control unit

Overload protection

3/L2

13/NO

Short-ciircuit protection

Pre-wiring

6/T3

Reverser

4/T2

Motor starter structure

2/T1

Control unit

Disconnection and breaking

Short-ciircuit protection
Power switching
Variable speed
controller

Variable speed control

In

Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter

7
12 Amp
category AC3

Nonreversing

Contactor
family

Coil voltage :
110 V 50/60 Hz

TeSys D

Circuitbreaker
family

Auxiliary contact (for cut-out of contactor coil)

Startercontroller
family

1/54

TeSys D

Power combination block

Wide range
control unit
Standard

Power base

10

For ratings
up to 12 A

Rating

Size of product 2
(45 mm wide)

Startercontroller
family

Control voltage
e.g.. : 110240 V
AC/DC
Rating
e.g.. : 312 A

82

81

84

A2

B1

A1

A3

B3

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

Reverser

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Selection
CONTROL UNIT

POWER BASE

For D.O.L. starting

non-reversing

Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz

Setting range

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts built-in as standard.

For D.O.L. starting
reversing

Reference to be completed by adding the voltage code

Reference to be completed by
adding the voltage code

Control circuit voltages (V)

or

Reference

Rating

4
5

Auxiliary contacts

6
Auxiliary contacts
Number of contacts

Auxiliary contacts

Power pole status

References

Signalling contacts
Signalling contacts
Power base

Number of contacts
Fault signalling

Position of rotary knob

Removable terminal
block

References

10

1/55

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Standard control unit

Magnetic control unit

LUCL

For use with a

variable speed
controller or a soft
start-soft stop unit

LUCA

Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)

b Protection against overloads and shortcircuits.

b Protection against phase failure and
phase imbalance.
b Earth fault protection (equipment
protection only).
b Manual reset.

(see page 1/134)

b Short-circuit protection
b Manual Reset
Motor thermal overload protection must
be provided by the variable speed
controller or soft starter.

4
1
2

3
Power base
LUB or LU2B

Thermal overload signalling

module and manual reset
LUF DH11
(see page 1/71)

Thermal overload signalling

modules and automatic or
remote reset
LUF DA01 and LUF DA10
(see page 1/71)

Thermal overload alarm

module
LUF W10
(see page 1/71)

Motor load indication module

LUF V2
(see page 1/71)

Auxiliary contact modules

LUF Npp
(see page 1/65)

Parallel wiring module

LUF C00
(see page 1/76)

7
8
3

Fault signalling contacts

LUA1pp (Depending on configuration)
(see page 1/65)

10
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.

1/56

Advanced control unit

Multifunction control unit

LUCB

Class 10 - 3-phase

LUCC

Class 10 - single-phase

LUCM

LUCD

b
b
v
v
v
v

Same functions as the standard control unit

In addition, in conjunction with a function module:
fault differentiation with manual reset,
fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset,
thermal overload alarm,
indication of motor load.

Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase

(see page 1/70)

Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)

b Same functions as the standard control unit

b In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic.
b Protection function alarm.
b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS
485 port.
b Log function.
b Monitoring function, indication of main motor parameters on
front panel of the control unit, or via a remote terminal
b Differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault.
b Overload, no-load running.

3
4
5

AS-Interface
communication modules (1)
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
(see page 1/78)

Profibus DP
communication module (1)
LUL C07
(see page 1/80)

CANopen
communication module (1)
LULC08
(see page 1/84)

DeviceNet
communication module (1)
LUL C09
(see page 1/86)

Advantys STB
communication module (1)
LULC15
(see page 1/90)

6
7

Modbus
communication modules (1)
LUL C031 and LUL C033
(see page 1/92)

8
9
10
(1)Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).

1/57

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

525971

Application

Starting and protection of a pump.

Operating conditions

b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b

Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
In: 9 A.
Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
Duty class S3.
3-wire control:
Start button (S2),
Stop button (S1),
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.

Products used
Description
Power base
12 A with screw clamp connections
Standard control unit

Item
1

Quantity Reference
1
LUB12

LUCA12FU

5/L3

3/L2

Scheme
2

230 V

13

6
C.U.

9
10

1/58

A1

6/T3

A2

4/T2

M
3

W1

V1

U1

2/T1

14

7
8

1/69

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.

1/L1

510901

Functions performed

Page
1/62

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

510902

Application

Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.

Operating conditions

Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.

Additional products used

Description

Quantity Reference

Page

2
3

LUCB12FU
LUF W10

1
1

Functions performed

5/L3

3/L2

Scheme
1/L1

1/69
1/71

b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by

the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.

3
4

230 V

13

A1

LUF W10

07

Alarms Module

08
To
application

A2

4/T2

6/T3
W1

2/T1

14

C.U.

V1

Advanced control unit

Alarm function module

U1

Item

Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
overload alarm function module.

M
3

Other versions

The advanced control unit can provide other functions,

depending on the type of function modules used (instead of
the LUF W module described above):
- thermal fault signalling with function modules LUFDA01,
LUFDA10 or LUFDH11,
- indication of motor load with function module LUFV2. This
module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is
proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the
motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and
provides access to other application functions using this
value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance
possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks
down).

7
8
9
10

1/59

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

520971

Application

Manual control of a 2-position turntable.

Operating conditions

b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b

Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V.

In: 6 A.
30 starts per hour
Duty class S4.
3-wire control:
Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1),
Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2),
Stop button (S5),
Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4.
Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.

Products used
Description
Power base, reversing,
12 A with screw clamp connections
Standard control unit

523761

Item
1

Quantity Reference
1
LU2B12FU

Page
1/63

LUCA12FU

1/69

Functions performed

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9MR1C included on
base LU2B12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical
interlocking unnecessary.

V1

M
3

9
10

1/60

6/T3
W1

U1

2/T1

4/T2

C.U.

115 V

A2

A1

Reverser Motor Controller

B3

A3

LU2B

B1

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

Scheme (manual control)

Application examples

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

520969

Application

Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry

running, which could lead to destruction of the pump.

Operating conditions

b
b
b
b
b

Power: 15 kW at 400 V.
In: 28.5 A.
Duty class S1.
Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.

Products used

510903

Description
Power base 32 A without connections
Multifunction control unit
Modbus communication module
Pre-wired coil connection
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Connection cable for connecting the
communication module to the serial bus
T-junction

Functions performed

Item
1
2
3
4

Quantity
1
1
1
1

Reference
LUB320
LUCM 32BL
LUL C033
LU9B N11C

Page
1/62
1/70
1/93
1/93

VW3A8306Rpp

1/93

VW3 A8 306 TF03

1/93

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s),
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.

3
4

3
4
5
6

LUL C033

24 V 24 V
c Aux COM

D (B)
D (A)
Gnd

LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil

Modbus Module

LO1
LI1
LI2

D (B)
D (A)
Gnd

5/L3

Multifunction
Control Unit

4 5 8

M
3

24 V

4 5 8

C.U.

W1 6/T3

Status (Register 455)

Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped
Reserved reset enabled
A1-A2 powered
Motor running
Motor current % (bit 0)
Motor current % (bit 1)
Motor current % (bit 2)
Motor current % (bit 3)
Motor current % (bit 4)
Motor current % (bit 5)
Reserved
Motor starting

V1 4/T2

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

LUCM

24 V Aux

U1 2/T1

Modbus profile IEC 64915

Commands (Register 704)
Forward running
Reverse running
Reserved
Reset
Reserved
Connection test
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 3-phase control
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

3/L2

1/L1

Schemes

Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03

Other functions

The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
Module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two configurable
discrete inputs.

1/61

10

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Two versions of control connection configuration are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.

561330

520739

Non-reversing power bases

Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection
Power
Control

Item
(2)

Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A

Reference

Weight

690 V
A

kg

These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O(13-14) and 1 N/C(21-22) which

indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
LUB p2

A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off
when the rotary knob is no longer in the ON position.

LUB p20

The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70

510904

Screw
clamp
terminals

Screw
clamp
terminals

1+2+3
+4

Without
1+2
connections

1
2

12

12

LUB12

0.900

32

23

21

LUB32

0.900

12

12

LUB120

0.865

32

23

21

LUB320

0.865

Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection

For base

Item
(2)
3+4

Reference

Weight
kg
0.045

Screw clamp terminals

(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66
Volts
230
440
500
690 (3)
kA
50
50
10
4
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.

LUB p2

Other versions

7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98

1/62

Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111

Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/119

LUB120 or 320

LU9BN11

Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate
fuses).
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing power bases

561270

Two versions of control connection configuration are available:

b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories).

Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled

Connection
Power
Control

Item
(1)

Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A

690 V
A

Reference, to
be completed) (2)

Weight
kg

These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw
clamp
terminals

Screw
clamp
terminals
Without
connections

1 + 2 + 3 12
+4+5
32

12
23

9
21

LU2B12pp
LU2B32pp

1.270
1.270

1 + 2 + 3 12
+5
32

12
23

9
21

LU2BA0pp
LU2BB0pp

1.270
1.250

Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting

for customer assembly

A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base

without connections to create a reversing starter-controller.
The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C(21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking
between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as
output contacts.
The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate
non-reversing and reversing operating status.

510905

LU2B p2

32 A reverser block

Connection
Power
For mounting directly
Screw clamp
beneath the power base terminals
For mounting separately Screw clamp
from the base
terminals
(screw or rail fixing)

Item (1)
Control
Without
3
connections
Without
6
connections

Reference, to
be completed) (2)

2
3
4

Weight
kg

LU2M B0pp

0.400

LU6M B0pp

0.425

Accessories
Description Item
Control
terminal
block

Application

Reference

Reversing power base without

LU9 M1
connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp
Reverser block LU2M B0pp
LU9 M1
for direct mounting beneath power base
Reverser block LU6M B0pp
LU9 M1
for mounting separately from power base
Reverser block LU6M B0pp
LU9M R1
for mounting separately from power base

Weight
kg
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.030

Control circuit pre-wiring components

Description

Weight
kg
Pre-wired connector (3)
5
LU9M R1C
0.035
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL

a
B

c or a

ES (4)
FU (5)
(3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.

510906

LU2B p2

Other versions
7

Item

Reference

Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses).
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111

7
8
9
10

LU6M + LU9M1 + LU9MR1

Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98

Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119

1/63

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation

TeSys U starter-controllers

Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules

Contact states depending on the product status

Position
of rotary
knob

Indication N/O pole

on front
contact
panel

N/C pole
contact

N/O
contact
any fault

N/C ontact
any fault

LUFN11
31-32

LUA1C20
97-98

LUA1C11
95-96

or

LUFN02
31-32
41-42

LUA1C200 LUA1C110
No terminal No terminal
block
block

LUA1C200
No terminal
block

or

LUFN20
33-34
43-44

LUB9N11
21-22

LUA1C11
17-18

or

LUFN11
43-44

LUA1C110
No terminal
block

or

LUB9N11
13-14

1
References of add-on contact blocks
and auxiliary contact modules
Terminal referencing

2
3
4

Off

OFF

Ready to operate

Start

Tripped on short-circuit

Tripped on
thermal overload

Manual reset mode

TRIP

0
0

Remote reset mode

7
8
9
10

1/64

I>>

Automatic reset on thermal

overload fault mode

Characteristics:
page 1/98

TRIP

Schemes:
page 1/112

N/O contact

in closed position.

N/C contact

in open position.

N/O contact
product
ready
LUA1C20
17-18

TeSys motor starters - open version

References

TeSys U starter-controllers

Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules

568764

References

Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition

4
6

1
2
5

LUB + LUA1 + LUFN + LUA8E20

Cabling

Item

Reference

Weight
kg
0.030

1 N/C fault signalling

contact (95-96) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position

Screw clamp
terminals

1+2

LUA1 C11

Without
connections

LUA1 C110

0.012

1 N/O fault signalling

contact (97-98) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position

Screw clamp
terminals

1+2

LUA1 C20

0.030

Without
connections

LUA1 C200

0.012

2 N/O contacts
Contacts open, rotary knob
in OFF position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
in ready position

Screw clamp
terminals

LUA8E20

0.048

Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals

Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles
Operation: a or c 24250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition

Item

Reference

2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44)

LUF N20

Weight
kg
0.050

1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44)

LUF N11

0.050

2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42)

LUF N02

0.050

Item

Reference

Screw clamp
LUA1 C110
terminal blocks

LU9B C11

Weight
kg
0.022

LUA1 C200

LU9B C20

0.022

Location for auxiliary contact,

communication or
function module
Location for add-on
contact blocks

LU9C 1

0.020

LU9C 2

0.010

Accessories
Description

Blanking
covers

For use on

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
page 1/98

Schemes:
page 1/112

1/65

TeSys motor starters - open version

References

TeSys U starter-controllers

Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and

accessories

Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

4 1

Description

Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars

2
5

Protective
end cover

Application

Pitch
mm
45
54

Item
2

Sold in
lots of
1
1

Unit
reference
GV2 G245
GV2 G254

Weight
kg
0.036
0.038

3 tap-offs

45
54

1
1

GV2 G345
GV2 G354

0.058
0.060

4 tap-offs

45
54

1
1

GV2 G445
GV2 G454

0.77
0.085

5 tap-offs

54

GV2 G554

0.100

GV1 G10

0.005

GV1 G09

0.040

2 tap-offs

For unused

busbar outlets

Terminal block for Connection

supply to one or from the top
more busbar sets

Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support.

Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common

Number of
tap-offs at
18 mm intervals
18

Item

Length

For mounting in
enclosure width

mm
452

mm
800

Reference

AK5 JB144

Weight
kg
0.900

Removable 3-phase power sockets

Number of
points used
on the busbar
system
2

Thermal
current

Item

Cable
lengths

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

16

200

AK5PC13 (1)

kg
0.040

32

250

AK5PC33 (1)

0.045

1000

AK5PC33L (1)

0.060

Limiter blocks and accessories

Application

Limiterdisconnector
(3) (5)
Current limiter
(3)
Limiter cartridge

Item

Weight

Breaking
Mounting
capacity Iq
y 440 V 690 V
kA
kA
130
70
Direct on
power base

Unit
reference

LUALB1 (2)

kg
0.310

100

35

Separate

LA9 LB920

0.320

130

70

Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1

7+9

Weight

0.135

LAD90 (4)
On power base,
0.001
on reverser block,
on parallel link
splitter box
(1) The rated peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current
must not exceed 7 kA.
(2) Supplied with limiter cartridge.
(3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
(4) Sold in lots of 100.
(5) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
Clip-in
marker holder

9
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111

1/66

TeSys motor starters - open version

References (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

568768

Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and

accessories

Phase barrier

Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used:

b To build a UL 508 type E certified starter (Self Protected Starter).
Without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508.
b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.

Description

568769

Phase barrier

Item

Application

Mounting Reference

LUB or LU2B 12 or 120

LUB or LU2B 32 or 320
LUA LB1

Direct on LU9 SP0

terminals
L1, L2, L3

Door interlock mechanisms

Description

Weight
kg
0.030

2
3
4

Item

Reference

2+3

LU9 AP00

Weight
kg
0.490

Door-mounted black handle on blue front plate, IP54 4

LU9 AP11

0.150

Door-mounted red handle on yellow front plate, IP54 4

LU9 AP12

0.150

Fixing kit (1) (2)

568771

5
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer
(Motor Control Centre)

LU9AP20

0.096

(1) The fixing kit includes a bracket and a shaft extension (maximum depth 508 mm).
(2) To use the fixing kit with a D.O.L. reversing power base, only reverser block LU6M must be
used.

568770

RESET

TEST

8
9

10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111

1/67

TeSys motor starters - open version

Selection

TeSys U starter-controllers
Control units

Operating characteristics

Control units

Standard
LUCA

Thermal overload protection

Overcurrent protection

LUCD

14.2 x the setting current

Short-circuit protection
Protection against phase loss

Advanced
LUCB
LUCC

3 to 17 x the setting current

14.2 x the max. current

Protection against phase imbalance

Earth fault protection
(equipment protection only)
Tripping class
Motor type

10
3-phase

10
20
Single-phase 3-phase

No-load running
Long starting time

Manual
Automatic or remote

With function module, or parameters

can be set via the bus with a
communication module, see chart
below.

Alarm

Thermal overload alarm only with

function module or communication
module, see below.

5
Log function

Monitoring function

With module LUFW

With module LUFDH11

Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset

With modules LUFDA01 and

LUFDA10
With module LUFV

Possible for each type of fault.

Indication on front panel of the control
unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via
PDA (1).
With communication modules to make
use of these alarms via a bus, see
below.
Log of the last 5 trips.
Number of starts, number of trips,
number of operating hours.

With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Reset method
Alarm

With any communication module

Parameters can be set via the bus
With modules LULC031, LULC033,
LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and
LULC09 (thermal overload alarm only).

Fault signalling and differentiation

Remote programming and monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Built-in function

10

Parameters can be set via the bus with

a communication module (see below).

With function modules (2)

Thermal overload alarm
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset

Remote reset via the bus

Indication of motor load

Parameters can be set

Parameters can be set

Display of main motor parameters on

front panel of the control unit, via
remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).

Indication of motor load (analogue)

530
Single-phase and 3-phase

Thermal overload test function

Overtorque

Reset method

Multifunction
LUCM

(1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant.

(2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module.

1/68

With module LULC031, LULC033,

LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and
LULC09
and Modbus port on the control unit
(alarm possible for all types of fault).
With modules LULC031, LULC033,
LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and
LULC09
and Modbus port on the control unit.

Function provided with accessory

TeSys motor starters - open version

References

TeSys U starter-controllers

Standard and advanced control units

510913

Description

1
5
2

1
2
3
4
5

Extraction and locking handle

Test button (on advanced control unit only)
Ir adjustment dial
Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
Sealing of locking handle

Standard control units

Maximum standard power
ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
400/440 V 500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW

Setting
range

Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating

0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832

12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32

Reference, to
be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

Weight

kg

Class 10 for 3-phase motors

0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15

520735

LUCApppp
LUCBpppp

2.2
5.5
9
15

3
9
15
18.5

LUCA X6pp
LUCA 1Xpp
LUCA 05pp
LUCA 12pp
LUCA 18pp
LUCA 32pp

0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135

Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload.
Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15

2.2
5.5
9
15

3
9
15
18.5

12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32

LUCBX6pp
LUCB1Xpp
LUCB05pp
LUCB12pp
LUCB18pp
LUCB32pp

0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140

0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832

12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32

LUCCX6pp
LUCC1Xpp
LUCC05pp
LUCC12pp
LUCC18pp
LUCC32pp

0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140

0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832

12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32

LUCDX6pp
LUCD1Xpp
LUCD05pp
LUCD12pp
LUCD18pp
LUCD32pp

0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140

0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832

Class 10 for single-phase motors

0.09
0.55
2.2
4
7.5

520736

LUBp2 + LUCA pppp

4
5
6

Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15

2.2
5.5
9
15

3
9
15
18.5

(1) Standard control circuit voltages:

Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL (2), (3)

a
B

c or a

ES (4)
FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.

7
8
9

LUBp2 + LUCB pppp

10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99

Schemes:
page 1/113

1/69

TeSys motor starters - open version

References

TeSys U starter-controllers
Multifunction control units

510914

Description

6
1
2
3

LUCMppBL

1
2
3
4
5
6

Extraction and locking handle

Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters)
4-button keypad
c 24 V auxiliary power supply
Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector.
Sealing of locking handle

The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow:

b in configuration mode: local configuration of protection functions and alarms,
b in run mode: display of parameter values and events.
The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect:
b an operator terminal,
b a PC,
b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).

Multifunction control units

3
520737

Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried
out:
b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad,
b or via an operator terminal,
b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software,
b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus.
Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power
supply.

4
5
6

LUBp2 + LUCM ppBL

Maximum standard power

ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
400/415 V 500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW

0.09

0.25
3
1.5
2.2

Setting
range

Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating

A
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255

A
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32

LUCM X6BL
LUCM 1XBL
LUCM 05BL

kg
0.175
0.175
0.175

5.5
7.5
15

312
4.518
832

12 and 32
32
32

LUCM 12BL
LUCM 18BL
LUCM 32BL

0.175
0.175
0.175

5.5
9
15

9
15
18.5

On CD-Rom

Weight

TeSys U users manual (2)

Application

Language

Reference

Multi-language (3)

LU9 CD1

Weight
kg
0.022

HMI terminal

This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit
LUCM to be read and modified.
It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers
(Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded).
Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.

521335

Reference
(1)

Language
Multi-language (3)
XBTNU400

Display window

Supply voltage

Reference

4lines of
20 characters

c 24 V

XBTNU400

Length

Type

Reference

2.5 m

SUB-D 25-way
female - RJ45

XBTZ938

Weight
kg
0.150

Connecting cable (4)

Function

Connects terminal XBTNU400

to a multifunction control unit.

Weight
kg
0.200

(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %.

(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
(4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub
or to T-junctions (see page 1/93).

10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99

1/70

Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/115

TeSys motor starters - open version

References

TeSys U starter-controllers
Function modules

Function modules
Output

Item

Application

Reference

Weight
kg

510915

Thermal overload signalling and manual reset

Module LUFDH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well
as an LED on the front panel.
To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base.
The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c
24240 V external power supply.
4

1 N/O + 1 N/C

a or c 24250 V

LUF DH11

1
2

0.060

Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset

These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit
faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1C).
The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED
on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with
terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring
allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then
stay in the ready position .
Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if
terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free
contact connected to terminals X1-X2.

3
4

These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c
24240 V external power supply.
1

510445

LUBp2 + LUCBpppp
+
LUFW10 or LUFVp

Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
For remote resetting, use a volt-free contact specific to each module to be reset.
1 N/C
1 N/O

4
4

a or c 24250 V
a or c 24250 V

LUF DA01
LUF DA10

0.055
0.055

Thermal overload alarm

Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in
operation due to overload tripping.
Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state
exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %).
Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by
an N/O relay output.
It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.

%
200

100

1
2
3

1 N/O
1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW
12 mA

20 mA

a or c 24250 V

LUF W10

0.055

Indication of motor load

This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status
(Iaverage/Ir).
b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases,
b Ir = value of the setting current.
The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to
300 % for a single-phase load).
It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit.
Module LUFV2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA

LUF V2

6
7
8

0.050

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/101

Schemes:
page 1/114

1/71

Presentation,
functions

PowerSuite software workshop

Presentation

534513

The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting
up the Schneider Electric control device motors:
b TeSysU starter-controllers
b TeSysT motor management systems
b Altistart soft start/soft stop units
b Altivar variable speed drives
b Lexium 05 servo drives

It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as:

b Preparing configurations
b Start-up
b Maintenance
To facilitate start-up and maintenance, the PowerSuite software workshop is
compatible with the Bluetooth wireless link.

PowerSuite screen on PC

Preparing configurations
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device
configuration, which can be saved, printed and exported to office automation
software.

The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert an Altivar 58 or

Altivar58F drive configuration into one that is compatible with an Altivar71.
Start-up
When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b Transfer the generated configuration
b Adjust
b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as:
v The oscilloscope
v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms)
v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope
v Display of communication parameters
b Control
b Save the final configuration

533181

5
6

PowerSuite screen on PC
View of PI regulator function parameters

Maintenance
To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved
configuration
b Manage the users installed equipment base, in particular:
v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery,
workshops, etc.)
v Store maintenance messages
v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address
User interface
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to:
b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated
views of diagrams or simple tables
b Customize the parameter names
b Create:
v A user menu (choice of particular parameters)
v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts)
b Perform sort operations on the parameters
b Display text in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). The
language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program.

572706

Functions (1)

It also features online contextual help:

b On the PowerSuite tool
b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals

10
View of the FTT oscilloscope
References:
page 1/74

1/72

(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions,
page 1/73.

PowerSuite software workshop

Functions (continued)

Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop

Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices

Controller

Startercontroller

Soft start/
soft stop
unit

Drives

TeSys T

TeSys U

ATS48

ATV11 ATV31

Servo
drive
ATV61

ATV71

LXM05

Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High-speed oscilloscope

FFT oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels

Sort operation on parameters

Custom logic editor
Functions available
Functions not available

536845

Connections (1)

Modbus serial link

The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal
port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC.

PowerSuite

Two types of connection are possible:

b With a single device (point-to-point connection), use a VW3A8106 PC serial port
connection kit.
b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), use the XGSZ24 interface.

RS 232
XGS Z24
RS 485

Modbus serial link

ATV31 or
Lexium05

ATV61

ATV71

TeSysU

ATS48

Modbus multidrop connection

Bluetooth wireless link

The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link if
the device is equipped with a Bluetooth Modbus VW3A8114. The adapter plugs
into the device connector terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of
10 m (class2).

536846

PLC (2)
PowerSuite

Modbus TCP network

Bridge

ATS 48

ATV61

Modbus TCP connection

ATV71

5
6
7

If the PC does not feature Bluetooth technology, use the VW3A8115 USB Bluetooth adapter.
Remote maintenance
A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software
workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics.
When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly
accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem,
teleprocessing gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Modbus
serial link

ATV31 or
Lexium05

ModbusTCP communication network

The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to a ModbusTCP network.
In this case, the devices can be accessed:
b Using a VW3A3310 communication card for the Altivar 61and 71 drives
b Using a TSXETG100 Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway

8
9

(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/75.

(2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7
software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.

10
Presentation:
page 1/72

References:
page 1/74

1/73

PowerSuite software workshop

References

PowerSuite software workshop

Description

536848

1
2

VW3 A8104

536847

3
4

VW3 A8114

Composition

Reference

Weight
kg
0.100

PowerSuite CD-ROM

VW3A8104
b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian
and Spanish
b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals

PowerSuite update
CD-ROM (1)

b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian

and Spanish
b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals

VW3A8105

0.100

PC serial port connection kit

for point-to-point Modbus
connection

VW3A8106
b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or
drive side and 1 RS232/RS485 converter with 19-way female
SUB-D connector on PC side
b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D
connector and 1 RJ45 connector
b For ATV38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter

0.350

RS 232/RS 485 interface

for multidrop Modbus
connection

XGSZ24
b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw
terminals. Requires a 24 V c(20...30V), 20mA power supply (2)

0.105

Modbus-Bluetooth adapter
(3)

VW3A8114
b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10m range, class 2)
with 1 RJ45 connector
b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and
1 mini DIN connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter

0.155

USB - Bluetooth adapter for

PC

This adapter is required in the case of a PC that does not feature

Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC.
10 m range (class 2)

VW3A8115

0.290

(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom,
VW3A8104.
(2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue.
(3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.

5
6
7
8
9
10
Presentation:
page 1/72

1/74

Functions:
page 1/72

PowerSuite software workshop

Compatibility

Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connexion

Modbus

Controller

Startercontroller

Soft start/
soft stop
unit

Drives

TeSysT

TeSysU (2)

ATS48

ATV11

ATV31

ATV61

ATV71

LXM05A LXM05B LXM05C

V2.5

V1.40

V1.30

V1.40

V2.0

V2.3

V2.2

V2.2

V2.4

V2.5

V2.3

V2.2

Modbus TCP (device equipped

with Modbus TCP card)

Servo drives

Modbus TCP via

Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway

V1.50

V2.0

V2.3

V2.2

V2.2

V2.4

V2.5

Bluetooth

V2.2

V2.2

V2.3

V2.2

V2.2

V2.4

V2.5

1
2

Compatible software versions

Incompatible software versions

Hardware and software environments

The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations:
b Microsoft Windows XP SP1, SP2,
b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM
b SVGA or higher definition monitor

(1) Minimum software version.

(2) TeSys U starter-controllerwithout communication module or with Modbus LULC031 or LULC033 communication module.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Presentation:
page 1/72

Functions:
page 1/72

References:
page 1/74

1/75

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation,
references

TeSys U starter-controllers

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection

components

510916

Presentation

When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the
TeSysU starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2).
The use of dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 allows remote
connection of 4 starter-controllers.

511529

Outputs for starter commands

RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box

511528

1
2

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC
I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw
terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system
(1).
The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each
starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB12 or LU2BA0BL power base and a
c 24 V control unit LUCpppBL.
Splitter boxes LU9G02 and LU9G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O
modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it.
Splitter box LU9G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with
card TSXDMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters)
for use with cards TSXDMZ64DTK and BMXDDM3202K.

Parallel wiring module LUFC00 has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running,
b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.

Each of the channels of LU9 G0p splitter boxes has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, in the case of a
reversing starter.
b 2 inputs: fault indication and position of poles.
LU9G02

Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables:

b RJ45LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres,
b 490NTW000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres.

LU9 G03

Parallel type connection

510917

Architecture

3 Parallel wiring module

LUFC00
4 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9BN11C
5 Connection cable LU9Rp with
one RJ45 connector at each
end
6 Splitter box LU9G02 or
LU9G03 for 8 motor starters
with channel connections on
the PLC side by two HE 10
connectors and on the startercontroller side by 8 RJ45
connectors.
7 Connection cable
TSXCDPppp with one HE 10
connector at each end.

10
To
PLC

11

12

12

References
Description

Parallel wiring module

Reference

LUF C00

(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue.
(2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue

10

Item

Dedicated parallel interface module

(STBEPI2145)
9 Power base
10 c 24 V control unit (LUCB/D/C/M pp BL)
11 Parallel wiring module (LUFC00)
12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks

1/76

Weight
kg
0.045

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection

components

566964

Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection

The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description
Pre-wired coil
connection

4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B

For use with

power base
LUBpp

Item

Reference

LU9B N11C

LU2Bpp

13

LU9M RC

Weight
kg
0.045
0.030

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may by used.

Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection
is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a
maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed.
The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply.

510918

2
3
4

Splitter boxes
Connectors
PLC side

Starter-controller
side
8 x RJ45

2 x HE 10
20-way

For use with

Reference

Weight

4 reversing starters
maximum

LU9 G02 (1)

0.260

8 reversing starters
maximum

LU9 G03 (1)

0.260

kg

Connection cables to the splitter box

Connectors

Item

2 x RJ45 connectors

13

Length
m
0.3
1
3

Reference
LU9 R03
LU9 R10
LU9 R30

Weight
kg
0.045
0.065
0.125

Weight

Connection cables from splitter box to PLC

Type of connection
Gauge
PLC side
Splitter box
side
AWG
HE 10
HE 10
22
20-way
20-way

C.s.a.

Length

Reference

mm2
0.324

m
0.5
1
2
3
5

TSX CDP 053

TSX CDP 103
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 503

kg
0.085
0.150
0.280
0.410
0.670

28

0.080

1
2
3

ABFH20H100
ABFH20H200
ABFH20H300

0.080
0.140
0.210

0.324

0.5

BMX FCC 053

0.210

BMX FCC 103

0.350

BMX FCC 203

0.630

BMX FCC 303

0.940

BMX FCC 503

1.530

10

BMX FCC 1003

3.000

3
5

TSX CDP 301

TSX CDP 501

0.400
0.660

LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M

HE 10
40-way

Bare wires

2 x HE 10
20-way

HE 10
20-way

22

0.324

(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.

1/77

5
6
7
8
9
10

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation,
references

TeSys U starter-controllers

AS-Interface communication modules

AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 make it easy to

connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow
remote control and command of these starter-controllers.

510919

Presentation

Module ASILUFC51 features extended addresing.

The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present,
communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by a green
LED 1 and a red LED 2.

Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is

totally transparent to the user.

3
4

3
1
2
3
4

Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present

Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault
Outputs for starter commands
Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary
power supply
5 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface
system

The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed

on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing
terminal.
The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and
must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCpppBL.
The product is supplied with a yellow connector 4 for connection to the AS-Interface
system, a black connector 5 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black
connector 3 for connection of the outputs.
Series type connection
Architecture

6 Communication modules ASILUFC5 or

ASILUF C51
7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2
8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

5
6

6
7
24 V

AS-Interface

Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

AS-Interface profiles
Data bits (command)

8
Data bits
(status)

Bit value
Command D0 (O)
Command D1 (O)
Command D2 (O)
Command D3 (O)

7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile

=0
=1
Stop forward
Forward running
Stop reverse
Reverse running
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used

Bit value
Status D0 (I)
Status D1 (I)
Status D2 (I)
Status D3 (I)

=0
Not ready or fault
Stopped
Not used
Not used

=1
Ready
Running
Not used
Not used

References
Description

10

Communication
modules

1/78

Addressing
Single
31 slaves
Extended
62 slaves

Item

Reference

ASI LUF C5

ASI LUF C51

Weight
kg
0.065
0.065

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

AS-Interface communication modules

510920

Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection

The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
1

Description

LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

Pre-wired
coil connection

For use with

power base
LUBpp

Item

Reference

LU9BN11C

LU2Bpp

LU9MRC

Weight
kg
0.045
0.030

b Wire link
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.

531122

Connection of the communication module (1)

3
4

This is achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables:

b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow).
b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1
5

Description
Tap-off

Length
m
2

Reference
XZCG0142

Weight
kg
0.265

Consoles and cable adapter

Description

520898

520899

LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

Reference

Addressing terminal
Battery operated. Battery charger supplied
AS-InterfaceV.1 and V.2.1 compatible
Adjustment and diagnostics console
Runs on LR6 batteries
Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves
and diagnostics
Cable adapter
For console XZMC11

XZMC11

Weight
kg
0.550

ASITERV2

0.500

XZMG12

0.070

Software set-up
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From
the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices
corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O.
Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.
XZ MC11

ASI TERV2

TeSys U users manual (2)

Application

Language

Reference

7
8

Weight
kg
0.022

Multi-language LU9CD1
(3)
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires.
Black wire: + 24 V.
White wire: 0 V.
Blue wire: AS-Interface ().
Brown wire: AS-Interface (+).
(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
On CD-Rom

1/79

9
10

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

1
2

567139

Presentation

When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
module LULC07 allows TeSys U starter-controllers to be controlled via Profibus DP
(Deported Periphery).
Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
internal registers (which can be accessed via the Profibus DP bus) in cyclic or acyclic
mode. This module has a 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two configurable discrete
inputs.

10

Connections
Serial bus topology

11

3
4
5

8 7 6

1 LED indicating module status

2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1
4 SUB-D connector for bus link
5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing)
10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or
multifunction)

15
13

13

14

15
16
18
17

12
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

12

18

18

18

17

24 V

24 V

Programmable controller with Profibus DP master card

Other slave (not powered via the bus)
Profibus DP 2-wire cable (TSXPBSCA100 = 100 m, TSXPBSCA400 = 400 m)
Standard Profibus DP connector (490NAD91103 or 490NAD91104)
Profibus DP power supply module for c 24 V-Aux supply to LULC07 modules (LU9GC7)
Profibus DP connector, TeSys U dedicated (LU9AD7)
Profibus DP 4-wire cable (LU9RPBppp)
Profibus DP communication module (LULC07)

Profibus DP: general information

The TeSys U communication module supports 2 Profibus application profiles based
on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter
(MMS).
Cyclic/Acyclic services
In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services.
The application profiles define, for the cyclic data:
b manufacturer independent data,
b manufacturer specific data.

DP V1 Read/Write services
DP V1 read and write services allow access to all data that cannot be accessed by
cyclic data exchange.

PKW feature
In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0
masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented.
The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called
PKW, which makes it possible to access all the registers en bloc.

Electronic device description

The TeSys U system is described by a GS*- file (1). This file will be used by any
Profibus configuration tool to get information about the device.
The GS*- files and associated icon, dedicated to the TeSys U system, can be
downloaded from the www.schneider-electric.com website (Library/Software
Tools).

10

(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.

1/80

Presentation (continued)
references

TeSys motor starters - open version

1

TeSys U starter-controllers

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C07.

106949

Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07

with c 24 V control units
LULC07 in conjunction with:
LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL
LUCAppBL
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
control unit
control unit
control unit

Information accessible
via Profibus DP

Starter status (ready, running, fault)

Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed

LUL C07

References
Description
ProfibusDP communication module

Item

Reference

18

LULC07

Weight
kg
0.108

Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals

510951

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
Description

OA3 OA1 COM

c 24 V

Item

Reference

LU9BN11L

LU2Bpp

LU9MRL

Weight
kg
0.050

5
6

0.450

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

COM

LI2
c 24 V

LI1

LO1

Pre-wired coil connection

For use with

power base
LUBpp

Components for connection to the bus and to the installation

The c 24 V-Aux supply to Profibus DP modules LULC07 must pass through power
supply module LU9GC7.
LULC07 modules must be connected to the LU9GC7 splitter box in order to be
powered.
The number of TeSys U starter-controllers that can be powered by an LU9GC7
module is limited by the maximum current (1.5 A) which it can deliver.
The c 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately.
Description

Length
m

Item
(1)

Reference

15

LU9 GC7

Weight
kg

16

LU9 AD7

Profibus DP cables
2-wire

100

TSXPBSCA100

TSXPBSCA400

Profibus DP cables
4-wire

10

13
13
17
17
17

LU9RPB010

LU9RPB100

LU9RPB400

Profibus DP
power supply module
Profibus DP connector

A1
A2

L1
On
power
base

c 24 V

0V

400
100
400

(1) See connection diagram on page 1/80.

Connection of power supplies

1/81

9
10

Compatibility

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

Profibus
DP
module

Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing

LUCM6XBL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

7.5

LUB32

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

15

LUB32

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC07

LU9BN11L

power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V

567122

Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07

with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32
Maximum 1
or
or
2

Power
base

Standard
control
unit

Advanced
control
unit

Nonreversing

Class 10

Class 10

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

0.25

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA1XBL

1.5

LUB12
or LUB32

5.5

kW
0.09

3
4

LUB + LUCpppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9BN11L

Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20

Classes
530

Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.

6
7
8
9
10

1/82

Compatibility (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07

with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32
Maximum 5
or
or
2

Profibus
DP
module

Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing

LUCM6XBL

LULC07

LU9MRL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC07

LU9MRL

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

7.5

LU2B32BL

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

15

LU2B32BL

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC07

LU9MRL

567123

power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V

Power
base

Standard
control
unit

Advanced
control
unit

Reversing

Class 10

Class 10

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

0.25

or LU2B12BL
LU2B32BL

LUCA1XBL

1.5

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

5.5

kW
0.09

6
LU2B + LUCpppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9MRL

Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20

Classes
530

1
2
3
4
5

Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.

6
7
8
9
10

1/83

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

CANopen communication module and

pre-wired coil connection components

Presentation

Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on a CANopen bus.
Module LULC08 is of the slave type.

When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module

LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.

For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V.
0.5 V discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.
LULC08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module :
XBE2100K.

8 7 6

Connections
Star topology

1 LED indicating module status

2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3

Bus topology

10

12

12

and LO1

4
5

4
5
6
7
8
9

SUB-D connector for bus link

Discrete output
Outputs for starter commands

or

14

11

junction box).

connectors for connection of slaves and screw terminal

blocks (connection of bus and dedicated 24 V supply to
modules LUL C08).

13 Connection between junction boxes TSX CANTDM4 by

cable TSXCANCADDpp or cable TSXCANCpp fitted with

TSXCANKCDF90T connectors.

14 The slaves are connected by means of cables

TSXCANCADDpp

15 Connections are made by means of cables TSXCANCpp

fitted with TSXCANKCDF180T connectors for the slaves
and with TSXCANKCDF90T connectors for the junction
boxes.
16 Starter-controller
17 CANopen communication module LUL C08

18 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Modules

+ I/O modules)

19 CANopen extension module STB XBE 2100K

c 24 V

17

15

16

16

19

11 Cable TSXCANCpp equipped with a TSX CANKCDF90T

connector (to be assembled)

17

c 24 V

10 CANopen master module TSX CPP110 (PMCIA card with

12 Terminal block TSX CANTDM4 with 4 SUB D type

11

13

11

Discrete input
Discrete input

16

16

c 24 V supply connection

14

17

18

17

15

Connection of power supplies

The c 24 V power supply for modules LUL C08 is distributed via the bus and must
be connected to the first TSX CANTDM4 junction box. The cable c.s.a. allows
connection of up to 25 LUL C08 modules .
Above this number, another power supply must be connected to the next junction
box.
A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
LO1.
Information carried by the bus
Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit
Standard
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.

Advanced

Multifunction

Compatibility of CANopen communication module with

control units

10

LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
All versions u V3.2
LUCMppBL
All versions u V3.2
LUCMT1BL
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code.
04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.

1/84

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

CANopen communication module and

pre-wired coil connection components

Communication services

Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data
exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic
Words).

Transmit and Receive PDO

PDO 1

Real time command-control

Preconfigured and enabled

PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused

PDO 4

To be defined by configuration

Adjustment, diagnostics and acyclic exchanges Preconfigured and enabled

510922

References
Description
CANopen communication module

Item

Reference

16

LULC08

Weight
kg
0.108

Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website
www.schneider-electric.com.

Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals

16

17

Description
Pre-wired coil connection

LUB + LUL C08 + LU9BN11L

For use with

power base
LUBpp
LU2Bpp

566988

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
Item

Reference

17
18

LU9BN11L
LU9MRL

Weight
kg
0.050
0.450

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.

5
6

Cables for connection to the bus

Description

16

Length
m

Item

Reference

0.3

14
14
14
14
11
11

TSXCANCADD03

0.045

TSXCANCADD1

0.065

TSXCANCADD3

0.125

TSXCANCADD5

1.500

14
14
14
14
11
11

TSXCANCBDD03

0.045

TSXCANCBDD1

0.065

TSXCANCBDD3

0.125

TSXCANCBDD5

1.500

Standard
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors

1.0
3
5

18
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9MRL

Reel of cable

50
100

UL approved
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors

0.3
1
3
5

Reel of cable

50
100

Weight
kg

TSXCANCA50

TSXCANCA100

TSXCANCB50

TSXCANCB100

7
8
9

Separate components
Description
Elbowed connector
Straight connector
Junction box

Reference

Weight
kg
TSXCANKCDF90T

TSXCANKCDF180T

TSXCANTDM4

1/85

10

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

1
2

567225

Presentation

When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
module LULC09 allows TeSysU starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled
via DeviceNet.
Communication module LULC09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet.
Module LULC09 has a configurable 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two
configurable discrete inputs.

10

Connections
Serial bus topology

3
4
5

8 7 6

1 LED indicating module status

2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1 and 24 V bus
4 DeviceNet connector for bus link
5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing)
10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or
multifunction)

6
7
8
9
10

1/86

11

63 starter-controllers max.
with modules LULC09

24 V
12

11
12
13
14

13

13

13

14

14

14

Industrial PLC: Industrial Programmable Controller equipped with a DeviceNet Master.

Connection and power distribution box for supply to DeviceNet communication modules.
Starter-controller.
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09.

Presentation (continued),
references

TeSys motor starters - open version

1

TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

567228

Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C09.

Compatibility of DeviceNet LULC09 communication module with

c 24 V control units
LULC09 in conjunction with:
LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL
LUCAppBL
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
control unit
control unit
control unit

Information accessible
via DeviceNet

Starter status (ready, running, fault)

Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed

567226

LUL C09

OA3 OA1 COM

References
V

Can_L

Can_H

Description
V+

DeviceNet communication module

Item

Reference

14

LULC09

Weight
kg
0.108

24 V

24 V

+
+

LI2

LI1

LO1

24 V

Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals

Pre-wired coil connection

For use with

power base
LUBpp

Reference
LU9BN11L

LU2Bpppp

LU9MRL

4
5

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
Description

Weight
kg
0.050

0.450

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

Supply
Connection of power supplies

The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LULC09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-)
terminals.
The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply
to the LULC09 modules.
The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.

8
9
10

1/87

Compatibility

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09

with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32
Maximum 1
or
or
2

DeviceNet
module

Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing

LUCM6XBL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

7.5

LUB32

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

15

LUB32

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC09

LU9BN11L

567122

power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V

Power
base

Standard
control unit

Advanced
control unit

Nonreversing

Class 10

Class 10

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

0.25

LUB12
or LUB32

LUCA1XBL

1.5

LUB12
or LUB32

5.5

kW
0.09

3
4

LUB + LUCpppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9BN11L

Multifunction
control unit

Class 20

Classes
530

Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.

6
7
8
9
10

1/88

Compatibility (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil

connection components

Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09

with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32
Maximum 5
or
or
2

DeviceNet
module

Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing

LUCM6XBL

LULC09

LU9MRL

LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL

LUCM1XBL

LULC09

LU9MRL

LUCA05BL

LUCB05BL LUCD05BL

LUCM05BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

LUCA12BL

LUCB12BL LUCD12BL

LUCM12BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

7.5

LU2B32BL

LUCA18BL

LUCB18BL LUCD18BL

LUCM18BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

15

LU2B32BL

LUCA32BL

LUCB32BL LUCD32BL

LUCM32BL

LULC09

LU9MRL

567123

power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V

Power
base

Standard
control unit

Advanced
control unit

Reversing

Class 10

Class 10

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

LUCA6XBL

LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL

0.25

or LU2B12BL
LU2B32BL

LUCA1XBL

1.5

LU2B12BL
or LU2B32BL

5.5

kW
0.09

6
LU2B + LUCpppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9MRL

Multifunction
control unit
Class 20

Classes
530

1
2
3
4
5

Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.

6
7
8
9
10

1/89

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Advantys STB communication module and

pre-wired coil connection components

Presentation

1
2

Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at
the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS
(End of segment) extension module STBXBE1100.
The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by
Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions.
When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module
LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V,
0.5 A discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.

Connections
10

3
4

8 7 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

11

Two-colour LED indicating module status

Fault signalling LED
LED indicating that c 24 V supply is ON
Bus connectors
c 24 V supply connection
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete output
Outputs for starter commands

14

13

15

12

16
13

13

14

14 + 16
17

13

13

12

14

14

12

18

17

12

10 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Module + I/O modules).

11 Extension module (EOS/End of segment) STBXBE1100.
12 Bus connecting cable LU9RCDpp, elbowed/straight, for connection of the first TeSys U
communication module.

13 Starter-controller.
14 Communication module LUL C15.
15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules

LU9BN11L or LU9MRL.

16 Line end adapter LU9RFL15.

17 Bus connection cable LU9RDDpp, straight/straight, for connections between LUL C15 modules.
18 Beginning of segment (BOS).
Connection of power supply for the outputs
A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C15 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
LO1.

Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit
Standard
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.

8
9

Advanced

Multifunction

Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module

with control units

10

LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
All versions u V3.2
LUCMppBL
All versions u V3.2
LUCMT1BL
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of
manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.

1/90

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Advantys STB communication module and

pre-wired coil connection components

Possible architectures

The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to

an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and
the associated control units.
NIM
(Network Interface
Module)
CANopen

Standard
Basic
DeviceNet
Standard
Basic
Profibus DP Standard
Basic
Interbus
Standard
Basic
Fipio
Standard
Modbus plus Standard
Ethernet
Standard

Number of starter-controllers
LUCAppBL LUCBppBL LUCMppBL
LUCCppBL
LUCD ppBL
17
17
15
12
12
12
18
18
16
12
12
12
9
8
8
9
8
8
2
2
1
2
2
1
4
4
4
17
17
15
32
32
32

Number of controllers
LUCBpp
LUCDpp
LUCMpp
15
12
16
12
8
8
1
1
4
15
32

1
2
3

References
Description

Item

Reference

LULC15
14
LU9RFL15
16
End of segment (EOS)
STBXBE1100
11
Beginning of segment (BOS)
STBXBE1300
18
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Advantys STB communication module
Line end adapter

14

19

Weight
kg
0.108
0.012

Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection.
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
Description
Pre-wired coil connection

For use with

power base
LUBpp
LU2Bpp

Item

Reference

19
20

LU9BN11L
LU9MRL

Weight
kg
0.050

Cables
14

20

Cables fitted with

connectors,
one straight
and one elbowed
Cables fitted with
two straight connectors

Length
m
0.3
1
3
5
0.3
1
3

0.450

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.

Description

Item

Reference

12
12
12
12
17
17

LU9RCD03

Weight
kg
0.045

LU9RCD10

0.065

LU9RCD30

0.125

LU9RCD50

1.500

LU9RDD03

0.045

LU9RDD10

0.065

LU9RDD30

0.125

7
8
9

Note: User manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.

10

1/91

Presentation

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil

connection components

Presentation

LULC033

LULC031

1
510624

566970

Communication modules LULC031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U startercontroller to be connected to the Modbus network.
They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V
control unit, LUCpppBL.
They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements.
The module LUL C033 also has two configurable discrete inputs.

Series type connection

Architecture
Star topology

35

Bus topology

2
10

3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

Module status signalling LED

24 V supply connection
RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link
2 discrete inputs
1 discrete output
Outputs for starter commands

12

To PLC

11

7
8
9
10

Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used.

11 12

Communication module LULC031 or LULC033

Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C
Connection cable VW3A8306Rpp with one RJ45 connector at each end
Modbus hub LU9GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller
with RJ45 connectors
11 T-junction VW3A8306TFpp
12 Line terminator VW3A8306R

Control unit
Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
Start and Stop commands
Thermal overload alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed

7
8

Standard

Advanced

Multifunction

For more detailed information, please refer to Users Manual LU9CD1, see page
opposite.

Compatibility of Modbus communication modules

With starter-controllers and controllers

Starter-controllers and controllers
LUB pp / LU2Bp2
LUTM ppBL
Possible combinations.

10

1/92

LUL C031

LUL C033

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil

connection components

Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)

With power bases

Control unit software versions

LUCA ppBL
LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL
LUCM ppBL

V1.04
V1.05
V1.06
V1.10 (1)

LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

LUL C033
V2.2 (1)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

V2.11 (1)

LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
No
No

LUL C033
V2.1 (1)
Yes
Yes

With base controllers, version 1.200 (1)

Control unit software versions
LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL
LUCM TppBL
(1) And higher versions
511527

Combinations not permitted.

1
2
3

References
Description

Item

Reference

LULC031
7
LULC033
7
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Modbus communication modules

Weight
kg
0.080
0.080

Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals
7
8

By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
Description

LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B

Pre-wired coil connection

For use with

power base
LUBpp

566967

LU2Bpp

Item

Reference

8
13

LU9BN11C

5
Weight
kg
0.045

LU9MRC

0.030

b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.

Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

6
7

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.

Description
Modbus hub
8 slaves
Cables fitted with
2 x RJ45 connectors

13
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M

Length
m

Item

Reference

10

LU9GC3

0.3

9
9
9
11
11
12

VW3A8306R03

0.045

VW3A8306R10

0.065

VW3A8306R30

0.125

VW3A8306TF03

0.032

VW3A8306TF10

0.032

VW3A8306R

0.012

1
3

T-junctions (1)

0.3
1

RS 485 line terminator

Weight
kg
0.260

TeSys U users manual (2)

Application
On CD-Rom

Language

Reference

Multi-language (3)

LU9CD1

8
9

Weight
kg
0.022

(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied
with an RJ45 male connector (station side).
(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish

1/93

10

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation,
description,
setting-up

Communication gateways LUFP

0

Presentation

Communication gateways LUFP allow connection between the Modbus serial link
and Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet field buses.

After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by

the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions
(command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses.
An LUFP communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a
35mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus
serial link.

Example of architecture

LUFP

4
524177

Fipio
Profibus DP
DeviceNet

Configuration
of gateway
by PC

TeSys U starter-controllers

(1)
Modbus

ATS 48 ATV 312

Description

Front panel of the product

1 LED indicating:
- communication status of the Modbus serial links,
- gateway status,
- communication status of the Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet bus.
2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet buses.

561512

Underside of product
3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link
4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC
5 c 24 V power supply
3

Software set-up

For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7
Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software.
For the ProfibusDP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using
ABCConfigurator.
This software is included in the TeSysU users manual.

4
5

(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/74).

10
Characteristics, references:
page 1/95

1/94

Dimensions:
page 1/95

Schemes:
page 1/118

Characteristics,
references,
dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version

Communication gateways LUFP

0

Characteristics
Bus type
Environment
Ambient air temperature
Degree of protection
Electromagnetic
compatibility

Conforming to IEC 60664

Around the device

Emission
Immunity
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected
Connection
Modbus
To a PC
Field bus
Supply
Consumption

Max.
Typical

Indication/diagnostics
Services

V
mA
mA

Profile
Command
Monitoring
Configuration and adjustment

Fipio
ProfibusDP
DeviceNet
Degree of pollution: 2
+ 5+ 50
IP 20
Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993
Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999
y8
By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard
By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit
By SUBD9 female
By SUBD9 female
By 5-way removable
connector
connector
screw connector
External supply, c 24 10 %
280
100
By LED on front panel
FEDC32 or FEDC32P

26 configurable words (1)

122 configurable words
256 configurable words
26 configurable words (1)
122 configurable words
256 configurable words
By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)

1
2
3

References
Description
Communication
gateways

For use with

TeSysU starter-controllers,
Altistart48,
Altivar31,
Altivar312

Weight
kg
0.245
0.245
0.245

Weight
kg
VW3 A8 306 D30
0.150

With bus/
serial link
Fipio/Modbus
ProfibusDP/Modbus
DeviceNet/Modbus

Reference
LUFP1
LUFP7
LUFP9

Connectors

Reference

VW3 A8 306 R03

VW3 A8 306 R10
VW3 A8 306 R30
TSX FP ACC12

Connection accessories
822631

Description
Connection cables

For use with

Modbus

Length
m
3

Fipio

0.3
1
3

1 RJ45 type connector and

one end with stripped wires
2 RJ45 type connectors
2 RJ45 type connectors
2 RJ45 type connectors
1 SUB-D 9 male connector

Profibus mid line

Profibus line end

1 SUB-D 9 male connector

1 SUB-D 9 male connector

822713

TSXFPACC12

Connectors

490NAD91103

0.050
0.050
0.150
0.040

490 NAD 911 04

490 NAD 911 03

Documentation
Description
Users manual for
TeSysU range (2)

Medium

Language

Reference

CD-Rom

Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian,

Spanish

LU9 CD1

Weight
kg
0.022

Dimensions

120

75

27
(1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited
to a total of 26 words.
(2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
ABC Configurator.

Presentation, description:
page 1/94

Setting-up:
page 1/94

Schemes:
page 1/118

1/95

10

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Environment

Product certifications

UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ASEFA.

ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS.
ATEX.
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N14, Type E
UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0
690

600

kV

Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400

Conforming to standards
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

2
3

Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Safety separation of circuits
SELV

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,

overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
Conforming to UL508,
CSA C22-2 n14
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
appendix N

Degree of protection
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
direct finger contact)
Other faces
Protective treatment

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Maximum operating altitude

Operating positions

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11
Storage
Operation

IP 40
IP 20
IP 20
TH
Cycles 12
h
48
C
- 40+ 85
C
Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70.
(At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a
minimum gap of 9mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 C and up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between
products.)
m
2000

In relation to normal vertical

mounting plane

30
90

6
30
Flame resistance

7
8
9

C
C

Environmental restrictions
Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27
(1)

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6

(1)

Resistance to
electrostatic discharge

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2

Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3

Immunity to fast
transient currents

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4

Immunity to dissipated
shock waves

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2

Uc a 24240 V,
kV
Uc c 48220 V
Uc = 24 V c
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V

Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance

10

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60695-2-12

Radiated emission
and conducted

V2
960 (parts supporting live components)
650
Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Power poles open: 10 gn
Power poles closed: 15 gn

kV
kV
V/m
kV
kV

Conforming to CISPR 11 and

EN 55011

Power poles open: 2 gn

Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
In open air: 8 - Level 3
On contact: 8 - Level 4
10 - Level 3
All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Common mode
Serial mode
2
1
Not applicable
10
Class A

(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.

References :
pages 1/62 to 1/71

1/96

Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111

Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119

90

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Power bases and control units

Power base, control unit or reverser block type

LUB 12 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD

Power circuit connection characteristics

LUB 32 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD

LUB 12 +
LUCM

LUB 32 +
LUCM

LU2M
LU6M

2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16

2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16

2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16

1.92.5

1.92.5

1.92.5

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5

0.81.2

0.81.2

0.81.2

24240
24240
24220
24220
2027
2027
2026.5
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
a 88264
c 88242
c 88242
14.5
14.5
14.5
14.5
29
29
55
55
130
220
140
220
280
280
280
280
60
80
70
90
35
45
35
25
2
3
24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50
35
35
3
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
15
3600
3600

24
2028

14.5

150

70

1.7
75
35
3

24
2028

14.5

200

75

1.8
65
35
3

15
3600

15
3600

120
2360
2300
1000
120
(2)
(2)
(2)

3
3
Yes
Yes
1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank
12
32
q y 70C: 12A
q y 70C: 32A
q y 70C: 12A
q y 70C: 32A
690 (3)
690 (3)
4060
4060
3
6
9
12 18 25 32
0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5

3
Yes

3
Yes

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
without cable end

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

Control circuit connection characteristics

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

2.510
2.510
1.56
1.56
16
16
16
16
110
110
16
16
Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm
1.92.5
1.92.5

Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
without cable end

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

Control circuit characteristics

Rated voltage
of control circuit

a 50/60 Hz
c

Voltage limits
Operation

c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V

Drop-out

Typical consumption
I max while closing

I rms sealed

Heat dissipation
Operating time

Closing
Opening

Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms

Main pole characteristics

Number of poles
Isolation
Possible
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking
Rated thermal current
Rated operational current To IEC/
Category AC-41
(Ue y 440V)
EN 60947-6-2 Category AC-43
Rated operational voltage
Frequency limits
Of the operating current
Power dissipated
Operational current
in the power circuits
Power dissipated in all three poles
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit
Total breaking time
Thermal limit

With Isc max on 440 V

V
Hz
A
W

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
Philips n 1 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm
0.81.2
0.81.2

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

12
32

q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A

q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A
690 (3)
690 (3)

4060
4060

V
230
440
500
690
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kAs
90
120
90
120
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.

9
10

1/97

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts

Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M

Duration of inrush phase

a 50/60 Hz ms
c
ms
Without change of direction
ms
With change of direction
ms

Maximum
operating time

25
15
75
150

General characteristics of auxiliary contacts

2
3

Conventional
For ambient temperature q < 70 C
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current
U min
Minimum switching capacityl = 10-8
I min
Short-circuit
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
protection
Short-time rating
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between
N/C and N/O contacts

Hz
V
mA
A

Up to 400
17
5
gG fuse: 4

A
A
A
mW
ms

30
40
50
10
2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base

Linked contacts
Mirror contact

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Rated insulation
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to UL, CSA

V
V
V

Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked
The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power
contacts (safety scheme)
Up to a 690; c 250
690
600

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Rated insulation
Conforming to IEC/EN60947-5-1
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to UL, CSA

V
V
V

Up to a 250; c 250
250
250

Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1

and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M

Rated operational power of contacts

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1

8
9

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.

V
VA

24
60

48
120

115
280

230
560

400
960

440 600
1050 1440

V
W

24
120

48
90

125
75

250
68

VA

16

32

80

160

280

300

420

70

50

38

33

VA

20

40

70

80

100

25

18

14

12

10
8
7
6
5
4
3

Millions of operating cycles

1 million
operating cycles
3 million
operating cycles
10 million
operating cycles

Millions of operating cycles

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an
inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j = 0.4)

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3

10

0,2

References :
pages 1/63 and 1/64

1/98

24 V
48 V
125 V
250 V

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2

0,2

0,1
0,1

10
8
7
6
5
4
3

0,3 0,4

0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9

6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A

Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111

0,1
0,1

0,2

Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119

0,3 0,4

0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9

3
4
6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Control units

Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection
Overload
protection

Short-circuit
protection

Motor type
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Protection against phase imbalance
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance

3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14
10
Hz
C

4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir (setting current)
20 %

Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type
Protection
Motor type
Conforming to standard
Overload
protection

Short-circuit
protection

Tripping class conforming to

UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Protection against phase imbalance
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance

Hz
C

LUCB
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10

LUCC
Single-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10

LUCD
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
20

4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %

4060
- 25+ 55

14.2 x Ir max.
20 %

4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %

Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection
Overload
protection

Communication
interface for
terminal on
enclosure door
Display

Auxiliary supply

Motor type
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Maximum transmission speed
Maximum return time
Type
Language version
Precision
Resolution
External type
Heat dissipation

Parameters can be set: single-phase or 3-phase

IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable)
Hz
C

bit/s
ms

V
W

5060
- 25+ 55
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
19 200 (self-configuration up to this value)
200
LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters
Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish)
5%
1 % of Ir
c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %.
0.8

5
6

Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Tripping

Alarm

Factory setting Factory setting

Adjustment of tripping
Adjustment of time before
Adjustment of alarm
threshold
tripping
threshold
Range
Default value Range
Default value Range
Default value

Overcurrent
Overload

Activated (1)
Activated (1)

Activated

317 Ir
0.532 A (2)

14.2
Ir min

Class: 530

Earth fault
Phase imbalance
Torque limitation
No-load running
Long starting time

Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated

Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated

0.25 Ir min
1030 %
18 Ir
0.31 Ir
18 Ir

0.3 Ir min
10 %
2 Ir
0.5 Ir
Ir

0.11.2 s
0.220 s
130 s
1200 s
1200 s

0.1 s
5s
5s
10 s
10 s

Factory setting
Manual
120 s
3-phase motor
Self-cooled
English
Average current

Setting range
Manual, automatic or remote
11000 s
3-phase motor, single-phase motor
Self-cooled, force cooled
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of
last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.

Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM

Reset
Time before reset
Type of load
Language
Display

References :
pages 1/69 and 1/70

Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111

10100 % of
85 %
the thermal state
0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min
1030 %
10 %
18 Ir
2 Ir
0.31 Ir
0.5 Ir
18 Ir
Ir

7
8

Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119

1/99

9
10

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload

alarm function module and thermal overload fault
signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Operating threshold
Breaking capacity

690

32

I rms

kA
V
kA

50
440 690
130 70
Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2

1.510
1.5...6
110
16
1...6
1...6
Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm
1.92.5

Mounting
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end

Flexible cable with cable end

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

N.m

Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

4
5

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Operating threshold
Breaking capacity
Mounting
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end

I rms

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

690

63

A
V
kA

1000
440
100
Separate

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2

1.525
1.5...10
1.525
2.510
1.516
1.54
Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm
2.2

N.m

690
35

Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10

7
8
9
10

Activation threshold
Hysteresis between activation and switching off
Display
Supply
Discrete output characteristics
Type
AC-15
DC-13
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
For ambient
A
temperature q < 70 C
Short-circuit protection
Conforming to
A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state

5%
By LED on front panel
Powered by the control unit
N/O contact
230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles
2
gG fuse: 2

Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules

Module type
Fault signalling
External power supply
Module consumption

V
mA

Discrete outputs

Type
AC-15
DC-13

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

For ambient
temperature q < 70 C
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Conductor c.s.a.
Length

Short-circuit protection
Reset input

References :
pages 1/66 and 1/71

1/100

LUF DH11
LUF DA01
By LED on front panel
a/c 24 240
7 at c 24
1.1 at a 240
1 N/C+ 1 N/O
1 N/C
230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles

Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111

gG fuse: 2

mm2
m

0.2 min
500 (R = 50 W , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF)

Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119

LUF DA10

1 N/O

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Function modules and communication modules

Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output
Signal delivered
Load impedance

Signal characteristics
with advanced control unit
Signal characteristics
with multifunction control unit

Minimum
Maximum
Typical
Precision

kW
W
W

Precision
Resolution

4 - 20 mA
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC

500
100
6%

1
2

10 %
1 % of Ir
External c 24 V

Supply

Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Module type
Product certification
AS-Interface profile
Ambient air temperature
Cycle time
Addressing
AS-Interface supply
Current consumption

C
ms

On the
AS-Interface bus
On 24 V supply
for the outputs

Auxiliary supply
Number of outputs
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs
Indication/diagnostics

V
mA
mA
mA
V

ASILUF C5
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901
7.D.F.0
Operation - 25+ 70
5
31 slaves
29.5...31.5
Normal operation: 25
Fault condition: 30
200

ASILUF C51
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303
7.A.7.E

10
62 slaves

c 24 30 %
2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits)
By 2 LEDs on front panel

Characteristics of Modbus communication module LULC03p

Module type
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Maximum transmission speed
Maximum return time
Addressing
Ambient air temperature
Discrete inputs

bit/s
ms
C

Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type

Solid state
outputs
Protection
Switching capacity
Indication/diagnostics

Number
Supply
Max. current
gI fuse

V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms

V
mA
A

LUL C031
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
19 200 (self-configuration up to this value)
30
By switches: from 0...31
Operation - 25+ 55

c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30 %)
10 ( 30 %)
Resistive

LUL C033

6
2 (to be assigned according to the configuration)
c 24
7

3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

c 24
500
1
0.5 A/24 V

By 3 LEDs on front panel

9
10

1/101

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Function modules and communication modules

Characteristics of CANopen, Profibus DPand DeviceNet communication modules

Communication module
Services

Profibus DP
LULC07
NA
Profibus DP

CANopen
LULC08
S 20 (Schneider Electric)
CIADS-301 V4.02
DR 303-2

Protocol
Address

LVSG V1.0
MS (Motor Starter) and
MMS (Motor Management
Starter)
Profibus DP
1125

Physical interface
Binary rate

9-way SUB-D male

9600 Kbits/s12 Mbits/s

Cables

2 shielded twisted pairs

Conformity class
Standard
Profile

2
Structure

3
Supply for the
discrete outputs
and control

Ambient air temperature

Logic inputs

5
Discrete outputs

c 24 V
Current consumption
Protection by gl fuse

Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Number
Max. current
Short-circuit protection
Switching capacity

CAN 2.0A (2B passive)

0127 (by switches)

CAN 2.0A (2B passive)

063

9-way SUB-D female

10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500
and 1000 Kbits/s
(by switches)

Open Style connector

125500kbaud

V
A
A

2028
1.5 (max)
2

Operation -25+55

V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms

2 (to be assigned according to the configuration)

c 24
7
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30%)
10 ( 30%)
Resistive

mA

Indication/diagnostics

3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

500
Yes
0.5 A / c 24 V
By 3 LEDs on front panel

Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15

7
8

Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Transmission speed
Addressing
Supply for the
c 24 V
discrete outputs Current consumption
and control
Protection by gl fuse
Ambient air temperature
Discrete inputs

Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type

CAN
Fire Wire
CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode)
kbit/s 800
Self-addressing
V
2028
A
1.5 (max)
A
2
C
Operation - 25+ 55

V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms

Discrete outputs

10

Number
Max. current
Short-circuit protection
Switching capacity
Indication/diagnostics

1/102

mA

DeviceNet
LULC09
NA
IEC 62026-1,
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
ODVA (Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association)
MS (Motor Starter)

2 ( to be assigned according to configuration)

c 24
7
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30%)
10 ( 30%)
Resistive
3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
500
Yes
0.5 A / c 24 V
By 3 LEDs on front panel

Characteristics(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Function modules and communication modules

Connection characteristics
Module type

LUFW10,
LUFDH11,
LUFDA01 and
LUFDA10

LUF V2

ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Outputs

5.08

3.81

Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
5.08

Connectors

Pitch

Flexible cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm

0.21.5

0.141

0.21.5

0.141

2 identical conductors

mm

0.21

0.140.75

0.21

0.140.75

Flexible cable Without

with cable end insulated
ferrule

1 conductor

mm

0.251.5

0.251

0.251.5

0.251

2 identical conductors

mm

0.251

0.250.34

0.251

0.250.34

With
insulated
ferrule

1 conductor

mm

0.251.5

0.250.5

0.251.5

0.250.5

2 identical conductors
(Use a double cable end)

mm

0.51

0.5

0.51

0.5

1 conductor

mm

0.21.5

0.141

0.21.5

0.141

2 identical conductors

mm

0.21

0.140.5

0.21

0.140.5

AWG24 AWG16

AWG26 AWG16

AWG24 AWG16

AWG26 AWG16

Solid cable
without cable end

Conductor size

1 conductor

3.81

Tightening torque

N.m

0.50.6

0.200.25

0.50.6

0.200.25

Flat screwdriver

mm

3.5

2.5

3.5

2.5

LULC031,
LULC033,
LULC08 and
LULC15

LUFC00

LUL C09

3.81

3.81

Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
3.81

Module type

2
3

Connectors

Pitch

Flexible cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm

0.141

0.141

0.141

Connection
on the bus
5 (Open Style)
DeviceNet
0.22.5

2 identical conductors

mm

0.140.75

0.140.75

0.140.75

0.51.5

Flexible cable Without

with cable end insulated
ferrule

1 conductor

mm

0.251

0.251

0.251

0.252.5

2 identical conductors

mm

0.250.34

0.250.34

0.250.34

0.251

With
insulated
ferrule

1 conductor

mm

0.250.5

0.250.5

0.250.5

0.252.5

2 identical conductors
(Use a double cable end)

mm

0.5

0.5

0.75

0.51.5

1 conductor

mm

0.141

0.141

0.141

0.22.5

2 identical conductors

mm

0.140.5

0.140.5

0.140.5

0.140.5

AWG26 AWG16

AWG26 AWG16

AWG26 AWG16

AWG24 AWG16

Solid cable
without cable end

Conductor size

1 conductor

Tightening torque

N.m

0.200.25

0.200.25

0.200.25

0.50.6

Flat screwdriver

mm

2.5

2.5

2.5

3.5

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/103

TeSys motor starters - open version

Curves

TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.

Time (s)

1000

100

2
3
10

3
1

0,1
1

10

12

14

20
30
x the setting current (Ir)

1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20.

2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10.
3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.

Tripping curves for control units LUCC

Time (s)

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.

1000

100

2
10

8
9

0,1

1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state.

2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.

10
References :
page 1/69

1/104

10

12

14

20
30
x the setting current (Ir)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Curves (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves

Time (s)

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.

10000

1000

100

10

Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5

5
0,1
1

9 10

12
11

13

14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
x the setting current (Ir)

6
7
8
9
10
References :
page 1/70

1/105

TeSys motor starters - open version

Curves (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Hot state curves

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %

Time (s)

1
2
3

10000

1000

100

10

4
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5

5
0,1
1

9 10

12
11

6
7
8
9
10
References :
page 1/70

1/106

13

14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
x the setting current (Ir)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Curves (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Current limitation on short-circuit

peak current (kA)

Ue = 460 V

100

10

0,1
0,1

4
0,2

0,4

0,6 0,8 1

8 10

20

30

40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A power base
3 12 A power base

Thermal limit on short-circuit

Sum of Idt (As) 103

Ue = 460 V
1000

6
1

100

10

1
0,1

0,2

0,4

0,6

0,8 1

8 10

20

30

40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 32 A power base
2 12 A power base

10
References :
page 1/62

1/107

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Millions of operating cycles

LUB 12

LUB 32

Use in category AC-41

10
8
6
5
4
3
2

1
0,8

0,6
5

6 7 8 9 10 12

32 40
Current broken in A

Use in category AC-43

LUB 12

LUB 32

LUB 12

Ue = 690 V

Millions of operating cycles

10
8
6
5
4
3
2

1
0,8

6
5
4
3
2

0,6

0,6

0,5

0,5

1,5

7,5

32 40
Current broken in A

6 7 8 9 10 12

5,5

2,2

0,75

0,55

15

11

7,5

5,5

2,2

230 V

440 V

9
10
References:
page 1/62

1/108

15

11

7,5

5,5

2,2

1,5

0,75

0,55

400 V

10
8

1
0,8

0,55

1,5

0,75

Ue y 440 V

Millions of operating cycles

LUB 32

0,5

kW

kW

kW

6 7 8 9 10 12

32 40
21
Current broken in A

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Use in category AC-44

1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2

1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08

0,06
0,05
0,04

0,06
0,05
0,04

0,03

0,03

0,02

0,02

10

20

30
40

50 66 100
200
60 80
170
Current broken in A

0,3

0,1
0,08

LUB 12
LUB 32

LUB 12
LUB 32

Ue = 690 V

Millions of operating cycles

Millions of operating cycles

Ue y 440 V

0,01

0,01

3
1

10

20

30

200
50 60
100
40 54 80
126
Current broken in A

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References:
page 1/62

1/109

TeSys motor starters - open version

Dimensions

TeSys U starter-controllers

Dimensions

Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing

LU2B: reversing
Rail mounting
126

X1

126

Screw fixing
30

Rail mounting

Screw fixing
29

4 (2)

4 (2)

45

X2

135 (1)
a

With Modbus module

135

With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profibus DP

or DeviceNet modules

147

233237

120/125

X1

a (1)

224

154

163167

73

X2

45

Minimum electrical clearance:

X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0
Screw fixing

104

Rail mounting

115

Reverser block for mounting separately from power base

113

36

113

45

Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2G445 and GV2G454

GV2Gppp with terminal block GV1G09

GV1 G09

95

GV2G245 and G254

38

18

a
l

GV2G445 (2 x 45)

179

45

GV2G454 (2 x 54)

206

54

GV2G554

GV2G245 (2 x 45)

89

GV2G254 (2 x 54)

98

GV2G345 et G354
260

Number of tap-offs

GV2G445 (2 x 45)

224

269

314

359

GV2G345 (2 x 45)

I
134

GV2G454 (2 x 54)

260

314

368

422

GV2G354 (2 x 54)

152

30

82

AK5PC13, PC33, PC33L

45,5

AK5JB144

45

10

81

79

438
452
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) Retractable fixing lugs.

1/110

38

35,5

TeSys motor starters - open version

Dimensions (continued),
mounting

TeSys U starter-controllers

Dimensions, mounting

Current limiter LA9LB920

93

Limiter-disconnector LUALB1
Disconnector LUALB10

115

103

154

146

2M4

45

a (1)

51

53,5

a
With Modbus module

135

With Advantys STB,

CANopen, Profibus DP or
DeviceNet modules

147

Door interlock mechanisms

LU9AP20

LU9AP00
Door cut-out
45

55

171230

11,5

= =
54

162

162

230

230

= =
54

11,5

508

Addressing consoles
XZMC11

ASI TERV2

195

209

80

84

30

35

Splitter boxes
LU9GC3 (Modbus) LU9G02 and LU9G03
Rail mounting

LU9GC7 (ProfibusDP)
Screw fixing

Rail mounting

Screw fixing
4 (2)

128

45

128

30

65

45

163167

170

154

163167

4 (2)

65

10

30

(1) Depth with communication module.

(2) Retractable fixing lugs.

1/111

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes

TeSys U starter-controllers

Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A

With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit

5/L3
6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

LU2M

82

84

81

A2

B1

A1

LU6M

Reverser Block

LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil

LU6M

21
22
S3

A2
S1

14
S2

A2

B1

A1

A1

13

Basic scheme

Reverser Motor Controller

B3

A3

S3
S3

S2

S1
82

84

81

A2

B1

A1

B3

A3

6/T3

Control terminal block

LU2M

A2

A1

B3

A3

With pre-wired connector LU9MRC

LU6M
4/T2

B1

Reverser Block

LU6M

2/T1

S2

S1

S3

S2

S1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Control terminal blocks

Reverser

S1 Start next stage

S2 Electrical interlocking
S3 Maintaining contact
B1 Maintain forward running
B3 Maintain reverse running
A1 Pulse forward running
A2 Common
A3 Pulse reverse running
(1) Electronically operated
bistable electromagnet.

Add-on contact blocks

17/NO

18/NO

95/NC

96/NC

97/NO

98/NO

1/112

67

18/NO

68

17/NO

LUA8E20
57

LUA1 C20

58

LUA1 C11

A2

A3 Reverse

A1 Forward

B3 Reverse

B1 Forward

(1)

10

B3

A3

6/T3

A2

B1

A3

A2

A1

V 6

U 2

Reverser blocks

A1

Reverser Motor Controller

B3

22/NC

21/NC

14/NO

13/NO

Control terminal block

LU2B

4/T2

Reverser

2/T1

5 L2

Connection of a single-phase motor

Control Unit

Pre-wired

With control unit LUCC or LUCM

3/L2

1/L1
22/NC

21/NC

14/NO

Control Unit

A2

A1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

Control Unit

1 L1

13/NO

5/L3

Non-reversing
3/L2

Non-reversing
1/L1

Add-on contact modules

LUFN20

LUFN11

LUFN02

33/NO

34/NO

43/NO

44/NO

31/NC

32/NC

43/NO

44/NO

31/NC

32/NC

41/NC

42/NC

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Control units
Standard control units LUCA

Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD

Basic scheme

Basic schemehd
1

1
LUCA

Power Base
Interface

Sensor
L1

Sensor
L3

6
LUCp

Control
A.S.I.C.

Sensor
L2

tr

Power Base
Interface

Sensor
L1

Control
A.S.I.C.

Sensor
L2

tr

Sensor
L3
Therm. overload

Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence

memory

Interface module
7

1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C

Test

A2

A1

Thermal
overload
memory

A2

A1

Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence

9 10 11

12

1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 Thermal status/Set
9 Reset mode/Reset
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Vc2
12 Vc1

4
5

Multifunction control units LUCM

Control terminal block

Multifunction Control Unit

D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V

LUCM
24 V Aux

4 5 7
6 8

Basic scheme
1

Sensor
L1
Sensor
L2

Display and
Parameter Entry
ESC

Control
A.S.I.C.

Sensor
L3

ENT

RS485
Supply and
detection of
start
sequence

LUCM

Power Base
Interface

Thermal
overload
memory

D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V

4
5
RJ45
7
8

Interface module

A2

A1

Supply

24 V Aux

9 10 11 12

1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 N/C
9 Earth
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Rx/Tx
12 Vc1

10

1/113

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Function modules

Alarm

Indication of motor load

LUF W10

LUF V2
4-20 mA output

Analogue output Module

LUFV 2

Alarms Module

LUFW 10

08

07

24 V Aux
NC

24 V Aux

4...20 mA

Basic scheme

Basic scheme

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

LUFW 10
Input interface

LED

LUFV 2
Input interface

Supply

Supply

P - Analogue/Digital
converter

08

Digital/Analogue
converter
07

Isolation

Relais bistable

Voltage/Current converter

4...20 mA

100 W < load < 500 W c 30 V max and 40 mA min

Communication modules

Communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51

Without pre-wired coil connection

AS-Interface Module
AS-i

OA3

OA1

Com

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C

AS-i

LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil

Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
or
Ready-Fault-Pole

DEL

10

1/114

OA1

Com

Output interface
OA3

ASILUF C51

A2SI
AS-i

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil

AS-Interface Module
AS-i

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Modbus communication module LULC031

Modbus communication module LULC033

Without pre-wired coil connection

Without pre-wired coil connection

24 V
c

24 V
Aux

COM

4 5 8
6

LI2

LI1

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

Basic scheme

24 V
Aux

D(B)
D(A)
0V

24 V
c

LI2

LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil

4 5 8

LI1

D(B)
D(A)
0V

24 V Aux

Modbus Module

LUL C033
LO1

Modbus Module
Com

4 5 8
6

D(B)
D(A)
0V

LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil

4 5 8
6

LUL C031
LO1

COM

Modbus Module
LI2

D(B)
D(A)
0V

LO1

Com

24 V Aux

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil

24 V
Aux

LUL C033
LI1

Modbus Module

LUL C031
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil

24 V
c

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

LO1

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C

LO1

4 5 8
6

OA1

Com

D(B)
D(A)
0V

LO1

Com

OA3

OA1

Com

24 V Aux

Modbus Module

LUL C033
OA3

Modbus Module

LUL C031

1
D(B)
D(A)
0V

Communication modules (continued)

COM

4 5 8

Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

Controller

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

x6
LUL C031

Input interface

Ready-Fault-Pole
D(B)
RS485

D(B)

5 Modbus
RJ45
8

RS485

AL1
Output interface

I/O interface
LI2

AL2

LI1

24 V Aux

Ready-Fault-Pole

LO1

Com

LO1

OA3

OA1

Com

24 V

Supply

0V

Controller
interface

Address

OA3

AL1
Output interface

D(A)

LED

Com

Address

OA1

LED

LUL C033

Control unit interface

24 V
c

24 V
Aux

Supply

D(A)
0V

4
5 Modbus
RJ45
8

AL2

COM

8
9
10

1/115

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)

Profibus DP communication module LUL C07

CANopen communication module LUL C08

Without pre-wired coil connection

Without pre-wired coil connection

LI2

LI1

LO1

LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil

LI2

LI1

Bus
LI2

LO1

LI2

LI1

LO1

Canopen Module

LUL C08

Bus

LI1

Profibus DP Module

Basic scheme

Bus

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

LUL C07
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil

LO1

LI2

LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

Canopen Module

LUL C08

Bus
LI1

LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil

Bus

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

Profibus DP Module

LUL C07

Com

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

LO1

OA3

Bus

Canopen Module

LUL C08
OA1

Profibus DP Module

LUL C07

OA3

Basic scheme
Controller

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

Controller

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

x6

x6

LUL C07
Control unit interface
LED

LUL C08
Control unit interface

Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole

Address

LED

Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole

Address

6
AL1

Supply

AL2

LI2

LI1

Com

OA1

LO1

I/O interface

AL2

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

OA3

Supply

OA3

AL1
I/O interface

DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

Without pre-wired coil connection

Basic scheme
Controller

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

LUL C09

x6
LUL C09
Control unit interface

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

Bus
OA3

DeviceNet Module

LED

Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole

Address

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

DeviceNet Module

DeviceNet Module

LUL C09

1/116

LI2

LI1

LO1

Bus
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

OA3

I/O interface

With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL

10

AL1

LI2

LI1

Bus
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil

24 V c

LUL C09
LO1

Supply

AL2

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)

Advantys STB communication module LUL C15

Parallel wiring modules

Without pre-wired coil connection

Without pre-wired coil connection

Advantys STB Module

LUL C15

Parallel bus Module

LUF C00

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

OA3

Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC

Advantys STB Module

LUL C15

OA1

In Out

Com

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

OA3

Bus

Parallel bus Module

LUF C00

LI2

LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil

LI1

LO1

Bus
In Out

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil

With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC

Advantys STB Module

LUL C15

Parallel bus Module

LUF C00

LI2

LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil

LI1

LO1

Bus
In Out

Basic scheme

Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil

Basic scheme

x6

Ready
Fault
Pole

LUL C15
Control unit interface

OUT
IN
AL1

Supply

AL2

LI2

LI1

LO1

Com

OA1

OA3

I/O interface

OA1

Ready-Fault-Pole

Address

OA3

Controller
interface
Com

LED

LUF C00

Controller

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit

RJ45
1

1 Forward running
2 Reverse running
3 Output common
4 Selector in position
5 Pole state
6 Reserved
7 Fault
8 Input common

Profibus DP power supply module LU9GC7

LU9 GC7
IN

OUT

Filter

24 V Aux.

10

1/117

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Communication modules (continued)

X10

RJ45

X6

X7

RJ45

RJ45

X7

X8
RJ45

Shielding

RJ45

(3)

X8

Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com

Com

Inputs

Outputs

Shielding

0V

0V

Shielding

D (A) +

24 V Aux

RJ45

RJ45

Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
Reverse running X5
Reverse running X6
Reverse running X7
Reverse running X8
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com

Colours of
TSXCDPppp
connection
cable wires
(4)

1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown

X10

X6
RJ45

(3)

X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45

24 V Aux

(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.
(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.

LUF P7

Fip I/O - Modbus Gateway

LUF P1
24 V Aux

X2 Fip I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

1/118

X1

4 5 8

LUF P7
24 V Aux

LUF P9

Profibus - Modbus Gateway

X2 Profibus
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

X1

D(B)
D(A)
0v

LUF P1

4 5 8

LUF P9
24 V Aux

DeviceNet - Modbus Gateway

X2 DeviceNet
1 2 3 4 5

X1

D(B)
D(A)
0V

Gateways

D(B)
D(A)
0V

X10

RJ45

D (B)

X4

X5

RJ45

RJ45

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X5
Forward running
N/C
Commun des sorties
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+ 24 V Aux

(2)

Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com

Com

X5

X3

Inputs

RJ45

RJ45

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RJ45

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X4

X6

(2)

RJ45

X4

RJ45

X3

X9

X2

Com

RJ45

RJ45

Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com

Outputs

X3

N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
RJ45 D (A) +
N/C
24 V
(1)
0V

LU9 G03

X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
+ 24 V
Fault
+ 24 V Aux

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RJ45

X9

X2
X9

LU9 G02

X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+24 V Aux

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

LU9 GC3

X1
N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
D (A) + RJ45
N/C
N/C
0V
X2

Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G03

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G02

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Modbus hub LU9GC3

Com

Wiring hub and splitter boxes

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4 5 8

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes (continued)

TeSys U starter-controllers

Data profile under AS-Interface

Control unit present in the product
Status

Standard
LUCA
D0
D1
D0
D1

Commands

Advanced
LUCB,
CC, CD

Multifunction
LUCM

Ready (available)
Poles closed (running)
Start - forward running
Start - reverse running

Main registers accessible with Modbus, CANopen, AdvantysSTB, Profibus DP and DeviceNet communication modules.
For other registers and for further information, please consult the User's Manual Communication variables on the website www.schneider-electric.com
Control unit present in the product
Standard
Advanced Multifunction
Marking
Register 0Register 99
WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version
Log
Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips
Status
Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits)
Values
Register 465Register 473 Words
Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status
Earth leakage current.
Phase imbalance and phase failure
Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved
Configuration Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset
mode
Commands
Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands
Status and
values

Register 452

Register 455

Register 461
Register 465
Register 466
Configuration Register 602

Register 682

Commands

Register 700
Register 704

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 3
Word
Word

Short-circuit fault
Overcurrent fault
Thermal overload fault
Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped ("TRIP" position)
Fault acknowledgement allowed
Reserved
Motor running
Motor current % (bit 0)
Motor current % (bit 1)
Motor current % (bit 2)
Motor current % (bit 3)
Motor current % (bit 4)
Motor current % (bit 5)
Reserved
Motor starting
Thermal overload alarm
Thermal status value
Motor load value (Im/Ir)

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Value 0
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5

Manual reset on thermal overload fault

Remote reset on thermal overload fault
Automatic reset on thermal overload fault
Fallback mode validation
Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged
Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0
Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged,
signalling existence of communication failure
Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged
Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged

Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 615

LO1 output command

OA1 output command
OA3 output command
Reserved
Fault acknowledgement
Reserved
Trip test
Reserved

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Data accessible

1/119

Basic schemes

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Non-reversing

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB

V1 4/T2

W1 6/T3

U1 2/T1

Control Unit

M
3

2-wire control via 2-position switch

3-wire control, pulsed start with

maintaining contact

4
A1

A2

A1

Start
Stop

Connection of a motor load indicator

module LUFV 2

A2

4...20 mA

13

Analogue output Module

LUFV 2
24 V Aux

14

NC

5
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10
Automatic reset

Remote reset
V1

A2

X2

X1

S2

S1

S1

A2

1/120

A1

LI2

LI1

LO1
S1

24 V 24 V
c Aux

COM

D(B)
D(A)
GND

Modbus Module

LUL C033

OA3

4 5 8
6

Without pre-wired coil connection

OA1

Com

LO1

OA3

OA1

Com

24 V Aux

D(B)
D(A)
GND

Modbus Module

LUL C031

Control via Modbus communication module LULC033

Com

Control via Modbus communication module

LULC031

Modbus

10

24230 V

A1

QF1

Without pre-wired coil connection

Z2

Z1

A1

QF1

08

07

LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset

24230 V

X2

X1

Z1
A2

Automatic or remote reset

Z2

LUF DA10

Reversed

08

V1

07

4 5 8
6

S2
Modbus

A2

A1

24 V Aux

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Non-reversing

Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51

Without pre-wired coil connection

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

Without pre-wired coil connection

With local control

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5

or ASILUF C51

AS-Interface Module

AS-Interface line
Normal

A1

A2

With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C

ASILUF C5

or ASILUF C51

AS-Interface line

A1

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

AS-Interface

OA3

OA1

AS-Interface
Com

LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil

AS-i Module

Without pre-wired coil connection

With local control

AS-Interface Module

OA3

OA1

Com

AS-Interface

Adjustment

A2

OA3

OA1

Com

AS-Interface

AS-Interface line

AS-Interface line
Adjustment

A1

Normal

A2

Without pre-wired coil connection

With multifunction control unit LUCM

ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

AS-Interface Module

A2

OA3

OA1

Com

AS-Interface

A1

AS-Interface line

9
LUCM

Multifunction Control Unit

D(B)
D(A)
GND

RJ45

24 V Aux

4 5 8
6

10

Bus Modbus
RS 485

1/121

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing

Reversing starter-controllers LUB

2-wire control
via 3-position switch

A2

B1

A1

A3

A2

B1

A1

B3

A3

Reverser Motor Controller

Start
forward running

6/T3

4/T2

Stop
forward running
and reverse
running

forward running
Stop
reverse running

Stop
forward running

Start
reverse running

Stop
reverse running

W1 6/T3

U1 2/T1

V1 4/T2

2/T1

Control Unit

3
4

LU2B

Reverser Motor Controller

B3

LU2B

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5

and ASILUFC51

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches

With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC

With multifunction control unit LUCM

AS-Interface Module

ASILUF C5 or ASILUFC51

Stop forward
running
and reverse
running

D(B)
D(A)
GND

Multifunction Control Unit

LUCM
24 V Aux

4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5

and ASILUFC51
Without pre-wired coil connection
With running direction pilot lights and limit switches

OA3

OA1

ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module

Com

A2

A1

B3

A3

B1

Reverser
Motor
Controller

LU2B

Stop
Limit switch
forward running forward running

AS-Interface line

AS-Interface

AS-Interface line

10

53

54

81

84
82

1/122

Stop
Limit switch
reverse running reverse running

Start
forward running

Start
reverse running

A2

B1

A1

A3

LU9M RC
Pre wired coil

Reverser Motor Controller

LU2B

AS-Interface
B3

Basic schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers
Reversing

Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)

Control via Modbus communication module LULC031

Control via Modbus communication module LULC033

Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

Modbus Module
24 V
c

24 V
Aux COM

D(B)
D(A)
GND

LI2

LO1
LI1

OA3

OA1

LULC 033
Com

A2

B1

A1

B3

4 5 8
6

Reverser
Motor
Controller

LU2B
A3

24 V Aux

Com

LO1

OA3

OA1

Com

B1
A2

A1

B3

A3

Modbus Module

LUL C031

D(B)
D(A)
GND

Reverser
Motor
Controller

LU2B

4 5 8
6

Modbus

Adjustment

Start
forward running
Start
reverse running

Normal

Start reverse
running

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

6/T3
6/T3

5/L3

W1

4/T2

3/L2
4/T2
V1

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

2-wire control via 3-position switch

A1

A2

B1

A1

B3

22

S3

S2

S1

A2

Reverser Block

LU6M

A2

B1

B3

A3

Stop
Start
reverse running reverse running
S7
S9

A1

Reverser Block

LU6M

21

22

S3

S2

21

S1

A1

14

13

Stop
forward running
and reverse
Stop
Start
running
forward running forward running
S5
S6
S8

A2

A3

U1

2/T1

1/L1

2/T1

Control Unit

Modbus

Normal

Adjustment

Start forward
running

10

forward running
Stop
reverse running

1/123

Presentation

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

536566

Presentation

The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed
primarily for combinations with TeSys U starter-controllers.

When combined with a TeSys U 1 controller by means of a connector 2, the

AltistartU01 3 is a power option which provides the Soft start/soft stop function.
The result is a unique, innovative motor starter.

Using the Altistart U01 starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous
motors by allowing them to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It
prevents mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of
maintenance work and production downtime.
The Altistart U01 limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines
which do not require a high starting torque.

The Altistart U01 is designed for the following simple applications:

b Conveyors
b Conveyor belts
b Pumps
b Fans
b Compressors
b Automatic doors and gates
b Small cranes
b Belt-driven machines, etc.

The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN
60947-4-2, carries UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC certifications and e marking.

4
5
6
7

7
8

b ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for
deceleration
v Internal bypass relay
v Motor power ratings ranging from 0.75 kW to 15 kW
v Motor supply voltages ranging from 200 V to 480 V, 50/60 Hz.
An external power supply is required for controlling the starter.

Description
b Altistart U01 soft start/soft stop units are equipped with:
v A potentiometer for setting the starting time 6
v A potentiometer for setting the deceleration time 8
v A potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor
load 7
v 1 green LED 4 to indicate that the unit is switched on
v 1 yellow LED 5 to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it
is connected to the starter
v A connector 9:
- 2 logic inputs for Run/Stop commands
- 1 logic input for the BOOST function
- 1 logic output to indicate the end of starting
- 1 relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has
reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

1/124

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133

Presentation (continued)

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Description of a TeSys U starter-controller

Please consult the TeSys U starters - open version catalogue.

ATSU01N2pppLT soft start unit functions

b 2-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State 1 of logic
input LI2 controls starting and state 0 controls stopping.
Altistart U01 control terminals
LI1
LI2
+ 24 V

Wiring diagram for 2-wire control

b 3-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs.
Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0).
The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals

+ 24 V

LI1

LI2

Wiring diagram for 3-wire control

b Starting time
Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the
motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load.
b Voltage boost function via logic input
Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting
overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction.
When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and
the starter applies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting.
U

5
6

100%
Un

50%
Un

Voltage ramp

Initial voltage

200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage

b End of starting
v Application function for logic output LO1
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic
output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal
speed.

8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133

1/125

Characteristics

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Environmental characteristics

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Type of starter
Conformity to standards

ATSU01N2ppLT
Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest
international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial
control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2.

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

Conducted and radiated
emissions
Harmonics
EMC immunity
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated radioelectrical interference
Immunity to electrical transients
Voltage/current impulse
Conducted and radiated
emissions
Immunity to conducted
interference caused by radioelectrical fields
Damped oscillating waves
e marking

CISPR 11 level B, IEC 60947-4-2, level B

IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-4
EN 50082-2, EN 50082-1
IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
IEC 61000-4-4 level 4
IEC 61000-4-5 level 3
IEC 61000-4-6 level 3
IEC 61000-4-11

Product certifications
Degree of protection
Degree of pollution
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Relative humidity
Ambient temperature around
the unit

Storage
Operation

Maximum operating altitude

Operating position
Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical
mounting position

C
C
m

IEC 61000-4-12 level 3

The starters carry e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
UL, CSA, C-Tick and CCC
IP 20
2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz, conforming to IEC/EN
60068-2-6
15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
595% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3
-25+70 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
-10+40 without derating, up to 50C with current derating of 2% per C above 40C
1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 2.2% per additional 100 m)
10

10

Electrical characteristics
Type of starter
Category of use
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2
Rated operating voltage
3-phase a voltage
Frequency
Output voltage
Control supply voltage
Rated operating current
Adjustable starting time
Adjustable deceleration time
Starting torque
Type of starter
ATSU
Control power supply consumption
Power dissipated
At full load at end of starting
In transient state at 5 times the
rated operating current
Type of starter

Use
I
Starting time
Starting time
Maximum number of cycles per
hour

V
Hz

A
s
s
%

W
W

ATSU01N2ppLT
Ac-53b
200 -10% to 480 +10%
50 -5% to 60 +5%
Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage
24 V c, 100 mA 10%
6...32
1...10
1...10
30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque
01N206LT
01N209LT
01N212LT
01N222LT
01N232LT
24 V c, 65 mA
24 V c, 100 mA
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
61.5
91.5
121.5
222.5
322.5
ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N222LT

ATSU01N232LT

1
100

1
50

5
20

10
10

Full voltage state or

starter at standstill

t
Operating cycle

10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

1/126

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133

5
10

10
5

Characteristics (continued)

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power
and control)
+ 24 V, COM
Logic inputs
LI1, LI2, BOOST
Stop, run and boost on start-up functions

24 V 10%
Isolated
Max. current 100 mA
Logic inputs with impedance 27kW; 24 V power supply (U max 40 V)
Max. current 8 mA
State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA
State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA
Open collector logic output:
External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V)
Max. current 200 mA
Normally open (N/O) contact
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c
Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos j = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for
250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15)
Maximum operating voltage 440 V
Starter powered up
Nominal voltage reached

Logic output LO1

End of starting signal
Relay output
R1A R1C

LED signalling

Green LED
Yellow LED

Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)

Power circuit

Flexible wire with cable end

Rigid wire

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

Tightening torque

Control circuit

Flexible wire with cable end

Rigid wire
Tightening torque

1.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5

8 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
8 AWG
10 AWG

0.52.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.52.5
0.51
0.5

14 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
17 AWG

5
6

Torque characteristics (typical curves)

T

The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the
supply voltage.
The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase
in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.

U
0,85 U
0,6 U

Tn

0,25

Screw connector

Flexible wire without cable

end

2 Tn

Connection to 4 mm screw clamps

Flexible wire without cable

end

3 Tn

0,5

Tr

0,75

N/Ns

8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133

1/127

References

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

Soft start/soft stop units for 0.75 to 15 kW motors

(can be combined with the TeSys U starter-controller)
Motor
Motor power (1)
230 V 230 V
kW
HP

DF531714

400 V
kW

460 V
HP

Starter
Nominal
current

Reference

Weight

kg

3-phase supply voltage: 200480 V 50/60 Hz

2
3
ATSU01N222LT

2
3

ATSU01N206LT

0.340

1.5
2.2
3

ATSU01N209LT

0.340

2.2
3

5.5

7.5

12

ATSU01N212LT

0.340

4
5.5

5
7.5

7.5
11

10
15

22

ATSU01N222LT

0.490

7.5

10

15

20

32

ATSU01N232LT

0.490

0.75
1.1

1
1.5

1.5

Accessorie

Description

DF510362

LUBp2BL

Power connector between

ATSU01N2ppLT and
TeSys U

Used for starter

Reference

ATSU01N2ppLT

VW3 G4104

Weight
kg
0.020

TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations

Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered.

Please consult the TeSys U Starters-open version specialist catalogue.

2
3

LUCM ppBL

Soft starter
460 V
HP
2
3

7.5
10
15
20

ATSU01N206LT
ATSU01N206LT
ATSU01N209LT
ATSU01N209LT
ATSU01N212LT
ATSU01N212LT
ATSU01N222LT
ATSU01N222LT
ATSU01N232LT

TeSys U
Power base

Control unit (2)

LUB12
LUB12
LUB12
LUB12
LUB12
LUB32
LUB32
LUB32
LUB32

LUCp05BL
LUCp12BL
LUCp12BL
LUCp12BL
LUCp12BL
LUCp18BL
LUCp18BL
LUCp32BL
LUCp32BL

Example of a starter-motor combination with:

1 non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBp2BL)
2 control unit (LUCMppBL)
3 power connector (VW3G4104)
4 Altistart U01soft start/soft stop unit (ATSU01N2ppLT)

Motor power
Voltage
230 V
400 V
kW/HP
kW
1.5
0.75/1
2.2/3
1.1/1.5

1.5/2

2.2/3
3/
5.5
4/5
7.5
11
5.5/7.5
15
7.5/10

(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL508.
(2) Depending on the configuration of the chosen TeSys U starter-controller, replace the p with
A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.

ATSU 01N2ppLT

9
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

1/128

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133

Dimensions

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and

ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)

and ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT

Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector

Side by side mounting

135

124

154

150

284

99
72,2

45

TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and

ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)

and ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT

Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector

Side by side mounting

135

99

314

170

154

72,2

45

6
9

7
8

46,6

10

44,8

28

20

VW3G4104 connector

Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

References:
page 1/128

Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133

1/129

Schemes

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors

1/L1

5/L3

Power wiring with reversing unit

5/L3

3/L2

Power wiring

1/L1

3/L2

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

QF1

QF1

TeSys U

CU

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

TesysU

TeSys U
with
reversing
unit

CU

TesysU

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

3/L2

5/L3

6/T3

A1

2/T1

5
6

6/T3

ATSU 01N2ppLT

M1
3

4/T2

2/T1

4/T2

ATSU 01N2ppLT

1/L1

A1

M1
3

Compatible components (For full references, Please consult our catalogue and Please consult our catalogue or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter
solutions - Control and protection components)
Code
Description
A1
Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1
TeSys U controller-starter
CU
TeSys U control unit

7
8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

1/130

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)
Automatic 2-wire control

c 24 V

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

R1C

Stop
Run

S1

ATSU 01N2ppLT
R1A

18

LUA1 C20
LO1

BOOST

LI2

LI1

COM

R1C

R1A

18

+ 24 V

17

ATSU 01N2ppLT

LUA1 C20

A1

COM

A1

17

c 24 V

A1

Stop
Run

S1

S2
A1

A2

QF1

With and without deceleration

LO1

Without deceleration

QF1
A2

Functional diagrams

Power supply
voltage
Green LED

Power supply
voltage
Green LED

Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S2
Pushbutton S1

Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S1
Logic output LO1

Yellow LED

U1

10 s

U1

Logic output LO1

Yellow LED

10 s

Motor voltage

Motor voltage

t1

t1

t2

Automatic 3-wire control

With deceleration

c 24 V

A1

14

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

R1C

QF1
14

QF1

A2

A1

QF1

S1

QF1
A2

R1A

18

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

S2

13

ATSU 01N2ppLT

LUA1 C20

13

S2

LI1

R1C

R1A

18

S1

COM

ATSU 01N2ppLT

LUA1 C20

A1

COM

A1
17

17

c 24 V

LO1

Without deceleration

Functional diagrams
Power supply
voltage
Green LED

Power supply
voltage

Pushbutton S1

Green LED

500 ms

Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S2
Logic input LI1
Pushbutton S1

Pushbutton S2
Logic input LI2

Logic output LO1

Logic output LO1

U1

Yellow LED

Yellow LED

10 s

Motor voltage

10 s

Motor voltage

t1

t1

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

S1, S2: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter
t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
U1: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

10
References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

1/131

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)
Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit

With deceleration

18

QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons
S3: minimum depression time 500 ms

QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons

c 24 V

c 24 V

Boost on starting and end of starting signal

A1

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

COM

R1C

R1A

ATSU 01N2ppLT

To PLC

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

1/132

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

References:
page 1/128

Dimensions:
page 1/129

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

COM

R1C

LUA1 C20

18

B1

17

LUA1 C20

A1

Stop
S3

Stop
S3
17

ATSU 01N2ppLT

Run
direction 1
S1

Run
direction 2
S2

S2

B3

LI2
+ 24 V
BOOST
LO1

LI1

COM

R1C

R1A

Run
direction 1
S1

A1

LU2B p2BL

ATSU 01N2ppLT
A2

B1

A1

A3

Run
direction 2

B3

LU2B p2BL

QF1

A1

R1A

QF1

A2

Without deceleration

A3

Schemes (continued)

Soft starters
for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)

Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
A1

c 24 V 24 V Aux.

D(B)
D(A)
Gnd

LO1
COM

OA3

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

4 5 8

LI1

COM

R1A

c 24 V 24 V Aux.

D(B)
D(A)
Gnd

LO1
COM

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil

Modbus Module

LUL C031

ATSU 01N2ppLT

4 5 8

13

LI1

COM

R1C

Modbus Module

LUL C031

ATSU 01N2ppLT

A1

A1

R1C

A1

R1A

With reversing unit

COM
OA1

Without reversing unit

c 24 V

14

QF1

c 24 V

Value
0

Automatic control without deceleration

Run
700
0
Stop
704
0
Automatic control with deceleration
Run
700
0
Soft stop
700
0

1
0
1
0

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

3
A2

B1

A1

B3

A3

LU2B p2BL

Function
Register
Bit
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU

704
0

Function
Register
Bit
Value
Powering up TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
1
Reverse
704
1
1
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
0
Reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control without deceleration
Run
700
0
1
Stop forward
704
0
0
Stop reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse)
Run
700
0
1
Soft stop
700
0
0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit

5
6

Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration

Without reversing unit

With reversing unit

A1

A1

LO1

BOOST

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

R1C

COM

R1A
COM
OA1

A2

B1

A1

c 24 V AS-Interface

c 24 V

c 24 V

Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run
D0
1
Stop
D0
0

A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125

B3

A3

c 24 V AS-Interface
LU9B N11C
+
Pre-wired coil +

ASI LUFC5

LU2B p2BL
OA3

BOOST

LO1

QF1

14

ASI LUFC5

ATSU 01N2ppLT

13

+ 24 V

LI2

LI1

COM

R1C

R1A

ATSU 01N2ppLT

Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127

Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run forward
D0
1
Stop
D0
0
Run reverse
D1
1
Stop
D1
0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
References:
page 1/128

10

Dimensions:
page 1/129

1/133

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation,
description,
references

Magnetic control unit for the protection of

variable speed controllers and soft start units

Presentation

S1 (mm2 / AWG)

When installed upstream of a variable speed controller or soft start unit,

control unit LUCLpp, used in conjunction with an LUB12 or LUB32 power base,
provides:
v isolation,
v short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
(variable speed controller-based or soft start unit-based motor starters).

1
2
S2 (mm2 / AWG)

LUCLpp

LUB pp

Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or
LUB32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
Installation regulations
When the length of the cable between the TeSysU starter and the variable speed
controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed
controller and the TeSysU starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable
upstream of TeSysU (S1).

3
Altivar or Altistart

4
568027

Description

1
2

1
2
3
4

Extraction and locking handle

Sealing of locking handle
Dial for magnetic adjustment of motor In
Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover

References
Description

Line current of the

variable speed controller
or soft start unit

Reference

(1)

A
Magnetic control unit

kg

0.150.6

LUCLX6pp

0.351.4

LUCL1Xpp

0.135

1.255

LUCL05pp

0.135

312

LUCL12pp

0.135

LUCL18pp

0.135

832

LUCL32pp

0.135

24

4872

110240

BL (2), (3)

c or a

ES (4)

FU (5)

(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.

(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(4) c: 4872 V, a: 48 V.
(5) c: 110220 V, a: 110240 V.

9
10

1/134

0.135

4.518
(1) Standard control circuit voltage:
Volts

Weight

TeSys motor starters - open version

Selection

Magnetic control unit for the protection of

variable speed controllers and soft start stop units

Control unit and associated power base selection

Functions provided

Maximum motor
power ratings 50/60 Hz

b Short-circuit protection
b Manual reset

Power base
reference

Control unit
reference

Line current

< 400/415 V

500 V

690 V

KW

KW

KW

0.09

LUB12 or LUB32

LUCLX6pp

0.150.6

0.25

LUB 12 or LUB32

LUCL1Xpp

0.351.4

1.5

2.2

LUB12 or LUB32

LUCL05pp

1.255

5.5

5.5

LUB12 or LUB32

LUCL12pp

312

7.5

15

LUB32

LUCL18pp

4.518

15

15

18.5

LUB32

LUCL32pp

832

Operating characteristics
Control units

Standard

Advanced

LUCA

LUCB

Multifunction
LUCC

LUCD

LUCL

LUCM

Thermal overload protection

Over current protection

14.2 x the setting current

Short-circuit protection

14.2 x the max. current

3 to 17 x the setting
current

Protection against phase loss

Protection against phase imbalance

Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)

Tripping class

10

10

20

Motor type

3-phase

Single-phase

3-phase

530
Single-phase and 3-phase

Thermal overload test function

Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method

Manual

Parameters can be set

Automatic or remote

With function module, or parameters can

be set via the bus with a communication
module (see page 1/68).

Integrated function

Compatibility of
control unit LUCLpp with

References
Yes

LUB12/LUB32 Starter-controller (magnetic protection)

The starter

No

LUS12/LUS32 Starter without either magnetic or thermal overload protection)

The controller

No

LUT M

Controller (without thermal overload protection)

Add-on contact blocks

with fault signalling
and auxiliary contacts

Yes

LUA1C11

Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (1 N/O + 1 N/C)

LUA1C20

Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (2 N/O)

LUF N20

Auxiliary contacts (2 N/O)

LUF N11

Auxiliary contacts (1 N/O + 1 N/C)

LUF N02

Auxiliary contacts (2 N/C)

Function modules

Functions

The starter-controller

Yes

No

Parameters can be set

via the bus with a
communication module
(see page 1/68).

Function provided with accessory

Compatibility

Communication
modules

Parameters can be set

7
8

ASILUFC5 and AS-Interface communication modules

ASILUFC51
LUF C00

Parallel wiring module

LUL C033

Modbus communication module (1 output/2 inputs)

LUL C031

Modbus communication module (1 output)

LULC15

Advantys STB communication module (1 output/2 inputs)

LULC08

CANopen communication module (1 output/2 inputs)

LUL C09

DeviceNet communication module (1 output/2 inputs)

LUL C07

Profibus DP communication module (1 output/2 inputs)

LUF W10

Alarm function module

LUF DH11

Thermal overload signalling module with manual reset

LUF DA01

Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/C)

LUF DA10

Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/O)

LUF V2

Motor load indication module

9
10

1/135

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL

Protection

Short-circuit protection

2
3
4

Motor type

3-phase

Conforming to standard

When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control
unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.

Tripping threshold

14.2 x In (max. setting current)

Tripping tolerance

20 %

Environment

Product certifications

CE

Conforming to standards

When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to
standard 60947-2.

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,

overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3

690

Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2

kV

Safety separation of circuits

SELV

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

appendix N

Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40

Degree of protection
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
direct finger contact)
Other faces
Protective treatment

IP 40
IP 20
IP 20

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

Conforming to/EN 60068-2-30

TH
Cycles 12

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h

Ambient air temperature
around the device

- 40+ 85

Operation

Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70.

(At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of
9mm between products).

Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60.

(At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.)
Maximum operating altitude

6
7

Operating positions

In relation to normal vertical

mounting plane

Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12

V2
960 (parts supporting live components)

650
Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27
(1)

Power poles open: 10 gn

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6

(1)

Power poles open: 2 gn

Resistance to
electrostatic discharge

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2

Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance

Power poles closed: 15 gn

Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
kV

In open air: 8 - Level 3

kV

On contact: 8 - Level 4

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3

V/m

10 - Level 3

Immunity to
fast transient currents

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4

kV

All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4

kV

Serial link: 2 - Level 3

Immunity to dissipated
shock waves

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2

Uc a 24240 V,
Uc c 48220 V

kV

Uc = 24 V c

10

2000

Environmental restrictions

48

Storage

Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6

Common mode

Serial mode

Not applicable
V

10

(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.

1/136

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

TeSys U starter-controllers
Power bases and LUCL magnetic control unit

Power base and control unit type

LUB12 + LUCL

LUB32 + LUCL

2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm
1.92.5

2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16

Power circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

N.m

1.92.5

Control circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2

1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors

Screwdriver
Tightening torque

N.m

Control circuit characteristics

Rated control
circuit voltage
Voltage limits
Operation

Drop-out

Typical consumption
I max while closing

I rms sealed

Heat dissipation
Operating time
Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips
Mechanical durability
Maximum operating rate

a 50/60 Hz
c
c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110240 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
Closing
Opening

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms

IEC/EN 61000-4-11
In millions of operating cycles
In operating cycles per hour

Main pole characteristics

Number of poles
Isolation
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Rated thermal current
Rated operational current
(Ue y 440 V)

Possible
Padlocking
A
Conforming
to IEC/ EN
60947-2

Category AC-41
Category AC-43

Rated operational voltage

Frequency limits
Power dissipated
in the power circuits

Of the operating current

Operational current
Power dissipated
in all three poles
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit
Total breaking time
Thermal limit

With Isc max on 440 V

V
Hz
A
W

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm
0.81.2

0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2

24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
130
140
280
280
60
70
35
35
2
24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50
35
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
3600

24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
220
220
280
280
80
90
45
25
3
24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50
35
3

3
Yes
1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank
12
y 70 C: 12 A
y 70 C: 12 A

3
Yes
1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank
32
y 70 C: 32 A
y 70 C: 32 A

690 (3)
4060
3
6
0.1 0.3

690 (3)
4060
9
0.6

12
1.1

18
2.4

3
4
5
6
7

15
3600

25
4.6

8
9

32
7.5

V
230
440
500
600
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kA2s
90
(1) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.

10
120

1/137

Combinations

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Coordination

The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is
to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the
components after testing: type 1 and type 2
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.

The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination

.

Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection

526113

526112

TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination

Power
400 V (kW)

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Soft start unit reference

Class 10

Class 20

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18

ATS48D17

7.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATS48D17

ATS48D22

11

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATS48D22

ATS48D32

15

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATS48D32

ATS48D38

Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection
526114

526112

TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination

Power
400 V (kW)
0.75

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Variable speed controller reference

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV21H075N4
ATV21HU15N4

6
7

2.2

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21HU22N4

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21HU30N4

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21HU40N4

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18

ATV21HU55N4

7.5

LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18

ATV21HU75N4

11

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV21HD11N4

15

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV21HD15N4

526115

526112

TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination

9
10

1/138

Power
400 V (kW)

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Variable speed controller reference

0.75

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV21W075N4/N4C

1.5

LUB12 + LUCL12 or LUCL05

ATV21WU15N4/N4C

2.2

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21WU22N4/N4C

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21WU30N4/N4C

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV21WU40N4/N4C

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18

ATV21WU55N4/N4C

7.5

LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18

ATV21WU75N4/N4C

11

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV21WD11N4/N4C

15

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV21WD15N4/N4C

526116

526112

Combinations

526117

526112

526118

526112

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys U starter-controllers

Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection (continued)
TeSys U / Altistart 31: type 1 coordination
Power
400 V (kW)

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Variable speed controller reference

0.37

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV31H037N4

0.55

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV31H055N4

0.75

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV31H075N4

1.1

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV31HU11N4

1.5

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV31HU15N4

2.2

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV31HU22N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV31HU30N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV31HU40N4

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV31HU55N4

7.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV31HU75N4

2
3
4

TeSys U / Altistart 61: type 1 coordination

Power
400V (kW)

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Variable speed controller reference

0.75

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV61H075N4

1.5

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV61HU15N4

2.2

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV61HU22N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV61HU30N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV61HU40N4

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV61HU55N4

7.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV61HU75N4

5
6

TeSys U / Altistart 71: type 1 coordination

Power
400V (kW)

TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)

Variable speed controller reference

0.75

LUB12 + LUCL05

ATV71H075N4

1.5

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV71HU15N4

2.2

LUB12 + LUCL12

ATV71HU22N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV71HU30N4

LUB32 + LUCL18

ATV71HU40N4

5.5

LUB32 + LUCL32

ATV71HU55N4

7
8
9
10

1/139

TeSys motor starters - open version

General

integral 63: a high performance concept

for reliability of operation
526454

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

integral 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching

assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that
of the best separate specialist devices.
They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC60947-1,
IEC60947-2, IEC60947-3, IEC60947-4-1 and IEC60947-6-2 (welding of power
poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA, and the
European directives.

The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of

operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection,
communication, remote control, fault identification, isolation, padlocking.

3
Functions performed by integral 63
units

4
5

The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions:

b power switching,
b isolation,
b overload protection,
b short-circuit protection.
These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be
combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being:
v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay,
v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.

Power switching

526324

Contactor (for automatic and remote control)

b Operational power for use in category AC-43:
v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz,
v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz.

b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at

rated power: 1.2 million.
b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 5 million.

7
526325

Reversing pairs
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted:
b mechanically interlocked.

Can be fitted with the same protection modules as integral 63 contactor breaker.

9
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

1/140

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177

General (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Functions performed by integral 63

units (continued)

Isolation

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Isolation conforming to IEC 60947

integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming
to standards IEC 60947.
In addition, integral 63 LD4 contactor breakers and LD5 reversing contactor
breakers incorporate specific poles for control testing and padlocking.

Overload protection

534529

Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and

overcurrent)
A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit:
b the rated operational current (rating and settings),
b the application:
v motors,
v frequent starting motors,
v distribution circuits.

1
2
3

Short-circuit protection

526327

High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker

For short-circuit protection.

High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping.

Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current
limiter (LA9 LB920).
The current limiter is fitted upstream of the integral unit.
Several integral units may be fitted downstream of the current limiter
(Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).

526328

Signalling and attachments

5
6

These devices provide comprehensive local signalling:

b pole position indicator,
b different signalling for overload and short-circuit.
They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous
add-on blocks:
b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks,
b remote electrical reset device,
b undervoltage and shunt trips,
b control circuit switching,
b etc.

7
8

Simple fixing and cabling methods

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers fit onto 75 mm 7

rails using a separate mounting plate.
integral units can also be mounted on:
b panels,
b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P,
b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts,
b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly,
combining safety and simplicity of use),
b AK5 panel busbar systems.

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/141

9
10

TeSys motor starters - open version

Terminology

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Terminology

Altitude

The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and
hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the
cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor
breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time).

No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.

Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage
and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:

Altitude
Rated operational voltage
Rated operational current

3500 m
0.90
0.92

4000 m
0.80
0.90

4500 m
0.70
0.88

5000 m
0.60
0.86

Ambient air temperature

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The
operating characteristics are given:
b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C.
b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C.

Rated operational current (Ie)

This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and
duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device.

Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1)

The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8
hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.
Short time rating

The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a
period of no load, without dangerous overheating.

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current,
determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the
corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational
voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.

The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics
are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form
(less than 5% total harmonic distortion).

This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and
referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As
the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each
of them are not necessarily the same.

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity,
which the device is able to withstand without failure under specified test conditions,
and to which isolation clearance values are referred.
The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the
values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the
device is fitted.

Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947.
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.

10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

1/142

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

Terminology (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Terminology (continued)

Rated operational power (expressed in kW)

The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor
breaker, at the stated operational voltage.

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1)

This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with
the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard.
Rated making capacity (1)
This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with
the making conditions specified in the IEC standard.

On-load factor (m)

This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T):
t
m = --T
T

Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current.

Pole impedance

The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components
between the input terminal and the output terminal.

The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component

X=Lw). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally
given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.

Electrical durability

This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts
can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation
category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.

Mechanical durability

This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow
through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical
failure.

Coordination

The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a

short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor
and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in
plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection
of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or
the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact
welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the
equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any
maintenance.

7
8
9

Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947.
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/143

10

Terminology (continued)

Definition

1
Reminder of standards IEC 60947

Standards for contactor breakers

3
4

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor
breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on:
b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting
or running, reversing, plugging.
b IEC 60947-1: general rules,
b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers,
b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices,
b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters,
b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units,
b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,

IEC 60947-4-1

Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It

concerns:
b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose
rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for
d.c. applications,
b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection
devices,
b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices
and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection
devices,
b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device.

IEC 60947-6-2

Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment.

It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with
main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is
less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications.
Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the
protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other
functions, such as isolation.
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
currents corresponding to the specified utilisation categories, and to the
number of operating cycles specified in the standard, without failing. This
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests.
Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifies that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage
or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter.
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications

5
6

Category AC-1

This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2

This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.

Category AC-3

This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.

Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).

10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

1/144

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177

Terminology (continued)

Standards for contactor breakers

(continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)

Category AC-4

This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.

Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41

This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.

1
2

Application examples: heating, distribution.

Category AC-42

This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal
to the mains supply voltage.

Category AC-43

This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running;
inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of
operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
Category AC-44

This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or
slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.

Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.

Tripping classes of protection modules

The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal
protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting
times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.

Standards for auxiliary contacts

Class
Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1)

IEC 60947-5

10 A
210 s

10
410 s

20
620 s

30
930 s

Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control
circuits.
It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (2)

4
5
6
7
8

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.

Utilisation categories for d.c. applications

Category DC-13 (3)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time
taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the
power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11.

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

10

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/145

Equipment selection
for starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for
determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment.
In particular:
b permissible currents for the conductors,
b maximum voltage drops,
b short-circuit protection,
b protection against indirect contact.

The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit.

The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all
European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection
against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to
the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.

Cable protection against overload

To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the
current drawn IB and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to
be protected.
IB < Irth y Iz

Short-circuit protection

Breaking capacity rule

Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than
the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed.
BC u Isc max

Breaking time rule

2 conditions must be fulfilled:
b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or
equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device,
b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that:

I2sc max tm y I2oto

I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit,

tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit
protection device.

These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used.
Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand
Isc max = 50 kA.

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

TN multiple earthed neutral scheme

PEN

B'

C'

TNC scheme

b
b
b
b
b
v
v

Neutral is connected to earth.

The earths are connected to neutral.
Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit.
As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the first fault.
The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be:
combined (TNC scheme),
separate (TNS scheme).

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/146

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

Equipment selection
for starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued)

b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires
that the following 2 conditions be fulfilled simultaneously:
v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required
for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 Irth max.
c = coefficient taking into account the upstream part of the
fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless
otherwise indicated.
q = coefficient dependent on the earth connection scheme
and equal to 1 in the TN scheme.
Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts.
Zb = fault loop impedance in mW/m such that:
Zb R (fault loop resistance).
L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the
circuit.
S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the
protective conductors.
r = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225.
= ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the
maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal
tripping device.

Uo
Id = c.q.___
Zb

L
Lc
R = r __ = 2 r ___
S
S

v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined
by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping
zone.
This condition is generally fulfilled for power supplies of 230/415 V.
(In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V,
a tm y 110ms would be required).
The first condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide
protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme.
For the TN scheme:
c.q.Uo.Sph
L y __________
2r.1. Irth
0.8 x Uo x Sph
i.e. L max = _______________________
2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max

2.5

10

16

25

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Irth max.
A
10
16
10
16
25
32
16
25
32
40
25
32
40
50
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63

=3
m
180
112
298
186
118
92
296
190
148
118
284
222
178
142
370
296
236
188
590
472
378
300
922
738
590
468

=6
m
90
56
149
93
59
46
148
95
74
59
142
111
89
71
185
148
118
94
295
236
189
150
461
369
295
234

= 12
m
45
28
75
47
32
23
74
48
37
30
71
56
45
36
93
74
59
47
148
118
95
75
281
185
148
117

2
3
4
5
6

Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

C.s.a.
mm2
1.5

= 15
m
36
22
60
37

60

7
8
9
10

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/147

Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

Selection for a temperature q y 40 C

Rated operational voltage

220/240

400/415

440

480/525

600/690

Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)

integral 63

63

63

63

63

63

33

37

55

Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 63

kW

15

33

Electrical durability
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V

b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,

b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.

Millions of operating cycles

20

10
8
6
5
4

(63 A)

2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04

0,02
0,01

1
1,5

2 3 45 79
20
6 8 10

40 60 80 150 200
63 100160 300
Current broken in A

1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current

2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of
short-circuit current during operation)

7
Current
breaking
limit

AC-3
AC-43

8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/148

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

AC-2
AC-42

Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43

Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 63

With cable c.s.a.

16 mm2

q y 40 C
63

q y 55 C
55

q y 70 C
50

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41

Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour

integral 63

Operating cycles/h

On-load
factor 85 %
Operation
at Ie max
1200

Operation
at 0.5 Ie
2400

On-load
factor 25 %
Operation
at Ie max
1800

Electrical durability Ue y 415 V

Millions of operating cycles

20

10
8
6
5
4

(63 A)

2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

20

40

63 80 100
60
Current broken in A

Note: for use in category AC-44, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

7
8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/149

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Type

1
2
3
4
5
6

A
V

3
63
690
1.2 million operating cycles
5 million operating cycles
3600 operating cycles/hour
600 operating cycles/hour

Environment
Conforming to standards

Product certifications
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device

Vibration resistance
Permissible acceleration

C
C
C
C

Operation
Storage
c Operation
(1) Storage
5100 Hz

Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration

Impulse duration: 11 ms

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529

Conforming to VDE 0106

Flame resistance
Maximum operating altitude
Operating positions
(without derating)

Without derating
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4

UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL
NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS
TH
- 20+ 60
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 50
- 25+ 70
Energised state: 3 gn
De-energised state: 3 gn
Energised state: 8 gn
De-energised state: 8 gn
IP 20B
Protection against direct finger contact
Conforming to IEC60295-2-1, NFC20-455 and decree of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
3000
From main axis
(left-right tilt)

Control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)

integral 63

Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
In AC-3 at 400 V
Electrical durability
Mechanical durability at Uc
a
Maximum operating rate
at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter

Voltage limits
at q y 55 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Heat dissipation
Operating time (2)
at 20 C and at Uc

a 50Hz
a 60Hz
c with converter
Operation
Drop-out
a
Inrush
Sealed
c (1)
Inrush
Sealed
a 50/60 Hz
c with
converter

C
O
C
O

V
V
V

VA
VA
W
W
W
ms
ms
ms
ms

24660
24600
24, 48, 110
0.851.1 Uc
0.250.7 Uc
375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
300 for 50 ms
8
8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz)
1235
720
2540
1525

(1) With converter.

(2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles.
The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the
moment the main poles separate.

9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/150

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/1711/1741/174

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Type

Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Heat dissipation in the power
circuits of the contactor breaker
and its protection module
Rated making capacity
I rms
I peak
Rated breaking capacity
conforming to
IEC 60947-2

conforming to IEC
60947-6-2 ensuring
reliability of operation
Total breaking time
Electrical durability in AC-3
at Ie max and at 415V
after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc
Thermal limit

integral 63
q y 40 C

A
Hz

63
4060

Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V

Operational current
A
Power per pole, hot state
W

690
25
4.4

Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA

12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips)

105

Operational voltage
Value of cos j
Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1)
Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1)
Icu = Ics

Prospective rms
short-circuit current at
terminals of a new device
Millions of operating cycles
With Isc max.
at 415 V, 50 Hz

Tightening torque

40
5.8

50
7

63
9

220/240
0.25
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
kA rms 50

380/415
0.25
50
50
50

440
0.25
50
50
50

480/525
0.25
35
35
30

600/690
0.5
10
10
10

ms
kA

4
3

10

25

35

50

1
300 x 103

0.9

0.6

0.5

0.2

A 2s

mm2

Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 50 or 2 x 35

Minimum c.s.a.
1x6

mm2

2 x 25

1x6

mm2
N.m

1 x 50
6

1x6

Cabling
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable

32
5

2
3
4
5

Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type
Protection

Thermal protection

Magnetic protection
conforming to
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2

Conforming to standards
Number of poles
Number of protected poles
Rated operational voltage
Max. continuous current
Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.)
Temperature compensation
Protection against
phase imbalance
Tripping class
Instantaneous trip current
setting range

V
A
A
C

LB1LD03P
Standard motors
NFC63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
- 20+ 60
With

LB1LD03M
Standard motors
NFC63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
With

LB6LD03M
Frequent starting
NFC63-650
3
3
690
1363

20+ 60
Without

20
20

Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual 612 Irth max
setting
910 Irth maxi)
20 %
20 %
20 %

Tripping tolerance

Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility

Conforming to standards
Rated operational voltage
Mechanical durability
Padlocking

V
Operating cycles

LB1LD03L
Distribution circuits
NFC63-120
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
Without

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Operating cycles

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

20 %

IEC 60947
690
10000
By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, 8mm shank

IEC 60947, NFC63-130, VDE0660, VDE0113

V
690
10000
1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8mm max and 5mm min. When flush mounting,
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open),
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

36 Irth max

Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Conforming to standards
Rated operational voltage
Mechanical durability
Padlocking

10

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/151

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1Lpp

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Switching capacity
Rated
a category
operational
AC-15 (1)
power

Making capacity
Rated
c category
operational
DC-13 (2)
power
Making capacity
Cabling

3
4

A
V

6
690

mVA
V
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
mm2

600
48
110/127
300
500
160
300
1500
3500
24
48
120
90
70
50
800
700
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1

A
V
V

6
690
125

mm2

Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5

A
V

3
250

V
VA
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
W
mm2

24
48
100
100
50
50
75
75
75
75
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1

220/240
600
330
6000
110
75
38
400

380/415
520
300
7500
220
68
33
260

110/127
600
90
875
160
110/125
50
6
50
6

220
750
125
500
200
200
50
7.5
50
7.5

440
500
280
7000
440
61
28
220

Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1LC03p

Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947
and NFC63-130
Cabling

a.c. supply
d.c. supply

Signalling contacts LA1LC001

Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Operational power
for 200 000 operating cycles

5
c

Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA
Voltage
1 million operating cycles
1.5 million operating cycles
a category AC-15
Voltage
1 million operating cycles
1.5 million operating cycles
c category DC-13

Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)

Cabling

(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
(4) Inductive load: cos j 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.

7
8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/152

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Interface modules and converters

Type
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage
Operation
Isolation
Cabling
Min.
Max.
Operating limits
Protection

C
C
kV
mm2
mm2

Module or converter type

Interface modules

Converters

- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.85...10.1 Uc
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage

- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
Common negative terminal
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage

LA1LC
580BD

LA1LC
080BD

580ED

Control circuit characteristics

Schemes

LA1LCp580pD

E2
Indication of input state
Input signals
Voltage
(logic side)
Current

State 1
guaranteed
Supply voltage

For U
For I
For U

A1

+ E1
E2

A2

A2

V
mA
V

< 2.4
<2
> 20.4

a
a
a
a
a
a
c
24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2)
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)

< 4.8
<2
> 40.8

c 48
(E1-E2)
25

< 2.4
<2
> 20.4

< 4.8
<2
>4

080FD

c 524
(E1-E2)
1524V
8.55V
< 2.5
<2
>4

E1

A1

E3

A2

E2

mA

c 524
(E1-E2)
1524V
8.55V
< 2.5
<2
>4

c 24
(E1-E2)
50

(0V)

LA1Lp080FD

E1

By LED
c 24
c 48
(E1-E2) (E1-E2)
30
20

080ED

LA1Lp080BD
LA1Lp080ED

LA1Lp180BD
A1

+ E1

State 0
guaranteed

180BD

A1

(0V)

A2

E2

c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10

c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10

<7
<5
> 14

< 14
< 2.5
> 28

<7
<5
> 14

<14
< 2.5
> 28

c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)

c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)

c
24 (2)
(E1-E2)

c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)

c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)

250

4
30
15

250

4
30
15

300

8
35
20

300

8
35
20

300

8
35
20

Operating characteristics
Electrical durability
in millions of operating cycles
Average
Inrush 50Hz
consumption
60Hz
c

VA
VA
W
Sealed 50/60Hz VA
c
W
Operating time Pull-in
ms
at 20 C
Drop-out
ms
and at Uc

160
185

12

1530
2235

1
160
185

12

1530
2235

160
185

12

1035
830

375
450

25

2040
2545

375
450

25

2040
2545

375
450

25

1045
830

250

4
30
15

6
7

(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.

(2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 300 VA and the maximum ripple must be y14%.

8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/153

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module

Environment

1
2
3
4

Conforming to standards
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device

Storage
Operation
Permissible for
operation at Uc

C
C
C

Protection against
direct finger contact

IEC 60337-1
TH
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 55
- 25+ 70
Conforming to VDE0106

Tripping devices

Type
Pull-in voltage
Drop-out voltage
Average consumption

Uc
Uc
Inrush
Sealed

Minimum pulse time

VA
VA
ms

LA1LC070p, LC072p
0.81.1
0.350.7
8
4

VA
s
s

LA1LC052p
9
9
0.5

LA1LC071p
0.71.1

8
4
10

Reset devices
Type
Consumption
Duration of a reset cycle
Minimum pulse duration

Suppressor module LA9D09982

Type of protection
Connection scheme

RC (resistor-capacitor)

Operational voltage

y 250

5
6
7
8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/154

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

TeSys motor starters - open version

Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational

voltage and protection module fitted.

Breaking capacity
Protection module
Reference
Irth
min
A
LBpLD03p16
10

Operational voltage
220/240V 400/415V 440V

500V

600/690V

max
A
13

kA

kA

kA

kA

u130

kA
10

LBpLD03p21

13

18

u130

u130

u130

u130

10

LBpLD03p22

18

25

u130

u130

50

35

10

LBpLD03p53

23

32

u130

50

50

35

10

LBpLD03p55

28

40

u130

50

50

30

10

LBpLD03p57

35

50

u130

50

50

30

10

LBpLD03p61

45

63

u130

50

50

30

10

u130

u130

u130

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/155

Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Motor protection (normal starting)

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)

Time

300
min
10 13 18

100
min

23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
P57
P61

10
min
40 s
1 min

10 s

1s

195

375
270

600

945

480 750

0,1 s

0,01 s

10

15 20

30 40 54 60

100

200

400

600

1000
2000
Current in A

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)

Time

300
min
10 13 18

Thermal zone

100
min

23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
M57
M61

10
min

1 min

10 s

Magnetic zone

1s

78

156

600

300

150 216

0,1 s

480

240

108 190

380

760

9
0,01 s

10

20

40

60

100

200

400

600

1000
2000
Current in A

(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average
operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the
coefficient 0.5.

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/156

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M

Time

300
min
100
min

Thermal zone

10
min

1 min

10 s

Magnetic zone

1s
78

156

480

240

108 190
150 216

600

300

760

380

0,1 s

0,01 s

10

20

40

60 80 100 110

200

400

600

1000

2000

Current in A

Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L

Time

300
min

25 32 40 50
18 23 28 35 45 63 irth

100
min

L22
L53
L55
L57

10
min

L61

1 min

10 s

1s

75

0,1 s

95

150
190
120
240
150
300
190
380

9
0,01 s
6

10

20

40

60

100

200

400

600

1000
2000
Current in A

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/157

Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

3-phase 400/415V, 50Hz

Current limitation on short-circuit

Maximum peak current in kA

100
80
60

40
=

20
=

10
8
6
4
3

os

0,2

0,3

1 (1)

0,5

0,7

2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2
0,1

0,1

0,2

0,4 0,3

4 6 8 10 15 20
50
100 200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A

Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
short-circuit protection zone

1000
800

600
400

200

(1)

100
80
60
40

20

10

8 10

15 20

50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A

(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/158

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and
reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/500V, 50Hz

Current limitation on short-circuit

Maximum peak current in kA

100
80
60

40
=

20
=

10
8
6
os

4
3

0,2

0,3

0,5

1 (1)

0,7

2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2
0,1

0,1

0,2

0,4 0,3

6 8 10 15 20

35 50

100

200

Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A

Current limitation on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
short-circuit protection zone

1000
800

600
400

(1)

200

100
80
60
40

20

10

8
1

8 10

15 20

35 50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA

1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A

(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/159

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of

3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43
220V 400V
240V 415V 440V 500V 660V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob
15
30
33
37
55
33

2
LD1LD030p

Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415V
A

kA

63

50

kg
LD1LD030p

3.700

With control test function and padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43
220V 400V
240V 415V 440V 500V 660V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113)
15
30
33
37
55
33

Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415V
A

kA

63

50

Weight

kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15
30
33
37
55
63
50
33

Weight

LD4LD130p

3.800

LD4LD030p

3.800

3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

With control test function and padlocking facility
Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43
220V 400V
240V 415V 440V 500V 660V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113)
15
30
33
37
55
33

5
6

Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415V
A

kA

63

50

kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15
30
33
37
55
63
50
33

7
LD5LC030p

Weight

LD5LD130p

7.600

LD5LD030p

7.600

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
480
500
400
50Hz B

D
E
F

M
M
U
Q
N
N

600

660

60Hz

BC

CC

CE

FC

LC

MC

MC

UX

c (4)

BD

ED

FD

(3) Variant: UL508 type E approved version (SPCD) at 347/600V; to order, add suffix H5 to the reference.
Example: LD1LD030MH5.
(4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).

9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/160

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

LB1LD03Mpp

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-43
220V 400V
480V
240V 415V 440V 525V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5

Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)

Reference

Weight

600V
690V
kW
10

A
1013

LB1LD03P16

kg
0.780

11

15

1318

LB1LD03P21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

1825

LB1LD03P22

0.780

7.5

15

15

18.5

22

2332

LB1LD03P53

0.780

22

22

25

33

2840

LB1LD03P55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

3550

LB1LD03P57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

4563

LB1LD03P61

0.780

1
2
3

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-43
220V 400V
480V
240V 415V 440V 525V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5

Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)

Reference

Weight

600V
690V
kW
10

A
1013

A
78156

LB1LD03M16

kg
0.780

11

15

1318

108216

LB1LD03M21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

1825

150300

LB1LD03M22

0.780

7.5

22

22

25

33

2332

190380

LB1LD03M53

0.780

22

22

25

33

2840

240480

LB1LD03M55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

3550

300600

LB1LD03M57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

4563

380760

LB1LD03M61

0.780

4
5
6

Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

LB6LD03Mpp

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-43
220V 400V
480V
240V 415V 440V 525V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5

Magnetic protection

Reference

Weight

600V
690V
kW
10

A
78156

LB6LD03M16

kg
0.780

11

15

108216

LB6LD03M21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

150300

LB6LD03M22

0.780

7.5

22

22

25

33

190380

LB6LD03M53

0.780

22

22

25

33

240480

LB6LD03M55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

300600

LB6LD03M57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

380760

LB6LD03M61

0.780

7
8
9

(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.

10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/161

Selection

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers integral 63

for control and protection of resistive circuits

in category AC-1

Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

Neutral point
connection

Neutral
connection

Type of
circuit
TNC
(neutral and
PE combined)

Equipment
scheme

3-pole + PEN

Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp
LD4LD130p + LB1LD03Lpp
LD4LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp

PEN

Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated,

Neutral point
Type of
connection
circuit
Neutral
connection

Equipment scheme

TNS
3-pole
(neutral and
PE separated)

Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp
LD4LC130p + LB1LC03Lpp
LD4LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp

Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.

5
6
7
8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/162

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers integral 63

for control and protection of resistive circuits

in category AC-1

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Rated
thermal
current I th
qy40C
A
Black knob
63

Maximum
operational
current AC-1
qy40C
A

Maximum Breaking
Number
operational capacity (Iq) of poles
voltage
for
Ue y 415V
V
kA

Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)

63

690

LD1LC030p

50

Weight

kg
3.700

With control test function and padlocking facility

LD1LD030p

Rated
Maximum
Maximum
thermal
operational
operational
current I th
current AC-1 voltage
qy40C
qy40C
A
A
V
Black knob (CNOMO. VDE0113)
63
63
690

Breaking
Number
capacity (Iq) of poles
for
Ue y 415V
kA

Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)

50

LD4LD130p

3.800

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE0113) Emergency Stop

63
63
690
50
3
LD4LD030p

3.800

Weight

kg

Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)

LB1LD03Lpp

Thermal
setting range
(Irth min./Irth max.)
A
1013

Magnetic
setting range
(36 Irth max)
A
3978

Number
of poles

Number of
protected
poles

Reference

LB1LD03L16

kg
0.780

1318

54108

LB1LD03L21

0.780

1825

75150

LB1LD03L22

0.780

2332

95190

LB1LD03L53

0.780

2840

120240

LB1LD03L55

0.780

3550

150300

LB1LD03L57

0.780

4563

190380

LB1LD03L61

0.780

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
400
50Hz B

D
E
F

M
M
U
Q
N
N
CC

CE
K
FC
LC
MC
MC

UX
60Hz BC
c (3)
BD

ED
FD

(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.

Weight

480

500

600

660

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/163

1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.

O
O

T
RESE

4
5
AUTO
+
TRIP.

T
RESE

7
8
9
AUTO
+
TRIP.

O
O

T
RESE

10

1/164

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Add-on blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP20) (1)

For
use on

Type and number

of blocks per unit

Composition

Reference

Weight
kg

N/O N/C C/O

LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising:
or LD5
b 3 signalling contacts
Mounted
contactor state
on RH side b 1 signalling contact
control knob in any
position other than Auto
b 1 signalling contact
tripped on short-circuit
b 1 signalling contact tripped

0.280

2
1

2
1

1
1

1 block of 3 signalling contacts

contactor state

LA1LC020

0.100

1 control circuit isolating block

(1 or 2 blocks per unit)

LA1LC030

0.035

1 block of 3 signalling contacts

contactor state

LA1LB021

0.100

1 control circuit isolating block

comprising 2 contacts

LA1LC031

0.100

1 block of 5 contacts comprising:

b 3 signalling contacts
contactor state
b 1 signalling contact
tripped on short-circuit
b 1 signalling contact tripped
1 block of 4 contacts comprising:
b 3 signalling contacts
contactor state
b 1 signalling contact tripped,
selectable by the user

LD4
Mounted
on LH side
LD5
Mounted
on LH side

LA1LC010

2
LA1LC012

0.220

LA1LC025

0.170

Signalling contact block (IP10) (1)

For
use on
LD1, LD4
or LD5

Type and number

of blocks per unit
1 block comprising 1 signalling
contact contactor state
Mounted on LH or RH side

Composition

Reference

N/O N/C C/O

LA1LC001

Weight
kg

5
6

0.035

(1) UL and CSA approved.

8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/165

1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP .

Off
O

RESE

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1/166

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories

Electrical tripping and reset devices

For
use on

Type and number

of devices per unit
Time delay 0.2s

Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)
LA1LC070p

Instantaneous

LA1LC072p

0.150

or 1 shunt trip

Instantaneous

LA1LC071p

0.150

1 remote electrical
reset device

24V 50/60Hz

LA1LC052B

0.320

42V 50Hz
48V 50/60Hz

LA1LC052E

0.320

100/127V
50/60Hz

LA1LC052F

0.320

200/240V
50/60Hz

LA1LC052M

0.320

LD1, LD4
or LD5
fitted with an
LA1LC010 or
LA1LC012
block

1 undervoltage trip

LD1, LD4
or LD5
fitted with an
LA1LC010 or
LA1LC012
add-on block

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
Volts
24
48
110
120
220/230
240
380/400
B
E
F

M
U
Q
50Hz
B
E
F
F
M
M
Q
60Hz

Weight
kg
0.150

415
N

440
N
N

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

General :
pages 1/174 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/167

1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.

O
O

T
RESE

4
5
6
7
AUTO
+
TRIP .

RESE

AUTO
+
TRIP .

Off
O

RESE

10

1/168

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories and spare parts

Interface modules (1)

Mounting

On top of the
integral unit

Type

Operational
voltage
50/60Hz
V
24240

Reference

Solid state

Control
voltage
c
V
524

Weight

LA1LD180BD

kg
0.110

Relay output

24

24240

LA1LD580BD

0.110

48

24240

LA1LD580ED

0.110

Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

1
2

For c control circuit operation

Mounting

On top of the
integral unit

For use
on integral

LDpLDpppBD

LDpLDpppED

LDpLDpppFD

Operational
voltage
c (2)
V
24 (4)

48 (4)

110

Consumption
Inrush
Sealed
W
300

300

300

W
8

Description Reference (3)

Weight

Coil

LX1LD0249

kg
0.300

Converter

LA1LD080BD

0.150

Coil

LX1LD0489

0.300

Converter

LA1LD080ED

0.150

Coil

LX1LD01109

0.300

Converter

LA1LD080FD

0.150

3
4

Suppressor module
Mounting

Clip-on

Type

RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)

Operational voltage
50/60Hz
V
y 250

Reference

LA9D09982

Weight
kg
0.010

(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
(2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of
the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C.
(3) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated.
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).

5
6
7
8
9
10

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/169

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Accessories

Protection accessories
Description

Power terminal
protection shroud
Sealing cover

For
use on
Upstream power
terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Protection module

Sold in
lots of
5

Unit
reference
LA9LD701

Weight
kg
0.050

LA1LC090

0.010

Mounting
on
1 x 75 mm
7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails

Reference
LA9LD010

Weight
kg
0.450

Colour
of knob
Red

Unit
reference
LA9LC330

Weight
kg
0.400

Black

LA9LC331

0.400

Red

LA9LC530

0.400

Black

LA9LC531

0.400

Mounting accessories

Description
LA1LC090

Mounting plate

For
use on
LD1, LD4, LD5

Door interlock mechanisms (IP54)

Type
Adjustable
from 0 to 185mm
with extension
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)

For
use on
LD1

LD4, LD5

5
6
7

LA9LD010

8
9
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/170

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Coils (replacement parts)

a.c. operation

LX1LDppp

Rated control
circuit voltages
Uc 50Hz Uc 60Hz
V
V

24

Average
Inductance Voltage
resistance at of closed
code (1)
20 C 10% circuit

Reference

Weight

W
0.213

H
0.045

BC

LX1LD020

kg
0.300

24

0.323

0.071

LX1LD024

0.300

36

0.503

0.106

CC

LX1LD030

0.300

48

0.845

0.19

CE

LX1LD040

0.300

42

0.987

0.22

LX1LD042

0.300

48

1.26

0.29

LX1LD048

0.300

110

4.88

LX1LD090

0.300

115/120

5.89

1.18

FC

LX1LD100

0.300

110

6.48

1.48

LX1LD110

0.300

127

9.80

2.13

LX1LD127

0.300

220

19.82

4.2

LC

LX1LD180

0.300

230/240

23.24

4.5

MC

LX1LD190

0.300

220/230

30.51

6.7

LX1LD220

0.300

240

37.66

7.9

LX1LD240

0.300

440

80.46

16.7

UX

LX1LD360

0.300

380/400

460/480

93.63

20

LX1LD380

0.300

415/440

116.46

23.7

LX1LD415

0.300

500

575/600

152.18

31

LX1LD500

0.300

660

290.80

60

LX1LD660

0.300

1
2
3
4
5
6

Consumption at 50Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 350 to 400VA; sealed (cos j: 0.28) 20 to 30VA.
Consumption at 60Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 420 to 500VA; sealed (cos j: 0.30) 24 to 36VA.

d.c. operation
The integral63 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding
voltage converter: see page 1/169
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.

7
8
9
10

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149

Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177

1/171

TeSys motor starters - open version

Operation

Contactor breakers integral 63

A1

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

Auxiliary contact actuators

Auto

A2

5/L3

1/L1

LD4

A2

A1

LD1

3/L2

Auxiliary contact states

according to the positions of the control knob

+0
U

LA1
LC030

41

13
23
31

(53)
63

14
24
32

(54)
64

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

42

14 24 32

54

13 23 31

16 18

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96 98

41

13 23 31

53

14 24 32

15

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

42

14 24 32

54

98

96 98

96

13 23 31

13
23
31

98

98

08

08
05

13 23 31

13
23
31

96 98

96
98

06 08

06
08

16 18

16
18

14
24
32

LA1
LC020

95

95

14
24
32

95

95

05

14
24
32

15

ou

Contact closed

LD1

LA1
LC001

13 23 31

13
23
31

Contact open

LA1 LC025

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

LA1 LC012

42

Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010

LD4

Off + control test function

Off

4
On, contactor open
AUTO

AUTO

5
On, contactor closed
AUTO

Off after overload

TRIP.

7
8

AUTO

TRIP.

Tripped on overload
TRIP.

TRIP.

Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP.

TRIP.

Off after short-circuit

TRIP.

TRIP.

Manual reset
TRIP.

10

RESET

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/172

TRIP.

95

RESET

Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155

References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175

TeSys motor starters - open version

Operation

Reversing contactor breakers integral 63

Auxiliary contact actuators

5/L3

1/L1

LD5

3/L2

Auxiliary contact states

according to the positions of the control knob

+0

ou

A1

A2

A1

A2

Auto

Auxiliary contacts

41

13
23
31

53
63

14
24
32

54
64

LA1
LC031

42

LA1
LC021

13
23
31

98

LA1
LC001

14
24
32

96

13
23
31

98

08

13
23
31

96
98

06
08

16
18

13
23
31

LA1
LC020

LA1 LC025

95

95

14
24
32

95

05

14
24
32

95

ou
05

Contact closed

LA1 LC012

15

Contact open

14
24
32

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

LA1 LC010

Off + control test function

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

14 24 32

15

13 23 31

16 18

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06
08
05

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

06 08

96 98

13 23 31

08

98

13 23 31

96

98

13 23 31

41

13 23 31

53 63

05

95

14 24 32

05

95

14 24 32

95

14 24 32

42

14 24 32

54 64

Off

On, reversing contactor open

AUTO

On, closed
AUTO

On, closed
AUTO

Tripped on overload
TRIP. +

Off after overload

TRIP. +

Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. +

Off after short-circuit

TRIP. +

4
5
6
7
8
9

Manual reset
TRIP. +

RESET

General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145

14 24 32

15

Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155

References :
pages1/160 to 1/171

95

Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175

1/173

10

TeSys motor starters - open version

Dimensions,
mounting

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Contactor breakers integral63

Control circuit: d.c.
LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03 + LA1LD080

128,5

100,5
146
158,5
192

90

192

45
210

250
121,5

100,5
= 28 =

16,5

146
158,5

Reversing contactor breakers integral63

= 28 =
=

16,5

97,5
45
210

243
121,5

104,5

LA1 LD080

121,5

Control circuit: a.c.

LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03

=
90

Current limiter

LD5LDp30 + LBpLD03M

LA9LB920

45
59

194

63
181

103
115

146

51

53,5

16,5

45

148
160,5

100,5

121,5

210

275

153,5

129,5

2M4

59

Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63
LA1LC012
LA1LC001

LA1LC052

LA1LC010
LA1LC07p

LA1LC020

LA1LC030
(1 ou 2)

LA1LC025
LALC001

LA1 LC010

LA1 LC001

LA1 LC001

LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072

LA1 LC012
13

11

LA1 LC025
51

26

12

12

11

For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63

LA1LC021, LC025
LA1LC001

LA1LC031

LA1LC012
LA1LC001

LA1LC052p

LA1LC010
LA1LC07pp

LA1LC020

LA1 LC001
LA1 LC031
LA1 LC021

LA1 LC021
LA1 LC025

9
10

LA1 LC001
LA1 LC012

LA1 LC010
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
13

12

26

13

11

11

General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145

1/174

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177

26

51

12

TeSys motor starters - open version

Mounting (continued)

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Mounting
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1P

G
75

33

4xM5

DZ5 ME9

15

210

210

220

128,5

LA9 LD010

210

266

137,5

On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9LD010

AF1 EA5

LD1

266

137,5

192

28

LD1

192

28

LD1

192

28

LD4

266

137,5

192

28

LD4

192

28

LD4

192

28

LD5

282

153,5

194

63

LD5

194

63

LD5

194

63

2
3

With mounting plate LA9LD010

SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LD010

68

120

110

DZ5 ME5

31

192

78

LD4

192

78

LD5

194

94

5
Minimum electrical
clearance

30

Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)

4 (1)

a1

1
(2)

==

46

(3)

a2

a1

a2

LD1 LD030

90

LD4 LDp30

90

LD5 LDp30

181

LA1 LC010

13

LA1 LC012

13

LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p

51

LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p

51

7
30

40

c
LD1

(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.

(2) Centre of operating handle.
(3) Fixing centre.

Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p

= 28 =
=

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

= =
54

45
59

90

General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145

= =
54

105
105

243
207357 (LD4)
209359 (LD5)

105

105

65
54

275

Door drillings

105

For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30

63

10

59

181

Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177

1/175

TeSys motor starters - open version

Schemes

LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P

A1

A2

A2

6/T3

1/L1

5/L3

4/T2

Q1

A1

1/L1

3/L2

2/T1

A1

5/L3

Q1

A2

A1

A2

LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p

5/L3

LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

3/L2

Reversing contactor breakers

integral 63
with protection module LBp

3/L2

Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp

1/L1

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

For contactor breakers LD4

4/T2

6/T3
6/T3

Mounted on RH side

53

63
64

LA1 LC031

Control knob
position

1/176

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

31

41
42

LA1 LC001

32
96
95

23

31
32

24

23
24

13

13
14

14

31
32

Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175

98

23
24
95
08
05

10

LA1 LC025

95

13
14

Isolator

General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145

98

31
32

98
08
05
15

31

Auto

32

23
24

14

42

13

LA1 LC021

18

Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC001

LA1 LC020

23

06

+0

For reversing contactor breakers LD5

LA1 LC012

13
Short-circuit
signalling

16

95

Trip signallingt

LA1 LC010

24

54

53

(64) (63)
54
53

Breaker

14

Isolator

1 or 2 LA1LC030

54

2/T1

For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5

Mounted on LH side

41

4/T2

Add-on blocks

LA1 LC030

2/T1

6/T3
6/T3

4/T2

LB6 LD03M

96

LB6 LD03M
2/T1

4/T2

2/T1

Schemes (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5

Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5

LA1 LC071

LA1 LC052p

D1

C1

LA1 LC070, LC072

TRIP +
RESET

D2

C2

U<

B4

B1

The use of instantaneous auxiliary

contact block LA1LC020 prevents
the use of tripping devices or electrical
reset devices

B2

1
2

B3

(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.

Interface modules
LA1 LD180

LA1 LD580
A1

A1

+ E1

+ E1

E2

E2
A2

A2

Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact

Switching by Low level input

E1

24 or 48 V

(0V)

A1

E3
E2

A2

E1

(0V)
E2

A1

A2

Supply

24 or 48 V

E1

Low
level
input
(0V)

A1

E3

E2

A2

6
7
8
9
10

General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145

References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171

Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175

1/177

Presentation,
characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Presentation

Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also

increases productivity.
The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this
objective to be achieved.
There are numerous advantages:
b saving of space in enclosures,
b reduced size of enclosures,
b reduced wiring time,
b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through
the use of insulated mounting rails,
b flexibility and modularity of equipment,
b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance.

1
2
3

Description
Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system.
The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical
connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm.
These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as:
b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers,
b TeSys D and TeSys K contactors up to 38 A,
b integral 63 contactor breakers,
They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component
combinations.
These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating
with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an
AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.

LA9 Z32199

4
5
6
7
8

General characteristics
Conforming to standards
Degree of protection
Temperature resistance
Rated frequency of current
Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar
and at 35 C
Coefficient K to be applied
according to ambient temperature
Rated insulation voltage
Rated operational voltage
Rated permissible
With insulated busbar support
peak current
Busbar dimensions
Rated current
Maximum let-through energy
Support fixing, by screws
Cabling, by connectors
Flexible cable with cable end
Multi-strand cable
Solid cable
Tightening torque

10

C
Hz
mm
A
C
K
V
V
mm
kA
A 2s
mm

mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

IEC 60439
IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp
120
50/60
12 x 5
12 x 10
15 x 5
20 x 5
20 x 10 25 x 5
200
360
250
320
520
400
35
40
45
50
55
60
1
0.9
0.75
0.65
0.55
0.35
690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
690
LA9 Z11098 and Z11099
LA9 Z11100 and Z11101
12 x 5
12 x 10
12 x 5
12 x 10 20 x 10
35
35
30
35
35
1 x 108
4 x 108
1 x 108
11 x 108 11 x 108
4x6
4x5
LA9 Z11103
LA9 Z11104
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
4
35
16
70
4
35
16
70
4
35

1x6
1 x 10

30 x 5
450

30 x 10
630

30 x 5
30 x 10
45
55
6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
LA9 Z11105
Min.
Max.
120
120
35
120

3 x 12

Characteristics of adaptors for use with busbar systems (3-phase)

Adaptor type

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

LA9Z

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Conductor c.s.a.
(colour: black)
Type of conductor insulation
Permissible current
Rated insulation voltage
Rated peak current
Maximum let-through energy

References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187

1/178

mm2

A
V
kA
A 2s

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

32196
32228
32229

32199
32200
32208 to
210 32232

32343, 32344 32345

40132, 60132
40232, 60232

IP 20
4
6
6
10
AWG 12
AWG 10
AWG 10
AWG 8
PVC 105 C
25
32
32
63
690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1
6
6
6
10
2 x 105
2 x 105
2 x 105
3 x 105

32253

32248
32249

16

2.5
AWG 22/14

15
250

80
10
3 x 105

Characteristics

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Short-circuit resistance

Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Busbar system with 60 mm pitch

Peak current Ipk (kA)

Peak current Ipk (kA)

Busbar system with 40 mm pitch

50

40

70

60

12 x 5 and 12 x 10

30 x 10

30

50
30 x 5

20

40

10

30

200
300
400
500
Busbar support fixing centres (mm)

20

600

12 x 10
and 20 x 10

12 x 5

200
300
400
500
Busbar support fixing centres (mm)

600

(1) Depending on the prospective short-circuit current

Current capacity of busbars

For an ambient temperature of 35C and a busbar temperature of 65C

C.s.a.
Permissible current

mm2
A

12 x 5
200

15 x 5
250

20 x 5
320

25 x 5
400

30 x 5
450

12 x 10
360

20 x 10
520

30 x 10
630

Factor K2
2,2

C
0
5
10
15

2,1
2,0

20
25
30
35
40
45
50

1,9
1,8
1,7
1,6

Ambient temperature

If the above climatic conditions are modified, consult the chart below to find the correction factor K2 to be applied.

6
7

55
60
65

1,5
1,4

1,3
1,2
1,1

1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6

0,5
0,4
0,3

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100 105 110 115 120 125

Busbar temperature (C)

Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A.
800 A
For a load of 800 A, the correction coefficient K2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 630 A ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be
82.5 C.
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

1/179

10

hhh

40 mm : LA9 Z32228
60 mm : LA9 Z32229

1
2

GV2 ME, GV2 P

40 mm : LA9 Z32196

GV2 ME, GV2 P

LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12

4
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12

40 mm : LA9 Z32199
60 mm : LA9 Z32200

6
GV2 ME, GV2 P

40 mm : LA9 Z40132
60 mm : LA9 Z60132

7
GV2 ME, GV2 P

LC1 D09D38

9
LC1 D09D38

10

1/180

References

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type

GV2 ME + LC1, LP1,

LP4 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09D38
or GV2 P

Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12

32

Width x height
of adaptor

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

mm
45 x 139

LA9 Z32196

kg
0.788

45 x 182

LA9 Z32228

0.984

45 x 182

LA9 Z40132

0.984

54 x 182

LA9 Z32199

1.144

1
2

Adaptors for busbar systems with 60 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type

GV2 ME + LC1, LP1,

LP4 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09D38
or GV2 P

Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12

Width x height
of adaptor

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

mm
45 x 182

LA9 Z32229

kg
0.984

32

45 x 182

LA9 Z60132

0.984

54 x 182

LA9 Z32200

1.220

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

1/181

1
2

60 mm : LA9 Z32210

GV2 ME, GV2 P

40 mm : LA9 Z32232

GV2 ME, GV2 P

LC2, LP2, LP5 K06K12

4
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06K12

40 mm : LA9 Z32208
60 mm : LA9 Z32209

GV2 ME, GV2 P

40 mm : LA9 Z40232
60 mm : LA9 Z60232

7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2 D09D38

8
9
LC2 D09D38

10

1/182

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - reversing

Motor starter type

GV2 ME + LC2, LP2,

LP5 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09D38
or GV2 P

Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12

Width x height
of adaptor

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

mm
90 x 139

LA9 Z32232

kg
0.788

32

90 x 182

LA9 Z40232

1.884

135 x 182

LA9 Z32208

0.638

1
2

Adaptors for busbar systems with 60 mm pitch - reversing

Motor starter type

GV2 ME + LC2, LP2,

LP5 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09D38
or GV2 P

Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12

Width x height
of adaptor

Sold in
lots of

Unit reference

Weight

mm
90 x 182

LA9 Z32210

kg
1.868

32

90 x 182

LA9 Z60232

1.948

135 x 182

LA9 Z32209

0.651

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

1/183

1
60 mm : LA9 Z32253

2
3

GV3 ME

4
5
60 mm : LA9 Z32345

6
7

LD1 LD, LD4 LD

8
9
10

1/184

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Adaptors for busbar systems with 60 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type

Width x height
of adaptor
mm
108 x 244

Reference

integral LD1, LD4 LD

Operational current AC-3

440 V
A
63

Weight

LA9 Z32345

kg
0.887

GV3 ME

80

72 x 182

LA9 Z32253

0.347

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

1/185

LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z11098

LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z32936

LA9 Z32

LA9 Z098

40 mm

2
3
4

LA9 Z11098

LA9 Z11100

LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249

LA9 Z91413

LA9 Z11105

LA9 Z32

LA9 Z11101

LA9 Z098

LA9 Z11102
60 mm

6
7
8
9

LA9 Z11100

10

LA9 Z11099

LA9 Z11118

LA9 Z11104

LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11105

1/186

LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249

References (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Accessories for busbar sets with 40 mm pitch

Description
3-pole

Sold in
lots of
10

Unit
reference
LA9 Z11098

Weight
kg
1.040

3-pole + N + T

10

LA9 Z11099

1.400

For busbars, thickness 5 mm

10

LA9 Z09818

0.420

For busbars, thickness 10 mm

10

LA9 Z09820

0.940

Connector

Capacity 35 mm2

50

LA9 Z11103

2.300

Protective cover

For connector LA9 Z11103

LA9 Z91413

0.160

Side module, 13.5 x 182 mm

For increasing the width of the adaptor

LA9 Z32936

0.472

Plug-in terminal blocks

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)

Width 54 mm

LA9 Z32248

0.066

Width 45 mm

LA9 Z32249

0.055

3-pole

Sold in
lots of
10

Unit
reference
LA9 Z11100

Weight
kg
2.100

3-pole + N

10

LA9 Z11101

2.660

3-pole

10

LA9 Z11102

0.310

4-pole

10

LA9 Z11118

0.380

For busbars, thickness 5 mm

10

LA9 Z09819

0.800

For busbars, thickness 10 mm

10

LA9 Z09820

0.940

Capacity 70 mm2

25

LA9 Z11104

1.875

3-pole capacity 120 mm2

LA9 Z11105 (2)

0.719

Protective cover

For connector LA9 Z11104

LA9 Z91413

0.160

Plug-in terminal blocks

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)

Width 54 mm

LA9 Z32248

0.066

Width 45 mm

LA9 Z32249

0.055

Busbar system supports (1)

Insulated rails
(length 1 m)

1
2
3

Accessories for busbar sets with 60 mm pitch

Description
Busbar system supports (1)

Insulated terminal shroud

Insulated rails
(length 1 m)

Connectors

4
5
6
7

(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/178 and 1/179
(2) Supplied complete with protective cover

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189

1/187

Dimensions

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly

Dimensions

5
6
7

e1
40/60 40/60

a
c

Motor starter combinations, non-reversing

Motor starter type

40/60 40/60

e1

e1
40/60 40/60

GV2 ME or P + LCp D
x

GV2 ME or P + LCp, LPp K

40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125

Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32196

60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)

e1
Other

Adaptor
reference

40

GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12

45

152

GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12

45

152

145

145

LA9 Z32196

40

GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12

45

184

125

125

LA9 Z32228

135

135

LA9 Z32229

40

GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12

45

184

145

145

LA9 Z32228

155

155

LA9 Z32229

40

GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18

45

200

139

139

LA9 Z40132

149

149

LA9 Z60132

40

GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18

45

200

142

142

LA9 Z40132

152

152

LA9 Z60132

40

GV2 ME + LC1 D25 to D38

45

200

146

146

LA9 Z40132

156

156

LA9 Z60132

40

GV2 P + LC1 D25 to D38

45

200

146

146

LA9 Z40132

156

156

LA9 Z60132

40

GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18

54

200

131

137

LA9 Z32199

141

147

LA9 Z32200

33

GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18

54

200

142

142

LA9 Z32199

152

152

LA9 Z32200

33

GV2 ME + LC1 D25 to D38

54

200

140

146

LA9 Z32199

150

156

LA9 Z32200

33

GV2 P + LC1 D25 to D38

54

200

142

146

LA9 Z32199

152

156

LA9 Z32200

33

integral 63 LD1, LD4

108

244

250

LA9 Z32345

50

GV3 ME

72

182

180

LA9 Z32253

50

(1) LC = Low Consumption

X electrical clearance
GV2 ME
GV2 P
integral 63
GV3 ME

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

1/188

References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187

Ue y 415 V
40
40
20
40

Ue = 440 V
40
80
20
40

Ue = 500 and 600 V

40
120
20
50

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys motor starters - open version

Adaptors for use with busbar systems

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly

Dimensions

integral

60

e1

1
2

60

40/60 40/60

e1

GV2 ME or P + LC2, LP2 K

a
a

Motor starter combinations, reversing

Motor starter type

40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125

Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32232

60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)

e1
LD5

Adaptor
reference

40

GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12

90

150

GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12

90

150

145

145

LA9 Z32232

40

GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12

90

184

135

135

LA9 Z32210

40

GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12

90

184

155

155

LA9 Z32210

40

GV2 ME + LC2 D09 to D18

90

200

139

139

LA9 Z40232

149

149

LA9 Z60232

40

GV2 P + LC2 D09 to D18

90

200

142

142

LA9 Z40232

152

152

LA9 Z60232

40

GV2 ME +LC2 D25 to D38

90

200

146

146

LA9 Z40232

156

156

LA9 Z60232

40

GV2 P + LC2 D25 to D38

90

200

146

146

LA9 Z40232

156

156

LA9 Z60232

40

GV2 ME + LC2 D09 to D18

135

203

131

137

LA9 Z32208

141

147

LA9 Z32209

33

GV2 P + LC2 D09 to D18

135

203

142

142

LA9 Z32208

152

152

LA9 Z32209

33

GV2 ME + LC2 D25 to D38

135

201

140

146

LA9 Z32208

150

156

LA9 Z32209

33

GV2 P + LC2 D25 to D38

135

201

142

146

LA9 Z32208

152

156

LA9 Z32209

33

GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12

90

150

125

LA9 Z32232

40

GV2 P + LP5 K06 to K12

90

150

145

LA9 Z32232

40

GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12

90

184

135

LA9 Z32210

40

GV2 P + LP5 K06 and K12

90

184

155

LA9 Z32210

40

(1) LC = Low Consumption

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179

References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187

1/189

Selection guide

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Functions

Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools

Product type

Power circuit pre-wiring

components

For contactors

TeSys D (9 to 25 A)

Type of starter

Direct and reversing

Direct

Coil control

Yes

Use with motor starters

Limited to 60 A (Ith)
Limited to 8 starters (1)

Number of motor starters

Type of connection or bus

Number of channels

References

LAD3p

LAD9AP3pp

Pages

1/197

1/199

Control-command pre-wiring components for

TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Reversing
No

Yes

(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2ME and upstream terminal block LAD3B1.

9
10

1/190

No

Communication with the processing part

Control-command pre-wiring components for
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3P

Splitter box

Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB

network interface module

1
2
3
4

TeSys D (40 to 65 A)

Direct

Reversing

Yes

Yes

8 starters per splitter box

4 starters per module

HE 10

Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet, TCP/IP,

Profibus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet

16 inputs/12 outputs

LU9G02

STBEPI2145

1/199

1/199

6
7
8
9
10

1/191

Installation system

Presentation

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardises and simplifies setting up of

motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and flexible. In addition,
this system:
b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date,
b reduces maintenance time and
b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate
interfaces and the amount of ducting.

1
2

System for motor starters with spring terminals

Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers

b From 0 to 18 A max.,
b TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers combined with TeSysD contactors from 9 to 25 A
(spring terminal version),
b Quickfit pre-wired power and control connections.

3
4

Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers

b From 9 to 65 A max.,
b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with TeSysD contactors from 40 to 65 A
(spring terminal version),
b Quickfit pre-wired control connections only,
b For pre-wired power connections, use busbar sets from the TeSys D, 40 to 65 A
contactor range (see page 5/85).
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers

Power circuit pre-wiring components

(motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)

b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules,
b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16mm2),
b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and
the earth cables (6 mm2).

6
7

This range comprises pre-wiring components for:

b the power circuits,
b the control circuits.

Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the
power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed.
This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components
(motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)

Motor starter with GV3P circuit-breakers

b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data
for this motor starter.
b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter:
v HE10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via
the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable
for use in an Advantys STB configuration for connection to the PLC via a field bus.

9
10
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195

1/192

Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

Presentation (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Control/command
HE10 connection

1
1

1 Automation platform
2 Connection cable
TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp
3 Splitter box LU9 G02

2
2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)
Configuration example (for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module
Module
STBPDT 3100
Connection base
STBXBA 2200
Terminal block
STBXTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module
STBEPI 2145
Connection base
STB XBA 3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen
STBNCO 1010 (4)
Fipio
STBNFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP
STBNIP 2210
InterBus
STBNIB 1010 (4)
Profibus DP
STBNDP 1010 (4)
DeviceNet
STBNDN1010 (4)
Modbus Plus
STBNMP 2210
Terminal block
STBWTS 2120

4 Network interface module

5 Supply module
6 Parallel interface module

3
4
5

TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1Cpp

6
7

7 TeSys Quickfit module

8 Adapter plate APP2CX
9 Splitter box LU9G02 for 8 direct motor
starters, with channel connections on the
APP1C module side by two HE 10
connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys
Quickfit side, by RJ45 connectors
10 Connection cable APP2AH40H060

10

The motor starter is connected to an APP1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate

APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP2AH40H060 10.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
b 1 output: motor control,
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version.

Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195

Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203

9
10

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/193

Installation system

Description

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Power components

1
2
4

2a

2b
3

(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)

Power kits LAD 3p
Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and two Quickfit
technology power connection modules 2.
The plate is used for mounting TeSys D contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing,
with spring terminals and fitted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2ME circuit-breaker
4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate.
The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of
the contactor up to 18 A.
The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box
and the circuit-breaker.
The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuitbreaker and the contactor.
Splitter boxes LAD 32p
Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters.
They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply.
A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters.
Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2).
Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1
The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions:
b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b power supply between two connected splitter boxes.
The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickfit technology. It
is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width
equivalent to two motor starters.
Outgoing terminal block LAD 331
The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions:
b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2,
b connection of the motor earth cables.
In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for
maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal.
The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the
contactor, using Quickfit technology.

6
7
8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193

1/194

Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205

Description (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Control/command components

Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp

The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on
the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the
location provided for the front-mounting block.
It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2ME and 65A for
TeSys GV3P.
Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect
connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.).
These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or
without contactor coil interface relay.
The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V.
The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface,
at 24 V d.c.
The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply.
Module LAD9AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors:
3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system.
4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with
relay).
5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil
(supplied complete with shunt)
2

3 4 5

Parallel wiring modules

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which
incorporate TeSys Quickfit technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and
without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides the status and
command information for each motor starter.
Control connection modules LAD9AP3pp are connected to the parallel wiring
modules using RJ45 cables LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths.
The following information is available for each motor starter:
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status,
b 1 output: contactor coil control.
A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel.
A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSysD contactors, the
Quickfit pre-wired system allows the contactor to be mounted below the circuit-breaker or
mounting of the two devices side by side.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Parallel wiring module LU9 G02

This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters

directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wiring
system (1).
This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.

Dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 (2)

This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the
Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor
starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus,
FIPIO, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, ProfibusDP, INTERBUS and DeviceNet.
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces.
(2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".

8
9

10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/195

1
LAD 3B1

2
LAD 352
GV2 MEpp3

3
4

LC1 Dpp3

Power circuit pre-wiring

components
Direct starter

LAD 331

5
6
7
8
LC2 Dpp3

Power circuit pre-wiring

components
Reversing starter

10

1/196

Installation system

References

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description

Maximum
connection c.s.a.

Application

Sold in
lots of

Reference

16 mm2 (1)

Power supply of 1 or 2
power splitter boxes

LAD3B1

Extension by

Number of starters

Reference

LAD32p

LAD 322

0.120

LAD 324

0.240

Composition

Reference

1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and

2 power connection modules LAD341

LAD 352

Maximum
connection c.s.a.

Application

Sold in
lots of

Reference

6 mm2

Connection of
motor cables

10

LAD 331

No. of
starters

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Plate for mounting a

GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor

10

LAD 311

0.042

Power connection module

10

LAD 341

0.018

Upstream terminal block

LAD3B1

Description
Power splitter box, 60 A

Description
LAD 324

Weight
kg
0.212
Weight
kg

Weight
kg

Direct starter
Power connection kit

0.078

Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD352
Description
Outgoing terminal block
Description
LAD 352

LAD 331

Weight
kg
0.050

Weight
kg

(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063),
1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103),
1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163).

6
7
8
9
10

Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195

Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201

Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/197

LAD 32p

STB EPI 2145

1
GV2 MEpp3

2
LC2 Dpp3

LC1 Dpp3

3
4

LU9 G02
LAD 9AP3D1

LAD 9AP3D2

5
6
GV3 Ppp

LC2 DppA3
LC1 DppA3

8
9
10

Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).

1/198

References (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Control-command pre-wiring components

Description

Control connection modules

TeSys D
coil voltage

Type of coil
control relay

Type of
starter

Reference

a 12... 250 V or
c 5...130 V

Electromechanical

Direct

LAD9AP31

0.150

Reversing

LAD9AP32

0.200

c 24 V

Without relay

Direct

LAD9AP3D1

0.140

Reversing

LAD9AP3D2

0.190

Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)

Description
LAD 9AP3p

Splitter box
Description
Advantys STB parallel
interface module

Connectors

Reference

PLC side

Motor starter side

2 x HE 10
20-way

8 x RJ45

Weight
kg

Weight

Connectors

Reference
Motor starter side

4 x RJ45

kg
LU9G02

PLC side

0.260
Weight
kg

STBEPI2145

0.165

Connection cables

Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9G02 or STBEPI2145
Connectors

Length

Reference

Weight

m
2 x RJ45 connectors

kg

0.3

LU9 R03

0.045

LU9 R10

0.065

LU9 R30

0.125

Length

Reference

Between splitter box LU9G02 and the PLC

Type of connection

Gauge

C.s.a.

AWG

mm2

22

0.324

0.5

TSX CDP 053

0.085

TSX CDP 103

0.150

TSX CDP 203

0.280

TSX CDP 303

0.410

TSX CDP 503

0.670

ABFH20H100

0.080

ABFH20H200

0.140

ABFH20H300

0.210

TSX CDP 301

0.400

TSX CDP 501

0.660

Characteristics

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Spring terminal connections for:

b the external contact
b the auxiliary power supply

2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm

10

APE 1PRE21

0.020

Self-stripping connector for:

b the external contact
b the auxiliary power supply

2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm

16

APE 1PAD21

0.020

Connecting cable
between module APP1Cp and
splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)

Connectors:
1 x HE 10, 30-way
2 x HE 10, 20-way

APP 2AH40H060

0.400

PLC side
HE 10
20-way

HE 10
20-way

28

Bare wires

Weight

Splitter box side

HE 10
20-way

Separate components
Description

22

0.080

0.324

4
5

kg

6
7

Weight
kg

8
9
10

Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195

Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201

Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/199

Installation system

Characteristics

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Type of control connection module

1
2
3
4
5

LAD9AP3pp

General environment
Standard
Certifications
Degree of protection
Resistance to
incandescent wire
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Resistance to radiated fields
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Surge withstand
Immunity to
radioelectric fields
Ambient air temperature

Conforming to IEC 60529

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn
and BV/LR
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2

11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave)

2100 Hz : 4 and 3100 Hz: 0,7
Level 3

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4

V/m

10 (261000 MHz)
Level 3

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5

kV

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6

2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode

Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s
10 (0.15...80 MHz)

Operation in
floor-standing enclosure
Operation in
wall-mounted enclosure

- 5+ 60

- 5+ 40

C
mm

- 40+ 70
> 30

Storage
Space required around
For inserting cables
mounted assembly
and heat dissipation
Degree of pollution
Assembly fixing
(with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
Suitable wire
c.s.a.

IEC 60439-1
UL, CSA
IP 40 (mounted assembly)
960

Voltage supply Number of wires

for power
Flexible cable with cable end
Flexible cable
without cable end
Solid cable
Voltage supply Number of wires
for contactor
Flexible cable
coil control
with cable end (max)
Flexible cable
without cable end (max)
Solid cable (max)

3
On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME

mm
mm
mm

3
16
25

mm

25
2
1.5

mm

2.5

mm

2.5

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes)

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

A
V
V
kV
Hz
kA

60
80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page)
18 (with an empty slot between two starters)
750
690
6
50-60
50

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

kA

9.1 (for 70 ms)

V
V
V

a 12250 (with interface relay)

c 524 (without interface relay)
c 5130 (with interface relay)

3-phase power circuit characteristics

Maximum
current

7
8

Per power
supply
Per sub-base
GV2 operating limit
Maximum current per starter
Insulation voltage
Operational voltage
U imp
Rated operational frequency
Rated short-circuit current
conditional Isc at 415 V
Permissible
short-time rating Icw

Control circuit characteristics

Contactor coil control voltage

9
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

1/200

Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

Characteristics (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickfit
Circuit-breaker reference
GV2 ME06
GV2 ME07
GV2 ME08
GV2 ME10
GV2 ME14
GV2 ME16
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME21

GV2 ratings (1)

1 - 1.6 A
1.6 - 2.5 A
2.5 - 4 A
4 - 6.3 A
6 - 10 A
9 - 14 A
13 - 18 A
17 - 23 A

Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickfit

1.28 A
2A
3.2 A
5A
8A
11.2 A
14.4 A
18 A

1
2

Electromechanical relay characteristics

Type of control connection module

LAD9AP31, LAD9AP32

Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)

Rated voltage at Us
Energisation threshold at 40 C
Drop-out voltage at 20 C
Maximum operational voltage
Maximum current at Us
Drop-out current at 20 C
Maximum power dissipated at Us
Supply failure

V
V
V
V
mA
mA
W
ms

c 24
c 19.2
c 2.4
c 30
15
1
0.36
5

3
4

Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Type of contact
Maximum switching voltage
Frequency of the operating current
Maximum current of the contact

V
V
Hz
A

1F
a 250
c 130
50/60
4

ms

10

ms

Hz
Hz

10
0.5
20

Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time
at Us (including bounce)

Maximum operating ratet

Mechanical life

Between coil energisation

and closing of the contact
Between coil de-energisation
and opening of the contact
No load
At Ie
In millions of operating cycles

Dielectric strength
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage
Maximum current
24 V - DC13
for 500 000 operations
230 V - AC15

V
1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn
kV
2.5
V
300
A
0.6
A
0.9
(1) Thermal trip setting range.

7
8
9
10

Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/201

Installation system

Dimensions

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Dimensions

Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors

120

5
2
4

255

285

6
(1)

110
135

5
6

1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate

2 Power connection module
3 Power splitter box
4 Control splitter box
5 Upstream terminal block
6 Outgoing terminal block
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.

Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1D40A3 LC1D65A3)
Vertical mounting

Side by side mounting

119

231

138

141

119

9
141

10

55

55

1 Control splitter box

2 Set of GV3 G264 busbars
3 Set of S-shape busbars GV3S

Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

1/202

Description :
pages 1/192 and1/193

Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

Installation system

Dimensions (continued),
schemes

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Dimensions

Parallel wiring modules

Splitter box LU9 G02

Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145

70

35
155

35

2
120

56

42

47

75

3
10

28,1 (1)
(1)Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
configuration.

Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1
Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status RJ45
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common
X2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

LU9 G02

X3

(2)
RJ45
X4
RJ45

RJ45

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common

X5

RJ45

(3)
X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45

1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown

6
7
8

Not used with

TeSys Quickfit
NC
NC
NC
NC
+ c 24 V
- c 24 V
+ c 24 V
- c 24 V

Com

24 V Aux
Inputs

Com

Outputs

Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Control X1
Control X2
Control X3
Control X4
Control X5
Control X6
Control X7
Control X8

X10

X6

24 V

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RJ45

Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole status X1
Pole status X2
Pole status X3
Pole status X4
Pole status X5
Pole status X6
Pole status X7
Pole status X8
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X9

Colours of
TSXCDPppp
connection cable
wires (4)

Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

10

(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.

(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205

1/203

Installation system

Schemes (continued)

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Wiring schemes
With relay

Shunt 1

23
24

21
22

14

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

(1)

KA2 (2)

Ph

KA1 (2)

Ph

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

KM2

(1)

Ph

KA1 (2)

22

14

22

14

KM1

4
5

13

(1)

21

KM1

13

13

24

14

Q1

21

13

Q1

14

LAD9AP32

23

LAD9AP31

13

Shunt 2

Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
(2) Interface relay.

6
7
8
9
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

1/204

Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203

Schemes (continued)

Installation system

TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals

Wiring schemes (continued)

Without relay

13

23
24

22

(1)

14

22

KM2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1

21

13

13

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

KM1

14

22

(1)

21

24

21

14

Q1

KM1

14

14

23

Q1

13

LAD9AP3D2

13

LAD9AP3D1

(1)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1

Shunt 2

Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193

Characteristics :
pages1/200 and 1/201

References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199

Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and1/203

1/205

1
2
3
5
1

8
10

11

12

6
6
9

8
9

6
7
13

10
10
AK5-ASS-3-Q

1/206

15

12

14

Power distribution in control panels

Presentation

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of
products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable.
The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating
prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:

Carrying of electric current

By the pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 C.
4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.

The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm.
An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar
system.
"Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to
connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4.
Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/208.

Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions:
b 2-pole,
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral),
b 4-pole (3-phase + Common).
The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and
electrical connection to the busbars.
2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A.
The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the
power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit
conditions.

4
5

Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply
of power to components.
They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings.
These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar
system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tapoff.
2 types of mounting plate are available:
b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be
bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm.
b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9
mounted on 100 mm fixing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions,
allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with
connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices.
Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution:
b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph)
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common).
Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: 2-pole (Ph + N,
Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3Ph+N and 3Ph + common).

6
7
8
9

Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable
mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these
extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically.

10

A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or
double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the
control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209

References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213

Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211

1/207

Power distribution in control panels

Characteristics

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar system characteristics

1
2

Conforming to standards

IEC 60439

Product certifications

UL, CSA, DNV, LROS

Degree of protection

Against access to live parts

Flame resistance

Conforming to IEC 60695

Number of conductors

IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529

Conforming to standard UL 94

V0

AK5JB14p

4
a

Supply current

Rated operational frequency

Rated operational current

4
Rated insulation voltage

Hz

50 or 60

Ambient temperature 35 C

160

Coefficient K to be applied
according to the
ambient temperature

35

40

45

50

55

60

0.96

0.92

0.88

0.83

0.78

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

690

Conforming to UL and CSA

600
Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

400

Conforming to UL, CSA

480
Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

V
kA

600
25

A 2s

1 x 10 7

Operational voltage

6
Maximum permissible
peak current

Maximum let-through energy

Upstream short-circuit (1)
and overload protection

8
9
10

Type of protection

Schneider Electric circuit-breaker

Fuses

NS 160 H

NS 160 H

aM

gF

Rating

160

160

160

160

Prospective
short-circuit current

kA

36

70

100

100

Operational current

160

160

160

160

Cabling

Maximum c.s.a.

Minimum c.s.a.

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

70

2.5

Solid cable

mm2

70

2.5

Tightening torque

Nm

10

Mounting position

Horizontal or vertical (2)

Prsentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207

References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213

1/208

850 (incandescent wire)

Fixing with screws provided

(1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA.
(2) Using side stop AK5BT01 on mounting plates AK5PA.
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211

Power distribution in control panels

Characteristics (continued)

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Tap-off characteristics
Type

AK5

AK5

AK5

AK5

AK5

AK5

AK5

PC12

PC12PH

PC13

PC14

PC131

PC32L

PC32LPH PC33

AK5

AK5

AK5

PC34

PC331

1
2

PC33L

PC34L

3-phase

Conforming to standards

IEC 60439

Product certifications

UL, LROS, CSA, DNV

Degree of protection

Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 529

Polarity

Phase

Phase

3-phase

3-phase

Phase

Phase

3-phase

3-phase

Neutral

Phase

Neutral

Common

Neutral

Phase

Neutral

Common

2 x 2.5

2 x 2.5

4 x 2.5

3 x 2.5

2x4

2x4

4x4

3x4

Conductor c.s.a.

mm2

3-phase

3 x 2.5

(UL cables)

Conductor colours

Permissible current

3x4

1 x 1.5

Black

Black

Black

Black

Blue

Blue

White

(Neutral)

(Neutral)

16

Black

16

Black

16

16

Rated insulation voltage

690 conforming to IEC 60439-1

Rated peak current

kA

Maximum let-through energy

A 2s

100 000

Type of conductor insulation

1 x 1.5

16

Black

Black

Blue

Blue

White

(Neutral)

(Neutral)

(Common)

32

32

32

Black

32

Black

32

3
4

10

10

(Common)

(Common)

200000

PVC 105 C

Tap-off characteristics
Type

AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3

AK5
PA211PH12
PA211PH13
PA211PH23
PA212PH12
PA212PH13
PA212PH23

AK5
PA231
PA232
PA232S

AK5
PA241
PA242

AK5
PA2311
PA2312
PA2312S

AK5
PA532

AK5
PA542

AK5
PA5312

Conforming to standards

IEC 60439

Product certifications

UL, LROS, CSA, DNV

Degree of protection

Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529

Polarity

Phase +
Neutral

Phase +
Phase

3-phase

3-phase
+ Neutral

3-phase
+ Common

3-phase

3-phase
+ Neutral

3-phase
+ Common

Conductor c.s.a.
(UL cables)

mm2

2x4

2x4

3x4

4x4

3x4
1 x 1.5

2 x (3 x 4)

2 x (4 x 4)

2 x (3 x 4)
1 x 1.5

Permissible current

25

25

25

25

25
10
(Common)

50

50

50
10
(Common)

Rated insulation voltage

Rated peak current
Maximum let-through energy

V
kA
A 2s

690 conforming to IEC 60439-1

6
200 000

Type of conductor insulation

8
9

PVC 105 C

Characteristics of mounting rails AM1DL201 and AM1DL2017

Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)

Type

Material

2 mm sheet steel

Surface treatment

Galvanized

10

1/209

Power distribution in control panels

Mounting
(equipment possibilities)

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system

1
2
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3

AK5
AK5
PA231 PA241
PA2311
(1)

AK5
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3

AK5
PA212PH12
PA213PH13
PA212PH23

AK5
AK5
PA232 PA242
PA2312
(1)

AK5
PA232S
PA2312S
(1)

AK5
AK5
PA532 PA542
PA5312
(1)

54

54

54

54

54

54

54

108

108

108

105

105

105

190

190

190

190

190

190

190

No. of 18 mm pitches

Thermal current

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

25 A

50 A

50 A

Application

Ph + N

3-pole

3-pole

3-pole
+N

3-pole

3-pole

3-pole
+N

Note: if the equipment is wider than the

mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.

(1) 3-pole + common

Mounting
Width in mm
plate
incorporating
Height in mm
tap-off

Motor starter type

5
6
7
8
9
10

Minimum
centres
with
60 mm
ducting

3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system

Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay

LS1D25
170
LS1D25 + LA8D254
170
LS1 D25 + LC1 -D09 to D25 and
overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320
LS1D25 + LC1D09 to D25
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
320
overload relay up to LR2 D1322

Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay

LS1D25 + LC2D09 to D18
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
overload relay up to LR2D1322
LS1D25 + LC2D25
with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
overload relay up to LR2D1322

320

320

170
170

3
5

270
270

6
6

Optimal breaker switch

GK2CF03 to CF22
GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2AX
GK3EF40
GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX

Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay

GK2CF03 to CF21 + LC1D09
to D18 + overload relay up to
LR2 D1322
GK2CF03 to CF22 + LC1D09
to D25 + overload relay up to
LR2 D1322
GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2-AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with
1 block LA8 D + overload relay
up to LR2 D1322

320

320

320

Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay

GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
relay up to LR2 D1322
GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2 AX + LC2D25
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
relay up to LR2 D1322

1/210

320

320

Power distribution in control panels

Mounting
(equipment possibilities)

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

(continued)

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system

Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the

mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
Note 2: for upstream protection, see page
1/208
(1) 3-pole + common
Mounting
Width in mm
plate
Height in mm
incorporating
No. of 18 mm pitches
tap-off
Thermal current
Application
Motor starter type

Minimum
centres with
60 mm
ducting

2
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
54
105
3
25 A
Ph + N

AK5
PA231
PA2311
(1)
54
105
3
25 A
3-pole

AK5
AK5
AK5
PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12
PA212N2 PA213PH13
PA212N3 PA212PH23
54
54
54
105
190
190
3
3
3
25 A
25 A
25 A
3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system

AK5PA
232
PA2312
(1)
54
190
3
25 A
3-pole

AK5
AK5
PA242 PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
54
108
190
190
4
6
25 A
25 A
3-pole 3-pole
+N

AK
PA532
PA5312
(1)
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole

AK5
PA542
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole
+N

3
4

Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)

GV2p06 to p22

170

GV3M01 to M40

270

4
3

270

270

Motor circuit-breaker + contactor

GV2p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270
GV2p06 to p20 + LC1D09
270
to D18
GV2p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270
GV3M01 to M40 with
GV1App + LC1D09 to D32

GV3M01 to M40 + LC1D09

to D32 with 1 add-on block
LA8D

5
6

Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor

GV2p06 to p20 + LC2-D09 to
D18 with or without add-on
block LA8 D
GV2p22 with 1 add-on block
LA8D

270

270

C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection

2369p
2370p
2371p and 2372p

170
170
170

8
9
10

1/211

Power distribution in control panels

References

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with
component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1DL201 rail.
When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C.
Number of
Number of
Length
Suitable for
Reference
Weight
conductors
tap-offs at
mounting in
18 mm intervals
enclosure width
mm
mm
kg
4 (1)
12
344
600
AK5JB143
0.700

1
2
3

AK5JB1pp

18

452

800

AK5JB144

0.900

24

560

800

AK5JB145

1.100

30

668

800

AK5JB146

1.300

48

992

1200

AK5JB149

1.900

54

1100

1200

AK5JB1410

2.100

Omega rail, width 75 mm

This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tapoffs. It supportsthe busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail.

Material and
surface treatment
2 mm sheet steel

Depth

Length

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

mm
15

Weight

mm
2000 (4)

AM1 DL201

Thermal
current

Cable
lengths

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

mm

16

200

6 (2)

AK5PC12

0.035

32

1000

6 (2)

AK5PC32L

0.040

16

200

6 (3)

AK5PC12PH

0.035

32

1000

6 (3)

AK5PC32LPH

0.040

16

200

AK5PC13

0.040

32

250

AK5PC33

0.045

1000

AK5PC33L

0.060

16

200

AK5PC14

0.045

32

250

AK5PC34

0.050

1000

AK5PC34L

0.065

16
10 (common)

200

AK5PC131

0.045

32
10 (common)

250

AK5PC331

0.050

kg
3.000

Removable power sockets

Use

5
6

AK5PC12

Number of points
used on the
busbar system

Single-phase
+
Neutral

2-phase

3-phase

7
AK5PC14

3-phase
+
Neutral

3-phase
+
common

AK5GF1

Accessories

kg

Description

Maximum no.
C.s.a. mm2
Sold in
Unit
of connections
lots of
reference
Cable guide
4
2.5 or 4
20
AK5GF1
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3).
(3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.

10
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207

1/212

Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209

Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and1/215

Weight

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211

Weight
kg
0.300

Power distribution in control panels

References (continued)

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Single plate (height 105 mm)

Use
Single-phase
+ neutral

2-phase

AK5PA231

No. of 18mm
Phase
points used on the
busbar system
3
Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3

3-phase
3
3-phase + common 3
3-phase + neutral 3

Thermal
currentA

Reference

25

Number of 6
rails for component support
1

Weight

AK5PA211N1

kg
0.135

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

AK5PA211N2
AK5PA211N3
AK5PA211PH12
AK5PA211PH13
AK5PA211PH23
AK5PA231
AK5PA2311
AK5PA241

0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.140
0.145
0.145

AK5PA232

2-phase

3-phase

3
6

Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3

3-phase + neutral 3
3-phase + common 3
6

3-phase + neutral

2
3

Double plate (height 190 mm)

Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices.
Single-phase
+ neutral

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
25
25 (10 common)
25 (10 common)
50 (10 common)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1

AK5PA212N1
AK5PA212N2
AK5PA212N3
AK5PA212PH12
AK5PA212PH13
AK5PA212PH23
AK5PA232
AK5PA232S
AK5PA532
AK5PA242
AK5PA2312
AK5PA2312S
AK5PA5312

0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.230
0.600
0.700
0.230
0.235
0.610
0.710

50

AK5PA542

0.715

4
5

Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider
components.
Use
Number of tap-offs
Reference
Weight
at 18 mm intervals
kg
For mounting
Single
4
AK5PE17
0.100
plates incorDouble
4
AK5PE27
0.150
porating tap-off

Side stop (AK5JB mounted vertically)

Use
For extension plate
AK5BT01

Sold in
lots of
50

Unit
reference
AK5BT01

Weight
kg
0.005

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight
kg

10

AK5SB1

Thermal
current A
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10

10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails
Fixed part
10
10
AB1 DV10235U
Moving part
10
10
AB1 DVM10235U

0.065

Description

Marking

Strips of clip-in markers

10 identical numbers, signs or
capital letters per strip

09
+

AZ

Sold in
lots of
25
25
25
25

Unit
reference
AB1Rp (1)
AB1 R12
AB1 R13
AB1Gp (1)

Weight
kg
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050

(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1R1 or AB1GA.

Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209

Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215

0.047
0.021

Accessories

Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207

Control terminal blocks

Description

AK5SB1

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211

1/213

9
10

Power distribution in control panels

Dimensions

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Busbar systems

82

AK5JBppp

30

2
79

45

81

3
4

G
a

AK5

No. of
18 mm
points

JB143
JB144
JB145
JB146
JB149
JB1410

344
452
560
668
992
1100

330
438
546
654
978
1086

12
18
24
30
48
54

Busbar feed units

AK5JBppp

Installation of AK5JBppp busbar systems

Connection

Flexible cable with or without cable end

1 x 70 (1)
2 x 35

2 x (9 x 4)

9x4
+
1 x 2.5

9x4
+
1 x 35

Flexible bar

+
flexible cable with or without cable end

(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.

Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A

Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A

Single width extension plates

AK5PC12p. AK5PC32Lp

AK5PA2p1. AK5PA2311. AK5PA211pppp

AK5PE17

17,5

38

35,5

10

10

45,5

105

AK5PCp3. AK5PC33L
AK5PCp4. AK5PC34L
AK5PCp31

105

53 (1)

38

53 (1)

45,5

10

1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
Flexible bar

C.s.a. in mm2
min
max

15

46

54

15 7

Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207

1/214

Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209

References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211

71

Dimensions

Power distribution in control panels

(continued)

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Double extension plate

AK5PA232. AK5PA2312. AK5PA242

AK5PE27

53 (1)

53 (1)
100

2
190

10

40
10
100
190

10

15

46

54

15 7

71

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

AK5PA232S. AK5PA2312S

AK5PA532. AK5PA5312. AK5PA542

5
6
7

Control terminal block

AK5BT01

AK5SB1

20

0,8

Side stop

22

4,2

15,5

10

7
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207

Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209

References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213

Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 et 1/211

1/215

Contents

2 - TeSys motor starters:

enclosed version

Selection guide  page 2/2

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

b Pre-assembled page 2/4
b Assembled by the user page 2/5
2

b Add-on modules page 2/6

b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market,

conforming to UL and CSA standards  page 2/10

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

b TeSys GV2 ME
v Standard  page 2/12
v Assembly of a safety enclosure page 2/14
b TeSys GV3 PC page 2/13

D.O.L. starters for motor control

b 0.55 to 30 kW
v With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breaker  page 2/18
b 2.2 to 45 kW
v Without isolating device page 2/20
v With isolating device  page 2/24

b 0.25 to 7.5 kW
v With 3-phase thermal overload relay page 2/28
b 0.37 to 5.5 kW
v With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor page 2/30

Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW
v Without isolating device page 2/32
b 7.5 to 75 kW
v With isolating device  page 2/36

b 90 to 375 kW
v Without isolating device page 2/42

D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1

b Without isolating device page 2/44

b With isolating device  page 2/48

9
10

2/0

integral 63 contactor breaker and reversing contactor

breaker
b Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly  page 2/52

b For control and protection of motors page 2/56

b For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1 page 2/58
b Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories page 2/59

2
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use
in a machine subject to the application of Machinery
Directive 98/37/CE
b Non-reversing starters page 2/62
b Reversing starters page 2/64

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling

system
Selection guide  page 2/72
b TeSys LF3 P and LF4 P page 2/84

b TeSys LF3 M and LF4 M page 2/85

5
6
7
8
9
10

2/1

General selection guide

TeSys enclosed starters

Applications

D.O.L. starters

Type

Standard starters

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V

437 kW

0.0645 kW

0.5530 kW

0.375.5 kW

0.2545 kW

Manual

Auto

Switch

Circuit-breaker

Fuse carrier

Short-circuit

Overload

Non-reversing

VpF
VCFN
VpFX

GV2 ME
GV3 PC

GV2 LC
GV NGC

LE1 GVME

LE1 M
LE1 D

Reversing

LE2 K
LE2 D

2/4 and 2/5

2/12and 2/13

2/18

2/30

2/20, 2/21 and

2/28

2
3

Starters

4
Isolation

5
Protection

6
Communication

References

7
8

Pages

9
10

2/2

Soft starters

Starters for safety applications

Starters for use on

AS-Interface line

Standard star-delta starters

2.245 kW

0.0611 kW

0.069 kW

0.069 kW

0.065.5 kW

5.5132 kW

7.575 kW

LE4 K
LE4 D

GV2 ME

LG1 K
LG1 D

LG7 K
LG7 D
LJ7 K

LF3P
LF3
M

LE3

K
LE3

D
LE3

LE6

D
LE3

LE8 K
LE8 D
LE2 D

LG8 K
LJ8 K

LF4
P
LF4
M

2/24 and
2/25

2/14 and
2/15

2/63

2/62, 2/63,
2/68 and
2/69

2/84 and
2/85

2/32,
2/33 and
2/42

2/36 and
2/37

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2/3

References

3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC60204.
Marking on operator O
Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included).
IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable.
Cover lockable in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating.

580545

3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)

VCF0GE

Operator
Handle

Red, standard,
padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8 shank)

Red, long, padlockable

with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8 shanks)

569394

VCF3GE

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,

pre-assembled

b
b
b
b
b

580546

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications

1
2

lthe

Power
AC-23
at 400V

Incorporated
switch
body

Possible
attachments (2)

Reference

mm
Yellow
60 x 60

A
10
16
20
25
32
50
63

kW
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
22
30

V02
V01
V0
V1
V2
V3
V4

2
2
2
2
2
3
3

VCF02GE
VCF01GE
VCF0GE
VCF1GE
VCF2GE
VCF3GE
VCF4GE

kg
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.930
0.930

Yellow
90 x 90

100
140

37
45

V5
V6

1
1

VCF5GEN
VCF6GEN

2.190
2.190

Front plate
Dimensions

Weight

3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)

Black, standard,

padlockable
with up to3padlocks
(4to8 shank)

Black
60 x 60

10
16
20
25
32
50
63

4
5.5
7.5
11
15
22
30

V02
V01
V0
V1
V2
V3
V4

2
2
2
2
2
3
3

VBF02GE
VBF01GE
VBF0GE
VBF1GE
VBF2GE
VBF3GE
VBF4GE

0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.930
0.930

Black, long, padlockable

with up to 3padlocks
(4to8 shank)

Black
90 x 90

100
140

37
45

V5
V6

1
1

VBF5GEN
VBF6GEN

2.190
2.190

Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1.

b Degree of protection IP 55.
VCF5GEN

3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)

580548

Operator
Handle

Red padlockable,
either by 1
(8 shank)
or by3padlocks
(6 shank)

9
10

lthe

Power
AC-23
at 400V

A
10
16
20
25
32

kW
4
5.5
7.5
11
15

Front plate
Dimensions
mm
Yellow
60 x 60

Incorporated
switch
body

Possible
attachments (2)

Reference

VN12
VN20
V0
V1
V2

2
2
0
0
0

VCFN12GE
VCFN20GE
VCFN25GE
VCFN32GE
VCFN40GE

(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) For VCF and VBF enclosures, see page 2/6. For VCFN enclosures, see page 2/7.

VCFN12GE

Dimensions:
page 2/8

2/4

Schemes:
page 2/9

Weight

(2)
(2)

kg
0.422
0.422
0.512
0.512
0.512

580549

References

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,

assembled by the user

Empty enclosures

IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate
(for mounting a main or Emergency Stop switch disconnector)
For switch body

lthe

Possible attachments (1)

Reference

A
1032

VCFXGE1

kg
0.340

V02V2

1032

VCFXGE4

0.660

V3

50

VCFXGE2

0.660

VN12, VN20
V02V2

VBFXGE2

TeSys e
nclosed starters

Weight

1
2

IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate

(for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN12, VN20
V02V2

1032

VBFXGE1

0.340

V02V2

1032

VBFXGE4

0.660

V3

50

VBFXGE2

0.660

Rating
A
10

Reference
VN12

Weight
kg
0.110

16

VN20

0.110

Switch bodies for standard applications (2)

Description
3-pole
switch disconnectors

Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)

Description
580550

3-pole
switch disconnectors

V0

Rating
A
10

Reference
V02

Weight
kg
0.200

16

V01

0.200

20

V0

0.200

25

V1

0.200

32

V2

0.200

50

V3

0.200

63

V4

0.200

(
1) See

pages 2/6 and 2/7.

(2) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Dimensions:
page 2/8

Schemes:
page 2/9

2/5

References

TeSys e
nclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Add-on modules

580589

580594

Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF

Description

Rating
A
10
16
20
25
32
50
63

Reference
VZ02
VZ01
VZ0
VZ1
VZ2
VZ3
VZ4

Weight
kg
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.100
0.100

Neutral pole modules

with early make and
late break contacts

10 to 32
50 and 63
100 and 140

VZ11
VZ12
VZ13

0.050
0.100
0.250

Earthing modules

10 to 32
50 and 63
100 and 140

VZ14
VZ15
VZ16

0.050
0.100
0.250

Type of contacts

Reference

N/O + N/C (1)

N/O + N/O

VZ7
VZ20

Main pole module

(mountedinenclosure)

VZ11

580595

580596

VZ0

Description
VZ15

VZ20

Auxiliary contact block

modules with
2 auxiliary contacts

Weight
kg
0.050
0.050

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a

switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ7 or VZ20

V0p

VZ7 or VZ20

or

or

VZ11 or VZ12

V0

VZ11 or VZ12

or

or

VZ14 or VZ15

to

VZ14 or VZ15

or

or

VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 +

V4

+ VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

8
9

VZ0p

VZ0p +

V0p

+ VZ0p +

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ0

VZ0

V0

VZ0

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ1

VZ1

V1

VZ1

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ2

VZ2

V2

VZ2

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ3

VZ3

V3

VZ3

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ12

or

VZ15

VZ4

VZ4

V4

VZ4

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ12

or

VZ15

Note: The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules.
Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body.
(1) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts

10
Schemes :
page 2/9

2/6

References (continued)

TeSys e
nclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Add-on modules

580597

Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN12GE and 20GE

Description
Main pole modules

VZN11

Neutral pole module

withearly make and
late break contacts
Earthing module

580598

Description
Auxiliary contact block
modules

580599

VZN14

Rating
A
10

Reference
VZN12

Weight
kg
0.020

16

VZN20

0.020

10 and 16

VZN11

0.020

10 and 16

VZN14

0.016

Type of contacts

Reference

1 N/O latemakecontact

VZN05

Weight
kg
0.020

1 N/C earlybreakcontact

VZN06

0.020

1
2
3

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a

switch body
VZN12 or VZN20 +

+ VZN12 or VZN20
or
VN12

or

or
VN20

VZN05

VZN11

or
VZN05 or VZN06
or

VZN05 or VZN06

VZN14

6
7
8
9
10

Schemes :
page 2/9

2/7

Dimensions

TeSys e
nclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Dimensions

VCFN12GE to VCFN40GE

131

90

1
2

106

82,5

Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.

4
c

c1

=
a

VpF02GE to VpF2GE, VpFXGE1 (1)

VpF3GE and VpF4GE (2)
VpFXGE2 and VpFXGE4 (2)

VCF or VBF02GE to 4GE

VCFX or VBFXGE1 to GE4

a
90
150
150

b
146
170
170

c
85
106
106

c1
131
152
152

H
130
164
164

(1) Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.

(2)
Cable glands:
2 x
16/21/29 P

top and bottom.

VCF or VBF5GEN and 6GEN

4x4,2

268,5

9
128
190,5

10
References:
pages 2/4 and 2/5

2/8

Schemes:
page 2/9

218,5
241

291

Schemes

TeSys e
nclosed starters

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

Schemes

Switch disconnectors

Neutral pole
module

5/L3

Main pole module

6/T3

3/L2
4/T2

2/T1

1/L1

Enclosed or switch bodies

Auxiliary contact blocks

21

13

23

13

21

14

24

14

22

VZN06

22

VZN05

13

VZ20

14

VZ7

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
References:
pages 2/4 and 2/5

2/9

TeSys e
nclosed starters

569396

References

Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 25 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, IEC60204, UL 508 and
CSA22.2 n 14.
b Marking on operator O
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included).
b NEMA type 1 and type 12 enclosures, IP 65 degree of protection, sealable and lockable.

3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)

VC1GUN

Operator

569397

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

for the North American market,
conforming to UL and CSA standards

Rating

Handle

3
569398

VC3GUN

UL

Standard
power
ratings
of UL motors

600 V

240 V 480 V 600 V

HP

HP

HP

32
40
63
80

20
25
45
63

5
5
10
15

10
10
20
30

125
175

100
115

25
30

50
50

Front plate
Dimensions

IEC
(Ith)

mm

Red, standard,
padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

Yellow
60 x 60

Red, long,
padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

Yellow
90 x 90

Incorporated
switch
body

Possible
attachments

Reference Weight

10
15
30
40

V1
V2
V3
V4

2
2
2
2

VC1GUN
VC2GUN
VC3GUN
VC4GUN

0.500
0.500
0.930
0.930

50
60

V5
V6

1
1

VC5GUN
VC6GUN

2.190
2.190

kg

Add-on modules for VC enclosure

Description

Rating

Reference Weight

A
25
32
50
63

VZ1
VZ2
VZ3
VZ4

0.050
0.050
0.100
0.100

Neutral pole module

with early make and
late break contacts

10 to 32
50 and 63
100 and 140

VZ11
VZ12
VZ13

0.050
0.100
0.250

Earthing modules

10 to 32
50 and 63
100 and 140

VZ14
VZ15
VZ16

0.050
0.100
0.250

Type of contacts

Reference Weight

N/O + N/C (2)

N/O + N/O

VZ7
VZ20

5
569400

569401

VC5GUN

kg

Main pole module

(mounted in enclosure)

Description

kg

VZ11

VZ15

Auxiliary contact block

modules with
2 auxiliary contacts

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body

569402

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body

VZ7 or VZ20

VZ14 or VZ15

VZ11 or VZ12
or

+
V4

or
VZ1 to VZ4

VZ7 or VZ20
or

to

or
VZ20

+
V1

or
VZ11 or VZ12

VZ14 or VZ15
or

VZ1 to VZ4

10
(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts.

2/10

0.050
0.050

TeSys e
nclosed starters

Dimensions,
schemes

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

for the North American market,
conforming to UL and CSA standards

Dimensions

VC1GUN and VC2GUN

164

141

Fixing (rear view)

121

87
132,1

4x4,2

98

VC3GUN and VC4GUN

87
132,1

170

193

Fixing (rear view)

141

164

4x4,2

VC5GUN and VC6GUN

Fixing (rear view)

291

268,5

6
7
241

128

218,5

4x4,2

190,5

Schemes

Switch disconnectors

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

Enclosed switch disconnectors

or switch bodies

Main pole module

Neutral pole module

Auxiliary contact block modules

10

13

21

13

23

22

14

24

VZ20

14

VZ7

2/11

TeSys enclosed starters

References

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and accessories, for customer assembly

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/46, 3/55 and 3/57.
Starters consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standard IEC 60947-4-1.

GV2

2
500277_1

Ithe in
enclosure
(A)

ME ME ME
01
02
03
0.16 0.25 0.4

500280_1

GV2MC

ME
07
2.5

ME
08
4

ME
10
6.3

ME
14
9

ME
16
13

ME
20
17

ME
21
21

ME
22
23

Surface
mounting,
double
insulated with
protective
conductor.
Sealable cover

IP 41

Possible no. of
side mounting auxiliary
contact blocks on GV2ME
LH side
RH side
1
1

IP55

IP 55 for
1
temperature < + 5 C

GV2MC03

0.300

Flush
mounting,
with protective
conductor

IP 41 (front face)

GV2MP01

0.115

IP 41 (reduced
flush mounting)
IP 55 (front face)

GV2MP03

0.115

GV2MP02

0.130

IP 55 (reduced
flush mounting)

GV2MP04

0.130

Reference

Weight
kg
0.800

GV2MP

Degree of
protection

Reference

GV2MC01

kg
0.290

GV2MC02

0.300

or GV2MCK04 (1)

Weight

0.420

Front plate

500278_1

ME
06
1.6

Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME

Type

ME ME
04
05
0.63 1

Description

GV2-MP

For direct control,

through a panel,
of a chassis mounted GV2ME

GV2CP21

IP 55

Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Description

GV2CP21

7
500279_1

Padlocking device (2)

for GV2ME operator
(padlocking is only
possible in the O position)

GV2-CP

Mushroom
head
Emergency
stop
pushbutton
40 mm, red

Spring return (2)

Latching (2)
IP55

Sold in
lots of
1 to 3 padlocks 4 1
to 8 mm

Unit
reference
GV2V01

Weight
kg
0.075

GV2K011

0.052

Key release, key n 1

455
Turn to release
1

GV2K021

0.160

GV2K031

0.115

GV2K04 (3)

0.120

IP55 for
10
temperature
between
+

C and +

40

GV2E01

0.012

IP55 for
10
temperature
between
-20C and +40C
100

GV2E02

0.012

AB1VV635UBL

0.015

AB1AC6BL

0.003

1
Sealing kit

GV2K011

GV2-K011
Neutral
terminal

10

Partition

For enclosures
and front plate

50

(1) Enclosure GV2MCK04 is fitted with a GV2K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
as standard.
(2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2Mp01.
(3) Padlockable in O position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.

2/12

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3P (for customer assembly)

References (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48 and 3/59.
GV3P40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A.
Starters consisting of a GV3P motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and IEC/EN 60947-2.

Metal enclosures fitted with a padlockable rotary handle (1),

for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3P, up to 30 A
Composition (2)

Type

b Metal enclosure,
b Black handleLU9AP11
Padlocking in ON/OFF position
b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter

Surface
mounting

Degree of Reference
protection
of
enclosure
IP55
GV3PC01
IK09

b Metal enclosure,
b Red handleLU9AP12
Padlocking in OFF position
b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter

Surface
mounting

IP55
IK09

Weight

kg
2.000

GV3PC02

2.000

(1) For special applications a GV3L magnetic motor circuit-breaker can be fitted in this type of
enclosure. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Components for customer assembly. Circuit-breaker to be ordered separately.

3
4

Dimensions
7,7

97,5

97,5

312

References
dimensions

150

181

52,5 52,5

203,5

7
8
9
10

2/13

TeSys enclosed starters

References

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and accessories
Assembly of a safety enclosure

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/46, 3/55 and 3/57. Starters
consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard
IEC60947-4-1.

GV2

ME
02

ME
03

Ithe in
0.16 0.25 0.4
enclosure
(A)
500277_1

ME
01

ME
04

ME
05

0.63 1

ME
06

ME
07

ME
08

ME
10

ME
14

ME
16

ME
20

ME
21

ME
22

1.6

2.5

6.3

13

17

21

23

Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME

Type

Degree of
protection

Possible number of
Reference
side-mounting auxiliary
contact blocks on GV2ME

LH side
Surface
IP 41
1
mounting,
double
IP 55
1
insulated with
protective
conductor.
Sealable cover
IP 55 for
1
temperature < + 5 C

3
GV2MC

RH side
1
GV2MC01

kg
0.290

GV2MC02

0.300

or GV2MCK04 (1)
1

GV2MC03

0.420
0.300

Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Description

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

Padlocking devices (2)

for GV2ME operator (padlocking
is only possible in the O position)
500279_1

Weight

Mushroom
Spring return (2)
head
Emergency Latching (2)
stop
IP 55
pushbutton
40mm, red

Sealing kit
GV2K011

GV2-K011

For enclosures
and front plate

Weight
kg

GV2V01

0.075

GV2K011

0.052

Key release, key n 1

455

GV2K021

0.160

Turn to
release

GV2K031

0.115

GV2K04 (3)

0.120

IP 55 for
10
temperature
between
+5C and +40C

GV2E01

0.012

IP 55 for
10
temperature
between
-20C and +40C

GV2E02

0.012

1 to 3 padlocks 4 1
to 8mm

Neutral
terminal

100

AB1VV635UBL

0.015

Partition

50

AB1AC6BL

0.003

(1) Enclosure GV2MCK04 is fitted with a GV2K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
as standard.
(2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2Mp01.
(3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.

9
10

2/14

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and accessories
Assembly of a safety enclosure

Assembly of a safety enclosure

(conforming to standards IEC 60974-4-1, IEC 60204 and IEC 60292)
Type of product

Page

Reference

Enclosure

Opposite

GV2MCpp

Circuit-breaker

3/46

GV2MEpp

Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (1)

3/55

GV2Apppp

1
2

or GV2AXppp
Latching mushroom head
Stop pushbutton

Opposite

GV2K021
or GV2K031

or GV2K04
(1) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2/15

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions,
mounting

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME

Dimensions

Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MC0p

(1)

147

130

84

93

(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.

Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04

(1)

130

147

5
84

93

145,5
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.

Mounting

Flush mounting enclosures GV2MP0p (panel cut-out)

GV2 MP0p

GV2 MP01, MP02

GV2 MP03, MP04

Front plate GV2CP21

9,5

1...6
12

=
a

GV2
MP01, MP02
MP03, MP04

10

2/16

93,5
106,5

86

71
93

12

76
93

7,5

133

62

1...4

6,5

118

133

117

140

127

21

11,5

71

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME

Schemes

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

GV2MEpp

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
GVAE1

GVAE11

13

11

13

21

13

23

14

12

14

22

14

24

or

GVAE20

3
4

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

97

51
52

Short-circuit signalling contacts

43
(73)
44
(74)

08
06

(63)
33
(64)
34

05

43
(73)
44
(74)

GVAM11

(61)
31

GVAN20

(62)
32

GVAN11

GVAD1001

98

53
54

97
98

52

95
96

95
96

54

GVAD1010

51

GVAD0101

53

GVAD0110

Voltage trips

D1

D2
E2

C1
C2

GVAXppp

E1

D1

GVASppp

D2

GVAUppp

7
8

Wiring diagram for undervoltage trip used on potentially dangerous machines, conforming to INRS

D2

9
D1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

10 AgG max

10

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

E2

E1

2/17

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics,
references

D.O.L. starters with manual control,

with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW

Characteristics (1)

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

GV2 LC: IP 547

GV NGC: IP 407
GV2 LC: 690 V
GV NGC: 500 V
Polycarbonate (2)

Operational voltage Ue
Material

References

Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with 8 shank, to be ordered separately)

A
1.6

Breaking capacity Icu

conforming to IEC 60947-2
220/
400/
440 V
230 V
415 V
kA
kA
kA
100
100
100

2.5

100

100

100

6.3

533740

Rating
In

500 V

Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %

Reference

Weight

kA
100

A
13 In

GV2 LC0206 (3)

kg
0.780

100

100

13 In

GV2 LC0207 (3)

0.780

100

100

100

13 In

GV2 LC0208 (3)

0.780

100

100

100

100

13 In

GV2 LC0210 (3)

0.780

10

100

100

20

10

13 In

GV2 LC0214 (3)

0.780

14

100

50

20

10

13 In

GV2 LC0216 (3)

0.780

18

100

50

20

10

13 In

GV2 LC0220 (3)

0.780

25

100

50

30

15

12 In

GV NGC0225

2.450

32

100

50

30

15

12 In

GV NGC0232

2.450

40

100

50

30

15

12 In

GV NGC0240

2.450

50

100

50

30

15

12 In

GV NGC0250

2.450

63

100

50

30

15

12 In

GV NGC0263

2.450

GV2 LC02pp
526149

526148

GV2 LC02pp

6
7

GV NGC02pp

Variants

Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background

Add the letter R to the references selected above.
Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.

526148

Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover

Description
Black rotary handle

Red rotary handle on yellow background

GV2 LC02

Rating
A
1.618
2563

Reference
GV2 LC02
GV NGC02

1.618
2563

GV2 LC02R
GV NGC02R

Weight
kg
0.300
0.550
0.300
0.550

(1) Circuit-breaker characteristics:

GV2 L: see pages 3/14 and 3/15.
NG 125L: product marketed under the Schneider Electric brand, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) The following can be fitted by the customer: a GVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the
RH side.

10

2/18

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions,
scheme

D.O.L. starters with manual control,

with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW

Dimensions

GV NGC0225NGC0263

150

330

348

120

88

167
237

173

1
2

166

65

GV2 LC0206LC0220

186,3

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type
GV2 LC

At top
ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

At bottom
ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

GV NGC

2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40

2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40

5/L3

3/L2

6
7

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

1/L1

Scheme

8
9
10

2/19

Characteristics,
references

TeSys enclosed starters

2

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Characteristics

1
2

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

IP 659: LE2 K
IP 657: LEp D09D35
IP 557: LEp D405D955
Operation: - 5+ 40 C

Operating positions

Same as that of the contactors

Material

Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LEp D09D35

Sheet steel: LEp D405D955

References

LE1 D12pp

Maximum Basic reference,

current
to be completed by adding
I the
the voltage code (3)
up to
A
9
12
18
25
35
40
50
65
80
95

Weight

LE1 D09pp
LE1 D12pp
LE1 D18pp
LE1 D25pp
LE1 D35pp
LE1 D405pp
LE1 D505pp
LE1 D655pp
LE1 D805pp
LE1 D955pp

kg
0.920
0.920
1.015
1.015
4.320
4.820
4.850
4.850
5.140
5.440

LE2 K065pp
LE2 K095pp
LE2 D09pp (4)
LE2 D09pp
LE2 D12pp
LE2 D18pp
LE2 D25pp
LE2 D35pp
LE2 D405pp
LE2 D505pp
LE2 D655pp
LE2 D805pp
LE2 D955pp

1.080
1.080
2.100
2.100
2.100
2.410
2.570
4.100
5.270
5.470
5.470
6.700
7.000

Reversing starters
526424

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
230 V 400 V
690 V
kW
kW kW kW kW kW
2.2
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
5.5
11
11
11
15
15
7.5
15
15
15
18.5 18.5
11
18.5 22
22
22
30
15
22
25
30
30
33
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
22
37
45
45
55
45
25
45
45
45
55
45

526423

Non-reversing starters

6
LE2 D12pp

1.5
2.2

2.2
4

2.2
4

3
4

6
9

3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
25

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45

5.5
9
11
15
22
25
37
45
45

5.5
9
11
15
22
30
37
45
45

5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
22
30
37
55
55

5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
30
33
37
45
45

9
12
18
25
35
40
50
65
80
95

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately,
see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons).
(3) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
42
48
110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
LE2 K
B7
D7
E7
F7

M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
LE1, LE2 D B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7 M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales
Office.

8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/22

2/20

Schemes :
page 2/23

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

526425

Description

Standard versions comprise:

b For non-reversing starters:
v 1 green Start button I,
v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.

526426

LE1 D12ppA04

LE1 D12ppA05

b For reversing starters:

v LE2 K:
- 1 Start button A,
- 1 Start button E,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button.
v LE2 D09D35:
- 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button O,
v LE2 D405D955:
- 1 blue Reset button R.

526427
526428
526429

Application

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (2)
A04

No pushbuttons on cover

LE1 D09D955
LE2 D09D955

1 green Start button I

1 green Start button II
1 red Stop/Reset button O

LE2 D405D955

A11

1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D09D955
LE2 K06 and K09
LE2 D09D35

A05

1 3-position stay put selector

switch (I-O-II)
(I: Automatic Start; O: Stop;
II: Manual Start)
1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D09D35

A09

1 2-position stay put selector

switch O-I
(O: Stop; I: Manual Start)
1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D09D35

A13

1 3-position selector switch

O-I spring return to centre position
(I: Manual start;
O: Stop, stay put)
1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D09D35

A35

1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on
LE1 and LE2D09 to D35,
LE1 and LE2D405 to D955 starters
ordered with 222 V (M7), 230 V (P7)
or 240 V (U7) control supply
Mounting of an LC1D09 or D12 contactor
in an enclosure identical to LE1D18 (3)

LE1 D405D955
LE2 K06 and K09
LE2 D405D955

A59

LE1D09
LE1D12

Application

Reference

LE1 D405D955

LA9 D09907

LE1 D12ppA09

LE1 D12ppA35

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

LE1 D12ppA13

4
5
6
7
8

Accessory (for customer assembly)

Description

Start pushbutton latching device

for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)

Weight
kg
0.060

(1) See previous page.

(2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04.
(3) See dimensions page 2/22.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schemes :
page 2/23

2/21

10

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters for motor control

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions

LE1 D09 and D12ppT

LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35

LE1 D405D655

LE1 D09 and D12

= =
88

195

312

183

c1

= =
101

c1

201

150

166

TeSys enclosed starters

c1

105

181

3
4

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05
Variant A09
Variant A13
Variant A35

c1
128.5
135
128.5
135
135
135

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05
Variant A09
Variant A13
Variant A35

c1
LE1 D
153.5
145
153.5
160
160
160

LE2 D
160
145
153.5

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

c1
161
150
161

LE2 K06 and K09

120

165

150

19

146

84
175

LE2 D805 and D955

=

LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405D655

287

165
=

307

195

c1

165

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05
Variant A11

c1
LE1 D
176
165
176

LE2 D
176
165

176

225

367

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

c1
194
190
194

At top
PG

1 x 13 and 1 x 21
1 x 13 and 1 x 29
1 x 13 and 1 x 36
2 x 13 and 2 x 16

ISO
2 x 20
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 1 x 25
1 x 20 and 1 x 32
1 x 20 and 1 x 40
4 x 20

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure

10

c1

257

8
9

LE1 D09 and D12

LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35
LE2 D405
LE1 D405D655, LE2 D505 and D655
LE1 or LE2 D805 and D955
LE2 K
References :
pages 2/20 and 2/21

2/22

Schemes :
page 2/23

At bottom
PG
2 x 13 or 2 x 16
2 x 16 or 2 x 21
1 x 13 and 2 x 21
1 x 13 and 2 x 29
1 x 13 and 2 x 36
2 x 13 and 2 x 16

ISO
2 x 20
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 2 x 32
1 x 20 and 2 x 40
4 x 20

Schemes

LE1 D09D955

LE1 D09D955

Variant A04 or A05

L3

L2

D.O.L. starters for motor control

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device

Schemes
L1

TeSys enclosed starters

KM1
132221

O
Remote control

A1

A1

KM1

A2

LE2 K06, K09

Variant A05

L3

L2

LE2 K06, K09

L1

A2

KM1
B

KM1

14

KM1

R
O

KM1

KM1

KM2

KM2

A1

A1

A1

A2

KM2
A2

A2

LE2 D09D35

LE2 D405D955, LE2 D09D955

with variants A04 or A05

L3

L2

L1

KM1

KM2

A2

KM1
B

KM1

KM1

A1

KM2

LE2 D09D955

Remote
control

KM2

21

II

S1

ll

KM2

Connections
220 V, 230 V, 240 V

A1

KM1
B

KM2

LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D09 and D12

LE1 and LE2 D18D955

A
L3
L3

B
Neutral
Neutral terminal

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V

All products

L3

L1

Other voltages

LE1 and LE2 D09D35

LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D405 and D955

Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Direct connection

References :
pages 2/20 and 2/21

KM1

A2

A2

KM2
A2

KM1

KM1

KM2

KM1

A1

KM2

KM2

A1

KM1

A1

KM2

A2

KM1

O Remote
control
22

9
10

Dimensions :
page 2/22

2/23

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics,
references

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

Characteristics

1
2

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

IP 659: LEp K
IP 657: LEp D09D35
IP 557: LEp D406D806
Operation: - 5+ 40 C

Operating positions

Same as that of the contactors

Material

Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09D35

Sheet steel: LEp D406D806

References

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
230 V 400 V
690 V

511547

Maximum Fuses to be fitted

current
by the customer
I the
Size
Type aM
up to

kW
1.5
2.2

kW
2.2
4

kW
2.2
4

kW
3
4

kW

kW

A
6
9

10 x 38
10 x 38

A
10
12

2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22

4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37

4
5.5
9
11
15
22
25
37
45

4
5.5
9
11
15
22
30
37
45

5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
22
30
37
55

18.5
30
33
37
45

9
12
18
25
35
40
50
65
80

10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
14 x 51
14 x 51
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58

12
16
20
25
32
40
63
80
80

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (3)

or

4
LE4 D12pp

Weight

LE4 K065pp
LE4 K095pp
LE4 D09pp (4)
LE4 D09pp
LE4 D12pp
LE4 D18pp
LE4 D25pp
LE4 D35pp
LE4 D406pp
LE4 D506pp
LE4 D656pp
LE4 D806pp (5)

kg
1.450
1.450
1.960
1.960
1.960
2.200
2.200
5.190
5.770
6.440
6.670
7.100

LE8 K065pp
LE8 K095pp
LE8 D09pp (4)
LE8 D09pp
LE8 D12pp
LE8 D18pp
LE8 D25pp
LE8 D35pp
LE2 D406pp
LE2 D506pp
LE2 D656pp
LE2 D806pp

1.600
1.600
3.550
3.550
3.550
3.700
4.670
5.800
14.170
14.700
14.770
16.000

526430

Reversing starters
1.5
2.2

2.2
4

2.2
4

3
4

6
9

10 x 38
10 x 38

10
12

3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37

5.5
9
11
15
22
25
37
45

5.5
9
11
15
22
30
37
45

5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
22
30
37
55

18.5
30
33
37
45

9
12
18
25
35
40
50
65
80

10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
14 x 51
14 x 51
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58

12
16
20
25
32
40
63
80
80

or

6
7

Non-reversing starters

LE8 D12pp

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
a 50/60 Hz
LEp K
B7
D7
E7
F7

M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
LEp D
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(5) Supplied with 3 cable entries.

8
9
10
Dimensions:
page 2/26

2/24

Schemes:
page 2/27

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

526431

Description

Standard versions comprise:

b For non-reversing starters:
v LE4 K and LE4 D09D656
- 1 green Start button I,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button O.
v LE4 D806
- no pushbuttons on cover

b For reversing starters:

v LE8 K :
- 1 Start button A,
- 1 Start button E,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button.
v LE8 D09D35 :
- 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II,
- 1 red Stop/Reset button O,
v LE2 D406 to D806:
- no pushbuttons on cover.

LE4 D12ppA04

526432

Protection
LE4 and LE8 K
LE4 and LE8 D09D25
LE4 and LE2 D35D806

Power circuit
1 3-pole isolating device
1 3-pole isolating device
1 3-pole isolating device

3
Control circuit
None
+ 1 additional pole
+ 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

LE4 D12ppA05

Application

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (2)
A04

No pushbuttons on cover

LE4 D09D656
LE8 D09D35

1 green Start button I

1 green Start button II
1 red Stop/Reset button O

LE2 D406D806

1 blue Reset button R

LE4 D09D806
LE8 K06 and K09
LE8 D09D35
LE2 D406D806

A05

1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on LE4 D18D806,
LE8 D18D35 and LE4 D406D806
starters ordered with 220 V (M7),
230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply

LE4 K06 and K09

LE4 D09D806
LE8 K06 and K09
LE8 D09D35
LE2 D406D806

A59

A11

6
7

Accessory (for customer assembly)

Description
Start pushbutton latching device
for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)

Application

Reference

LE4 D406D656

LA9 D09907

Weight
kg
0.060

8
9

(1) See previous page

(2) Example: LE4 D09F7A04.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

10
Dimensions:
page 2/26

Schemes:
page 2/27

2/25

Dimensions

LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09

LE4 D09D35, LE8 D09D35

175

(1)

330

84

120
c1

c1

3
c1
LE4 K
146

Standard version
Variant A05
(1) For LE8 only

LE8 K
146
139

c1
LE4 D
175.5
167
175.5

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

LE4 D406D656

31

LE8 D
182
167
175.5

LE2 D406D806, LE4 D806

=

350

342,5

400 (1)

195

287

a-75

4xM8x25

225

367

c1

31

325

=
186

19 20

348

150

31

165

D.O.L. starters for motor control

2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

31
202

a-50

c1

a
a+57,5

7
a
LE2 D406, D506, D656
300
LE2 D806
400
LE4 D806
400
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Standard version
Variant A05
Variant A11

LE4 and LE8 D09D35

At top
PG

At bottom
PG

LE2 D09D35
LE2 D406 and LE4 D406
LE1 D506D656, LE4 D506 and D656
LE2 D806 and LE4 D806
LE4 K and LE8 K

1 x 13 and 1 x 21
1 x 13 and 1 x 29
1 x 13 and 1 x 36
2 x 13 and 2 x 16

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

8
9

c1
201
190
201

c1
LE2 D
218
218

LE4 D
218
218
218

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure

10
References :
pages 2/24 and 2/25

2/26

Schemes :
page 2/27

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 1 x 25
1 x 20 and 1 x 32
1 x 20 and 1 x 40
4 x 20

1 x 13 and 2 x 21
1 x 13 and 2 x 29
1 x 13 and 2 x 36
2 x 13 and 2 x 16

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 2 x 25
1 x 20 and 2 x 32
1 x 20 and 2 x 40
4 x 20

Schemes

D.O.L. starters for motor control

2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device

LE4 K06, K09

LE4 D09D35

LE4 D406D656

LE4 D806, LE4 D09D656

with variant A04 or A05

F1

Q1

Q1

KM1
KM1

14
A2

LE8 K06, K09

Variant A05

L3

A2

A1

A1

KM1

KM1

KM1

A2

A1

KM1
B

LE8 K06, K09

A1

A2
KM1

L2

KM1

17

Remote control

18

Q1

F1

Q1

KM1

Q1

Q1
O

KM1

Remote control

KM2
KM1

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

KM2

LE8 D09D35

L3

L2

KM1

KM2

A2

KM1

L1

KM1

KM1

A1

KM2

KM2

KM2

LE8 D09LE2 D806

LE2 D406D806

A
Q1

Q1

Q1

F1

Q1

14

S1

Connections
220 V, 230 V, 240 V

A2

KM2
A2

KM1
B

KM2

KM1

KM2

KM1
A1

KM1

KM1
B

KM2
A2

A1

KM2

KM2

A1

KM1

A1

KM2

13

O
Remote control
ll

II

A2

22 21

2 KM1

LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D12

LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE2 D406D806

A
L3
L3

B
Neutral
Neutral terminal

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V

All products

L3

L1

Other voltages

LE4 and LE8 D09D35

LE4 and LE2 D406D806

Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Direct connection

References :
pages 2/24 and 2/25

Q1

L1

21

L3

L2

L1

LE4 K06, K09

LE4 D09D806

TeSys enclosed starters

13 22

Schemes

Dimensions :
page 2/26

2/27

9
10

Characteristics,
references

TeSys enclosed starters

2

D.O.L. starters for motor control

0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases

Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529
Ambient air temperature
Operating positions
Material

Non-reversing starters
Starter LE1M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1
or type 2 coordination, depending on the type of devices used.

511548

References

533789

3
4
5
LE1 M35pppp

Description

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V 240 V
380 V
415 V
230 V
400 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
0.12
0.12
0.25
0.25

Setting range
of thermal
overload relay
LR2K (2)

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)

A
0.540.8

LE1 M35pp05

kg
0.600

0.18

0.18

0.37

0.37

0.81.2

LE1 M35pp06

0.600

0.25

0.25

0.55

0.55

1.21.8

LE1 M35pp07

0.600

0.37

0.37

1.1

0.75

1.82.6

LE1 M35pp08

0.600

0.55

0.55

1.5

1.5

2.63.7

LE1 M35pp10

0.600

1.1

0.75

2.2

2.2

3.75.5

LE1 M35pp12

0.600

1.5

1.1

5.58

LE1 M35pp14

0.600

2.2

2.2

811.5

LE1 M35pp16

0.600

5.5

5.5

1014

LE1 M35pp21

0.600

3.7

7.5

7.5

1216

LE1 M35pp22

0.600

b
v
v
v
v
v

7
8

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947

IP 65
Operation: - 5 to + 40 C
Same as for the TeSys K contactors
Self-extinguishing ABS

The standard version comprises:

1 TeSys contactor LC1Kpp,
1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K,
1 green Start button I,
1 red Stop/Reset button O/R,
1 yellow operating indicator.

b Control may be pulsed or maintained.

b An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the
enclosure.
b For safey applications, see enclosed starters:
GV2MC, LG1K, LG1D, LG7K, LG7D, LJ7K, LG8K and LJ8 K.

Variant

Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K

Delete the last 2 digits of the starter references selected above.
Example: LE1 M35pp

Replacement part

Description

Contactor

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)
LC1 KppA80

(1) For characteristics of TeSys K contactor, see pages 5/10 to 5/13.

For characteristics of TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K, see pages 6/10 and 6/11.
(2) Thermal overload relay fitted as standard.
(3) The contactor coil is pre-wired between 2 phases of the power circuit.
The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage.
Volts
24
220
230
240
380
400
415
a 50/60 Hz
Code
B7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716.

10
Dimensions :
page 2/29

2/28

Weight

Schemes :
page 2/29

Weight
kg
0.180

440
R7

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions,
schemes

D.O.L. starters for motor control

0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases

Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)

108

78

160

130 (5"1/8)

2
3
4

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type

At top
PG
2 x 13 to 2 x 21

LE1 M

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

At bottom
PG
2 x 13 to 2 x 21

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

(1) Can be mounted on machine panel or frame. Knock-outs for 4 x 13 P cable glands.

Schemes
1/L1

L1 L2 L3

5/L3

Choice of type of control built into the product

3/L2

LE1 M35

Control by latching pushbuttons

A

Control by spring return pushbuttons

A

13

14

KM1

KM1

I
13

1 3 5

13

A1

2
T1 T2

6
T3

Reset/OR

O/R

95

A2
H1

A1

KM1

KM1

H1

A1

A2 96

14 A2

2 4

O/R

96

95

14

KM1

Connection
220 V, 230 V, 240 V
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V
Other voltages

A
L3
L3
Terminal 1

B
Neutral
L1
Terminal 2

9
10
References :
page 2/28

2/29

Characteristics,
references

TeSys enclosed starters

2

D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW

with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Characteristics
Conforming to standards
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529
Ambient air temperature
Operating positions
Material

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947

IP 55
Operation: - 5 to + 40 C
Same as for the TeSys K contactors
Polycarbonate (1)

533798

526440

References

4
LE1 GVMEppKpp

Standard power ratings of

3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
230 V 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V
415 V
kW kW kW kW kW
0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75
0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1
0.75

Setting
range of
thermal
trips

Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (2)

Weight

A
11.6

A
22.5

LE1 GVME06Kpp

kg
1.210

0.37

0.75 0.75 1.1

1.1

1.5

1.62.5

33.5

LE1 GVME07Kpp

1.210

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

1.5

1.5
2.2

2.2
3

2.54

51

LE1 GVME08Kpp

1.210

1.1

2.2

2.2
3

46.3

78

LE1 GVME10Kpp

1.210

1.5
2.2

3
4

4
5.5

5.5
7.5

610

138

LE1 GVME14Kpp

1.210

2.2
3

5.5

5.5
7.5

7.5

9
11

914

170

LE1 GVME16Kpp

1.210

Variants
526441

Description

Suffix to be added Weight

to the starter
reference (3)
kg
A59

Neutral terminal
Description

Reference
LE1 GVMEK

Weight
kg
0.740

Sold in
lots of
1

Unit
reference
GV2 V01

Weight
kg
0.075

GV2 K011

0.052

GV2 K021

0.160

1
1
10

GV2 K031
GV2 K04 (5)
GV2 E01

0.115
0.120
0.012

Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit fitted

(references of combination motor starters
for customer assembly, see pages 1/6 and 1/7)

LE1 GVMEK

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description

Padlocking device (4)

for GV2 ME operator (padlocking
is only possible in the O position)
Mushroom
Spring return (4)
head Stop
pushbutton
Latching (4)
40 mm,
IP 55
red

Sealing kit

1 to 3 padlocks
4 to 8 mm

Key release,
key n 455
Turn to release

IP 55 for
temperature
between
+5C and +40C
IP 55 for
10
GV2 E02
0.012
temperature
between
-20C and +40C
(1) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
42
48
110 115 220 230 240 380
400
415
440
a 50/60 Hz
Item
B7
D7
E7
F7

M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59.
(4) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit.
(5) Padlockable in position O using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.

9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/31

2/30

Schemes :
page 2/31

Dimensions,
schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

2

D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW

with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK

201

183

1
2
=

86

=
101

94

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type

At top
ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

LE1GV

At bottom
ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25

Schemes

LE1 GVMEK
L3

L2

L1

A
Q1
Q1

External
control

KM1

A1

6
KM1

A2

KM1

Connections
220 V, 230 V, 240 V

A
L3

B
Neutral

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V

L3

L1

Other voltages

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

7
8
9
10

References :
page 2/30

2/31

Characteristics,
references

TeSys enclosed starters

2

Star-delta starters
5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device (1)

Characteristics

1
2

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

IP 659: LE3 K
IP 657: LE3 D09D35
IP 557: LE3 D405D150
Operation: - 5 to + 40 C

Operating positions

Same as that of the contactors

Material

Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09D35

Sheet steel: LE3 D405D150

References

Maximum operating rate:

LE3 K: 12 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
LE3 D: an LAD S2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at
the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking
time.

526435

3
4

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors

Mains voltage - delta connection
220 V
380/400 V 415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
5.5

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (3)
LE3 K065pp

kg
1.460

LE3 K095pp

1.460

LE3 D09pp (4)

3.650

7.5

7.5

7.5
or

5
LE3 D12pp

6
7

Weight

5.5

11

11

11

LE3 D12pp

3.650

11

18.5

22

22

LE3 D18pp

3.750

15

30

30

30

LE3 D35pp

5.160

18.5

37

37

37

LE3 D405pp

8.160

30

55

59

59

LE3 D505pp

8.150

37

75

75

75

LE3 D805pp

14.000

63

110

110

110

LE3 D115pp

24.500

75

132

132

147

LE3 D150pp

24.500

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see
pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons).
(3) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
42
48
110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
a 50/60 Hz
LE3 K
B7
D7
E7
F7

M7
P7
U7

LE3 D
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7 M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your
Regional Sales Office.

8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/34

2/32

Schemes :
page 2/35

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters
5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

526436

Description

The standard version comprises:

b LE3 K and LE3 D09D35:

v 1 green Start button I,
v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.
b LE3 D405D150:
v no pushbuttons on cover.

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

526437

LE3 D12ppA04

Application

No pushbuttons on cover

LE3 D09D35

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (1)
A04

1 green Start button I

1 red Stop/Reset button O

LE3 D405D150

A06

1 blue Reset button R

LE3 D09D805

A05

1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on
starters LE3 D115 and D150

LE3 K065 and K095 A59

LE3 D09D805

Mechanical interlock
Fitted as standard on starters
LE3 K and LE3 D09D35

LE3 D405 to D150

3
4

A64

LE3 D12ppA05
(1) Example: LE3D09F7A04

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6
7
8
9
10

Schemes :
page 2/35

2/33

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

Star-delta starters
5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions

LE3 K065, K095

120

146

348

84

330

150

19

LE3 D09D35

165

175

3
4

c1

186

Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

LE3 D405 and D505

c1
175.5
167
175.5

LE3 D805D150
a - 75

b - 75

b - 50

b + 57,5

b (1)

287

195

225

=
=

c1

367

c1

a - 50

c1 + 15,5

a
a + 57,5

7
Standard version
Variant A05
Variant A06

8
9

c1
190
194
194

LE3
a
D805
400
D1155
500
D1505
500
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

b
400
600
600

LE3
Standard version
Variant A05
Variant A06

c1
D805
202
218
218

D115, D150
252
268

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure
LE3 D09D35

At top
PG

LE3 D405

1 x 29

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40
1 x 32

LE3 D505

1 x 36

1 x 40

LE3 D805

1 x 36

LE3 K

2 x 13 and 2 x 16

10
References :
pages 2/32 and 2/33

2/34

Schemes :
page 2/35

At bottom
PG

1 x 40

1 x 29,
2 x 13 and 2 x 21
1 x 36,
2 x 13 and 2 x 29
2 x 13 and 3 x 36

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or
2 x 32 or 2 x 40
1 x 32,
2 x 20 and 2 x 25
1 x 40,
2 x 20 and 2 x 32
2 x 20 and 3 x 40

4 x 20

2 x 13 and 2 x 16

4 x 20

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

Star-delta starters
5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device

Schemes

KM2

KM3

W1

V1

U1

L3

L2

L1

LE3 K065 and K095

KM1

W2

W1

A1

A1

A1

A1

KM3
A2

A2

KM1
A2

Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).

KM2

LE3 D09D35

LE3 D405D805
A

W1

V1

U1

L3

L2

L1

LE3 D09D805

KM1

A2

V2

KM2
KM1

KM3

W2

V1
V2

U2

U1

U2

W2

17

KM1

KM1

A1

KM3
A2

KM2
A2

KM1
B

A1

KM1

A1

KM3
A2

KM2
A2

KM1
B

KM2

KM3

A1

A1

KM1

A1

KM3

KM2

A2

KM2

A2

Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).

W2

V2

KM2

U2

KM2

W1

V1

Remote
control
I

KM2

U1

18

KM1

V2

KM3

U2

KM2

Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or a circuit-breaker.

W1

KM2

KM1
KM1

Connections
220 V, 230 V, 240 V

KM3

KM2
Y

A1

A1

KA1

KA1

KM3
A2

KM1

A2

F2
B

A1

A1

KM2

A2

Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).

KM1

KM2

A2

W2

18

17

Remote
control
l

W1
W2

U1

V1
V2

U2

KM1

V2

KM3

U2

KM2

V1

U1

L3

L2

L1

LE3 D115 and D150

LD09 and D12

LE3D18 to D150

A
L3
L3

B
Neutral
Neutral terminal

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V

All products

L3

L1

Other voltages

LE3D09D35
LE3K and LE3D405D150

Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Direct connection

References :
pages 2/32 and 2/33

9
10

Dimensions :
page 2/34

2/35

Characteristics,
references

TeSys enclosed starters

2

Star-delta starters (1)

7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device

Characteristics

1
2

IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

IP 657: LE6 D09D18

IP 557: LE3 D326D806
Operation: - 5 to + 40 C

Operating positions

Same as that of the contactors

Material

Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D

Sheet steel: LE3 D

References

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
An LA2 DS2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the
moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.

511549

Conforming to standards

4
5

LE6 D12pp

Standard power ratings of

squirrel cage motors. Mains
voltage - Delta connection
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V
400 V
kW kW
kW
kW
4
7.5
7.5
7.5

Fuses to be fitted
by the customer
Size
Type
aM

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (3)

Weight

10 x 38

A
20

LE6 D09pp

kg
3.900

5.5

11

11

11

10 x 38

25

LE6 D12pp

3.900

11

18.5

22

22

14 x 51

40

LE6 D18pp

4.850

15

30

30

30

22 x 58

63

LE3 D326pp

7.650

18.5

37

37

37

22 x 58

80

LE3 D406pp

16.900

30

55

59

59

22 x 58

125

LE3 D506pp

17.000

37

75

75

75

160

LE3 D806pp

27.500

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see
pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons).
(3) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
42
48
110 115 220 230 240 380 400
415
440
50/60 Hz
B7 D7 E7 F7
FE7 M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6
7
8
9
10
Dimensions:
page 2/38

2/36

Schemes:
page 2/39

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Star-delta starters
7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

526438

Description

The standard version comprises:

b LE6 D09D18:
v 1 green Start button I,
v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.

b LE3 D326D806:
v no pushbuttons on cover
Protection
LE6 D09 and D12
LE6 D18LE3 D806

Power circuit
1 3-pole isolating device
1 3-pole isolating device

Control circuit
+ 1 additional pole
+ 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08

Variants (pre-assembled)

LE6 D12ppA04

526439

Description

LE6 D12ppA05

Application

No pushbuttons on cover

LE6 D09D18

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (1)
A04

1 green Start button I

1 red Stop/Reset button O

LE3 D326D806

A06

1 blue Reset button R

LE6 D09LE3 D806

A05

1 neutral terminal

LE6 D09LE3 D806

A59

Mechanical interlock
Fitted as standard on
starters LE6 D09D18

LE3 D326D806

A64

3
4
5

(1) Example: LE6 D09F7A04.

6
7
8
9
10
Dimensions:
page 2/38

Schemes:
page 2/39

2/37

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

Star-delta starters
7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

Dimensions
LE6 D09D18

LE3 D326

3
4

c1

=
186

225

367

348

330

190

31

195

287
Standard version
Variant A04
Variant A05

31

c1
175.5
167
175.5

LE3 D406D806
=

a-75

b-75

b-50

b (1)

b+57,5

31

4xM8x25
=

6
c1

a-50

LE3
D406, D506
D806

a+57,5

a
400
500

b
500
700

c1
218
269

(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure

8
9

LE6 D09D18

At top
PG

LE3 D326

1 x 21

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
1 x 32

LE3 D406

1 x 29

1 x 32

LE3 D506

1 x 36

1 x 40

LE3 D806

1 x 36

1 x 40

10
References :
pages 2/36 and 2/37

2/38

Schemes :
page 2/39

At bottom
PG

2 x 13, 2 x 16
and 1 x 21
2 x 13, 2 x 21
and 1 x 29
2 x 13, 2 x 29
and 1 x 36
2 x 13 and 3 x 36

ISO
2 x 20 or 2 x 25
or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
2 x 20, 2 x 25
and 1 x 32
2 x 20, 2 x 25
and 1 x 32
1 x 40, 2 x 20
and 2 x 32
2 x 20 and 3 x 40

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

Star-delta starters
7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

Schemes

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LE6 D09D18

A
Q1
Q1

W1

V1

U1

Q1

KM2

W2

V2

KM1

KM3

KM2

U2

A1
KM3

A2

KM2

A2

KM1

A1

KM1

A1

KM3

KM2

A2

Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)

3
4

KM2

W2

V2

U2

W1

V1

U1

KM1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LE3 D326D806
A
F1

Q1

KM2

14

W2

V2

U2

KM1
KM2

Connections
220 V, 230 V, 240 V

KM2

KM2

A1

KM3

A2

KM1

A1

KM1

A1

KM3

A2

Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)

A2

5
6

3
4

2
W2

V2

KM1

W1

4
V1

U1
U2

S1
Remote
control

13 22

KM3

KM2

21

W1

V1

U1

Q1

LE6 D09 and D12

LE6 D18LE3 D806

A
L3
L3

B
Neutral
Neutral terminal

380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V

All products

L3

L1

Other voltages

LE6 D09D18
LE3 D326D806

Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Direct connection

8
9
10

References :
pages 2/36 and 2/37

Dimensions :
page 2/38

2/39

TeSys enclosed starters

References

Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons

500118_1

Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device

Description

500120_1

ZB5 AA331

Flush, green I (1)

For
use on
LE1 D09...D35

Unit
reference
ZB5 AA331

Weight
kg
0.018

Projecting, red O (1)

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AL432

0.019

Adaptation kit
for head ZB5AL432

LE1 D09 and D12

LAD 9091

0.002

LE1 D18...D35

LAD 91810

0.003

ZB5 AA0

0.022

+ZBA 639 (3)

0.001

LE1 D09 and D12

LAD 9092

0.002

LE1 or LE2 D18...D35

LAD 91810

0.003

LE3, LE6, LE4

or LE8 D09...D35

LAD 9T4

0.004

Heads for Reset pushbuttons

ZB5 AL432

LE1 D09...D35

500117_1

Flush, blue R(2)

4
Adaptation kit for head
ZB5AA0 + ZBA639

5
500119_1

LAD 9091

Heads for selector switches

500121_1

ZB5 ADp

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AD3

0.024

2-position stay put

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AD2

0.024

3-position
spring return to centre

LE1 D09...D35

ZB5 AD5

0.024

1 N/O spring return

LE1 D09...D35

ZEN L1111

0.010

1 N/C spring return

LE1 D09...D35

ZEN L1121

0.010

Mounting for contact block

LE1 D09 and D12

LAD 90909

0.008

LEp D18...D35 (4)

LAD 91809

0.014

Contact blocks

8
500122_1

ZEN L1111

9
10

3-position stay put

ZEN-L1111
LAD 91809

2/40

(1) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9091 or LAD 91810, depending on size.
(2) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9092.
(3) Sold in lots of 10.
(4) LE1, LE2, LE3, LE4, LE6 or LE8.

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device

511551

Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters without isolating device

Designed
for use with
LE1 D09 and D12

Head(s)
mounted on cover
Without

Reference
DE1 DS1A04

Weight
kg
0.300

1 flush blue head R

DE1 DS1A05

0.300

1
2

DE1 DS1A04

511552

3
1 flush green head I
1 projecting red head O

DE1 DS1

0.300

4
1 flush blue head R
1 switch

DE1 DS1A13

0.300

511553

DE1 DS1A05

LE1 D18...D35

Without

DE1 DS2A04

0.500

6
1 flush blue head R

DE1 DS2A05

0.500

1 flush green head I

1 projecting red head O

DE1 DS2

0.500

1 flush blue head R

1 switch

DE1 DS2A13

0.500

511554

DE1 DS1

8
9
10

DE1 DS1A13

2/41

TeSys enclosed starters

References

Star-delta starters

533866

Star-delta starters (1)

90 to 375 kW, without isolating device

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour.

Maximum starting time: 20 seconds

533867

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2) (3)

Weight

LE3 F185pp

kg
31.400

100

200

200

220

LE3 F225pp

33.000

110

220

220

250

LE3 F265pp

50.800

160

280

280

315

LE3 F330pp

80.000

185

315

355

375

LE3 F400pp

82.000

Specifications

4
5

Standard power ratings

of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage - delta connection
220 V
380 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
90
160
160
185

Enclosure

LE3 F185F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559

No pushbuttons on cover

LE3 F185F400

Connections

LE3 F185F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit

connections

LE3 Fppppp

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description
1 green Start button I
1 red Stop/Reset button O

For
use on
LE3 F185F400

Suffix to be added
to the starter
reference(4)
A06

(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see
pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
48
110
220/230 230
240
380/400 400
415
50/60 Hz
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
For other voltages, see pages 5/130 to 5/139.
(3) LC1 F185 and F225: contactors fitted with LX9 F coils,
LC1 F265F400: contactors fitted with LX1 F coils.
(4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.

7
8

Other versions

9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/43

2/42

Schemes :
page 2/43

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions,
schemes

Star-delta starters
90 to 375 kW, without isolating device

Dimensions
LE3 Fppp

a-75

b-75

b-50

b (1)

b+57,5

4xM8x25

a-50

c1

a
a+57,5

LE3
a
b (1)
F185, F225
600
700
F265
700
900
F330, F400
800
1000
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

c
303
303
403

c1
319
319
419

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure
At top
LE3 F185, F225
2 x 48 P
LE3 F265400

At bottom
2 x 13 P and 4 x 48 P

Schemes

5
F1

L3

L2

LE3 Fppp
L1

W1

V1

21 96
13

67

KM2

13

62

54
(14)
55

68

KA1
14

KM2
61 56

8
KA1

A1

KM3
A2

A1

KM2

A2

KM1
A2

F2
KM3:1

A1

KM3

A2

3
4

Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)

KM1

A1 62

W2

V2

U2

W1

V1

U1

KM1

61

14

53 54

KM2

(13)

W2

V2

U2

53

22

O
Remote
control

F1

KM1

KM3

KM2

U1

95

KM3:5

Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, each starter must be provided with short-circuit protection by fuses or a circuit-breaker.

10
References :
page 2/42

2/43

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation

category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

References
Operational Minimum
current
c.s.a. of
up to
phase
conductors

Fuses to be
fitted separately

For use with relay

LR2 D or kit LA9 D
(to be ordered
separately)

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(3)

Weight

LA9 D1275 (4)

LE1 D123pp

kg
0.920

A
16

mm2
2.5

aM
A

gG
A
16

17.5

1.5

20

LR2 D1321 (2)

LE1 D123pp

0.920

24

2.5

25

LR2 D1322 (2)

LE1 D255pp

1.015

32

32

LA9 D0975 (4)

LE1 D255pp

1.015

50

10

50

LE1 D405ppA04
(5)

4.820

57

10

63

LR2 D3359 (2)

LE1 D405pp

4.820

63

16

63

LE1 D655ppA04
(5)

4.850

76

16

80

LR2 D3363 (2)

LE1 D655pp

4.850

90

25

100

LR2 D3365 (2)

LE1 D805pp

5.140

100

35

100

LE1 D805ppA04
(5)

5.140

511550

1
2
LE1 D123

526421

3
4
5

LE1 D405

Specifications
Enclosure

LE1 D12

Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659

LE1 D25

Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557

LE1 D40...D80

Metal, degree of protection IP 559

Control (2 pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover)

LE1 D12D80

1 green Start button I

1 red Stop/Reset button O

No pushbuttons on cover

LE1 DpppppA04

Connections

LE1 D12D80

6
7

Pre-wired control circuit connections

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V, 240 V, 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed
to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only.
(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75.
(5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.

8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/46

2/44

Schemes :
page 2/47

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation

category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

Application

No pushbuttons on cover

LE1 D12 and D25

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (3)
A04

1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D12D80

A05

1 green Start button I and

1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact
(for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay)

LE1 D12 and D25

A07

1 2-position selector switch O-I

(O: Stop; I: Manual Start)
1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D12

A13

Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands

(instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands)

LE1 D12

A20

1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)

LE1 D12D80

A59

2
3
4

Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description

For
use on
LE1 D25D65

Reference

LE1 D12

LA9 D1275

0.040

LE1 D25

LA9 D0975

0.020

LE1 D12

LA9 D931

0.040

LE1 D25

LA9 D941

0.025

110 V

LE1 D12 and D25

LA9 D924

0.020

220 V

LE1 D12 and D25

LA9 D925

0.020

380, 415 V

LE1 D12 and D25

LA9 D926

0.020

LE1 D12 D80

LA1 DNpp

0.030

Start pushbutton latching device

for stay put operation (Start-Stop)
Kits to provide Stop function
without thermal overload relay fitted

Miniature control circuit fuse holder

size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied

Pilot light with neon bulb,

red lens and locking ring

1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts,

please consult your Regional Sales Office

LA9 D09907

Weight
kg
0.060

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings,
in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only.
Example: LE1 D123M7A04.

.
Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Schemes :
page 2/47

2/45

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters and equipment,

without isolating device

Dimensions
LE1 D123

LE1 D255

= =

=
165
=

142

LE1 D405, D655

101

LE1 D805

165

307

195
=

312

135

88

150

120
140

185

166

150

161 (1)

105

181

165
c1

165

257

(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

6
7

Type of enclosure
LE1 D123

At top
2 x 13 P

At bottom
2 x 13 P

LE1 D255

1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P

2 x 16 P

LE1 D405 and LE1 D655

1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P

1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P

LE1 D805

1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P

1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P

8
9
10
References :
pages 2/44 and 2/45

2/46

Schemes :
page 2/47

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment,

without isolating device

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1

3/L2

5/L3

LE1 D123
KM1/5

95

1/L1
2
1

LE1 D123D805, LE1 DpppppA04

96

KM1

14

A1

13

13

KM1

KM1

A2

N
KM1/1

LE1 D255D805

96

14

13

13 22

KM1

N
KM1/1

A1

A2

KM1

13

14

A1

17

KM1

A2

14

18

Remote
control

KM1

21 96

95

95

KM1/5

KM1/1

LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05

KM1/5

14

6
7
8
9
10
References :
pages 2/44 and 2/45

Dimensions :
page 2/46

2/47

References

Equipment for control in utilisation

category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device

Operational
current
up to

Minimum
c.s.a. of
phase
conductors

A
16

mm2
2.5

Fuses to be fitted
by the customer
Size
Type
aM
gG
A
A
10 x 38

16

For use with relay

LR2 D or kit LA9 D
(to be ordered
separately)

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(3)

Weight

LA9 D0975 (4)

LE4 D126pp

kg
1.960

17.5

1.5

10 x 38

20

LR2 D1321 (2)

LE4 D126pp

1.960

20

2.5

10 x 38

20

LA9 D0975 (4)

LE4 D256pp

2.200

22

2.5

10 x 38

25

LR2 D1322 (2)

LE4 D256pp

2.200

40

10

14 x 51

40

LE4 D406ppA04 (5)

5.770

45

10

14 x 51

50

LR2 D3357 (2)

LE4 D406pp

5.770

63

16

22 x 58

63

LE4 D656ppA04 (5)

6.670

76

16

22 x 58

80

LR2 D3363 (2)

LE4 D656pp

6.670

90

25

22 x 58

100

LR2 D3365 (2)

LE4 D806pp (5)

7.100

100

35

22 x 58

100

LE4 D806pp (5)

7.100

LE4 D126

526420

TeSys enclosed starters

References

526419

LE4 D406

Specifications
Enclosure

6
7

LE4 D12 and D25

Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557

LE4 D40D80

Metal, degree of protection IP 559

Control
(2 pushbuttons mounted
on enclosure cover)

LE4 D12D65

1 green Start button I

No pushbuttons on cover

LE4 Dppppp A04

LE4 D80

Isolating device with

external operator

LE4 D12 and D25

1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole

LE4 D40D80

1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2 CB08

LE4 D12D80

Pre-wired power and control circuit connections

Connections

1 red Stop/Reset button O

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings,
in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only.
(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975.
(5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.

9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/50

2/48

Schemes :
page 2/51

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Equipment for control in utilisation

category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

For use on

No pushbuttons on cover

LE4 D12 and D25

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference(3)
A04

1 blue Reset button R

LE4 D12D80

A05

1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O

with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits
without thermal overload relay)

LE4 D12 and D25

A07

1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)

LE4 D12D80

A59

2
3

Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description

For
use on
LE4 D12D65

Reference

Kit to provide Stop function

without thermal overload relay fitted

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D0975

0.020

Miniature control circuit fuse holder

size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V
Fuse supplied

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D941

0.025

Pilot light with neon bulb,

red lens and locking ring

110 V

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D924

0.020

220 V

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D925

0.020

380, 415 V

LE4 D12 and D25

LA9 D926

0.020

LE4 D12D80

LA1 DNpp

0.030

Start button latching device

for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)

1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts,

please consult your Regional Sales Office

LA9 D09907

Weight
kg
0.060

(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings,
in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only.
(3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.

Other versions

Possible combinations of 2 variants.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Schemes :
page 2/51

2/49

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters and equipment,

with isolating device

Dimensions

LE4 D126, D256

LE4 D406, D656

280

260

c1

=
122

LE4
D126
D256

c
132
144

c
c1 (1)

31

c1
139
151

31

(1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

LE4 D806
=

a-75

31

b-75

b-50

b (1)

b+57,5

4xM8x25

a-50

c1

a
a+57,5

7
8

(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure
LE4 D126

At top
2 x 13 P

At bottom
2 x 13 P

LE4 D256

1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P

2 x 16 P

LE4 D406

1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P

1 x 13 P and 2 x 21 P

LE4 D656

1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P

1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P

LE4 D806

1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P

1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P

9
10
References :
pages 2/48 and 2/49

2/50

Schemes :
page 2/51

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment,

with isolating device

Schemes

D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1

5/L3

LE4 D126 and D256

Q1/2 0

9
Q1

13

3/L2

1/L1

LE4 D126D806, LE4 DpppppA04

Q1

96

95

2
1
2

14

Q1

A2

LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05

Q1/2

F1

14

13

KM1

A2

13
A2

Q1/1

14

13

22

96
14

18
17

A1

KM1

Q1/6

KM1

Remote
control

21

95

96

14

Q1

Q1
95

13

F1

14

13

Q1/2

KM1
A1

KM1

Q1/6

LE4 D406 and D656

A1

17

1
2

13

KM1

14

18

KM1

7
8
9
10
References :
pages 2/48 and 2/49

Dimensions :
page 2/50

2/51

526411

References

TeSys enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers,
for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosure
Type of
enclosure

Degree of protection IP 54
with drillings for
door interlock mechanism
(interlock not supplied),
for customer assembly
(1)

For use
on integral

Reference

LD1LD or LD4LD

DE1LT315

Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)

Type

Non-adjustable

3.510

For use on
enclosure

Colour
of knob

Reference

DE1LT315
(LD1)

Red

LA9LC320

0.200

Black

LA9LC321

0.200

Red

LA9LC520

0.200

Black

LA9LC521

0.200

3
DE1LT315

Weight
kg

DE1LT315
(LD4)

Weight

kg

(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of
cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/53.

5
6
7
8
9
10
Dimensions :
page 2/53

2/52

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions,
mounting of accessories

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers,
for customer assembly

Empty metal enclosure, degree of protection IP 54

367

225

2
190

69

192
287

Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands

At

Cable

top

For cable gland

bottom

min.

max.

Type

10

12

13

13M

24

30

36

36M

Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9LC33p and LA9LC53p

For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30

LD4LDp30

LD5LDp30

54

172 (LD4)
174 (LD5)

= 28 =
= =
90

105

105

105

65

243

105
275

105

(1)

45
59 63

59

181

Door drillings

= =
54

= =
54
(1) Thickness: 5 mm max.

9
10
References :
page 2/52

2/53

Characteristics

1
2
3

TeSys e
nclosed starters
integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers

Type
Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie)
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V
Mechanical durability at Uc
a
Maximum operating rate
at ambient temperature
c With converter
y 55 C

A
V

Environment
IEC: 60947-1, 60047-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN

Product certifications

ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, VE,
RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR,
LROS, PTB, SEMKO

Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device

Operation
Storage
Operation
Storage

Vibration resistance
Permissible acceleration

5100 Hz

Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration

Impulse duration: 11 ms

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 144 and 529

Conforming to VDE 0106

C
C
C
C

Flame resistance

integral 63
3
63 in AC-3
690
1.2 million operating cycles
5 million operating cycles
3600 operating cycles/hour
600 operating cycles/hour

Conforming to standards

c (1)

Maximum operating altitude

Operating positions
(without derating)

Without derating
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

TH
- 20+ 60
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 50
- 25+ 70
Energised state: 3 gn
De-energised state: 3 gn
Energised state: 8 gn
De-energised state: 8 gn
IP 20B
Protection against direct finger contact
Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and the requirement of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
3000

From main axis

(left-right tilt)

Control circuit characteristics

Rated control
circuit voltage (Uc)
Voltage limits
at q y 55 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Heat dissipation
Operating time (2)
at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz
a 60 Hz
c With converter
Operating
Drop-out
a
Inrush
Sealed
c (1)
Inrush
Sealed
a 50 Hz

V
V
V

a
C
50/60 Hz O
c (1)
C
O

ms
ms
ms
ms

VA
VA
W
W
W

24660
24600
24, 48, 110
0.851.1 Uc
0.250.7 Uc
375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
25 (50 or 60 Hz)
300 for 50 ms
8
8 (50 Hz)
11 (60 Hz)
1235
720
2540
1525

(1) With converter.

(2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

10
References :
pages
2/56
to 2/59

2/54

Dimensions :
page 2/60

Schemes :
page 2/61

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys e
nclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers

Pole characteristics
Type
Rated thermal current
(Ith)
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Heat dissipation
in the power circuits of the
contactor breaker and its
protection module
Rated making capacity
Rated breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2

ensuring continuity of service

Total breaking time

Thermal stress limit
Cabling

Tightening torque

integral 63
63

Hz

4060

Conforming to IEC 60947-4

kV

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

Operational current

V
A

690
25

32

40

50

63

Power per pole, hot state

4.4

5.8

440

480/ 525

600/ 690

q y 40 C

I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A

I peak conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA
Operational voltage
V
Value of cos j
Icu (O-t CO)
Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO)
Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO)

With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz

12 or 15 x Ith (1)
105
220/ 240
380/ 415

0.25
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
O
t
CO
rCO
ms
A 2s

Flexible cable without cable end mm2

Flexible cable with cable end
mm2
Solid cable
mm2
N.m

1
2

0.25
0.25
0.25
0.5
50
40
35
10
50
40
35
10
50
50
30
10
: breaking short-circuit current (open)
: time
: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual)
: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)

4
300 x 103
Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 50 or 2 x 35
2 x 25
1 x 50
6

Minimum c.s.a.
1x6
1x6
1x6

3
4
5

Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type
Protection

Thermal protection

Magnetic protection
conforming to
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2

Standard motors,
frequent starting,
distribution circuits
Conforming to standards
Number of poles
Number of protected poles
Rated operational voltage
Maximum continuous current
Setting range
(Irth min./Irth max.)
Temperature compensation
Protection against
phase imbalance
Tripping class
Instantaneous trip current
setting range
Tripping tolerance

V
A
A
C

Irth
max.

LB1 LD03P

LB1 LD03M

LB6 LD03P

LB1 LD03L

Standard motors

Standard motors

Frequent starting

Distribution circuits

IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) and NF C

63-650
63-650
3
3
3
3
690
690
1363
1363
10/13... 45/63
10/13... 45/63

63-650
3
3
690
1363

63-120
3
3
690
1363
10/13... 45/63

- 20+ 60
With

With

Without

Without

20
Fixed at 15

20
612 (2)

612

36

6
7
8

20 %

Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Conforming to standards
Rated operational voltage
Mechanical durability
Padlocking

V
Operating cycles

IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113

690
10 000
1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank 8 mm max. and 5 mm min.). When flush mounting,
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.

(1) Above this value, the breaker trips.

(2) Usual setting range 910 Irth max.

10
References :
pages
2/56
to 2/59

Dimensions :
page 2/60

Schemes :
page 2/61

2/55

References

integral 63 contactor breakers

for control and protection of motors

3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

526404

TeSys e
nclosed starters

Standard power ratings of 3-phase

motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43
220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
240 V 415 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

Operational
current

Breaking
capacity
(Iq) for Ue
y 415 V

kA

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code
(2)

Weight

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15

30
33

33

37

63

55

LD4 LD030p

50

3.800

526405

LD4 LD030p

3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43
220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
240 V 415 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

Operational
current

Breaking
capacity
(Iq) for Ue
y 415 V

kA

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code
(2)

Weight

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15

30
33

33

37

63

55

LD5 LD030p

50

7.600

LD5 LD030p

5
6

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380/ 400 415
440
480
500

600

660

50 Hz

60 Hz

BC

CC

CE

FC

LC

MC

MC

UX

c (3)

BD

ED

FD

(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 2/54 and 2/55

2/56

Dimensions :
page 2/60

Schemes :
page 2/61

References

TeSys e
nclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)

533936

Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors

LB1 LD03Mpp

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V
400 V
440 V
480/
600/
240 V
415 V
525 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

Thermal
setting range
(Irth min.
to Irth max.)

Magnetic
Reference
setting range
(6...12 Irth max)

Weight

kg

Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max

3

5.5

5.5

7.5

10

10...13

LB1 LD03P16

0.780

11

15

13...18

LB1 LD03P21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

18...25

LB1 LD03P22

0.780

7.5

15

15

18.5

22

23...32

LB1 LD03P53

0.780

22

22

25

33

28...40

LB1 LD03P55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

35...50

LB1 LD03P57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

45...63

LB1 LD03P61

0.780

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max

3

5.5

5.5

7.5

10

10...13

78...156

LB1 LD03M16

0.780

11

15

13...18

108...216

LB1 LD03M21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

18...25

150...300

LB1 LD03M22

0.780

7.5

15

15

18.5

22

23...32

190...380

LB1 LD03M53

0.780

22

22

25

33

28...40

240...480

LB1 LD03M55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

35...50

300...600

LB1 LD03M57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

45...63

380...760

LB1 LD03M61

0.780

2
3
4

533936

Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors

LB6 LD03Mpp

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V
400 V
440 V
480/
600/
240 V
415 V
525 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

Thermal
setting range
(Irth min.
to Irth max.)

Magnetic
Reference
setting range
(6...12 Irth max)

Weight

kg

Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max

3

5.5

5.5

7.5

10

78...156

LB6 LD03M16

0.780

11

15

108...216

LB6 LD03M21

0.780

5.5

11

11

15

18.5

150...300

LB6 LD03M22

0.780

7.5

15

15

18.5

22

190...380

LB6 LD03M53

0.780

22

22

25

33

240...480

LB6 LD03M55

0.780

11

25

25

33

45

300...600

LB6 LD03M57

0.780

15

33

33

40

55

380...760

LB6 LD03M61

0.780

5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 2/54 and 2/55

Dimensions :
page 2/60

Schemes :
page 2/61

2/57

References

TeSys enclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Rated
thermal
current
Ith q y 40 C
A

Maximum
operational
current
AC-1 q y 40 C
A

Maximum
operational
voltage

Breaking
capacity
Iq for
Ue y 415 V
kA

Number
of
poles

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code
(2)

Weight

kg

With control test function and padlocking facility

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

63

63

690

50

LD4 LD030p

3.800

Protection modules (for customer assembly)

3
4

533937

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)

LB1 LD03Lpp

Thermal
setting range
(Irth min. to Irth max.)
A
10...13

Magnetic
setting range
(3...6 Irth max)
A
39...78

Number
of
poles

Number of
protected
poles

Reference

Weight

LB1 LD03L16

kg
0.780

13...18

54...108

LB1 LD03L21

0.780

18...25

75...150

LB1 LD03L22

0.780

23...32

95...190

LB1 LD03L53

0.780

28...40

120...240

LB1 LD03L55

0.780

35...50

150...300

LB1 LD03L57

0.780

45...63

190...380

LB1 LD03L61

0.780

(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts

24

36

42

48

110

120

220

230

240

415

440

480

500

600

660

380/
400
Q

50 Hz

60 Hz

BC

CC

CE

FC

LC

MC

MC

UX

c (3)

BD

ED

FD

(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 2/54 and 2/55

2/58

Dimensions :
page 2/60

Schemes :
page 2/61

References

TeSys e
nclosed starters

integral 63 contactor breakers

Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories

526407

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)

For
use on

LD4 or LD5
Mounted on RH side
integral
+
LA1 LC030

Type and number

of blocks per unit

Composition

1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts

comprising:
3 signalling contacts contactor state
1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit
1 signalling contact tripped
1 signalling contact control knob in any
position other than Auto
1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts
comprising:
3 signalling contacts contactor state
1 signalling contact tripped
1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit

Reference

Weight

kg
0.280

LA1 LC010
2

1
1

2
LA1 LC012

2
1
1

0.220

526408

Isolating blocks
For
use on

integral
+
LA1 LC010
+
LA1 LC070p

Type and number

of blocks per unit

Composition

Reference

Weight

LD4
Mounted on LH side

1 control circuit isolating block

(1 or 2 blocks per unit)

LA1 LC030

kg
0.035

LD5
Mounted on LH side

1 control circuit isolating block

LA1 LC031

0.100

Electrical tripping devices

For
use on

LD4 or LD5
fitted with an
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012
add-on block

Type and number

of blocks per unit

Function

1 undervoltage trip

Time delay
LA1 LC070p
0.2 s
Instantaneous LA1 LC072p

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code
(1)

Weight

kg
0.150

Instantaneous LA1 LC071p

0.150

Remote electrical reset devices

For
use on
LD4 or LD5
fitted with an
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012
add-on block

Type and number

of blocks per unit
1 remote electrical
reset block

integral
+
LA1 LC012
+
LA1 LC052p

Control voltage

Reference

24 V
50/60 Hz

LA1 LC052B

Weight
kg
0.320

42 V 50 Hz
48 V 50/60 Hz

LA1 LC052E

0.320

100/127 V
50/60 Hz

LA1 LC052F

0.320

200/240V
50/60 Hz

LA1 LC052M

0.320

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
48
110
120
220/230
240
380/
400
50 Hz
B
E
F

M
U
Q
60 Hz

Dimensions :
page 2/60

0.150

526409

or 1 shunt trip

Characteristics :
pages 2/54 and 2/55

415

440

8
9
10

Schemes :
page 2/61

2/59

TeSys enclosed starters

References,
dimensions

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers
Enclosures

References

Empty metal enclosure

Type of enclosure

For use on

Reference

Degree of protection IP54 (1) LD4LD130p

with drillings for door interlock LD4LD030p
mechanism
(interlock not supplied).
For customer assembly

Weight

kg

DE1LT315

Door interlock mechanism (IP54)

Type
Non-adjustable

For use on
enclosure

Colour
of knob

Reference

Weight

DE1LT315

Red

LA9LC520

kg

Metal enclosure DE1LT315

225

367

4
Number of blanked-off cable entries
At

5
69

190

195
287

Cable

Top

min.

max.

Type

10

12

13

13M

24

30

36

36M

integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030

LD5LD030

(2)

= 28 =
= =
90

= =
54

9
= =
54

(2) thickness 5 mm max.

Schemes :
page 2/61

2/60

105

243
172 (LD4)
174 (LD5)

105

105

65
54

Door drillings

10

105
275

105

For cable gland

Bottom

Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism

LA9LC52p
LD4LD030

0,200

(1) Enclosure supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of
cable glands (te be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see below.

Dimensions

3,510

45
59 63
181

59

TeSys enclosed starters

schemes

integral 63 contactor breakers

and reversing contactor breakers
Enclosures

A1

5/L3

3/L2

1
A2

A2

Q1

A1

5/L3

A2

A1

1/L1

LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P

3/L2

Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp

LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1

Contactor breakers with protection module LBp

6/T3

6/T3

2/T1

6/T3

4/T2

4/T2

LB6 LD03M

LB6 LD03M
2/T1

4/T2

2/T1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

Add-on blocks
Mounted on LH side

For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5

Mounted on RH side

+0

31

13

23

31

13

23

31

41

32

14

24

32

14

24

32

42

96

23
24
98
08
05

95

13
14

98

31
32

95

23

LA1 LC001

Tripping devices (1) for LD4, LD5

D2

U<
C2

Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD4, LD5

LA1LC070, LC072

LA1LC052p

D1

C1

LA1LC071

15

Control knob
position signalling

5
6

63

Auto

16

Isolator

64

54

53

LA1 LC031

08

Mounted on LH side

05

For reversing contactor breaker LD5

LA1 LC025

18

06

Short-circuit
signalling

LA1 LC020

24
98

Trip signalling

LA1 LC012

95

1 ou 2 LA1LC030

96

54

53

(64) (63)
54
53

LA1 LC010

95

Breaker

13

Isolator

LA1 LC030

14

Mounted on LH side

Auto
Trip +
RESET
B4

B1

B2
B3

(1)
For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.

10
References, dimensions :
page 2/60

2/61

TeSys enclosed starters

References

Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)

526414

LG7 K06

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

526415

3
4
LG7 D12 with padlocking
facility fitted as standard

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
220/
400/
230 V
415 V
kW
kW

0.06

Circuit-breaker
Setting range
of thermal trips

Dust & damp protected starter

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2) (3)

Weight

440 V
kW
0.06

A
0.160.25

LG7 K06pp02

kg
1.300

0.06

0.09

0.12

0.250.40

LG7 K06pp03

1.300

0.18

0.18

0.400.63

LG7 K06pp04

1.300

0.12

0.25

0.37

0.631

LG7 K06pp05

1.300

0.25

0.55

0.55

11.6

LG7 K06pp06

1.300

0.37

0.75

1.1

1.62.5

LG7 K06pp07

1.300

0.75

1.5

1.5

2.54

LG7 K06pp08

1.300

1.1

2.2

46.3

LG7 K06pp10

1.300

1.5

610

LG7 K09pp14

1.450

5.5

5.5

914

LG7 D12pp16

1.600

7.5

1318

LG7 D18pp20

1.630

1723

LG7 D18pp21

1.630

Specifications
Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7 K09,
b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3),
b short-circuit protection,
b overload protection,
b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases.
For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

5
6
7

Variants (pre-assembled)
See page 2/65.
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

LG7 K
Volts a 12
50/60 Hz
Code
J7

24

36

42

48

110

127

B7

C7

D7

E7

F7

FC7

220/
230
M7

230
P7

230/
240
U7

380/
400
Q7

400
V7

400/
415
N7

440

500

R7

S7

660/
690
Y7

LG7 D

Volts a 24
50/60 Hz
Code
B7

42

48

110

D7

E7

F7

220/
230
M7

230

240

P7

U7

380/
400
Q7

400

415

440

V7

N7

R7

(3) LG7 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LG7 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This
circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional
Sales Office.

10

Other versions

Dimensions :
page 2/66

2/62

Schemes :
page 2/67

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

TeSys enclosed starters

References (continued)

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

526416

Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation)

Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position I.

LG1 K

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
220/
400/
230 V
415 V
kW
kW

0.06

Circuit-breaker
Setting range
of thermal trips

Dust & damp protected starter

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2)

Weight

440 V
kW
0.06

A
0.160.25

LG1 K065pp02

kg
0.970

0.06

0.09

0.12

0.250.40

LG1 K065pp03

0.970

0.18

0.18

0.400.63

LG1 K065pp04

0.970

0.12

0.25

0.25

0.631

LG1 K065pp05

0.970

0.25

0.55

0.55

11.6

LG1 K065pp06

0.970

0.37

0.75

1.1

1.62.5

LG1 K065pp07

0.970

0.75

1.5

1.5

2.54

LG1 K065pp08

0.970

1.1

2.2

46.3

LG1 K065pp10

0.970

1.5

610

LG1 K095pp14

1.120

5.5

5.5

914

LG1 D122pp16

1.270

7.5

1318

LG1 D182pp20

1.290

1723

LG1 D182pp21

1.290

Specifications
Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation,
b lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector),
b short-circuit protection,
b overload protection,
b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases.
For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

Variants (pre-assembled)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

See page 2/65.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

LG1 K
Volts a 12
50/60 Hz
Code
J7

24

36

42

48

110

127

B7

C7

D7

E7

F7

FC7

220/
230
M7

230
P7

230/
240
U7

380/
400
Q7

400
V7

400/
415
N7

440

500

R7

S7

660/
690
Y7

LG1 D
Volts a 24
50/60 Hz
Code
B7

Other versions

Dimensions :
page 2/66

42

48

110

D7

E7

F7

220/
230
M7

230

240

P7

U7

380/
400
Q7

400

415

440

V7

N7

R7

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9
10

Schemes :
page 2/67

2/63

TeSys enclosed starters

References (continued)

Reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)

526417

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
220/
400/
230 V
415 V
kW
kW

0.06

Circuit-breaker
Setting range
of thermal trips

Dust & damp protected starter

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2) (3)

Weight

440 V
kW
0.06

A
0.160.25

LG8 K06pp02

kg
1.640

0.06

0.09

0.12

0.250.40

LG8 K06pp03

1.640

0.18

0.18

0.400.63

LG8 K06pp04

1.640

0.12

0.25

0.25

0.631

LG8 K06pp05

1.640

0.25

0.55

0.55

11.6

LG8 K06pp06

1.640

0.37

0.75

1.1

1.62.5

LG8 K06pp07

1.640

0.75

1.5

1.5

2.54

LG8 K06pp08

1.640

1.1

2.2

46.3

LG8 K06pp10

1.640

1.5

610

LG8 K09pp14

1.640

5.5

5.5

914

LG8 K12pp16

1.640

LG8 K06

2
3

526418

4
5
LG8 K09 with padlocking
facility fitted as standard

6
7

Specifications of reversing starters

Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8 K09,
b Emergency stop (3),
b short-circuit protection,
b overload protection,
b control by selector switch 1-2, position non maintained,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases.
For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

Variants (pre-assembled)
See page 2/65.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts a 12
24
36
42
48
110
127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz
230
240 400
415
690
Code
J7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FC7 M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Y7

(3) LG8 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LG8 K09: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker
is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

10

Other versions

Dimensions :
page 2/66

2/64

Schemes :
page 2/67

Starters for higher power ratings.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

TeSys enclosed starters

References (continued)

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)

Variants
Description

Application

With Emergency Stop

No control pushbuttons

LG1, LG7, LG8

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (2)
A04

With Emergency Stop

2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E
(latching)
1 Stop button O
Without Emergency Stop
2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E
(non latching)
Without Emergency Stop
With Emergency Stop, mushroom head

LG8 K06

A10

LG8

A14

LG1

A37

Without Emergency Stop

(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)

LG7, LG8

A39

With padlocking facility

(fitted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09)
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
for use on 240 V (U7) supply

LG1 K06, LG7 K06

A29

LG1, LG7, LG8

A59

Short-circuit signalling block

LG7

A12

Vacuum valve for compressor

LG7 D

A40

Without circuit-breaker

LG1, LG7, LG8

(3)

1
2
3
4
5

Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)

Starter type

A04

LG1 K

A10

A12

A14

A29

A37

A39

A40

A59

(5)

LG7 K06
LG7 K09

LG7 D12
LG8 K06

LG8 K09

Combination possible

Combination not possible

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
(2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04.
(3) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp.
(4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59.
(5) LG1 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LG1 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This
circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional
Sales Office.

2/65

9
10

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

Starters without isolator

LG1 K06, K09
LG1 D12, D18

LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18

LG8 K06, K09, K12
120

(1)

120
165

165

150

150

(2)

146 (2)

84
175

177 (1)

84

165

(3)

175

(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW

(2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW
(3) Only for LG7

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Type of enclosure
LG1 K and LG1 D

At top
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

At bottom
2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

LG7 K and LG7 D

2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

LG8 K

2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P

References :
pages 2/62 to 2/65

Schemes :
page 2/67

5
6
7
8
9
10

2/66

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

D.O.L. starters

LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18

380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

L1

L2

LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18

L3

Ph

6 T1

4 T2

2 T3

Q1

KM1/1

13

13

Q2

KM1

5 5

S2

12

3 3
V1 4

W1 6

1 1

11

14

14

S1

KM1

A1

U1 2

A2

KM1

KM1/5
N

D2

D1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Q1

Ph

13

13

14

14
11
12

5
W1 6

E2

3
4

A2
KM1

A1

U1

V1

6
W1

4
V1

S2
E1

1
2

F1

KM1
2

S1

6
5

4
3

2
1

KM1

U1

KM1/1

Q1

KM1

LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18

380/400 V, code Q7 or
400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

5/L3

3/L2

LG7 K09, D12, D18

1/L1

LG7 K06

KM1/5
N

Reversing starters

LG8 K06, K09, K12

Q1

380/400 V, code Q7 or
400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

D2

D1

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

LG8 K09, K12

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LG8 K06

7
8

Ph
Q1

21

21 12
KM2/1

22
14
KM1

54

S2

KM2

KM2

References :
pages 2/62 to 2/65

A1 53

0 2

A1 53

KM1

A2

14

S2

54

13

1 0

13

22

3
4

6
W

4
V

KM1

A2

E2

6
5

2
U

KM2

KM1

4
V

2
1

KM2

KM2

KM1

S1

E1

11

KM2/5

Schemes :
page 2/66

2/67

10

References

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

511544

Non-reversing starters with integral transformer

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.

Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply

LJ7 K

3
4

(with pushbutton control of isolator function)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
Circuit-breaker
motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
Setting range of thermal trips
380/400 V

Dust and damp

protected starter
Reference (1)

Weight

kW
0.06

A
0.160.25

LJ7 K06Q702

kg
2.270

0.09

0.250.40

LJ7 K06Q703

2.270

0.18

0.400.63

LJ7 K06Q704

2.270

0.25

0.631

LJ7 K06Q705

2.270

0.55

11.6

LJ7 K06Q706

2.270

0.75

1.62.5

LJ7 K06Q707

2.270

1.5

2.54

LJ7 K06Q708

2.270

2.2

46.3

LJ7 K06Q710

2.270

610

LJ7 K09Q714

2.270

Specifications
Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ7 K09,
b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2),
b short-circuit protection,
b overload protection,
b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O,
b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.

5
6
7

Variants (3)
Description

For
use on
LJ7

With Emergency Stop

No control pushbuttons
Without Emergency Stop
LJ7
(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
With padlocking facility
LJ7 K06
(fitted as standard on LJ7 K09)
Without circuit-breaker
LJ7

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (4)
A04
A39
A29
(5)

(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme).
(2) LJ7 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz.
(3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7 K06. Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39.
Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04.
(5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7.

Other versions

10
Dimensions :
page 2/70

2/68

Schemes :
page 2/71

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

511545

Reversing starters with integral transformer

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.

Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply

LJ8 K

(with pushbutton control of isolator function)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
Circuit-breaker
motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
Setting range of thermal trips
380/400 V

Dust and damp

protected starter
Reference (1)

Weight

kW
0.06

A
0.160.25

LJ8 K06Q702

kg
2.650

0.09

0.250.40

LJ8 K06Q703

2.650

0.18

0.400.63

LJ8 K06Q704

2.650

0.25

0.631

LJ8 K06Q705

2.650

0.55

11.6

LJ8 K06Q706

2.650

0.75

1.62.5

LJ8 K06Q707

2.650

1.5

2.54

LJ8 K06Q708

2.650

2.2

46.3

LJ8 K06Q710

2.650

610

LJ8 K09Q714

2.650

Specifications
Functions performed by the starter:
b isolation,
b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ8 K09,
b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2),
b short-circuit protection,
b overload protection,
b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O,
b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.

For
use on
LJ8

With Emergency Stop

No control pushbuttons
Without Emergency Stop
LJ8
(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
With padlocking facility
LJ8 K06
(fitted as standard on LJ8 K09)
Without circuit-breaker
LJ8

Suffix to be added to
the starter reference (4)
A04

Dimensions :
page 2/70

4
5
6

A39

A29
(5)

(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme).
(2) LJ8 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker.
LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz.
(3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8 K06. Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39.
Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8 K09. Example : LJ8 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04.
(5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.

Other versions

Variants (3)
Description

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9
10

Schemes :
page 2/71

2/69

Dimensions

TeSys enclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

Dimensions

LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06

165

177

150

165

120

150

84
175

LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09

120

4
5

146

84
175

Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P.

6
7
8
9
10
References :
pages 2/68 and 2/69

2/70

Schemes

TeSys e
nclosed starters

Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control

for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE

Schemes

Non-reversing starters

1
1
2

KM1/1

D2

D1

2
13

13 1
S2

A1 12

KM1/5

E2

E1

11

14

S1

KM1

A2

A2

W1 6

V1 4

U1 2

KM1

KM1

14

5 6

1 2

14

11

400/24 V
25 VA

F1

KM1

A1 12

KM1/5

3 4

13
S1

S2

W1 6

V1 4

U1 2

4A

X1

T1

13 1
KM1

14

5 6

3 4

1 2

400/24 V
25 VA

KM1

5/L3

1/L1

X1

T1

F1

Q1

Q1

4A

KM1/1

F1

3/L2

5/L3

3/L2

LJ7 K09
1/L1

LJ7 K06

Reversing starters

4
11

S1

21

12

KM2/5

F1

Q1

22

22

54

A1

A1

KM2

53

13

0 2
S2

53

KM1

14

54

23

1 0
S2

24

400/24 V
25 VA

KM2/1

KM2

A2

KM1

A2

6
W

4
V

2
U

KM2

KM1

KM1

6
5

4
3

2
1

KM2
T1

21

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LJ8 K06

7
S1

22

22

E1

E2

54

KM2

53

13

0 2
S2

A1

A1

53

KM1

14

54

23

KM2

A2

KM1

A2

1 0
S2

24
KM2/1

6
W

4
V

2
U

400/24 V
25 VA

KM2

KM1

KM1

6
5

4
3

2
1

KM2
T1

21

21

12

KM2/5

Q1

11

F1

D2

D1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LJ8 K09

10
References :
pages 2/68 and 2/69

2/71

Selection guide

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Applications

1
2
3
Composition

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker
Low consumption contactor or contactor pair
Electronic control device

Degree of protection

IP 54

Enclosure

Insulated (plastic)

Operator

Rotary knob

Sensor connection

With

With and local/line control

Non-reversing

LF3Pppp

LF3PpppA79

Reversing

LF4Pppp

LF4PpppA79

4
5
6
7

Contactors

Pages

8
9
10

2/72

2/84 and 2/85

1
2
3
4
Metal

Insulated (plastic)

Pushbuttons

With

With and local/line control

With

With and local/line control

LF3MPpp
p

LF3MPpp
pA79

LF3Mppp

LF3

Mpp
pA79

LF4MPpp
p

LF4MPpp
pA79

LF4Mppp

LF4

Mpp
pA79

6
7
8
9
10

2/73

TeSys enclosed starters

Presentation

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Presentation

Decentralised control of motors using enclosed starters which communicate on

ASInterface, drastically reduces setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability
of machines.
In order to cater for different environments, these starters are sub-divided according
to:
b the different power connection methods: cable gland or Harting plug-in
connectors,
b the local/AS-Interface remote operating modes,
b the type of enclosure: insulated (plastic) or metal.

Decentralisation of machine starters

These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled
and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling.
They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations:
i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control.
The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power
distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a
conveyor system.

Traditional installation

Equipment
floor-standing
enclosure

5
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker
Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs
Contactor + thermal overload relay

Decentralised installation
Distribution
enclosure

AS-Interface
Power

Distribution circuit circuit-breaker

Programmable controller

AS-Interface starters

Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable.

These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors
(control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise:
- a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker,
- a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing),
- an I/O module ASI 20MTpp.
Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used
with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal
circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in
order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

2/74

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

TeSys enclosed starters

Description

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Connection by cable gland

4

1 2 3

1
2
3
13 4

Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs.

Input state.
Output state.
Knock-out for cable gland (not included for any power extension or output control
relay cabling).
12
5 Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped.
6
6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79).
7
7 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter
(LF4). Function:
- position 1 = forward running,
- position 0 = Stop,
- position 2 = reverse running.
Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3).
Function: Pulsed operation.
8 Cable gland for power supply cable.
9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap).
10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply.
11 Cable gland for motor cabling.
12 Reset pushbutton.
13 Stop pushbutton.

DF526363

DF526362

1 2 3

5
6
7

11

10 9

11

10

Connection by plug-in connectors(variant A74)

5

1 2 3 8 4 13 14

DF526367

DF526364

1 2 3 8 4

12 11

9 10

12 11

9 10

1
2
3
4
5
6

Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs.

Input state.
Output state.
Knock-out for cable gland (not included for output control relay cabling).
Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2).
Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped.
7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2).
8 Local/AS-Interface key switch.
9 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter
(LF4). Function:
- position 1 = forward running,
- position 0 = Stop,
- position 2 = reverse running.
Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF3).
Function: Pulsed operation.
10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2).
11 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap).
12 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply.
13 Stop pushbutton.
14 Reset pushbutton.
(1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) HARTING plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included, see page 2/95).

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/75

TeSys enclosed starters

Functions

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Auxiliary supply

AS-Interface
Auxiliary supply

Control-command and
contactor supply

Contactor supply

Contactor supply

2
Power supply

A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF3 and LF4 starters.

Prospective current consumptions are listed on page 2/83.

Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are:
- motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface,
- D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing),
- overload protection of the motor,
- short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling.

4
DF526368

Starters with rotary control knob

These starters provide the following functions:
- load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob,
- IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.

Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or

whilst in the off position and padlocked.
The rotary control knob has 3 positions:
0: switch-disconnector opened manually,
I: switch-disconnector closed,
Trip: switch-disconnector tripped.

6
DF526365

Starters with pushbutton control

These starters provide the following functions:
- pushbutton resetting of the protection device,
- pushbutton stop control,
- IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

2/76

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop
command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the
switch-disconnector function.
Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either:
- a rotary control knob, or
- a stop pushbutton (black).
In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker
is possible after the motor has cooled down.
Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either:
- a rotary control knob, or
- a reset pushbutton (blue).

2
3

Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79)

DF526369

This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which,

depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions:
b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter.
b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC.

b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4).
Function:
- position 1 = forward running,
- position 0 = Stop,
- position 2 = reverse running.

b Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3) .

Function:
- Pulsed operation.
Control via a control station

AS-Interface
Message 2
Message 1

7
Power supply

It is possible to achieve manual local start control from pushbutton control stations
connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Actuation of a pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1)
which passes it on to the starter (message2).

8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/77

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Local signalling

Indication of all the operating states (diagnostic, inputs and outputs) is visible without
having to open the enclosure (transparent window in the enclosure cover).

Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation.
External safety functions are not processed by the starter.

Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and
be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These
functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 9.2.5.4).
Protection against unexpected restarting, after an accidental power supply failure,
must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter.

The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop
function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the
starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204
10.2.1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since
this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.

Assume fallback condition

When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC.

The fallback condition of the starter is motor stopped (outputs at 0).

Output control relay

This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator
lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (250 V, 5 A), via AS-Interface.

AS-Interface

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

2/78

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

Functions (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters with sensors connected (1)

Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected
directly to the starter.

The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via the AS-Interface
line.
(1) For "Reflex Stop" function, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

References:
pages 2/84 to 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/79

Characteristics

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Environment

1
2
3

6
7
8
9

IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1,

IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1,
EN 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1)

Product certifications

Protective treatment

Standard version

TC

Degree of protection
conforming to IEC 60529

IP 54

Ambient air temperature

around the device
conforming to IEC 60439-1

Storage

-40+80

Operation

-5+40

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

2000

Operating position
without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

Flame resistance
of equipment

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave, 11ms)
conforming to IEC60068-2-27

Contactor open

10 gn

Contactor closed

15 gn

Vibration resistance
5150Hz
conforming to IEC60068-2-6

Contactor open

2 gn

Contactor closed

4 gn

Safe separation of circuits

Conforming to VDE 0106

and IEC 60536

SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V

Immunity to non-dissipating
shock wave (Uimp)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

Material and colour

of enclosure base

Insulated enclosures

Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout

Metal enclosures

Sheet steel RAL 9001

Material and colour

of enclosure cover

Insulated enclosures

Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, RAL 9001 throughout

Metal enclosures

Sheet steel RAL 9001

Resistance to
chemical agents

Insulated enclosures

Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain
detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.

30

30

90

kV

LF3,LF4

90

Starter type
Conforming to standards

960

6: power
2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor

Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic
discharge

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2

EN 61000-4-2

kV

8: in open air (level 3)

4: in indirect mode (level 2)

Immunity to fast transient

currents

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4

EN 61000-4-4

kV

2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 3)

Immunity to
dissipated shock wave

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5

EN 61000-4-5

kV

4/2: power (level 4)

Immunity to conducted
radio-frequency interference

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6

ENV 50 141

V/m

10

Immunity to radiated
radio-frequency interference

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3

ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204
(GSM)

V/m

10

Radio-conducted and
radio-radiated rejection

ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1)

2/0.5: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 2)

Class B
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending.

10
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

2/80

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Cabling
Starter type
Power supply
cabling

Motor cabling

LF3
Screw clamp
terminals

Max.

Min.

Max.

Solid cable

mm2

1 x 1.5

2x6

1 x 1.5

2x6

Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

2x6

1 x 1.5

2x6

Flexible cable
with cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

2x4

1 x 1.5

2x4

Tightening torque (1)

N.m

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

Cable Gland
(Pg16)

Clamping capacity

mm

10

15

10

15

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

Screw clamp
terminals

Solid cable

mm2

1 x 1.5

2x4

1 x 1.5

1x4

Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

2x4

1 x 1.5

1x4

Flexible cable
with cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5

1 x 1.5

1 x 2.5

Tightening torque (1)

N.m

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

Clamping capacity

mm

10

15

10

15

Cable Gland
(Pg16)
Output
control relay
cabling

LF4

Min.

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

mm2

0.5

1.5

0.5

1.5

Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2

0.5

1.5

0.5

1.5

Flexible cable
with cable end

mm2

0.5

1.5

0.5

1.5

Tightening torque (2)

N.m

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.7

13

13

10

15

10

15

Terminal block Solid cable

Cable gland

Clamping capacity Pg 13 mm
Pg 16 mm

1
2
3
4
5

Pole electrical characteristics

Utilisation category

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

(circuit-breaker)

Conforming to 947-4-1
(motor starter)

AC-3

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Conforming to IEC 60947

415

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947

415

Rated operational frequency

Conforming to IEC 60947

Hz

50/60

Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu)

Conforming to 230/240 V kA
IEC60947-2 400/415 V kA

> 100

Sensitivity to phase failure

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2

Yes

> 100

Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)

Mechanical durability

C.O.: closing, opening

C.O.

100000

Electrical durability

For AC-3 duty

C.O.

100000

Duty class

Maximum operating rate

C.O./h

25

Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)

Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles
per hour

3600

Mechanical durability

In millions of
operating cycles

30

Electrical durability

In category AC-3 at 8.5 A

800000

Starters with rotary control knob

Circuit-breaker type
GV2P

See pages 3/8 to 3/11

Starters with pushbutton control

Circuit-breaker type
GV2ME LF3, LF4 only

See pages 3/8 to 3/11

Non-reversing starters

Contactor
LP4K0901BW3 (3)

See pages 5/10 to 5/13

Reversing starters

Reversing contactor
LP5K0901BW3 (4)

See pages 5/10 to 5/13

Other characteristics

(1) Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver 5.5.

(2) Flat screwdriver 3.5.
(3) LP4 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16.
(4) LP5 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16.
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

References:
page 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

10

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/81

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Sensor inputs

Starter type

LF3,LF4

Cabling

M12

Nominal input values

Input voltage range

Voltage

c 24

Maximum current
available
per sensor

mA

50

Sensor supply
(including ripple)

1930

Voltage

c > 11

Current

mA

>6

Voltage

c<5

Current

mA

<2

At state 1
At state 0

3
4

Maximum number of sensors

Proximity sensor compatibility

2-wire/3-wire

Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line

Yes

Input type

Resistive for PNP type sensor

Output control relay

Operating voltage limit

a.c. supply

250

d.c. supply

30

Thermal current at 40 C (Ith)

Service life
on an a 24 V load

Service life on
a c 24 V load

Response time

Resistive Millions of operating cycles

load
AC-12

0.1 (1) in 5 A current,

1 (2) in 1 A current.

Inductive Millions of operating cycles

load
AC-14

0.5 (2) in 1 A current,

1 (2) in 0.5 A current,
5 (3) in 0.25 A current.

Resistive Millions of operating cycles

load
DC-12

0.1 (1) in 5 A current,

0.2 (1) in 2 A current.

Resistive Millions of operating cycles

load
DC-3

0.5 (2) in 1 A current,

> 1 (3) in 0.25 A current.

Latching

ms

< 10

Unlatching

ms

< 15

Contact type

Built-in protection

Isolation

C/O
Against overload
and short-circuits

None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted

Against a.c. or d.c.

inductive overloads

Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators

rms voltage between output

and earth or between output
and internal logic

Insulation resistance between

mW
output terminals and AS-Interface

1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s

> 1000

(1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second.

(2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second.
(3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.

9
10
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

2/82

References:
page 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Consumption
Starter type

Product configured for supply

from an auxiliary c 24 V supply
LF3

Current consumption

From the
AS-Interface line
(1)

From the auxiliary

c 24 V supply

LF4

De-energised 20 mA

20 mA

Inrush

20 mA

20 mA

Sealed

20 mA

20 mA

Per sensor

Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 10 mA (signal = 1)

Relays

20 mA

De-energised 0

Inrush

110 mA

110 mA

Energised

30 mA

30 mA

Data exchange characteristics

AS-Interface profile
Data bits (commands)

Data bits (status)

7.D.F.F (standard addressing

7.A.7.0 (extended addressing A/B)
Bit value

=0

=1

Command D0 (O)

Stop - forward running

Start - forward running

Command D1 (O)

Stop - reverse running

Start - reverse running (2)

Command D2 (O)

Deactivation of control relay

Activation of
control relay

Command D3 (O)

Not Used

Not Used

Bit value

=0

=1

Status D0 (I)

Not ready or fault

Ready

Status D1 (I)

Stopped

Running

Status D2 (I)

Sensor 1 signal absent (3)

Sensor 1 signal
present (3)

Status D3 (I)

Sensor 2 signal absent (4)

Sensor 2 signal
present (4)

4
5
6

(1) 30 mA maximum + sensor consumption.

(2) Only on LF4.
(3) Sensor 1 or circuit-breaker fault signal, depending on configuration.
(4) Sensor 1 or sensor 2 signal or control/local mode, depending on configuration.

7
8
9
10
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

References:
page 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

Connections:
pages 2/94 and 2/95

2/83

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics,
references

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

LF3 P and LF4 P

Characteristics
Conforming to standards

Conforming to IEC 60529

IP 54

Ambient air temperature

Operation

- 5 to + 40 C

Operating positions

Same as that of the contactors

Material

LFpP: polycarbonate (2). LFpMP: sheet steel

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220/230 V

400/415 V

kW

kW

Circuit-breaker
adjustment range
of thermal trips

Starter
Ref. with
standard
addressing

Ref. with
extended
addressing

Weight

kg

Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)

DF526356

LF3PppD

DF526357

Degree of protection

Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure

2
3

IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1

UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1)

Without

LF3P00D (4)

LF3P00E (4)

1.020

0.06

0.160.25

LF3P02D

LF3P02E

1.300

0.06

0.09

0.250.40

LF3P03D

LF3P03E

1.300

0.12
0.18

0.400.63

LF3P04D

LF3P04E

1.300

0.09
0.12

0.25

0.631

LF3P05D

LF3P05E

1.300

0.18
0.25

0.37
0.55

11.6

LF3P06D

LF3P06E

1.350

0.37

0.75

1.62.5

LF3P07D

LF3P07E

1.350

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

2.54

LF3P08D

LF3P08E

1.350

1.1

2.2

46.3

LF3P10D

LF3P10E

1.350

1.5

3
4

610

LF3P14D

LF3P14E

1.350

2.2
3

5.5

914

LF3P16D

LF3P16E

1.350

Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)

6
LF4PppDA79A74

Without

LF4P00D (4)

LF4P00E (4)

1.020

0.06

0.160.25

LF4P02D

LF4P02E

1.550

0.06

0.09

0.250.40

LF4P03D

LF4P03E

1.550

0.12
0.18

0.400.63

LF4P04D

LF4P04E

1.550

0.09
0.12

0.25

0.631

LF4P05D

LF4P05E

1.550

0.18
0.25

0.37
0.55

11.6

LF4P06D

LF4P06E

1.600

0.37

0.75

1.62.5

LF4P07D

LF4P07E

1.600

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

2.54

LF4P08D

LF4P08E

1.600

1.1

2.2

46.3

LF4P10D

LF4P10E

1.600

1.5

3
4

610

LF4P14D

LF4P14E

1.600

2.2
3

5.5

914

LF4P16D

LF4P16E

1.600

Starters in metal enclosures

b To order a metal enclosure, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4, in the references selected above.
Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02D.
b To order a metal enclosure that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4 and a
letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02DU.

Variants (pre-assembled)
DF526358

Description

10
LF4MPppDA74A79
Dimensions:
pages 2/88 to 2/90

2/84

For mounting on

Suffix to be added to the

starter reference (5)

With HARTING connectors (6)

Insulated or metal enclosure

A74

With local/AS-Interface control

Insulated enclosure

A79

With local/AS-Interface control

Metal enclosure

A79

(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending.
(2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the
letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF3MP02DR.
(4) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker.
(5) Example: LF3P02DA79A74.
(6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95).
Schemes:
pages 2/91 to 2/93

TeSys enclosed starters

Characteristics,
references

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

LF3 M and LF4 M

Characteristics
Conforming to standards

IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1

UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14
IP 54

Degree of protection
Conforming to IEC 60529
Ambient air temperature
Operating positions
Material

Operation

- 5 to + 40 C
Same as that of the contactors
LFpM: polycarbonate (1).

Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50-60 Hz in category AC-3
220/230 V

400/415 V

kW

kW

Circuit-.breaker
adjustment range
of thermal trips

Starter
Ref. with
standard
addressing

Ref. with
extended
addressing

Weight

kg

DF526359

Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control

LF3MppD

Without

LF3M00D (2) LF3M00E (2)

1.000

0.06

0.160.25

LF3M02D

LF3M02E

1.250

0.06

0.09

0.250.40

LF3M03D

LF3M03E

1.250

0.12
0.18

0.400.63

LF3M04D

LF3M04E

1.250

0.09
0.12

0.25

0.631

LF3M05D

LF3M05E

1.250

0.18
0.25

0.37
0.55

11.6

LF3M06D

LF3M06E

1.300

0.37

0.75

1.62.5

LF3M07D

LF3M07E

1.300

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

2.54

LF3M08D

LF3M08E

1.300

1.1

2.2

46.3

LF3M10D

LF3M10E

1.300

1.5

3
4

610

LF3M14D

LF3M14E

1.300

2.2
3

5.5

914

LF3M16D

LF3M16E

1.300

3
4
5

DF526360

Reversing starters with pushbutton control

LF3MppDA79

Without

LF4M00D (2) LF4M00E (2)

1.000

0.06

0.160.25

LF4M02D

LF4M02E

1.500

0.06

0.09

0.250.40

LF4M03D

LF4M03E

1.500

0.12
0.18

0.400.63

LF4M04D

LF4M04E

1.500

0.09
0.12

0.25

0.631

LF4M05D

LF4M05E

1.500

0.18
0.25

0.37
0.55

11.6

LF4M06D

LF4M06E

1.550

0.37

0.75

1.62.5

LF4M07D

LF4M07E

1.550

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

2.54

LF4M08D

LF4M08E

1.550

1.1

2.2

46.3

LF4M10D

LF4M10E

1.550

1.5

3
4

610

LF4M14D

LF4M14E

1.550

2.2
3

5.5

914

LF4M16D

LF4M16D

1.550

7
8

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description

For mounting on

Suffix to be added to the

starter reference (3)

With HARTING connectors (4)

Insulated enclosure

A74

With local/AS-Interface control

Insulated enclosure

A79

(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(2) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker.
(3) Example: LF3M02DA79A74.
(4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95).

9
10

Dimensions:
pages 2/88 to 2/90

Schemes:
pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/85

TeSys enclosed starters

References (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Insulated enclosures LF3 and LF4

Power extension (daisy-chaining)

Terminal

LA9 LFF

LA9 LFF

LA9 LFM

LA9 LFM

LA9 LFC

LA9 LFT

2
3
4
Metal enclosures LF3 and LF4

5
6
7
LA9 LFM

LA9 LFMM

LA9 LFFM40

9
10

2/86

References (continued)

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74

Presentation
In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF
starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to
allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection
using tap links

Connection
using power
extension
(daisychaining)

LF

LF

LF

LF

This configuration avoids having to switch off the power

supply when replacing or adding one or more starters.
Although machine availability is increased, a larger
number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.

The number of power connections per starter is halved,

but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the
upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With
this type of installation, special precautions must be taken
because removal of a starter at the head of the power
supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that
line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be
removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204
above 3kW/400V).

The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up
of power extension configurations by the user.

Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)

Enclosure Capacity
application

Kit contents

For
Reference
mounting on

mm2

Weight

3
4

kg

Power
extension
(daisychaining)

3-pole
1.5 or 2.5

1 female connector
Enclosures
2 male connectors and LF3 and LF4
corresponding power
sockets (1)

LA9LFC

0.150

Terminal

3-pole
1.5 or 2.5

1 female connector
1 male connector
1 blanking plug and
corresponding power
sockets (1)

Enclosures
LF3 and LF4

LA9LFT

0.110

Capacity
mm2

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

1.5

100

LA9LFM15

0.120

2.5

100

LA9LFM25

0.120

1.5

100

LA9LFF15

0.160

2.5

100

LA9LFF25

0.150

Crimping contacts
Type
Male

Female

Weight
kg

Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74

6
7

Connection kits
For
connector

Kit contents

For
Reference
mounting on

Weight

Input

1 metal cover
2 size 16 cable glands
1 blanking plug
1 female power socket (3P + earth)
4 female crimping contacts (2)

Metal
enclosures
LF3, LF4

LA9LFFM40

0.260

Output
to motor

1 metal cover
1 size 16 cable gland
1 female power socket
(3P+ earth) (1)

Metal
enclosures
LF3, LF4

LA9LFMM

0.060

kg

Crimping contacts
Type

Male

Capacity

Thermal
current

Voltage Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

mm2

1.5

10

400

100

LA9LFM15

0.120

2.5

10

400

100

LA9LFM25

0.120

kg

(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately.

(2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.

2/87

10

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

LF3P and LF4 P

Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFpPpp
pA74

120

175
4x5,3

47

84

3
With cable glands
Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpPpp
pA79

(2)

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpPpp
pA79A74

175
120

175
4x5,3

47

84

150

5
6
7

(1)

Knock-outs for cable gland

From above
2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13
From below
2 x Pg16 (cable glands supplied)
(1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply.
(2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.

8
9
10
References:
page 2/84

2/88

Schemes:
pages 2/91 to 2/93

(2)

165

(1)

18

150

165

175

18

With cable glands

LFpPpp
p

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

LF3M and LF4 M

Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFpMpp
pA74

175
4x5,3

84

175

120

4x5,3

47

84

(2)

With cable glands

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpMpp
pA79

(1)

(2)

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpMpp
pA79A74

165

175
4x5,3

84

(1)

(2)

18

150

120

47

165

(1)

18

30

150
165

120

140

150

140

165

With cable glands

LFpMpp
p

Knock-outs for cable gland

From above
2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13
From below
2 x Pg16
(cable glands supplied)
(1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and a
uxiliary 24 V supply.
(2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.

5
6
7
8
9
10

References:
page 2/85

Schemes :
pages 2/91 to 2/93

2/89

TeSys enclosed starters

Dimensions (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

LF3MP and LF4 MP

Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFpMPpp
pA74

179

219
125

179

60

175
7

8,5

219
125

175

8,5

With cable glands

LFpMPpp
p

230

245
245

199

230

245

230

199

2
3
13

With cable glands

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpMPpp
pA79

179

179

219
125

(2)

219
125

175
7

(1)

With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)

Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
LFpMPpp
pA79A74

8,5

(2)

60

175
8,5

(1)

13

6
7

13

(1)

(2)

Knock-outs for cable

Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant
gland
A74
From above
3 x Pg16
1 x Pg16
From below
2 x Pg16
1 x Pg16
(1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V
supply.
(2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.

8
9
10
References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

2/90

Schemes:
pages 2/91 to 2/93

199

245

230

199

13

(1)

(2)

TeSys enclosed starters

Schemes

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Non-reversing starters LF3

I2

I4

J21A
1

+S-S

Q3

-KA1

J21B
1 2 3

Q2

Black
White
Brown
Blue

I1

Output
Q1

Aux+
AuxASi+
ASi-

AS Interface
Input
I3

A (bus) M (local)

KM
GV
ready

GV
Flt.

-KM1
GV
ready

-KA1

-KO3

PR5 4 1 2 3

5 PR3

-KO3

J2
NO

COM

NC
+24 V
0V
ASi+
ASi-

O3

Sensor 2

250 VAC / 5 A

Sensor 1

Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79

Reversing starters LF4

AS Interface
I4

J21A

-KM1
1

+S-S

Output

Q1

Q2

-KA1

J21B

A (bus) M (local)

1 2 3

Q3

Aux+
AuxASi+
ASi-

I2

Black
White
Brown
Blue

I1

Input
I3

-KM2
GV
ready

GV
Flt.

I 0 II

-KM1

5 PR3

GV
-KO3
ready

-KA1

-KM2

PR5 4 1 2 3
-KO3
J2

Sensor 2
Sensor 1

COM

NC

O3
250 VAC / 5 A

+24 V
0V
ASi+
ASi-

NO

10

Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions :
pages 2/88 to 2/90

2/91

Recommended application TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system
schemes

Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay

1
2
3
4

AS-Interface line

5
6
7
8
9
10

2/92

Recommended
application schemes

TeSys enclosed starters

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

(continued)

Connections on enclosure
M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
24 V 4

AS-i +

AS-i

0V

2
Sensor M12 female connector
Limit switch
3

2-wire PNP type sensor

3

Sensor 1
1

2
Sensor 2

3-wire PNP type sensor

3
Sensor 1

+
+

Sensor 1

+
+

Sensor 2

Sensor 2

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2/93

TeSys enclosed starters

Connections

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters in enclosures with cable glands

2
3

4
M

5
8

5
7

1 Junction box

2 Incoming power
3 Power extension
4 FTXCY1212: splitter block

5 XZCR1511040Ap: extension
6 XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
7 XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables
8 XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

8
9
10
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

2/94

Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

TeSys enclosed starters

Connections (continued)

D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors

3
1

2
M

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Incoming power
Power extension
Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank
FTXCY1212: splitter block
XZCR1511040Ap: extension
XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables
XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to

be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference

8
5

for incoming power

female connector

for power extension

and motor connection
male connectors

Straight cover

1 x 09-20-003-0420

2 x 09-20-003-0420

Male insert
6-way, 400 V

2 x 09-12-005-3101

Female insert
6-way, 400 V

1 x 09-12-005-3001

Male contacts
2.5 mm2

8 x 09-33-000-6102

Female contacts
2.5 mm2

3 x 09-33-000-6202

Plug for the last socket

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1 x 09-20-003-5408

Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors

2

Incoming power
Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank
FTXCY1212: splitter block
XZCR1511040Ap: extension
XZCB1pp02p: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
XZCG1403D: tap link for two cables
XZCB1pp01p: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface

Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to

be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference
for incoming power
female connector

for power extension

and motor connection
male connectors

Straight cover

1 x 09-30-006-442 (1)
1 x 09-30-006-443 (2)

2 x 09-20-003-1440

Male insert
6-way, 400 V

2 x 09-12-005-3101

Female insert
6-way, 400 V

1 x 09-33-006-2702

Male contacts
2.5 mm2

5 x 09-33-000-6102

Female contacts
2.5 mm2

3 x 09-33-000-6207

7
4

7
8
9

(1) PG21.
(2) PG29.

10
Functions :
pages 2/76 to 2/79

Characteristics:
pages 2/80 to 2/83

References:
pages 2/84 and 2/85

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/88 to 2/93

2/95

Presentation

TeSys D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Presentation

AS-Interface modules LA9Z32810 and LA9Z32811 allow motor starters to be

monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the
ASInterface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF2.

The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs.

565189

565188

These products can be mounted in two ways:

b on 5 rail,
b on LA9Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.

3
AS-I
PWR

4
5
6
7
8

AS-I
PWR

9
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so
reducing installation time.
The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector.
The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black
connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject
to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).

10
Characteristics:
page 2/98

2/96

References:
page 2/99

Dimensions, scheme :
pages 2/100 and 2/101

Presentation (continued)

TeSys D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Fields of application

The various module sizes allow control of:

- non-reversing starters,
- reversing starters,
- 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings.
The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a
current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors:
- LP1, LP4K06 to K12,
- LC1D09 to D32.

Composition

565190

AS-Interface module

1
AS-I
PWR

1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator:

- red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off,
- green: communication OK, outputs OK,
- red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31),
- off: no power supply to AS-Interface.

2 Green PWR LED:

- LED on: auxiliary power supply ON,
- LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.

5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 2/98

References:
page 2/99

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/97

Characteristics

TeSys D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

General system environment

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Interface type
Product certifications
Protective treatment
Degree of protection
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Maximum operating altitude
Flame resistance
Resistance to external
mechanical impact
Vibration resistance
Immunity to non-dissipating
shockwave (Uimp)
Immunity to
electrostatic discharge
Immunity to
fast transient currents
Immunity to
dissipated shock wave
Immunity to conducted
radio-frequency interference
Immunity to radiated
radio-frequency interference
Radio-conducted and
radio-radiated rejection
AS-Interface supply
Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface
Cabling c.s.a., 24 V
Cabling c.s.a., input/output

Conforming to IEC 60539

Storage, conforming to IEC 60539
Operation
Without derating
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
1/2 sine wave, 11ms
conforming to IEC60068-2-6
5150 Hz
conforming to 60068-2-6
Conforming to IEC 60439-1
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4 level 4
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6
ENV 50 141
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3
ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204
(GSM)
ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1)

Flexible cable
Flexible cable
Flexible cage terminal
and flexible cable

Input current
Coincidence of inputs
Maximum length of wires to switching components
Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V)
Thermal current
Ith
Coincidence of outputs
Short-circuit protection
By flywheel diode
Outputs switched off
Watchdog
in event of interference
on the AS-Interface line
AS-Interface profile
Number of I/O
Current consumption
On AS-Interface On/OFF
Data bits
Status
Command
D0 (O)
D1 (O)
D2 (O)
D3 (O)
Status
D0 (I)
D1 (I)
D2 (I)
D3 (I)
Parameters
P0P3

C
C
m
C

LA9Z32810
AS-Interface N 18701
TH
IP 20
-40+85
-10+55
2000
960
15 gn
2 gn

kV

2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs

kV
kV

8: in open air (level 3)

4: in indirect mode (level 2)
2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs

kV

2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs

V/m

10

V/m

10
Class A

V
mm2
mm2
mm2

29.5-31.6
2 x 0.50.75
2 x 0.50.75
0.082.5; AWG2812

mA

7
100 %
0.4
0.5
2
100 %
Yes
Yes

m
A
A

mA
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4

3F
2 inputs/1 output
812
0
Off
Not used
Not used
Not used
Absent
Absent
Not used
Not used
Not used

9
10
Presentation:
pages 2/96 and 2/97

2/98

References:
page 2/99

LA9Z32811
AS-Interface N 18601

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 2/100 and 2/101

1
On

Present
Present

7F
4 inputs/2 outputs
812
0
Off
Off

1
On
On

Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent

Present
Present
Present
Present

References

TeSys D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

AS-Interface modules (1) (2)

No. of
Number
channels of inputs
3

Number
Output
of outputs voltage
V
1
c 24

Current
Reference
per output
A
0.5
LA9Z32810

Weight

c 24

0.5

LA9Z32811

Busbar
system
mm
40 or 60

Width

Reference

mm
45

LA9Z32744

kg
0.044

54

LA9Z32745

0.051

45

LA9Z32740

0.091

54

LA9Z32741

0.098

45

LA9Z32742

0.085

54

LA9Z32743

0.092

kg
0.070
0.070

Accessories
Description

Modules without
electrical connection,
for use with all
LA9Zpp adapters

Module with
PE + N polarity and
5-way connector

40

60

Weight

Replacement connectors and adapter cable

Description

Colour

Insulation Displacement
Yellow
Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface
Insulation Displacement
Connector (IDC)
for auxiliary supply
Description

Adapter cable for connection to

addressing terminal XZMC11

Black

Sold in
lots of
5

Unit
reference
LA9Z32825

Weight
kg
0.100

LA9Z32826

0.100

Cable length

Reference

m
0.5

XZMG12

1
2
3
4
5
6

Weight
kg
0.070

(1) Users Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Supplied with connectors LA9Z32825 and LA9Z32826.

8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 2/96 and 2/97

Characteristics:
page 2/98

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 2/100 and 2/101

2/99

TeSys D.O.L. starters

Dimensions,
mounting

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Dimensions

69,5

LA9 Z3281p

65

1
2

86

45

Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743

LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741

60 mm busbar system

40 mm busbar system
Common front face view

120

115

80

80

40

4
5

LA9

Z32740, Z32742

45

Z32741, Z32743

54

LA9 Z32745

LA9 Z32744

40 or 60 mm busbar system
Common front face view

80

40

8
9

135,5

LA9

10

30
a

80

125,5

135,5

125,5

Z32745

54

Z32744

45

Presentation:
pages 2/96 and 2/97

2/100

Characteristics:
page 2/98

References:
page 2/99

Schemes

TeSys D.O.L. starters

LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

Schemes

D.O.L. starter, non-reversing

1 motor

2 motors

Q1

Q1

KM

Q2

1/L1

Q2

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

KM2

KM1

M1

KM2

5/L3

Q2

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

OUT2
X3, 8

OUT1
X3, 7

M
X3, 6

IN +
X3, 5

IN4
X3, 4

IN3
X3, 3

Q1

KM1

5/L3

3/L2

KM2

3/L2

KM1

KM

IN2
X3, 2

IN1
X3, 1

OUT1
X4, 2

M
X4, 4

IN +
X3, 3

LA9 Z32811

KM

1/L1

IN2
X3, 2

IN1
X3, 1

LA9 Z32810

M2

D.O.L. starter, reversing

KM1

KM2

KM2

KM1
KM2

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

KM1

OUT2
X3, 8

OUT1
X3, 7

M
X3, 6

IN +
X3, 5

IN4
X3, 4

IN3
X3, 3

IN2
X3, 2

IN1
X3, 1

LA9 Z32811

8
9

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

KM2

KM1

10

Presentation:
pages 2/96 and 2/97

Characteristics:
page 2/98

References:
page 2/99

2/101

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3/0

Contents

3 - TeSys protection components:

motor circuit-breakers

TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46
b Dimensions, mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/66
b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/76

TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52
b Dimensions, mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/78

b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/83

TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for

the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves
and transformers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/84

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/86
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/87
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/90

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/91

b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/91

6
7
8
9
10

3/1

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Protection of motors against short-circuits and overloads

2
3
4
5
6

Tripping threshold on short-circuit

13 In

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V

Up to 15 kW

Up to 30 kW

37 kW

Operational current at 415 V

0.132 A

965 A

5680 A

Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2

10100 kA

35100 kA

50100 kA

15 kA

Door interlock mechanism

Without

With

With

Without

Circuit-breaker type

GV2 ME

GV2 P

GV3P

GV3 ME80

Pages

3/46 and 3/47

3/48

3/48

3/48

7
8
9
10

3/2

Protection of motors with high current peak

on starting

1
2
3
4

20 In

7.5110 kW

Up to 11 kW

12220 A

0.2523 A

35 and 36 kA

70 kA

With

GV7 RE
3/49

15100 kA

With

GV7 RS

GV2 RT
3/50 and 3/51

7
8
9
10

3/3

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys protection components

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Protection of motors
Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with
thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.

2
3
4
5
6
7

Tripping threshold on short-circuit

13 In

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V

Up to 15 kW

Operational current at 415 V

0.432 A

Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2

10100 kA

Door interlock mechanism

With

Circuit-breaker type

GV2 LE

GV2 L

Pages

3/52

3/53

8
9
10

3/4

35100 kA

2
3

614 In

813 In

6.312.5 In

Up to 30 kW

37 kW

0.37250 kW

2565 A

80 A

1.5500 A

50100 kA

35 kA

25.7 and 150 kA

With

With

With

GV3L

GK3 EF80

NS 80

3/53

3/53

Please consult the Schneider Electric catalogue - Low Voltage Distribution

5
35.7150 kA

NS 100 to
NS 250

45.7150 kA

NS 400 and
NS 630

7
8
9
10

3/5

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2, GV3 and GV7

Presentation

526135

526134

Presentation

GV2 ME
with screw clamp
terminals

GV2 ME
with spring terminals
connections

GV3
GV3 circuit-breakers feature connection by BTR screws (hexagon socket head),
tightened using a n 4 Allen key.
This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (1) 
(Schneider Electric patent).
This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque,
in order to avoid cable creep.

526136

1
3

GV3 circuit-breakers are also available with connection by lugs. This type of
connection meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for
applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport.

4
GV3 P

GV7
GV7 circuit-breakers: with connection by screw clamp terminals (for bars and lugs)
and by clip-on connectors.

Operation
Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own.
Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor.

526137

1
3

GV2 ME and GV3 ME80

Pushbutton control.
Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button I 1.
De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button O 2, or
automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip
attachment.

4
GV2 P

GV2 P, GV3P and GV7R

b Control by rotary knob: for GV2P and GV3P

b Control by rocker lever: for GV7R.

526138

GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV3 ME, GV3P and GV7 R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole
thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers specifically designed for the control and
protection of motors, conforming to standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1.

Connection
GV2
GV2ME and GV2P circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp
terminals.
Circuit-breaker GV2ME can be supplied with lugs or spring terminal connections.
Spring terminal connections ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is
resistant to harsh environments, vibration and impact and are even more effective
when conductors without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two
independent conductors.

Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position I 1.

De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position O 2.
De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the
Trip position 3.
Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or rocker lever to
position O.

1
3

(1) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.

GV7 R

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/23

3/6

References:
pages 3/46 to 3/51

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/75

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

Presentation (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2, GV3 and GV7

Presentation (continued)

Protection of motors and personnel

Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements
incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker.

The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping

threshold, which is equal to 13 times the maximum setting current of the thermal
trips.
The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for
ambient temperature variations.
The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated knob 4.
Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct finger
contact from the front panel.
The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in
the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against
sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start
button I has to be pressed to restart the motor.
With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely
controlled.
The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be
locked in the Stop position O by up to 4 padlocks.
Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position,
provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving
contacts by the position of the operators.

Special features
These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any configuration thanks to their
universal fixing arrangement: screw fixing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical,
asymmetrical or combination rails.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/23

References:
pages 3/46 to 3/51

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/75

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

3/7

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Environment

Circuit-breaker type
Conforming to standards

GV2 ME
GV2 P
IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 
60947-4-1, 
EN 60204, UL 508,
CSA C 22.2 n 14-05, 
NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130,
VDE 0113, 0660

GV3P
IEC/EN 
60947-1,
60947-2,
60947-4-1,
UL 508 type E,
CSA C 22.2 
n 14-05 type E

GV3 ME80
IEC/EN, NF
EN, BSEN,
DIN EN 60947-2,
60947-4-1

Product certifications

UL, CSA, CCC,

CEBEC,
GOST, TSE,
BV, GL, LROS ,
DNV, PTB,
EZU, SETI,
RINA, ATEX

UL, CSA,
CCC (pending),
GOST,
ATEX (pending)

UL, CSA,
LROS

TH
IP 20

TC
IP 20

2
3
Protective treatment
Degree of protection

Conforming to 
IEC 60529

5
6

TH
IP 20

Open mounted

GV2 Mp01: 
IP41 
GV2 Mp02: 
IP55
30 gn -11 ms

In enclosure

4
Shock resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

Vibration resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

Ambient air temperature

Storage
Operation

Open mounted
In enclosure
Temperature compensation
Open mounted
In enclosure
Flame resistance
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
Maximum operating altitude
Suitable for isolation
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6
Resistance to mechanical impact

C
C
C
C
C
C
m
J

Sensitivity to phase failure

Technical characteristics
Circuit-breaker type

7
8
9
10

References:
pages 3/46 to 3/51

3/8

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/75

GV3 PC01 and GV3 CE01:

GV3 PC02: IP55 IP55

On: 15 gn -11ms
Off: 30 gn -11ms
5 gn (5150 Hz)
4 gn
(5300 Hz)
- 40+ 80
- 40+ 80
- 40+ 80
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 60 (2)
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 40
960
960
2000
3000
Yes
Yes
0.5
0.5
10
IK 04
IK 09
(in enclosure)
Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2
GV2 ME GV2 P

15 gn -11 ms

2.5 gn
(025 Hz)
- 40+ 80
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 40
- 20+ 60
- 20+ 40
960
3000

0.5

2.5 gn (25 Hz)

GV3
ME80

A
AC-3
690

A
AC-3
690

A
AC-3
690

GV7
Rp20...
Rp100
A
AC-3
690

690

690

690

750

600

600

600

Hz

50/60

50/60

600
(B600)
50/60

kV

W
C.O.

2.5
100 000

8
50 000

8
30 000

5
50 000

C.O.
C.O.
C.O./h
A

GV2 RT

TC
IP 405 with
terminal
shrouds

22 gn - 20 ms

GV3 P

Utilisation category

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 60947-2
(Ui)
Rated voltage
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, 
UL 508
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Rated operational
frequency
UL, CSA
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2
voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole
Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Close, Open)
Electrical durability
440 V In/2
for AC-3 duty
440 V In
Duty class (maximum operating rate)
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Maximum conventional
rated thermal current (Ith)
Rated duty
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

UL (1), CSA,
PTB, EZU,
GOST, TSE,
DNV, LROS,
GL, BV, RINA,
CCC, ATEX

GV7 R
IEC 60947-1, 
60947-2,
60947-4-1, 
EN 60947-1,
60947-2, 
EN 60947-4-1, 
NF C 63-650, 
NF C 63-120,
79-130,
VDE 0113,
0660
UL, DNV,
CCC

- 55+ 95
- 25 + 70

- 25 + 55 (3)

960
2000
Yes
0.5

GV7
Rp150

GV7
Rp220

8.7
40 000

14.5
20 000

50/60

100 000

30 000
50 000
40 000
20 000

50 000

30 000
20 000
10 000
25
25
25
25
0.16  0.16  0.40  13 
80
12 
150
220
32
32
23
65
100
Continuous duty
(1) UL 508 type E for GV2 PppH7
(2) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space, or side mounting addon contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
(3) For operation up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Mounting characteristics
Operating position
Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (1)

90

90

90

90

Connection characteristics

Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals

Bare cables

Circuit-breaker type
Connection to screw clamp terminals
(2)
Solid cable
(Max. number of 
conductors x c.s.a.)
Flexible cable 
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Tightening torque
Connection to spring terminals
Number of conductors x c.s.a.

mm2

GV2 ME
Min.
2x1

Max.
2x6

GV2 P
Min.
2x1

Max.
2x6

GV3 P
Min.
2x1

mm2

2 x 1.5

2x6

2 x 1.5

2x6

2x1

mm2

2x1

2x4

2x1

2x4

2x1

N.m

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

Solid cable

mm2

2 x 1 (3)

2x6

Max.
1 x 25 and
1 x 35
1 x 25 and
1 x 35
1 x 25 and
1 x 35
5: 25 mm2
8: 35 mm2

Flexible cable 
without cable end

mm2

2 x 1.5 (3) 2 x 4

GV3 ME80
Min.
Max.
1 x 2.5
1 x 35
1 x 2.5

2 x 16

1 x 2.5

2 x 16

4
5

Connection by bars or lugs

Bars or lugs

e
Circuit-breaker type
Pitch

Bars or cables with lugs

L'

Without spreaders

mm

13.5

17.5

GV7
Rp20...Rp100
35

With spreaders

mm

45

45

45

mm

y6

y6

y6

y6

y6

mm

y 9.5

y 13.5

y 25

y 25

y 25

mm

y 9.5

y 16.5

mm

y 10

y 10

y 10

y 10

y 10

M4

M6

M6

M8

M8

Screws

Bare cables (copper or aluminium)

with connectors

GV2MEpp6

GV3Ppp6

GV7 Rp150

GV7 Rp220

35

35

Tightening torque

N.m

1.7

10

15

15

Height (h)

mm

20

20

20

C.s.a.

mm2

1.5...95

1.5...95

1.5...185

Tightening torque

N.m

15

15

15

7
8
9

(1) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage.
(2) For motor circuit-breakers GV3 P: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system.
Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local electrical wiring regulations.
(3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
References:
pages 3/46 to 3/51

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/75

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

3/9

10

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 ME and GV2 P

Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P

Circuit-breaker type

Rating

Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

A
230/240 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)

440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)

Associated fuses (if required)

if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2

230/240 V

400/415 V

6
440 V

500 V

690 V

GV2 ME
01 07 08
to
06
0.1 2.5 4
to
1.6
g g g

20

6.3 10

14

18

21
&
22
23
&
25
50

15

15

15

50

50

50

15

75

75

75

75

g g g

10

32
50

GV2 P
01 07 08
to
06
0.1 2.5 4
to
1.6
g g g

10

14

16

20

32

21
&
22
23
&
25
g

6.3 10

14

18

32
g

100 100 g

10

50

50

50

40

50

50

50

50

50

20

20

20

50

50

50

75

75

75

75

50

42

10

10

10

75

75

75

100 75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

80

80 g

100 100 g

100 100 100

125 125 125

100 100 50
50

32

100 100 75

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

aM

gG

g g g

aM

g g g g g 63

gG

g g g g g

80

80 100 100 g

aM

g g g 50

50

50

50

63

63

50

63

gG

g g g 63

63

63

63

80

80

63

80 100 100

aM

g g g 50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

gG

g g g 63

63

63

63

63

63

63

63

63

63

63

aM

g 16

25

32

32

40

40

40

40

20

25

40

40

50

50

50

50

gG

g 20

32

40

40

50

50

50

50

25

32

50

50

63

63

63

63

10

3/10

16

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

14

g > 100 kA.

(1) As % of Icu.

References:
pages 3/46 to 3/48

10

Schemes:
page 3/76

g g

g g

63

80

80

80

80

TeSys protection components

Characteristics (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 ME and GV2 P

Breaking capacity of GV2ME and GV2P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type

GV2 ME
01 to 06 07
0.1 to
2.5
1.6

08
4

10
6.3

14
10

16
14

20
18

21
23

22
25

32
32

100

100

100

100

100

50

50

40

40

40

50

20

20

20

20

75

75

75

75

75

50

42

10

10

10

10

100

100

75

75

75

75

GV2 P
01 to 06 07
0.1 to
2.5
1.6

08
4

10
6.3

14
10

16
14

20
18

21
23

22
25

32
32

100

100

100

100

100

50

50

50

50

50

100

100

100

100

100

100

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

GV2 ME
01 to 06 07
0.1
2.5
to 1.6

08
4

10
6.3

14
10

16
14

20
18

21
23

22
25

32
32

1 mm2

y 10 kA y 6 kA

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

1.5 mm2

y 20 kA y 10 kA (2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

2.5 mm2

(2)

46 mm2

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

A
230/240 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
Circuit-breaker type
Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

A
230/240 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V (3)

Icu = Ics

kA

Circuit-breaker type
Rating
Cable protection against
thermal stress in the
event of short-circuit
(PVC insulated copper cables)

A
Minimum 
c.s.a. 
protected
at 40 C
at Isc max.

g > 100 kA
p Cable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected
(3) With limiter LA9 LB920

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References:
pages 3/46 to 3/48

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

3/11

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3P and GV3ME80

Breaking capacity of GV3P and GV3ME80

Motor circuit-breaker type

GV3 P

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

230/240 V

Icu

18

25

32

40

50

65

13

18

25

32

40

50

65

80

kA

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

50

50

50

15

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

10

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

60

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

100

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

100

Ics % (1)

400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)

500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
Associated fuses, if required
if lsc > breaking capacity Icu

230/240 V

415 V

440 V

500 V

690 V

GV3 ME80

13

aM

gG

aM

125

125

125

315

gG

160

160

160

400

aM

63

80

125

125

125

125

125

315

gG

80

100

160

160

160

160

160

400

aM

63

63

63

63

80

80

80

200

gG

80

80

80

80

100

100

100

250

aM

50

50

50

50

63

63

63

200

gG

63

63

63

63

80

80

80

250

g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc.

(1) As % of Icu.

8
9
10
References:
page 3/48

3/12

Dimensions:
pages 3/71 and 3/72

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Breaking capacity of GV7R

Circuit-breaker type

GV7
RE150

RS150

RE220

RS220

RE20RE100

1220 to 60100

90150

90150

132220

132220

kA

85

100

85

100

85

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

36

70

35

70

35

70

100

100

100

100

100

100

36

65

35

65

35

65

100

100

100

100

100

100

18

50

30

50

30

50

100

100

100

100

100

100

10

10

10

Ics % (1)

100

100

100

100

100

100

4 mm2

y 6 kA

y 6 kA

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

6 mm2

y 25 kA

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

1050 mm2

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

230/240 V

lcu
Ics % (1)

400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V

Cable protection against

thermal stress in the
event of short-circuit
(PVC insulated copper cables)

Minimum 
c.s.a.
protected
at 40 C
at Isc max.

Icu

kA

RS20RS100

1
2
3
4
5

(1) As % of Icu.
p Cable c.s.a. protected.
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.

6
7
8
9
10
References:
page 3/49

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/13

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 LE and GV2 L

Environment

1
2
3

Circuit-breaker type
Conforming to standards
Product certifications

GV2 LE
GV2 L
IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60204, NF C 63-650, NF C63-120, 79-130, 
VDE 0113, 0660.
CSA, CCC
CSA, CCC, BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA

Protective treatment

TH

TH

Shock resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

30 gn

30 gn

Vibration resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

5 gn (5 to 150 Hz)

5 gn (5 to 150 Hz)

Ambient air temperature

Storage

- 40+ 80

- 40+ 80

Operation

- 20+ 60

- 20+ 60

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

960

960

2000

2000

Solid cable

mm2

Min.
2x1

Max.
2x6

Min.
2x1

Max.
2x6

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

2 x 1.5

2x6

2 x 1.5

2x6

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

2x1

2x4

2x1

2x4

N.m

1.7

1.7

Yes

Yes

0.5

0.5

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

AC-3

AC-3

Flame resistance
Maximum operating altitude
Operating position

4
Connection
(Max. number of 
conductors x c.s.a)

5
Tightening torque
Suitable for isolation

Resistance to mechanical impact

8
9

Technical characteristics
Utilisation category

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Rated operational frequency

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

690

690

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

690

690

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Hz

50/60

50/60

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Rated impulse withstand
voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole

kV

1.8

1.8

Mechanical durability
For AC-3 duty
(C.O.: Closing, Opening)
Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty
(C.O.: Closing, Opening)
Duty class
(maximum operating rate)
Rated duty
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

C.O.

100 000

100 000

C.O.

100 000

100 000

C.O./h

40

40

Continuous duty

Continuous duty

10
References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

3/14

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Characteristics (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 LE and GV2 L

Circuit-breaker type

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2

A
230/240 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
Associated fuses (if required)
if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2 
amendment 1

GV2 L
03 06 08
to &
05 07
0.4 1.6 4
to to
1 2.5
g g g

16 20 22

32

14 18 25

32

50

50

100 100 g

15 15 15

10

50 50 40

50

50

15

14

16

20

22

32

6.3 10

14

18

25

32

50

50

100 100

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

20

20

20

20

20

100 100 50 50 50

50

75

75

75

75

75

50

10

10

10

10

10

100 100 75 75 75

75

100 75

75

75

75

10

10

75 75 75

75

75 75 75

75

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

80

aM

80

100 100

gG

100 100 g

125 125

aM

63 63 80

80 100 100 100

gG

80 80 100 100 g

100 125 125 125

aM

50

50

50 50 63

63

50

63

gG

63

63

63 63 80

80

63

80 100 100 100

aM

50

50

50 50 50

50

50

50

50

50

50

gG

63

63

63 63 63

63

63

63

63

63

63

aM

16 25 32

32

40 40 40

40

20

25

40

40

50

50

50

50

gG

20 32 40

40

50 50 50

50

25

32

50

50

63

63

63

63

1 mm2

kA

y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) p

y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2)

1.5 mm2

kA

y20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p

y20 y10 (2) (2) (2) (2)

2.5 mm2

(2) p

(2)

46 mm2

230/240 V

400/415 V

440 V

500 V

690 V

Cable protection against

thermal stress in the event
of short-circuit
(PVC insulated copper cables)
Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C 
and at Isc max.

GV2 LE
03 07 08 10 14
to
06
0.4 2.5 4 6.3 10
to
1.6
g g g g
g

80

80

80

1
2
3
4
5

80

6
7
8

g > 100 kA
p Cable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected

9
10
References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/15

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3L and GK3EF80

Environment

1
2

Circuit-breaker type
Conforming to standards

GV3 L
IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2

GK3 EF80
IEC 60947-2, EN 60204

Protective treatment

TH

TC

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60529

IP 20

IP 20

Shock resistance

Conforming to 
IEC 60068-2-27
Conforming to
IEC 60068-2-6
Conforming to
IEC 60695-2-1
Storage

On : 15 gn -11 ms
Off : 30 gn -11 ms
4 gn (5300 Hz)

22 gn -20 ms
2.5 gn (025 Hz)

960

960

- 40+ 80

- 40+ 80

- 20+ 60 (1)

- 20+ 70 open mounted

3000

3000

Vibration resistance
Flame resistance
Ambient air temperature

Operation
Maximum operating altitude
Operating position
Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (2)

Any position

4
Connection
(Max. number of 
conductors x c.s.a)

Solid cable

mm2

Min.
2x1

Flexible cable 
without cable end
Flexible cable 
with cable end

mm2

2x1

mm2

2x1

N.m

Tightening torque

6
7
8

Suitable for isolation

conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6

Max.
1 x 25
1 x 35
1 x 25
1 x 35
1 x 25
1 x 35
5 : 25 mm2
8 : 35 mm2

Min.
1 x 2.5

Max.
1 x35

1 x 2.5 or 
2 x 2.5
1 x 2.5 or 
2 x 2.5
5

1 x 25 or 
2 x 16
1 x 25 or 
2 x 16

Yes

Yes

Technical characteristics
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand
voltage (U imp)
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated operational frequency

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

690

750

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

kV

10

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

690

690

Hz

50/60

5060

C.O.

50000

1500

C.O.

50000

20000

C.O./h

25

40

Operating threshold of magnetic trips

14 I max

3363

Utilisation category

Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty

(C.O.: Close - Open)
Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Closing, Opening)
Maximum operating rate

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

(1) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting

add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
(2) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage.

10
References:
page 3/53

3/16

Dimensions:
pages 3/81 and 3/82

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Characteristics (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3L and GK3EF80

Breaking capacity of GV3L and GK3EF80

Type
Breaking capacity of the
circuitbreaker only or of the
circuitbreaker combined with
a thermal overload relay

230/240 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
400/415 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
440 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
500 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
690 V

Icu

kA

Ics % (1)
Associated fuses (if required)
for use with circuit-breaker only
or circuit-breaker combined with
a thermal overload relay
if lsc > breaking capacity

230/240 V

415 V

440 V

500 V

690 V

GV3L32
100

GV3L40
100

GV3L50
100

GV3L65
100

GK3 EF80
50

100

100

100

100

100

40

100

100

50

50

50

35

100

100

100

100

100

25

50

50

50

50

50

25

100

100

100

100

100

30

12

12

12

12

12

15

50

50

50

50

50

30

50

50

50

50

50

50

aM

200

gG

315

aM

125

200

gG

160

250

aM

63

80

125

125

125

160

gG

80

100

160

160

160

250

aM

63

63

63

63

80

160

gG

80

80

80

80

100

200

aM

50

50

50

50

63

125

gG

63

63

63

63

80

160

Use of circuit-breakers without fuses

1
2
3
4
5
6

Minimum cable length (in metres) limiting the maximum short-circuit current to 35 kA
maximum, so enabling breakers GK3 EF80 to be used without fuses
mm2

y 25

35

50

70

95

120

50 kA

10

13

15

45 kA

10

12

40 kA

37 kA

Cable c.s.a.
Isc (rms) 3-phase, incoming
(Ue = 415 V)

GV3L25
100

7
8

g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc.

(1) As % of Icu

9
10
References:
page 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/82 and 3/82

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/17

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2, GV3P and GV3L
Auxiliary contacts

Type of contacts

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

690

Fault signalling
GV AD,
GV AM11 (1)
690

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14

and UL 508
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

600

300

250 (690 in relation to

main circuit)
300

2.5

2.5

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14

and UL 508

Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Close - Open)
Operational power and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. a.c. operation
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Operational power, 
normal conditions
Occasional breaking and making
capacities, abnormal conditions
Rated operational current
(Ie)
Operational power and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. d.c. operation
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Operational power, 
normal conditions
Occasional breaking and making
capacities, abnormal conditions
Rated operational current
(Ie)
Low power switching reliability of contact

C.O.

100 000

1000

100 000

AC-15/100 000 C.O.

AC-14/1000 C.O.

AC-15/100 000 C.O.

Minimum operational conditions

d.c. operation

V
mA

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

(associated insulation
coordination)
Conventional
thermal current (Ith)

2
3
4
5

Instantaneous auxiliary
GV AN, GV AD

V
VA

110 230 380 440 500 690 24

127 240 415
300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36

kVA

13

15

13

12

4.5

3.3

2.2

1.5

0.6

DC-13/100 000 C.O.

V

Cabling, screw clamp

terminals

1.25 1

0.5

DC-13/1000 C.O.

DC-13/100 000 C.O.

60

24

15

24

15

240 360 240 210 180

100 50

50

100 50

50

0.15

0.15

1.3

0.5

GV AN only
0.752.5
0

0.752.5
1

F
F

0.3

GB2 CB06 or gG fuse

10 A max

0.751.5
Operation of fault signalling contacts

GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp

Change of state following tripping on
shortcircuit, overload or undervoltage.

F
O
F
O

Contact open
Contact closed

(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/76.
(2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 5/81.

0.3

GV AM11
Change of state following tripping on
shortcircuit.


F
F

GV AE: Number of failures for n million operating cycles

(17 V-5 mA): = 10-6
17
5
By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational
current for Ue y 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max
1
2
12.5
12.5
0.752.5
0.752.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
1.4 max
1.4 max

F
O

3/18

0.3

48

F
O

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 3/66 to 3/83

0.5

24

mm2

References:
page 3/55

1.5

Power pole

10

1.27 2.4

60

Flexible cable without cable end

Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts

Cabling, spring terminal

connections

0.45 0.45 0.48 0.6

48

60

0.22 0.3
1

48

24

mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

48

60

110 230
127 240
120 120

48

110 230 24
127 240
72 72 48

Number of conductors
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Tightening torque

24

48

110 240
(2)
140 240 180 140 120

Short-circuit protection

48

Instantaneous
auxiliary GV AE

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV3ME80
Auxiliary contacts

Type of contacts
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conventional rated
thermal current (Ith)

Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Close - Open)
Operational
power and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
a.c. operation

Operational power
and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
d.c. operation

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GV3 A01A07
690

Fault signalling contacts

GV3 A08 and A09
690

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V

UL 508
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
A

600 (B600)

600 (B600)

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, A

UL 508
C.O.

5 (B600)

5 (B600)

100 000

1000

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

110 220 380

127 240 415
AC-11/100 000 C.O.

440

500

690

110 220 380

127 240 415
AC-11/1000 C.O.

440

500

690

VA

350 500

800

850

700

700

400

240 460

800

850

450

450

200

Occasional breaking and 

making capacities
Operational current (Ie)

kVA

12

20

20

15

15

10

2.4

12

15

12

12

4.5

3.5

2.2

1.5

1.5

0.6

3.6

3.5

2.2

0.3

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Operational power

24

48

60

110

220

24

48

60

110

220

Occasional breaking and 

making capacities
Operational current (Ie)

DC-11/100 000 C.O.

48

180 240

180

140

120

120 120

90

70

60

240 360

240

210

180

180 180

135

105

90

1.3

0.5

1.5

0.7

0.3

2.5

By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max

Number of conductors

Solid cable

mm2

12.5

12.5

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

0.752.5

0.752.5

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

0.752.5

0.751.5

Contact operation

Power pole
GV3 A01, A07

3
4

DC-11/1000 C.O.

Short-circuit protection
Connection

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Operational power

48

6
GV3 A08 and A09 change state following
tripping on short-circuit or overload

O
F

GV3 A02

F
F

GV3 A03

O
F
F

GV3 A05

F
F
F

GV3 A06

F
F

7
8
Contact open
Contact closed

9
10

References:
page 3/61

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/19

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV7
Auxiliary contacts

Auxiliary contact characteristics

1
2
3
4

Type of contacts
Rated insulation voltage(Ui)
(associated insulation
coordination)
Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Close - Open)
Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
a.c. operation

Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
d.c. operation

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

GV7 AE11
690

GV7 AB11
690

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

C.O.

50 000

50 000

AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O.

24
48
110 230/ 380/ 440
240 415
5
5
5
5
5
5

0.1

DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O.

24
48
110

250

DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O.

24
48
110

250

2.5

2.5

0.8

0.3

0.2

0.5

0.03 0.5

17

12

mA

Solid cable

mm2

By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker

(rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max.
1 x 1.5 conductor
1 x 1.5 conductor

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5 conductor

1 x 1.5 conductor

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5 conductor

1 x 1.5 conductor

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated operational
current (Ie)

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated operational
current (Ie)

AC-12

AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O.

24
48
110 230/ 380/ 440
240 415
6
6
6
6
6
6

AC-15

V
DC-12
DC-14

Minimum operational conditions

d.c. operation

Short-circuit protection
Cabling

6
7
8
9
10
References:
page 3/63

3/20

Schemes:
page 3/77

690

2.5

2.5

690
5
0.1

0.5

0.1

0.25

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GK3EF80
Auxiliary contacts

Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

500

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Operational
power and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
a.c. operation
(C.O.: Close - Open)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

500

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

AC-15. 20 000 C.O.

48
110/127

220/240

380/415

440

500

Operational power

VA

360

500

800

850

700

700

4000

12 000

20 000

20 000

15 000

15 000

4.5

3.5

2.2

1.5

1.5

Occasional breaking and making VA

capacities
Rated operational current (Ie)
A
Operational
power and current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
d.c. operation
(C.O.: Close - Open)

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

DC-13. 1000 C.O.

24
48

60

110

220

Operational power

180

240

180

140

120

Occasional breaking and 

making capacities
Rated operational current (Ie)

240

280

240

210

180

1.3

0.5

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Cabling

Solid cable

mm2

1 x 14 conductor

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 2.5 conductor

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1 x 12.5 conductor or 2 x 12.5 conductors

N.m

0.8

Tightening torque

2
3
4

By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max

6
7
8
9
10
References:
page 3/61

Dimensions:
page 3/82

3/21

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Electric trips

Characteristics of electric trips

1
2

Circuit-breaker type
Type of trip
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

Operational voltage

Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V

UL 508
Conforming to IEC 60947-1
V

Operating time

4
5

600

600

600 (B600) 600 (B600) 600

600

0.7
1.1Un
0.75
0.2 Un
14

0.85
1.1 Un
0.7
0.35 Un
12

0.81.1 Un

0.7
1.1 Un
0.2
0.75 Ue

12

0.85
1.1 Un
0.35
0.7 Ue
< 10

GV3 B
690

GV7 R
GV3 D
690

GV7 AU
690

10.5

<5

VA

3.5

3.5

<5

1.1

1.6

1.1

2.5

<5

ms

From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the
circuitbreaker.
1015
10
15
< 50

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

Number of conductors

0.70.35 Un

100 %

100 %

100 %

2 or 4

1 or 2

Solid cable

mm2

12.5

12.5

1.5

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

0.752.5

0.752.5

1.5

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

0.751.5

0.752.5

Tightening torque

N.m

1.4 max

1.2

1.2

Mechanical durability
(C.O.: Close - Open)

C.O.

30 000 (GV2 ME and GV2 P)

50 % of the mechanical durability of the
10 000 (GV3 P and GV3 L)
circuitbreaker
(1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME
only, see page 3/76.

7
8
9
10
References:
page 3/63

3/22

GV7 AS
690

VA

On-load factor
Cabling

GV3 ME80

Sealed consumption

GV2ME
only
GV AX (1)
500

0.85
1.1Un
0.7
0.35 Un
12

Drop-out voltage
Inrush consumption

GV2 ME, GV2 P

GV3P, GV3L
GV AU
GV AS
690
690

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor 
circuit-breakers GV2 and GV3
Accessories

Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp and GV3Gp64

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

GV2Gppp
690

GV3Gp64
690

Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Permissible
peak current (I peak)
Permissible
thermal limit (I2t)
Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

63

115

kA

11

20

kA2s

104

300

IP 20

IP 20

Yes

Conforming to IEC 60529

Terminal block

1
2

Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09 (for GV2ME and GV2 P)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

690

Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60439-1

63

Conforming to IEC 60529

Connection

IP 20

Solid cable

mm

1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 6 conductors

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 4 conductors

Flexible cable with cable end

mm

1 x 1.5 to 10 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 2 conductors

Flexible or solid cable AWG

Tightening torque

3
4

1 AWG 4

Connector

N.m

2.2

Screw clamp terminals

N.m

1.7

Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)

Type
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Operating threshold

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

GV1 L3
690

LA9 LB920
690

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

63

63

rms current

1500 (non adjustable threshold)

1000 (non adjustable threshold)

1 conductor

2 conductors

1 conductor

2 conductors

Connection

Tightening torque

Solid cable

mm2

1.525

1.510

1.525

1.510

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1.525

2.510

1.525

1.510

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1.516

1.5 4

1.516

1.5 4

N.m

2.2

6
7

8
9
10
References:
page 3/57

3/23

TeSys protection components

Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 ME and GV2 P

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current

Time (s)

10 000

2
3

1000

100

1
10

2
3

4
1

5
0,1

6
7

0,01

0,001

1,5

10

100
x the setting current (Ir)

1 3 poles from cold state

2 2 poles from cold state
3 3 poles from hot state

8
9
10
References:
pages 3/47 and 3/48

3/24

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 ME and GV2 P

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)

100
1

=0

.3

=0

.25

2
3

=0

.5

4
5

10

=0
.7

0.8

0.9

co

=0

.95

5
10

11

0,1
0,1

7
1

10

15 (12)

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current

2 24 -32 A
3 20 -25 A
4 17 -23 A
5 13 -18 A
6 9 -14 A
7 6 -10 A
8 4 -6.3 A
9 2.5 -4 A
10 1.6 -2.5 A
11 1 -1.6 A
12 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)

8
9
10

References:
pages 3/47 and 3/48

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

3/25

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 ME

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

2
3
4
5

6
7

10

9
1

5
6
7
8
9

10

0,1

0,01

0,1

1 24 -32 A
2 20 -25 A
3 17 -23 A
4 13 -18 A
5 9 -14 A
6 6 -10 A
7 4 -6.3 A
8 2.5 -4 A
9 1.6 -2.5 A
10 1 -1.6 A

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

10
References:
pages 3/46 and 3/47

3/26

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 P

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

1
2
3

4
5
6

10

0,1

0,01

1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

6
7

0,1

24 -32 A
20 -25 A
17 -23 A
13 -18 A
9 -14 A
6 -10 A
4 -6.3 A
2.5 -4 A
1.6 -2.5 A
1 -1.6 A

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

8
9

10
References:
page 3/48

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

3/27

TeSys protection components

Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3 P and GV3ME80

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current

Time (s)

10 000

2
3

4a
1000

4b

100

3a
3b

10

1a

1b

2a
2b
1

5
0,1

6
7
8

0,01

0,001

10

100
x the setting current (Ir)

1a 3 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3P

1b 3 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P
2a 2 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3P
2b 2 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P
3a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3P
3b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P
4a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3ME80
4b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3ME80

9
10
References:
page 3/48

3/28

Dimensions:
pages 3/71 and 3/72

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3 P and GV3ME80

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)
100

=0
.25

0.
3

0.

3 4

5
6
7

10

0.7

0.

0.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

7
1

10

Maximum peak current

56 -80 A
48 -65 A
37 -50 A
30 -40 A
23 -32 A
17 -25 A
12 -18 A
9 -13 A

15

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

8
9

10
References:
page 3/48

Dimensions:
pages 3/71 and 3/72

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

3/29

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3 P and GV3ME80

Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
1000

2
2
3
4
5
6

7
100

4
5
10

6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

10

56-80 A (GV3ME80)
48-65 A (GV3P65)
37-50 A (GV3P50)
30-40 A (GV3P40)
23-32 A (GV3P32)
17-25 A (GV3P25)
12-18 A (GV3P18)
9-13 A (GV3P13)

15

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

9
10
References:
page 3/48

3/30

Dimensions:
pages 3/71 and 3/72

Schemes:
pages 3/76 and 3/77

TeSys protection components

Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R

Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current

Time (s)
10000

5000
2000

1000
500

200

100
50
20
10
5

1
0,5

0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02

0,01
0,005
0,002
0,001

1 1,12

10

20

30

40 50

70

100

x the setting current (Ir)

1 Cold state curve

2 Cold state curve
3 1214 Ir
In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s 20 %

8
9
10

References:
page 3/49

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/31

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc)

For GV7 RE only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RE220
2 GV7 RE150
3 GV7 RE100

100
80
70
60

50
40
30

20

1
2
3

10
8
7

6
5
4
2

10

20

30

40

50 60 70
100
Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RS220
2 GV7 RS150
3 GV7 RS100

100
80

70
60
50
40
30

20

1
2
3

10

8
7
6
5
4
2

10

20

10

30

40

50 60 70
100
Prospective Isc (kA)

References:
page 3/49

3/32

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Thermal limit

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)

For GV7 RE only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)

10

1 GV7 RE220
2 GV7 RE150
3 GV7 RE100

5x10

3x10

2x106

10

1
5x10

3x10

2x10

10

5x10

2
3

3x104
2x10

10

20

30

40

50 60 70
100
Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)

10

5x10

1 GV7 RS220
2 GV7 RS150
3 GV7 RS100

3x106
2x10

10

1
5x10

3x10

2x10

10

5x10

3x10

2x10

9
2

10

20

30

40

50 60 70
100
Prospective Isc (kA)

10

References:
page 3/49

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/33

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc)

For GV7 RE only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RE220
2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100

50
40

30

3
4

20

1
2

10
8
7
6

5
4
2

10

20
Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only

Limited peak current (kA)

1 GV7 RS220
2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100

50
40

30

20

1
2
10
8
7

6
5
4
2

10

10

20
Prospective Isc (kA)

References:
page 3/49

3/34

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7 R

Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Thermal limit

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)

For GV7 RE only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)

3x10

2x10

10

5x10

1 GV7 RE220
2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100

2
3

2
3x10

2x10

10

4
5

10

20
Prospective Isc (kA)

For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)

3x10

2x10

10

5x10

1 GV7 RS220
2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100

2
3x10

2x10

10

9
5

10

20
Prospective Isc (kA)

10

References:
page 3/49

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/35

TeSys protection components

Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 RT

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT

1
2

Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

2
1
10

4
1

5
6

0,1

0,01

0,001

10

1 3 poles from cold state

2 2 poles from cold state
3 3 poles from hot state

100
k x Ir

8
9
10
References:
page 3/50

3/36

Dimensions:
page 3/70

Schemes:
page 3/76

TeSys protection components

Curves

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

Tripping curves for GV2 L or LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current

Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

3
1
2
3

10

4
1

5
0,1

0,01

0,001

10

1 3 poles from cold state

2 2 poles from cold state
3 3 poles from hot state

100
x the setting current (Ir)

8
9
10

References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/37

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)

100

=0

.25

=0
.3

3
=0
.5

4
5
6
=

0.7

10

0.8

7
8

=0
s
co

.95

=0

.9

10

6
7
8
9

0,1

0,1

10

15

11

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A
3 25 A
4 18 A
5 14 A
6 10 A
7 6.3 A
8 4 A
9 2.5 A
10 1.6 A
11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

10
References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

3/38

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)

100

=0

.25

=0

.3

2
3

=0

.5

4
5

0.8

=0
.7

10

0.9

.95

co

=0

10

0,1

0,1

10

100

15

11

Prospective Isc (kA)

1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A
3 25 A
4 18 A
5 14 A
6 10 A
7 6.3 A
8 4 A
9 2.5 A
10 1.6 A
11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

8
9
10

References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/39

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 LE

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

2
3
4
5
6

10

8
1

0,1

6
7
8
9

0,01

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

0,1

32 A
25 A
18 A
14 A
10 A
6.3 A
4A
2.5 A
1.6 A

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

10
References:
page 3/52

3/40

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

1
2
3
4

5
6

10

7
8

4
1

5
0,1

0,01

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

6
7

0,1

25 A and 32 A
18 A
14 A
10 A
6.3 A
4A
2.5 A
1.6 A

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

9
10

References:
page 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/41

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)

100

2
1

3
4
5
6

10

8
1

5
6

0,1

10

7
8
9

0,01
0,1

10

15

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1 32 A (GV2 LE32)
2 25 A and 32 A (GV2 L32)
3 18 A
4 14 A
5 10 A
6 6.3 A
7 4 A
8 2.5 A
9 1.6 A
10 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).

10
References:
pages 3/52 and 3/53

3/42

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/80

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Curves

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3L and GK3EF80

Tripping curves for GV3L and GK3EF80 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow

Time (s)

10 000

1000

100

A
1
2
3
10

4
1

5
0,1

0,01

0,001

10

100
x the setting current (Ir)

1 3 poles from cold state

2 2 poles from cold state
3 3 poles from hot state
A Thermal overload relay protection zone
B GK3EF80 and GV3L protection zone

9
10
References:
page 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/81 and 3/82

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/43

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3L and GK3EF80

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80 (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress

I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)

50

2
1
3
4
5

3
4

6
7

10

5
6
7

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Maximum peak current

GK3EF80
GV3L65
GV3L50
GV3L40
GV3L32
GV3L25

9
10
References:
page 3/53

3/44

Dimensions:
pages 3/81 and 3/82

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3L and GK3EF80

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80

Thermal limit in A2s

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Sum of I2dt (A2s)

1000

2
2
3
4
5
6

1
100

4
5
10

7
1

10

100
Prospective Isc (kA)

1
2
3
4
5
6

GK3EF80
GV3L65
GV3L50
GV3L40
GV3L32
GV3L25

9
10
References:
page 3/53

Dimensions:
pages 3/81 and 3/82

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/45

TeSys protection components

References

526134

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with screw clamp terminals

GV2 ME with pushbutton control

1
2

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2 ME

GV2 ME10

3
4
5
6
7

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
500 V
690 V
P
Icu Ics
P
Icu Ics (1) P
Icu
(1)
kW kA
%
kW kA
%
kW kA

Setting
range
of thermal
trips
Ics (1)
(2)

Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %

Reference

Weight

A
0.10.16

A
1.5

GV2ME01

kg
0.260

0.06




0.160.25

2.4

GV2ME02

0.260

0.09




0.250.40

GV2ME03

0.260

0.12
0.18

g
g

g
g

 0.37 g

0.400.63

GV2ME04

0.260

0.25

 0.55 g


0.631

13

GV2ME05

0.260

0.37
0.55

0.75

g
g

g
g

0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1

g
g
g
g

g
g
g
g


0.75
1.1
 1.5



g
g
3


g
g
75

116

22.5

GV2ME06

0.260

1.62.5

33.5

GV2ME07

0.260

1.1
1.5

g
g

g
g

1.5
2.2

g
g

g
g

 2.2
 3

3
3

75
75

2.54

51

GV2ME08

0.260

2.2

50

100

 4


75

46.3

78

GV2ME10

0.260

3
4

g
g

g
g

4
5.5

10
10

100
100

 5.5
 7.5

3
3

75
75

610

138

GV2ME14

0.260

5.5

15

50

7.5

6

75

 9
 11

3
3

75
75

914

170

GV2ME16

0.260

7.5

15

50

75

 15


75

1318

223

GV2ME20

0.260

15

40

11

75

 18.5 3


75

1723

327

GV2ME21

0.260

11

15

40

15

75




2025

327

GV2ME22 (3)

0.260

15

10

50

18.5 4

75

 22

75

2432

416

GV2ME32

0.260

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with lugs

To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected
above.
Example: GV2ME08 becomes GV2ME086.
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME with built-in auxiliary contact block
With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/55):

b GV AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. 
Example: GV2 ME01AE1TQ.
b GV AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. 
Example: GV2 ME01AE11TQ.
b GV AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. 
Example: GV2 ME01AN11TQ.

These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack.
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
(3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
g > 100 kA.

10
Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/11

3/46

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

TeSys protection components

References (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2 ME

526135

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 11 kW, with spring terminal connections

GV2 ME (1) with pushbutton control

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

GV2 MEpp3

500 V

Setting
range
of thermal
trips
(3)

Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %

Reference

Weight

Icu

Ics (2)

Icu

Ics (2)

kW

kA

kW

kA

A
 0.10.16

A
1.5

GV2 ME013

kg
0.280

0.06

 0.160.25

2.4

GV2 ME023

0.280

0.09

 0.250.40

GV2 ME033

0.280

0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.37
0.55

g
g
g
g
g
g

g
g
g
g
g
g

0.400.63

GV2 ME043

0.280

0.37

0.631

13

GV2 ME053

0.280

GV2 ME063

0.280

g
g
g
g

22.5

g
g
g
g

11.6

0.75

0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1

 1.62.5

33.5

GV2 ME073

0.280

1.1
1.5
2.2

g
g
g

g
g
g

1.5
2.2
3

g
g

g
g

2.54

51

GV2 ME083

0.280

50

100

 46.3

78

GV2 ME103

0.280

3
4
5.5

g
g

g
g

100
100
75

138

GV2 ME143

0.280

50

10
10
6

610

15

4
5.5
7.5

 914

170

GV2 ME163

0.280

7.5

15

50

75

 1318

223

GV2 ME203

0.280

9
11
11

15
15
15

40
40
40

11

75

1723

327

GV2 ME213

0.260

15

75

2025

327

GV2 ME223

0.260

Front

Maximum
number
1

LH side

Type of
contacts
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O

1
2
3
4
5

Contact blocks
Description
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Mounting

Sold in
lots of
10
10
1
1

Unit
reference
GV AE113
GV AE203
GV AN113
GV AN203

Weight
kg
0.030
0.030
0.060
0.060

Sold in
lots of
20

Unit
reference

Weight
kg

Accessory
Description
Cable end reducer

Application
For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2

LA9 D99

6
7

LA9 D99
(1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
(2) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office
(3) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
g > 100 kA.

8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/11

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/69

Schemes:
page 3/76

3/47

TeSys protection components

References

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 30 kW / 400V

526137

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2 P, GV3 P and GV3ME80

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
500 V
690 V
P
Icu Ics
P
Icu Ics
P
Icu
(1)
(1)
kW kA %
kW kA %
kW kA

Ics
(1)
%

Setting
range
of thermal
trips
(2)

Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %

Reference

Weight

0.10.16
0.160.25
0.250.40
0.400.63

1.5
2.4
5
8

GV2 P01
GV2 P02
GV2 P03
GV2 P04

0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350

0.631
11.6

13
22.5

GV2 P05
GV2 P06

0.350
0.350

1.62.5
2.54
46.3
610
914

33.5
51
78
138
170

GV2 P07
GV2 P08
GV2 P10
GV2 P14
GV2 P16

0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350

1318
1723
2025
2432

223
327
327
416

GV2 P20
GV2 P21
GV2 P22
GV2 P32

0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350

913
1218
1725
2332
3040
3750
4865

182
252
350
448
560
700
910

GV3P13
GV3P18
GV3P25
GV3P32
GV3P40
GV3P50
GV3P65

0.960
0.960
0.960
0.960
0.960
0.960
0.960

kg

GV2P: control by rotary knob

GV2P10

526139

Screw clamp terminals

g
0.06 g

g
0.09 g

g
0.12 g

g
0.18 g

g
0.25 g

g
0.37 g
0.37
g
0.55 g
0.55
g
0.75 g
1.1
g
1.1 g
1.5
g
2.2 g
3
g
g
3
5
g
5.5 g
7.5

7.5 50 50
9
9
50 50
11
11
50 50
15
15
35 50
18.5

g
g
g
g
g

g
g
g
g
g

50
42

10
10
10
10

100
75

75
75
75
75

0.37

0.55

0.75
1.5
2.2
4
5.5
9
11
15
18.5

22


g
8
8
6
6
6
6
4
4


g
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

100

GV3P: control by rotary knob

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3)
5.5 100 100
7.5 12 50
11
6
50
7.5 100 100
9
12 50
15
6
50
11
100 100
15
12 50
18.5 6
50
15
100 100
18.5 12 50
22
6
50
18.5 50 100
22
12 50
37
6
50
22
50 100
30
12 50
45
6
50
30
50 100
45
12 50
55
6
50

5
6

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor

GV3 P65

To assemble a GV3 P13 to P65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the
circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the
digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 P65 becomes GV3 P651.
Connection by lugs

526140

To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected
above. Example: GV3P18 becomes GV3P186.
GV3ME80: pushbutton control, screw clamp terminals
37

15

50

45

100

55

100

5680

GV3 ME80 (4)

Motor circuit-breakers up to 50 hp / 600 V, UL 508 type E

8
GV3 P651

GV2 (5)
To obtain a GV2P motor circuit-breaker, UL 508 type E, combine:
b a circuit-breaker GV2PppH7 (except 32 A),
b and a Large Spacing adapter GV2GH7.
GV3 (6)
To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, use the following with the circuit-breaker:
b a Large Spacing cover GV3G66,
b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11.
GV3 with connection by lugs (6)
To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of
reference selected above and use the following with the circuit-breaker:
b two IP20 covers LAD96570,
b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11.
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
(3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local wiring regulations.
(4) Recommended for use in association with a contactor.
(5) Accessory: see page 3/63.
(6) Accessories: see page 3/57.
g > 100 kA.

10
Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/13

3/48

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/72

0.700

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV7 R

526138

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals

Control by rocker lever

526141

GV7 RE40

GV7 RS220

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
500 V
P
Icu
Ics (1) P
Icu
Ics (1)
kW
kA
%
kW
kA
%
7.5
36
100
9
18
100
9
36
100
11
18
100

660/690 V
P
Icu
kW
kA
11
8
15
8

Ics (1)
%
100
100

7.5
9

70
70

100
100

9
11

50
50

100
100

11
15

10
10

9
11

36
36

100
100

11
15

18
18

100
100

15
18.5

9
11

70
70

100
100

11
15

50
50

100
100

18.5

36

100

18.5
22

18
18

18.5

70

100

18.5

22

36

100

22

70

37

Setting
range
of thermal
trips

Reference

Weight

A
1220

GV7 RE20

kg
2.010

100
100

1220

GV7 RS20

2.010

8
8

100
100

1525

GV7 RE25

2.010

15
18.5

10
10

100
100

1525

GV7 RS25

2.010

100
100

22

100

2540

GV7 RE40

2.010

50

100

22

10

100

2540

GV7 RS40

2.010

30

18

100

30

100

3050

GV7 RE50

2.015

100

30

50

100

30

10

100

3050

GV7 RS50

2.015

36

100

45
55

18
18

100
100

55

100

4880

GV7 RE80

2.040

37

70

100

45
55

50
50

100
100

55

10

100

4880

GV7 RS80

2.040

45

36

100

18

100

75

100

60100

GV7 RE100

2.040

45

70

100

50

100

75

10

100

60100

GV7 RS100

2.040

55
75

35
35

100
100

75
90

30
30

100
100

90
110

8
8

100
100

90150

GV7 RE150

2.020

55
75

70
70

100
100

75
90

50
50

100
100

90
110

10
10

100
100

90150

GV7 RS150

2.020

90
110

35
35

100
100

100
100

132220

GV7 RE220

2.350

100
100

100
100
100
100
100
100

8
8

70
70

30
30
30
50
50
50

160
200

90
110

110
132
160
110
132
160

10
10

100
100

132220

GV7 RS220

2.350

(1) As % of lcu

 160
 200


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
10
Characteristics:
page 3/13

Dimensions:
page 3/73

Schemes:
page 3/77

3/49

TeSys protection components

References

For motors with high current peak on starting

526142

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers 
GV2 RT

Control by rocker lever

GV2 RT

3
4
5
6

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
220/
400/
440 V
500 V
690 V
230 V
415 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
0.06
0.09
0.09

0.12

Setting
range
of thermal trips
(1)

Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %

A
0.250.40

A
8

GV2 RT03

kg
0.350

0.12
0.18

0.18

0.37

0.400.63

13

GV2 RT04

0.350

0.09
0.12

0.25
0.37

0.25
0.37

0.37

0.55

0.631

22

GV2 RT05

0.350

0.18
0.25

0.37
0.55

0.37
0.55

0.75
1.1

11.6

33

GV2 RT06

0.350

0.37

0.75

0.75
1.1

0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1

1.5

1.62.5

51

GV2 RT07

0.350

0.55
0.75

1.1
1.5

1.5

1.5
2.2

2.2
3

2.54

78

GV2 RT08

0.350

1.1

2.2

2.2
3

46.3

138

GV2 RT10

0.350

1.5
2.2

3
4

4
5.5

5.5
7.5

610

200

GV2 RT14

0.350

2.2
3

5.5

5.5
7.5

7.5

9
11

914

280

GV2 RT16

0.350

7.5

7.5
9

15

1318

400

GV2 RT20

0.350

5.5

9
11

11

11

18.5

1723

400

GV2 RT21

0.350

(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/23

3/50

Dimensions:
page 3/70

Schemes:
page 3/76

Reference

Weight

TeSys protection components

References (continued)

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers 
GV2 RT

526142

For primaries of 3-phase transformers

Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings

GV2 RT

Setting
range of
thermal trips (1)

Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %

Reference

Weight

A
0.250.40

A
8

GV2 RT03

kg
0.350

230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V

kW
kW
kW

500 V
kW

690 V
kW

0.400.63

13

GV2 RT04

0.350

0.63

0.63

0.631

22

GV2 RT05

0.350

0.4

0.63

11.6

33

GV2 RT06

0.350

0.63

1.6

1.6
2

1.62.5

51

GV2 RT07

0.350

1.6
2

1.6
2

2
2.5

2.5

2.54

78

GV2 RT08

0.350

1.6
2

2.5

2.5
4

46.3

138

GV2 RT10

0.350

2.5

4
5

5
6.3

4
5
6.3

610

200

GV2 RT14

0.350

6.3

6.3

10
12.5

914

280

GV2 RT16

0.350

5
6.3

10

10

10
12.5

10

1318

400

GV2 RT20

0.350

Reference

Weight
kg
0.280

1
2
3
4
5

Accessory (2)
Description
Padlockable external operator (IP 54)
black handle, blue legend plate




GV2 AP03

(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
(2) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor
circuitbreakers, see page 3/57.

6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 3/8 to 3/23

Dimensions:
page 3/70

Schemes:
page 3/76

3/51

TeSys protection components

References

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW

526144

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2 LE

GV2L: control by rocker lever, connection by screw clamp terminals

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
P

2
GV2 LE10

3
4
5
6
7
8

Icu

500 V
Ics (1) P

690 V
Icu

Ics (1) P

Use in
Reference
association
with
thermal
overload
relay

Weight

kW

kA

kW

kA

A
0.4

A
5

LR2 K0302 GV2 LE03

kg
0.330

0.09 g

0.4

LR2 K0304 GV2 LE03

0.330

0.12 g

0.37 g

0.63

LR2 K0304 GV2 LE04

0.330

0.18 g

0.63

LR2 K0305 GV2 LE04

0.330

0.55 g

13

LR2 K0305 GV2 LE05

0.330

0.25 g

13

LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05

0.330

0.75 g

13

 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05

0.330

0.37 g

0.37 g

13

LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05

0.330

0.55 g

0.55 g

1.1

1.6

22.5

LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06

0.330

0.75 g

1.6

22.5

LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06

0.330

0.75 g

1.1

1.5

75

2.5

33.5

LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07

0.330

1.1

2.5

33.5

LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07

0.330

1.5

1.5

75

51

LR2 K0310 GV2 LE08

0.330

2.2

51

LR2 K0312 GV2 LE08

0.330

2.2

50

100

75

6.3

78

LR2 K0312 GV2 LE10

0.330

10

100

5.5

75

10

138

LR2 K0314 GV2 LE14

0.330

5.5

10

100

10

138

LR2 K0316 GV2 LE14

0.330

7.5

75

10

138

LRD 14

GV2 LE14

0.330

75

14

170

LRD 16

GV2 LE16

0.330

5.5

15

50

7.5

75

11

75

14

170

LR2 K0321 GV2 LE16

0.330

7.5

15

50

75

15

75

18

223

LRD 21

GV2 LE20

0.330

15

40

11

75

18.5 3

75

25

327

LRD 22

GV2 LE22

0.330

11

15

40

15

75

25

327

LRD 22

GV2 LE22

0.330

15

10

50

18.5 4

75

22

75

32

416

LRD 32

GV2 LE32

0.330

9
10

3/52

Ics (1)

Tripping
current
Id 20 %

kW kA
0.06 g

(1) As % of Icu.
g > 100 kA.

Characteristics:
pages 3/14 and 3/17

Icu

Magnetic
protection
rating

Dimensions:
page 3/78

Schemes:
page 3/83

TeSys protection components

References

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV2 L, GV3 L and GK3EF80

Motor circuit-breakers from 0.09 to 30 kW

GV2L: Control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals

526145

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

526146

GV2 L10

GV3 L65

500 V

Icu

Ics (1) P

kW
0.09
0.12
0.18

0.25

0.37
0.55

0.75
1.1
1.5

2.2
3
4

5.5
7.5
9
11
15

kA
g
g
g

g
g
g

g
g

g
g

g
g

g
g

50
50
50
50
35

50
50
50
50
50

kW

0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1

1.5

3
4

7.5
9
11
15
18.5

690 V
Icu

Ics (1) P

kA

g
g
g
g

g
g
g
g

10

10
10
10
10
10

100

75
75
75
75
75

kW

0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

4
5.5

7.5
9
11
15
18.5

22

Icu

Ics (1)

kA

4
4

4
4
4
4
4

100

100

100
100

100
100
100
100
100

100

Tripping
current
Id 20 %

A
0.4
0.63
0.63
1
1
1
1
1.6
1.6
2.5

A
5
8
8
13
13
13
13
22.5
22.5
33.5

51

6.3
10

78
138

10
14
14
18
25
25
32

138
170
170
223
327
327
416

Use in
Reference
association
with
thermal
overload
relay
(class 10 A)
LRD 03
LRD 04
LRD 04
LRD 05
LRD 05
LRD 06
LRD 05
LRD 06
LRD 06
LRD 07
LRD 08
LRD 08
LRD 08
LRD 10
LRD 12
LRD 14
LRD 14
LRD 16
LRD 16
LRD 21
LRD 22
LRD 22
LRD 32

Weight

kg
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330
0.330

GV2 L03
GV2 L04
GV2 L04
GV2 L05
GV2 L05
GV2 L05
GV2 L05
GV2 L06
GV2 L06
GV2 L07
GV2 L08
GV2 L08
GV2 L08
GV2 L10
GV2 L14
GV2 L14
GV2 L14
GV2 L16
GV2 L16
GV2 L20
GV2 L22
GV2 L22
GV2 L32

1
2
3
4
5

GV3L: control by rotary knob, connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
P

526147

Magnetic
protection
rating

Icu

500 V
Ics (1) P

690 V
Icu

Ics (1) P

Icu

Magnetic
protection
rating

Tripping
current
Id 20 %

Ics (1)

Use in
Reference
association
with thermal
overload
relay
(class 10 A)

Weight

kW kA
11
100

100

kW
15

kA
12

50

kW kA
18.5 6

50

A
25

A
350

LRD325

GV3L25

kg
0.960

15

100

18.5 12

50

22

50

32

448

LRD332

GV3 L32

0.960

18.5 50

100

22

12

50

37

50

40

560

LRD340

GV3 L40

0.960

22

50

100

30

12

50

45

50

50

700

LRD350

GV3 L50

0.960

30

50

100

37

12

50

55

50

65

910

LRD365

GV3 L65

0.960

100

7
8

Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor

To assemble a GV3 L25 to L65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the
circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the
digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 L65 becomes GV3 L651.
Connection by lugs

To order these circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above.
Example: GV3L32 becomes GV3L326.

GK3EF80

GK3: control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals

37

35

25

55

15

30

80

1040

LRD 3363

GK3 EF80

0.795

10

(1) As % of Icu. Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/17.
g > 100 kA.

Characteristics:
pages 3/14 to 3/17

Dimensions:
pages 3/78 to 3/83

Schemes:
page 3/83

3/53

Pg 2

1
GV2 AK00

GV1 L3

GV AX

GV2 ME

GV AD
GV AM11

GV AU

GV2 P

6
GV AM11

GV AS

GV2 L

GV AE11, GV AE20

GV AN
GV AN
GV AE1
GV2 LE

10

3/54

GV AE1

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Add-on blocks and accessories

Contact blocks
Description
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Mounting
Front (1)

Maximum
number
1

Side
(LH)

Fault signalling contact +

instantaneous
auxiliary contact

Side (3)
(LH)

Short-circuit
signalling contact

Side
(LH)

Type of
contacts
N/O or N/C (2)
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O
N/O (fault)
+ N/O
+ N/C
N/C (fault)
+ N/O
+ N/C
C/O common point

Sold in
lots of
10
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Unit
reference
GV AE1
GV AE11
GV AE20
GV AN11
GV AN20
GV AD1010
GV AD1001
GV AD0110
GV AD0101
GV AM11

Weight
kg
0.015
0.020
0.020
0.050
0.050
0.055
0.055
0.055
0.055
0.045

Reference

Weight
kg

Electric trips
Mounting

Voltage

1
2
3

Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)

Side
(1 block on RH side 
of circuit-breaker)

24 V
48 V
100 V
100110 V
110115 V
120127 V
127 V
200 V
200220 V
220240 V
380400 V
415440 V
415 V
440 V
480 V
500 V
600 V

GV Ap025
GV Ap026
GV Ap055
GV Ap056
GV Ap107
GV Ap107
GV Ap115
GV Ap116
GV Ap125
GV Ap115
GV Ap207
GV Ap207
GV Ap225
GV Ap226
GV Ap385
GV Ap386
GV Ap415
GV Ap416
GV Ap385
GV Ap415
GV Ap505
GV Ap505

0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105

50 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz

GV AX115
GV AX116
GV AX115
GV AX225
GV AX226
GV AX385
GV AX386
GV AX415
GV AX385

0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110
0.110

Maximum
number
1
1

Reference

Weight
kg
0.150
0.130

LA9 LB920

50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz

Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME)

Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side
(1 block on RH side 
of circuit-breaker GV2 ME)

110115 V
127 V
220240 V
380400 V
415440 V
440 V

Add-on contact blocks

Description
Visible isolation block (5)
Limiters

LA9 LB920

Mounting
Front (1)
At top
(GV2 ME and GV2 P)
Independent

GV2 AK00
GV1 L3

5
6
7
8
9

0.320

(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L.
(2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted.
(3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker.
(4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025.
To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025.
(5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L.
Visible isolation block GV2 AK00 cannot be used with motor circuit-breakers GV2P32 and GV2L32 (Ith max = 25 A).

10

Characteristics:
pages 3/18 to 3/23

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 3/66 to 3/83

3/55

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
TRIP
T

RESE

10

3/56

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Accessories

Accessories
Description

Application

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

For mounting a GV2 ME 

or GV2 LE by screw fixing

10

GV2 AF02

0.021

For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 P 

and contactor LC1D09D38 
with front faces aligned

LAD 311

0.040

Height compensation plate

7,5 mm

10

GV1 F03

0.003

Combination blocks

Between GV2 and contactor LC1 K or LP1 K

10

GV2 AF01

0.020

Between GV2 and contactor LC1 D09D38

10

GV2 AF3

0.016

Between GV2 mounted on LAD 311 

and contactor LC1 D09D38

10

GV2 AF4

0.016

With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 

and a contactor LC1 D09D25

GK2 AF01

0.120

Application

Pitch

Reference

Adapter plates

Motor starter adapter plate

Description

mm
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars

2 tap-offs

3 tap-offs
4 tap-offs

Weight
kg

Weight
kg

45

GV2 G245

0.036

54

GV2 G254

0.038

72

GV2 G272

0.042

45

GV2 G345

0.058

54

GV2 G354

0.060

45

GV2 G445

0.077

54

GV2 G454

0.085

72

GV2 G472

0.094

5 tap-offs

54

GV2 G554

0.100

Application

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Protective end cover

For unused busbar outlets

GV1 G10

0.005

Terminal block
for supply to one or more 
GV2 G busbar sets

Connection from the top

GV1 G09

0.040

Can be fitted with current limiter GV1 L3

(GV2 ME and GV2 P)

GV2 G05

0.115

Cover for terminal block

For mounting in modular panels

10

LA9 E07

0.005

Flexible 3-pole connection

for connecting a GV2 to a
contactor LC1-D09D25

Centre distance between mounting rails: 

100120 mm

10

GV1 G02

0.013

Set of connections
upstream/downstream

For connecting GV2 ME to a printed circuit board

10

GV2 GA01

0.045

Large Spacing adapter

UL 508 type E

For GV2PppH7 (except 32 A)

GV2GH7

0.040

Clip-in marker holders

(supplied with each 
circuit-breaker)

For GV2 P, GV2 L, GV2 LE and GV2 RT 

(8 x 22 mm)

100

LA9 D92

0.001

Description

Weight
kg

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

External operators
Description
For GV2 P and GV2 L
(150 to 290 mm)

For GV2 LE

Reference

Weight
kg

Padlocking in On and Off position

Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54

GV2 AP01

0.200

Padlocking in Off position

Red handle, yellow front plate, IP 54

GV2 AP02

0.200

Cannot be padlocked in On and Off positions

Does not lock the door or drawer operator in
the On positon. Colour: RAL 7016, IP 42

GV2 AP04

0.104

Padlocking in On and Off position

Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54

GV2 AP03

0.280

8
9

Padlocking device
Description
For all GV2 device

Reference
For use with up to 4 padlocks, 6 mm shank max.
(padlocks not included)

GV2 V03

Weight
kg
0.092

Dimensions:
pages 3/66 to 3/83

3/57

10

1
GV3 G264
GV3 G364

2
3
GV AM11

GV3 P

GV AM11

GV AE113, GV AE203, GV AED 1013,

GV AED 0113

GV3 L
GV AE11, GV AE20,

GV AED 101, GV AED 011

GV AE1

GV AE1

9
GV3 AP02

10

GV2 V03

3/58

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3P and GV3L
Add-on blocks and accessories

Contact blocks
Description
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Mounting
Front

Side
(LH)
Fault signalling contact +
instantaneous
auxiliary contact

Front

Short-circuit signalling contact

Side (LH)

Side (3)
(LH)

Maximum Type of
number contacts
1
N/O or N/C (1)
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O
2
N/O + N/C
N/O + N/O
1
N/O (fault)
+ N/O
N/O (fault)
+ N/C
1
N/O (fault)
+ N/O
+ N/C
N/C (fault)
+ N/O
+ N/C
1
C/O common point

Sold in
lots of
10
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Unit
reference
GV AE1
GV AE11 (2)
GV AE20 (2)
GV AN11 (2)
GV AN20 (2)
GVAED101 (2)
GVAED011 (2)
GV AD1010
GV AD1001
GV AD0110
GV AD0101
GV AM11

Weight
kg
0.015
0.020
0.020
0.050
0.050
0.020
0.020
0.055
0.055
0.055
0.055
0.045

Reference

Weight
kg
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105
0.105

Electric trips - undervotlage or shunt (4)

Mounting
Side
(1 block on RH side 
of circuit-breaker)

Voltage
24 V
48 V
100
100110 V
110115 V
120127 V
127 V
200 V
200220 V
220240 V
380400 V
415440 V
415 V
440 V
480 V
500 V
600 V

GV3G66

50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz

Padlockable external operators for GV3 P and GV3 L

Description

LAD96570

External operators
comprising: an LU9AP1p handle,
a shaft (max. length: 260 mm), 
a bracket and an adaptor.

Padlocking in On and Off position

Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54
Padlocking in Off position
Red handle, yellow front plate, IP 54

GV3 AP01

Weight
kg
0.294

GV3 AP02

0.294

Handles only

Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54

Red handle, yellow front plate, IP 54

LU9AP11
LU9AP12

0.105
0.105

For circuit-breakers

Reference

Weight
kg
0.150
0.250
0.020

Accessories
Description

Sets of 3-pole 115 A busbars

Pitch: 64 mm
LAD96575

LAD7X3

GV Ap025
GV Ap026
GV Ap055
GV Ap056
GV Ap107
GV Ap107
GV Ap115
GV Ap116
GV Ap125
GV Ap115
GV Ap207
GV Ap207
GV Ap225
GV Ap226
GV Ap385
GV Ap386
GV Ap415
GV Ap416
GV Ap385
GV Ap415
GV Ap505
GV Ap505
Reference

2 tap-off
3 tap-off

GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp

GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp
GV3Ppp

GV3G264
GV3G364
GV3G66

Cover Large Spacing UL 508 type E

(Only one cover required on supply side)
IP20 cover (Two covers required per breaker)
GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6
LAD96570
0.021
IP 20 cover for use when mounted with circuit-breakers
GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6
LAD 96575
0.010
Size 4 Allen key, insulated, 1000 V
GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp
LAD ALLEN4 (5)
0.026
GV2V03
Padlocking device
GV3 Ppp and GV3Lpp
0.092
for use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied) 6 mm shank max. GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6
Replacement of GV3 ME 
Retrofit plate
LAD 7X3
0.150
for screw fixing
with GV3 Ppp or GV2 Ppp
(1) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted.
(2) Contact blocks available in version with spring terminal connections. Add a figure 3 at the end of the references selected above.
Example: GVAED101 becomes GVAED1013.
(3) The GV ADpp is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker.
(4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025.
To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025.
(5) Sold in lots of 5.

3/59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
GV3 A01...A07

4
5

GV3 A08
GV3 A09

6
7
8
9
10

3/60

TeSys protection components

References

Motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME80 and

GK3EF80
Add-on blocks and accessories

For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80

Contact blocks
Description
Instantaneous auxiliary
contact blocks
(1 per circuit-breaker)

Fault signalling contacts (1)

Type of standard
early break contacts
N/C + N/O
N/O + N/O
N/C + N/O + N/O
N/O + N/O + N/O
N/O + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals
N/C + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals

Reference
GV3 A01
GV3 A02
GV3 A03
GV3 A05
GV3 A06
GV3 A07

Weight
kg
0,060
0.060
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070

N/C
N/O

GV3 A08
GV3 A09

0.030
0.030

1
2

Electric trips
Description
Udervoltage trips (1)

Shunt trips (1)

Voltages
50 Hz
110, 120, 127 V
220, 240 V
380, 415 V

60 Hz
120, 127 V
277 V
440 V, 480 V

Reference
GV3 B11
GV3 B22
GV3 B38

Weight
kg
0.070
0.070
0.070

110, 120, 127 V

220, 240 V
380, 415 V

120, 127 V
277 V
440 V, 480 V

GV3 D11
GV3 D22
GV3 D38

0.070
0.070
0.070

Sold in
lots of
5

Unit
reference
GV1 V02

3
4

Accessory
Description
Padlocking device,
for locking the Start button (on open-mounted product)

Weight
kg
0.010

For magnetic circuit-breaker GK3 EF80

Contact blocks
Description

Number of poles

Reference

Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling

and control circuit test function
(1 or 2 blocks per device)
mounted on RH side of GK3 EF80

N/O
N/O + N/O
N/C + N/O

GK2 AX10
GK2 AX20
GK2 AX50

Weight
kg
0.025
0.031
0.031

Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks

(1 or 2 blocks per device)
mounted on LH side of GK3 EF80

N/O
N/O + N/O
N/C + N/O

GK2 AX12
GK2 AX22
GK2 AX52

0.025
0.031
0.031

Reference

Accessories
Description
Padlocking device for padlocking the operator,
using up to 3 padlocks
(padlocks to be ordered separately)

GK3 AV01

Weight
kg
0.020

External operator for mounting on enclosure door.

Red 40 knob on yellow plate, padlockable in position O
(with up to 3 padlocks). Door locked when knob in position I,
and when knob padlocked in position O.

GK3 AP03

0.300

6
7
8

(1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit-breaker.

Other versions


24 to 690 V, 50 or 60 Hz voltage trips for circuit-breakers GV3 ME80.
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9
10

Characteristics:
pages 3/18 and 3/22

Dimensions:
page 3/82

3/61

1
2
3

GV7 AE11, AB11

4
GV7 RE, RS

5
GV7 AU, AS

6
7
8
9
10

3/62

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Add-on blocks and accessories

Add-on auxiliary contacts

These allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical
locking, relaying, etc. They are available in two versions: standard and low level. They include a terminal block
and the auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose.
They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker:
Location
1 and/or 4
2

Function
C/O contact
Trip indication

Electrical fault indication

Application
Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles
Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an
overload, a short-circuit, a differential fault or the operation of a
voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip), or of the push to trip
test button. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset.
Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an
overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the
circuit-breaker is reset.

Type

Reference

Standard

GV7 AE11

Weight
kg
0.015

Low level

GV7 AB11

0.015

1
2
3

Fault discrimination devices

These make it possible to:

b either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault,
b or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault.
Voltage

4
Reference

a 24...48 and c 2472 V

GV7 AD111 (1)

Weight
kg
0.100

z 110240 V

GV7 AD112 (1)

0.100

b Undervoltage trip GV7 AU

v Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and
0.7 times the rated voltage.
v Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage.
Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7 AU trip meets the requirements of IEC 60947-2.

Electric trips

These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal.

b Shunt trip GV7 AS

Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage.
b Operation (GV7 AU or GV7 AS)
v When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7 AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote control.
(For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
v Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in
closing, even temporarily, of the contacts.
v Durability: 50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker.
Type

Voltage

Reference

Undervoltage trip

48 V, 50/60 Hz
110130 V, 50/60 Hz
200240 V, 50/60 Hz
380440 V, 50/60 Hz
525 V, 50 Hz

GV7 AU055 (1)

GV7 AU107 (1)
GV7 AU207 (1)
GV7 AU387 (1)
GV7 AU525 (1)

Weight
kg
0.105
0.110
0.110
0.105
0.100

Shunt trip

48 V, 50/60 Hz
110130 V, 50/60 Hz
200240 V, 50/60 Hz
380440 V, 50/60 Hz
525 V, 50 Hz

GV7 AS055 (1)

GV7 AS107 (1)
GV7 AS207 (1)
GV7 AS387 (1)
GV7 AS525 (1)

0.105
0.110
0.110
0.105
0.100

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

8
9
10

(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.

Characteristics:
pages 3/20 and 3/22

Schemes:
page 3/75

3/63

1
ON

OFF

ON

GV7 AP04
O

OFF
ON

GV7 AP01, AP02

ON

GV7 RE, RS

OFF

GV7 AP03
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

GV7 AP05

GV7 AC04
GV7 AC01

6
GV7 V01

7
8
9

GV7 RE, RS

GV7 AC03

10

3/64

GV7 AC04

GV7 AC01

TeSys protection components

References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories

Cabling accessories
Description

Application

For use on
contactors

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Up to 150 A, 1.595 mm2

GV7 AC021

kg
0.300

Up to 220 A, 1.5185 mm2

GV7 AC022

0.350

Spreader
3-pole (1)

To increase the pitch to 45 mm

GV7 AC03

0.180

Terminal shields
IP 405 (1)

Supplied with 
sealing accessory

GV7 AC01

0.125

Phase barriers

Safety accessories used when

fitting of shields is impossible
Ensure insulation between the
connections and the backplate
Allowing link between the 
circuit-breaker and the contactor.
The cover provides protection
against direct finger contact

GV7 AC04

0.075

GV7 AC05

0.075

LC1 F115F185

GV7 AC06

0.550

LC1 F225 and F265 1

GV7 AC07

0.550

LC1 D115 and D150 1

GV7 AC08

0.550

Clip-on connectors
for GV7 R

+
+

GV7AC07

Insulating screens
Kits for combination
with contactor(2)

Weight

Direct rotary handle

GV7AC08

Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in
the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). A
conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door
cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the ON position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure
door is open.
Description
Direct rotary handle

Adapter plate (3)

Type

Reference

Black handle, black legend plate

Degree of
protection
IP 40

GV7 AP03

Weight
kg
0.205

Red handle, yellow legend plate

IP 40

GV7 AP04

0.205

Four mounting direct rotary 

handle on enclosure door

IP 43

GV7 AP05

0.100

Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. 
It comprises:
b a unit which screws onto the front cover of the circuit-breaker,
b an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door,
b an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm
minimum, 600mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means
of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). This prevents the enclosure door
from being opened.

Extended rotary handle

Type

2
3
4
5
6

Extended rotary handle

Description

Reference

Black handle, black legend plate

Degree of
protection
IP 55

GV7 AP01

Weight
kg
0.775

Red handle, yellow legend plate

IP 55

GV7 AP02

0.775

7
8

Locking device

Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3
padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included).
Description
Locking device

Application

Reference

For circuit-breaker not fitted with a rotary handle

GV7 V01

Weight
kg
0.100

(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders.

(2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker.
(3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being
closed if the door is open.

Dimensions:
pages 3/73 to 3/75

3/65

9
10

TeSys protection components

Dimensions

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and GV2P

Dimensions
GV2 ME

GV AX

67,2

Block GV AD, AM, AN

Block GV AU, AS, AX

GV AE

15

46
15,7

44,5

16

9,3

9,3

18

81(1)

b
GV2 MEpp
89
GV2 MEpp3
101
(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V

GV2 P

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS

Block GV AD, AM, AN
Block GV AU, AS

GV2 AK00

14

98

26
15

50
82

X2

45

89

61

32

X1

X1

45

10

11

GV AD, AM, AN, AU,

AS, AX

X1

44,5

9,3

81(1)

(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V,
or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V
X2 = 40 mm

GV2 GH7
70
15

7
8

44,5

9
10

3/66

9,3

18

44,5

Mounting,
dimensions

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and GV2P

Mounting
GV2 ME

On 35 mm 5 rail

On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02

On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA

AF1 EA4

15

35

60

50

50/60

50/60

4,2

On rails DZ5 MB201

35

80

DZ5 ME8

35
GV2 AF02

DZ5 MB201

c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5)

c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, ED200
(35 x 15)

Panel mounted

On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA

Adapter plate GK2 AF01

45

135

84

106

13,5

Dimensions
GV2 AF01

35

45

44,5

84

105 5

55

44,5

35

AF1EA4

13,5

24

9,5

54

GV2 AF3

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys K contactor

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys D contactor

Combination GV2 P + TeSys D contactor

7
b

152

79

45

c1

c1
c
d1
d

45

GV2 ME +
b
c1
c

LC1 D09
D18
176.4
94.1
99.6

LC1 D25
and D32
186.8
100.4
105.9

GV2 P +
b
c1
c
d1
d

45

LC1 D09
D18
176.4
100.1
105.6
95
100.5

LC1 D25
and D32
186.8
106.4
111.9
95
100.5

10

3/67

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and GV2P

Dimensions (continued)
GV2 AF4 + LAD 311

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys D contactor

Combination GV2 P + TeSys D contactor

234

1253

1253

b
234

3
4

GV2 ME +
b
c1
c
d1
d

c1
c

45

LC1 D09D18
176.4
103.1
135.6
107
112.5

LC1 D25 and D32

186.8
136.4
141.9
107
112.5

GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter)

45

GV2 P +
b
c1
c

LC1 D09D18
176.4
136.5
141.6

39

40
77

44,5

X1

35

129

45

13

89

LC1 D25 and D32

186.8
142.4
147.9

7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

X1

c1
c
d1
d

X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V
or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V

Mounting

Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P

Door cut-out

54

65

8
9

1,5...5
53

=
135284

10

3/68

=
54

5,2
=

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME and GV2P

GV2ME, GV2P

Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05

a
p

63

18

2
45
l
179
206
260

GV2G445 (4 x 45 mm)
GV2G454 (4 x 54 mm)
GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)

p
45
54
72

Number of tap-offs
GV2 G445
GV2 G454
GV2 G472

Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09

a
5
224
260
332

6
269
314
404

7
314
368
476

8
359
422
548

Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272

38

GV1G09

5
GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm)
GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm)
GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)

l
89
98
116

Sets of busbars GV2 G554

Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

260

7
8

GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm)

GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)

l
134
152

9
10

3/69

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2RT

GV2RT

Dimensions

12,5

66

2
16

44

44,5

X1

7,5

45

89

X1

X1: Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V

Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03

65

53

1,5...5

133282

5
On 35 mm 7 rail

On panel with adapter

plate GV2 AF02

4,2

On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA

On rails DZ5 MB

15

AF1EA4

35

50/60

44,5

84,5

35

50
60

44,5

15

50/60

13

12,3

35

DZ5ME8
GV2AF02

DZ5MB201

GV2AF0
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5)
c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)

8
9
10

3/70

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P

GV3P

Dimensions

1
(2)

68

X1

(1)

64

132

2
9

55

X1

136

18

(1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11

(2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max)

40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

Note: Leave a gap of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C

Mounting
Side by side mounting with TeSys contactor LC1 D40AD65A
(S-shape busbar system GV3 S)

138

Mounting with TeSys contactor LC1D40AD65A

231

119

120

136

55

136

Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201

Panel mounting, using M4 screws

64

137,5

68

144

136

37,5

3x4

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA

137,5

136

18,7 18,7

10

AF1 EA4

3/71

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers 

GV3P and GV3ME80

GV3P (continued)
Busbar systems

Set of busbars GV3G264

Set of busbars GV3G364

119

183

16

16

1
2

Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C.

Mounting of external operator GV3AP01 or GV3AP02

Depth 131 mm

Depth 231 to 390 mm

65

1,5...5

1,5...5
131

53

231390

53

Door cut-out

Depth 177 to 230 mm

65

43

1,5...5

177230

53

54

65

Bracket

4x3,5

54

GV3ME80

Dimensions
17,3

20

22

77,5
113

5,5

45

120

70
21,2

Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201

(1) Blocks GV3A01A07.

Panel mounting, using M4 screws

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA

61,2

122,5

113

20 20
21,2

3/72

100110

10

100110

70,4

61,2

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max)

40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

Mounting

(1)

X1

100110

X1

4,5

113

20

AF1 EA4

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7R

GV7R

Dimensions

35

125

81

86

161

= =

=
105

111(1)
(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220.

Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers

GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04

4
5
6

(2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04

(3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01

Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p
a
b
c
GV7 R + LC1 F115 or
119 334 181
F150 + GV7 AC06
GV7 R + LC1 F185 +
119 338 188
GV7 AC06
GV7 R + LC1 F225 +
131 358 188
GV7 AC07
GV7 R + LC1 F265 +
131 364 215
GV7 AC07
Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers
mounted side by side = 0

x2

x1

7
x1

x2

Minimum electrical clearance

Painted or insulated metal plate,

insulation or insulated bar
U y 440 V
Bare
metal
440 V < U < 600 V
plate
U u 600 V

x1
0

x2
30

5
10
20

35
35
35

9
10

3/73

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7R

GV7R

Panel mounting

Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201

DZ5ME5

125

125

135

35

35

35

15

35

Flush-mounting
1 circuit-breaker GV7 R

n circuit-breakers GV7 R
side by side

88

83

==

108
=

29

108

76

47

=
108

29

Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

GV7 R + LC1 F115 + GV7 AC06

GV7 R + LC1 F150 + GV7 AC06
GV7 R + LC1 F185 + GV7 AC06
GV7 R + LC1 F225 + GV7 AC07
GV7 R + LC1 F265 + GV7 AC07

8
9
10

3/74

E
44
46
48
57
60

G
85
85
85
85
85

H
120
120
120
120
120

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV7R

GV7R

Spreaders GV7 AC03

Connection

114
45

Connectors

41

70

70

30

19

10,5

45

Smooth terminals

a
19.5
21.5

GV7 Rp40Rp150
GV7 Rp220

2
3

Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04

Flush-mounting

121

55

155

47

76
29

28

73

45

36

89

91

97

Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Enclosure viewed from top

9,25

Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre

of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point D u 100 + (h x 5)

59

120

69

41

125 2

100

Front face cut-out

51

120

=
100

e = 1 to 3 max

Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02

9,25
60

75

I
0
60
l

10

75
l : 185 min, 600 max
The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP02 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.

3/75

TeSys protection components

Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2ME, GV2P, GV3P and GV2RT

Schemes

3/L2

5/L3

4/T2

6/T3

5/L3
6/T3

1/L1

3/L2
4/T2

2/T1

1/L1

5/L3

2/T1

3/L2

6/T3

GV3 Ppp

4/T2

GV2 Ppp

1/L1

GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT

2/T1

1
2

21
22

97

GV AED011

98

23

23

21
22

24

13
14

13

11
12

14

13

or

GV AE20

24

GV AED101

GV AE11

97

GV AE1

98

Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts

14

Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

4
Side mounting add-on contact blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts

51

08
06

43
(73)
44
(74)

05

(63)
33
(64)
34

D2
E2

GV1 L3

3/L2

D1
E1

D1

GV AXppp

5/L3

Current limiter
GV ASppp

1/L1

43
(73)
44
(74)

Voltage trips
GV AUppp

52

97
98

53
54

97

51
52

98

95

53

96

95
(61)
31

GV AM11

(62)
32

Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AN20

Use of fault signalling contact

and short-circuit signalling contact

Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines

(conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only

D2

D1

10Agl max

5/L3

GV AD10pp

3/L2

GV AM11

1/L1

GV AD1001

GV AN11

D2

GV AD1010

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

D1

GV AD0101

D2

96

54

GV AD0110

Short-circuit
signalling

E2

3/76

6/T3

N/C or N/O
Start-Stop contact

4/T2

10

2/T1

Trip signalling

E1

TeSys protection components

Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3ME80 and GV7R

Schemes

13

23

13

23

31

13

23

33

13

23

33

13

23

31

24

14

24

32

14

24

34

14

24

34

14

24

32

GV3 A07

14

GV3 A06

21

GV3 A05

22

GV3 A03

13

GV3 A02

14

5/L3

GV3 A01

3/L2

Auxiliary contact block modules

GV3 ME80

1/L1

Motor circuit-breakers

6/T3

C1

C2

97
98

Location 4
C/O contact

24

22

21

82

Location 3
Electrical fault
indication

81

91

92

94

12

14

11
6/T3

4/T2

84

GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11

Location 1
Location 2
C/O contact
Trip indication

2/T1

GV3 D

Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)

5/L3

3/L2

GV7 R

1/L1

Motor circuit-breakers

GV3 B

D1

GV3 A09

95

Voltage trips

GV3 A08

96

Fault signalling contacts

D2

4/T2

2/T1

A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the
circuitbreaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts.
(1) See pages 3/20 and 3/61.

Electric trips
GV7 ASppp

GV7 AD111, AD112

50ms

C2

D4

97

C1

D1

GV7 AUppp

98

Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112

97

50ms

Contactor opening on overload

50ms

13

97

Fault indication

Reset

21

98

14

98

KA1

Associated components
KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N

A1 22

B1

A1

KA1

KM1
A2

Overload fault

A2

KA1

KA1

23
24

Reset

10

Associated components
KA1: CAD + LAD 6K10 or RHK
KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F

3/77

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

GV2 L

Dimensions

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS

Block GV AD, AM, AN

Block GV AU, AS

GV2 AK00

14

98

45

89

61

32

X1

50
82

9,3

9,3

18
44,5

81 (1)

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or

80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V.
X2 = 40 mm.

(1) Maximum

Mounting

Adapter plate GK2 AF01

On rail AM1 DE200,

AM1ED200 (35 x 15)

Panel mounted

On pre-slotted mounting
plate AM1 PA

AF1 EA4
5

35

135

35

44,5

45

45

84

84

44,5

55

5,5
1055

44,5

X2

26
15

106

13,5

24

13,5

9,5

54

7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

39

13

35

GV2 LE

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS

GV AE

Block GV AD, AM, AN

Block GV AU, AS

15

7,5

16

12,5

44

X1

66

45

44,5

9,3

18

81 (1)

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.

(1) Maximum

Mounting
On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02

50/60

44,5

10

c
c = 80 on AM1 DP200
(35 x 7.5) and 88 on
AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x15)

3/78

On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA

AF1 EA4

84,5

4,2
35

On rails DZ5 MB201

15
35

50
60

On 35 mm 7 rail

44,5

9,3

50/60

89

10

X1

Dimensions

35

DZ5 ME8
GV2 AF02

DZ5 MB201

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L and GV2 LE

GV2 L and GV2 LE

Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for GV2 L

65

1,5...5
135284

53

5,2
=

Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE

65

13

12,3

4
1,5...5
53

133282

Door cut-out

43

54

4x3,5

=
54

Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05

63

18

45

GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm)

GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm)
GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)

l
179
206
260

p
45
54
72

Number of tap-offs
GV2 G445
GV2 G454
GV2 G472

a
5
224
260
332

6
269
314
404

9
7
314
368
476

8
359
422
548

10

3/79

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L, GV2 LE

Sets of busbars for GV2L and GV2LE

Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with term. block GV1 G09

Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272

GV1G09

38

1
2
3
4

GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm)

GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm)
GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)

I
89
98
116

Set of busbars GV2 G554

Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

260

5
6

GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm)

GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)

7
8
9
10

3/80

I
134
152

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3 L

GV3L

Dimensions

1
(2)

68

X1

(1)

64

132

2
9

55

X1

136

18

(1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11

(2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp

X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max)

40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V

Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.

Mounting
Side by side mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A
(S-shape busbar system GV3 S)

195

Mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A and

relay LR3D313365

185

115

299

136

119

70
136

55

Mounting on rail AM1DE200 or AM1ED201

Panel mounting, using M4 screws

64

137,5

68

144

136

Set of busbars GV3G264

137,5

AF1 EA4

Set of busbars GV3G364

183

16

119

3x4

16

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA

37,5

136

10

18,7 18,7

3/81

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV3 L and GK3 EF80

GV3L (continued)

Mounting of external operator GV3AP01 or GV3AP02

Depth 131 mm

Depth 231 to 390 mm

65

65

Bracket

1,5...5

1,5...5
131

53

Depth 177 to 230 mm

65

1,5...5
177230

53

231390

53

Door cut-out

=
=

4x3,5

54

GK3EF80

GK3EF80 + 4 GK2AX

105

38

28

15

9
10

3/82

70

4,5

X1

45
=

120

80

X1

54

43

Number of GK2AX
0
1
2
66
74.8
83.5

3
92.5

4
101

TeSys protection components

Schemes

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 L, GV2 LE, GV3 L and GK3 EF80

5/L3

1
2

6/T3

3/L2

1/L1
2/T1

6/T3

GK3 EF80

4/T2

5/L3

GV3 Lpp
3/L2

1/L1
2/T1

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

5/L3

3/L2

GV2 LEpp

1/L1

GV2 Lpp

4/T2

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Accessories

Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

21

23
24

22

13
14

97

21
22

98

13
14

23

11
12

GVAED101 and GVAED011

24

13
14

OR

GV AE20

97

GV AE11

98

GV AE1

3
4

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AN11

GV AM11

(61)
31

43
(73)

(63)
33

43
(73)

08
06

(62)
32

44
(74)

(64)
34

44
(74)

05

GV AN20

51

97

52

98

54

53

97
98

52

51

GV AD1001

53

GV AD1010

96

96

GV AD0101

54

95

GV AD0110

95

Side mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts

Voltage trips

D1

C1
C2

GV ASppp

D2

GV AUppp

Start-Stop signalling contact blocks

13

21
22

23

24

GK2 AX50

14

13

14

GK2 AX20

14

13

GK2 AX10

Fault signalling contact blocks

97

05
06

07

08

GK2 AX52

98

97

GK2 AX22

98

98

97

GK2 AX12

9
10

3/83

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 

for the protection of control circuits, 
solenoid valves and transformers
Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads

1
2

Tripping threshold on short-circuit

57 In

1216 In

Operational current

0.5 and 1 A

0.520 A

Maximum operational voltage

415 V

250 V

Number of poles

1 + neutral

Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2

50 kA at 415 V

1.550 kA at 415 V

1.550 kA at 250 V

Device type

GB2 C

GB2 CB

GB2 CD

Pages

3/91

3/90

3/90

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3/84

Protection of transformers

Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V

3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V

Primary

Secondary

3
4
5

About 20 In

0.2523 A

415 V

690 V

1 + neutral

7
1.550 kA at 415 V

1.550 kA at 250 V

15100 kA at 415 V

GB2 DB

GB2 DB

GB2 CD

GV2 RT

3/90

3/90

3/90

3/50

8
9
10

3/85

Presentation, selection

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits
Presentation

GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of

industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers.
They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves,
electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage.

GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB
12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole +
neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions.
They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the
current peaks generated by many industrial components.

GB2 CS
2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version.
The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In.

Functions, installation
Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick
mounting plates.
Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers.
Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator.
Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and
thermal tripping thresholds).

1
2
3
4

Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phase transformers.
Magnetising peak: 20 In.
Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.

5
6
7
8
9

Power
VA
40

Primary (1)
220/240 V 380/415 V
GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05

Secondary
24 V
48 V
GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06

110 V
GB2 CD05

220 V
GB2 CD05

63

GB2 DB05

GB2 DB05

GB2 CD08

GB2 CD07

GB2 CD06

GB2 CD05

100

GB2 DB06

GB2 DB05

GB2 CD10

GB2 CD07

GB2 CD06

GB2 CD05

160

GB2 DB07

GB2 DB06

GB2 CD14

GB2 CD09

GB2 CD07

GB2 CD06

250

GB2 DB07

GB2 DB06

GB2 CD16

GB2 CD12

GB2 CD08

GB2 CD07

400

GB2 DB08

GB2 DB07

GB2 CD22

GB2 CD14

GB2 CD09

GB2 CD07

630

GB2 DB10

GB2 DB08

GB2 CD21

GB2 CD12

GB2 CD08

1000

GB2 DB14

GB2 DB09

GB2 CD16

GB2 CD10

1600

GB2 DB20

GB2 DB14

GB2 CD14

2000

GB2 DB21

GB2 DB14

GB2 CD22

GB2 CD16

2500

GB2 DB22

GB2 DB20

GB2 CD20

3000

GB2 DB22

GB2 DB20

GB2 CD21

4000

GB2 DB21

GB2 CD22

5000

GB2 DB22

(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in
series, see page 3/50.

10
Characteristics :
pages 3/87 to 3/89

3/86

References :
pages 3/90 and 3/91

Dimensions :
page 3/91

Schemes :
page 3/91

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits

Circuit-breaker type

GB2 CB

Environment

Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Protective treatment
Degree of protection
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Flame resistance
Maximum operating altitude
Operating position

Conforming to IEC 60529

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Storage
Operation
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

GB2 CD

GB2 DB

GB2 CS

IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2

CSA, NEMKO, UL
NEMKO, UL

TC
IP 20
22 gn for 20 ms
5 gn (5110 Hz)
- 40+ 80
- 20+ 60
960
3000

C
C
C
m

In relation to normal 
vertical mounting plane

3
GB2 CB,CD, CS
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable with cable end
Tightening torque

GB2 DB

mm2
mm2
N.m

Minimum c.s.a.
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.75
1.2

Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 6 or 2 x 4
1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5

V
V

A
415 (1)
277

A
250

A
415
277

A
415 (1)

Hz
kV

50/60
4

50/60
4

50/60
4

50/60
4

W
C.O.

2
8000

2
8000

2
8000

1.9
8000

- 20

Technical characteristics
Utilisation category
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)

Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Conforming to IEC 60947-2
Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14
and UL 1077
Conforming to IEC 60947-2
Conforming to IEC 60947-2

Rated operational frequency

Rated impulse withstand
voltage (U imp)
Total power dissipated per pole
C.O.: Closing - Opening
Mechanical and
electrical durability
According to the permissible
Operational current
ambient temperature
correction coefficient
(a or c)
Correction coefficient
Tripping threshold
Of the magnetic trips

- 10

1.2
1.15
1216 In

+ 10

1.1
1.05
1216 In

+ 20
1

+ 30

+ 40

+ 50

+ 60

0.95
1216 In

0.90

0.85
57 In

0.80

(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.

6
7

Tripping curves

Minutes
Seconds

120
60
20
10
5
2
1
20
10
5
2
1
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1

Milliseconds

Milliseconds

Seconds

Minutes

Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state)

GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB
GB2 CS

1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8
1,5
10

100 x In

120
60
20
10
5
2
1
20
10
5
2
1
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1

8
9

1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8
1,5
10

10

100 x In

Presentation, selection :
page 3/86

References :
pages 3/90 and 3/91

Dimensions :
page 3/91

Schemes :
page 3/91

3/87

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits

Circuit-breaker type

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2 
a 50/60 Hz

2
Associated fuses, if required
if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2

A
110 V

Icu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
100

50
50

15
50

10
50

6
50

3
75

3
75

3
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

230/240 V

Icu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

15
25

3
50

3
50

2
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

400/415 V

Icu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

15
25

3
50

3
50

2
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

110 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

20
25

25
32

25
32

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

63
80

63
80

63
80

230/240 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

16
25

20
32

20
32

32
40

32
40

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

50
63

400/415 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

16
25

20
32

20
32

32
40

32
40

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

50
63

GB2
CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20

Circuit-breaker type

4
5
6

Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2 
a 50/60 Hz

Associated fuses, if required

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu 
conforming to IEC 60947-2

Icu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
100

50
50

15
50

10
50

6
50

3
75

3
75

3
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

230/ 240 V

Icu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

15
25

3
50

3
50

2
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

110 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

20
25

25
32

25
32

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

63
80

63
80

63
80

230/240 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

16
25

20
32

20
32

32
40

32
40

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

50
63

GB2
DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20

Rating

7
8

110 V

Circuit-breaker type

Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2 
a 50/60 Hz

Associated fuses, if required

if lsc > breaking capacity Icu 
conforming to IEC 60947-2

GB2
CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20

110 V

lcu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
100

50
50

15
50

10
50

6
50

3
75

3
75

3
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

2
75

230/240 V

lcu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

15
25

3
50

3
50

2
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

400/415 V

lcu
Ics % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

15
25

3
50

3
50

2
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
75

1.5
1.5

75
75

110 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

20
25

25
32

25
32

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

63
80

63
80

63
80

230/240 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

16
25

20
32

20
32

32
40

32
40

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

50
63

400/415 V

aM
gG

A
A

g
g

g
g

16
25

20
32

20
32

32
40

32
40

40
50

40
50

50
63

50
63

50
63

(1) As % of Icu.
g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.

10
Presentation, selection :
page 3/86

3/88

References :
page 3/90

Dimensions :
page 3/91

Schemes :
page 3/91

TeSys protection components

Characteristics (continued)

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits

Circuit-breaker type
24 V
48 V

kA
kA

GB2
pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

DC-12

24 V
48 V

A
A

0.5
0.5

1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

8
8

10
10

12
12

16
16

20
20

DC-13

24 V
48 V

A
A

0.5
0.5

1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

5
5

6
6

8
8

10

12

16

20

GB2
CS05
0.5

CS06
1

Breaking capacity (lcu) 

conforming to IEC 60947-2
c
Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 
c

Circuit-breaker type
Rating
Breaking capacity
conforming to IEC 60947-2 
a 50/60 Hz

lcu
lcs % (1)

kA

50
100

50
100

230/240 V lcu
lcs % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

400/415 V lcu
(2)
lcs % (1)

kA

50
25

50
25

24 V
48 V

kA
kA

1.5
1

1.5
1

DC-12

24 V
48 V

A
A

0.5
0.5

1
1

DC-13

24 V
48 V

A
A

0.5
0.5

1
1

Operational voltage

48

110

230

48

110

230

C.s.a.

m
m
m
m
m
m

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

31
39
52
78
130
200

365
460
610
910
1520
2400

6
8
10
15
26
41

85
110
145
220
360
580

230
290
380
570
950
1500

Operational voltage

48

110

230

48

110

230

C.s.a.

m
m
m
m
m
m

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

230
290
390
580
970
1500

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

56
70
95
140
230
375

230
290
380
570
950
1500

Operational voltage

48

110

230

48

110

230

C.s.a.

m
m
m
m
m
m

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

46
60
80
120
190
310

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

13
17
22
34
56
90

100
130
170
250
420
680

110 V

Breaking capacity (lcu)

conforming to IEC 60947-2
c
Operational current
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 
c

Maximum
permissible
line length for
star-delta starting
(length of cable
containing 2 or 
more conductors)

With contactors
LCp D09 D18

With contactors
LCp D25D32

With contactors
LCp D40D80

060 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2

0.60 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2

0.60 mm2
0.75 mm2
1 mm2
1.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
4 mm2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

(1) As % of Icu.
(2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
(3) Use relays.

10
Presentation, selection :
page 3/86

References :
pages 3/90 and 3/91

Dimensions :
page 3/91

Schemes :
page 3/91

3/89

TeSys protection components

References

Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In

534268

Single-pole

2
GB2 CBpp

4
5
GB2 CDpp

7
8

Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
A
6.6
14
26
40
52
66
83
108
138
165
220
270

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

GB2 CB05
GB2 CB06
GB2 CB07
GB2 CB08
GB2 CB09
GB2 CB10
GB2 CB12
GB2 CB14
GB2 CB16
GB2 CB20
GB2 CB21
GB2 CB22

Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
A
6.6
14
26
40
52
66
83
108
138
165
220
270

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

GB2 CD05
GB2 CD06
GB2 CD07
GB2 CD08
GB2 CD09
GB2 CD10
GB2 CD12
GB2 CD14
GB2 CD16
GB2 CD20
GB2 CD21
GB2 CD22

Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
A
6.6
14
26
40
50
66
83
108
138
165
220
270

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

GB2 DB05
GB2 DB06
GB2 DB07
GB2 DB08
GB2 DB09
GB2 DB10
GB2 DB12
GB2 DB14
GB2 DB16
GB2 DB20
GB2 DB21
GB2 DB22

Weight
kg
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060

Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
A
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20

Weight
kg
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070

2-pole

534270

Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
A
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20

Single-pole + neutral

534269

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits

GB2 DBpp

Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
A
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20
(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.

9
10
Presentation, selection :
page 3/86

3/90

Characteristics :
pages 3/87 to 3/89

Dimensions :
page 3/91

Schemes :
page 3/91

Weight
kg
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115
0.115

TeSys protection components

References (continued),
dimensions,
schemes

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2

for the protection of industrial equipment control
circuits

Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In

Single-pole

534271

Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
A
0.5

Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
A
3.3

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

GB2 CS05

Weight

kg
0.055

2
1

GB2 CSpp

GB2 CS06

0.055

(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.

Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2-CB, DB and CS

Description

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Busbar set for supply to 

10 GB2 DB or 
20 GB2 CB or GB2 CS with 2 connectors

GB2 G210

Supply connector

10

GB2 G01

Weight
kg
0.100

5
Dimensions

GB2 DBpp

74

82

74

GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp

85

15

30

85

82

78

75

82

79

70

67

Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.

Schemes

1/L1

2/T1

4/T2

2/T1

2/T1

4/T2 ( 14 )

2/T1

3/L2

1/L1

GB2 CSpp

1/L1

GB2 DBpp

3/L2 ( 13 )

GB2 CDpp

1/L1

GB2 CBpp

10

Presentation, selection :
page 3/86

Characteristics :
pages 3/87 to 3/89

3/91

Contents

4 - TeSys protection components:

fuse protection

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard

applications

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
b Complete units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8

b Switch bodies and add-on modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9

b Operators and accessories  page 4/17
b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22

VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance

applications
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4

b Complete units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12

b Switch bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14
b Operators and accessories  page 4/17
b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24

TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control

circuits or transformers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/26

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/29
b Dimensions, mounting and schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/31
b Fuse carriers for the North American market, conforming .
to UL and CSA standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32

TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/35

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/36

b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/37
b Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/40

9
10

4/0

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses for motor

or variable speed drive protection
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/46

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/53
b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/60
b Dimensions, mounting and schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62

b Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming .

to UL and CSA standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/68

Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment

with current peaks
b Type aM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/72
4

b Type gG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/74

4

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/1

Selection guide

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Applications

Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for onload making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where
frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in
utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible
breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts
are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible
to padlock the handles in the open position.

Switch type

Mini-VARIO for standard applications VARIO for high performance applications

Thermal current

12 A

20 A

12 A

20 A

25 A

Operational current
AC-23 A at 400 Volts

8.1 A

11 A

8.1 A

11 A

14.5 A

Number of poles

35

36

Number of auxiliary contacts

1 or 2

14

Switch fixing
From the front

Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes

Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws

From the back

Clip-on mounting on 7 rail

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing

Reversible terminal blocks

Yes

Door mounting, direct operator

Yes

Mounting at back of enclosure,

indirect operator with door interlock

Yes

Enclosure reference

VpDN12

VpDN20

VpD02
VpF02

VpD01
VpF01

VpD0
VpF0

Product reference

VCFN12GE

VCFN20GE

VpF02GE

VpF01GE

VpF0GE

Pages

2/4 and 4/8

10

4/2

4/12 and 4/13

Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and
inductive circuits where frequent operation is required.
They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless
all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.

1
2
3
4

VARIO for high performance applications

32 A

40 A

63 A

80 A

125 A

175 A

21.8 A

29 A

41.5 A

57 A

68.5 A

83 A

36

3 + N + PE

14

Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes

Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws

6
Fixing 4 x 5.5 screws

Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing

Screw fixing

Yes

Yes
Yes

VpD1
VpF1

VpD2
VpF2

VpF3

VpF4

VpF5

VpF6

VpF1GE

VpF2GE

VpF3GE

VpF4GE

VpF5GE

VpF6GE

8
9

2/4, 4/8 and 4/12

10

4/3

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Characteristics

1
2
3
4
5

Environment

Switch type (bare type)

Conforming to standards

VN12
V02
VZN12 VZ02
IEC 60947-3

Product certifications

UL, CSA, GL

Protective treatment

TC

Degree of protection
with protection shroud

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529

V0
VZ0

VVD0
VVE0

V1
VZ1

VVD1
VVE1

V0
VZ0

VVD0
VVE0

V1
VZ1

VVD1
VVE1

- 20+ 50

Flame resistance

960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11ms conforming to IEC60068-2-27

gn

15

30

Vibration resistance
10150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

gn

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

VN12
VZN12
690

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth)

and rated uninterrupted (lu)

12

20

25

32

Conventional thermal current in enclosure (lthe)

10

16

20

25

Rated operational
power and current

32

15

30

V02
VZ02

VN20
VZN20

V01
VZ01

Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation

Switch type (bare type)

AC-21A/22A

230690 V

12

20

25

AC-23A

230 V

A/kW

10.6/3

14/4

19.7/5.5

240 V

A/kW

10.6/3

14/4

19.9/5.5

18.9/5.5

400 V

A/kW

8.1/4

11/5.5

14.5/7.5

21.8/11

415 V

A/kW

8.1/4

11/5.5

14/7.5

21/11

500 V

A/kW

8.9/5.5

11.9/7.5

16.7/11

690 V

A/kW

8.6/7.5

12.3/11

17.5/15

Rated
operational power

230/240 V

kW

1.5

400/415 V

kW

5.5

500 V

kW

5.5

7.5

690 V

kW

AC -3

8
Intermittent duty class

V01
VZ01

Ambient air temperature

6
7

VN20
VZN20

5.5

7.5

A/
400V

120

200

A/
400V

120

200

Short-circuit
characteristics

Permissible rms short time rating (Icw)

A/
140
400V/1s

300

140

300

Rated making capacity under .

short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak

kA/
400V

0.5

0.5

Rated conditional .
short-circuit current (I rms) .
with aM/gG fuses

kA/
400V

10

10

12

4/4

11

30

Rated making capacity .

Characteristics
in normal operating AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms)
conditions
Rated breaking capacity .
AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms)

10

7.5

20

250

320
250
384

25

35

V2
VZ2
IEC 60947-3

VVD2
VVE2

V3
VZ3

VVD3
VVE3

V4
VZ4

VVD4
VVE4

V5

V6

VZ7
VZ20
IEC 60947-5

VZN05
VZN06

UL, CSA, GL
TC

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529

- 20+ 50
960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
30

V2
VZ2
690

VVD2
VVE2

V3
VZ3

VVD3
VVE3

V4
VZ4

VVD4
VVE4

V5

V6

VZ7
VZ20

40

63

80

125

175

12

32

50

63

100

140

10

40

63

80

125

160

le/AC-15

25.8/7.5

50.3/15

61.2/18.5

71.9/22

96.6/30

6A

24.8/7.5

48.2/15

58.5/18.5

68/22

92.7/30

6A

29/15

41.5/22

57/30

68.5/37

83/45

4A

28/15

40/22

55/30

66/37

80/45

4A

28.5/18.5

44/30

54/37

64.5/45

79/55

2A

17.5/15

25/22

33/30

42/37

49/45

1A

5.5

11

15

22

30

11

18.5

22

30

37

15

22

30

37

45

11

18.5

30

37

30

5
6
7
8

400

630

800

1250

1750

320

500

640

1000

1400

480

756

960

1500

2100

2.1

2.8

10
50

VZN05
VZN06

10

1
63

80

125

200

16

1.6

4/5

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Characteristics

Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation

Switch type (bare type)
24 V
Rated
operational current
DC-1 (L/R = 1ms)

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

VN12
VZN12
12
12
12

48 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

12
12
12

20
20
20

25
25
25

32
32
32

60 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

12
12
12

20
20
20

25
25
25

32
32
32

110 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

1.5
8
12

2
10
20

9
12
25

10
16
32

220 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

1.5
7
10

2
8
14

2.5
10
16

3
12
20

250 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

0.6
3
8

0.7
4
10

0.8
6
12

1
8
16

24 V
Rated
operational current
DC-2toDC-5
(L/R=1ms)

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

12
12
12

20
20
20

25
25
25

32
32
32

48 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

12
12
12

20
20
20

25
25
25

32
32
32

60 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

10
12
12

14
20
20

16
25
25

20
32
32

110 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

1.5
3
12

2
4
20

2.5
5
25

3
6
32

220 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

0.4
1.4
1

0.5
1.5
2

0.5
1.5
3

0.8
2
4

250 V

1 contact
2 contacts
3 contacts

A
A
A

0.3
0.4
1.2

0.4
0.6
2.4

0.5
0.8
1.6

0.8
1
2

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

VN20
VZN20
20
20
20

V01
VZ01

V0
VZ0
25
25
25

VVD0
VVE0

V1
VZ1
32
32
32

VVD1
VVE1

Other characteristics
Switch type (bare type)
Mechanical durability
(millions of operating cycles)
Electrical durability in cat. AC-21
(millions of operating cycles)
Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5
(operating cycles)
Suitable for isolation
Cabling

10

V02
VZ02

Tightening torque

4/6

VN12
VZN12
0.05

V02
VZ02
0.1

VN20
VZN20
0.05

V01
VZ01
0.1

0.05

0.1

0.05

0.1

30 000
Yes

Flexible cable + cable end

mm2

Solid cable

mm2

10

10

N.m

0.7

2.1

0.7

2.1

V0
VZ0

VVD0
VVE0

V1
VZ1

VVD1
VVE1

V2
VZ2
40
40
40

VVD2
VVE2

V3
VZ3
63
63
63

VVD3
VVE3

V4
VZ4
80
80
80

VVD4
VVE4

V5

V6

125
125
125

175
175
175

VZ7
VZ20
8 (le/DC-11)

40
40
40

63
63
63

80
80
80

125
125
125

175
175
175

8 (le/DC-11)

35
40
40

40
63
63

50
80
80

60
125
125

70
175
175

4 (le/DC-11)

12
20
40

20
63
63

25
80
80

30
125
125

12
175
175

2 (le/DC-11)

4
14
25

6
25
30

8
30
40

12
40
80

15
50
100

1 (le/DC-11)

2
12
20

4
20
30

5
25
40

3
30
50

10
40
61

0.8 (le/DC-11)

40
40
40

63
63
63

80
80
80

125
125
125

175
175
175

40
40
40

63
63
63

80
80
80

125
125
125

175
175
175

25
40
40

40
63
63

50
80
80

60
125
125

70
175
175

5
8
40

6
10
50

8
20
63

10
22
70

12
24
80

1
3
7

1.5
4
10

2
6
15

2.2
7
16

2.4
8
13

1
2
6

1.2
3
8

1.5
6
10

1.6
7
12

1.8
8
14

V5

V6

VZ7
VZ20
0.1

VZN05
VZN06
0.05

0.1 (AC-15)

0.05

V2
VZ2
0.1
0.1

VVD2
VVE2

V3
VZ3
0.03

VVD3
VVE3

V4
VZ4

VVD4
VVE4

0.03

30 000

30 000 (DC-11)

Yes

16

70

2 x 0.751.5

10

25

95

2 x 12.5

2.1

22.6

0.7

VZN05
VZN06

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/7

References

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors .

for standard applications
Complete units
b
b
b
b

3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 20 A

Marking on operator .
Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
Degree of protection IP65.

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

for door mounting

Red, padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

511156

Operator
Handle

lth
Front plate Fixing
mm
mm
Yellow
22.5
60 x 60

A
. 12
.
. 20
.

Reference

Weight

VCDN12

kg
0.177

VCDN20

0.177

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting

at back of an enclosure (1)

VCDN20

Operator
Handle
Red, padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

Front plate Fixing

mm
mm
Yellow
22.5
60 x 60

lth

Reference

A
. 12
.

VCCDN12

kg
0.334

VCCDN20

0.334

511157

. 20
.

Weight

Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator
Handle

5
VCCDN20

VBDN20

8
9
10

4/8

Reference

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 and 4/23

Schemes :
page 4/23

Weight

VBDN12

kg
0.177

VBDN20

0.177

(1) Switches supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32.
(see page 4/11)

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

A
. 12
.
. 20
.

511158

Black, padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

lth
Front plate Fixing
mm
mm
Black
22.5
60 x 60

References (continued) 

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors .

for standard applications
Switch bodies, add-on modules

812801

Switch bodies
Description

Rating
A
12

VN12

20

VN20

Rating
A
12

Reference
VZN12

20

VZN20

0.020.
.

Neutral pole module

with early make and
late break contacts

12 and 20

VZN11

0.020.
.
.

Earthing module

12 and 20

VZN14

0.016.
.

Auxiliary contact block

modules

1 N/O late make contact

VZN05

0.020.
.

1 N/C early break contact

VZN06

0.020.
.

For add-on pole modules or

VZN26
auxiliary contact block modules
(single-pole shroud)

0.004.
.
.

VZN08

0.007.
.

3-pole switch disconnectors

Reference

Weight
kg
0.110.
.
0.110.
.

Add-on modules

VN20

Description

580586

Main pole modules

580587

VZN11

Input terminal
protection shrouds

For switch bodies .

(3-pole shroud)

VZN14

Weight
kg
0.020.
.

580588

Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on

a switch body
VZN12 or VZN20

or
VZN05

+
VN12

or

or

VZN11

VN20

or

2
3
4
5
6

VZN12 or VZN20

+ VZN14

VZN05 or VZN06

812805

VZN05 or VZN06

VZN26

812806

9
VZN08

10
Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 and 4/23

Schemes :
page 4/23

4/9

1
KCC1YZ

VZN14
VZNpp

VZNpp

VN12, VN20

3
VZN17, VZN30

KCD1PZ

KZ32, KZ83

6
7

KAD1PZ

8
9
10

4/10

References

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors .

for standard applications
Operators and accessories

b Degree of protection IP65.

b Marking on operator .
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
b Operator fixing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19.
b For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 4/20, 4/21 and 2/5..

Operators for main and Emergency stop

switch disconnectors

Handle
Red, padlockable
with 1 padlock
(4to6)
Red, padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

Front plate
mm
Yellow
45 x 45

Reference

Yellow
60 x 60

KCD1PZ

KCC1YZ

Weight
kg
0.050.
.
.
.
0.084.
.
.
.

2
3

Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle
Black, padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
(4to8)

Front plate
mm
Black
60 x 60

Reference
KAD1PZ

Weight
kg
0.084.
.
.
.

Accessories for door interlocking

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in

addition to a direct operator
Description

Shaft extensions

Front
plate
mm

Distance
enclosure
back/door
mm
300330

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

Weight

VZN17

400430

VZN30

0.130.
.
.

kg
0.100.
.
.

Door interlock plate

45 x 45 or
60x 60

KZ32

0.170.
.
.

Plate for door mounting

45 x 45 or
60x 60

KZ83

0.205.
.
.

6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 and 4/23

Schemes :
page 4/23

4/11

References

TeSys protection components

VARIO switch disconnectors .

for high performance applications
Complete units

511159

b
b
b
b

3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A

Marking on operator .
Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
Degree of protection IP65.

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

for door mounting
Handle

Red,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

4
5

Front plate
mm
Yellow
60 x 60

511160

VCF0

Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

Yellow
90 x 90

Fixing

Rating
A
12
20
25
32
40

VCD02
VCD01
VCD0
VCD1
VCD2

Weight
kg
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215.

4 screws

12
20
25
32
40
63
80

VCF02
VCF01
VCF0
VCF1
VCF2
VCF3
VCF4

0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.560
0.560.

4 screws

125
175

VCF5
VCF6

1.200
1.200.
.
.
.

22.5

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)

VCF5

Handle
Red,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

Front plate
mm
Yellow
60 x 60

Fixing

Rating
A
12
20
25
32
40

VCCD02
VCCD01
VCCD0
VCCD1
VCCD2

Weight
kg
0.392
0.392
0.392
0.392
0.392.

4 screws

12
20
25
32
40
63
80

VCCF02
VCCF01
VCCF0
VCCF1
VCCF2
VCCF3
VCCF4

0.527
0.527
0.527
0.527
0.527
0.440
0.680.

4 screws

125
175

VCCF5
VCCF6

1.320
1.320

22.5

511161

6
7
8

Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

9
10

4/12

Yellow
90 x 90

Reference

(1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32 or KZ74
(see page 4/20).

VCCF0

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Reference

Dimensions :
pages 4/24 and 4/25

Schemes :
page 4/25

References (continued) 

TeSys protection components

VARIO switch disconnectors .

for high performance applications
Complete units

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A

b Marking on operator .
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
b Degree of protection IP65.

Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

511162

Handle
Black,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

Front plate
mm
Black
60 x 60

Fixing
22.5

4 screws

VBD0

511163

Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
( 4 to 8)

Black
90 x 90

4 screws

Rating
A
12
20
25
32
40

Reference
VBD02
VBD01
VBD0
VBD1
VBD2

Weight
kg
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215.

12
20
25
32
40
63
80

VBF02
VBF01
VBF0
VBF1
VBF2
VBF3
VBF4

0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.560
0.560.

125
175

VBF5
VBF6

1.200
1.200.
.
.
.

2
3
4

Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards

Handle
Red,
padlockable
with 1 padlock
( 4 to 6)

580534

VBF4

Front plate
mm
Yellow
45 x 45

Rating
A
25
32
40
63
80

Reference
VVE0
VVE1
VVE2
VVE3
VVE4

Weight
kg
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.530
0.530.

Main switch disconnectors

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards

Handle
Black, not
padlockable

VVE1

Front plate
mm
Black
45 x 45

Rating
A
25
32
40
63
80

Reference
VVD0
VVD1
VVD2
VVD3
VVD4

Weight
kg
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.560
0.560.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/24 and 4/25

Schemes :
page 4/25

4/13

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

VARIO switch disconnectors .

for high performance applications

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts

(forcustomerassembly)

2
3

580535

Description
3-pole switch disconnectors
(1)

V0

580536

Switch bodies
Rating
A
12

Reference
V02

Weight
kg
0.200

20

V01

0.200

25

V0

0.200

32

V1

0.200

40

V2

0.200

63

V3

0.500

80

V4

0.500

125

V5

0.900

175

V6

0.900

Rating
A
12

Reference
VZ02

Weight
kg
0.050

20

VZ01

0.050

25

VZ0

0.050

32

VZ1

0.050

40

VZ2

0.050

63

VZ3

0.100

80

VZ4

0.100

12 to 40

VZ11

0.050

63 to 80

VZ12

0.100

125 and 175

VZ13

0.250

12 to 40

VZ14

0.050

63 and 80

VZ15

0.100

125 and 175

VZ16

0.250

Add-on modules
Description

580538

V5

580537

Main pole modules

Neutral pole modules with

early make and late break
contacts (1)

6
VZ0

VZ11

Earthing modules

580540

580539

Auxiliary contact block modules

Description
Auxiliary contact block
modules with
2 auxiliary contacts

8
VZ15

VZ20

10

4/14

Dimensions :
pages 4/24 and 4/25

Reference

N/O + N/C (2)

VZ7

N/O + N/O

VZ20

(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20.

(2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Type

Schemes :
page 4/25

Weight
kg
0.050.
0.050.

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

VARIO switch disconnectors .

for high performance applications

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts

(forcustomerassembly)
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a
switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ7 or VZ20

V0p

VZ7 or VZ20

VZ7

or

or

VZ11 or VZ12

VZ20

or

or

VZ14 or VZ15

VZ13

or

or

VZ0p/VZ0 to
VZ4

VZ16

or
VZ11 or VZ12

or

V0

to

VZ14 or VZ15

or

+
V4

VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 +

+
or

V6

VZ7
or

V5
+

VZ20
or

VZ13
or

VZ16

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ0p

VZ0p +

V0p

+ VZ0p +

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ0

VZ0

V0

VZ0

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ1

VZ1

V1

VZ1

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ2

VZ2

V2

VZ2

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ11

or

VZ14

VZ3

VZ3

V3

VZ3

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ12

or

VZ15

VZ4

VZ4

V4

VZ4

VZ7

or

VZ20

or

VZ12

or

VZ15

Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum
of 3 main pole modules per switch body.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/24 and 4/25

Schemes :
page 4/25

4/15

1
2

KAp1BZ

VN12, VN20
V02V2

KCp1LZ
KCp1YZ
VZN17, VZN30

KBp1PZ

KZ32, KZ83
KDp1PZ
KAp1PZ

V3, V4
KCp1PZ

4
VZ18, VZ31
KAF2PZ
KCF2PZ

5
KZ81
V5, V6

KBF2PZ
VZ18, VZ31

KDF2PZ

KZ74

KBF3PZ

KDF3PZ

KAF3PZ

KCF3PZ

10
503798

4/16

References

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Operators, handles and front plates .
(forcustomerassembly)

b Marking on operator .
b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied).
b Degree of protection IP65..

Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop

switch disconnectors

For
switch
body
VN12, VN20
V02V2

Operator
Handle

Red,
padlockable
with 1 padlock
( 4 to 6)

Reference
Front plate
Dimensions
mm
Yellow
45 x 45

Weight

Fixing
22.5

KCC1YZ

kg
0.050

4 screws

KCE1YZ

0.040

22.5

KCD1PZ

0.082

4 screws

KCF1PZ

0.075

Red,
padlockable
with up to .
3 padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Yellow
60 x 60

V3 and V4

Red,
padlockable
with up to .
3 padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Yellow
60 x 60

4 screws

KCF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Red, long,
padlockable
with up to .
3 padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Yellow
90 x 90

4 screws

KCF3PZ (1)

0.160

VN12, VN20
V02V2

Operator
Handle

Black,
padlockable
with up to 3
padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Reference
Front plate
Dimensions
mm
Black
60 x 60

3
4

Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors

For
switch
body

Weight

Fixing
22.5

KAD1PZ

kg
0.082

4 screws

KAF1PZ

0.075

V3 and V4

Black,
padlockable
with up to .
3 padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Black
60 x 60

4 screws

KAF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Black, long,
padlockable
with up to .
3 padlocks .
( 4 to 8)

Black
90 x 90

4 screws

KAF3PZ (1)

0.160

6
7
8

(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be
ordered separately (see page 4/20).

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes :
pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/17

1
KAp1BZ

VN12, VN20
V02V2

KCp1LZ
KCp1YZ
VZN17, VZN30

KZ32, KZ83

KBp1PZ
KDp1PZ
KAp1PZ

V3, V4
KCp1PZ

4
VZ18, VZ31

KAF2PZ

KCF2PZ

KZ81
V5, V6

KBF2PZ
VZ18, VZ31
KDF2PZ

KZ74

8
KBF3PZ

KDF3PZ

KAF3PZ

KCF3PZ

10
503799

4/18

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Operators, handles and front plates .
(forcustomerassembly)

b Marking on operator .
b Degree of protection IP65..

Handles and front plates for Emergency stop

switch disconnectors
For
switch
body

VN12, VN20
V02V2

Operator
Handle

Red, .
not .
padlockable

Reference
Front plate
Dimensions
mm
Yellow
45 x 45

Yellow
60 x 60

Weight

Fixing
22.5

KCC1LZ

kg
0.050

4 screws

KCE1LZ

0.040

22.5

KDD1PZ

0.082

4 screws

KDF1PZ

0.075

V3 and V4

Red, .
long, not .
padlockable

Yellow
60 x 60

4 screws

KDF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Red, .
long, not .
padlockable

Yellow
90 x 90

4 screws

KDF3PZ (1)

0.160

VN12, VN20
V02V2

Operator
Handle

Black, .
not .
padlockable

Reference
Front plate
Dimensions
mm
Black
45 x 45

Black
60 x 60

3
4

Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors

For
switch
body

Weight

Fixing
22.5

KAC1BZ

kg
0.050

4 screws

KAE1BZ

0.040

22.5

KBD1PZ

0.055

4 screws

KBF1PZ

0.045

V3 and V4

Black, .
not .
padlockable

Black
60 x 60

4 screws

KBF2PZ

0.070

V5 and V6

Black,
not .
padlockable

Black
90 x 90

4 screws

KBF3PZ (1)

0.160

5
6
7

(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be
ordered separately (see next page).

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes :
pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/19

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Accessories

Input terminal protection shrouds

Description
580583

For switch bodies

(3-pole shroud)

VZ8
For add-on pole modules
(single-pole shroud)
580584

For contact blocks

with 2 auxiliary contacts

VZ26

For
use on
V02V2

Reference
VZ8

Weight
kg
0.015

V3 and V4

VZ9

0.020

V5 and V6

VZ10

0.060

VZ02VZ2, VZ11, VZ14

VZ26

0.005

VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15

VZ27

0.007

VZ13, VZ16

VZ28

0.020

VZ29

0.005.
.

Components for door interlocking

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in

addition to a direct operator
Description

Shaft
extensions

For
use on

Distance enc. Sold in

back/door
lots of
mm
VN12, VN20 300330
1
V02V2
400430
1

Unit
reference

V02V2

580585

Description

Plates for
door mounting
of handles with
4 screw fixing

580527

KZ32

Adapter plate
for switch
disconnectors

8
KZ81

10
Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

4/20

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes :
pages 4/23 and 4/25

VZN30 (1)

0.130.

VZ17

0.075.

400430

VZ30

0.125.

300320

VZ18

0.170.

400420

VZ31

0.215.

330350

VZ18

0.170.

430450

VZ31

0.215.

VN12, VN20
V02V2
V3V6

KZ32

0.177

KZ74

0.020.

For
use on

Front plate
dimensions
mm
VN12, VN20 45 x 45 or.
V02V2
60 x 60

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

KZ83

kg
0.205.
.

V3V6

KZ81

0.010.

KZ106

0.075.
.
.
.
.

V3 and V4

60 x 60 or.
90 x 90
90 x 90

(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.

kg
0.100.

V3 and V4

Door
interlock plates

VZN17 (1)

300330

V5 and V6

Weight

Weight

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors

Accessories

Accessories for operators

Description

For
use on

Front plate
dimensions
mm
45 x 45

Sold in
lots of
5

KZ13

60 x 60

KZ15

0.065.
.

90 x 90

KZ103

0.070.
.

45 x 45

20

KZ14

0.060.
.

60 x 60

10

KZ16

0.065.
.

90 x 90

KZ101

0.070.
.

KZ14

20

KZ76

0.020.
.

KZ16

10

KZ77

0.010.
.

KZ101

KZ100

0.005.
.

VN12, VN20

45 x 45

KZ65

0.037.
.

V02V2

60 x 60

KZ66

0.033.
.

V3 and V4

60 x 60

KZ62

0.033.
.

V3V6

90 x 90

KZ67

0.064.
.

For operators
with 22.5
fixing

Z01

0.050.
.
.

812783

Legend
Front plate
holder with
silver coloured
blank legend
plate

Legend
holders
without
legend plate

KZ15

580528

Silver
coloured
blank legend
plates for
engraving by
customer

KZ67

Seals

812785

Tightening
tool

Front plate

Unit
reference

Weight
kg
0.060.
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Z01

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 4/4 to 4/7

Dimensions :
pages 4/22 to 4/25

Schemes :
pages 4/23 and 4/25

4/21

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A

Dimensions

Switch disconnectors
Switch bodies VN12, VN20

Add-on modules VZN12, VZN20

62

39

48

12

45,5

Add-on modules VZN11, VZN14 VZN05

and VZN06

45,5

46,5

39

12

56

Mounting

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door

VN12, VN20
Single hole fixing

12,7
22,5
44

74,5

VN12, VN20
4 screw fixing
45 x 45 front plate

1,5...6

60 x 60 front plate

13

36

48

1,5...6

44

36

62,5

8
9
10
Characteristics :
page 4/4

4/22

References :
page 4/14

Schemes :
page 4/23

48

Mounting (continued),
schemes

TeSys protection components

4

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A

Mounting (continued)

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN17 or VZN30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
VN12, VN20
Single hole fixing

4 screw fixing

1,5...6

1,5...6

2
e
Shaft extension

VN12, VN20

VZN17
VZN30

Distance (e)
enclosure back/door
mm
300330
400430

Schemes
VZN06
21

Auxiliary contact blocks

VZN05

22

5/L3
6/T3

Neutral pole module

VZN11

13

3/L2
4/T2

Main pole module

VZN12, VZN20

14

1/L1
2/T1

Switch body
VN12, VN20

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
page 4/4

References :
page 4/14

4/23

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

VARIO switch disconnectors,12to 175A

Dimensions

Switch disconnectors
Switch bodies V0p, V0 to V2

Switch bodies V3 to V6

60

55

74

G
a

Add-on modules VZ02 to VZ4 and VZ11 to VZ16

VZ02 and VZ01,

VZ0 to VZ2, VZ11, VZ14
VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15
VZ13, VZ16

Mounting

c
65
90

G
48
68

H
48
68

5.5
5.5

20

48,5

b
83
125

65

a
V3, V4
60
V5, V6
90
Add-on modules VZ7, VZ20

a
16

b
74

c
35

20
30

83
125

46
63

Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door

4 screw fixing
V0p, V0 to V4

1,5...6

4 screw fixing
4 screw fixing
45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
V0p, V0 to V2
V0p, V0 to V4

1,5...6

1,5...6

48

36

12,7

Single hole fixing

V0p, V0 to V4

36

22,5
44

72

44

37
c
60
65

V0p, V0 to V2
V3, V4

48

V5 and V6. 4 screw fixing

90 x 90 front plate

1,5...6

94

68

9
68

10
65

4/24

90

TeSys protection components

Mounting (continued),
schemes

VARIO switch disconnectors, 12to175A

Mounting (continued)

Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure

4 screw fixing
V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft
extension VZ17 or VZ30
(clip-on mounting on 6 rail
possible for V0p to V2)

Single hole fixing

V3 to V4 with shaft extension
VZ18orVZ31

1,5...6

1,5...6

V5 and V6 with shaft extension

VZ18 or VZ31

1,5...6

Shaft extension

V02 and V01

V0toV2

Distance (e)
enc.back/door
mm
300330
400430
300320
400420

VZ17
VZ30
VZ18
VZ31

V3 and V4

94

60

100

2 x 4.2
2 x 4.2
2x5
2x5

15
15
20
20

30

Shaft
extension
V5 and V6

Distance (e) enc.

back/door
mm
300350
430450

VZ18
VZ31

Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards

VVp3 to VVp4

5,5

45
83

45
74

VVp0 to VVp2

5,5

45

60

110

106

Schemes

21

13

23

22

14

24

6/T3

4/T2

VZ20

13

VZ7

14

Auxiliary contact blocks

VZ11 to VZ13

5/L3

Neutral pole module

VZ02 and VZ01

VZ0 to VZ4

3/L2

Main pole module

V02 and V01

V0 to V6
1/L1

Switch body

2/T1

72

68

9
10

4/25

Selection guide

TeSys protection components

Fuse protection

Applications

Protection of control circuits or transformers

2
3
4
5

Breaking under load

Fuse type

NF C or DIN

Cartridge fuses

1125 A

Device type

Fuse carriers

References

DF

Pages

4/29

6
7
8
9
10

4/26


Protection of motors

Protection of motors or variable speed drives

2
3
Yes, only if combined with a contactor

Yes

NF C or DIN

NF C, DIN, BS or UL

1125 A

11250 A

Fuse carriers

Switch-disconnector-fuses

LS1 and GK1

GS

4/36

4/42

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/27

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

Fuse carrier type

1
2
3
4

6
7
8
9

DF10

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-3, UL 512, CSA 22-2 n 39

Protective treatment

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

Storage

- 40+ 80

For operation, with derating (1)

- 20+ 60

Operating positions

Without derating

Flame resistance

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

DF14

DF22

IP 20

23 in relation to normal mounting plane

C

960

Fuse size

mm

8.5 x 31.5

10 x 38

14 x 51

22 x 58

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

with tubular links, a.c. supply
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

500

690

690

690

kV

25

32

50

125

A
A

25
25

32
32

50
50

125
100

kA
kA
kA

20

120
120

120
120
80

120
120
80

kA

11

15

15

19

mm2

Min.
1 x 1.5

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

Nm

2.2

Pole characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1)
With tubular links
With aM cartridge fuses
With gG cartridge fuses

DF8

Environment characteristics

Rated conditional short-circuit current

Conforming to IEC 60947-3
400 V
500 V
690 V
Peak withstand current (dynamic stress)
Conforming to IEC 60269-1
With tubular links
Cabling (number of conductors x c.s.a.)
Solid cable

Tightening torque

Max.
1 x 16
2x6
1 x 10
2x6
1 x 10
2x6

Min.
1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5

Max.
1 x 16
2x6
1 x 10
2x6
1 x 10
2x6

Min.
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5

Max.
1 x 25
2 x 10
1 x 25
2 x 10
1 x 25
2 x 10

Min.
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5

3.5

Max.
1 x 35
2 x 25
1 x 35
2 x 16
1 x 35
2 x 16

Characteristics of early break and signalling contacts DF14 AM and DF22 AM

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
a.c. supply
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1)
Rated operational current
Category AC-15

250

24 V
4

48 V
4

127 V
3

240 V
2.5

Category DC-13

0.2

0.1

Definition of
rated characteristics
Low load operating
characteristics

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

B300

Minimum voltage

10

Minimum current

mA

30

Cabling

Faston connectors
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 20 C, apply a derating coefficient:
Maximum temperature
20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
Max. relative humidity
95 %
90 %
80 %
50 %
50 %
1
0.95
0.9
0.8
0.7
Current derating
coefficient

10
References:
pages 4/29 and 4/30

4/28

Substitution:
page 4/30

Dimensions:
page 4/31

Schemes:
page 4/31

References

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

DF221NV

Fuse carriers (1)

106786

106788

Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
A
25

DF103N

32

10 x 38

106795

106793

DF101

Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
mm
8.5 x 31.5

50

DF143NC

106825

106823

DF141

106792

106791

125

DF223NC

DF221

DF101NV

DF103V

22 x 58

Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
A
25

Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
mm
8.5 x 31.5

32

DF221NV

DF223VC

12
12
6
6
4
3

DF8 1
DF10 N
DF8 1N
DF8 2
DF8 3
DF8 3N

1P
N
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

12
12
6
6
4
3

DF10 1
DF10 N
DF10 1N
DF10 2
DF10 3
DF10 3N

0.061
0.071
0.132
0.122
0.183
0.254

1P
N
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

6
6
3
3
2
1

DF14 1
DF14 N
DF14 1N
DF14 2
DF14 3C (3)
DF14 3NC (3)

0.140
0.150
0.290
0.280
0.420
0.570

1P
N
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

6
6
3
3
2
1

DF22 1
DF22 N
DF22 1N
DF22 2
DF22 3C (3)
DF22 3NC (3)

0.218
0.238
0.456
0.436
0.654
0.892

Substitution:
page 4/30

Weight

12
6
6
4
3

DF8 1V
DF8 1NV
DF8 2V
DF8 3V
DF8 3NV

kg
0.064
0.135
0.125
0.186
0.257

10 x 38

1P
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

12
6
6
4
3

DF10 1V
DF10 1NV
DF10 2V
DF10 3V
DF10 3NV

0.064
0.135
0.125
0.186
0.257

50

14 x 51

1P
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

6
3
3
2
1

DF14 1V
DF14 1NV
DF14 2V
DF14 3VC (3)
DF14 3NVC (3)

0.143
0.293
0.283
0.423
0.573

125

22 x 58

1P
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

6
3
3
2
1

DF22 1V
DF22 1NV
DF22 2V
DF22 3VC (3)
DF22 3NVC (3)

0.221
0.459
0.439
0.657
0.895

(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose. Clip-in markers
type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used.
(2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked tubular link as standard.
(3) A letter C in the reference indicates that the fuse carrier can be fitted with auxiliary early
break, blown fuse signalling and fuse present signalling contacts.
(4) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.

Dimensions:
page 4/31

(1) (4)

Composition Sold Unit

in
reference
lots of

Characteristics:
page 4/28

1P
N
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

1P
1 P + N (2)
2P
3P
3 P + N (2)

DF143VC
106835

106834

DF141NV

Weight
kg
0.061
0.071
0.132
0.122
0.183
0.254

Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon)

106822

106834

14 x 51

Composition Sold Unit

in
reference
lots of

Schemes:
page 4/31

4/29

6
7
8
9
10

References (continued),
substitution 

TeSys protection components

4

Fuse carriers

Accessories

Auxiliary early break and blown fuse signalling contacts (1)

Fuse carriers Size of cartridge
to be equipped fuse or link
DF14
14 x 51
(3 P or 3 P + N)

106836

DF14 AMp

DF22
(3 P or 3 P + N)

22 X 58

Number
of contacts
1
2
1
2

Sold in
lots of
1
1
1
1

Unit
reference
DF14 AM1
DF14 AM2
DF22 AM1
DF22 AM2

Weight
kg
0.025
0.029
0.032
0.035
Weight
kg

Fuse carrier assembly kits (2)

524196

2
3

Fuse carriers
to be
assembled
DF8
DF10
DF14

Size of cartridge
fuse or link

Composition Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

8.5 x 31.5
10 x 38
14 x 51

1 pin, .
2clips

12

DF10 AP

0.001

10

DF14 AP

0.003

DF22

22 x 58

1 pin, .
3clips
1 pin, .
3clips

10

DF22 AP

0.003

Marking

Sold in
lots of
25
25

Unit
reference
AB1 Rp (3)
AB1 Gp (3)

Marking accessories
Description

Composition

Clip-in markers Strip of 10 identical

numbers or letters

Substitution

09
AZ

Weight
kg
0.002
0.002

Fuse carriers
Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting

Old range
Reference
DF6 AB08
DF6 AB10
DF6 N10
GK1 CC
GK1 CD
GK1 CF
GK1 CH
GK1 DC
GK1 DD
GK1 DF
GK1 DH
GK1 EB
GK1 EN
GK1 EC
GK1 ED
GK1 EF
GK1 EH
GK1 FB
GK1 FN
GK1 FC
GK1 FD
GK1 FF
GK1 FH

5
6
7
8

Size of cartridge
fuse or link
8.5 x 31.5
10 x 38
8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38
8.5 x 31.5
8.5 x 31.5
8.5 x 31.5
8.5 x 31.5
10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
10 x 38
14 x 51
14 x 51
14 x 51
14 x 51
14 x 51
14 x 51
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58

Composition
1P
1P
1N
1P+N
2P
3P
3P+N
1P+N
2P
3P
3P+N
1P
1N
1P+N
2P
3P
3P+N
1P
1N
1P+N
2P
3P
3P+N

New range
Reference
w/o indicator
DF8 1
DF10 1
DF10 N
DF8 1N
DF8 2
DF8 3
DF8 3N
DF10 1N
DF10 2
DF10 3
DF10 3N
DF14 1
DF14 N
DF14 1N
DF14 2
DF14 3C
DF14 3NC
DF22 1
DF22 N
DF22 1N
DF22 2
DF22 3C
DF22 3NC

Reference
with indicator
DF8 1V
DF10 1V

DF8 1NV
DF8 2V
DF8 3V
DF8 3NV
DF10 1NV
DF10 2V
DF10 3V
DF10 3NV
DF14 1V

DF14 1NV
DF14 2V
DF14 3VC
DF14 3NVC
DF22 1V

DF22 1NV
DF22 2V
DF22 3CV
DF22 3NVC

Fuse carrier assembly kits

Old range
Reference
GK1 AP2
GK1 AP3

New range
Size of cartridge fuse or link
Reference
DF10 AP
8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38
DF10 AP
8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38
DF14 AP
14 x 51
DF10 AP
GK1 AP4
8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38
DF22 AP
22 x 58
DF14 AP
GK1 AP5
14 x 51
DF14 AP
GK1 AP6
14 x 51
DF22 AP
22 x 58
DF22 AP
GK1 AP9
22 x 58
(1) These auxiliary contacts provide the following functions: early break, blown fuse signalling (if
the fuse carrier is fitted with striker fuses) and fuse present signalling.
(2) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DF8 or DF10 fuse carriers together.
1 pin and 3 clips are required to assemble two DF14 or DF22 fuse carriers together.
(3) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. Example:
AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.

9
10
Characteristics:
page 4/28

4/30

Dimensions:
page 4/31

Schemes:
page 4/31

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
schemes

Fuse carriers

Dimensions

Modular fuse carriers 25 A and 32 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
DF81 and DF81V
DF101 and DF101V
DF10N

DF81N and DF81NV

DF82 and DF82V
DF101N and DF101NV
DF102 and DF102V

DF83 and DF83V

DF103 and DF103V

DF83N and DF83NV

DF103N and DF103NV

58

83

45

47

5,5

40,5

17,5

2x17,5

3x17,5

4x17,5

64

Modular fuse carriers 50 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
DF141 and DF141V
DF14N

DF141N and DF141NV

DF142 and DF142V

DF143C and DF143VC

DF143NC and DF143NVC

107

45

48,5

70

5
3x17,5

1,5x17,5

3,8

50,5

4,5x17,5

6x17,5

76,5

Modular fuse carriers 125 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
DF221 and DF221V
DF22N

DF221N and DF221NV

DF222 and DF222V

DF223C and DF223VC

DF223NC and DF223NVC

51

70

45

126,5

2x17,5

50,5

7
4x17,5

6x17,5

8x17,5

76,5

Schemes

Modular fuse carriers

10

3
4

Characteristics:
page 4/28

DFp 3P + N

3
4

DFp 3P

DFp 2P

DFp 1P + N

1

DFp N

DFp 1P

References:
pages 4/29 and 4/30

Substitution:
page 4/30

4/31

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers for the North American market,.

conforming to standards UL and CSA,

Environment characteristics

1
2
3

Fuse carrier type

DFCC

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-3, UL 512, CSA 22-2 n 39

Protective treatment

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60529

Ambient air temperature

Storage

- 40+ 80

For operation, with derating (1)

- 20+ 60

Operating positions

Without derating

Flame resistance

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

IP 20

23 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

C

Pole characteristics
Fuse carrier type

DFCC

Fuse size

4
5
6
7

960

Class CC

Rated insulation voltage (Ui).

with tubular links, a.c. supply

600

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

With tubular links

30

With aM cartridge fuses

30

With gG cartridge fuses

30

Conforming to UL 512 at 600 V

kA

200

Conventional thermal current (Ith) .

for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1)

Short-circuit current withstand

With UL 248-4 Class CC fuses

Cabling (number of conductors x c.s.a.)

Min.

Max.

Solid cable

mm2

1 x 1.5

1 x 16
2x6

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

1 x 10
2x6

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1 x 1.5

1 x 10
2x6

Nm

2.2

Tightening torque

(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 20 C, apply a derating coefficient:
20 C

30 C

40 C

50 C

60 C

Max. relative humidity

Maximum temperature

95 %

90 %

80 %

50 %

50 %

Current derating coefficient

0.95

0.9

0.8

0.7

8
9
10
References:
page 4/33

4/32

Dimensions:
page 4/33

Schemes:
page 4/33

TeSys protection components

References,
dimensions,
schemes

Fuse carriers for the North American market,.

conforming to standards UL and CSA,

References
106786

Fuse carriers (1)

Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)

Size of
cartridge
fuse or link

Composition Sold Unit

in
reference
lots of

Class CC

1P

12

DFCC 1

0.061

2P

12

DFCC 2

0.122

3P

DFCC 3

0.183

Weight
kg

30
DFCC1

Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon) (1), (2)

106792

Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)

Size of
cartridge
fuse or link

Composition Sold Unit

in
reference
lots of

Class CC

1P

12

DFCC 1V

0.064

2P

DFCC 2V

0.125

3P

DFCC 3V

0.186

Weight
kg

30
DFCC3V

524196

Fuse carrier assembly kits (3)

Fuse carriers
to be assembled
DFCC

Size of
cartridge
fuse or link

Composition Sold Unit

in
reference
lots of

Class CC

1 pin, .
2clips

12

Marking

Sold Unit
in
reference
lots of

DF10 AP

Weight
kg
0.001

Marking accessories
Description
Clip-in markers

Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting

Composition

Strip of 10 identical 09
numbers or letter
AZ

Weight
kg

25

AB1 Rp (4)

0.002

25

AB1 Gp (4)

0.002

(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose.
Clip-in markers type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used.
(2) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.
(3) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DFCC fuse carriers together.
(4) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.

5
6

Dimensions

Modular fuse carriers 30 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
DFCC1 and DFCC 1V

DFCC2 and DFCC2V

DFCC3 and DFCC3V

83

45

47

5,5

40,5

58

17,5

8
2x17,5

3x17,5

64

Schemes

DFCC2P

DFCC 3P

DFCC 1P

Modular fuse carriers

10

Characteristics:
page 4/32

4/33

Selection

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

Operation: safety

The fuse carrier performs two basic functions:

b it isolates the downstream circuit by means of a visible break and wide opening
contacts,
b it holds the cartridge fuses designed to protect the installation against shortcircuits.
The type of cartridge fuse needed to protect the circuit must be determined before
selecting the fuse carrier.

1
2

Cartridge fuse selection (type, rating, size)

Type

Application
Solution

Application
Solution

b Motor protection.
b Transformer protection.
b aM type fuses. These fuses are designed to withstand high
current peaks of a very short duration. They must be
combined with a thermal overload relay coupled with a
contactor.
b Lighting circuit protection.
b Supply line protection.
b Furnace protection.
b gG type fuses, which are more widely used but whose
limiting capacity is weaker than that of aM type fuses.

Rating

gG fuses
aM fuses

See standard NF C 15-100.

Table 53 A paragraph 532-2-1 and table 52 C .
paragraph 5231.
Motors
Motors
Cartridge fuses
3 x 220 V
3 x 400 V
type aM
P
in
P
in
Size
Rating
kW A
kW
A
A
9
32
15
28.5 10 x 38 32
11
39
22
44
14 x 51 50
22
75
37
73
22 x 58 80
30
103
55
105
22 x 58 125

Fuse carrier

LS1 D32
GK1 EK
GK1 FK
GK1 FK

Size
Use the fuse characteristics table opposite to select the
correct fuse size according to:
b the nominal current of the circuit to be protected,
b the operational voltage.

Fuse carrier selection

Application
Solution

Application
Solution

Isolation of a circuit for safety reasons only.

The fuse carrier may be fitted with links.
The maximum permissible current is indicated in the pole
characteristics table opposite.
Isolation of a circuit and its protection against short-circuits.
Select a fuse carrier according to:
b the type of cartridge fuse required,
b the maximum permissible current in the fuse carrier poles
(see pole characteristics table opposite). If the
operational current is greater than the maximum
permissible current in the poles of the fuse carrier
corresponding to the cartridge fuse size selected, select
the fuse carrier the next size up.
The safety provided by using a fuse carrier can be increased
by adding a padlocking device with up to three padlocks.

Recommendations for use

The fuse carrier conforms to utilisation category AC-21A/22A of standard

IEC609473. It is therefore recommended that the fuse carrier early break auxiliary
contacts always be inserted in the coil circuit of the contactor with which it is in series.
If the fuse carrier is not associated with a contactor, it is essential to ensure that it will
be operated off-load.

9
10
Characteristics :
page 4/35

4/34

References :
pages 4/36 and 4/37

Dimensions :
page 4/40

Schemes :
page 4/41

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

Fuse carrier type

LS1 D32

Environment

LS1 D323

GK1 Ep

GK1 Fp

NF EN 60947-3

IEC 60947-3

Product certifications

BV, UR

Protective treatment

TH

TC

TC

- 50+ 70

- 50+ 70

- 50+ 70

23

23

23

Conforming to standards

Ambient air temperature

for operation with links without derating
Maximum tilt
in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

1
2

Pole characteristics

Fuse size

10 x 38

10 x 38

14 x 51

22 x 58

690

690

690

690

mm2/A 6/32 or 4/25

or 2.5/16
mm2/A 6/32 or 4/22
or 2.5/20
mm2/A 4/25 or 2.5/20
or 1.5/16

4/25 or 2.5/16

10/50 or 6/40

35/125 or 25/100

4/25 or 2.5/20

10/50 or 6/35

35/125 or 25/100

2.5/20 or 1.5/16

10/40 or 6/32

25/100 or 16/80

Rated operational voltage

a 250. c 60

a 250. c 60

a 500. c 440

a 500. c 220

Conventional thermal current

2.5

2.5

10 x 38

10 x 38

14 x 51

22 x 58

Rated operational voltage

with links. a.c. supply
Maximum continuous current at
ambient temperature y 40 C (1) (Min. cable /Ie)
With tubular links
With aM fuses
With gG fuses

Early break contact characteristics

Cartridge fuse characteristics

Fuse size
Type aM

a 400 V
a 500 V
a 660 V

A
A
A

32 (2)
20

25
20

50
40
25

125
80
50

Type gG

a 400 V
a 500 V
a 660 V

A
A
A

25 (2)
25

25
25

40
40
25

100
80
50

8.5

18

Maximum power dissipated by fuse

6
7

Cabling

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Number and c.s.a. of conductors
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end

mm2
mm2
mm2

Min.
2x1
2 x 1.5
2x1

Nm

Screw clamp
terminals
1.7

Connection
Tightening torque

Max.
2x6
2x6
2x4

Min.

Max.

Min.
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5
1 x 2.5

Max.
1 x 25
1 x 25
1 x 16

Min.
1 x 16
1 x 16
1 x 16

Connector

Connector

Max.
1 x 70
1 x 50
1 x 25

Connection by spring terminals

Number and c.s.a. of conductors
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end

Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
2 x 1 (3) 2 x 4

2x4
2 x 1.5.

(3)
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 55 C, apply a derating coefficient
equivalent to
mm2
mm2

Min.

Max.

(2) These values are for fuse carriers mounted side by side with a gap of 10mm between them
or mounted with sets of busbars GV2 p54. If mounted side by side without a gap, use the
following fuse sizes: aM fuse: 25 A and gG fuse: 20 A.
(3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.

Selection :
page 4/34

References :
pages 4/36 and 4/37

Dimensions :
page 4/40

Schemes :
page 4/41

4/35

9
10

References

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

526399

3-pole basic blocks

Rating

Cartridge
fuse
size

Number of
early break
contacts (1)

Single-phase
protection
device (2)

Reference
(3)

Weight

(4)

Without

LS1D323

0.270

kg

Connection by spring terminals

25 A

10 x 38

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

32 A

10 x 38

(4)

Without

LS1D32

0.300

50 A

14 x 51

Without

GK1EK

0.430

With

GK1EV

0.470

Without

GK1ES

0.470

With

GK1EW

0.510

Without

GK1FK

0.860

With

GK1FV

0.900

Without

GK1FS

0.900

With

GK1FW

0.940

0.300
0.570

LS1D323

526400

125 A

22 x 58

4-pole basic blocks

LS1D32
526401

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

32 A

10 x 38

(4)

Without

50 A

14 x 51

Without

LS1D32
+ LA8D324 (5)
GK1EM

With

GK1EY

0.600

Without

GK1ET

0.610

With

GK1EX

0.650

Without

GK1FM

1.090

With

GK1FY

1.130

Without

GK1FT

1.130

With

GK1FX

1.160

125 A

7
8

22 x 58

500505_1

526400

GK1FK

Fuse carriers for the North American market

25 and 30 A basic blocks: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

LS1D32

+ LA8D324

(1) With 1 or 2 early break contacts to be inserted in the contactor control circuit.
(2) Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device must be fitted with striker fuses.
(3) LS1D: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or screw fixing.
GK1: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or Telequick mounting plate.
(4) Addition of add-on contact block, see page 4/37.
(5) Can be mounted on left-hand or right-hand side of the basic block.

9
10
Selection :
page 4/34

4/36

Characteristics :
page 4/35

Dimensions :
page 4/40

Schemes :
page 4/41

References

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

Operators and accessories

Add-on contact blocks
Description
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
(early break contacts)

For
use on
LS1D32

LS1D323

Mounting
Front

Front

Maximum
number
1

Type of
contacts
N/O + N/C

Sold in
lots of
10

Unit
reference
GVAE11

Weight
kg
0.020

N/O + N/O

10

GVAE20

0.020

N/O + N/C

10

GVAE113

0.030

N/O + N/O

10

GVAE203

0.030

Operators
526402

For fuse carrier

Rating

For
mounting on

Reference

Number of poles
3 or 4

Right-hand side

GK1AP07

0.300

Left-hand side

GK1AP08

0.300

1
2

Weight
kg

Side handles
125 A

Front handles (1)

32 - 50 - 125 A
GK1FK + GK1AP07

Fitted as standard

External handles
32 A

50 A

125 A

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

Right-hand side

LS1D32005 (2)

0.200

Left-hand side

LS1D32006

0.200

Right-hand side

GK1AP05

0.180

Left-hand side

GK1AP06

0.180

Right-hand side

GK1AP07

0.300

Left-hand side

GK1AP08

0.300

4
5

Padlocking devices (3)

For fuse carrier
Rating

Reference
Number of poles

Weight

32 A

3 or 4

Single-phase
protection device
Without

50 A

Without

GK1AV07

0.100

With

GK1AV08

0.110

Without

GK1AV08

0.110

With

GK1AV09

0.070

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

10

DK1CB92 (4)

Weight
kg
0.007

integral

kg

6
7

Links

Tubular links
For fuse carrier
Rating
32 A

Number of poles
3 or 4

50 A

3 or 4

10

DK1EB92 (5)

0.012

125 A

3 or 4

10

DK1FA92 (5)

0.020

(1) Fitted as standard on 32, 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1.
(2) Reference LS1D32005 replaces reference DK1FB005.
(3) For the 125 A rating, use side handles GK1AP07 or GK1AP08.
(4) For use on a neutral circuit, the tubular link can be interlocked with special device LA8D25906 (sold in lots of 10).
(5) 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1 are fitted with an interlocked neutral tubular link as standard.

8
9
10

Selection :
page 4/34

Characteristics :
page 4/35

Dimensions :
page 4/40

Schemes :
page 4/41

4/37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/38

pg2

References

TeSys protection components

Accessories

Accessories for LS1D32 (screw clamp terminals)

Description

Application

Plate for mounting

Combination blocks

Description

Sold in
lots of
1

Unit
reference
LAD311

Weight
kg
0.040

10

GV2AF01

0.020

10

GV2AF3

0.016

10

GV2AF4

0.016

Pitch
mm
45

Reference
GV2G245

Weight
kg
0.036

54

GV2G254

0.038

72

GV2G272

0.042

45

GV2G345

0.058

54

GV2G354

0.060

45

GV2G445

0.077

54

GV2G454

0.085

72

GV2G472

0.094

5 tap-offs

54

GV2G554

0.100

Application

Sold in
lots of
5
1

Unit
reference
GV1G10
GV1G09

Weight
kg
0.005
0.040

LS1D32 and contactor

LC1D09...D38 .
with front faces aligned
Between LS1D32 and
contactor LC1K or LP1K
Between LS1D32 and
contactor LC1D09...D38
Between LS1D32 mounted
on LAD311 and contactor
LC1D09...D38
Application

Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars

2 tap-offs

3 tap-offs

4 tap-offs

Description
Protective end cover
Terminal block
Connection from the top
Cover for terminal block
Padlocking device

For unused busbar outlets

For supply to one or more
GV2G busbar sets
For mounting in modular panels 10
For use with up to 4 padlocks
1
(not supplied).
6 mm shank max

LA9E07
GV2V03

0.005
0.092

1
2
3
4
5
6

Accessories for LS1D323 (spring terminals)

Description
Plate for mounting
Description
Power splitter box, 63 A

Description
Assembly and
power connection kit
for LS1D323 and
LC1D093...D323
Description

Maximum
capacity
16 mm2

Upstream
terminal block
Downstream 16 mm2
terminal block
Cable end

reducer

Application

Reference

LS1D323 and contactor LC1D09...D38 .

with front faces aligned

LAD311

Extension by

Reference

LAD32p

Weight
kg
0.040

Number
of starters
2

LAD322

Weight
kg
0.120

LAD323

0.180

LAD324

0.240

Kit contents

Reference

1 LAD311 plate for mounting LS1D323

2 LAD341 power connection modules
- between LS1D323 and power splitter box
- between LS1D323 and contactor

LAD352

Weight
kg
0.078

Application

Sold in
lots of
1

Unit
reference
LAD3B1

Weight
kg
0.212

LAD331

20

LAD99

Power supply to 1 or 2 .
power splitter boxes
Connection of motor cables
For connection of conductors.
from 1 to 1.5 mm2

7
8
9

0.050

4/39

10

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

Fuse carriers

LS1 D32
Panel
mounting

Mounting
on rail
AM1DP200

Mounting of 4th pole

On left-hand side

On right-hand side

45

22,5

22,5

68,3

GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET, EV, EW, EX, EY

87

89

17,5

Mounting on
pre-slotted
plate AM1P

45

95

29,5

20,5

40,5

a1

7,5

82

7,5

45
7,5

EK
EM
ES
ET
EV
EW
EX
EY

4,5

External operator GK1 AP05 right-hand, GK1 AP06 left-hand

Panel cut-out
5
a1
3P
88

97

4P

141
132

4,5

70

a
3P

106
115

45
98

82

a: with single-phase protection device.

a1: without single-phase protection device.

GK1

53

4P

114

123

70

45

45

45

GK1 E + GK1 AV (padlocking device)

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200

17,5

57

15 15

40

2x5

51,5
38,5

87

84

89

14,2

LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200

13

External operator, RH or LH side

GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET
GK1 EV, EW, EX, EY

30

110
f
29114
29114

GK1 Fp + GK1 AP07 (internal right-hand control)

Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA

a
AF1 EA4

Mounting on rail AM1 DE or ED

120

100/110

47

44
82

6
15

a1
a

7,5

55 35

44

(1)

Fp

a
3P 4P
70 105

10

FK
FM
FS
FT
FV
FW
FX
FY
Selection :
page 4/34

4/40

Characteristics :
page 4/35

4P

156

171

References :
pages 4/36 and 4/37

==

==

55

4P

186
171

a1
3P
121

136

55

a
3P

136
151

= = 12,5

Internal or external control GK1 AP07 RH, AP08LH

Panel cut-out (for external control)
GK1

a1
3P 4P
96 131

a
a1

82

(1) Padlocking device (up to 3 padlocks)

GK1

25

8,5

External operator, RH or LH side

GK1 FK, FM, FS, FT
GK1 FV, FW, FX, FY
Schemes :
page 4/41

30
f

110
f
35114
35114

Schemes

TeSys protection components

Fuse carriers

Fuse carriers without single-phase protection device

13

14

23

24

1
2

21

24

22

11

3
4

21

24

11
22

14

12

11

14

5
6

12

1
2

GK1 FT

13

14

5
6

14

3
4

12

1
2

11

23

4-pole
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

GK1 FM

24

14

13
14

12

5
6

GK1 EK

21

22

13

5
6

14

3
4

14

1
2

23
24

13

13

5
6

14

LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE20p

GK1 FS

GK1 ET

1

5
6

3
4

1
2

3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EM

GK1 FK

1
2

GK1 ES

LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE11p

1
2

3-pole
LS1 D32, D323

Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device

21

24

22

11

5
6

14

3
4

12

1
2

96

98
95

11

14

5
6

23

6
7
8

21

24

22

24

11

14

14

12

5
6

3
4

1
2

1
2

13

95
96

98
95

98

96

95

11

14

5
6

12

3
4

12

3
4

23
24

13
14

5
6

96

3
4

13
14

5
6

3
4

1
2

96

95

GK1 FX

GK1 FY

98

GK1 FW

GK1 EX

95

98

98

1
2

13

96

5
6

14

98

3
4

3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EY

96

GK1 FV

95

1
2

96

GK1 EW

95

98

3-pole
GK1 EV

9
10

Selection :
page 4/34

Characteristics :
page 4/35

References :
pages 4/36 and 4/37

Dimensions :
page 4/40

4/41

Selection guide

TeSys protection components

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

Applications

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and
They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting and switching
They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as
Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system equipment to

Fuse type

NF C or DIN

Rated thermal current (Ith)

32A

50A

Number of poles

3 or
3 + Nc

3 or 4

Fuse size

10 x 38

14 x 51

External operator, padlockable and lockable

Front and RH side

LH side

Direct operator, padlockable

Front

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

690V

Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23 A

32A

50A

63A

100A

125A

160A

250A

400A

630A

Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B

320A

500A

630A

1000A

1250A

1600A

2500A

4000A

6300A 10 000A

Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B

256A

400A

500A

800A

1000A

1280A

2000A

3200A

5040A 8000A

Rated conditional short-circuit current

at 400 V, with gG (gI) fuses

100kA

100kA

100kA

100kA

100kA

100kA

100kA

50kA

100kA

100kA

Switch-disconnector-fuse type references

GS1
DD

GSp
F

GSp
G

GSp
J

GSp
GSp
K
L
or KK or LL

GSp
N

GSp
QQ

GS2
S

GS2
V

Pages

4/53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/42

63A

100A

125A

160A

250A

400A

630A

1250A

T00C

22 x 58

22 x 58
T00

T0
T00

T1

T2

T3

T4

RH side

Front

1000A

overcurrent protection.
off main circuits (including Emergency stop).
padlocking and interlocking.
provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.

1
2
3

BS

32A

32A

3 or
3 + Nc

3 or 4

A1

A1

63A

100A

160A

200A

250A

315A

400A

630A

800A

1250A

4
A2-A3

A4 .
y 31 mm

A4
B1-B2

B1-B2

B1B3

B1B3

B1B4

C1-C2

C1C3

D1

Front and RH side

Front

Front

690 V

32A

32A

63A

100A

160A

200A

250A

315A

400A

630A

800A

1000A

320A

320A

630A

1000A

1600A

2000A

2500A

3150A

4000A

6300A

8000A

10 000A

256A

256A

500A

800A

1280A

1600A

2000A

2520A

3200A

5040A

6400A

8000A

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

80kA

GS1
DDB

GS2
DB

GS2
GB

GS2
JB

GS2
LB
or LLB

GS2
MMB

GS2
NB

GS2
PPB

GS2
QQB

GS2
SB

GS2
TB

GS2
VB

6
7
8

4/55

9
10

4/43

TeSys protection components

Presentation

Switch-disconnector-fuses.
32 to 1250 A, TeSys GS

Presentation

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking or making, safe

isolation and overcurrent protection of all low voltage electrical circuits.

They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting
and switching off main circuits (including Emergency stop).

Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system
equipment to provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming
supply of equipment, generators or motor starters.

GS1 DD3

Conforming to standard IEC 60947-3, TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses are

available for use with:
b NFC or DIN fuses,
b BS fuses.

3
4

A range for use with UL fuses, specifically for the North-American market and
meeting the requirements of standards UL98 and CSA 22.2 Nr.4, is also available.
The TeSys GS range includes sturdy and compact handles. These handles are
easy to install and operate and are available in the following options:
b Direct operator.
b External front and RH side-mounted operator.
b External LH side-mounted operator.
b Padlockable with up to 3 padlocks. The door is locked when the handle is
padlocked.
b Locking by means of a key-operated lock (option).
b With door interlock in the closed position. When in the Closed position, the door
can be opened by means of a tool to be used only by authorised personnel.
Locking is automatically re-established when the door is closed.
b Black/Grey or Yellow/Red for the Emergency stop function.
b IP 65 or IP 55.

GS2 N3
+ handle GS2 AH540

This range is completed by auxiliary contacts:

b Two auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts, configurable
and common to all ratings.
b Auxiliary contacts GS1 AN, which are suitable for isolation.
Reversibility of these contacts to convert an N/C contact into an N/O contact and vice
versa.
b Control circuit test facility, off-load, with auxiliary contacts GS1AM110,
GS1AM101 or GS1 ANT, used in conjunction with handles GS2 AHT.
b Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts.

6
7

GS2 S3
+ handle GS2AH550

Functions

Breaking
b Quick break and quick tripping mechanism, independent of the fuses.
Opening and closing independent of operator speed.
On-load making and breaking of resistive, inductive or mixed resistive and
inductive circuits.
Quality and durability of mechanical and electrical lives.

b Utilisation categories AC-23/690 V and DC-23/440 V.

Durable performance in severe duty applications.
Direct control of motors.

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

4/44

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

Presentation (continued)

TeSys protection components

Switch-disconnector-fuses.
32 to 1250 A, TeSys GS

Functions (continued)

Isolation
b Upstream and downstream breaking of fuses for all ratings.
Double break isolation of the power circuit and safe replacement of fuses.
Total isolation of power and control circuits to ensure safety of persons and
equipment.

b GS1 AN auxiliary contacts.

Control circuit isolation.
b Contacts forced open in the event of welding.
Fully visible break. Open position cannot be indicated unless all contacts are
actually open.
Safe opening and clear indication of Open state of switch-disconnector.
b Visible isolation distance between the open contacts.
Visible break (630 to 1250 A ratings).

2
3

Protection
b Addition of gG (gl) fuses.
b Overload and short-circuit protection of distribution circuits and power switching
circuits without significant current peak. .
b Addition of aM fuses (associated with thermal overload relays).
Type 2 coordination (Iq > 50 kA) for motor starters consisting of fuses, contactors,
relays.
Short-circuit protection of motors and equipment.
b Addition of quick-blow fuses.
Protection of electronic variable speed controllers and soft starters.

4
5

b Blown fuse detection device.

Protection against single-phasing.
b Conditional short-circuit withstand voltage of 100 kA for all ratings.
Equivalence between the breaking capacity of the fuses and the ability of the
switch-disconnector-fuse to withstand this maximum capacity.
Use in installations where very high short-circuit currents can develop.
Handles with padlocking facility, with door interlock.
Handle locking by means of a key-operated lock (option).
Door interlock in Closed position.
Operator shafts padlockable with door open.
Fuse covers fitted as standard on all ratings.
Protection against accidental contact.
Protection of persons.
b
b
b
b
b

6
7

b IP 20 protection with terminal shrouds

Information and testing
b Up to 12 auxiliary contacts.
Early break, Open and Closed position signalling, and blown fuse signalling.
Use in automation systems.
b Control circuit test facility, off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110,
GS1AM101 or GS1ANT in conjunction with handles GS2AHT. .
In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.

8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/45

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Type

1
2
3

GS1DD

GSpF

GSpG

GSpJ

Switch-disconnector-fuse characteristics
Environment

Conforming to standards

Switch-disconnector-fuses

IEC 60947-3

Circuit-breakers

IEC 60269-1 and 2

Product certifications

ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending)

Degree of protection
conforming to IEC 60529

With terminal covers

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 40+ 80

Operation

- 20+ 70

Body

960

960

Fuse cover

850

32

50

63

100

10 x 38

14 x 51

T00C

22 x 58

Flame resistance
conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

IP 20

Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
for ambient temperature y 40 C

4
5
6

Fuse size
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

800

750

750

750

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

a 400 V

32

50

63

100

a 500 V

32

50

63

100

a 690 V

32

50

63

100 (3)

Cat. DC-23A/B
(1)

c 440 V (2)

20

40

40

100

Cat. AC-23A/B
(1)

a 400 V

kW

15

25

30

51

a 500 V

kW

18.5

33

40

63

a 690 V

kW

25

45

55

90

I rms at a 400 V with .

protection by gG (gl) fuses

kA

100

100

100

100

Rating of associated fuses

32

50

63

100

Peak value of permissible

current (dynamic
short-circuit withstand)

Conforming to
IEC 60269-1

kA

5.5

7.6

10.6

20

Rated making capacity

I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B

320

500

630

1000

Rated breaking capacity

I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B

256

400

500

800

Mechanical durability

Number of operating cycles

20 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

Electrical durability

Number of operating cycles .

cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1)

1500/300

1500/300

1500/300

1500/300

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

mm2

2.5/16

6/25

10/25

25/95

Bars (max width)

mm

20

N.m

3.2

3.2

12

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B

(1)

Rated operational power

Rated conditional
short-circuit current

7
8
9

a 400 V

Tightening torque

(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles

(2) 2 poles in series per phase.
(3) With terminal covers.
(4) Poles not juxtaposed.

10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/46

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

pg3

GSpK

GSpKK

GSpLL

GSpL

GSpN

GSpQQ

GS2S

GS2V

IEC 60947-3
IEC 60269-1 and 2
ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending)

IP 20
- 40+ 80
- 20+ 70
960

850

125

125

160

160

250

400

630

1250

22 x 58

T00

T00

T0

T1

T2

T3

T4

750

750

750

750

750

800

1000

1000

12

12

125

125

160

160

250

400

630

1000

125

125

160

160

250

315

500

800

100 (3)

100 (3)

125 (3)

125 (3)

250 (3)

250/315

315/400

630

100

100

125

125

200

200/315 (4)

400/630 (4)

1000

63

63

80

80

132

220

355

560

90

90

110

110

160

220

355

560

80

80

110

110

220

220/295

295/400

400/475

100

100

100 (50)

100

100

50

100

100

125

125

125 (160)

160

250

400

630

1250

20

20

22.7

20

32.5

40

70

90

1250

1250

1600

1600

2500

4000

6300

10 000

1000

1000

1280

1280

2000

3200

5040

8000

10 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

8000

5000

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

500/100

35/95

35/95

50/95

50/95

95/240

185/240

2 x 150 / 2 x 300

/ 4 x 185

20

20

20

20

32

45

63

80

12

12

12

12

25

25

44

44

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/47

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A, for use with BS fuses

Type

1
2
3

GS1DDB

GS2DB

GS2GB

GS2JB

Switch-disconnector-fuse characteristics
Environment

Conforming to standards

Switch-disconnector-fuses

IEC 60947-3

Circuit-breakers

IEC 60269-1 and 2

Product certifications

ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending)

Degree of protection
conforming to IEC 60529

With terminal covers

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 40+ 80

Operation

- 20+ 70

Body

960

Fuse cover

32

32

63

100

A1

A1

A2-A3

A4 y 31 mm

Flame resistance
conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

IP 20

850

Pole characteristics

4
5
6
7
8
9

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C
Fuse size
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

800

750

750

750

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

a 400 V

32

32

63

100

a 500 V

32

32

63

100

a 690 V

32

32

63

100 (4)

Cat. DC-23A/B
(1)

c 440 V (2)

20

20

40

100

Cat. AC-23A/B
(1)

a 400 V

kW

15

15

30

51

a 500 V

kW

18.5

18.5

40

63

a 690 V

kW

25

25

55

90

I rms at a 400 V with .

protection by gG (gl) fuses

kA

80

80

80

80

Rating of associated fuses

32

32

63

100

Peak value of permissible

current (dynamic
short-circuit withstand)

Conforming to
IEC 60269-1

kA

5.5

10.6

20

Rated making capacity

I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B

320

320

630

1000

Rated breaking capacity

I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B

256

256

500

800

Mechanical durability

Number of operating cycles

20 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

Electrical durability

Number of operating cycles .

cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1)

1500/300

1500/300

1500/300

1500/300

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

mm2

2.5/16

6/25

10/25

25/95

Bars (max width)

mm

20

N.m

3.2

3.2

12

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B

(1)

Rated operational power

Rated conditional
short-circuit current

a 400 V

Tightening torque

(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles

(2) 2 poles in series per phase.
(3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS2 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS2 LLB with A4 fuses.
(4) With terminal covers.
(5) Poles not juxtaposed.

10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/48

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

pg5

GS2LB or LLB (3) GS2MMB

GS2NB

GS2PPB

GS2QQB

GS2SB

GS2TB

GS2VB

IEC 60947-3
IEC 60269-1 and 2
ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending)

IP 20

- 40+ 80
- 20+ 70

960
850

160

200

250

315

400

630

800

1250

A4. B1-B2 (3)

B1-B2

B1B3

B1B3

B1B4

C1-C2

C1C3

D1

750

750

750

800

800

1000

1000

1000

12

12

12

160

200

250

315

400

630

800

1000

160

200

250

315

315

500

630

800

125 (4)

200/160 (4)

250 (4)

250/315 (4)

250/315

315/400

630

630

125

200

200

200

200/315 (5)

400/630 (5)

800

1000

80

100

132

150

220

355

450

560

110

140

160

220

220

355

450

560

110

150/185

220

220/295

220/295

295/400

400

400/475

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

160

200

250

315

400

630

800

1250

22.7

32.5

32.5

40

40

70

80

90

1600

2000

2500

3150

4000

6300

8000

10 000

1280

1600

2000

2520

3200

5040

6400

8000

10 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

10 000

8000

8000

5000

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

1000/200

500/100

500/100

50/95

95/240

95/240

185/240

185/240

2 x 150 / 2 x 300

2 x 185 / 2 x 300

/ 4 x 185

20

32

32

45

45

63

63

80

12

25

25

25

25

44

44

44

4
5
6
7
8
9

pg5

10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/49

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Auxiliary contacts for .

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses

GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics

1
2

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

16

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

127 V: 5; 230 V: 4 ; 400 /415 V : 3 ; 440 V : 2

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Fuse protection

gG

Cabling

Mechanical: 1 000 000

Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000
A

6 max

mm

Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

3
4
5
6

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

20

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

127 V: 12; 230 V: 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6

Cat. DC-13

48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Fuse protection

gG

16 max

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

mm2

Min: 1.5; max: 10

Mechanical: 30 000
Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000

GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

10

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

Mechanical: 5 000 000

Electrical: cat. AC-15: 1 000 000
mm2

Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5

GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

16

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

230 V: 4; 400 V: 3

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Cabling

Mechanical: 30 000
Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000
mm

Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35

9
10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/50

References:
page 4/55

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A, for use with BS fuses

GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

16

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400/415 V: 3; 440 V: 2

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Fuse protection

gG

Cabling

Mechanical: 1 000 000

Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000
A

6 max

mm

Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

20

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

127 V: 12; 230 V: 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6

Cat. DC-13

48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Fuse protection

gG

16 max

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

mm2

Min: 1.5; max: 10

Mechanical: 30 000
Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000

GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

10

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Cabling

Cable (c.s.a. min/max)

Mechanical: 5 000 000

Electrical: cat. AC-15: 1 000 000
mm2

Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5

GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

for ambient temperature y 40 C

16

Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15

230 V: 4; 400 V: 3

Cat. DC-13

24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4

Durability

Number of operating cycles

Cabling

Mechanical: 30 000
Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000
mm

Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35

9
10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

References:
page 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/51

Pg2
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p

GS1 AF

GS1 APp

2
3
4

GS1 AN11

50400 A - External operator

6
GS1 AN22

GS2 AE2p

GS1 AMp

8
GS2 AE2p

GS2 AH220
GS2 AH240

10

GS2 AH51p
GS2 AH53p

4/52

GS1 APp

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses

532783

Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating

Fuse size

Number of poles

Reference

Weight
kg

For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators

32
GS1 DD3

50

14 x 51

63

Size 00C (2)

100

568664

10 x 38

125

22 x 58
22 x 58
Size 00

GS2 F3

160

Size 00

568665

Size 0
250

GS2 N3

400

Size 2

630

Size 3

1250

Size 4

568666

GS1DD3

3 + Nc (1)

GS1DD4

0.500

GS2F3

0.800

GS2F4

1.000

GS2G3

1.000

GS2G4

1.300

GS2J3

1.500

GS2J4

2.000

GS2K3

1.500

GS2K4

2.000

GS2KK3

1.500

GS2KK4

2.000

GS2LL3

1.800

GS2LL4

2.300

GS2L3

1.800

GS2L4

2.300

GS2N3

3.200

GS2N4

4.500

GS2QQ3

4.800

GS2QQ4

GS2S3

16.000

GS2S4

20.000

GS2V3

25.000

GS2V4

30.000

GS1DD3

3 + Nc (1)

GS1DD4

0.500

GS2FG3

0.800

GS2FG4

1.000

GS2GG3

1.000

GS2GG4

1.300

GS2JG3

1.500

GS2JG4

2.000

GS2KG3

1.500

GS2KG4

2.000

GS2KKG3

1.500

GS2KKG4

2.000

GS2LLG3

1.800

GS2LLG4

2.300

GS2LG3

1.800

GS2LG4

2.300

GS2NG3

3.200

GS2NG4

4.500

GS2QQG3

4.800

GS2QQG4

GS2SG3

16.000

GS2SG4

20.000

GS2VG3

25.000

GS2VG4

30.000

0.460

10 x 38

50

14 x 51

63

Size 00C (2)

100
125

22 x 58
22 x 58
Size 00

160

Size 00
Size 0

250

Size 1

400

Size 2

630

Size 3

1250

Size 4

2
3
4

6.100

For external LH side-mounted operators

32

GS2 L4

Size 1

0.460

6
7
8

6.100

1) Nc = Switched neutral.
2) Compact fuses for German market.

9
10

Presentation :
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics :
pages 4/46 to 4/49

Dimensions :
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes :
page 4/67

4/53

Pg4
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p

GS1 AF

GS1 APp
GS1 AM1

GS1 AM2

3
4
50400 A - Direct operator

5
GS1 AN11

6
7
8
GS1 AN22

9
GS1 APp
GS1 AH01
GS1 AH02

10

4/54

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses

568667

Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating

Fuse size

Type of operator

Number of poles

Reference

Weight
kg

For direct operator

32

GS1 JD3

50

63

510761

100

125

10 x 38

14 x 51

Size 00C (2)

22 x 58

22 x 58

Size 00

GS2 S3
with handle
GS2AHp50 or
GS2AHp60

160

Size 00

Size 0

250

400

630

1250

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Front

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

RH side

Front

Front

GS1DD3

0.460

3 + Nc (1)

GS1DD4

0.500

GS1FD3

0.800

GS1FD4

1.000

GS1GD3

1.000

GS1GD4

1.300

GS1JD3

1.500

GS1JD4

2.000

GS1KD3

1.500

GS1KD4

2.000

GS1KKD3

1.500

GS1KKD4

2.000

GS1LLD3

1.800

GS1LLD4

2.300

GS1LD3

1.800

GS1LD4

2.300

GS1ND3

3.200

GS1ND4

4.500

GS1QQD3

4.800

GS1QQD4

6.100

GS2S3

16.000

GS2S4

20.000

GS2V3

25.000

GS2V4

30.000

1
2
3
4
5
6

1) Nc = Switched neutral.
2) Compact fuses for German market.

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics :
pages 4/46 to 4/49

Dimensions :
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes :
page 4/67

4/55

32 A - Direct or external operator

1
2
3

GS2 AE8p

GS1 AH103

GS2 AH51p

5
6
7
GS1 AMp

GS1 AD10

8
GS1 AMp11

GS2 AE8p

9
10

GS2 AH220

4/56

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A, for use with BS fuses

510961

Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with BS fuses

Switch rating

Fuse size

Number of poles

Reference

Weight
kg

For external front-mounted and RH or LH side-mounted operator

For direct front-mounted operator

32

A1

GS1DDB3

GS1DDB3

0.500

3 + Nc (1)

GS1DDB4

0.540

GS2DB3

0.800

GS2DB4

1.000

GS2GB3

1.000

GS2GB4

1.300

GS2JB3

1.500

GS2JB4

2.000

GS2LLB3

1.800

GS2LLB4

2.300

GS2LB3

1.800

GS2LB4

2.300

GS2MMB3

3.200

GS2MMB4

4.500

GS2NB3

3.200

GS2NB4

4.500

GS2PPB3

4.800

GS2PPB4

6.100

GS2QQB3

4.800

GS2QQB4

6.100

GS2SB3 (2)

16.000

GS2SB4 (2)

20.000

GS2TB3 (2)

17.000

GS2TB4 (2)

21.500

GS2VB3 (2)

25.000

GS2VB4 (2)

30.000

For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators (2)

32

510967

63

100

160

GS2GB3

A1

A2-A3

A4 y 31 mm

A4

B1-B2

200

250

315

400

630

800

1250

B1-B2

B1B3

B1B3

B1B4

C 1-C2

C 1C3

D1

2
3
4
5
6
7

(1) Nc: switched neutral.

(2) 630, 800 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses can also be fitted with a direct front-mounted operator.

8
9
10
Presentation :
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics :
pages 4/46 to 4/49

Dimensions :
pages 4/62 to 4/66

Schemes :
page 4/67

4/57

GS2 AF6p, AF7p

GS1 AF

1
2

GS2 APp

3
6301250 A - External operator

GS1 AN22

5
6

GS1 AN11

GS2 AE5p
GS1 AMp

7
GS2 AE5p

8
GS2 AH260

9
GS2 AH550
GS2 AH570

10

GS2 APp

4/58

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A .
Auxiliary contacts

568473

Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1) (2) (3)
Switch rating

Contact type

Type of operator

Reference

1 N/O

External, front or side-mounted (4)

GS1AM110

0.200

1 N/C

External, front or side-mounted (4)

GS1AM101

0.200

A
321250

kg

Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3) (5)

Switch rating
GS1 AM1pp

Weight

Contact type

Type of operator

Reference

Weight
kg

568476

Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts

501250

GS1AN11

0.132

1 N/C + 1 N/O

External, front or RH side-mounted

Direct
External, LH side

GS1AN11G

0.131

2 N/C + 2 N/O

External, front or RH side-mounted

Direct

GS1AN22

0.238

External, LH side

GS1AN22G

0.252

Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)

50400
GS1 ANppp

1 N/C + 1 N/O

External, front side-mounted

GS1ANT11

0.153

2 N/C + 2 N/O

External, front side-mounted

GS1ANT22

0.258

Auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts

Switch rating

Contact type

Type of operator

Reference

1 C/O

GS1AM111

0.080

2 C/O

GS1AM211

0.080

1 C/O

Direct, RH side

GS1AM1

0.023

2 C/O

Direct, RH side

GS1AM2

0.035

568474

A
32
50400

Contact type

Switch rating

Fuse size

Number of poles

Reference

50

14 x 51

3 or 4

GS1AF1

0.025

100 and 125

22 x 58

GS1AF23

0.033

GS1AF24

0.037

GS1AF33

0.036

GS1AF34

0.030

GS1AF43

0.038

GS1AF44

0.032

GS2AF63

0.046

GS2AF64

0.100

GS2AF73

0.080

GS2AF74

0.045

3 or 4

GS1AF

0.015

A
GS1 AMp11

1st C/O

568475

250 and 400

630
1250
2nd C/O
GS1 AMp

Weight
kg

160

501250

Size 0
Size 1 and Size 2
Size 3
Size 4

(1) For 32 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow:

- early break and O and I position signalling,
- O and I position signalling,
- O, I and Test position signalling,
- Test position signalling.
For 50 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break,
- O and I position signalling,
- O, I and Test position signalling,
- Test position signalling.
For 630 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling,
Standard

With additional
bracket

Reference of additional bracket

32

4+4

GS1AD10

50160

4+4

GS2AD20

200400

8+4

GS2AD20

6301250

Characteristics :
pages 4/46 to 4/49

Dimensions :
pages 4/62 to 4/66

4
5
6
7

(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 and GS1ANTpp
only allow the text function with external handles GS2 AHTppp.
(4) These auxiliary contacts can also be used with 630, 800 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with a direct frontmounted operator.
(5) Reversible add-on attachments for converting an N/C contact to an N/O contact and vice versa.
(6) For striker fuses (BS fuses are not available with striker).

Presentation :
pages 4/44 and 4/45

(2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts:

Switch rating
A

Weight
kg

Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts for use with NF C and DIN fuses (6)

Schemes :
page 4/67

4/59

10

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A .

538656

Handles for external operators

Handles for external operator

Switch rating

1
GS2 AHp10
GS2 AHp20

3263

100400

630 and 800

1250

Reference

Weight
kg

IP 65

GS2AH510

IP55

GS2AH515

0.200

Red/Yellow

IP 65

GS2AH520

0.200

Black/Grey

IP 65

GS2AH530

0.240

IP55

GS2AH535

0.240

Red/Yellow

IP 65

GS2AH540

0.240

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH550

0.280

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH560

0.280

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH570

0.390

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH580

0.390

Black/Grey

0.200

Handles for front-mounted external operators with test facility (3), padlockable and lockable in "O"
position (1). Door interlock in I position (2)
GS2 AHp30
GS2 AHp40

3263
100400

538654

Degree of protection

Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable and lockable in position O (1)
Door interlock in I position (2)

538655

Handle colour

Black/Grey

IP 65

GS2AHT510

0.200

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AHT520

0.200

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AHT530

0.240

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AHT540

0.240

Handles for external RH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)
3263

100400

6301250

3263
GS2 AHp50
GS2 AHp60

100400

538653

6301250

GS2AH210

0.200

IP55

GS2AH215

0.200

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH220

0.200

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH230

0.240

IP55

GS2AH235

0.240

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH240

0.240

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH250

0.280

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH260

0.280

Black/Grey

IP 65

GS2AH310

0.200

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH320

0.200

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH330

0.240

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH340

0.240

Black/Grey

IP65

GS2AH350

0.280

Red/Yellow

IP65

GS2AH360

0.280

Reference

Shafts for external operators

Switch rating

Shaft length

Shaft cross section

mm

mm

32

200

5x5

GS2AE82

0.100

320

5x5

GS2AE8

0.125

400

5x5

GS2AE81

0.150

200

10 x 10

GS2AE22

0.160

320

10 x 10

GS2AE2

0.280

400

10 x 10

GS2AE21

0.320

200

12 x 12

GS2AE52

0.240

320

12 x 12

GS2AE5

0.380

400

12 x 12

GS2AE51

0.420

50400

6301250

9
10

IP 65

Handles for external LH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)

6
7

Black/Grey

kg

(1) Lockable with device GS2AX1, to be ordered separately.

(2) Door interlock override by means of a tool.
(3) The Test facility allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 or
GS1ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.
GS2 AHp70
GS2 AHp80

4/60

Weight

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, .
32 to 1250 A
Handles for external operators
Accessories

568668

Handles for external operators

Switch rating

Type of operator

Handle colour

Reference

Weight
kg

Handles for direct operators, padlockable

GS1 AH01

32

Front

Black

GS1AH103

0.060

50 and 63

RH side

Black

GS1AH01

0.060

100400

RH side

Black

GS1AH02

0.100

630 and 800

Front

Black

GS2AH104

0.480

1250

Front

Black

GS2AH105

0.600

Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates

Switch rating

Number of poles

Reference

50 and 63

3 or 4

(1)

100160

GS1AP33

0.073

GS1AP34

0.180

GS1AP43

0.240

GS1AP44

0.280

GS2AP63

0.520

GS2AP64

0.780

GS2AP83

0.680

GS2AP84

0.840

568669

630800
1250

Devices for locking fuse covers in "I" position (2)

Weight

Fuse size

Number of poles

Reference

50

14 x 51

3 or 4

(3)

63

Size 00C

3 or 4

GS1AV1

0.012

100160

22 x 58, Size 00

3 or 4

GS1AV2

0.040

160

Size 0

GS1AV33

0.026

GS1AV34

0.010

250

Size 1

GS1AV53

0.026

GS1AV54

0.010

GS1AV73

0.027

GS1AV74

0.033

GS1 AH02

400

Size 2

Reference

50 and 63

3 or 4

(4)

100160

GS1AW33

0.179

GS1AW34

0.357

GS1AW43

0.236

GS1AW44

0.480

Description

Reference

Device for RONIS EL11AP key lock .

(lock to be ordered separately).

GS2AX1

A
321250

321250

Flat mounting kit

Switch rating

Description

Degree of protection

Reference

Allows a new GS2pp handle .

to be fitted on existing cut-outs

IP 65

GS2AH001

Weight
0.200

Weight
kg

Description

Reference

The kit, for use with a front-mounted external handle,

includes:
b a 200 mm shaft, cross section 10 x 10 mm,
b an adapter plate

GS2 ADL2

A
50400

Weight

kg

Height compensation plate for external handles

Switch rating
A

kg

External handle locking device

Switch rating

Weight

Number of poles

200250

kg

Cage terminals for connection of bare cables (without lug)

Switch rating

kg

200400

Switch rating

0.020

Weight
kg
0.300

(1) For these ratings, the switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with terminal covers as standard.
(2) For NF C and DIN switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with right-hand mounted direct operator.
(3) For this rating, switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with a cover locking device as standard.
(4) For these ratings, switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with cage terminals as standard.

4/61

10

TeSys protection components

Dimensions

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

GS1DD (32 A)

Direct front-mounted operator

GS1DD

GS1DDB
37,5 15
5,2

44

35

96

19

8,5

21,5

65

2x5
17

21,5

98

8,5

79,5

2x5

External front-mounted operator

Door cut-out
37,5 15

102 min. (1)

44

40

4x7

78

35

28
Test

49

70

14

37

90

65
O

GS1DDB

Door cut-out
37,5 15

102 min. (1)

40

28

I
Test

49

14

70

4x7

78

35

44

37

90

65
O

(1) With 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 130 mm.

(2) With 3 or 4 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 155 mm.

5,2

83

GS1DD

37,5 15

6,5

45

79,5

98

45

65

6,5

14

19

14

44

112

96

112

98

External RH side-mounted operator

GS1DD

Door cut-out
I

70

36 min.

96

6,5

44

90

28

4x7

49

40

37

70

52,5
GS1DDB

Door cut-out
I
70

19

6,5

36 min.

96

44

90

78

28

4x7

49

78

49

19

49

10

40

Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/62

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

37

70

52,5
References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Schemes:
page 4/67

TeSys protection components

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

GS1pp (50400A)

Direct RH side-mounted operator

GS1FD (50A), GD (63A), JD (100A), KD, KKD (125A), LD, LLD (160A), ND (250A) and QQD (400A)
J

c
(4)

Q
(5)

K(2)

R1

b1

M
b2

(1)

70
(3)

G1

P1

a1

31

c1
c2

GS1

a1

b1

b2

c1

c2

G1

P1

R1

3P

118

118

87

134

27

5.4

106

31

6.5

27

33.5

4P

145

118

87

134

27

5.4

106

31

6.5

27

33.5

3P

133

118

159

116.5 134

145

32

5.4

106

36

6.5

32

36

4P

165

118

159

116.5 134

145

32

5.4

106

36

6.5

32

36

3P

150

108

162

268

116

173

36

5.4

127

40

44

141

36

38

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

4P

186

144

162

268

116

173

36

5.4

127

40

44

141

36

38

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

KKD,
LLD

3P

150

108

162

268

141

126.5 173

193

36

5.4

127

40

44

141

36

38

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

4P

186

144

162

268

141

126.5 173

193

36

5.4

127

40

44

141

36

38

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

LD

3P

192

136

162

268

174

136.5 173

229

50

5.4

140

54

44

141

50

45

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

4P

242

172

162

268

174

136.5 173

229

50

5.4

140

54

44

141

50

45

20

19.5

2.5

8.5

3P

253

180

195

345

185

146

173

251

60

6.4

162

64

65

166

60

81

32

19.5

2.5

11

4P

313

240

195

345

185

146

173

251

60

6.4

162

64

65

166

60

81

32

19.5

2.5

11

3P

271

192

205

355

200

149

173

260

66

6.4

172

70

65

175

66

86

50

20

11

4P

337

258

205

355

200

149

173

260

66

6.4

172

70

65

175

66

86

50

20

11

FD
GD
JD, KD

ND
QQD

(1) Terminal cover.

(2) Mounting on 5 rail only for GS1 FD and GS1 GD (50 and 63 A).
(3) Protective screen, lockable in I position.
(4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp.
(5) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AMp.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/63

TeSys protection components

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

GS2pp (50400A)

External front and RH side-mounted operator

GS2DB (32 A), F (50A), G, GB, JB (63A), J (100A), K, KK (125A), L, LL, LB, LLB (160A), MMB (200 A), N, NB (250A), PPB (315 A),
QQ and QQB (400A)
E min.

a
c

J
(1)

31

J1

b2
(4)

J2

G1

(3)

M2

b2
b3

P2
P3

45

c1

6
7
8

GS2

b1

b2

b3

c1

E min. G

G1

J1

J2

M1

M2

P1

P2

P3

F, DB 3P

121

118

70

85

87 (5)

153

100 (5) 27

5.4

106

31

45

18

15

27

59

12

4P

148

118

70

85

87 (5)

153

100 (5) 27

5.4

106

31

45

18

15

27

59

12

G, GB 3P

136

118

70

159

116.5 (6) 145

125

32

5.4

106

36

50

18

15

32

59

12

4P

168

118

70

159

116.5 (6) 145

125

32

5.4

106

36

50

18

15

32

59

12

J, JB, 3P
K
4P

148

162

268

125

141

116 (6)

187

135

36

5.4

127

40

54

18

141

41

36

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

184

162

268

125

141

116 (6)

187

135

36

5.4

127

40

54

18

141

41

36

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

KK,
LL

3P

148

162

268

125

141

126.5 (6) 193

135

36

5.4

127

40

54

18

141

41

36

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

4P

184

162

268

125

141

126.5 (6) 193

135

36

5.4

127

40

54

18

141

41

36

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

L, LB, 3P
LLB 4P

190

162

268

125

174

136.5

229

145

50

5.4

140

54

64

18

141

41

50

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

240

162

268

125

174

136.5

229

145

50

5.4

140

54

64

18

141

41

50

62

2.5

19.5 20

8.5

MMB, 3P
NB, N 4P

234

195

345

125

185

146

251

154

60

6.4

162

64

86

25

166

52

17

60

84

2.5

19.5 32

11

294

195

345

125

185

146

251

154

60

6.4

162

64

86

25

166

52

17

60

84

2.5

19.5 32

11

PPB, 3P
QQB, 4P
QQ

252

205

355

125

200

149

260

157

66

6.4

172

70

91

25

175

54

14.5 66

84

20

50

11

318

205

355

125

200

149

260

157

66

6.4

172

70

91

25

175

54

14.5 66

84

20

50

11

(1) Terminal cover.

(2) Rear access connector plates (option).
(3) 1 to 8 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp.
(4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp.
(5) 1 auxiliary contact GS1 AM1pp: + 23.5 mm, 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: + 47 mm.
(6) 132 mm with 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp.
Door cut-out
For external RH side-mounted operator

For external front-mounted operator

40
4x7
28

90
O

10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/64

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

90
O

37

65

4x7

I
Test

37

28

78

40

45

P2
P2

M1

b1

20 min.
230 max.

P1

(2)

Schemes:
page 4/67

78

TeSys protection components

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

GS2pp (6301250A)

Direct front-mounted operator

GS2S, SB (630A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250A)

E min.

a
c

G
155

34

79,5

235,5

11

3
300

260

250

471

(3)

235,5

188

90

22

(1)

85,5

13

(2)

59

c1
GS2
S, SB, TB
V, VB

c1

E min.

3P

364

300

250

380

265

284

94

51

65

4P

458

300

250

380

265

378

94

51

65

3P

442

355

289

295

304

362

120

77

88

4P

562

355

289

295

304

482

120

77

88

(1) Handle GS2AH104 for GS2S, GS2SB and GS2TB.

(2) Terminal cover.
(3) Rear access connector plates (GS2V and GS2VB).
Handle GS2AH105 for GS2V and GS2VB (direct front-mounted operator)

Connector plates for GS2V and GS2VB

40
77

25
20

13

330

165

165

103

28

10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Schemes:
page 4/67

4/65

TeSys protection components

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

GS2pp (6301250A) (continued)

External front and RH side-mounted operator

GS2S, SB (630A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250A)
E min.

210

34
61

22

15 min.

210

61

GS2

S, SB, TB
Handle GS2 AH570 or GS2 AH580 for GS2V and GS2VB (external
front-mounted operator)

V, VB

E min.

3P

297

265

4P

297

265

3P

350

304

4P

350

304

350

165

165

90
O

39

60

Door cut-out
For external front-mounted operator

For external RH side-mounted operator

28

10

Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

4/66

90
37

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

90

4x7

40

37

78

4x7

28

40

Schemes:
page 4/67

78

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
schemes

TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses,.
32 to 1250 A

Dimensions with auxiliary contacts

GS1 AM111, GS1 AM211

GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101

98

18

2
24

24

65

Schemes
3-pole GS

4-pole GS

32 to 1250 A

32 A

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

7/L3

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

7/L3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

8/T3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

8/T3

50 to 1250 A

4
5

Auxiliary contacts

21

24

22

14

12

24

21

22

14

41
42

12

33
34

11

21
22

13
14

2 C/O

21
22

1 C/O

2 N/C + 2 N/O

13

GS1 AFp

1 N/C + 1 N/O

14

GS1 ANpp

11

14
11

12

2 C/O

p1

GS1 AM211 and GS1 AM2

1 C/O

p2

GS1 AM111 and GS1 AM1

1 N/C

p3

GS1 AM101

1 N/O

p4

GS1 AM110

8
9
10
Presentation:
pages 4/44 and 4/45

Characteristics:
pages 4/46 to 4/51

References:
pages 4/52 to 4/57

Dimensions:
pages 4/62 to 4/66

4/67

TeSys protection components

References

Switch-disconnector-fuses .
for the North American market,.
conforming to UL and CSA standards, .
30 to 800 A, TeSys GS

All TeSysGS switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market are certified UL98 and CSA 22.2 N 4.

Compact switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses

538735

Switch
rating

Fuse
size

Number
of poles

Reference

Weight
kg

For front-mounted external operators

For front-mounted direct operators

30
GS1 DU3

CC.

GS1DDU3

0.600

J.

GS1DU3

0.672

Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses

Switch
rating

Number
of poles

Reference

Weight
kg

For front-mounted external operators (1)

CC.

GS2EEU3

1.400

J.

GS2EU3

2.100

60

J.

GS2GU3

2.217

100

J.

GS2JU3

2.761

200

J.

GS2MU3

4.166

400

J.

GS2QU3

5.400

600

J.

GS2SU3

29.000

800

L.

GS2TU3

20.860

510979

30

4
GS2MU3

Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses,

with handle for direct operator

510959

Fuse
size

Switch
rating

Fuse
size

Number
of poles

Type of
operator

Reference

Weight
kg

For direct operator

30

GS1EERU30

CC

RH side-mounted
GS1AH01

GS1EERU20

0.991

CC.

RH side-mounted
GS1AH01

GS1EERU30

1.218

(1) 630 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses can also be fitted with a front-mounted direct operator.

8
9
10

4/68

TeSys protection components

References (continued)

Switch-disconnector-fuses .
for the North American market,.
conforming to UL and CSA standards, .
30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Auxiliary contacts

568473

Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1), (2), (3)
Switch
rating

Contact
type

Type of
operator

Reference

kg

30 Compact

GS1 AM1pp

30800

1 N/O.

External, front or side-mounted

GS1AM110

0.200

1N/C.

External, front or side-mounted

GS1AM101

0.200

1 N/O.

External, front or side-mounted (4)

GS1AM110

0.200

1 N/C

External, front or side-mounted (4)

GS1AM101

0.200

Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3), (5)

Switch
rating

Contact
type

Type of
operator

Reference

A
568476

Weight

kg
1 N/C + 1 N/O

External, front or RH side-mounted

Direct

GS1AN11

0.132

2 N/C + 2 N/O

External, front or RH side-mounted

Direct

GS1AN22

0.238

Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)

30400

GS1 ANppp

Weight

Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts

30800

1 N/C + 1 N/O.

External, front-mounted

GS1ANT11

0.153

2 N/C + 2 N/O.

External, front-mounted

GS1ANT22

0.258

(1) For 30 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow:

- early break and O and I position signalling,
- O and I position signalling,
- O, I and Test position signalling,
- Test position signalling.
For 30 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break,
- O and I position signalling,
- O, I and Test position signalling,
- Test position signalling.
For 600 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling,

3
4
5

(2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts:

Switch rating
A

Standard

With additional bracket

Reference of
additional bracket

CC

4.

4+4

GS1AD10

2.

2+4

GS1AD10

30100

4.

4+4

GS2AD20

200 and 400

8.

8+4

GS2AD20

600 and 800

8.

30 Compact

6
7

(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 and GS1ANTpp
only allow the test function with external handles GS2 AHTppp.
(4) These auxiliary contacts can also be used with 600 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with a front-mounted direct
operator.

8
9
10

4/69

TeSys protection components

538656

References

Switch-disconnector-fuses .
for the North American market,.
conforming to UL and CSA standards, .
30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Handles, accessories
Handles for external operators
Switch
rating

Protection index
Nema

Handle colour

Reference

Weight
kg

Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable

Door interlock in I position (1)
30 Compact

1, 3R, 12
1, 3R, 12

538655

GS2 AHp10
GS2 AHp20

30400

1, 3R, 12
1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12

600 and 800

GS2 AHp30
GS2 AHp40

30 Compact

1, 3R, 12
1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12

30400

1, 3R, 12
1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12

Shafts for external operators

GS2 AHp50
GS2 AHp60

0.200

Black/Grey

GS2AH410

0.200

Red/Yellow

GS2AH420

0.200

Black/Grey

GS2AH130

0.240

Red/Yellow

GS2AH140

0.240

Black/Grey

GS2AH430

0.240

Red/Yellow

GS2AH440

0.240

Black/Grey

GS2AH150

0.280

Red/Yellow.

GS2AH160

0.280

Black/Grey

GS2AHT110

0.200

Red/Yellow

GS2AHT120

0.200

Black/Grey

GS2AHT410

0.200

Red/Yellow

GS2AHT420

0.240

Noir/Gris

GS2AHT130

0.240

Red/Yellow

GS2AHT140

0.240

Black/Grey

GS2AHT430

0.240

Red/Yellow.

GS2AHT440

0.240

Shaft cross section

Reference

Shaft length

mm

mm

200

5x5

GS2AE82

0.100

320

5x5

GS2AE8

0.125

400

5x5

GS2AE81

0.150

200

10 x 10

GS2AE22

0.160

320

10 x 10

GS2AE2

0.280

400

10 x 10

GS2AE21

0.320

200

12 x 12

GS2AE52

0.240

320

12 x 12

GS2AE5

0.380

400

12 x 12

GS2AE51

0.420

30400

600 and 800

0.200

GS2AH120

Switch
rating

30 Compact

GS2AH110

Red/Yellow

Handles for front-mounted external operators with Test facility (2), padlockable
Door interlock in I position (1)

538654

1, 3R, 12

Black/Grey

kg

(1) Door interlock override by means of a tool.

(2) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110. GS1AM101 or
GS1ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.

8
9
10

4/70

Weight

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Switch-disconnector-fuses .
for the North American market,.
conforming to UL and CSA standards, .
30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Handles, accessories

568668

Handles for direct operators

Switch
rating

Type of operator

Handle colour

Reference

Weight
kg

Handles for direct operators, padlockable

30 Compact

Front-mounted

Black

GS2AH106

0.040

600 and 800

Front-mounted

Black

GS2AH107

0.480

Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates

GS1 AH01

Switch
rating

Number
of poles

Reference

30 Compact

(1)

3060

(1)

100

GS1AP33

0.073

200

GS1AP43

0.240

400

GS1APU53

0.060

600 and 800

GS2AP63

0.520

568669

Description

Reference

Allows a new GS2pp handle to be fitted in existing cut-outs

GS2AH001

GS1 AH02

30 Compact
30400.

kg

Height compensation plate for external handles

Switch
rating

Weight

3
4

Weight
kg
0.020

(1) For these ratings, the switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with terminal covers as standard.

6
7
8
9
10

4/71

References

TeSys protection components

Cartridge fuses type aM

For protection of equipment with current peaks

Fuse type

1
812889

Cylindrical
8.5 x 31.5

Maximum
rated
voltage

Rating

V
a 400

A
1
2
4
6
8
10

10
10
10
10
10
10

Fuses without striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg
DF2 BA0100
0.010
DF2 BA0200
0.010
DF2 BA0400
0.010
DF2 BA0600
0.010
DF2 BA0800
0.010
DF2 BA1000
0.010

Fuses with striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg

a 500

0.16
0.25
0.50
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
16

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 CA001
DF2 CA002
DF2 CA005
DF2 CA01
DF2 CA02
DF2 CA04
DF2 CA06
DF2 CA08
DF2 CA10
DF2 CA12
DF2 CA16

0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010

a 400

20
25
32

10
10
10

DF2 CA20
DF2 CA25
DF2 CA32

0.010
0.010
0.010

a 690

0.25
0.50

10
10

DF2 EA002
DF2 EA005

0.020
0.020

a 500

1
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
32
40

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 EA01
DF2 EA02
DF2 EA04
DF2 EA06
DF2 EA08
DF2 EA10
DF2 EA12
DF2 EA16
DF2 EA20
DF2 EA25
DF2 EA32
DF2 EA40

0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020

DF3 EA02
DF3 EA04
DF3 EA06
DF3 EA08
DF3 EA10
DF3 EA12
DF3 EA16
DF3 EA20
DF3 EA25
DF3 EA32
DF3 EA40

0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020

a 400

50

10

DF2 EA50

0.020

DF3 EA50

0.020

a 690

4
6
8
10
16
20
25
32
40
50

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 FA04
DF2 FA06
DF2 FA08
DF2 FA10
DF2 FA16
DF2 FA20
DF2 FA25
DF2 FA32
DF2 FA40
DF2 FA50

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

DF3 FA04
DF3 FA06
DF3 FA08
DF3 FA10
DF3 FA16
DF3 FA20
DF3 FA25
DF3 FA32
DF3 FA40
DF3 FA50

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

a 500

63
80
100

10
10
10

DF2 FA63
DF2 FA80
DF2 FA100

0.045
0.045
0.045

DF3 FA63
DF3 FA80
DF3 FA100

0.045
0.045
0.045

a 400

125

10

DF2 FA125

0.045

DF3 FA125

0.045

DF2 CAppp

812888

Cylindrical
10 x 38

DF2 EAppp

4
5

812890

Cylindrical
14 x 51

DF3 EApp

812887

6
7
DF2 FApp

Cylindrical
22 x 58

812891

8
9
DF3 FApp

10

4/72

Sold in
lots of

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Cartridge fuses type aM

For protection of equipment with current peaks

Fuse type

Maximum
rated
voltage

Rating

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Fuses without striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg
DF2 FGA16
0.160
DF2 FGA20
0.160
DF2 FGA25
0.160
DF2 FGA32
0.160
DF2 FGA40
0.160
DF2 FGA50
0.160
DF2 FGA63
0.160
DF2 FGA80
0.160
DF2 FGA100
0.160

Fuses with striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg

V
a 500

A
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100

a 400

125

DF2 FGA125

0.160

Blade
size 0

a 500

50
63
80
100
125
160
200

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

DF2 GA1051
DF2 GA1061
DF2 GA1081
DF2 GA1101
DF2 GA1121
DF2 GA1161
DF2 GA1201

0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230

DF4 GA1121
DF4 GA1161
DF4 GA1201

0.230
0.230
0.230

Blade
size 1

a 500

160
200
250
315

3
3
3
3

DF2 HA1161
DF2 HA1201
DF2 HA1251
DF2 HA1311

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.400

DF4 HA1201
DF4 HA1251
DF4 HA1311

0.400
0.400
0.400

Blade
size 2

a 500

250
315
400
500

3
3
3
3

DF2 JA1251
DF2 JA1311
DF2 JA1401
DF2 JA1501

0.560
0.560
0.560
0.560

DF4 JA1311
DF4 JA1401
DF4 JA1501

0.560
0.560
0.560

Blade
size 3

a 500

400
500
630

3
3
3

DF2 KA1401
DF2 KA1501
DF2 KA1631

0.850
0.850
0.850

DF4 KA1501
DF4 KA1631

0.850
0.850

Blade
size 4

a 500

630
800
1000

1
1
1

DF2 LA1631
DF2 LA1801
DF2 LA1101

1.900
1.900
1.900

DF4 LA1631
DF4 LA1801
DF4 LA1101

1.900
1.900
1.900

a 400

1250

DF2 LA1251

1.900

DF4 LA1251

1.900

533330

Blade
size 00

533331

DF2 GApppp

533332

DF4 GApppp

DF2 JApppp

Sold in
lots of

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/73

References

TeSys protection components

Cartridge fuses type gG

For protection of circuits without significant current peaks

Fuse type

1
812897

Cylindrical
8.5 x 31.5

Maximum
rated
voltage

Rating

V
a 400

A
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
20

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Fuses without striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg
DF2 BN0100
0.010
DF2 BN0200
0.010
DF2 BN0400
0.010
DF2 BN0600
0.010
DF2 BN0800
0.010
DF2 BN1000
0.010
DF2 BN1200
0.010
DF2 BN1600
0.010
DF2 BN2000
0.010

Fuses with striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg

a 500

2
4
6
8
10
12
16
20

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 CN02
DF2 CN04
DF2 CN06
DF2 CN08
DF2 CN10
DF2 CN12
DF2 CN16
DF2 CN20

0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010

a 400

25
32

10
10

DF2 CN25
DF2 CN32

0.010
0.010

a 500

4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 EN04
DF2 EN06
DF2 EN10
DF2 EN16
DF2 EN20
DF2 EN25
DF2 EN32
DF2 EN40
DF2 EN50

0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020

DF3 EN04
DF3 EN06
DF3 EN10
DF3 EN16
DF3 EN20
DF3 EN25
DF3 EN32
DF3 EN40

0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020

a 690

10
20
25
32
40
50

10
10
10
10
10
10

DF2 FN10
DF2 FN20
DF2 FN25
DF2 FN32
DF2 FN40
DF2 FN50

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

DF3 FN10
DF3 FN20
DF3 FN25
DF3 FN32
DF3 FN40
DF3 FN50

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

a 500

63
80
100

10
10
10

DF2 FN63
DF2 FN80
DF2 FN100

0.045
0.045
0.045

DF3 FN63
DF3 FN80
DF3 FN100

0.045
0.045
0.045

DF2 CNpp

812896

2
DF2 ENpp

812898

Cylindrical
10 x 38

DF3 ENpp

812895

Cylindrical
14 x 51

DF2 FNpp

a 400
Cylindrical
22 x 58

812899

6
7

DF3 FNpp

8
9
10

4/74

Sold in
lots of

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Cartridge fuses type gG

For protection of circuits without significant current peaks

Fuse type

533333

Blade
size 00

Maximum
rated
voltage

Rating

V
a 500

A
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160

533334

DF2 GNpppp

533335

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Fuses without striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg
DF2 FGN10
0.160
DF2 FGN16
0.160
DF2 FGN20
0.160
DF2 FGN25
0.160
DF2 FGN32
0.160
DF2 FGN40
0.160
DF2 FGN50
0.160
DF2 FGN63
0.160
DF2 FGN80
0.160
DF2 FGN100
0.160
DF2 FGN125
0.160
DF2 FGN160
0.160

Fuses with striker

Unit
Weight
reference
kg

Blade
size 0

a 500

50
63
80
100
125
160

3
3
3
3
3
3

DF2 GN1051
DF2 GN1061
DF2 GN1081
DF2 GN1101
DF2 GN1121
DF2 GN1161

0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230
0.230

DF4 GN1121
DF4 GN1161

0.230
0.230

Blade
size 1

a 500

160
200
250

3
3
3

DF2 HN1161
DF2 HN1201
DF2 HN1251

0.400
0.400
0.400

DF4 HN1201
DF4 HN1251

0.400
0.400

Blade
size 2

a500

250
315
400

3
3
3

DF2 JN1251
DF2 JN1311
DF2 JN1401

0.560
0.560
0.560

DF4 JN1311
DF4 JN1401

0.560
0.560

Blade
size 3

a 500

500
630

3
3

DF2 KN1501
DF2 KN1631

0.850
0.850

DF4 KN1501
DF4 KN1631

0.850
0.850

Blade
size 4

a 500

800
1000
1250

1
1
1

DF2 LN1801
DF2 LN1101
DF2 LN1251

1.900
1.900
1.900

DF4 LN1801
DF4 LN1101
DF4 LN1251

1.900
1.900
1.900

DF4 GNpppp

DF2 JNpppp

Sold in
lots of

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4/75

Contents

5 - TeSys contactors and reversing

contactors

b Contactors: definitions and comments page 5/2

b Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming 
to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1 page 5/4

b Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load. . . . . . . . . page 5/5

TeSys contactors selection guide  page 5/6

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8
b Contactors
v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14
v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4  page 5/15
v 20 A in category AC-1 page 5/17

b Reversing contactors
v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18
v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4  page 5/19
v 20 A in category AC-1 page 5/20

b Auxiliary contact blocks, suppressor modules and accessories page 5/23

5

TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contactors

b For motor control in categories AC-3 and AC-1  page 5/34

b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 

and suppressor modules page 5/35
5

TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contactors

b For use in modular panels  page 5/42

b Suppressor modules  page 5/43

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide  page 5/46

b Contactors for motor control

v
v
v
v

Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 

Up to 30 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 
From 25 to 200 A, in category AC-1 
From 20 to 200 A, for the North American market, 
conforming to UL and CSA standards

page 5/62
page 5/63
page 5/64
page 5/71

b Reversing contactors for motor control

v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3  page 5/72
v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3  page 5/73
v From 20 to 200 A, in category AC-1  page 5/74

b Components parts for assembling reversing contactors  page 5/76

b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules page 5/79
b Coils for TeSys D contactors  page 5/86

10

TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks

b Contactors used for power factor correction page 5/102

5/0

TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide  page 5/104
b Contactors for motor control

v 115 to 800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/114

v 200 to 2100 A, in category AC-1 page 5/115
b Reversing contactors
v
v
v
v

115 to 265 A, in category AC-3 page 5/116

200 to 350 A, in category AC-1 page 5/117
Components for assembling reversing contactors page 5/118
Instantaneous contact blocks and accessories  page 5/123

v Coils for TeSys F contactors page 5/130

High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution

2
3

b For customer assembly page 5/153

Capacitive delayed opening devices

b For TeSys D contactors  page 5/156

b For TeSys F contactors  page 5/157

TeSys LC1 FG shockproof contactors

b Presentation, selection page 5/158
b Characteristics page 5/166

b References  page 5/174

b Dimensions and schemes  page 5/180

TeSys LC1 B contactors

b 750 to 1800 A
, in category AC-3 page 5/184

b 800 to 2750 A, in category AC-1 page 5/185

b Accessories and spare parts page 5/186
b Replacement coils page 5/188

Variable composition contactors

Selection guide  page 5/226

b CV1 B from 80 to 1000 A and CV3 B from 80 to 500 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/228

3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors

b LC1 V and CV2 V page 5/232

Magnetic latching contactors

b CR1 F and CR1 B  page 5/242

Modular equipment
Selection guide  page 5/268
b TeSys GC standard contactor  page 5/278
b TeSys GF impulse relays  page 5/286
b TeSys GY dual tariff contactors page 5/292

5/1

10

General

TeSys contactors

Definitions and comments

Definitions

Altitude

The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the
rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence
the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.

2
Ambient air temperature

3
4
5
6
7

Rated operational current (Ie)

This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty,
utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device.

Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1)

The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its
temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.

Permissible short time rating

The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without
dangerous overheating.

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the
use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category
are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is
less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based.
For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total
harmonic distortion).

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to
in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are
not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same.

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down.

Rated operational power (expressed in kW)

The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated
operational voltage.

Rated breaking capacity (2)

This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking
conditions specified in the IEC standard.

Rated making capacity (2)

This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions
specified in the IEC standard.

On-load factor (m)

8
9
10

Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current
(a.c. supply) are as follows.
Altitude
3500 m
4000 m
4500 m
5000 m
Rated operetional voltage
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,60
Rated operational current
0,92
0,90
0,88
0,86

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device.
The operating characteristics are given:
- with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C,
- with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C.

This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of
the cycle (T)
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current

Pole impedance

The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between
the input terminal and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = Lw).
The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz.
This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.

Electrical durability

This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can
perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the
rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.

Mechanical durability

This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the
main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure.

(1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards.

(2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into
account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the
rms symmetrical component.
Note : these definitions are extracted from standard IEC 60947-1.

5/2

General

TeSys contactors

Definitions and comments

Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4

The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor must be able to make or break.

These values depend on:

- the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
- the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging.
a.c. applications
Category AC-1

This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95
(cos j u 0.95).
Application examples: heating, distribution.

Category AC-2

This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated
current of the motor.
v On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains
supply voltage.

Category AC-3

This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor.
v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated
current of the motor.
v On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the
contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc... .

Category AC-4

This category covers applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors.
The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor
current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor
speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains
voltage. Breaking is severe
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy
industry.

d.c. applications

2
3
4
5

Category DC-1

This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal
to1ms.

Category DC-3

This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors.
Time constant y 2 ms.
v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated
motor current.
v On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage
which is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore
the lower its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage.
Breaking is difficult.

This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors.
Time constant y 7.5 ms.
On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the
rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is
higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage.
Breaking is severe.

Category DC-5

Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC 60947-5
a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (1)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.

Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.

Category AC-15 (1)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is more than 72 VA.

Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.

d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (2)

This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach
95% of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load
(with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor.

10

(1) Replaces category AC-11.

(2) Replaces category DC-13.

5/3

General

Technical information

Tests according to standard utilisation categories

conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie 
and rated operational voltage Ue

Contactors

Electrical durability:
making and breaking conditions

a.c. supply
Typical
applications

2
3
4
5
6

Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions

AC-1

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

cos j
0.95

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

cos j
0.95

Making
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

cos j
0.8

Breaking
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

cos j
0.8

Motors
Slip ring motors: 
starting, breaking.

AC-2

2.5 Ie

Ue

0.65

2.5 Ie

Ue

0.65

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

0.65

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

0.65

Squirrel cage motors:

starting, breaking whilst
motor running.

AC-3
Ie y (1)
Ie > (2)

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

1 Ie
1 Ie

0.17 Ue
0.17 Ue

0.65
0.35

10 Ie
10 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

8 Ie
8 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

Squirrel cage motors:

starting, 
reversing, 
inching

AC-4
Ie y (1)
Ie > (2)

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

12 Ie
12 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

10 Ie
10 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

DC-1

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Making
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Breaking
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

L/R (ms)
1

DC-3

2.5 Ie

Ue

2.5 Ie

Ue

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

2.5

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

2.5

DC-5

2.5 Ie

Ue

7.5

2.5 Ie

Ue

7.5

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

15

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

15

Resistors,
non inductive 
or slightly inductive loads

Utilisation
category

d.c. supply
Typical
applications
Resistors,
non inductive 
or slightly inductive loads
Shunt wound motors: 
starting,
reversing,
inching
Series wound motors: 
starting,
reversing,
inching

Utilisation
category

Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability:
making and breaking conditions

Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions

a.c. supply
Typical
applications

Utilisation
category

Making
I
U

cos j

Breaking
I
U

cos j

Making
I
U

cos j

Breaking
I
U

cos j

Electromagnets
y 72 VA

AC-14

6 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.7

6 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.7

> 72 VA

AC-15

10 Ie

Ue

0.7

Ie

Ue

0.4

10 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.3

10 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.3

Utilisation
category

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Making
I
U
1.1 Ie
1.1 Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Breaking
I
U
1.1 Ie
1.1 Ue

d.c. supply

8
9

Typical
applications
Electromagnets

DC-13

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty.

(2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty.
(3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50
W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R.
Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.

10

5/4

General

Technical information

Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors 

at nominal load

3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW

Current values for power in hp

Rated
operational
power (1)

Rated
operational
power (2)

Indicative rated operational current

values at:
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V

kW
A
A
A
A
0.06
0.35
0.2
0.16
0.12
0.09
0.52
0.3
0.24
0.17
0.12
0.7
0.44
0.32
0.23
0.18
1
0.6
0.48
0.35
0.25
1.5
0.85
0.68
0.49
0.37
1.9
1.1
0.88
0.64
0.55
2.6
1.5
1.2
0.87
0.75
3.3
1.9
1.5
1.1
1.1
4.7
2.7
2.2
1.6
1.5
6.3
3.6
2.9
2.1
2.2
8.5
4.9
3.9
2.8
3
11.3
6.5
5.2
3.8
4
15
8.5
6.8
4.9
5.5
20
11.5
9.2
6.7
7.5
27
15.5
12.4
8.9
11
38
22
17.6
12.8
15
51
29
23
17
18.5
61
35
28
21
22
72
41
33
24
30
96
55
44
32
37
115
66
53
39
45
140
80
64
47
55
169
97
78
57
75
230
132
106
77
90
278
160
128
93
110
340
195
156
113
132
400
230
184
134
160
487
280
224
162
200
609
350
280
203
250
748
430
344
250
315
940
540
432
313
355
1061
610
488
354
400
1200
690
552
400
500
1478
850
680
493
560
1652
950
760
551
630
1844
1060
848
615
710
2070
1190
952
690
800
2340
1346
1076
780
900
2640
1518
1214
880
1000
2910
1673
1339
970
(1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz).
(2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).

hp
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500

Indicative rated operational current values at:

110 120 V
A
4.4
6.4
8.4
12
13.6
19.2
30.4
44
56
84
108
136
160
208
260

200 V

208 V

A
2.5
3.7
4.8
6.9
7.8
11
17.5
25.3
32.2
48.3
62.1
78.2
92
120
150
177
221
285
359
414
552

A
2.4
3.5
4.6
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
114
143
169
211
273
343
396
528

220 240 V
A
2.2
3.2
4.2
6
6.8
9.6
15.2
22
28
42
54
68
80
104
130
154
192
248
312
360
480
604
722
828
954
1030
1180

380 415 V
A
1.3
1.8
2.3
3.3
4.3
6.1
9.7
14
18
27
34
44
51
66
83
103
128
165
208
240
320
403
482
560
636

786

440 480 V
A
1.1
1.6
2.1
3
3.4
4.8
7.6
11
14
21
27
34
40
52
65
77
96
124
156
180
240
302
361
414
477
515
590

550 600 V
A
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.4
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
125
144
192
242
289
336
382
412
472

2
3
4
5
6
7

Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.

8
9
10

5/5

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys contactors

Equipment based on standard contactors

Equipment requiring
low consumption
contactors which
can be switched
directly from
solid state outputs

AC-3

6A

6..0.16 A

9150 A

115800 A

7501800 A

6...12 A

925 A

AC-1

12 A

20 A

25200 A

2002100 A

8002750 A

20 A

2040 A

Rated operational voltage

690 V

690 V

690 V

1000 V

1000 V

690 V

690 V

Number of poles

2 or 3

3 or 4

3 or 4

2, 3 or 4

14

3 or 4

Contactor type references

LC1 SK
LP1 SK

LC1 K
LC7 K
LP1 K

LC1 D

LC1 F

LC1 B

LP4 K

LC1 D

Pages

5/8 and 5/9

5/46 and
5/47

5/104 and 5/105

5/15

5/48 and
5/49

1
2
3
4
5

Rated operational current

6
7
8
9
10

5/6

Equipment requiring magnetic

latching contactors

Motors, resistive circuits, rotor

short-circuiting devices, electro
lifting magnets, hoisting, mines,
c motors, high operating rates.
Variable composition bar mounted
contactors.

Induction heating, heating of metal

or of a metal part in a channel or
crucible furnace by induction of a.
c. currents.Contactors for
induction heating applications.

Applications conforming to NATO

specifications and references.
Shockproof contactors

1
2

1501800 A

80...1800 A

12630 A

2502750 A

802750 A

8016 300 A

25850 A

1000 V

a 1000 V
c 440 or 1500 V

3000 V

690 V or 1000 V

14

16

18

3 or 4

CR1 F
CR1 B

CVp

CEp
CSp

LC1 DpG
LP1 DpG
LC1 FGppp

5/250 to 5/259

5/226 and 5/227

4
5
6

Please consult your Regional Sales Office

8
9
10

5/7

Selection guide

TeSys contactors

From 6 to 16 A

Applications

Simple automation systems

1
2
3
4

Rated operational current

Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

6A

6A

Ie AC-1 (q y 40 C)

12 A

690 V

Number of poles

2 or 3

220/240 V

1.1 kW

1.5 kW

380/400 V

2.2 kW

2.2 kW

415/440 V

2.2 kW

2.2/3 kW

500 V

3 kW

660/690 V

3 kW

1000 V

Front

Up to 2 N/C or N/O

Up to 4 N/C or N/O

Side

Front time delay

1 N/C

Front dust and damp protected

Class 10 A

0.1116 A

Class 20 A

Varistor or diode

Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit

LC1 SK

LC1 or LC7 K06

LP1 SK

LP1 K06

Reversing contactor with

mechanical interlock
type references

LC2 or LC8 K06

LP2 K06

Pages

Contactors

5/34 and 5/35

5/14 to 5/17

Reversing contactors

5/18 to 5/21

Rated operational power

in category AC-3

Add-on auxiliary
contact blocks

6
Associated manual-auto
thermal overload relays

Suppressor modules

Contactor type references

8
9

Rated operational voltage

10

5/8

9A

12 A

16 A

20 A

2
3

3 or 4

2.2 kW

3 kW

3 kW

4 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

4 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

4 kW

4 kW

5.5 kW

4 kW

4 kW

4 kW

4
5
6

LC1 or LC7 K09

LC1 or LC7 K12

LC1 K16

LP1 K09

LP1 K12

LC2 or LC8 K09

LC2 or LC8 K12

LC2 K16

LP2 K09

LP2 K12

9
10

5/9

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Environment characteristics

Conforming to standards
Product certifications

IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424

LCp and LPpK06 to K12

UL, CSA

Operating positions

Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

90

180

90

Without derating

Connection
Screw clamp
terminals

Spring terminals

4
5
6
7
8

90

90

Faston connectors
Solder pins for
printed circuit board
Tightening torque

Solid conductor
Flexible conductor 
without cable end
Flexible conductor 
with cable end
Solid conductor
Flexible conductor 
without cable end
Clip
With locating device between
power and control circuits
Philips head n 2 and 6

Protective treatment

Min.
1 x 1.5
1 x 0.75

Max.
2x4
2x4

mm2

1 x 0.34

1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5

1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5

mm2
mm2

1 x 0.75
1 x 0.75

1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5

2 x 1.5
2 x 1.5

mm

2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35
4 mm x 35 microns

N.m

0.8
Up to 5 contacts, depending on model

V
V
V

690
750
690

600

kV

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60068 

(DIN 50016)
Conforming to VDE 0106

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation

C
C

- 50+ 80
- 25+ 50

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

2000

Vibration resistance
5 ... 300 Hz

Contactor open
Contactor closed

2 gn
4 gn

Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to NF F 16-101 
and 16-102
Contactor open

Self-extinguishing materials V1
Conforming to requirement 2

Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)

Contactor closed
Safe separation of circuits

Conforming to VDE 0106 

and IEC 60536

TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Protection against direct finger contact

On X axis: 6 gn
On Y and Z axes: 10 gn
On X axis: 10 gn
On Y and Z axes: 15 gn
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V

10
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21

5/10

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Possible positions for LCpK only.

Contactor pull-in voltage: 0.85 Uc
Max. to IEC 60947
1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5

mm2
mm2

Terminal referencing

Conforming to standards 
EN 50005 and EN50012
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 60947
(Ui)
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C
Conforming to BS 5424, 
NF C 20-040
Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14,
UL 508
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

Without derating

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Pole characteristics
Type
LCp or LPp
Conventional thermal
For ambient temperature
current (Ith)
y 50 C
Rated operational frequency
Frequency limits of the operational current
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Rated making capacity
I rms conforming to 
NF C 63110 and IEC60947
Rated breaking capacity
I rms conforming 220/230 V
to NF C 63110
380/400 V
and IEC60947
415 V
440 V
500 V
660/690 V

K06
20

K09

K12

K16

Hz
Hz
V
A

50/60
Up to 400
690
110

110

144

160

A
A
A
A
A
A

110
110
110
110
80
70

110
110
110
110
80
70

110
80
70

110
80
70

90
85
80
60
45
40
20

115
105
100
75
55
50
25

115
105
100
75
55
50
25

Permissible short
time rating

In free air for a

1s
time t from cold 5 s
state (q y 50 C)
10 s
30 s
1 min
3 min
u 15 min

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

90
85
80
60
45
40
20

Short-circuit protection

gG fuse U y 440 V 
(aM fuse, see page 6/12)
At Ith and 50 Hz
Maximum rated operational
current for a temperature y50 C
Maximum rated operational
current for a temperature y70 C
Rated operational current limits
in relation to the on-load factor
and operating frequency

25

mW
A

3
20

16 for Ue only

A
A
A

On-load factor
300 operating cycles/hour
120 operating cycles/hour
30 operating cycles/hour

Average impedance per pole

Use in category AC-1 
resistive circuits, heating,
lighting (Ue y 440 V)

Increase in rated operational

current by paralleling of poles

Use in category AC-3

squirrel cage motors

Operational
power according
to the voltage.
Voltage 50 or
60Hz

115 V single-ph.
220 V single-ph.
220/230 V 3-ph.
380/415 V 3-ph.
440/480 V 3-ph.
500/600 V 3-ph.
660/690 V 3-ph.

Maximum operating rate 

(in operating cycles/hour in
relation to % of rated power)

kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

90%
13
15
19

60%
15
18
20

1
2
3
4
5

30%
18
19
20

Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into
account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles
2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60
3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25
4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80

0.37
0.75
1.5
2.2
3
3
3

Op. cycles/h
Power

0.55
1.1
2.2
4
4
4
4

3
5.5
5.5/4 (480)
4
4

4
7.5
5.5/4 (480)
4
4
600
100 %

900
75 %

1200
50 %

8
9
10

References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

5/11

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Control circuit characteristics

Type
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits (y 50 C)
single voltage coil

Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

LC1
LC2
a 12690 (1)

LC7
LC8
a 24240 (1)

LP1
LP2
c 12250 (1)

LP4
LP5
c 12120

Operation

0.81.15 Uc (2)

0.851.1 Uc

0.81.15 Uc

0.71.30 Uc

Drop-out

u 0.20 Uc

u 0.10 Uc

u 0.10 Uc

u 0.10 Uc

Inrush

30 VA

3 VA

3W

1.8 W 

Sealed

4.5 VA

3 VA

3W

1.8 W

1.3

1.8

ms
ms
ms
ms
ms

515
1020
1020
1525
2
3600
10

2535
3040
30
40
2
3600
10

2535
3040
10
15
2
3600

2535
3040
1020
1525
2
3600

10

30

Heat dissipation

3
4

Operating time at 20 C and at Uc

Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts
- closing of the N/O contacts
Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts
- closing of the N/C contacts
Maximum immunity to microbreaks
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
Mechanical durability at Uc
50/60 Hz coil
In millions of operating cycles
c coil
Wide range coil,
Low consumption

(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor
module LA4KE1FC (50129V) or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
(2) LC1K16: 0.851.15 Uc.

5
6
7
8
9
10
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21

5/12

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

TeSys contactors

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks
Number of auxiliary contacts

On LCpK or LPpK 3-pole

On LA1K

1
2 or 4

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to

690

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to BS 5424
Conforming to IEC 60947
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14

V
V
V
V

690
690
750
600

Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the
operational current
Minimum switching
capacity

For ambient temperature

y50C

10

Hz

Up to 400

U min (DIN 19 240)

I min

V
mA

17
5

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947 

and VDE 0660, gG fuse
Conforming to 
I rms
IEC 60947
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms

10

110

A
A
A
MW

80
90
110
> 10

Rated making capacity

Short-time rating

Insulation resistance

2
3
4

Non-overlap distance

LA1K: linked contacts

mm
0.5 (see schemes pages 5/27 and 5/29)
conforming to INRS, BIA 
and CNA specifications
Operational power of contacts
a.c. supply, category AC-15
d.c. supply, category DC-13
conforming to IEC 60947
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating 
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating 
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an
electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the
electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
power broken (cos j 0.4).
increasing with the load.

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Occasional making capacity

V
VA
VA
VA
VA

24
48
17
7
1000

48
96
34
14
2050

110/
127
240
86
36
5000

220/ 380/
600/
230
400
440
690
440
800
880
1200
158
288
317
500
66
120
132
200
10 000 14 000 13 000 9000


Power broken in VA

1 Breaking limit of contacts valid 16 000

for:
10 000
- maximum of 50 operating
8000
cycles at 10 s intervals 
6000
5000
(power broken = making 
4000
current x cos j 0.7).
3000
2 Electrical durability of contacts
2000
for:
- 1 million operating cycles (2a) 1000
- 3 million operating cycles (2b)
800
- 10 million operating cycles (2c). 600
500
3 Breaking limit of contacts valid
400
300
for:
200
- maximum of 20 operating
cycles at 10 s intervals with current
100
passing for 0.5 s per operating
80
cycle.
60
4 Thermal limit.
40

V
W
W
W
W

24
120
55
15
720

48
80
38
11
600

110
60
30
9
400

220
52
28
8
300

440
51
26
7
230

600
50
25
6
200

5
6


Power broken in W

1000

700
500

300

250

200

200

100
80
60
50
40
30

140
100

2a

2a
2b

20

2c
2b

50

2c

20
24

48

110
120

220

380 500

10
8
6

9
12

24

48

110

220

440 600 V

440 690 V

10
References :
page 5/23

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

5/13

References

TeSys contactors

Contactors for motor control,

6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A 
in category AC-4
Control circuit: a.c.

511137

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.

3-pole contactors for standard applications

Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3

LC1 K0910pp

220 V
230 V

380 V
415 V

440/500 V
660/690 V

kW

kW

kW

Rated operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(1) (2)

Weight

kg

511138

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

12

7.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)
4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

16

LC1 K0610pp
LC1 K0601pp
LC1 K0910pp
LC1 K0901pp
LC1 K1210pp
LC1 K1201pp
LC1 K1610pp
LC1 K1601pp

0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180

Spring terminal connections

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0610pp becomes LC1K06103pp.

LC1 K09103pp

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

511139

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0610pp becomes LC1K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0610pp becomes LC1K06105pp.

3-pole silent contactors

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

Screw clamp connections

6
511140

LC1 K09107pp

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LC7 K0610pp
LC7 K0601pp
LC7 K0910pp
LC7 K0901pp
LC7 K1210pp
LC7 K1201pp

0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC7K0610pp becomes LC7K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

LC1 K09105pp

511141

8
9
10

LC7 K0910pp

Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/196

5/14

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC7K0610pp becomes LC7K06105pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Contactors LC1K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (2) 36
42
48
110 115 120 127 200/208
220/230 230
230/240
50/60 Hz
J7
Z7
B7
C7 D7
E7 F7
FE7 G7 FC7 L7
M7
P7
U7
Volts
256
277 380/400
400
400/415
440 480 500 575
600 660/690
50/60 Hz
W7
UE7 Q7

V7
N7
R7 T7
S7 SC7
X7
Y7

Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72.
Contactors LC7K (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230/240
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
U7
(2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V)
or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/26

Schemes :
page 5/27

References

TeSys contactors

Contactors for motor control,

6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption

511137

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25

3-pole contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3

LP1 K0910pp

220 V
230 V

380 V
415 V

440/500 V
660/690 V

kW

kW

kW

Rated operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(1) (2)

Weight

kg

511138

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LP1 K0610pp
LP1 K0601pp
LP1 K0910pp
LP1 K0901pp
LP1 K1210pp
LP1 K1201pp

0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. 
Example: LP1K0610pp becomes LP1K06103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

LP1 K09103pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. 
Example: LP1K0610pp becomes LP1 K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

511139

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP1K0610pp becomes LP1K06105pp.

3-pole low consumption contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4KppppFW3 and LP4KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

Screw clamp connections

511140

LP1 K09107pp

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LP4 K0610pp
LP4 K0601pp
LP4 K0910pp
LP4 K0901pp
LP4 K1210pp
LP4 K1201pp

0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235

Spring terminal connections

6
7

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0610pp becomes LP4K06103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0610pp becomes LP4K06107pp.

511141

LP1 K09105pp

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0610pp becomes LP4K06105pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
d.c. supply (contactors LP1K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (2) 36
48
60
72
100 110 125 155 174 200 220
Code
JD
ZD
BD
CD ED
ND SD
KD
FD
GD PD
QD LD
MD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3

8
230 240 250
MPD MUD UD

Low consumption (contactors LP4K: 0.7130 Uc)

Volts
12
20
24
48
72
110
120
Code
JW3
ZW3
BW3
EW3
SW3
FW3
GW3
(2) For LP1K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
LP4 K0910pp

Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/196

9
10

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/26

Schemes :
page 5/27

5/15

References

TeSys contactors

Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A

Control circuit: a.c.

3 or 4-pole contactors for standard applications (1)

511137

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.
Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C

Instantaneous
Basic reference,
auxiliary contacts to be completed by adding
the voltage code (2) (3)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

511138

LC1 K09004pp

Number
of poles

20

LC1 K0910pp
or LC1 K1210pp
LC1 K0901pp
or LC1 K1201pp
LC1 K09004pp
or LC1 K12004pp
LC1 K09008pp

0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.180

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0910pp becomes LC1K09103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0910pp becomes LC1K09107pp.
LC1 K09103pp

3 or 4-pole silent contactors (1)

511139

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1K0910pp becomes LC1K09105pp.

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

Screw clamp connections

20

6
LC1 K09107pp

LC7 K0910pp
or LC7 K1210pp
LC7 K0901pp
or LC7 K1201pp
LC7 K09004pp
or LC7 K12004pp
LC7 K09008pp

0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

7
511141

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC7K0910pp becomes LC7K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC7K0910pp becomes LC7K09105pp.

8
LC1 K09004pp

(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Contactors LC1K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (3) 36
42
48
110 115 120 127 200/208
220/230 230
230/240
50/60 Hz
J7
Z7
B7
C7 D7
E7 F7
FE7 G7 FC7 L7
M7
P7
U7
Volts
256
277 380/400
400
400/415
440 480 500 575
600 660/690
50/60 Hz
W7
UE7 Q7
V7
N7
R7 T7
S7 SC7
X7
Y7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72.
Contactors LC7K (0.81.1 Uc)
Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230/240
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
U7
(3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V)
or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.

10
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199

5/16

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/26

Schemes :
page 5/27

References

TeSys contactors

Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A

Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.

511142

3 and 4-pole contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current at
q y 50 C

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (2) (3)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

20

LP1 K0910pp
or LP1 K1210pp
LP1 K0901pp
or LP1 K1201pp
LP1 K09004pp
or LP1 K12004pp
LP1 K09008pp

511143

LC1 K09004pp

0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225

2
3

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP1K0910pp becomes LP1K09103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP1K0910pp becomes LP1K09107pp.
LC1 K09103pp

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP1K0910pp becomes LP1K09105pp.

511144

3 or 4-pole low consumption contactors (1)

Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4KppppFW3 and LP4KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

Screw clamp connections

20

LC1 K09105pp

LP4 K0910ppp
or LP4 K1210ppp
LP4 K0901ppp
or LP4 K1201ppp
LP4 K09004ppp
or LP4 K12004ppp
LP4 K09008ppp

0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235

Spring terminal connections

511141

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0910pp becomes LP4K09103pp.

6
7

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0910pp becomes LP4K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

LC1 K09004pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP4K0910pp becomes LP4K09105pp.
(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
d.c. supply (contactors LP1K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts c
12
20
24 (3) 36
48
60
72
100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Code
JD
ZD
BD
CD ED
ND SD
KD
FD
GD PD
QD LD
MD MPD MUD UD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.
Low consumption (contactors LP4K: 0.7130 Uc)
Volts c
12
20
24
48
72
110
120
Code
JW3
ZW3
BW3
EW3
SW3
FW3
GW3
(3) For LP1K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.

Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/26

Schemes :
page 5/27

5/17

8
9
10

TeSys contactors

References

Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A

in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
Control circuit: a.c.

Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.Integral mechanical
interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock.
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.

3-pole reversing contactors for standard applications

511147

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3

LC2 K0910pp

511148

3
4

220 V
230 V

380 V
415 V

440/500 V
660/690 V

kW

kW

kW

Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to

InstanBasic reference,
taneous
to be completed by adding
auxiliary
the voltage code (1) (2)
contacts per
contactor

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

12

7.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)
4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

16

LC2 K0610pp
LC2 K0601pp
LC2 K0910pp
LC2 K0901pp
LC2 K1210pp
LC2 K1201pp
LC2 K1610pp
LC2 K1601pp

0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390

Spring terminal connections

LC2 K09105pp

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. 
Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06105pp.

3-pole silent reversing contactors

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LC8 K0610pp
LC8 K0601pp
LC8 K0910pp
LC8 K0901pp
LC8 K1210pp
LC8 K1201pp

0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC8K0610pp becomes LC8K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC8K0610pp becomes LC8K06105pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Reversing contactors LC2K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (2) 36
42
48
110 115 120 127 200/208
220/230 230
230/240
50/60 Hz
J7
Z7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
FE7 G7
FC7 L7
M7
P7
U7
Volts
256
277 380/400
400
400/415
440 480 500 575
600 660/690
50/60 Hz
W7
UE7 Q7
V7
N7
R7
T7
S7 SC7 X7
Y7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72

Reversing contactors LC8K (0.81.1 Uc)

Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230/240
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
U7
(2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V)
or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203

5/18

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/28

Schemes :
page 5/29

TeSys contactors

References

Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A

in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption

Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Integral mechanical interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock.
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25

3-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3

220 V
230 V

380 V
415 V

440/500 V
660/690 V

kW

kW

kW

Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to

InstanBasic reference,
taneous
to be completed by adding
auxiliary
the voltage code (1) (2)
contacts per
contactor

Weight

2
kg

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LP2 K0610pp
LP2 K0601pp
LP2 K0910pp
LP2 K0901pp
LP2 K1210pp
LP2 K1201pp

0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480

Spring terminal connections

3
4

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP2K0610pp becomes LP2K06103pp. 

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06107pp. 

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06105pp.

3-pole low consumption reversing contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

Screw clamp connections

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

4 (> 440)
5.5 (440)

12

LP5 K0610pp
LP5 K0601pp
LP5 K0910pp
LP5 K0901pp
LP5 K1210pp
LP5 K1201pp

0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5K0610pp becomes LP5K06103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5 K0610pp becomes LP5K06107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5 K0610pp becomes LP5K06105pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
d.c. supply
Reversing contactors LP2K (0.81.15 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (3) 36
48
60
72
100 110 125 155 174 200 220
Code
JD
ZD
BD CD ED ND SD KD FD
GD PD QD LD
MD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.

230 240 250

MPD MUD UD

Low consumption
Reversing contactors LP5K (0.71.30 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24
48
72
110
120
Code
JW3
ZW3
BW3
EW3
SW3
FW3
GW3
(2) For LP2K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/28

Schemes :
page 5/29

5/19

9
10

TeSys contactors

References

Reversing contactors for control

in category AC-1, 20 A
Control circuit: a.c.

Warning: reversing contactors LC2K0910pp and LC2K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard.
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
Integral mechanical interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.

511150

3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C

2
LC2 K0910pp

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (2) (3)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

20

or

or
511151

or

LC2 K0910pp
LC2 K1210pp
LC2 K0901pp
LC2 K1201pp
LC2 K09004pp
LC2 K12004pp

0.390
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.380
0.380

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0910pp becomes LC2K09103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

LC2 K09105pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0910pp becomes LC2K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC2K0910pp becomes LC2K09105pp.

3 or 4-pole silent reversing contactors (1)

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

Screw clamp connections

511152

20

or

or

or

LC8 K0910pp
LC8 K1210pp
LC8 K0901pp
LC8 K1201pp
LC8 K09004pp
LC8 K12004pp

0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.470
0.470

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

LC2 K09004pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LC8K0910pp becomes LC8K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LC8K0910pp becomes LC8K09105pp.

(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Reversing contactors LC2K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts
12
20
24 (3) 36
42
48
110 115 120 127 200/208
220/230 230
230/240
50/60 Hz
J7
Z7
B7
C7 D7
E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7
M7
P7
U7
Volts
256
277 380/400
400
400/415
440 480 500 575
600 660/690
50/60 Hz
W7
UE7 Q7
V7
N7
R7 T7 S7 SC7
X7
Y7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72.

Reversing contactors LC8K (0.81.1 Uc)

Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230/240
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
U7
(3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V)
or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.

10
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199

5/20

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/28

Schemes :
page 5/29

TeSys contactors

References

Reversing contactors for control

in category AC-1, 20 A

Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption

Warning: reversing contactors LP2K0910pp and LP2K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard.
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
Integral mechanical interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/22 to 5/25.

3 or 4-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (2) (3)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

20

or

or
or

LP2 K0910pp
LP2 K1210pp
LP2 K0901pp
LP2 K1201pp
LP2 K09004pp
LP2 K12004pp

0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480
0.480

Spring terminal connections

3
4

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP2K0910pp becomes LP2K09103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP2K0910pp becomes LP2K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP2K0910pp becomes LP2K09105pp.

3 or 4-pole low consumption reversing contactors (1)

Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5KppppFW3 and LP5KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

Screw clamp connections

20

or

or
or

LP5 K0910ppp
LP5 K1210ppp
LP5 K0901ppp
LP5 K1201ppp
LP5 K09004ppp
LP5 K12004ppp

0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490
0.490

Spring terminal connections

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5K0910pp becomes LP5K09103pp.

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5K0910pp becomes LP5K09107pp.

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code.
Example: LP5K0910pp becomes LP5K09105pp.
(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
d.c. supply (reversing contactors LP2K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts c
12
20
24 (3) 36
48
60
72
100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Code
JD
ZD
BD
CD ED
ND SD
KD
FD
GD PD
QD LD
MD MPD MUD UD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.
Low consumption (reversing contactors LP5K: 0.7130 Uc)
Volts c
12
20
24
48
72
110
120
Code
JW3
ZW3
BW3
EW3
SW3
FW3
GW3
(3) For LP2K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.

Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

Dimensions :
page 5/28

Schemes :
page 5/29

5/21

9
10

ggg

1
2
LC1, LC7, LP1 K

LP4

LC1, LC7, LP1 K

LP4

3
4
5
6
7
LC1, LP1 K

8
9
10

LC1, LC7, LP1 K

5/22

LP4

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Auxiliary contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Recommended for standard applications. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Connection

For use on contactors

Composition

Reference

Weight

kg
Screw clamp terminals

Spring terminals

Faston connectors,
1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

All products with screw clamp terminals 2

1
All products with screw clamp terminals 4
except low consumption
3
2
1

All products with spring terminals

2

1
All products with spring terminals 
4
except low consumption
3
2
1

All products with Faston connectors

2

1
All products with Faston connectors
4
except low consumption
3
2
1

2
1

1
2
3
4

2
1

1
2
3
4

2
1

1
2
3
4

LA1KN20
LA1KN02
LA1KN11
LA1KN40
LA1KN31
LA1KN22
LA1KN13
LA1KN04
LA1KN203
LA1KN023
LA1KN113
LA1KN403
LA1KN313
LA1KN223
LA1KN133
LA1KN043
LA1KN207
LA1KN027
LA1KN117
LA1KN407
LA1KN317
LA1KN227
LA1KN137
LA1KN047

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

With terminal referencing to standard EN 50012. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Screw clamp terminals
with referencing
conforming to
standard EN50012

All 3-pole + N/O products with screw

clamp terminals 
except LP4 and LP5K12

2
1

LA1KN02M
LA1KN11M

0.045
0.045

All 3-pole + N/O products with screw

clamp terminals except 
LP4 or LP5K06, K09 and K12

3
2
1

1
2
3

LA1KN31M
LA1KN22M
LA1KN13M

0.045
0.045
0.045

All 4-pole products with screw clamp

terminals except LP4 or LP5K12

LA1KN11P

0.045


All 4-pole products with screw clamp

terminals except LP4 
or LP5K09 and K12

LA1KN22P

0.045



Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum.
Control voltage 0.851.1 Uc.
Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W.
Operating temperature -10+ 60 C.
Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.

Type

Timing range

Composition

Reference

LA2KT2E

kg
0.040

LA2KT2U

0.040

V
a or c 2448

s
On-delay 130

a 110240

On-delay 130

3
4
5
6
7
8

Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor

Voltage

Weight

9
10

Characteristics :
page 5/13

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

5/23

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

References
Mounting
and connection

565018

Type

For voltages

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

a and c 1224 V

LA4KE1B

a and c 3248 V

LA4KE1E

0.010


a and c 50129 V

LA4KE1FC

0.010


a and c 130250 V

LA4KE1UG

0.010


Diode + Zener diode (2) c 1224 V

LA4KC1B

0.010


c 3248 V

LA4KC1E

0.010


a 110250 V

LA4KA1U

0.010


Clip-on fixing on the front Varistor (1)

of contactors LC1 and LP1,
with locating device.
No tools required.

2
3

LA4 Kppp

RC (3)

(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Polarised component.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).

5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
page 5/13

5/24

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

Weight
kg
0.010


References 

TeSys contactors

TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Accessories

565019

Mounting and marking accessories

Description
Mounting plates (1)

565020

DX1AP25

Application

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight
kg
0.025


For fixing on 1 4 rail

Clip-on

LA9D973

For fixing on 2 4 rails

110/120 mm 
fixing centres

10

DX1AP25

0.065


Marker holder

Clip-on

Onto front of contactor

100

LA9D90

0.001


Clip-in markers

4 maximum 
per contactor

Strips of 10 identical
numbers 09

25

AB1Pp (2)

0.002


Strips of 10 identical
letters AZ

25

AB1Gp (2)

0.002




Sold in
lots of

Unit
preference

1
2
3

Connection accessories
Description
Paralleling links

Application

Weight
kg
0.010


For 2 poles

With screw clamps

LA9E01

For 4 poles

With screw clamps

LA9E02

0.015


Set of 6
power connections

For 3-pole 
reversing contactors
for motor control

For contactors with

screw clamp terminals

100

LA9K0969

0.010



Set of 4
power connections

For 4-pole changeover

contactor pairs

For contactors with

screw clamp terminals

100

LA9K0970

0.010



LA9E01
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for fixing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for fixing a reversing contactor.
(2) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
page 5/13

Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28

Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29

5/25

TeSys contactors

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSys K contactors

Contactors
On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)

4x4

LA1 K

57

35

58

50

58

LC1 K, LC7 K, LP1 K, LP4 K

On panel

35

45

57

45
DX1 AP25

DZ5 ME5

21

35

57

110

50

120

LA9 D973
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5MB with clip-on mounting plates

45

57

58

A1

= = =

50

8,65

10x1,6

45

27

On printed circuit board

45

53

A2

Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT
On contactor

27

58

LA2 KT

38

38

38

Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On contactor LC1 K or LP1 K

10

22

58

25

57

6
22

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

5/26

References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17

Schemes :
page 5/27

57

Schemes

TeSys contactors

TeSys K reversing contactors

3-pole contactors

With integral suppression device

LC7 K

LP4 K

+A1

A1

With integral suppression device

LC7 K

LP4 K

+A1

R1

R3

R2

R4

A1

A2

A2

7/L4

5/L3
T3/6

T4/8

A1

3/L2
T2/4

A2

1/L1
T1/2

A1

2 P N/O + 2 P N/C

A2

A2

A2

T3/6

21/NC

3/L2

5/L3

T2/4

4-pole contactors
4P

22

1/L1
T1/2

5/L3

7/L4

T3/6

T4/8

A1

3/L2

A2

1/L1

T2/4

3 P + N/C

T1/2

A2

A1

3 P + N/O

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K

63/NO

51/NC

61/NC

53/NO

61/NC

64

52

62

54

62

73/NO

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

71/NC

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

71/NC

81/NC

51/NC

61/NC

71/NC

81/NC

74

84

54

62

74

84

54

62

72

84

54

62

72

82

52

62

72

82

LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043

4 N/C

63/NO

LA1 KN13, KN137, KN133

1 N/O + 3 N/C

64

LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223

2 N/O + 2 N/C

53/NO

LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313

3 N/O + 1 N/C

54

LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403

4 N/O

LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113

1 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO

LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023

2 N/C

54

LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203

2 N/O

Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012

53/NO
54

41/NC
42

31/NC
32

21/NC
22

54

53/NO

31/NC

43/NO
44

32

43/NO

31/NC

LA2 KT
1 C/O

LA4 KC

18

LA4 KE

15

16

LA1 KN13M
1 N/O + 3 N/C

44

32

13/NO
14

21/NC

21/NC
22

22

13/NO

Suppressor modules

A1

Electronic time delay contact blocks

A2

22

21/NC

53/NO
54

44

43/NO

22

33/NO

21/NC

34

LA1 KN22M
2 N/O + 2 N/C

LA1 KN22P
2 N/O + 2 N/C

14

LA1 KN11P
1 N/O + 1 N/C

34

21/NC

LA1 KN31M
3 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO

31/NC
32

LA1 KN11M
1 N/O + 1 N/C

22

21/NC
22

LA1 KN02M
2 N/C

10
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17

Dimensions :
page 5/26

5/27

TeSys contactors

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSys K reversing contactors

Reversing contactors

LC2 K, LC8 K, LP2 K, LP5 K

On panel

On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)

LA1 K

57

80

90

57

35

50

58

58

8x4

90

DZ5 ME5

57

21

35

120

50

110

2 x LA9 D973
2 x DX1 AP25
On one asymmetrical mounting rail DZ5MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1AP25.

90
57

===

A1

A1

A2

A2

45

8,65

50

58

===

45

90

On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side

8,65

27

53

20x1,6

Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT
On reversing contactors

LA2 KT

58

27

8
38

38

57

38

Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On reversing contactors LC2 K or LP2 K

10

22

58

25

6
22

Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

5/28

References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21

Schemes :
page 5/29

57

Schemes

TeSys contactors

TeSys K reversing contactors

3-pole reversing contactors

With integral suppression

device
LC8 K

LP5 K

+A1

A1
A1
A2

5/L3
T3/6

21/NC

3/L2
T2/4

A2

22

1/L1
T1/2

5/L3
T3/6

21/NC

3/L2

22

1/L1

T2/4

A1
A2

T1/2

A1
A2

5/L3
T3/6

13/NO

3/L2
T2/4

14

1/L1
T1/2

5/L3
T3/6

13/NO

3/L2

14

1/L1

T2/4

4-pole reversing contactors

Integral suppression device

With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed
circuit board)
2N

A1
7
8

A2

A2

5
6

A1

3
4

L3

L2

L1

A2

A1
A2

A1

7
8

A2

5
6

2/L3

3
4

2/L2

1
2

2/L1

7
8

1N

5
6

1/L3

3
4

1/L2

1
2

A1
A2

LP5 K

4P
1/L1

4P

LC8 K

+A1

A2

A1
T1/2

With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board)

3 P + N/O
3 P + N/C

With screw clamp connections

1
2

A2

A1
A2

5/L3

21/NC
22

T3/6

1/L1

3/L2
T2/4

T1/2

5/L3

21/NC
22

T3/6

3/L2

1/L1

T2/4

A1
A2

T1/2

A1
A2

5/L3

13/NO
14

T3/6

3/L2

3 P + N/C

T2/4

1/L1
T1/2

5/L3

13/NO
14

T3/6

T2/4

T1/2

A1

1/L1

3/L2

With screw clamp connections

3 P + N/O

A2

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1K

21/NC

82

22

81/NC

72

13/NO
71/NC

62

14

61/NC

52

33/NO

51/NC

82

34

81/NC

72

21/NC
71/NC

62

22

61/NC

32

53/NO
54

31/NC

83/NO
84

21/NC
71/NC
72

22

61/NC
62

61/NC

53/NO
54

62

83/NO
84

53/NO
73/NO
74

54

61/NC
62

61/NC

53/NO
54

62

LA KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043

1 N/O + 3 N/C
4 N/C

83/NO

51/NC

LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223

2 N/O + 2 N/C

84

52

LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313

3 N/O + 1 N/C

73/NO

63/NO
64

LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403

4 N/O

74

53/NO

LA1 KN11P
1 N/O + 1 N/C

63/NO

LA1 KN11M
1 N/O + 1 N/C

64

LA KN02M
2 N/C

53/NO

LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113

1 N/O + 1 N/C

54

LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023

2 N/C

54

Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012

LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203
2 N/O

Electronic time delay contact blocks

Suppressor modules
LA4 KC

LA4 KE

18

16

15

A2

A1

LA2 KT
1 C/O

+
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13

References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21

10

Dimensions :
page 5/28

5/29

Characteristics

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

Environment

1
2
3

Rated insulation voltage

(Ui)

Conforming to 60947, 
VDE 0110 grC,BS 5424, 
CSA 22-2 n 14, UL508

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424

Approvals

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

(DIN 50015)

TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 50+ 70

Operation

- 20+ 50

Without derating

2000

Maximum operating altitude

690

Operating position

Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

4
Without derating

5
6

Cabling,
screw clamp terminals

Tightening torque

Min

Max

Solid conductor

mm2

1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5

1 x 6 or 2 x 4

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35

1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35

1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5

Pozidriv n 1 head

N.m

0.8

Terminal referencing

Conforming to standards En 50005

7
8
9
10
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35

5/30

Without derating

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes:
page 5/37

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature 
(Ith)
y 55 C

12

Rated operational frequency

Hz

50/60

Frequency limits of the

operational current
Rated operational voltage (Ue) 

Hz

Up to 400

690

Rated making capacity

I rms conforming to 
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947

66

Rated breaking capacity

(for Ue y 400 V)

Conforming to NF C 63-110 and

IEC60947 (I rms)

52

Short time rating

In free air for a time t

from cold state (q y 55 C)

50

Short-circuit protection
Average impedance per pole

gl fuse U y 440 V
At Ith and 50 Hz

A
mW

16
4

12

20

Maximum rated operational current

For a temperature 
AC-3 (1) 
y 55 C
(Ue y 400 V)
AC-1
Utilisation in category AC-1
resistive circuits, heating,
lighting
(Ue y 440 V)

Increase in operational current

by paralleling of poles

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)

Up to

690

Rated insulation voltage

(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947,

BS5424, 
VDE 0110 group C, 
CSA C 22-2 n 14

690

Conventional thermal current For ambiant temperature

(Ith)
y 55 C

10

Frequency of operational
current

Hz

Up to 400

10

1
2
3
4

Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947 and

VDE 0660, gl fuse

5
6
7

Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15
Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating
cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the
coil of an electromagnet: making current 
(cos j 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current
(cos j 0.4).
110/ 220/ 380/
V
24
48
127 230 400 440
VA
48
96
240 440 800 880
VA
17
34
86
158 288 317
VA
7
14
36
66
120 132
VA
1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000
(1) For LC1 contactors.

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Occasional making capacity

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid up to 1200
operating cycles per hour) on an inductive
load such as the coil of an electromagnet,
without economy resistor, the time
constant increasing with the load.
V
W
W
W
W

24
120
55
15
720

48
80
38
11
600

110
60
30
9
400

220
52
28
8
300

440
51
26
7
230

8
9
10

References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes:
page 5/37

5/31

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

Control circuit characteristics

Type
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits
(q y 50 C)

Average coil consumption

at 20 C and at Uc

LC1SK06
a 24400

LP1SK06
c 1272

For operation

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

For drop-out

u 0.20 Uc

u 0.10 Uc

Inrush

16 VA

2.2 W

Sealed

4.2 VA

2.2 W

1.4

2.2

ms

816

1018

ms

714

812

opening of the N/O contacts

ms

68

46

closing of the N/C contacts

ms

810

68

Heat dissipation

Operating time at 20 C and at Uc

Between coil
opening of the N/C contacts
energisation and
closing of the N/O contacts
Between coil deenergisation and

Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles per hour

1200

1200

Mechanical durability at Uc
In millions of operating cycles

50/60 Hz coil

10

c coil

10

5
6
7
8
9
10
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35

5/32

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes:
page 5/37

Contactor selection guide

according to required
electrical durability

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

5

Millions of operating cycles

Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors

with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the
rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.

10
9
8
7
6
5
4

3
2
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6

0,5
0,4
0,3
2

220/380/415 V

2,5

500 V
220/230 V
380/400 V
415 V

2,5

0,55

0,75

4
1,1

7
5

8
6

1,5

2,2 kW

1,1

1,5

2,2

4 kW

1,1

1,5

2,2

4 kW

Current broken in A

only up to 415 V

Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95).

The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the
current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.

Millions of operating cycles

Use in category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)

10
8
7
6
5
4

3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4

0,3
0,2

0,15
0,1

2,5

9 10

12

15
20
30 40
Current broken in A

9
10
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes :
page 5/37

5/33

References

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

b Width of contactor 27 mm.

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail.
b Screw clamp terminals.

1
511131

Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-3

Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in
category AC-3 (1)
220 V
380 V
660 V
230 V
415 V
690 V

kW
1.1
LC1SK06

kW
2.2

kW
2.2

A
12
511132

A
6

Number of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Basic reference.
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage (2)

LC1SK0600pp

Weight

kg
0.132

Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-1

Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 55 C)
utilisation category AC-1

Rated operational
voltage in AC-3
up to 400 V

Control circuit
supply

Number of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Basic reference.
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage (2)

a.c.
d.c.

2
2

LC1SK0600pp
LP1SK0600pp

Weight

kg
0.132
0.132

Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)

For use on contactor

Number of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Reference

Weight
kg

LA1SK10

0.022

LA1SK01

0.022

5
LA1SK10

LC1SK06
clip-on front mounting

Nota : Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page.
(1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting
on the contactor.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (variable delivery times, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

Mini-contactors LC1SK
Volts a
50/60 Hz
Code

24

48

110

120

220

230

240

380

400

B7

E7

F7

G7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

12
JD

24
BD

36
CD

48
ED

72
SD

Mini-contactors LP1SK
Volts c
Code

8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33

5/34

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes:
page 5/37

References

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor

modules

511133

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Clip-on front mounting
For use on
contactor

LC1SK06

Maximum
number of
blocks per
contactor

Composition

Reference

LA1SK20

kg
0.022

LA1SK02

0.022

LA1SK11

0.022

LA1SK11

Weight

1
2

Coil suppressor modules

511134

Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use

oftools
For use on
contactors

Type

LC1SK06 and Varistor (1)

LP1SK06

For voltages

Sold in lots of Unit reference

Weight
kg
0.003

a and c 
10
LA4SKE1E
24 V48 V
a and c 
10
LA4SKE1U
0.003
110 V250 V
Diode (2)
c
10
LA4SKC1U
0.003
24 V250 V
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of
transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).

LA4SKp1p

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33

Dimensions:
page 5/36

Schemes:
page 5/37

5/35

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK

Dimensions

Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1SK06

84,5
55,5

27

56

2
LA1 SK (1)

LA4 SK

3,5

(1) Only on LC1SK06.

Mounting

Mini-contactors

55,5

27

56

LC1 and LP1SK06

On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)

5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33

5/36

References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35

Schemes:
page 5/37

Schemes

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1SK and LP1SK

Schemes

2-pole mini-contactors

1/L1

3/L2
T2/4

A2

A1
T1/2

LC1 and LP1SK06

Add-on power pole block

21/NC

22

5/L3

1 pole + 1 N/C aux.

LA1SK01

T3/6

13/NO
14

T3/6

5/L3

1 pole + 1 N/O aux.

LA1SK10

2 N/O
LA1SK20

2 N/C
LA1SK02

1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1SK11

33/NO

43/NO

31/NC

41/NC

33/NO

41/NC

34

44

32

42

34

42

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33

References :
pages 5/34 and 5/35

Dimensions:
page 5/36

5/37

Characteristics

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC, 

for use in modular panels

Environment

1
2
3

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947,

VDE 0110 gr C, BS5424, 
CSA 22-2 n 14, UL508

690

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment
Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60068 

(DIN 50015)
Conforming to VDE 0106

TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Protection against direct finger contact

Ambient air temperature around the device

Storage
Operation

C
C

- 50+ 70
- 20+ 50

Maximum operating altitude

2000

Without derating

Operating position

Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

Without derating

Without derating

4
Cabling, connectors

5
Tightening torque

Solid conductor
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end

mm2
mm2
mm2

Min.
1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5
1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35
1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35

Pozidriv n 1 head

N.m

0.8

Terminal referencing

Conforming to standards En 50005

6
7
8
9
10
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

5/38

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

Max.
1 x 6 or 2 x 4
1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5
1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1 SKGC, 
for use in modular panels

Pole characteristics
Mini-contactor type
Conventional
For ambient temperature y 55 C
thermal current (Ith)
Rated operational frequency

LC1 SKGC2
20

Hz

50/60

Frequency limit of the operational current

Hz

up to 400

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Rated making capacity

690

I rms conforming to 
NF C 63-110 and IEC60947
Conforming to 
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
(I rms)
In free air for a time t 
from cold state (q y 55 C)
gl fuse U y 440 V

50

85

40

68

40

60

20

20

At Ith and 50 Hz

mW

20

20

32

32

Rated breaking capacity

(for Ue y 400V)
Permissible
short time rating
Short-circuit protection
Average impedance
per pole
Maximum rated
operational current

For temperature 
y 55 C

AC-3
(Ue y 400 V)
AC-1

Use in category AC-1

resistive circuits, heating,
lighting (Ue y 440 V)

Increase in rated operational

current by paralleling of 2poles

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

Up to

690

Conforming to IEC 60947, 

BS 5424, VDE0110 group C,
CSA C 22-2 n 14
For ambient temperature y 55 C

690

10

Hz

Up to 400

LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4

20

1
2
3
4

Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-contactors

Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947 and

A
10
VDE 0660, gl fuse
Operational power of contacts
a.c. supply, category AC-15
conforming to IEC 60947
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an
electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10times
the power broken (cos j 0.4).

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Occasional making capacity

24

48

VA
VA
VA
VA

48
17
7
1000

96
34
14
2050

110/
127
240
86
36
5000

220/
230
440
158
66
10000

380/
400
800
288
120
14000

440
880
317
132
13000

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of
an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time
constant increasing with the load.
V

24

48

110

220

440

W
W
W
W

120
55
15
720

80
38
11
600

60
30
9
400

52
28
8
300

51
26
7
230

6
7
8
9
10

References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

5/39

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1 SKGC, 
for use in modular panels

Control circuit characteristics

Mini-contactor type
Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)
Control voltage limits
(q y 55 C)

2
3
4

LC1 SKGC2
a 24400

Operation
For drop-out

LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4

0.851.1 Uc
0.20 Uc

Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc

Inrush
Sealed

VA
VA

16
4.2

23
4.9

Heat dissipation

1.4

1.5

Operating time at 20 C and at Uc

Between coil
opening of the N/C contacts
energisation and
closing of the N/O contacts

ms
ms

816
714

ms
ms

68
810

Between coil 
de-energisation and

opening of the N/O contacts

closing of the N/C contacts

Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles per hour

1200

Mechanical durability at Uc
in millions of operating cycles

50/60 Hz coil

10

5
6
7
8
9
10
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

5/40

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

Contactor selection
according to required
electrical durability

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1 SKGC, 
for use in modular panels
5

Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Millions of operating cycles

Control of 3-phase asynchronous 

squirrel cage motors with 
breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal 
to the rated operational current of the motor.

10
9
8
7
6
5
4

2
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6

0,5
0,4
0,3
2

220/380/415 V

2,5

500 V
220/230 V
380/400 V
415 V

2,5

0,55

0,75

7
5

1,1

8
6

1,5

2,2 kW

1,1

1,5

2,2

4 kW

1,1

1,5

2,2

4 kW

Current broken in A

1 LC1 SKGC2
2 LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4
- - - - - only up to 415 V

Use in category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)

Millions of operating cycles

Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95).

The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal 
to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.

10
8
7
6
5
4

3
2

1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4

0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1

2,5

9 10

12

15

20
30
40
Current broken in A

10
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

5/41

References

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC, 

for use in modular panels

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or fixing by four 4 screws, except for LC1SKGC200.

b Connection by connectors.
b Mini-contactor fitted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.

1
511135

Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V 380 V
660 V
230 V 415 V
690 V

kW

kW

kW

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
up to
400V
A
5

Non inductive No. of poles

loads
category AC-1
maximum
current
qy50C
A
20
2

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

Weight

kg
0.132

LC1 SKGC200pp

LC1 SKGC200

Mini-contactors, width 45 mm

511136

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
220 V 380 V
660 V
230 V 415 V
690 V

kW
1.1

kW
4

kW
4

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
up to
400V
A
9

Non inductive No. of poles

loads
category AC-1
maximum
current
qy50C
A
20
3
1

LC1 SKGC400

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

Weight

LC1 SKGC310pp

kg
0.175

LC1 SKGC301pp

0.175

LC1 SKGC400pp

0.175

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office)

Volts a
50/60 Hz
Code

24

48

110

120

220

230

240

380

400

B7

E7

F7

G7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41

5/42

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

References

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1 SKGC, 
for use in modular panels
Suppressor modules

511134

Suppressor modules

Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on contactors
LA4 SKp1p

LC1 SKGC

Type

For voltages

Varistor
(1)

Diode
(2)

a and c 2448 V

Sold in
lots of
10

Unit
reference
LA4 SKE1E

Weight
kg
0.003

a and c 110250 V

10

LA4 SKE1U

0.003

c 24250 V

10

LA4 SKC1U

0.003

1
2
3

(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41

Dimensions :
page 5/44

Schemes :
page 5/45

5/43

TeSys contactors

Dimensions,
mounting

Dimensions

Mounting

Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC2

55,5

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)

55,5
27

56

27

2
3,5

Mounting

Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4

56
45

On panel

58

4
LA4 SK

34-35

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41

5/44

References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)

56
45

48-50

Dimensions

Schemes :
page 5/45

58

LA4 SK

Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC, 

for use in modular panels

56

Schemes

TeSys contactors

Mini-contactors TeSys

LC1 SKGC, 
for use in modular panels

2-pole mini-contactors

1/L1

3/L2
T2/4

A2

A1
T1/2

LC1 SKGC2

2
3-pole mini-contactors

5/L3
T3/6

21/NC

3/L2
T2/4

22

1/L1
T1/2

A1
A2

5/L3
T3/6

13/NO

3/L2

14

1/L1
A2

A1

T2/4

LC1 SKGC301

T1/2

LC1 SKGC310

4-pole mini-contactors

7/L4

5/L3

3/L2

T4/8

T3/6

T2/4

T1/2

A2

A1

1/L1

LC1 SKGC400

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41

References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43

Dimensions :
page 5/44

5/45

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors

All types of control system

1
2
Rated operational current

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

9A

le AC-1 (q y 60 C)

20/25 A

18 A

25 A

32 A

25/32 A

25/40 A

50 A

38 A

Rated operational voltage

690 V on a and c

Number of poles

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

220/240 V

2.2 kW

3 kW

4 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

9 kW

380/400 V

4 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

415/440 V

4 kW

5.5 kW

9 kW

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

500 V

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

10 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

660/690 V

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

10 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

1000 V

Rated operational power

in AC-3

Auxiliary contacts

1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to
the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay
and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.

Thermal overload relays

manual-auto compatible

Class 10 A

0.1010 A

0.1013 A

0.1018 A

0.1032 A

Class 20

2.510 A

2.513 A

2.518 A

2.532 A

Suppressor modules
(c and low consumption
contactors are fitted with a
built-in bidirectional peak
limiting diode suppressior
as standard)

Varistor

Diode

RC circuit

Bidirectional peak
limiting diode

Interfaces

Relay output
Relay interface with
manual override switch

Contactor
type references

Reversing contactor
type references

0.1038 A

0.1038 A

Solid state

a or c 3 pole
a 4 pole

LC1 D09
LC1 DT20/

LC1 D12
LC1 DT25/

LC1 D18
LC1 DT32/

LC1 D25
LC1 DT40/

c 4 pole

LC1 D098

LC1 D128

LC1 D188

LC1 D258

LC1 D32

LC1 D38

a 3 pole

c 4 pole

LC2 D09
LC2 D09
LC2 DT20
LC2 DT20

LC2 D12
LC2 D12
LC2 DT25
LC2 DT25

LC2 D18
LC2 D18
LC2 DT32
LC2 DT32

LC2 D25
LC2 D25
LC2 DT40
LC2 DT40

LC2 D32
LC2 D32

LC2 D38
LC2 D38

Contactors

5/62 to 5/67

Reversing contactors

5/72 to 5/75

c 3 pole
a 4 pole

10

12 A

Pages

5/46

1
2
40 A

50 A

60 A

80 A

65 A

80 A

690 V a or c

95 A

125 A

115 A

150 A

200 A

1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

22 kW

30 kW

22 kW

25/30 kW

22 kW

30 kW

30 kW

22 kW

25 kW

30 kW

40 kW

37 kW

45 kW

55 kW

75 kW

37 kW

45 kW

45 kW

59 kW

80 kW

37 kW

55 kW

55 kW

75 kW

90 kW

33 kW

37 kW

45 kW

45 kW

80 kW

100 kW

45 kW

45 kW

75 kW

90 kW

1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to
1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.

1340 A

1350 A

1365 A

17104 A

1340 A

1350 A

1365 A

1780 A

17104 A

60150 A

60150 A

60150 A

60150 A

LC1 D40A
LC1 DT60A
LC1 DT60A

LC1 D50A

LC1 D65A
LC1 DT80A
LC1 DT80A

LC1 D80
LC1 D80
LC1 D80

LC1 D95

LC1 D115
LC1 D115
LC1 D115

LC1 D150

LC2 D40A
LC2 D40A

LC2 D50A
LC2 D50A

LC2 D65A
LC2 D65A

LC2 D80

LC2 D80

LC2 D95

LC2 D115

LC2 D115

LC2 D150

5
6
7
8
9
10

5/62 to 5/67
5/72 to 5/75

5/47

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys contactors

TeSys D low consumption contactors

Automation systems

1
2
Rated operational current

3
4

7
8

12 A

18 A

le AC-1 (q y 60 C)

20/25 A

20/25 A

25/32 A

690 V

Number of poles

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

220/240 V

2.2 kW

3 kW

4 kW

380/400 V

4 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

415/440 V

4 kW

5.5 kW

9 kW

500 V

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

10 kW

660/690 V

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

10 kW

Rated operational
power in AC-3

Coil consumption

2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V)

Operating ranges

0.71.25 Uc

Operating time
at 20 C and at Uc

Closing

70 ms

Opening

25 ms

Auxiliary contact block modules

1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks
common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts

Interference suppression

Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode

Contactor type

Reversing contactor type

9A

Rated operational voltage

5
6

le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Pages

3-pole

LC1 D09

LC1 D12

LC1 D18

4-pole

LC1 DT20/D098

LC1 DT25/D128

LC1 DT32/D188

3-pole

LC2 D09

LC2 D12

LC2 D18

4-pole

LC2 DT20

LC2 DT25

LC2 DT32

Contactors

5/62 to 5/67

Reversing contactors

5/72 to 5/75
(1) With low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
(2) With 2 low consumption kits LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

10

5/48

1
2

pg3

25 A

32 A

38 A

40 A

50 A

65 A

25/40 A

50 A

50 A

60 A

80 A

690 V

690 V

3 or 4

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

9 kW

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

22 kW

30 kW

11 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

22 kW

25/30 kW

37 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

22 kW

30 kW

37 kW

15 kW

18.5 kW

18.5 kW

30 kW

33 kW

37 kW

2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V)

0.6 W (25 mA - 24 V) for relay LA4 DFB + the power consumed by the
contactor coil

0.71.25 Uc

70 ms

25 ms

4
5
6
7

1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O
instantaneous standard contacts
Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode

LC1 D25

LC1 D32

LC1 D38

LC1 DT40/D258
LC2 D25

LC2 D32

LC2 D38

LC1 D40A (1)

LC1 D50A (1)

LC1 D65A (1)

LC2 D40A (2)

LC2 D50A (2)

LC2 D65A (2)

LC2 DT40

5/62 to 5/67
5/72 to 5/75

10

5/49

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

TeSys D contactors

Contactor type

2
3
4

Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,

overvoltage category III, 
degree of pollution: 3

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Conforming to IEC 60947

kV

D25D38
DT32 and
DT40

D40AD65A
DT60A and
DT80A

D80D95

D115 and
D150

1000

Conforming to standards

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14.

Product certifications

UL, CSA (1), CCC, GOST

GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS (pending for contactors LC1 D40A to D65A)

Degree of protection (2)

(front face only)

Conforming to VDE 0106 

and IEC 60529
Power circuit connections

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Coil connection

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-30

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 60+ 80

Operation

- 5+ 60

Permissible

- 40+ 70, for operation at Uc

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions
(3)

Without derating 
in the following positions

TH

a/c

Positions that are 

not permissible

For c contactors LC1 D09 to LC1 D65A.

Conforming to UL 94

V1

90

90

180

Environment

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

D09D18
DT20 and
DT25

180

LC1

7
Flame resistance

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Shock resistance (4)

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Vibration resistance (4)

5300 Hz

850

Contactor open

10 gn

8 gn

10 gn

8 gn

6 gn

Contactor closed

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

10 gn

15 gn

Contactor open

2 gn

Contactor closed

4 gn

4 gn

4 gn

3 gn

4 gn

(1) Contactor LC1 D95 with d.c. coil is not UL/CSA certified.
(2) Protection provided for the cabling c.s.a.'s indicated on the next page and for connection by cable.
(3) When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop.
(4) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction (coil energised at Ue).

10

5/50

TeSys contactors

Characteristics (continued)

Contactor type

TeSys D contactors

LC1

D09
D18
and D12 (3P)
DT20
and DT25

D25
(3P)

D32

D38

D18 and
D25 (4P)
DT32 and
DT40

D40A to
D80
D65A
and D95
DT60A
and
DT80A (1)

D115
and D150

Screw clamp terminals

Connector
2 inputs

Screw
clamp
terminals

Connector
1 input

Connector
2 inputs

Power circuit connections

Screw clamp terminal connections

Tightening
Flexible cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

1.56 2.510

2.510

135

450

10120

2 conductors

mm2

14

1.56 2.510

2.510

125
425
and 135

10120
+ 1050

Flexible cable
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

16

110

2.510

135

450

10120

2 conductors

mm2

12.5

14

1.56

2.510

125
416
and 135

10120
+ 1050

Solid cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

1.56 1.510

2.516

135

450

10120

2 conductors

mm2

14

1.56 2.510

2.516

125
425
and 135

10120
+ 1050

Screwdriver

Philips

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

Flat screwdriver

6 8

N.m

1.7

1.7

2.5

1.8

5:
9
y 25 mm2
8: 35 mm2

1 conductor

mm2

2.5
4
(4: DT25)

10

2 conductors

mm2

2.5
(except
DT25)

Hexagonal key
Tightening torque

12

2
3
4

Spring terminal connections (2)

Flexible cable
without cable end

Connection by bars or lugs

Bar c.s.a.

3 x 16

5 x 25

Lug external

mm

10

10

16.5

17

25

of screw

mm

M3.5

M3.5

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M6

M8

Philips

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

Flat screwdriver

10

10

13

1.7

1.7

2.5

2.5

1.8

12

Screwdriver

Key for hexagonal headed screw

Tightening torque

N.m

Control circuit connections

Connection by cable (tightening via screw clamps)

Flexible cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12.5

2 conductors

mm2

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12.5

Flexible cable
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

14

14

14

14

14

12.5

12.5

2 conductors

mm2

12.5

12.5 12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

Solid cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12.5

2 conductors

mm2

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12.5

Screwdriver

Philips

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

Flat screwdriver

N.m

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.2

1.2

1 conductor

mm2

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

0.752.5

2 conductors

mm2

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

0.752.5

mm

mm

Tightening torque

7
8

Spring terminal connections (2)

Flexible cable
without cable end

Connection by bars or lugs

Lug external
of screw
Screwdriver
Tightening torque

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

M3.5

Philips

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

N 2

Flat screwdriver

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.7

1.2

1.2

N.m

(1) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4,
see page 5/85).
(2) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm2, use 1.5 mm2) and square crimp the cable ends using a special tool.

5/51

10

TeSys contactors

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys D contactors

Contactor type

1
2
3
4

LC1

Pole characteristics

D09
(3P)

Rated operational current (Ie)

(Ue y 440 V)

In AC-3, q y 60 C

In AC-1, q y 60 C

25 (1)

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Up to

690

Frequency limits

Of the operational current

Hz

25400

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

q y 60 C

25 (1)

Rated making capacity (440 V)

DT20
D098

D12
(3P)

DT25
D128

D18
(3P)

25

32 (1)

12
20

25 (1)

18

690
25 (1)

32 (1)

40 (1)

40 (1)

Conforming to IEC 60947

250

250

300

450

250

250

300

450

Permissible short time rating

No current flowing for preceding
15 minutes with q y 40 C

For 1 s

210

210

240

380

For 10 s

105

105

145

240

For 1 min

61

61

84

120

For 10 min

30

30

40

50

type 1 A

25

40

50

63

type 2 A

20

25

35

40

Without thermal
overload relay, 
gG fuse

40

25400
32

Rated breaking capacity (440 V) Conforming to IEC 60947

Fuse protection
against short-circuits 
(U y 690 V)

DT40
D258

690

25400
25

D25
(3P)
25

32

690

25400
20

DT32
D188

40

With thermal overload relay

See pages 6/20 to 6/22, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated
thermal overload relay

Average impedance per pole

At Ith and 50 Hz

mW

2.5

2.5

2.5

Power dissipation per pole for

the above operational currents

AC-3

0.20

0.36

0.8

1.25

AC-1

1.56

1.56

2.5

3.2

12690

Control circuit characteristics, a.c. supply

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

50/60 Hz

Control voltage limits

50 or 60 Hz coils

50/60 Hz coils

Operation

Drop-out

Operation

0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C

Drop-out

Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz Inrush

0.30.6 Uc at 60 C
50 Hz coil

VA

Cos j
Sealed

0.75

50/60 Hz coil

VA

70

50 Hz coil

VA

Cos j
a 60 Hz Inrush

0.3

50/60 Hz coil

VA

60 Hz coil

VA

Cos j

Sealed

0.75

50/60 Hz coil

VA

70

60 Hz coil

VA

Cos j
50/60 Hz coil
Heat dissipation

8
9

50/60 Hz

0.3
VA

7.5

23

Operating time
(2)

Closing "C"

ms

1222

Opening "O"

ms

419

Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles

50 or 60 Hz coil

50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz

15

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature y 60 C

In operating cycles per hour

3600

(1) Versions with spring terminal connections:

16 A for LC1 D093 and LC1 D123 (20 A possible with 2 x 2.5 mm2 in parallel),
25 A for LC1 D183 to LC1 D323 (32 A possible for LC1 D183 connected with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel; 40 A possible for LC1 D253 and LC1D323 connected
with 2 x 4 mm2 in parallel).
(2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to closure of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the
moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/52

References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

D32

D38

D40A

DT60A

D50A

D65A

DT80A

D80

D95

D115

D150

32

38

40

50

65

80

95

115

150

50 (1)

50

60

60

80

80

80

125

125

200

200

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

1000

1000

1000

1000

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

25400

50

50

60

60

80

80

80

125

125

200

200

550

550

800

800

900

1000

1000

1100

1100

1260

1660

550

550

800

800

900

1000

1000

1100

1100

1100

1400

430

430

720

720

810

900

900

990

1100

1100

1400

260

310

320

320

400

520

520

640

800

950

1200

138

150

165

165

208

260

260

320

400

550

580

60

60

72

72

84

110

110

135

135

250

250

63

63

80

80

100

125

125

200

200

250

315

63

63

80

80

100

125

125

160

160

200

250

1
2
3

See pages 6/20 to 6/22 for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay
2

1.5

1.6

1.5

1.5

1.6

0.8

0.8

0.6

0.6

2.4

3.7

6.3

5.1

7.2

7.9

13.5

5.4

5.8

9.6

9.6

10.2

12.5

12.5

24

24

12690

12690

0.851.1 Uc at 55 C

24500

0.30.6 Uc at 55 C

0.30.5 Uc at 55 C

0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz 
at 60 C

0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C

0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz 
at 55 C

0.81.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz
at 55 C

0.30.6 Uc at 60 C

0.30.6 Uc at 60 C

0.30.6 Uc at 55 C

0.30.5 Uc at 55 C

200

300

0.75

0.75

0.75

0.8

0.9

70

160

245

280350

280350

20

22

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.9

15

26

218

218

220

300

0.75

0.75

0.75

0.8

0.9

70

140

245

280350

280350

22

22

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.9

7.5

13

26

218

218

23

45

610

38

34.5

1222

1226

1226

1226

1226

1226

2035

2035

2050

2035

419

419

419

419

419

419

620

620

620

4075

10

10

15

3600

3600

3600

3600

3600

3600

3600

3600

2400

1200

5
6
7
8
9
10

5/53

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors

Contactor type

1
2

d.c. control circuit characteristics

4
5
6
7
8

LC1 D40AD65A
LC1 DT60A and
DT80A
12440

Rated control circuit

voltage
(Uc)

12440

Rated insulation voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Control voltage limits

Operation

Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Operating time (1)

average at Uc

LC1 or LP1 D80

LC1 D95

LC1 D115 and

LC1 D150

24440

Standard
coil

0.71.25 Uc
at 60 C

0.751.25 Uc
at 60 C

0.851.1 Uc
at 55 C

0.751.2 Uc
at 55 C

Wide range
coil

0.751.2 Uc
at 55 C

0.10.25 Uc
at 60 C

0.10.3 Uc
at 60 C

0.10.3 Uc 
at 55 C

0.150.4 Uc
at 55 C

Drop-out

LC1 D09D38
LC1 DT20DT40

Inrush

5.4

19

22

270365

Sealed

5.4

7.4

22

2.45.1

Closing

"C"

ms

63 15 %

50 15%

95130

2035

Opening

ms

20 20 %

20 20%

2035

4075

Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Time constant (L/R)

ms

28

34

75

25

Mechanical durability at Uc

In millions of operating cycles

30

10

10

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature y 60 C

In operating cycles per hour

3600

3600

3600

1200

Low consumption control circuit characteristics

Rated insulation voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Maximum voltage

Of the control circuit on c

250

Average consumption
d.c. at 20 C and at Uc

Wide range coil

(0.71.25 Uc)

Inrush

2.4

Sealed

2.4

Operating time (1)

at Uc and at 20 C

Closing

"C"

ms

77 15 %

Opening

ms

25 20 %

Voltage limits (q y 60 C)
of the control circuit

Operation

0.8 to 1.25 Uc

Drop-out

0.10.3 Uc

40

Time constant (L/R)

ms

Mechanical durability

In millions of operating cycles

30

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature y 60 C

In operating cycles per hour

3600

(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode.
The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/54

References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors

Characteristics of auxiliary contacts incorporated in the contactor

Mechanically linked
contacts

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same
movable contact holder

Mirror contact

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and
can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)

Up to

690

Rated insulation voltage

(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

For ambient temperature y 60 C

10

Frequency of the operational current

Hz

25400

Minimum switching
capacity l = 108

U min

17

I min

mA

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Rated making capacity

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1,

Irms

a: 140, c: 250

Short-time rating

Permissible for

1s

100

500 ms

120

100 ms

140

MW

> 10

ms

1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time

Guaranteed between 
N/C and N/O contacts

2
3

gG fuse: 10 A

Operational power of contacts

conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making
current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power
broken (cos j 0.4).
V

24

48

24

48

125

250

440

1 million operating cycles

VA

60

120 280 560 960 1050 1440

96

76

76

76

44

3 million operating cycles

VA

16

32

80

160 280 300

420

48

38

38

32

10 million operating cycles

VA

20

40

100

14

12

12

115 230 400 440

70

80

600

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
economy resistor, the time constant increasing
with the load.

10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,2 0,3 0,5 0,8
0,4 0,6 1

5 8
4 6 10
Current broken in A
2

10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,1

125 V

48 V

24 V

250 V
440 V

0,2 0,3 0,5 0,8

0,4 0,6 1

5
6

DC-13
Millions of oprating cycles

Millions of oprating cycles

AC-15

0,1
0,1

10

Current broken in A

8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Dimensions:
pages5/92 to 5/95

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/55

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp

protected contacts for TeSys D contactors

Contact block type

1
2
3

LAD N or LAD C

Environment

IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 60+ 80

Operation

- 5+ 60

Permissible for operation at Uc

- 40+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Connection by cable

Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid cable 
with or without cable end

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Spring terminal connections

Flexible or solid cable 

without cable end

mm2

Max: 2 x 2.5

Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

5
6

1, 2 or 4

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)

Up to

690

Rated insulation voltage 

(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

For ambient temperature 

y 60 C

10

Hz

25400

U min

17

I min

mA

Frequency of the operational current

Minimum switching capacity

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

and VDE 0660. gG fuse

10

Rated making capacity

Conforming to 
IEC 60947-5-1

I rms

a: 140; c: 250

Short-time rating

Permissible for

1s

100

500 ms

120

100 ms

140

MW

> 10

Insulation resistance

7
8

LAD 8

Non-overlap time

Guaranteed between 
N/C and N/O contacts

ms

1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Overlap time

Guaranteed between N/C and

N/O contacts on LAD C22

ms

1.5

Time delay
(LADT, R and S contact blocks)
Accuracy only valid for 
setting range indicated 
on the front face

Ambient air temperature

for operation

- 40+ 70

- 40+ 70

Repeat accuracy

2%

2%

Drift up to 0.5 million 

operating cycles

+ 15 %

+ 15 %

Drift depending on 
ambient air temperature

0.25 % per C

0.25 % per C

In millions of operating cycles

30

30

Mechanical durability

LAD R

Conforming to standards

Number of contacts

LAD T and LAD S

Operational power
of contacts

See page 5/58

10
References :
pages 5/79 and 5/80

5/56

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

TeSys contactors

Characteristics (continued)

Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp

protected contacts for TeSys D contactors

Contact block type

LA1 DX

LA1 DZ
Protected

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC60947-5-1, VDE0660

Product certifications

UL, CSA

LA1 DY
Non protected

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

Storage and operation

- 25+ 70

Cabling

Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid conductor 
with or without cable end

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Number of contacts

Contact characteristics

1
2

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)

Up to

50

50

690

24

Rated insulation voltage 

(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

250

250

690

250

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

For ambient temperature

y 40 C

10

Maximum operational current

(Ie)

mA

500

500

50

Frequency of the operational current

Hz

25400

U min

I min

mA

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

Minimum switching capacity

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 609475-1

gG fuse

10

Rated making capacity

Conforming to 
IEC 609475-1

I rms

a:140; c: 250

Short-time rating

Permissible for

1s

100

500 ms

120

100 ms

140

MW

> 10

> 10

> 10

> 10

30

Insulation resistance
Mechanical durability

In millions of operating cycles

Materials and technology

used for dust and damp protected contacts

Silver - Single

break Silver - Single

break

3
4
5
6

Gold - Single break

with

crossed bars

7
8
9
10

References :
page 5/79

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/57

TeSys contactors

Characteristics (continued)

Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp

protected contacts for TeSys D contactors

Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

2
3

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: 
making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
V

24

48

115

230

400

440

600

1 million operating cycles

VA

60

120

280

560

960

1050

1440

3 million operating cycles

VA

16

32

80

160

280

300

420

10 million operating cycles

VA

20

40

70

80

100

Millions of oprating cycles

10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5

0,4
0,3
0,2

0,1

7
8

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,8 1
0,7 0,9

10

Current broken in A

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy
resistor, the time constant increasing with the load.
V

24

48

125

250

440

1 million operating cycles

120

90

75

68

61

3 million operating cycles

70

50

38

33

28

10 million operating cycles

25

18

14

12

10

Millions of operating cycles

0,1

10
8
7
6
5
4

24 V
48 V
125 V

3
250 V

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5

440 V

0,4
0,3

0,2

0,1

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,8 1
0,7 0,9

10

Current broken
in A

10
References :
pages 5/79 to 5/83

5/58

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Control modules, coil suppressor modules and

mechanical latch blocks for TeSys D contactors

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-5-1

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

40+ 80

Operation

25+ 55

Permissible for operation at Uc

25+ 70

Suppressor modules
Module type

Type of protection
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Maximum peak voltage

Natural RC frequency

Mechanical latch blocks

LA4 DA, LAD 4RC, LA4 DB, LAD 4T,

LAD 4RC3
LAD 4T3

LA4 DC, LAD 4D3

LA4 DE, LAD 4V,

LAD 4V3

RC circuit

Bidirectional 
peak limiting diode

Diode

Varistor

a 24415

a or c 24440

c 12250

a or c 24250

3 Uc

2 Uc

Uc

2 Uc

24/48 V

Hz

400

50/127 V

Hz

200

110/240 V

Hz

100

380/415 V

Hz

150

LAD 6K10

LA6 DK20

For use on contactor

LC1 D09D65A
DT20DT80A

LC1 D80D150
LP1 D80 and LC1 D115

Product certifications

UL, CSA

UL, CSA

690

690

24415

24415

VA

25

25

30

30

1200

1200

10 %

10 %

0.5

0.5

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Rated control circuit voltage a 50/60 Hz and c

Power required

Maximum operating rate

For unlatching

In operating cycles/hour

On-load factor
Mechanical durability at Uc

(1)

Mechanical latch block type

Rated insulation voltage

In millions of operating cycles

5
6

(1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed).

The LA6 DK or LAD 6K latch coil and the LC1 D operating coil must not be energised simultaneously.
The duration of the LA6 DK or LAD 6K and LC1 D control signals must be u 100 ms.

7
8
9
10

References :
pages 5/80 to 5/83

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/59

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Electronic serial timer module 

for TeSys D contactors

Module type

1
2
3

LA4 DT (On-delay)

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC 60255-5

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

40+ 80

Operation

25+ 55

For operation at Uc

25+ 70

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1

250

Cabling

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Phillips n 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid conductor 
with or without cable end

Control circuit characteristics

Built-in protection

4
5
6

Of the input

By varistor

Contactor coil suppression

By varistor

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

0.81.1 Uc

Type of control

By mechanical contact only

Timing characteristics

Timing ranges

040 C

Reset time

During time delay period

ms

150

After time delay period

ms

50

During time delay period

ms

10

After time delay period

ms

ms

Immunity to microbreaks

Time delay signalling

0.12; 1.530; 25500

Repeat accuracy

3 % (10 ms minimum)

Minimum control pulse duration

a or c : 24250

Permissible variation

By LED

Illuminates during time delay period

Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated

Leakage current

mA

<5

Residual voltage

3.3

Overvoltage protection
Electrical durability

3 kV; 0.5 joule

In millions of operating cycles

30

Function diagram

Electronic on-delay timer LA4 DT

U supply (A1-A2) 1
0
Time delay output 1
Contactor coil 0

Red LED

10
References :
page 5/83

5/60

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Interface modules for TeSys D contactors

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC 60255-5

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

40+ 80

Operation

25+ 55

Permissible for operation at Uc

25+ 70

Other characteristics
Module type

LA4 DFB
With relay

LA4 DWB
Solid state

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

For ambient temperature y 50 C

Rated insulation voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

250

Rated operational voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

250

Control voltage (E1-E2)

c 24

c 24

Permissible variation

1730

530

Current consumption at 20 C

mA

25

8.5 for 5 V
15 for 24 V

State 0 guaranteed for U

< 2.4

< 2.4

mA

<2

<2

17

Against reversed polarity

By diode

By diode

Of the input

By diode

By diode

In millions of operating cycles

10

20

Indication of input state

Input signals

By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energised

I
State 1 guaranteed for U
Built-in protection

Electrical durability
at 220 A/240 V

3
4
5

Maximum immunity to microbreaks

ms

Power dissipated

At 20 C

0.6

0.4

Direct mounting
on

contactor

With coil

a 24250 V

LC1 D80D150

a 100250 V

LC1 D80D115

a 380415 V

a 24250 V

LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40

LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40

a 380415 V

a 24250 V

LC1 D40AD65A

LC1 D40AD65A

a 380415 V

LC1 D40AD65A

LC1 D40AD65A

Mounting with
cabling adapter
LAD 4BB

With coil

Mounting with
cabling adapter
LAD 4BB3

With coil

Total operating time at Uc 

(of the contactor)

The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of
the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched
off to the moment the main poles separate.

With LA4 DFB

Cabling

Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid cable 
with

or without cable end

LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40

LC1 D40AD65A

LC1 D80 and D95

"C"

ms

2030

2834

2843

ms

1624

2024

1832

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

8
9
10

References :
page 5/83

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 and 5/93

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/61

TeSys contactors

References

TeSysD contactors for motor control 

up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3

526216

For connection by screw clamp terminals and lugs

3-pole contactors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3
(q y 60 C)

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)

Weight
(3)

Fixing (1)

kg

2.2

5.5

5.5

LC1 D09pp

0.320

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

12

LC1 D12pp

0.325
0.330

7.5

10

10

18

LC1 D18pp

5.5

11

11

11

15

15

25

LC1 D25pp

0.370

7.5

15

15

15

18.5

18.5

32

LC1 D32pp

0.375

18.5

18.5

18.5

18.5

18.5

38

LC1 D38pp

0.380

Power connections by EverLink BTR screw connectors (4) and control by spring terminals
LC1 D25pp

11

18.5

22

22

22

30

40

LC1 D40App (5)

0.850

15

22

25

30

30

33

50

LC1 D50App (5)

0.855

18.5

30

37

37

37

37

65

LC1 D65App (5)

0.860

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

526218

kW

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Connection by screw clamp terminals

526217

LC1 D09pp

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
440 V
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V up to
230 V 400 V
690 V

22

37

45

45

55

45

45

80

LC1 D80pp

1.590

25

45

45

45

55

45

45

95

LC1 D95pp

1.610

30

55

59

59

75

80

65

115

LC1 D115pp

2.500

40

75

80

80

90

100

75

150

LC1 D150pp

2.500

Connection by lugs or bars

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.

Separate components

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85

526219

LC1 D65App

(1) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D80 to D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D80 to D95 c : clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode).

50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

S7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

LC1 D80D115

d.c. supply
Volts

LC1 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.751.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.851.1 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.751.2 Uc

JW

BW

CW

EW

SW

FW

MW

MD

UD

RD

LC1 D80D95

526220

LC1 D95pp

LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.751.2 Uc

BD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

10

LC1 D115pp

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/62

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1 D80 and D95.
(4) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(5) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

TeSys contactors

References

TeSysD contactors for motor control 

up to 30 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
For connection by spring terminals

526221

3-pole contactors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3
(q y 60 C)

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
440 V
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V up to
230 V 400 V
690 V
kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)

Weight
(3)

kg

Fixing (1)

Power and control connections by spring terminals

LC1 D123pp

2.2

5.5

5.5

LC1 D093pp

0.320
0.325

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

12

LC1 D123pp

7.5

10

10

18

LC1 D183pp

0.330

5.5

11

11

11

15

15

25

LC1 D253pp

0.370

7.5

15

15

15

18.5

18.5

32 (4)

LC1 D323pp

0.375

526222

Power connections by EverLink BTR screw connectors (5) and control by spring terminals
11

18.5

22

22

22

30

40

LC1 D40A3pp (6)

15

22

25

30

30

33

50

LC1 D50A3pp (6)

0.855

18.5

30

37

37

37

37

65

LC1 D65A3pp (6)

0.860

0.850

Connection by Faston connectors

These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil
and auxiliary terminals.
For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, replace the figure 3 with a 9 in the references selected above.
Example: LC1 D093pp becomes LC1 D099pp.

4
5

Separate components

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
LC1 D65A3pp
(1) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

UD

RD

LC1 D09D65A
50/60 Hz

d.c. supply
Volts

LC1 D09D65A (coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode)
U 0.751.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

FL

ML

UL

MD

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit.
For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D32 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block
LAD331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/197). When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11
kW/400 V motors).
(5) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(6) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/63

TeSys contactors

References

TeSysD, 3-pole contactors

for control in category AC-1, from 25 to 200 A

526230

3-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
utilisation category AC-1

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)

Weight
(3)

Fixing (2)

LC1 D09pp

A
25

kg

Connection by screw clamp terminals

3

LC1 D09pp

0.320

or LC1 D12pp

0.325

32

LC1 D18pp

0.330

40

LC1 D25pp

0.370

50

LC1 D32pp

0.375

or LC1 D38pp

0.380

526231

Connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (4)

60

LC1 D40App (7)

0.850

80

LC1 D50App (7)

0.855

or LC1 D65App (5) (7)

0.860

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

125
200

LC1 D80pp

1.590

or LC1 D95pp (5)

1.610

LC1 D115pp

2.500

or LC1 D150pp (6)

2.500

3-pole contactors for connection by lugs

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

LC1 D65App

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

LC1 D09...D150 (coils D115 and D150 fitted with integral suppression device as standard)
50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

LC1 D80...D150

d.c. supply
Volts

LC1 D09...D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.71.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.851.1 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.751.2 Uc

JW

BW

CW

EW

SW

FW

MW

MD

UD

RD

LC1 or LP1 D80 and D95

LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.751.2 Uc

BD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D80 and D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 or LP1 D80 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1D80 and D95.
(4) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(5) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198.
(6) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel.
(7) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/64

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSysD, 3-pole contactors

526232

For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A

3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors

These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil
terminals. For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected from the previous page, insert a
figure 9 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D099pp.

3-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
utilisation category AC-1

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)

Weight
(3)

Fixing (2)

LC1 D123pp

25

1
1

LC1 D093pp (4)

0.320

or LC1 D123pp (4)

0.325

LC1 D183pp (5)

0.335

or LC1 D253pp (6)

0.325

or LC1 D323pp (6)

0.325

Power connections by EverLink BTR screw connectors (7) and control by spring terminals
526233

kg

Connection by spring terminals

1
6

60

LC1 D40A3pp (9)

0.850

8
0

LC1 D50A3pp (8) (9)

0.855

or LC1 D65A3pp (8) (9)

0.860

3
4

Separate components

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

S7

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

MD

UD

RD

LC1 D09...D65A
50/60 Hz

d.c. supply
LC1 D65A3pp

Volts

LC1 D09...D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.751.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) 20 A with 2 x 2.5 mm2 cables connected in parallel.
(5) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel.
(6) 40 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel.
(7) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(8) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198.
(9) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/65

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSysD, 4-pole contactors

526227

For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A

4-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
utilisation category AC-1

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)

Weight
(3)

Fixing (2)

kg

Connection by screw clamp terminals

LC1 DT20pp

20
25
32

40

LC1 DT20pp

0.365

LC1 D098pp

0.365

LC1 DT25pp

0.365

LC1 D128pp

0.365

LC1 DT32pp

0.425

LC1 D188pp

0.425

LC1 DT40pp

0.425

LC1 D258pp

0.425

526228

Connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors

60

LC1 DT60App

1.090

80

LC1 DT80App

1.150

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

60
8
0
125

2
2
4
2

LC1 DT80App

200

2
2

LC1 D40008pp

1.440

or LP1 D40008pp

2.210

LC1 D65008pp

1.450

or LP1 D65008pp

2.220

LC1 D80004pp

1.760

or LP1 D80004pp

2.685

LC1 D80008pp

1.840

or LP1 D80008pp

2.910

LC1 D115004pp

2.860

4-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars

526229

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1 DT20pp becomes LC1 DT206pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

LC1 D09...D150 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils D115 and D150 fitted with integral suppression device as standard)
50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

LC1 D80...D115

d.c. supply
LC1 D65008pp

Volts

LC1 D09...D65A and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.71.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.851.1 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.751.2 Uc

JW

BW

CW

EW

SW

FW

MW

MD

UD

RD

LC1 or LP1 D80

LC1 D115 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.751.2 Uc

BD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

ML

UL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D80 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 or LP1 D80 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 DT60A and D80A and 1 kg for LC1D80.

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/66

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSysD, 4-pole contactors

For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A

4-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
utilisation category AC-1

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (1)

Weight
(3)

kg

Fixing (2)

Connection by spring terminals

20
25
32
40

LC1 DT203pp

0.380

LC1 D0983pp

0.380

LC1 DT253pp

0.380

LC1 D1283pp

0.380

LC1 DT323pp

0.425

LC1 D1883pp

0.425

LC1 DT403pp

0.425

LC1 D2583pp

0.425

Connection by by EverLink, BTR screw connectors and control circuit by spring terminals
60

LC1 DT60A3pp

1.090

80

LC1 DT80A3pp

1.150

Separate components

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

R7

LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

UD

RD

d.c. supply
Volts

LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.71.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

MD

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

ML

UL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1DP or screw fixing.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg for LC1 DT60A and DT80A.

7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/67

Presentation

TeSys contactors

for the North American market,

conforming to UL and CSA

Starters for the North American market

1
1

3
4

Major improvements, carried out by the Canena (2) are aimed at harmonising
product requirements based on IEC (3) standards.
However, the North American codes use specific terminology for defining the
functions of a starter.
These functions can be fulfilled by standard IEC products, accompanied by
appropriate certifications.

Combination Starters

Combination Starters are the most common type of packaged motor starter. They
are called "Combination" because of their structure and their combined functions.
M

In recent years, the North American market has started to harmonise UL, CSA and
ANCE standards, as well as the industrial installation codes provided by national
regulations (NEC for the United States, CEC for Canada and MEC for Mexico). (1)

1Motor Disconnect (Disconnect switch)

2Motor Branch Circuit Protection 
(Short-circuit protection)
3Motor Controller (Contactor)
4Motor Overload Protection (Thermal overload relay)

The figure opposite shows the four combined functions that constitute a complete
motor starter circuit, defined as a Motor branch circuit by the NEC (US National
Electric Code) in article 430. Standard UL508 currently gives different types of
combination starter that meet the requirements of a "Motor branch circuit".
TypeE, called self-protected combination starter, covers all these functions and
can be controlled manually (thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) or remotely
(starter-controller). Type E starters withstand faults within their declared nominal
rating without sustaining damage, after which they can be put back into service. In
addition, they can withstand more severe short-circuit and durability performance
tests without welding or excessive wear of the contact tips.
TypeF, called Combination motor starter, consists of a type E manual starter
(thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) combined with a contactor.
These starters are evaluated by means of basic short-circuit tests, but are not
considered as self-protected.
For this combination, the type E starter must be marked Combination Motor
Controller when used with ..., followed by the reference of the load side contactor.

(1) UL: Underwriters Laboratories, CSA: Canadian Standards Association, ACNE: Association
of Standardization and Certification, NEC: National Electric Code, CEC: Canadian Electrical
Code, MEC: Mexican Electrical Code.
(2) Canena: Council for Harmonization of Electrotechnical Standardization of North America.
(3) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.

7
8
9
10

5/68

Presentation (continued)

TeSys contactors

for the North American market,

conforming to UL and CSA

Control panels
To help users properly coordinate their motor control equipment with their distribution
system in the event of a fault, article409 of the 2005 NECrequires panel builders to
list the short-circuit withstand rating of their motor control panels.
According to standard UL508A, manufacturers must use the short-circuit withstand
value of the lowest rated device as the nominal withstand rating of the panel, unless
the devices have been tested together for a higher coordinated rating.
The minimum short-circuit current rating (SCCR), on motor control components
for horsepower ratings of 50 hp or below is 5 000A.

1
2

Using a typeE or typeF combination starter eliminates the coordination problems

of using individual components for the motor branch circuit protection, motor
controller and motor overload protection functions.
The panel builder uses the declared short-circuit current rating for the combination
starter. This value is generally higher than 5 000A.
This makes it easier to list the short-circuit current ratings and to check the
compatibility of a UL508A motor control panel within a given distribution system.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/69

Presentation (continued)

TeSys contactors

for the North American market,

conforming to UL and CSA

Group protection
Article 430.53 of the NEC allows a single short-circuit protection device to be used
for more than one motor circuit if the components used are marked and listed for
such use.

Components suitable for use in group protection, known as motor group

installations, can be marked in one of the following two ways:
Case n 1

The contactor and the motor overload relay are both listed as suitable for group
installation.
An inverse time circuit-breaker can be used as the short-circuit protection device if it
is also listed as suitable for group installation.
The panel builder must therefore make sure that the short-circuit protection device
selected (fuses or inverse time circuit-breaker) does not exceed the value allowed by
article 430.40 for the smallest overload relay used in the circuit.

Once these conditions have been met, the panel builder can reduce the size of the
conductor connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor
contactor/overload relay, to one third of the size of the upstream circuit conductor
supplying the protection device.

The panel builder must limit the length of the motor starter conductor (connecting the
short-circuit protection device to the motor contactor/overload relay) to a maximum
of 7.6m (25 feet).
Case n 2
The motor contactor and overload relay are listed as suitable for tap conductor
protection in group installations.
This category allows the panel designer to reduce the size of the conductor
connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor
contactor/overload relay, to one tenth of the size of the upstream circuit conductor
supplying the protection device.
The designer must limit the length of this conductor to a maximum of 3.05m
(10feet).

5
6

In both cases, the supply circuits must not be less than 125 % of the connected
motor FLA (Full Load Amps) rating.
For panel builders, using typeF combination starters in group installations simplifies
group motor considerations.
Each starter is a fully coordinated motor branch circuit.

The panel builder follows the same NEC requirements for sizing the supply
conductors as those required for single motor branch circuits.
The size of the supply conductors can be reduced in accordance with the
specifications of article 430.28.
This allows the same flexibility in conductor sizing as that offered in article 430.53
(D), without a requirement to check the short-circuit protection rating marked on the
components and the overload relay limit.

A UL508A panel does not need a short-circuit protection device when each motor
starter installed is a type F.
The upstream short-circuit protection device supplying the starter protects the panel.
The panel builder only has to consider the panel/enclosure disconnect requirements
specified by the NEC or local codes.

9
10

5/70

TeSys contactors

Reference

for the North American market,

conforming to UL and CSA standards, 20 to 200 A

526168

Contactors

Standard power ratings of motors 50/60 Hz

526169

LC1 D09pp

Size

Single-phase
1

3-phase
3

115 V

230 V
240 V

200 V
208 V

230 V
240 V

460 V
480 V

575 V
600 V

HP

HP

HP

HP

HP

HP

Associated Continuous Type of contactor required

cable
current
Basic reference,
type
to be completed (1)
75 C-Cu
Fixing, connection (2)
A

Connection by screw clamp terminals

0.5

7.5

00

AWG10

20

LC1 D09pp

7.5

10

AWG10

25

LC1 D12pp

10

15

AWG8

32

LC1 D18pp

7.5

15

20

AWG6

40

LC1 D25pp

7.5

10

20

30

AWG6

50

LC1 D32pp

Power connections by EverLink BTR screw connectors (4) and control by spring terminals

LC1 D25pp

10

10

30

30

AWG3

60

LC1 D40App

7.5

15

15

40

40

AWG3

70

LC1 D50App

10

20

20

40

50

AWG3

80

LC1 D65App

Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

7.5

15

20

25

60

60

AWG2

110

LC1 D80pp

7.5

15

20

25

60

60

AWG2

110

LC1 D95pp

30

40

75

100

AWG2/0

175

LC1 D115pp

40

50

100

125

AWG3/0

200

LC1 D150pp

526170

Applications with High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings

For contactors LC1 D40A to LC1 D65A, the High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings are 50 kA at 480 V and 25 kA at 600 V.
If these contactors are used, stick the LAD UL1 warning sticker on the enclosure door..
Description
Warning sticker

Language

Sold in
lots of

Reference

English, Spanish, French

10

LAD UL1

Application example
For a 15 HP-230 V motor

LC1 D65App

Select a contactor type LC1 D50A.

Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to
size 2, the associated cable is type AWG3 75 C-Cu.

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

526171

LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

S7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

LC1 D80D115

d.c. supply
Volts

LC1 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.71.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.851.1 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

MD

UD

RD

U 0.751.2 Uc

JW

BW

CW

EW

SW

FW

MW

MD

UD

RD

LC1 D80 and D95

LC1 D95pp

LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.751.2 Uc

BD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption
Volts c

LC1 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.71.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

(2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC1 D80 and LC1 D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 6 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 6 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.

10

5/71

TeSys contactors

526172

References

TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control 

up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled

3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals

Pre-wired power connections.

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3
(q y 60 C)

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to

LC2 D12pp

2
526173

kW

Weight
(3)

Fixing (1)

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kg

With mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

LC2 D65App

2.2

5.5

5.5

LC2 D09pp (4)

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

12

LC2 D12pp (4)

0.697

7.5

10

10

18

LC2 D18pp (4)

0.707

5.5

11

11

11

15

15

25

LC2 D25pp (4)

0.787

7.5

15

15

15

18.5

18.5

32

LC2 D32pp (4)

0.797
0.807

0.687

18.5

18.5

18.5

18.5

18.5

38

LC2 D38pp (4)

11

18.5

22

22

22

30

40

LC2 D40App (5)

1.870

15

22

25

30

30

33

50

LC2 D50App (5)

1.880

18.5

30

37

37

37

37

65

LC2 D65App (5)

1.890

22

37

45

45

55

45

80

LC2 D80pp

3.200

25

45

45

45

55

45

95

LC2 D95pp

3.200

With mechanical interlock and electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

526175

Contactors supplied with coil

Basic reference, to be completed by
adding the control voltage code (2)

220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V

230 V 400 V
690 V

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts
per
contactor

LC2 D115pp

30

55

59

59

75

80

65

115

LC2 D115pp

6.350

40

75

80

80

90

100

75

150

LC2 D150pp

6.400

Connection by lugs or bars

For reversing contactors LC2 D09 to LC2 D38, LC2 D115 and LC2 D150, in the references selected above, insert
a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 D09pp becomes LC2 D096pp.
To build a 40 to 65 A reversing contactor, for connection by lugs, order 2 contactors LC1 DppA6 and mechanical
interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).

Component parts

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
(1) LC2 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC2 D80 and D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC2 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages between 16 and 690 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

LC2 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard))
50/60 Hz

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

S7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

MD

UD

RD

LC2 D80D115

d.c.supply
Volts

LC2 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.751.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption

Volts c

LC2 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg for
LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the references selected above.
Example: LC2 D09P7 becomes LC2 D09P7V.
(5) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

10

Note: when assembling a reversing contactor, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/72

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/98 and 5/99

TeSys contactors

526174

References

TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control 

up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled

3-pole reversing contactors, for connection by spring terminals

Pre-wired power connections.

Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
(q y 60 C)

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to

LC2 D123pp

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts
per
contactor

Contactors supplied with coil

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)

Weight
(3)

Fixing (1)

220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V

230 V 400 V
690 V
kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kg

For connection by spring terminals

2.2

5.5

5.5

LC2 D093pp

0.687

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

12

LC2 D123pp

0.697

7.5

10

10

18

LC2 D183pp

0.707

5.5

11

11

11

15

15

25

LC2 D253pp

0.787

7.5

15

15

15

18.5

18.5

32 (4)

LC2 D323pp

0.797

Power connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (5) and control by spring terminals
11
18.5 22
22
22
30
40
1
1
LC2 D40A3pp (6)
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
1
1
LC2 D50A3pp (6)
18.5 30
37
37
37
37
65
1
1
LC2 D65A3pp (6)

1.870
1.880

3
4

1.890

For connection by Faston connectors

All power connections are to be made by the customer.
These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil
terminals.
For reversing contactors LC2 D09 and LC2 D12 only, in the references selected above, replace the figure 3
before the voltage code with a figure 9.
Example: LC2 D093pp becomes LC2 D099pp.

Component parts

5
6

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
(1) LC2 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

S7

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

MD

UD

RD

LC2 D09D65A
50/60 Hz

d.c. supply
Volts

LC2 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.751.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

Low consumption
Volts c

LC2 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add
0.330 kg for LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block
LAD331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/197).When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11
kW/400 V motors).
(5) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(6) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).

9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/98 and 5/99

5/73

TeSys contactors

526176

References

Pre-assembled. Pre-wired power connections.

For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT40: mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.
LC2 D80004: order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2
contactors (see page 5/79). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock, please consult
your Regional Sales Office.
LC2 D115004: mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking.

1
2

TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs 

for control in category AC-1,
20 to 200 A

LC2 DT20pp
Utilisation category AC-1
Non-inductive loads
Maximum rated
operational current
(q y 60 C)

Instantaneous auxiliary
contacts per contactor

Contactors supplied with coil

Fixing (2)

3
4

Weight

Basic reference, to be completed

by adding the voltage code (1)

kg

20

LC2 DT20pp

0.730

25

LC2 DT25pp

0.730

32

LC2 DT32pp

0.850

40

LC2 DT40pp

0.850

125

LC2 D80004pp

3.200

200

LC2 D115004pp

7.400

For connection by lugs or bars

20

LC2 DT206pp

0.730

25

LC2 DT256pp

0.730

32

LC2 DT326pp

0.850

40

LC2 DT406pp

0.850

For customer assembly.

For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

60

LC1 DT60App (3)

80

LC1 DT80App (3)

For connection by lugs or bars

60

LC1 DT60A6pp (3)

80

LC1 DT80A6pp (3)

Accessories

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
(1) See note (1) on next page.
(2) LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
LC2 D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing.
LC2 D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(3) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).

Note: when assembling changeover contactor pairs, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay.

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/74

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/98 and 5/99

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs 

for control in category AC-1, 20A

Pre-assembled. Pre-wired power connections.

For connection by spring terminals.
Utilisation category AC-1
Non-inductive loads
Maximum rated
operational current
(q y 60 C)

Instantaneous auxiliary
contacts per contactor

Contactors supplied with coil

Weight

Basic reference, to be completed

by adding the control voltage code (1)
Fixing (2)

A
20

kg
1

LC2 DT203pp

0.760

For customer assembly.

Power connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (3) and control by spring terminals
60

LC1 DT60A3pp (4)

80

LC1 DT80A3pp (4)

Separate components

Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/78 to 5/85.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

a.c. supply
Volts

24

42

48

110

115

220

230

240

380

400

415

440

500

B7

D7

E7

F7

FE7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

50 Hz

B5

D5

E5

F5

FE5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

R5

S5

60 Hz

B6

E6

F6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

12

24

36

48

60

72

110

125

220

250

440

UD

RD

LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80

50/60 Hz

LC2 D80004D115004

d.c. supply
Volts

LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
U 0.71.25 Uc

JD

BD

CD

ED

ND

SD

FD

GD

12

20

24

48

110

220

250

ML

UL

MD

Low consumption
Volts c

LC2 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)

U 0.81.25 Uc

AL

JL

ZL

BL

EL

FL

For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91
(2) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
(3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(4) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).

6
7
8
9
10

5/75

TeSys contactors

537729

References

Component parts for assembling 

reversing contactors for motor control, 
low-speed/high-speed starters and star-delta starters
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer

Description

For contactors (1)

(2 identical contactors)

Reference

Weight
kg

Kit comprising:
b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 
with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1.
b a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel)
and LAD 9V6 (reversing)

LC1 D09 to D38

LAD 9R1V

0.045

Kit comprising:
b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 
without electrical interlocking
b a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel) 
and LAD 9V6 (reversing)

LC1 D09 to D38

LAD 9R1

0.045

Kit comprising:
b a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM,
b a set of power connections LA9 D65A69.

LC1 D40A to D65A

LAD 9R3

0.170

LC1 D80 and D95 (a)

LA9 D4002

0.170

LC1 D80 and D95 (c)

LA9 D8002

0.170

LC1 D115 and D150

LA9 D11502

0.290

LC1 D09 to D38

LAD 9V2

0.040

LC1 D40A to D65A

LAD 4CM

0.040

LC1 D80 and D95 (a)

LA9 D50978

0.170

LC1 D80 and D95 (c)

LA9 D80978

0.170

LC1 D09 to D38 with screw

clamp terminals or connectors

LAD 9V5 + LAD 9V6

LC1 D09D32 with 

spring terminal connections

LAD 9V12 + LAD 9V13 (2)

LC1 D40A to D65A

LA9 D65A69

0.130

LC1 D80 and D95 (a)

LA9 D8069

0.490

LC1 D80 and D95 (c)

LA9 D8069

0.490

LC1 D115 and D150

LA9 D11569

1.450

For contactors with

connection type

Reference

Screw clamps or connectors

LAD 9PVGV

0.016

Power connection module with

spring terminal connections

LAD 3PVGV

0.034

Outgoing terminal block with

spring terminal connections

LAD 3PVGV10

0.034

For contactors

Reference

Mounting kit comprising:

b 1 time delay contact block LAD S2 (LC1 D09D80),
b power circuit connections (LC1 D09D80),
b hardware required for fixing the contactors 
onto the mounting plate (LC1 D80).

LC1 D09 and D12

LAD 91217

0.180

LC1 D18 to D32

LAD 93217

0.310

LC1 D40A and D50A

LAD 9SD3

0.380

LC1 D80

LA9 D8017

0.680

Equipment mounting plates

LC1 D09, D12 and D18

LA9 D12974

0.150

LC1 D32

LA9 D32974

0.180

LC1 D40A and D50A

LC1 D80

LA9 D80973

Kits for assembly of reversing contactors

LAD 9R1

537730

2
3

Mechanical interlocks
LAD 9R3

4
537731

Mechanical interlock without

integral electrical interlocking

Sets of power connections

5
6

Mechanical interlock with

integral electrical interlocking

Comprising:
b a set of parallel bars,
b a set of reverser bars.

LA9 D8069

For low-speed/high-speed starter

Description

Connection kit enabling

reversing of low and high speed directions
using a reversing contactor and a 
2N/O + 2N/C main pole contactor

For star-delta starter

Description

8
9

(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72.

(2) To assemble a reversing contactor with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered:
- 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2,
- 1 upstream power connection kit and 1 downstream power connection kit..
Upstream power connection kit LAD 9V10: installed in the Quickfit system with power connection module LAD 34.
(If module LAD 34 is not used, replace LAD 9V10 with LAD 9V12).
Downstream power connection kit LAD 9V11: installed in the Quickfit system with outgoing terminal block LAD 331.
(If LAD 331 is not used, replace LAD 9V11 with LAD 9V13).

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/197

5/76

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

Dimensions, Schemes :
pages 5/98 and 5/99

Weight
kg

Weight
kg

0.300

TeSys contactors

References

Component parts for assembling

changeover contactor pairs

For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral)

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Description

For contactors (1)

(2 identical contactors)

Reference

Weight
kg

Kit comprising:
b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2
with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1,
b a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7.

LC1 DT20 to DT40 with

screw clamps or connectors

LAD T9R1V

0.045

Kit comprising:
b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2
without electrical interlocking,
b a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7.

LC1 DT20 to DT40 with

screw clamps or connectors

LAD T9R1

0.045

LC1 D80004

LA9 D4002

0.170

LP1 D80004

LA9 D8002

0.170

LC1 D115004

LA9 D11502

0.280

LC1 DT20 to DT40 with

screw clamps or connectors

LAD 9V2 (2)

0.040

LC1 DT203 to DT403

with spring terminals

LAD 9V2 (2)

0.040

LC1 DT60A and DT80A

LAD 4CM

0.040

LC1 D80004

LA9 D50978

0.155

LP1 D80004

LA9 D80978

0.180

LC1 DT60A and DT80A

LA9 D65A70 r

0.150

LC1 D80004

LA9 D8070

0.280

LP1 D80004

LA9 D8070

0.280

LC1 D115004

LA9 D11570

1.100

LC1 DT203 to DT403

with spring terminals

LAD 9V9

0.100

LC1 D80004

LA9 D8070 (2)

LP1 D80004

LA9 D8070 (2)

537733

Kits for assembly of changeover contactor pairs

Mechanical interlocks
With integral
electrical interlocking

Without integral
electrical interlocking
LA9 D50978

537734

Sets of power connections

Comprising a set of parallel bars

LA9 D6570

2
3
4
5
6

537735

For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Description
LA9 D8070

For contactors (1)

(2 identical contactors)

Reference

Weight
kg

Without integral
electrical interlocking

LC1 D40AD65A

LAD 9R3S

0.105

With integral
electrical interlocking

LC1 D115 and D150

LA9 D11502

0.280

LC1 D115 and D150

LA9 D11571

0.960

Mechanical interlocks

Sets of power connections

Comprising a set of parallel bars,

7
8

(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72.

(2) Order 2 contact blocks LAD Np1 to build the electrical interlock, see page 5/79.

9
10
r Available 1st quarter 2010.

5/77

245011

1
or

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

See page opposite for mounting possibilities

according to the contactor type

10

5/78

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments

In order to mount an LAD 8N on an LC1 D80 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 5/85
Clip-on mounting
(1)

Front

Side

Number of
contacts per block

4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C make before break

2

For terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

Front on 3P contactors and 

4P contactors 20 to 80 A
Front on 4P contactors
125 to 200 A

Composition

2
4
2
4

Reference

1
2

2
1
4

3
2
1
2

1
1

2
2
3

4
1
2
1

LAD N10
LAD N01
LAD N11
LAD N20
LAD N02
LAD N22
LAD N13
LAD N40
LAD N04
LAD N31
LAD C22
LAD 8N11
LAD 8N20
LAD 8N02

kg
0.020
0.020
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.030
0.030
0.030

1
2
1
2

1
2
1
2

LAD N11G
LAD N22G
LAD N11P
LAD N22P

0.030
0.050
0.030
0.050

LA1 DX20
LA1 DX11
LA1 DX02
LA1 DY20 (2)
LA1 DZ40
LA1 DZ31

0.040
0.040
0.040
0.040
0.050
0.060

With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments

Front

1
2

Weight

2
1

2
2
2

2
1

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts.
For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above.
Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected
contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above.
Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected
contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. 
Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N119.
(1
) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be fitted:
Contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
Type
Number of poles and size
Side mounted
Front mounted
1 contact 2 contacts
a
3P LC1 D09D38
1
on LH side
and
1
LC1 D40AD65A
1
on LH or 1 on RH side and
1
LC1 D80 and D95 (50/60 Hz)
1
on each side
or 2
and 1
LC1 D80 and D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1
on each side
and 2
and 1
LC1 D115 and D150
1
on LH side
and
1
4P LC1 DT20DT40
1
on LH side
and
1
LC1 DT60A and DT80A
1
on LH or 1 on RH side and
1
LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80 1
on each side
or 1
or 1
LC1 D115
1
on each side
and 1
or 1
c
3P LC1 D09D38

1
LC1 D40AD65A

1
LC1 D80 and D95

1
or 1
LC1 D115 and D150
1
on LH side
and
1
4P LC1 DT20DT40

1
LC1 DT60A and DT80A

1
LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80
2
and 1
LC1 D115
1
on each side

and 1
BC (3)
3P LC1 D09D38

1
4P LC1 DT20DT40

1
(
2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(
3) LC: low consumption.

4 contacts
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1

Time delay
Front
mounted
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1
or 1

8
9
10

5/79

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks
Mechanical latch blocks

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be fitted per contactor, see page 5/79.
Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 5/85.
LAD T0 and LAD R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
LAD S2: with switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.

Clip-on mounting

LAD Tp

Front

Number
of contacts

Time delay
Type

Setting range

1 N/O + 1 N/C

On-delay

0.13 s

LAD T0

0.060

0.130 s

LAD T2

0.060

10180 s

LAD T4

0.060

130 s

LAD S2

0.060

0.13 s

LAD R0

0.060

0.130 s

LAD R2

0.060

10180 s

LAD R4

0.060

Off-delay

Reference

Weight
kg

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

Add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T06.

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

Add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

LAD Tp3

Add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T09.

Mechanical latch blocks

Clip-on mounting

6
7

Front

(1)

Unlatching
control

For use on
contactor

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)

Manual or
electric

LC1 D09D38 (a or c)
LC1 DT20DT40 (a or c)

LAD 6K10p

0.070

LC1 D40AD65A
(3 P a or c)
LC1 DT60A and DT80A
(4 P a or c)

LAD 6K10p

0.070

LC1 D80D150 (3 P a)
LA6 DK20p
LC1 D80 and D115 (3 P c)
LC1 D80 (4 P a)
LC1 D80 and D115 (4 P a)
LP1 D80 and LC1 D115 (4 Pc)

0.090

LAD 6K10p

Weight
kg

(1) The mechanical latch block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor.
The duration of the control signal for the mechanical latch block and the contactor should be:
u 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply,
u 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply.
Maximum impulse duration for the LAD6K10p mechanical latch block: 10 seconds.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).

Volts 50/60 Hz, c

Code

24

32/36

42/48

60/72

100

110/127

220/240

256/277

380/415

EN

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 5/56 to 5/58

5/80

Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Suppressor modules

RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the
voltage is virtually sinusoidal. i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and
oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
Mounting

LAD 4pp

For use with contactor (1)

Rating

Clip-on side mounting (3)

D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40

Clip-on front mounting (3)

D40AD65A (3P)
DT60ADT80A (4P)

Screw fixing (4)

D80D150 (3P)
D40D115 (4P)

Reference
Type
Va
2448
50127
110250
2448
50127
110240
380415
2448
50127
110240
380415

Vc

Weight

LAD 4RCE
LAD 4RCG
LAD 4RCU
LAD 4RC3E
LAD 4RC3G
LAD 4RC3U
LAD 4RC3N
LA4 DA2E
LA4 DA2G
LA4 DA2U
LA4 DA2N

kg
0.012
0.012
0.012
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.040
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018

LAD 4VE
LAD 4VG
LAD 4VU
LAD 4V3E
LAD 4V3G
LAD 4V3U
LA4 DE2E
LA4 DE2G
LA4 DE2U
LA4 DE3E
LA4 DE3G
LA4 DE3U

0.012
0.012
0.012
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.018

2
3

Varistors (peak limiting)

Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).

LAD 4RC3p, LAD 4V3p,

LAD 4D3U, LAD 4T3p

Clip-on side mounting (3)

D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40

Clip-on front mounting (3)

D40AD65A (3P)
DT60ADT80A (4P)

Screw fixing (4)

D80D115 (3P)
D80D115 (4P)
D80D95 (3P)
D80 (4P)

2448
50127
110250
2448
50127
110250
2448
50127
110250

2448
50127
110250

2448
50127
110250

Flywheel diodes

No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time).
Polarised component.
Clip-on side mounting (5)
Clip-on front mounting (5)
Screw fixing (4)

D09D38 (3P), DT20DT40

D40AD65A (3P), DT60ADT80A (4P)
D80 and D95 (3P), D40D80 (4P)

Bidirectional peak limiting diodes

24250
24250
24250

LAD 4DDL
LAD 4D3U
LA4 DC3U

0.012
0.020
0.018

Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
LA4 Dpp

LAD 4DDL or LAD 4TpDL

Clip-on side mounting

(3) (5)

24

LAD 4TB
0.012

24
LAD 4TBDL
0.012
72

LAD 4TS
0.012

72
LAD 4TSDL
0.012

125
LAD 4TGDL
0.012

250
LAD 4TUDL
0.012

600
LAD 4TXDL
0.012
Clip-on front mounting
D40AD65A (3P)
1224
1224
LAD 4T3B
0.020
(3)
DT60ADT80A (4P) (2)
2572
2572
LAD 4T3S
0.020
73125 73125
LAD 4T3G
0.020
126250 126250
LAD 4T3U
0.020
251440 251440
LAD 4T3R
0.020
Screw fixing (4)
D80D95 (3P)
1224
1224
LA4 DB2B
0.018
D40D80 (4P)
2572
2572
LA4 DB2S
0.018

24
LA4 DB3B
0.018

72
LA4 DB3S
0.018
(1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be fitted across the coil of each contactor.
(2) From D09 to D65A and from LC1 DT20 to DT80A, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are fitted with a built-in
bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. This bidirectional peak limiting diode is removable and can therefore
be replaced by the user. (See reference above). If a d.c. or low consumption contactor is used without suppression, the
standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug (reference LAD 9DL for LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT40;
reference LAD 9DL3 for LC1 D40A to D65A and LC1 DT60A to DT80A).
(3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged.
(4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2.
(5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must first be removed.
D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40 (4P) (2)

5/81

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

See page opposite for mounting possibilities

according to the contactor type

10

5/82

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Accessories

Electronic serial timer modules (1)

b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: 
mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below.
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: 
mounted using adapter LAD 4BB3, to be ordered separately, see below.
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: 
mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of the contactor.

On-delay type
Operational voltage a
24250 V
LC1 D09D65A (3P)

Time delay

Reference

100250 V
LC1 D80D150 (3P)

Weight
kg

0.12 s

LA4 DT0U

0.040

1.530 s

LA4 DT2U

0.040

25500 s

LA4 DT4U

0.040

Interface modules

2
3

b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below.
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: mounted using adapter LAD4 BB3, to be ordered separately, see below.
Relay interface
Operational voltage a
24250 V
LC1 D09D150 (3P)

Supply
voltage E1-E2 (c)

Reference

24 V

LA4 DFB

Weight
kg

0.050

Relay interface with "AUTO-I" manual override switch (output forced ON), solid state type
Operational voltage a
24250 V
LC1 D09D65A (3P)

Low consumption kit

For use on contactors

LC1 D40AD65A (3P) (2)

Supply
voltage
E1-E2 (c)

Reference

100250 V
LC1 D80D115 (3P)

24 V

LA4 DWB

Weight
kg

Composition

Reference

Kit comprising:
b a retrofit coil LAD 4BB3.
b a relay interface module LA4 DFB.

LA4 DBL

0.045

Weight
kg
0.077

Retrofit: coil for 3-pole contactor

For adapting existing wiring to a new product

For use on contactors
LC1 D09D38

Reference

LC1 D40A65A

LAD 4BB

0.019

a 2448 V

LAD 4BBVE

0.014

a 50127 V

LAD 4BBVG

0.014

a 110250 V

LAD 4BBVU

0.014

LAD 4BB3

0.027

Without coil suppression

With coil suppression

Without coil suppression

Weight
kg

(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) The kit is compatible with a coil voltage of a 24 V to a 250 V (B7 to U7) and c 24 V to c 250 V (BD to UD).

7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 5/59 to 5/61

Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/83

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Accessories

Accessories for main pole and control connections

Description

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

4-pole 10 mm2

DT20, DT25

DT20, DT25

LAD 92560

0.030

3-pole 25 mm2

D09D38

D09D38

LA9 D3260

0.040

EverLink
terminal block

3-pole

D40AD65A

D40AD65A

LAD 96560

0.087

Connectors for cables

(2 connectors)

3-pole 120 mm2

D115, D150

D115, D150

LA9 D115603

0.560

4-pole 120 mm2

D115

D115

LA9 D115604

0.740

Connectors for
lug type terminals
(2 connectors)

3-pole

D1156, D1506

D1156, D1506

LA9 D115503

0.300

4-pole

D1156

D1156

LA9 D115504

0.360

Protective covers
for connectors for
lug type terminals

3-pole

D40A6D65A6

D40A6D65A6 1

LAD 96570

0.021

D1156, D1506

D1156, D1506

LA9 D115703 (1)

0.250

D60A6D80A6

D60A6D80A6 1

LAD 96580

0.027

D1156, D1506

D1156, D1506

LA9 D115704

0.300

LAD 96575

0.010

Connectors for cable, size

(1 connector)
LA9 D3260

2
3
4

LA9 D11550p

4-pole

kg

IP 20 covers for lug type

terminals (for mounting with
circuit-breakers
GV3 Ppp6 and GV3 Lpp6)

3 poles

D40A6D65A6

D40A6D65A6 1

Links for
parallel connection of

2 poles

D09D38

D09D38

10

LA9 D2561

0.060

DT20, DT25 (4P)

DT20, DT25 (4P) 10

LA9 D1261

0.012

DT32, DT40 (4P)

DT32, DT40 (4P) 10

LAD 96061

0.060

D40AD65A

D40AD65A

LAD 9P32

0.021

D80, D95

D80

LA9 D80961

0.060

D09D38

D09D38

10

LAD 9P3 (2)

0.005

D40AD65A

D40AD65A

LAD 9P33

0.021

D80, D95

D80, D95

LA9 D80962

0.080

DT20, DT25

DT20, DT25

LA9 D1263

0.024

D80, D95

D80

LA9 D80963

0.100

Staggered coil connection

D80

10

LA9 D09966

0.006

Control circuit take-off

from main pole

D80, D95

D80, D95

10

LA9 D8067

0.010

D115, D150

D115, D150

10

LA9 D11567

0.014

D115, D150

D115, D150

GV7 AC03

0.180

LA9 D11560p

3 poles

LA9 D11570p

4 poles

8
9

Weight

LAD 96570

5
6

For use with contactors LC1

LA9 D80962

LA9 D11567

10

Spreaders
for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm

(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers.
(2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.

Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95

5/84

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Accessories

Sets of contacts and arc chambers

Description

Sets of contacts
GV2 G245

Arc chambers

For contactor
3-pole

Reference
LC1 D115

LA5 D1158031

0.260

LC1 D150

LA5 D150803

0.260

4-pole

LC1 D115004

LA5 D115804

0.330

3-pole

LC1 D115

LA5 D11550

0.395

LC1 D150

LA5 D15050

0.395

LC1 D115004

LA5 D115450

0.470

4-pole

Power connection accessories

GV1 G09

Terminal block

For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets

GV1 G09

0.040

Set of 63 A busbars
for parallelling of contactors

2 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38

GV2 G245

0.036

4 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38

GV2 G445

0.077

Set of 115 A busbars

for parallelling of contactors

2 contactors LC1 D40AD65A

GV3 G264

0.150

3 contactors LC1 D40AD65A

GV3 G364 (1)

0.250

Set of S-shape busbars

For circuit-breakers GV3 Ppp and GV3 Lpp

and contactors LC1 D40AD65A

GV3 S

0.111

Protection accessories
Description

Use

Sold in
lots of

Reference

Miniature control
circuit fuse holder

5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse

LA9 D941

0.025

Sealing cover

For LAD T, LAD R

LA9 D901

0.005

Safety cover
preventing access to 
the moving contact carrier

LC1 D09D65A and DT20DT80A 1

LAD 9ET1

0.026

LC1 D80 and D95

LAD 9ET3

0.004

LC1 D115 and D150

LAD 9ET4

0.004

Use

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Sheet of 64 blank legends,

self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (2)

Contactors (except 4P)

LC1 D80D115 , 
LAD N (4 contacts), LA6 DK

10

LAD 21

0.020

Sheet of 112 blank legends,

self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm (2)

LAD N (2 contacts), 
LAD T, LAD R, LRD

10

LAD 22

0.020

Sheet of 64 blank legends

for marking using plotter 
or 8 x 33 mm engraver

Contactors (except 4P)

LC1 D80D115, 
LAD (4 contacts), LA6 DK

10

LAD 23

0.050

Sheet of 440 blank legends

for marking using plotter 
or 8 x 12 mm engraver

All products

35

LAD 24

0.200

Marker holder
snap-in, 8 x 22 mm

4-pole contactors, 
LC1 D80...D115, LA6 DK

100

LA9 D92

0.001

Marker holder
snap-in, 8 x 18 mm

LC1 D09...D65A, LC1 DT20...DT80A, 100

LAD N (4 contacts), LAD T, LAD R

LAD 90

0.001

Bag of 300 blank legends

self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm

On holder LA9 D92

LA9 D93

0.001

SIS Label
labelling software
supplied on CD-Rom

Multi-language version:
English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish

XBY 2U

0.100

LAD 7X3

0.150

Marking accessories

GV3 S

Description

LA9 D941

LAD 9ETp

Mounting accessories

LAD 7X3

Weight
kg

Weight
kg

1
2
3
4
5

Weight
kg

Retrofit plate
for screw fixing

For replacement of LC1 D40 to D65

with LC1 D40A to D65A

Mounting plate

For replacement of LC1 F115 or F150 1

with LC1 D115 or D150

LA9 D730

0.360

Set of shims

For fitting side mounting blocks 

LAD 8N on LC1 D80 and D95

LA9 D511

0.020

Size 4 Allen key, insulated,

1000 V

For use on contactors 

LC1 D40A to LC1 D150

LAD ALLEN4

0.026

(1) With this set of busbars, any one contactor can be supplied directly by its EverLink double cage power terminal block.
The other two contactors are supplied by the busbar set. The 115 A limitation is therefore applied to these two contactors.
Example: 1 LC1 D65A supplied directly + 1 contactor LC1 D65A and 1 contactor LC1 D50 A supplied via the busbar set =
115 A. This combination is compatible with busbar set GV3 G364.
(2) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if fitted.

5/85

6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

a.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For a contactors LC1D09...D38 and LC1DT20DT40

Specifications

Control circuit voltage

Uc
V
537496

Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush (cos j = 0.75) 70 VA,
- sealed (cos j
= 0.3) 50

Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA

Operating range (q y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc.

3
LXD1pp

4
5
6
7
8
9

Average resistance
at 20 C

10%

Inductance of
closed circuit
H

Reference (1)

Weight
kg

12

1.33

0.05

50/60 Hz
LXD1J7

21 (2)

4.17

0.17

LXD1Z7

0.070

24

5.37

0.22

LXD1B7

0.070

32

10.1

0.39

LXD1C7

0.070

36

12.8

0.49

LXD1CC7

0.070

42

17

0.67

LXD1D7

0.070

48

21.7

0.87

LXD1E7

0.070

60

34.6

1.4

LXD1EE7

0.070

100

100.4

3.8

LXD1K7

0.070

110

124.1

4.6

LXD1F7

0.070

115

129.8

LXD1FE7

0.070

120

150.6

5.4

LXD1G7

0.070

127

158.5

6.1

LXD1FC7

0.070

200

410.7

15

LXD1L7

0.070

208

430.4

16

LXD1LE7

0.070

220

515.4

18

LXD1M7 (3)

0.070

230

538.6

20

LXD1P7

0.070

240

562.3

22

LXD1U7

0.070

277

800.7

29

LXD1W7

0.070

380

1551

55

LXD1Q7 (4)

0.070

400

1633

60

LXD1V7

0.070

415

1694

65

LXD1N7

0.070

440

1993

73

LXD1R7

0.070

480

2398

87

LXD1T7

0.070

500

2499

95

LXD1S7

0.070

575

3294

125

LXD1SC7

0.070

600

3810

136

LXD1X7

0.070

660

4656

165

LXD1YC7

0.070

690

5020

180

LXD1Y7

0.070

0.070

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) Voltage for special coils fitted in contactors with serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
(3) Suitable for use on 230 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see
pages 5/52 and 5/53).
(4) Suitable for use on 400 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see
pages 5/52 and 5/53).

10

5/86

References

TeSys contactors

a.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For a contactors LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and LC1 DT80A

Specifications

Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush (cos j = 0.75) 160 VA.
- sealed (cos j
= 0.3) 50

Hz: 15 VA, 60 Hz: 15 VA

Operating range (q y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc.

503984

Control circuit voltage

Uc
V

LXD3pp

Average resistance
at 20 C 10%
W

Inductance of
closed circuit
H

Reference (1)

Weight
kg

12

0.49

0.03

50/60 Hz
LXD3J5 (2)

24

1.98

0.12

LXD3B7

0.070

32

3.76

0.22

LXD3C7

0.070

42

6.18

0.37

LXD3D7

0.070

48

7.97

0.48

LXD3E7

0.070

100

37.63

2.07

LXD3K7

0.070

110

42.28

2.50

LXD3F7

0.070

115

48.76

2.74

LXD3FE7

0.070

120

37.63

2.07

LXD3G7

0.070

127

60.29

3.34

LXD3FC7

0.070

200

149

8.27

LXD3L7

0.070

208

105

6.22

LXD3LE7

0.070

220

182

10

LXD3M7 (3)

0.070

230

192

10.9

LXD3P7

0.070

240

202

11.9

LXD3U7

0.070

277

193

11

LXD3W7

0.070

380

512

29.9

LXD3Q7 (4)

0.070

400

607

33.1

LXD3V7

0.070

415

635

35.6

LXD3N7

0.070

440

682

40.1

LXD3R7

0.070

480

607

33.1

LXD3T7

0.070

500

878

51.7

LXD3S7

0.070

575

1238

68.4

LXD3SC7

0.070

600

1304

74.5

LXD3X7

0.070

660

1593

90.1

LXD3YC7

0.070

690

1683

98.5

LXD3Y7

0.070

0.070

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) This coil can only be used on 50 Hz.
(3) Suitable for use on 230 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see
pages 5/52 and 5/53).
(4) Suitable for use on 400 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see
pages 5/52 and 5/53).

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/87

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

a.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D40, D50, D65, D80, D95

Specifications

Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200

VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA,

- sealed (cos j
= 0.3) 50

Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA

Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
V
537497

2
3
4

LX1D6pp

5
6

24
32
42
48
110
115
120
127
208
220
220/230
230
240
256
277
380
380/400
400
415
440
480
500
575
600
660

Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W
1.4
2.6
4.4
5.5
31
31

41

127
133
152
166

381
411
463
513

668

1220

Inductance
of closed
circuit

Reference (1)

H
0.09
0.16
0.27
0.35
1.9
1.9

2.4

7.5
8.1
8.7
10

22
25
26
30

38

67

50 Hz
LX1D6B5
LX1D6C5
LX1D6D5
LX1D6E5
LX1D6F5
LX1D6FE5

LX1D6G5

LX1D6M5
LX1D6P5
LX1D6U5
LX1D6W5

LX1D6Q5
LX1D6V5
LX1D6N5
LX1D6R5

LX1D6S5

LX1D6Y5

Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W

Inductance
of closed
circuit

Reference (1)

Weight

kg

1.05

4.2
22

28

86
98

120

157
300

392
480

675
775

0.06

0.23
1.2

1.5

4.3
4.8

5.7

8
14

19
23

33
36

60 Hz
LX1D6B6

LX1D6E6
LX1D6F6

LX1D6G6

LX1D6L6
LX1D6M6

LX1D6U6

LX1D6W6
LX1D6Q6

LX1D6R6
LX1D6T6

LX1D6S6
LX1D6X6

1.22
3.5
5
26

32
102
115
131
310
349
390
410

0.08
0.25
0.32
1.7

2
6.7
7.7
8.3
20
23
24
27

50/60 Hz
LX1D6B7
LX1D6D7
LX1D6E7
LX1D6F7
LX1D6FE7
LX1D6G7
LX1D6M7
LX1D6P7
LX1D6U7
LX1D6Q7
LX1D6V7
LX1D6N7
LX1D6R7

0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280

0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280
0.280

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush (cos j
= 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245

VA at 50 Hz,
- sealed (cos j
= 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz.
Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.

24
42
48
110
115
120
220/230 (2)
230
230/240 (3)
380/400 (4)
400
415
440

8
9

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) For use on 230 V / 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53.
This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
(3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
(4) For use on 400 V / 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53.

10

5/88

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

a.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D115

Specifications

Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush (cos j = 0.8) 50 or 60 Hz: 300

VA,
- sealed (cos j
= 0.3) 50 or 60

Hz: 22 VA
Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.

537502

Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
V

LX1D8pp

24
32
42
48
110
115
120
127
208
220
230
240
277
380
400
415
440
480
500

Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W

Inductance
of closed
circuit

1.24
2.14
3.91
4.51
26.53
26.53

32.75

104.77
104.77
125.25

338.51
368.43
368.43
441.56

566.62

0.09
0.17
0.28
0.36
2.00
2.00

2.44

7.65
8.29
8.89

22.26
25.55
27.65
30.34

38.12

Reference (1)

H
50 Hz
LX1D8B5
LX1D8C5
LX1D8D5
LX1D8E5
LX1D8F5
LX1D8FE5

LX1D8FC5

LX1D8M5
LX1D8P5
LX1D8U5

LX1D8Q5
LX1D8V5
LX1D8N5
LX1D8R5

LX1D8S5

Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W

Inductance
of closed
circuit

0.87

3.91
19.97

24.02

67.92
79.61

97.04
125.75
243.07

338.51
368.43

0.07

0.28
1.45

1.70

5.06
5.69

6.75
8.89
17.04

22.26
25.55

Reference (1)

Weight

kg
60 Hz
LX1D8B6

LX1D8E6
LX1D8F6

LX1D8G6

LX1D8L6
LX1D8M6

LX1D8U6
LX1D8W6
LX1D8Q6

LX1D8R6
LX1D8T6

0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260
0.260

2
3
4
5

For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D115, LC1D150

Specifications

Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush: cos j
= 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA,
- sealed: cos j
= 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA.
Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.81.15 Uc.
Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B.
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
V

Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W

Inductance
of closed
circuit

Reference (1)

24

32

42

48

110

115

120

127

208

220

230

240

277

380

400

415

440

480

500

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.

6
Average
resistance
at 20C
10%
W
147
301
498
1061
4377
4377
4377
6586
10 895
9895
9895
9895
21 988
21 011
21 011
21 011
21 501
32 249
32 249

Inductance
of closed
circuit

Reference (1)

H
3.03
8.28
13.32
24.19
109.69
109.69
109.69
152.65
260.15
210.72
210.72
210.72
533.17
482.42
482.42
482.42
507.47
938.41
938.41

Weight

kg
50/60 Hz
LX1D8B7
LX1D8C7
LX1D8D7
LX1D8E7
LX1D8F7
LX1D8FE7
LX1D8G7
LX1D8FC7
LX1D8LE7
LX1D8M7
LX1D8P7
LX1D8U7
LX1D8UE7
LX1D8Q7
LX1D8V7
LX1D8N7
LX1D8R7
LX1D8T7
LX1D8S7

0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290
0.290

5/89

7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

d.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications

1
537503

Average consumption: 22W.

Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc.

3
LX4D7pD

4
5
6

Control circuit voltage

Uc
V
12

Average resistance
at 20 C 10%
W
6.6

Inductance of
closed circuit
H
0.46

Reference (1)

LX4D7JD

kg
0.680

24

27

1.89

LX4D7BD

0.680

36

57

LX4D7CD

0.680

48

107

7.5

LX4D7ED

0.680

60

170

11.9

LX4D7ND

0.680

72

230

16.1

LX4D7SD

0.680

110

564

39.5

LX4D7FD

0.680

125

718

50.3

LX4D7GD

0.680

220

2215

155

LX4D7MD

0.680

250

2850

200

LX4D7UD

0.680

440

9195

640

LX4D7RD

0.680

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.

7
8
9
10

5/90

Weight

References

TeSys contactors

d.c. coils 
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors

For contactors LC1 D115, D150

Specifications

537504

Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W.

Operating range: 0.751.2 Uc.
Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B.
Control circuit voltage
Uc
V
24

Average resistance
at 20 C

10%

W
147

Inductance of
closed circuit
H
3.03

Reference (1)

Weight

LX4D8BD

kg
0.300

48

1061

24.19

LX4D8ED

0.300

60

1673

38.44

LX4D8ND

0.300

72

2500

56.27

LX4D8SD

0.300

110

4377

109.69

LX4D8FD

0.300

125

6586

152.65

LX4D8GD

0.300

220

9895

210.72

LX4D8MD

0.300

250

18 022

345.40

LX4D8UD

0.300

440

21 501

684.66

LX4D8RD

0.300

2
3
4

LX4D8pD

For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications

Wide range coils for specific applications

Average consumption: 23W.
Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc.
Coils with "TH" treatment as standard.

Control circuit voltage

Uc
V
12

Average resistance
at 20 C 10%
W
6.2

Inductance of
closed circuit
H
0.49

Reference (1)

Weight

LX4D7JW

kg
0.680

24

23.5

1.75

LX4D7BW

0.680

36

51.9

4.18

LX4D7CW

0.680

48

94.2

LX4D7EW

0.680

72

204

15.7

LX4D7SW

0.680

110

483

36

LX4D7FW

0.680

220

1922

144

LX4D7MW

0.680

7
8
9

(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.

10

5/91

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

TeSys D contactors
Control circuit: a.c.

LC1 D09D18 (3-pole)

LC1 D25D38 (3
-pole
), LC1 DT20DT40 (4
-pole)
44

44

Minimum electrical clearance

Minimum electrical clearance

LA4

10

b1

b1

LA4

12,5
(LAD 8)

c
c1
c2
c3

LC1

D09D18 D093
D123
77
99
94
107
110 (1)
123 (1)
119 (1)
132 (1)
126 (1)
139 (1)
84
84
86
86
117
117
129
129
137
137
141
141

10

D099
D129
80
95,5
111,5 (1)
120,5 (1)
127,5 (1)
84
86
117
129
137
141

D25
D38
85
98
114 (1)
123 (1)
130 (1)
90
92
123
135
143
147

LC1 D40AD65A (3
-pole
), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole)

DT32 and
DT40
91

97
99
131
143
151
155

D188, D258,
DT323 and DT403
105

97
99
131
143
151
155

LC1 D80 and D95 (3

-pole
), LC1 D80004 and D80008
(4
-pole
), D40008 and D65008 (4-pole)
32 44

b1

LA4

127

b1

117

LAD 4BB3

122

10

D098, D128,
DT203 and
DT20 and DT25 DT253
85
99
98

114

129

190

90
90
92
92
123
123
135
135
143
143
147
147

12,5
(LAD 8) (1)

Minimum electrical clearance

LAD 4BB3

12

12

c1

LA4 DpB

c2

12,5
(LAD 8N)

LC1

c
c1
c2
c3

12,5
(LAD 8N)

12,5
(LAD 8)

12,5
(LAD 8)

D40AD65A DT60ADT80A D40008

D80

D95, D65008

D80004

D80008

55

70

85

85

85

96

96

b1 with LA4 Dp2

135

135

135

135

135

with LA4 DB3 or LAD 4BB3

136

135

with LA4 DF, DT

157

142

142

142

142

142

with LA4 DM, DW, DL

166

150

150

150

150

150

without cover or add-on

blocks

118

118

125

125

125

125

140

with cover, without add-on

blocks

120

120

130

130

139

150

150

150

150

150

150

147

158

158

158

158

c2 with LAD

6K10 or LA6

DK

163

163

159

170

170

170

170

c3 with LAD T, R, S

171

171

167

178

178

178

178

175

175

171

182

182

182

182

c1 with LAD N (1 contact)

with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)

with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover

45

LA4 DpB

c3

D183
D323
99
107
123 (1)
132 (1)
139 (1)
90
92
123
135
143
147

Min. electrical clearance

6
7

12,5
(LAD 8)

c
c1
c2
c3

LC1 D115 and D150 (3

-pole
), LC1 D115004 (4
-pole)
LC1
a
b1 with LA4 DA2
with LA4 DF, DT
with LA4 DM, DL
with LA4 DW
c without cover or add-on

blocks
with cover, without add-on

blocks
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
c2 with LA6 DK20
c3 with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and

sealing cover

5/92

D115, D150
120
174
185
188
188
132
136
150
155
168
172

D115004
150
174
185
188
188
132

150
155
168
172

D1150046
155
174
185
188
188
115

150
155
168
172

Min. electrical clearance

10

c
c1
c2
c3

LA4

LAD 8

b1

12,5
(LAD 8)(1)

158

b without add-on blocks

b1 with LAD 4BB
with LA4 Dp2
with LA4 DF, DT
with LA4 DW, DL
c without cover or add-on

blocks
with cover

,
without add-on blocks
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
c2 with LA6 DK10, LAD 6K10
c3 with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
(1) Including LAD 4BB.

45

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

pg3

TeSys D contactors

Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption

LC1 D09D18 (3
-pole)

LC1 D25D38 (3
-pole)

Minimum electrical clearance

10

Minimum electrical clearance

45

45

10

c1
c2
c3

c1
c2
c3

LC1
b
c without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)
c2 with LA6DK10
c3 with LADT, R, S
with LADT, R, S and sealing cover

D09D18
77
93
95
126
138
146
150

D093D123
99
93
95
126
138
146
150

D099D129
80
93
95
126
138
146
150

D25D38
85
99
101
132
144
152
156

D183D323
99
99
101
132
144
152
156

LC1 DT20DT40 (4
-pole)

Minimum electrical clearance

45

10

c1
c2
c3
LC1
b
c
c1
c2
c3

DT20 and DT25

D098 and D128
85
99
123
135
143
147

with cover
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6 DK10
with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover

LC1 D40AD65A (3-pole), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole)

DT203 and DT253

D0983 and D1283
99
99
123
135
143
147

DT32 and DT40

D188D258
91
107
131
143
151
155

DT323 and DT403

D1883 and D2583
105
107
131
143
151
155

LC1 D80 and D95 (3

-pole
), LP1 D80004, LP1 D80008 (4
-pole
), 
LP1 D40008 and D65008 (4-pole)

LA4 DpB

Min. electrical clearance

Min. electrical clearance

127

b1

122

117

LAD 4BB3

LAD 4BB3

12

12

c1

LA4 DpB

c2

12,5
(LAD 8N)

c3

c1
c2
c3

12,5
(LAD 8N)

LC1 D40A LC1

D65A
DT60ADT80A
a
55
70
b1 with LAD 4BB3
136
136
with LA4 DF, DT
157
157
c without cover or add-on blocks
118
118
with cover, without add-on blocks
120
120
c1 with LAD N (1 contact)

with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)

150
150
c2 with LA6 DK10
163
163
c3 with LAD T, R, S
171
171
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
175
175
LC1 D115ppp and LC1 D150ppp with c
coil
: see page 5/92

LP1 D40008
and D65008
85

182

196
202
213
221
225

LC1
D80 and D95
85

181
186
204
210
221
229
233

LP1 D80004

LP1 D80008

96

181

204
210
221
229
233

96

196

204
210
221
229
233

9
10

5/93

TeSys contactors

Mounting

TeSys D contactors

LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40

On mounting rail AM1 DP200, DR200 or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)

On mounting rail AM1 DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm)

On mounting rail AM1EDppp or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)

LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and DT80A, LC1 D80 and D95,
LC1 D40008 and D65008

Control circuit: a.c.

LC1
b
c
c

4
5

D09
D18
77
(AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 88
(AM1 DE200) (1)
96

Control circuit: d.c.

LC1

D09
D18
b
77
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 97
c (AM1 DE200) (1)
105
(1) with safety cover.

D25
D38
85
94
102

DT20
and DT25
85
94
102

DT32
and DT40
100
109
117

D25
D38
85
103
110

DT20
and DT25
94
103
111

DT32
and DT40
109
118
1236

Control circuit: a.c.

LC1
b
c
c
c

(AM1 DL200) (1)

(AM1 DL201) (1)
(AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1)

Control circuit: d.c.

LC1
c (AM1 DL200) (1)
c (AM1 DL201) (1)
c (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1)
(1) with safety cover.

D40AD65A
DT60ADT80A
122

128

D80
and D95
127
147
137
137

D40008
and D65008
127
143
133
133

D40AD65A
DT60ADT80A

128

D80
and D95
205
195
128

D40008
and D65008
200
190
190

LC1 D80 and D95, LP1 D80

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres

DZ5 ME5

15

110

120

40

Control circuit: a.c.

LC1
c with cover

D80 and D95

130

Control circuit: d.c.

LC1
c with cover

D80 and D95

186

LP1
c

D80
181

LC1 D115, D150

=
158

100

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres

9
=

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

LC1
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200)
c (AM1 DE200 or EDppp)

D115 and D150

134,5
142,5

10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/94

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

D1156 and D1506

117,5
125,5

TeSys contactors

Mounting (continued)

TeSys D contactors

LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

Control circuit:
LC1
c with cover
G
H
H1
4-pole contactors
LC1

H1

DZ5 ME8

15

c
G
H
H1

LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

a.c.
D09D18
86
35
60
70

D25D38
92
35
60
70

d.c.
D09D18
95
35
70
70

D25D38
101
35
70
70

DT20
and DT25
92
35
60
70

DT32
and DT40
100
35
60
70

DT20
and DT25
101
35
70
70

DT32
and DT40
109
35
70
70

LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60ADT80A

AF1 EA4

37,5

c
Control circuit:
LC1
c with cover
G
H
LC1

a.c
D09D18
86
35
60/70
DT20
and DT25
80
35
60

c with cover
G
H

d.c
D09D18
95
35
70
DT20
and DT25
118
35
70

D25D38
92
35
60/70
DT32
and DT40
93
35
60

D25D38
101
35
70
DT32
and DT40
132
35
70

LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40

37,5

AF1EA6

3x6,5

Control circuit:
LC1

a.c
D40A65A ,
DT60ADT80A

d.c.
D40A65A ,
DT60ADT80A

120

120

with cover

5
6

LC1 D80 and D95, LC1 D40008 and D65008, LP1 D80

Panel mounted

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted

2xM4 2x4,5

Control circuit:
LC1
c with cover
4-pole contactors
LC1
c

with cover

35

a.c
D09D18
86
DT20
and DT25
90

D25D38
92
DT32
and DT40
98

100/110

110

35

d.c
D09D18
95
DT20
and DT25
90

50

60/70

2xM4

2
3

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted

128

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC

128

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB

40

D25D38
101
DT32
and DT40
98

Control circuit:
LC1

AF1EA6

40

3x6,5

c with cover
LP1

a.c
D80 and D95,
D40008 and D65008
130

d.c.
D80 and D95
D40008 and D65008
186
D80

181

without cover

LC1 D115, D150

8
9

130
158

Panel mounted

c
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

LC1
c
G (3-pole)
G (4-pole)
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67

D115
132
96/110
130/144

D1156
115
96/110
130/144

D150
132
96/110

D1506
115
96/110

Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97

5/95

10

TeSys contactors

Schemes

TeSys D contactors

Contactors

3-pole contactors (References: pages 5/62 to 5/65)

13/NO

21/NC
22

3/L2

5/L3

4/T2

6/T3

14

1/L1

A2

4-pole contactors (References: pages 5/66 and 5/67)

R3

R2

A1
A2

R4

21/NC
22

13/NO
14

3
4

A2

R1

R1

R3
R4

7/L4
8/T4

5/L3
6/T3

R2

3/L2

LC1 and LP1 D40008 to D80008

A1

1/L1

A2

LC1D098 to D258

4/T2

LC1D115004

A1

LC1DT20 to DT80A

2/T1

2/T1

LC1D09 to D150

A1

Front mounting add-on contact blocks

53/NO

61/NC

53/NO

54

62

54
81/NC

53/NO

82

54

83/NO

71/NC
72

73/NO

61/NC
62

73/NO

83/NO
84

74

61/NC
62

53/NO

3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

54

87/NO
88

84

53/NO
54

75/NC
76

74

83/NO
84

61/NC
62

63/NO

71/NC
72

53/NO
54

64

61/NC
62

71/NC

81/NC

72

61/NC
62

2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22

82

51/NC
52

63/NO

41/NC
(92)
42
(91)
53/NO

4 N/O LAD N40

54

1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

61/NC

2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

64

43/NO
(94)

2 N/O LAD N20

44
(93)

2 N/C LAD N02

4 N/C LAD N04

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

62

1 N/C LAD N01 (1)

51/NC

1 N/O LAD N10 (1)

52

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/79)

10

43/NO

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

41/NC

53/NO

63/NO

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

44

14

22

32

42

54

64

14

22

32

44

2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22P

31/NC

2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22G

32

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

41/NC

22

32

42

1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13P

14

51/NC

63/NO

43/NO
44

52

33/NO
34

64

21/NC
22

41/NC

13/NO
14

42

63/NO
64

31/NC

53/NO
54

1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13G

32

43/NO

3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31P

44

3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31G

31/NC

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11P

32

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11G

(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/96

Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

TeSys contactors

Schemes (continued)

TeSys D contactors

Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

74

84

84

62

83/NO

74

2 N/O protected (24-50 V)

+ 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31

54

73/NO

64

2 N/O protected (24-50 V)

2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40
53/NO

2 N/O (5-24 V)
LA1 DY20

63/NO

2 N/C (24-50 V)
LA1 DX02

54

2 N/O (24-50 V)
LA1 DX20

Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/80)

65/NC

55/NC

67/NO

66

56

68

On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD S

57/NO

67/NO
68

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R

58

55/NC
56

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T

Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 5/80)

E2

A2

A1

E1

LAD 6K10 and LA6 DK20

Side mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)

163/NO
(174)

251/NC
(282)

261/NC
(272)

164
(173)

252
(281)

262
(271)

2 N/O LAD 8N02 (1)

153/NO
(184)

161/NC
(172)
162
(171)

2 N/O LAD 8N20 (1)

154
(183)

(184)

154
(183)

153/NO

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD 8N11 (1)

(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.

Electronic serial timer modules

On-delay LA4 DTpU

Interface modules
Relay output

Solid state

LA4 DFB

LA4 DWB

References: page 5/83.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83

Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95

5/97

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

LC2 D09 to D38

LC2 DT20 to DT40

2 x LC1 D09 to D38

2 x LC1 DT20 to DT40

LC2 or 2 x LC1

3
4

c (1)

e1

e2

LC2 or 2 x LC1

D09 to D18 a

90

77

86

1.5

80

DT20 and DT25

90

85

90

80

D093 to D123 a

90

99

86

80

DT32 and DT40

90

91

98

80

D09 to D18 c

90

77

95

1.5

80

c, e: including cabling.

D093 to D123 c

90

99

95

80

D25 to D38 a

90

85

92

80

D183 to D383 a

90

99

92

80

D25 to D32 c

90

85

101

80

D183 to D383 c

90

99

101

80

e1 and e2: including cabling.

(1) With safety cover, without add-on block.

LC2 D40A to D65A

2 x LC1 D40A to D65A
37,5

122

26,5 37,5

120

6xM4

128

60/70

e2

e2

2xM4

60/70

e1

2xM4

TeSys D reversing contactors

18,7

64

18,7

119

8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/98

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References:
pages 5/72 to 5/77

Schemes:
pages 5/100 and 5/101

TeSys contactors

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys D reversing contactors

LC2 D80 and D95

2 x LC1 D80 and D95 c

2 x LC1 D80 and D95 a

6x6,5
G1

6x6,5
e1

1
8

13
LC2 or 2 x LC1

40

40 =

e2

e2

13

100/110

100/110

G1

e1

e1

e2

G1

2 x LC1

D80 and D95 a

182

127

158

13

57

96

D80 and D95

D80004 a

207

127

158

20

71

111

c, e1 and e2: including cabling.

40

40

e1

e2

G1

207

127

215

13

20

96

111

c, e1 and e2: including cabling.

LC2 D115 and D150

e1

2 x LC1 D115 and D150

130

158

LC2 or 2 x LC1

e2

e1

e2

D115 and D150

266

148

56

18

242/256

D115004

334

148

60

310/324

c, e1 and e2: including cabling.

8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References:
pages 5/72 to 5/77

Schemes:
pages 5/100 and 5/101

5/99

TeSys contactors

Schemes

TeSys D reversing contactors

Reversing contactors for motor control

LAD 9R1V

A1

21/NC
22

A2

13/NO
14

5
6
W

3
4

1
2

21/NC
22

L3
13/NO

5
6

14

L2

L1
1

3
4

A2

A1

A1

22

A2

13/NO

21/NC

14

6
W

4
V

1
2
U

13/NO

21/NC
22

L3
6

With integral electrical interlocking

14

L2
3

L1
1

A1
A2

LC2D09D150
Horizontally mounted

Changeover contactor pairs

8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

5/100

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References:
pages 5/72 to 5/77

Dimensions:
pages 5/98 and 5/99

A1

21/NC
22

A2

13/NO
14

2N
7
8
N

2/L3
5
6
L3

2/L2
3
4
L2

2/L1

L1

13/NO

21/NC
22

7
8

14

1/L3
5
6

1N

1/L2
3
4

1/L1
1
2

A2

A1

A1
A2

13/NO

21/NC
22

2N
14

2/L3

7
8
N

5
6
L3

2/L2

2/L1

21/NC
22

13/NO

1N
7
8

14

L2

1/L3
6

L1

1/L2
3

1/L1
A1

LAD T9R1V
With integral electrical interlocking

Horizontally mounted

A2

LC2DT20DT40

TeSys contactors

Schemes (continued)

TeSys D reversing contactors

Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors fitted with:

KM2

A2

KM2

A2

KM1

A2

02

A2

KM2
A1

02

KM1

A1

01

KM1

A2

01

A1

LAD 9V2, LAD 4CM, LA9 D50978 and LA9 D80978

A2

Mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts

LA9 D4002, LA9 D8002 and LA9 D11502

A1

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

A1

21/NC
22

13

21
22

14

W2

R4

V2

R3

R2

U2

R1

PV

GV

W1

U1

V1

A1
A2

13

21

3
4

22

R3
R4

14

R1

R2

PV

A2

13/NO

5
6

14

3
4

1
2

21/NC
22

13/NO
14

L3
6

L2
3

A1
A2

A1

21/NC
22

A2

13/NO

5
6

14

3
4
V

1
2
U

21/NC
22
A1

LAD 3PV/GV10

4
5

LAD 3PV/GV

LAD 9PV/GV

A2

L1

Low speed-High speed cabling kit, spring terminals

L3
13/NO

5
6

14

3
4

L2

1
2

A2

A1

L1

Low speed-High speed cabling kit, screw clamp terminals

GV

7
8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225

Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References:
pages 5/72 to 5/77

Dimensions:
pages 5/98 and 5/99

5/101

References

TeSys contactors

For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, 

used for power factor correction,
Direct connection without choke inductors

Special contactors

Special contactors LC1DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they
conform to standards IEC60070 and 60831, NFC 54-100, VDE0560, UL and CSA.

Contactor applications

Specification
Contactors fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on
closing to 60 In max.
This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses
and capacitors.
The patented design of the add-on block (n 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation.

Operating conditions
There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks.
Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.72 In.

3
511555

Maximum operational power

The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions:
Prospective peak current at switch-on
Maximum operating rate

Electrical durability at nominal load

Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1)

q y 55 C (2)

511556

200 In
240 operating cycles/hour
100 operating cycles/hour
300 000 operating cycles
200 000 operating cycles

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Tightening
torque on
cable end

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (3)

Weight

N/O
1

N/C
1
2

N.m
1.2
1.2

LC1DFK11pp
LC1DFK02pp

kg
0.430
0.430

220 V
240 V
kVAR
6.7

400 V
440 V
kVAR
12.5

660 V
690 V
kVAR
18

8.5

16.7

24

1
2

1.7
1.7

LC1DGK11pp
LC1DGK02pp

0.450
0.450

10

20

30

1
2

1.9
1.9

LC1DLK11pp
LC1DLK02pp

0.600
0.600

15

25

36

1
2

2.5
2.5

LC1DMK11pp
LC1DMK02pp

0.630
0.630

20

33.3

48

LC1DPK12pp

1.300

25

40

58

LC1DTK12pp

1.300

40

60

92

LC1DWK12pp

1.650

LC1 DFK11pp

LC1DpK
LC1DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK
LC1DTK, DWK
All contactor ratings
400 V
690 V

Switching of multiple-step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings)

8
9

LC1 DPK12pp

10
Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/103

5/102

The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched.
Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 50 C and U = 400 V or 440 V.
One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1DGK, and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1DFK.
(1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite.
(2) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 60070 and 60831 is 45 C.
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
24
42
48
110
115
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office

TeSys contactors

Dimensions,
schemes

For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, 

used for power factor correction

Dimensions

LC1DPK, DTK

1
2

127

180

74

130

LC1DFK, DGK

45

LC1
DFK
DGK

c
117
122

Type of fixing
LC1D12
See page 5/94
LC1D18
See page 5/94

LC1
DPK
DTK

75

150
Type of fixing
LC1D40
LC1D50

See page 5/94

See page 5/94

LC1DWK

127

200

84

140

LC1DLK, DMK

56

157
LC1
DLK
DMK

c
117
122

Type of fixing
LC1D25
See page 5/94
LC1D32
See page 5/94

LC1
DWK

85

Type of fixing
LC1D80

See page 5/94

Schemes
LC1DpK

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

A2

A1

-R

-R

9
R = Pre-wired resistor connections.

Cabling (maximum permissible c.s.a.)

Contactor type LC1
DFK
Number of conductors
1
Flexible cable with cable end (mm2) 2.5
Solid cable with cable end (mm2) 4

2
1.5
4

DGK
1
4
6

2
2.5
6

DLK
1
4
10

2
4
6

DMK
1
6
16

2
4
10

DPK, DTK
1
2
16
6
25
16

DWK
1
50
50

10

2
25
35

References :
page 5/102

5/103

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys contactors
From 115 to 2750 A

Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications

Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits:
heating, lighting, cos j rectification, transformers, normal-standby

2
Rated operational current

le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

115 A

150 A

185 A

225 A

265 A

330 A

Ie max. AC-1 (q y 40 C)

200 A

250 A

275 A

315 A

350 A

400 A

Rated operational voltage

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

Number of poles

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

220/240 V

30 kW

40 kW

55 kW

63 kW

75 kW

100 kW

380/400 V

55 kW

75 kW

90 kW

110 kW

132 kW

160 kW

415 V

59 kW

80 kW

100 kW

110 kW

140 kW

180 kW

440 V

59 kW

80 kW

100 kW

110 kW

140 kW

200 kW

500 V

75 kW

90 kW

110 kW

129 kW

160 kW

200 kW

660/690 V

80 kW

100 kW

110 kW

129 kW

160 kW

220 kW

1000 V

65 kW

65 kW

100 kW

100 kW

147 kW

160 kW

3
4

Rated operational power

in category AC-3

5
6
7
8
9

Add-on auxiliary contact blocks

Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous 

LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)

Associated
thermal overload relays
and controllers

Manual-auto

LR9 F

Electronic

TeSys T

Interfaces

Specific

LA4 FWB

Universal

With or without, depending on the control circuit

Contactor type

LC1 F115

LC1 F150

LC1 F185

LC1 F225

LC1 F265

LC1 F330

Reversing contactor type

LC2 F115

LC2 F150

LC2 F185

LC2 F225

LC2 F265

For customer
assembly

Pages

Contactors

5/114 and 5/115

5/114 and 5/115

Reversing contactors

5/116 and 5/117

5/118 to 5/121

10

5/104

version: 7.0

0204Q-EN.indd

2
400 A

500 A

630 A

780 A

800 A

750 A

1000 A

1500 A

1800 A

500 A

700 A

1000 A

1600 A

1000 A

1700 A

2100 A

800 A

1250 A

2000 A

2750 A

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

1000 V

2, 3 or 4

2, 3 or 4

2, 3 or 4

3 or 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

1 to 4

110 kW

147 kW

200 KW

220 kW

250 kW

220 kW

280 kW

425 kW

500 kW

200 kW

250 kW

335 kW

400 kW

450 kW

400 kW

500 kW

750 kW

900 kW

220 kW

280 kW

375 kW

425 kW

450 kW

425 kW

530 kW

800 kW

900 kW

250 kW

295 kW

400 kW

425 kW

450 kW

450 kW

560 kW

800 kW

900 kW

257 kW

355 kW

400 kW

450 kW

450 kW

500 kW

600 kW

700 kW

900 kW

280 kW

335 kW

450 kW

475 kW

475 kW

560 kW

670 kW

750 kW

900 kW

185 kW

335 kW

450 kW

450 kW

450 kW

530 kW

530 kW

670 kW

750 kW

Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, 
time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)

4 instantaneous contact compositions: 

2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O

LR9 F

LR9 F

TeSys T

TeSys T

LA4 FWB

With or without, depending on the control circuit

LC1 F400

LC1 F500

LC1 F630

LC1 F780

LC1 F800

LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100

LC1 BL

3
4
5
6
7

LC1 BM

LC1 BP

LC1 BR

For customer assembly

5/114 and 5/115

5/184 and 5/185

5/118 to 5/117

5/186

9
10

0204Q-EN.indd

version: 7.0

5/105

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

Environment

1
2
3
4

Contactor type
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)
Conforming to standards

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

LC1 F115
1000

LC1 F150
1000

LC1 F185
1000

Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C

1500

1500

1500

Coil not connected to the 

power circuit

kV

EN

60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038

Product certifications

CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC

60529
Conforming to VDE 0106

IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F

Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F

Protective treatment

Standard version

TH

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation
Permissible at Uc (1)

C
C
C

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 40+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

(not to be used for LC1F780, F1700 and F2100)

With derating
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the 
pull-i
n
voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the
operation
a
l curre
nt in AC-1

Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in

voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational
current

in AC-1
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and
mechanical durabilities can be assured.

7
8

Not to be used

Shock resistance (2)

1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Contactor open

9 gn

9 gn

7 gn

Contactor closed

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

Vibration resistance (2)

5300 Hz

Contactor open

2 gn

2 gn

2 gn

Contactor closed

6 gn

6 gn

5 gn

(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115
to F225.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher
resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult
your Regional Sales Office.

9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/106

References:
pages 5/114 and 5/115

Dimensions, mounting:
pages 5/140 to 5/145

Schemes:
page 5/146

LC1 F225
1000

LC1 F265
1000

LC1 F330
1000

LC1 F400
1000

LC1 F500
1000

LC1 F630
1000

LC1 F780
1000

LC1 F800
1000

LC1 F1700
1000

LC1 F2100
1000

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

UL, CSA, GL,

LROS

UL, CSA, CCC (pending)

EN

60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038

CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC
IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F
Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F

1
2

TH
- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 40+ 70

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 5+ 55

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 40
- 40+ 60

3000

4
5

(not to be used for LC1F780, F1700 and F2100)

Not to be used
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage
and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.

Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage
and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical
durabilities can be assured

7
7 gn

6 gn

6 gn

6 gn

9 gn

6 gn

5 gn

6 gn

6 gn

6 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

15 gn

2 gn

2 gn

2 gn

1.5 gn

2 gn

2 gn

2.5 gn

2 gn

2 gn

2 gn

5 gn

5 gn

5 gn

5 gn

4 gn

4 gn

5.5 gn

4 gn

4 gn

4 gn

8
9
10

5/107

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

Pole characteristics

Contactor type
Number of poles

LC1 F115
3 or 4

LC1 F150
3 or 4

LC1 F185
3 or 4

Rated operational current

(le)(Ue y 440 V)

In AC-3, q y 55 C
In AC-1, q y 40 C

A
A

115
200

150
250

185
275

Rated operational voltage 

(Ue)
Frequency limits

Up to

1000

1000

1000

Of the operational current (1)

Hz

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

Conventional thermal current

q y 40 C

200

250

275

Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4

Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4

I rms conforming to 
IEC 60947-4-1
Rated breaking capacity
I rms conforming to 
IEC 60947-4-1
Maximum permissible current For 10 s
No current flowing for previous  For 30 s
60 minutes, at q y 40 C
For 1 min
For 3 min
For 10 min

A
A
A
A
A

1100
640
520
400
320

1200
700
600
450
350

1500
920
740
500
400

Short-circuit protection
by fuses
U y 440 V

Motor circuit (type aM)

With thermal overload relay
(type gG)
gG fuses

A
A

125
200

160
200

200
315

200

250

315

Average impedance per pole

At lth and 50 Hz

mW

0.37

0.35

0.33

Power dissipation per pole

for the above 
operational currents

AC-3
AC-1

W
W

5
15

8
22

12
25

mm
mm2
mm2
mm

Maximum c.s.a.
2
20 x 3
95
95
6

2
25 x 3
120
120
8

2
25 x 3
150
150
8

N.m

10

18

18

Rated making capacity

Connection
Bar

Number of bars
Bar
Cable with lug
Cable with connector
Bolt diameter
Tightening torque

Power circuit connections

(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
(2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125.
(3) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's
recommendations.

7
8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/108

References:
pages 5/114 and 5/115

Dimensions, mounting:
pages 5/140 to 5/145

Schemes:
page 5/145

LC1 F225
3 or 4

LC1 F265
3 or 4

LC1 F330
3 or 4

LC1 F400
2, 3 or 4

LC1 F500
2, 3 or 4

LC1 F630
2, 3 or 4

LC1 F780
3 or 4

LC1 F800
3

LC1 F1700
3

LC1 F2100
3

225
315

265
350

330
400

400
500

500
700

630
1000

780
1600

800
1000

1700

2100 (2)

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

162/3200

315

350

400

500

700

1000

1600

1000

1700

2100 (2)

1250

1250

Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4

1800
1000
850
560
440

2200
1230
950
620
480

2650
1800
1300
900
750

3600
2400
1700
1200
1000

4200
3200
2400
1500
1200

5050
4400
3400
2200
1600

6250
5600
4600
3000
2200

5500
4600
3600
2600
1700

Making current:
1.5 x I in AC-1
Making and breaking current:
1.5 x I in AC-1

250
315

315
500

400
500

400
630

500
800

630
800

800
1000

800
1000

315

400

500

500

800

1000

2 x 800 (3)

1000

2 x 800 (3)

2 x 1000 (3)

0.32

0.3

0.28

0.26

0.18

0.12

0.10

0.12

0.10

0.10

16
32

21
37

31
44

42
65

45
88

48
120

60
250

77
120

200

200

2
32 x 4
185
185

2
32 x 4
240
240

2
30 x 5
240

2
30 x 5
2 x 150

2
40 x 5
2 x 240

2
3
60 x 5 60 x 5

2
100 x 5

2
60 x 5

3
100 x 5

4
100 x 5

10

10

10

10

10

12

2 x 12

12

12 ( 10 with set of rightangled connectors LA9 F2100)

35

35

35

35

35

58

58

58

58 (35 with set of right-angled

connectors LA9 F2100)

Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/109

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)

Control circuit: a.c.

Control circuit characteristics with LX1 or LX9 coil

Contactor type
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

50 or 60 Hz

Control voltage limits (q y 55 C)

50 or 60 Hz coils

40400 Hz coils

Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz Inrush

Sealed

a 60 Hz Inrush

Sealed

6
7

LC1 F115
241000

Operation
Drop-out

0.851.1 Uc
0.350.55 Uc

Operation
Drop-out

LC1 F150

LC1 F185

50 Hz coil
40400 Hz coil
Cos j

VA
VA

550

0.3

550

0.3

805

0.3

50 Hz coil
40400 Hz coil
Cos j

VA
VA

45

0.3

45

0.3

55

0.3

60 Hz coil
40400 Hz coil
Cos j

VA
VA

660

0.3

660

0.3

970

0.3

60 Hz coil
40400 Hz coil
Cos j

VA
VA

55

0.3

55

0.3

66

0.3

1216

1216

1824

ms
ms

2335
515

2335
515

2035
715

Heat dissipation

Operating time (1)

Closing "C"
Opening "O"

Mechanical durability at Uc

In millions of operating cycles

10

10

10

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature 
y 55 C
Connection
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable 
with cable end

In operating cycles per hour

2400

2400

2400

Solid cable 
without cable end
Tightening torque

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

Min/max c.s.a.
1/4

1/4

1/4

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

1/4

1/4

1/4

N.m

1.2

1.2

1.2

Mechanical latching

Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. 

For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. 
See pages 5/240 to 5/267
(1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
(2) Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil.

8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/110

References:
pages 5/114 and 5/115

Dimensions:
pages 5/140 to 5/145

Schemes:
page 5/146

LC1 F225
241000

LC1 F265

LC1 F330

LC1 F400
481000

LC1 F500

LC1 F630
481000

LC1 F780
110500

LC1 F800
110400

LC1 F1700
110500 (2)

LC1 F2100
110500 (2)

0.851.1 Uc
0.250.5 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.20.4 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.30.5 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.30.5 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.30.5 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.350.55 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.350.55 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.30.5 Uc

805

0.3

650
0.9

650
0.9

1075
0.9

1100
0.9

1650
0.9

2100
0.9

1700
0.9

2200
0.9

2200
0.9

55

0.3

10
0.9

10
0.9

15
0.9

18
0.9

22
0.9

50
0.9

12

36
0.9

36
0.9

970

0.3

650
0.9

650
0.9

1075
0.9

1100
0.9

1650
0.9

2100
0.9

1700
0.9

2200
0.9

2200
0.9

66

0.3

10
0.9

10
0.9

15
0.9

18
0.9

22
0.9

50
0.9

12

36
0.9

36
0.9

1824

14

18

20

2 x 22

25

2 x 18

2 x 18

2035
715

4065
100170

4065
100170

4075
100170

4075
100170

4080
100200

4080
130230

6080
150180

4075
100170

4075
100170

10

10

10

10

10

2400

2400

2400

2400

2400

1200

600

600

600

600

Min/max c.s.a.
1/4
1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4
1/2.5

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

2
3
4
5
6
7

Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.

For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F.
See pages 5/240 to 5/267.

8
9
10

5/111

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)

Control circuit: d.c.

Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil

1
2

Contactor type
Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)
Control voltage limits 
(q y 55 C)

Average consumption 
at 20 C and at Uc

Average operating time

at Uc (1)

3
4

Mechanical durability at Uc

LC1 F150
24460

LC1 F185
24460

Operation

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

Drop-out

0.150.2 Uc

0.150.2 Uc

0.150.2 Uc

Inrush

560

560

800

Sealed

4.5

4.5

Closing "C"

ms

3040

3040

3040

Opening "O"

ms

3050

3050

3050

In millions of operating cycles

Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
10
10
10

Maximum operating rate at

In operating cycles per hour
ambient temperature y 55 C
Cabling
Flexible cable 1 conductor
without cable
end
2 conductors

2400

2400

2400

mm2

Min/max c.s.a.
1/4

1/4

1/4

mm2

1/4

1/4

1/4

Flexible cable 1 conductor

with cable end
2 conductors

mm2

1/4

1/4

1/4

mm2

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

Solid cable
1 conductor
without cable
end
2 conductors

mm2

1/4

1/4

1/4

mm2

1/4

1/4

1/4

Tightening torque

N.m

1.2

1.2

1.2

Mechanical latching

Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.

For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F.
See pages 5/240 to 5/267.

5
6

LC1 F115
24460

(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact
of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

7
8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/112

References:
pages 5/114 and 5/115

Dimensions:
pages 5/140 to 5/145

Schemes:
page 5/146

LC1 F225
24460

LC1 F265
24460

LC1 F330
24460

LC1 F400
48440

LC1 F500
48440

LC1 F630
48440

LC1 F780
110440

LC1 F800
110400

LC1 F1700
110440

LC1 F2100
110440

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.150.2 Uc

0.150.2 Uc

0.150.2 Uc

0.20.35 Uc

0.20.35 Uc

0.20.35 Uc

0.20.4 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

0.20.35 Uc

0.20.35 Uc

800

750

750

1000

1100

1600

2 x 1000

1900

2100

2100

2 x 21

12

10

10

3040

4050

4050

5060

5060

6070

7080

6080

5060

5060

3050

4065

4065

4560

4560

4050

100130

4050

4560

4560

Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications. the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
10

10

10

10

10

2400

2400

2400

2400

2400

1200

600

600

600

600

Min/max c.s.a.
1/4
1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

3
4
5

Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors.

For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F.
See pages 5/240 to 5/267.

6
7
8
9
10

5/113

TeSys contactors

References

TeSys F contactors for motor control in

utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 800 A)
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

3-pole contactors

LC1 F225

813079

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors
50-60 Hz in category AC-3

813080

4
LC1 F630

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3

220 V
230 V
kW
30

380V
660V
400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V
kW kW kW kW kW kW
55
59
59
75
80
65

440 V
up to
A
115

40

75

80

80

90

100

65

55

90

100

100

110

110

63

110

110

110

129

75

132

140

140

100

160

180

110

200

147

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2)
Screw fixing,
cabling
(1)

Weight

LC1 F115pp

kg
3.430

150

LC1 F150pp

3.430

100

185

LC1 F185pp

4.650

129

100

225

LC1 F225pp

4.750

160

160

147

265

LC1 F265pp

7.440

200

200

220

160

330

LC1 F330pp

8.600

220

250

257

280

185

400

LC1 F400pp

9.100

250

280

295

355

335

335

500

LC1 F500pp

11.350

200

335

375

400

400

450

450

630

LC1 F630pp

18.600

220

400

425

425

450

475

450

780

LC1 F780pp

39.500

250

450

450

450

450

475

450

800

LC1 F800pp

18.750

Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127.

(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be
ordered separately, except on contactors LC1 F780 (see page 5/126).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales
Office) .
Volts a
24 48 110 115 120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 F115F225
50 Hz (coil LX1)
B5 E5 F5 FE5

M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1)

E6 F6
G6
L6 M6
U6 Q6

R6

E7 F7 FE7 G7
L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
40400 Hz (coil LX9)
LC1 F265F330
B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7
L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
40400 Hz (coil LX1)
LC1 F400F630

E7 F7 FE7 G7 (3) L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
40400 Hz (coil LX1)
LC1 F780

F7 FE7 F7
L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
40400 Hz (coil LX1)
LC1 F800

FW FW FW
MW MW MW QW QW QW
40400 Hz (coil LX4) (4)

6
7

Volts c
24 48 110
LC1 F115F330
(coil LX4F)
BD ED FD
LC1 F400F630
(coil LX4F)

ED FD
LC1 F780
(coil LX4F)

FD
LC1 F800
(coil LX4F)

FW
(3) F7 for LC1 F630.
(4) Coil LX4F8pp + rectifier DR5TEpp.

8
9

125 220

230 250 400 440

GD MD

MD UD

RD

GD MD

UD

RD

GD MD

UD

RD

FW MW

MW

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/114

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142

Schemes :
page 5/146

QW

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors for control in category AC-1,

(200 to 2100A )
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
813082

Maximum
current
in AC-1
(q y 40 C)

Number of poles

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Screw fixing,
cabling (1)

LC1 F115pp

kg
3.430

LC1 F1154pp

3.830

LC1 F150pp

3.430

LC1 F1504pp

3.830

LC1 F185pp

4.650

LC1 F1854pp

5.450

LC1 F225pp

4.750

LC1 F2254pp

5.550

LC1 F265pp

7.440

LC1 F2654pp

8.540

LC1 F330pp

8.600

LC1 F3304pp

9.500

LC1 F4002pp

8.000

LC1 F400pp

9.100

LC1 F4004pp

10.200

LC1 F5002pp

9.750

LC1 F500pp

11.350

LC1 F5004pp

12.950

LC1 F6302pp

15.500

LC1 F630pp

18.600

LC1 F6304pp

21.500

LC1 F6302ppS011

15.500

LC1 F630ppS011

18.600

LC1 F6304ppS011

21.500

LC1 F780pp

39.500

LC1 F7804pp

48.000

1700

LC1 F1700

30.000

2100 (3)

LC1 F2100

31.000

A
200

LC1 F1854

813084

250

275

315

350
LC1 F4004

813083

400

500

700
LC1 F6304

568674

1000

1250

LC1 F1700

568675

1600

Weight

Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately (except LC1 F780, LC1 F1700 and LC1 F2100), see page 5/126 .
(2) Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page.
(3) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125).

LC1 F2100

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142

Schemes :
page 5/146

5/115

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys F reversing contactors for motor control 

in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 265 A), 
pre-assembled
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted) (1)

523097

Pre-wired power connections

Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3

LC2F115

3
4

Operational
current
in AC-3

220 V 380 V
660 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
30
55
59
59
75
80
65

440 V 
up to
A
115

Maximum Contactors
operasupplied
tional
without coil (2)
voltage Complete
reference
Fixing, cabling
(3)
V
1000
LC2F115

Weight

40

75

80

80

90

100

65

150

1000

LC2F150

7.560


55

90

100

100

110

110

100

185

1000

LC2F185

10.100


63

110

110

110

129

129

100

225

1000

LC2F225

14.200

75

132

140

140

160

160

147

265

1000

LC2F265

16.480


kg
7.560


Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description
Power terminal
protection shrouds

5
Auxiliary contact
blocks and
add-on modules

For reversing
contactors
LC2F115

Quantity
required
2

Reference

LC2F150, F185

LA9F702

0.250


LC2F225, F265

LA9F703

0.250





See pages 5/122 

to 5/127

LA9F701

Weight
kg
0.250


(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LADNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2contactors, see page
5/123 For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see pages 5/130 and 5/131,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/133
(3) Screw fixing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.

7
8
9
10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/116

Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150

Schemes:
page 5/151

References (continued)

TeSys c
ontactors

TeSys F changeover contactor pairs for control 

in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 350A), 
pre-assembled
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)

Pre-wired power connections

526098

Utilisation category AC-1

Non inductive loads
Maximum operational current
q < 40 C

LC2F1854

Maximum
operational
voltage

Contactors
supplied without
coil (2)
Complete
reference
Fixing, cabling (3)

Weight

A
200

V
1000

LC2F1154

kg
8.860


250

1000

LC2F1504

8.860

275

1000

LC2F1854

12.100


315

1000

LC2F2254

15.200


350

1000

LC2F2654

19.480


Reference

Weight
kg
0.250

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description
Power terminal
protection shrouds

Auxiliary contact
blocks and
add-on modules

For changeover
pairs
LC2F1154

Quantity
required
2

LA9F706

LC2F1504, F1854 2

LA9F707

0.250


LC2F2254, F2654 2

LA9F708

0.250






See pages 5/122 to 5/127

(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LADNp1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2contactors, see page
5/123 For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see page 5/130,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/136.
(3) Screw fixing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150

Schemes:
page 5/151

5/117

Combinations

TeSys c
ontactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover
contactor pairs

Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors

and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly

Vertically mounted

4
5
6

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G

LC1F780

LA9FX970

7
8
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120 and 5/121
(2) Complete references: see page 5/119.

9
10

5/118

5
6
L3

2/L3

3
4
L2

A2

A1

1
2
L1

2/L2

1/L1
5
6

2/L1

1/L2
3

1/L3
1

6
W

A1

4
V

LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L

A2

1
2
U

Mechanical interlocks

Reversers assembled using 

2 contactors of identical rating,
type:
LC1F115
LC1F150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630
LC1F800
Reversers assembled using 
2 contactors of different ratings,
see page 5/120

A1

L3
5
6

A2

L2
3

A1

L1

LA9Fppp76 (2)

LA9Fp970 (2)

LC1F115
LC1F150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630
LC1F800

3-pole changeover contactor

pairs (1)
LA9Fppp82 (2)

Reversing contactors

Sets of power connections

A2

Mechanical interlocks

Horizontally mounted
Reversers assembled using 
2 contactors of identical rating,
type:

References

TeSys c
ontactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover pairs
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type
(1)

Set of power connections

Reference
Weight
kg

Mechanical interlock
Kit reference
Weight
kg

For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Horizontally mounted
LC1F115
LC1F150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630 or F800

LA9FF976
LA9F15076
LA9FG976
LA9F22576
LA9FH976
LA9FJ976
LA9FJ976
LA9FK976
LA9FL976

Vertically mounted
LC1F115 or F150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265 or F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630 or F800
LC1F780

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)

0.600
0.600
0.780
1.500
1.500
2.100
2.100
2.350
3.800

LA9FF970
LA9FF970
LA9FG970
LA9FG970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FL970

0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G
LA9FG4G
LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L
LA9FX970 (3)

0.345
0.350
0.350
1.060
1.200
1.200
1.220
6.100

2
3
4

For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4)

Horizontally mounted
LC1F115
LC1F150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630 or F800

LA9FF982
LA9F15082
LA9FG982
LA9F22582
LA9FH982
LA9FJ982
LA9FJ982
LA9FK982
LA9FL982

0.460
0.460
0.610
1.200
1.200
1.800
1.800
2.300
3.400

LA9FF970
LA9FF970
LA9FG970
LA9FG970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FL970

0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150

Vertically mounted
LC1F115 or F150
(2)

LA9FF4F
0.345
LC1F185
(2)

LA9FG4G
0.350
LC1F225
(2)

LA9FG4G
0.350
LC1F265 or F330
(2)

LA9FH4H
1.060
LC1F400
(2)

LA9FJ4J
1.200
LC1F500
(2)

LA9FK4K
1.200
LC1F630 or F800
(2)

LA9FL4L
1.220
LC1F780
(3)

LA9FX970 (3)
7.800
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/114 and 5/115.For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LADNp1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123
For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(2) With the exception of contactors LC1F780, all power connections are to be made by the
customer.
(3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power
connecting links.
(4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120 and 5/121

5
6
7
8
9
10

Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150

Schemes:
page 5/151

5/119

Combinations

TeSys c
ontactors

TeSysF
changeover contactor pairs

Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover

contactor pairs, for customer assembly

Vertically mounted

3
4
5
6

7
8

Mechanical interlocks

Contactor pairs assembled using

2 contactors of identical rating,
type:
LC1F1154
LC1F1504
LC1F1854
LC1F2254
LC1F2654
LC1F3304
LC1F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304

Assembly A
LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G

Assembly B
LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L

Assembly C
LA9FX971

Contactor pairs assembled using

2 contactors of different ratings,
type:
LC1F115 or F1154
LC1F150 or F1504
LC1F185 or F1854
LC1F225 or F2254
LC1F265 or F2654
LC1F330 or F3304
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630 or F6304
LC1F800

Assembly A
LA9FG4F

Assembly B
LA9FH4F, LA9FH4G
LA9FJ4F, LA9FJ4G
LA9FK4F, LA9FK4G
LA9FL4F, LA9FL4G

Assembly C
LA9FJ4H
LA9FK4H, LA9FK4J
LA9FL4H, LA9FL4J and LA9FL4K

Contactor pairs assembled using

3 contactors of identical or
different ratings, type:
LC1F115 or F1154
LC1F150 or F1504
LC1F185 or F1854
LC1F225 or F2254
LC1F265 or F2654
LC1F330 or F3304
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630 or F6304
LC1F800

LA9Fp4p4p: see pages 5/128 and 5/129

7
8
9

A2

A1

2N

5
6

L3

2/L3

3
4

2/L2

1
2

L1

L2

2/L1

1/L2

1/L1

1N

1/L3

1
A1

LA9Fp970

Sets of power connections

4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
LA9Fppp77

Mechanical interlocks

A2

Horizontally mounted
Contactor pairs assembled using
2 contactors of identical rating,
type:
LC1F1154
LC1F1504
LC1F1854
LC1F2254
LC1F2654
LC1F3304
LC1F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304

10

Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to

bottom.
(1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/119.

5/120

References

TeSys c
ontactors

TeSysF
changeover contactor pairs

Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover

contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
Contactor type
(2)

Set of power connections

Reference
Weight
kg

Mechanical interlock
Kit reference
Weight
kg

Horizontally mounted
LC1F1154
LC1F1504
LC1F1854
LC1F2254
LC1F2654
LC1F3304
LC1F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304

LA9FF977
LA9F15077
LA9FG977
LA9F22577
LA9FH977
LA9FJ977
LA9FJ977
LA9FK977
LA9FL977

LA9FF970
LA9FF970
LA9FG970
LA9FG970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FL970

0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150

Vertically mounted
LC1F1154 or F1504
LC1F1854
LC1F2254
LC1F2654 or F3304
LC1F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304
LC1F7804

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(4)

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G
LA9FG4G
LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L
LA9FX971 (4)

0.345
0.350
0.350
1.060
1.200
1.200
1.220
7.800

0.460
0.460
0.610
1.200
1.200
1.800
1.800
2.300
3.400

1
2
3
4

Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactor type(1)
At bottom
Vertically mounted
LC1F115 or F1154
or
LC1F150 or F1504

LC1F185 or F1854
or
LC1F225 or F2254

LC1F265 or F2654
or
LC1F330 or F3304
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004

At top

Mechanical interlock
Kit reference
Weight
kg

LC1F185 or F1854
LC1F225 or F2254
LC1F265 or F2654
LC1F330 or F3304
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630, F6304 or F800
LC1F265 or F2654
LC1F330 or F3304
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630, F6304 or F800
LC1F400 or F4004
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630, F6304 or F800
LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F630 or F6304 or F800
LC1F630 or F6304 or F800

LA9FG4F
LA9FG4F
LA9FH4F
LA9FH4F
LA9FJ4F
LA9FK4F
LA9FL4F
LA9FH4G
LA9FH4G
LA9FJ4G
LA9FK4G
LA9FL4G
LA9FJ4H
LA9FK4H
LA9FL4H
LA9FK4J
LA9FL4J
LA9FL4K

0.350
0.350
0.870
0.870
0.930
0.940
0.940
0.860
0.860
0.940
0.940
0.950
1.130
1.130
1.140
1.200
1.210
1.210

For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted

5
6
7
8

See pages 5/128 and 5/129.

(1) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/120
(2) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LADNp1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123.
For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(3) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
(4) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power
connecting links.

9
10

Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150

Schemes:
page 5/151

5/121

122

1
2
LAD N

3
4
LAD N, LAD C
LAD N10, N01

LC1 F

5
6

LAD T, LAD S

7
LAD R

8
9

LA1 DX, DY, DZ

10

5/122

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors

Auxiliary contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

For use in normal operating environments
Number
of
contacts

Maximum number
of blocks per contactor
Clip-on mounting

Composition

Reference

Weight

LAD N10
LAD N01

kg
0.020
0.020

1
2

LAD N11
LAD N20
LAD N02

0.030
0.030
0.030

2
1
4

3
2

2
3

4
1
2 (1)

LAD N22
LAD N13
LAD N40
LAD N04
LAD N31
LAD C22

0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050

1
2
3

With terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

2

1
1

1
1

LAD N11P
LAD N11G

0.030
0.030

2
2

2
2

LAD N22P
LAD N22G

0.050
0.050

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp
protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the
end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp

protected contacts

Recommended for use in particularly harsh industrial environments

Number
of
contacts

Maximum number of
blocks per contactor
Clip-on mounting

Composition

Reference

Weight

2
2

2 (2)

LA1 DX20
LA1 DY20

kg
0.040
0.040

2
2

LA1 DZ40
LA1 DZ31

0.050
0.050

2
1

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number
of
contacts
1 N/O
+
1 N/C

Maximum number of
blocks per contactor
Clip-on mounting

Time delay

On-delay 0.13 (3)

0.130
10180
130 (4)
Off-delay 0.13 (3)
0.130
10180

Type

Reference

Range
s
LAD T0
LAD T2
LAD T4
LAD S2
LAD R0
LAD R2
LAD R4

Inputs: c 24 V - 100 mA
Outputs: a 480 V - 25 A

Reference
LA4 FSRE r

kg
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060

Weight
kg

(1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break

(2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
(4) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the
N/O contact.
rAvailable 2nd half 2009.
Presentation :
page 5/122

Weight

Interface for PLC control

Type of I/O

Schemes :
page 5/147

5/123

8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors
Suppressor blocks

Suppressor blocks

RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)

b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only
in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion.
b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.3 times the normal time).

813089

Mounting
Clip-on mounting on all ratings 
and all a.c. coils.

Uc
a

LA9 D09981

Reference
2448 V
50110 V
127240 V
265415 V

LA4 Fppp

Suppressor block bracket

0.040
0.040
0.040

LA9D09981

0.010

813087

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Clip-on mounting on all ratings 
a or c
LA4FVE
2448 V
and all coils.
LA4FVF
50110 V
127240 V LA4FVP
265415 V LA4FVV

0.040
0.040
0.040
0.040

Diodes

b No overvoltage or oscillating frequencies.

b Increase in drop-out time (3 to 4 times the normal time).
b Polarised component.
c
Clip-on mounting on all ratings
2448 V
and all d.c. coils.
55110 V
125250 V

280440 V

LA4FDE
LA4FDF
LA4FDP
LA4FDV

0.040
0.040
0.040
0.040

Bidirectional peak limiting diodes (transil)

813088

LA9 Fp602

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to between 2 and 2.5 times Uc max.
b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Clip-on mounting on all ratings 
a or c
LA4FTE
0.040
2448 V
and all coils.
LA4FTF
0.040
50110 V
0.040
127240 V LA4FTP
0.040
265415 V LA4FTV

Connection accessories
For use on 4-pole contactors
LA9 Fp601

Set of 4 links
Set reference

Weight
kg

Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs)

LC1F1154
LC1F1504, F1854
LC1F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304

LA9FF602
LA9FG602
LA9FH602
LA9FK602
LA9FL602

0.200
0.350
1.000
1.750
3.000

LA9FF601
LA9FG601
LA9FH601
LA9FK601
LA9FL601

0.035
0.050
0.120
0.180
0.550

Links for star connection of 3 poles

LC1F115
LC1F150, F185
LC1F225, F265, F330, F400
LC1F500
LC1F630, F800

813090

LA4FRCF
LA4FRCP
LA4FRCV

Varistors (peak limiting)

LA4FRCE

Weight
kg
0.040

DZ3 FA3

Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals

For use with contactors
LC1F115
LC1F150, F185
LC1F225F500
LC1F630, F800

10
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144

5/124

Mounted on
bolt size
M6
M8
M10
M12

Sold in
lots of
10
10
10
10

Unit
reference
DZ3FA3
DZ3GA3
DZ3HA3
DZ3JA3

Weight
kg
0.004
0.004
0.006
0.009

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys Fcontactors
Accessories

Right-angled connectors

For contactors or thermal overload relays

813091

For use with

Contactors Thermal overload
relays (1)
LC1F115

LR9F5p67, LR9F67

With connector plates

Width
15 mm

LA9Fp981

813093

LC1F150,
F185

LC1F225,
F265, F330,
F400

LR9F5p69, F5p71,
LR9F69, F71

LR9F7p75,LR9F75

20 mm

25 mm

LA9Fp979
LR9F7p79, F7p81,
LR9F79, F81

30 mm

510487

LC1F500

LC1F630,
F800

LA9FL980

LR9F7p81,LR9F81

For use with

Contactors Thermal overload
relays (1)
LC1F1700,
F2100

40 mm

Type
Rear

Set of 3 connectors
Set reference
Weight
kg
LA9FF981
0.060

Side

LA9FF979

0.240

Large
surface area
Rear

LA9FF980

0.150

LA9FG981

0.080

Side

LA9FG979

0.350

Large
surface area
Rear

LA9FG980

0.200

LA9FJ981

0.430

Side

LA9FJ979

0.750

Large
surface area
Rear

LA9FJ980

0.490

LA9FK981

0.480

Side

LA9FK979

0.920

Large
surface area
Rear

LA9FK980

0.800

LA9FL981

1.210

Side

LA9FL979

2.570

LA9FL980

3.190

Large
surface area
With connector
plates
Width
60 mm

Type
Rear

Set of 6 connectors
Set reference
Weight
kg
LA9F2100
9.550

1
2
3
4
5

510487

Connection accessories

For reversing contactors or "star-delta" contactors combined with a thermal

overload relay

LA9F2100

For use with

Contactors Thermal overload
relays (1)
LC1F115
LR9F5p57, F5p63
LR9F5p67, F5p69
LR9F69, F71
LC1F150 
LR9F5p57, F5p63
and

F185

Width of
connector plates

Set of 3 busbars
Set reference

15 mm

LA7F401

Weight
kg
0.110

20 mm

LA7F402

0.110

LC1F185

LR9F5p71,
LR9F71

25 mm

LA7F407

0.160

LC1F225 
and

F265

LR9F5p71,
LR9F71

25 mm

LA7F403

0.160

LR9F7p75, F7p79
LR9F75, F79

25 mm

LA7F404

0.160

LC1F330 
and F400

LR9F7p75, F7p79
LR9F75, F79

25 mm

LA7F404

0.160

LC1F400

LR9F7p81,LR9F81

25 mm

LA7F404

0.160

LC1F500

LR9F7p75, F7p79
LR9F7p81
LR9F75, F79, F81

30 mm

LA7F405

0.270

LC1F630,
F800

LR9F7p81,
LR9F81

40 mm

LA7F406

0.600

6
7
8
9

(1) For protection relays class 10, replace the p with a 3 and for class 20, replace the p with a 5.

10
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144

5/125

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors
Accessories

Insulated terminal blocks

For use on
3-pole contactors

813094

LC1F115, F150, F185

Connection

Tightening
tool

1 x 16150 mm2 
or 
2 x 1695 mm2

4 mm
hexagonal
socket key

Set of 2 blocks
Set reference
LA9F103

Weight
kg
0.560

Power terminal protection shrouds

LA9 F103

813095

2
3
4

For use on
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors
LC1F115

Number of
Set reference
shrouds per set
6
LA9F701

Weight
kg
0.250

LC1F150, F185

LA9F702

0.250

LC1F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002

F500 and F5002

LA9F703

0.250

LC1F630, F6302 and F800

LA9F704

0.250

LC1F1154

LA9F706

0.300

LC1F1504 and F1854

LA9F707

0.300

LC1F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004

LA9F708

0.300

LC1F6304

LA9F709

0.300

LA9 F701

5
6
7
8
9
10

5/126

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors
Spare parts

Sets of contacts

813096

Per pole: 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and
washers.
For contactor

Type

Replacement
for
2 poles
2 poles
2 poles
2 poles

Reference
LA5F400802
LA5F500802
LA5F630802
LA5F630802S011

Weight
kg
1.350
1.950
4.700
4.800

3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
1 pole
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles

LA5FF431
LA5FG431
LA5FH431
LA5F400803
LA5F500803
LA5F630803
LA5F780801 (1)
LA5F780803
LA5F800803
LA5F630803S011

0.270
0.350
0.660
2.000
2.950
6.100
4.700
13.200
6.100
6.200

4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
1 pole
4 poles
4 poles

LA5FF441
LA5FG441
LA5FH441
LA5F400804
LA5F500804
LA5F630804
LA5F780801 (1)
LA5F780804
LA5F630804S011

0.360
0.465
0.880
2.700
3.900
8.150
4.700
17.300
8.400

Reference

LC1 F4002
LC1 F5002
LC1 F6302
LC1 F6302S011

Replacement
for
2 poles
2 poles
2 poles
2 poles

LC1 F115
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 F630S011
LC1 F1700
LC1 F2100

3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
3 poles
1 pole
3 poles
3 poles
6 poles
6 poles

LA5F11550
LA5F15050
LA5F18550
LA5F22550
LA5F26550
LA5F33050
LA5F40050
LA5F50050
LA5F63050
LA5F780150 (1)
LA5F80050
LA5F63050
LA5F170050 (2)
LA5F210050 (2)

0.490
0.490
0.670
0.670
0.920
1.300
1.300
1.850
3.150
2.100
3.150
3.150
3.750
3.750

LC1 F1154
LC1 F1504
LC1 F1854
LC1 F2254
LC1 F2654
LC1 F3304
LC1 F4004
LC1 F5004
LC1 F6304
LC1 F7804
LC1 F6304S011

4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
4 poles
1 pole
4 poles

LA5F115450
LA5F150450
LA5F185450
LA5F225450
LA5F265450
LA5F330450
LA5F400450 (3)
LA5F500450 (3)
LA5F630450 (4)
LA5F780150 (1)
LA5F630450

0.660
0.660
0.910
1.000
1.220
1.740
1.740
2.500
4.200
2.100
4.200

2-pole

LC1 F4002
LC1 F5002
LC1 F6302
LC1 F6302S011

3-pole

LC1 F115. F150

LC1 F185. F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330. F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780

LA5 FG431

569555

LC1 F800
LC1 F630S011
4-pole

LC1 F1504. F1154

LC1 F1854. F2254
LC1 F2654
LC1 F3304. F4004
LC1 F5004
LC1 F6304
LC1 F7804
LC1 F6304S011

Arc chambers
LA5F40050

For contactor

569556

2-pole

3-pole

4-pole

LA5F210050

Type

LA5F400250
LA5F500250
LA5F630250
LA5F630250

Weight
kg
0.870
1.250
2.100
2.100

(1) Comprising 2 identical items per pole.

(2) Comprising three 2-pole arc chambers.
(3) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers.
(4) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.

5/127

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors

Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors 

and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Closing of one of the 3 contactors prevents closing of the other 2.
Contactor type (1)
Top
Middle

813215

Mechanical interlock kits

LC1F115, F150,
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
F1854 or F2254

LC1F115, F150,
F1154 or F1504
LC1F115, F150,
F1154 or F1504

LA9Fp4p4p

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/128

LC1F115, F150,
F1154 or F1504
LC1F115, F150,
F1154 or F1504

Mechanical interlock (2)

Kit reference (3)
Weight
kg
LA9FF4F4F
0.554
LA9FG4F4F

0.559

LC1F115, F150,
LA9FG4G4F
0.559
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FG4G4G
0.562
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LC1F115, F150,
LC1F115, F150,
LA9FH4F4F
1.350
F2654 or F3304
F1154 or F1504
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FH4G4F
1.375
F1854 or F2254
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FH4G4G
1.375
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FH4H4F
1.524
F2654 or F3304
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FH4H4G
1.527
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FH4H4H
1.684
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002  LC1F115, F150,
LC1F115, F150,
LA9FJ4F4F
1.421
or F4004
F1154 or F1504
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FJ4G4F
1.424
F1854 or F2254
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FJ4G4G
1.428
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FJ4H4F
1.595
F2654 or F3304
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FJ4H4G
1.598
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FJ4H4H
1.755
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150,
LA9FJ4J4F
1.666
or F4004
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FJ4J4G
1.669
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FJ4J4H
1.829
F2654 or F3304
LC1-F400, F4002
LA9FJ4J4J
1.890
or F4004
LC1F500, F5002  LC1F115, F150,
LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4F4F
1.421
or F5004 
F1154 or F1504
F1154 or F1504
(continued on page LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4G4F
1.424
5/129)
F1854 or F2254
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FK4G4G
1.428
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4H4F
1.595
F2654 or F3304
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FK4H4G
1.598
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FK4H4H
1.755
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4J4F
1.666
or F4004
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FK4J4G
1.669
F2654 or F3304
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FK4J4H
1.829
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002
LA9FK4J4J
1.896
or F4004
LC1F500, F5002 LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4K4F
1.666
or F5004
F1154 or F1504
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LADN02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(2) Minimum distances between contactors, see page 5/129.
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
LC1F185, F225,
F1854 or F2254

Bottom

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys F contactors

Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors 

and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly

813216

Mechanical interlock kits (continued)

Contactor type (1)
Top
Middle
LC1F500, F5002
or F5004 
(continued)

LA9Fp4p4p

Bottom

Mechanical interlock (2)

Kit reference (3)
Weight
kg
LA9FK4K4G
1.669

LC1F500, F5002 LC1F185, F225,

or F5004
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FK4K4H
1.825
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002
LA9FK4K4J
1.896
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002 LA9FK4K4K
1.896
or F5004
LC1F630, F800,
LC1F115, F150,
LC1F115, F150,
LA9FL4F4F
1.428
F6302 or F6304
F1154 or F1504
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FL4G4F
1.431
F1854 or F2254
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FL4G4G
1.436
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FL4H4F
1.602
F2654 or F3304
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FL4H4G
1.606
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FL4H4H
1.751
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150,
LA9FL4J4F
1.673
or F4004
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FL4J4G
1.676
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FL4J4H
1.832
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002
LA9FL4J4J
1.903
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002  LC1F115, F150,
LA9FK4K4F
1.666
or F5004
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FK4K4G
1.669
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FK4K4H
1.825
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002
LA9FK4K4J
1.896
or F4004
LC1-F500, F5002
LA9FK4K4K
1.896
or F5004
LC1F630, F800, LC1F115, F150,
LA9FL4L4F
1.680
F6302 or F6304
F1154 or F1504
LC1F185, F225,
LA9FL4L4G
1.683
F1854 or F2254
LC1F265, F330,
LA9FL4L4H
1.910
F2654 or F3304
LC1F400, F4002
LA9FL4L4J
1.896
or F4004
LC1F500, F5002
LA9FL4L4K
1.896
or F5004
LC1F630, F800,
LA9FL4L4L
1.920
F6302, or F6304
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LADN02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127.
(2) Minimum distances between contactors.
This is the distance, in mm, between the centres of two adjacent contactors (between the top and
middle contactors or between the middle and bottom contactors).
Contactor
Bottom or top

Middle
LC1F115 LC1F185 LC1F265 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630
or F150
or F225
or F330
or F800
LC1F115 or F150
200
210
240
250
270
320
LC1F185 or F225
210
220
250
250
270
330
LC1F265 or F330
240
250
250
260
280
350
LC1F400
250
250
260
260
280
320
LC1F500
270
270
280
280
300
340
LC1F630 or F800
320
330
350
320
340
380
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/129

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils

References
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 C. Above this, use an LX9F coil, see page 5/135.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400.
Control circuit
Average
Inductance Voltage
Reference
Weight
voltage
resistance at of closed code
Uc - 50 Hz Uc - 60 Hz 20 C 10 % circuit
W
V
V
H
kg

1
813181

For contactors LC1F115 and LC1F150

2
LX1FFppp

3
4
5
6

24

0.27
0.04
B5
42

0.94
0.13
D5

48
0.78
0.11
E6
48

1.17
0.16
E5

110
4.55
0.59
F6

120
4.77
0.64
G6
110

6.38
0.86
F5
115

6.38
0.86
FE5
127/132

9.14
1.15
G5

200/208
14.5
1.87
L6

220
18.4
2.38
M6

240
18.9
2.5
U6
220
265/277
28.1
3.44
M5
230

28.1
3.44
P5
240

31.1
4.1
U5

380
57.2
7.05
Q6

440
72.6
9.21
R6
380
460/480
86.9
10.3
Q5
400

86.9
10.3
V5
415

95.1
12
N5
500

141
17
S5

660
172
20.3
Y6
660/690

254
28.9
Y5

1000
414
48.9

1000

610
68.5

Specifications
Average consumption at 20C:
- inrush 50Hz: 550VA; 60Hz: 660 VA,
- sealed 50Hz: 45VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos j= 0.3.
Heat dissipation: 1216 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 2335 ms, opening = 515 ms.

LX1FF024
LX1FF042
LX1FF040
LX1FF048
LX1FF092
LX1FF095
LX1FF110
LX1FF110
LX1FF127
LX1FF162
LX1FF184
LX1FF187
LX1FF220
LX1FF220
LX1FF240
LX1FF316
LX1FF360
LX1FF380
LX1FF380
LX1FF415
LX1FF500
LX1FF550
LX1FF660
LX1FF850
LX1FF1000

0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430

LX1FG024
LX1FG042
LX1FG040
LX1FG048
LX1FG092
LX1FG095
LX1FG110
LX1FG110
LX1FG127
LX1FG162
LX1FG184
LX1FG187
LX1FG220
LX1FG220
LX1FG240
LX1FG316
LX1FG360
LX1FG380
LX1FG380
LX1FG415
LX1FG500
LX1FG550
LX1FG660
LX1FG850
LX1FG1000

0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550

813182

For contactors LC1F185 and LC1F225

7
LX1FGppp

8
9
10

24

0.18
0.03
B5
42

0.57
0.09

48
0.47
0.08
E6
48

0.71
0.12
E5

110
2.74
0.44
F6

115/120
2.87
0.49
G6
110

4.18
0.65
F5
115

4.18
0.65
FE5
127/132

5.35
0.86
G5

200/208
8.8
1.41
L6

220
11.1
1.8
M6

240
11.4
1.87
U6
220
265/277
16.5
2.59
M5
230

16.5
2.59
P5
240

20.1
3.09
U5

380
34
5.32
Q6

440
43.5
6.94
R6
380
460/480
51.3
7.75
Q5
400

51.3
7.75
V5
415

62.3
9.06
N5
500

82.7
12.8
S5

660
103
15.3
Y6
660/690

154
21.8
Y5

1000
249
36.6

1000

370
51.6

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C:
- inrush 50 Hz: 805VA; 60Hz: 970 VA,
- sealed 50 Hz: 55VA; 60Hz: 66 VA, cos j= 0.3.
Heat dissipation: 1824 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 2035 ms, opening = 715 ms.

5/130

References

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils

References
Low sealed consumption.
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400.
Control
Average resistance
Inductance Voltage
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
of closed code
voltage
circuit
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V
H

Reference

Weight

kg

813183

For contactors LC1F265 and LC1F330

LX1FHppp2

24
0.8
20
(1)
B7
LX1FH0242
48
2.96
67
(1)
E7
LX1FH0482
110
18.7
440
(1)
F7
LX1FH1102
115
18.7
440
(1)
FE7
LX1FH1102
120/127
22.9
536
(1)
G7
LX1FH1272
200/208
58.4
1366
(1)
L7
LX1FH2002
220
70.6
1578
(1)
M7
LX1FH2202
230
70.6
1578
(1)
P7
LX1FH2202
240
87.94
1968
(1)
U7
LX1FH2402
277
113
2444
(1)
W7
LX1FH2772
380
217
4631
(1)
Q7
LX1FH3802
400
217
4631
(1)
V7
LX1FH3802
415
217
4631
(1)
N7
LX1-FH3802
440
265
6731
(1)
R7
LX1FH4402
480/500
329
8543
(1)
S7
LX1FH5002
600/660
296
10245
(1)
X7
LX1FH6002
1000
696
25880
(1)

LX1FH10002
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j = 0.9:
- inrush: 600700 VA,
- sealed: 810 VA.
Heat dissipation: 8W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4065 ms, opening = 100170 ms.

0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750
0.750

2
3
4
5

813184

For contactor LC1F400

LX1FJppp

48
1.6
29.5
0.18
E7
110/120
9.8
230
1.35
F7
115
9.8
230
1.35
FE7
120/127
12.8
280
1.75
G7
200/208
30
815
4.1
L7
220
37
1030
5.1
M7
230
37
1030
5.1
P7
240
47.5
1320
6.4
U7
265/277
61
1700
8.1
W7
380
120
3310
15.8
Q7
400
120
3310
15.8
V7
415
145
4070
19.4
N7
440
145
4070
19.4
R7
500
190
4980
25.5
S7
550/600
243
6310
27.4
X7
1000
720
19

420
84.6

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j
=

0.9:
- inrush: 10001150 VA,
- sealed:

1218 VA.
Heat dissipation: 14W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170.
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

LX1FJ048
LX1FJ110
LX1FJ110
LX1FJ127
LX1FJ200
LX1FJ220
LX1FJ220
LX1FJ240
LX1FJ280
LX1FJ380
LX1FJ380
LX1FJ415
LX1FJ415
LX1FJ500
LX1FJ600
LX1FJ1000

1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000

6
7
8
9
10

5/131

References (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils

References (continued)
Low sealed consumption.
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7.
Control
Average resistance
Inductance Voltage
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
of closed code
voltage
circuit
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V
H

Weight

kg

For contactor LC1F500

813186

Reference

3
LX1FKppp

4
5

48
1.9
33.5
0.19
E7
LX1FK048
110/120
9.55
260
1.25
F7
LX1FK110
115
9.55
260
1.25
FE7
LX1FK110
120/127
11.5
315
1.5
G7
LX1FK127
200/208
29
735
3.75
L7
LX1FK200
220
35.5
915
4.55
M7
LX1FK220
230
35.5
915
4.55
P7
LX1FK220
240
44.5
1160
5.75
U7
LX1FK240
265/277
56.5
1490
7.3
W7
LX1FK280
380
112
2980
14.7
Q7
LX1FK380
400
112
2980
14.7
V7
LX1FK380
415
143
3730
18.4
N7
LX1FK415
440
143
3730
18.4
R7
LX1FK415
500
172
4590
22.8
S7
LX1FK500
550/600
232
5660
23.9
X7
LX1FK600
1000
679
16

960
72

LX1FK1000
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9:
- inrush: 10501150 VA,
- sealed: 1620 VA.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400.
Heat dissipation: 18W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms.

1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150

813187

For contactor LC1F630

6
LX1FLppp

48
1.1
110/120
6.45
115
6.45
127
8.1
200/208
20.5
220
25.5
230
25.5
240
25.5
265/277
31
380
78
400
78
415
96
440
96
500
120
550/600
155
1000
474
Specifications

17.1
165
165
205
605
730
730
730
900
2360
2360
2960
2960
3660
4560
12

880

0.09
1.85
1.85
1.05
2.65
3.35
3.35
3.35
4.1
10.5
10.5
13
13
16.5
19.5
56.2

E7
F7
FE7
G7
L7
M7
P7
U7
W7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
X7

LX1FL048
LX1FL110
LX1FL110
LX1FL127
LX1FL200
LX1FL220
LX1FL220
LX1FL220
LX1FL260
LX1FL380
LX1FL380
LX1FL415
LX1FL415
LX1FL500
LX1FL600
LX1FL1000

Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9:

- inrush: 15001730 VA,
- sealed: 2025VA.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 1200.
Heat dissipation: 20W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 100200 ms.

8
9
10

5/132

1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500

References (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils

References (continued)
Low sealed consumption.
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7.
Control
Average resistance
Inductance Voltage Reference
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
of closed code
voltage
circuit
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V
H

Weight

kg

For contactor LC1F780

110/120
4.95 (2)
115
4.95 (2)
127
6.1 (2)
200/208
15.5 (2)
220
19.5 (2)
230
19.5 (2)
240
19.5 (2)
265/277
29.8 (2)
380
60.9 (2)
400
60.9 (2)
415/480
74.3 (2)
440
74.3 (2)
500
92 (2)
Specifications

230 (2)
230 (2)
280 (2)
750 (2)
920 (2)
920 (2)
920 (2)
1330 (2)
2780 (2)
2780 (2)
3340 (2)
3340 (2)
4180 (2)

0.21
0.21
0.26
0.66
0.82
0.82
0.82
1.25
2.3
2.3
2.8
2.8
3.5

F7
FE7
G7
L7
M7
P7
U7
W7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7

LX1FX110 (1)
LX1FX110 (1)
LX1FX127 (1)
LX1FX200 (1)
LX1FX220 (1)
LX1FX220 (1)
LX1FX220 (1)
LX1FX280 (1)
LX1FX380 (1)
LX1FX380 (1)
LX1FX415 (1)
LX1FX415 (1)
LX1FX500 (1)

3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000

2
3
4

Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9:

- inrush: 19002300 VA, sealed: 4455 VA.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600.
Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 130230 ms.

For contactor LC1F800

Control circuit
Voltage
Rectifier
Coil
voltage
code
Reference Reference
Uc
(3)
V
110/127
FE7
DR5TE4U LX4F8FW
220/240
P7
DR5TE4U LX4F8MW
380/440
V7
DR5TE4S LX4F8QW
Specifications
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600.
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.8:
- inrush: 1700VA, sealed: 12 VA
Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 160180 ms.
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
V

Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inrush
W

Sealed
W

Inductance Voltage Reference

of closed code
circuit
H

For contactors LC1F1700 and LC1F2100

110
5.92
120
5.92
220
9.55
230
9.55
240
11.5
277
16.5
380
29
400
29
415
35.5
440
35.5
500
44.5
Specifications

106
106
260
260
315
420
735
735
915
915
1160

0.72
0.72
1.25
1.25
1.50
2.25
3.75
3.75
4.55
4.55
5.75

Weight
kg
1.650
1.650
1.650

6
Weight

kg
F7
G7
M7
P7
U7
W7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7

LX1FK065 (4)
LX1FK070 (4)
LX1FK110 (4)
LX1FK110 (4)
LX1FK127 (4)
LX1FK140 (4)
LX1FK200 (4)
LX1FK200 (4)
LX1FK220 (4)
LX1FK220 (4)
LX1FK240 (4)

1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150

Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9:

- inrush: 16002400 VA, sealed: 2937 VA.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600.
Heat dissipation: 2 x 18 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms.

7
8
9
10

(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.

(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
(3) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.
(4) Order 2 coils and connect them in series.

5/133

References

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils

for specific applications (1)

References
Low sealed consumption.
High tolerance to inrush voltage drops.
Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain).
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7.
Control
Average resistance
Inductance Voltage
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
of closed code
voltage
circuit
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V
H

1
2

Reference

Weight

kg

813188

For contactors LC1F115 and LC1F150

3
LX9FFppp

48
3.03
80.2
0.3
E7
LX9FF048
110
14.8
579
2.08
F7
LX9FF110
115
14.8
579
2.08
FE7
LX9FF110
120/127
19
746
2.65
G7
LX9FF127
208
45
1788
5.95
L7
LX9FF200
220
59.4
2190
7.7
M7
LX9FF220
230
59.4
2190
7.7
P7
LX9FF220
240
73.5
2750
9.68
U7
LX9FF240
380
173
6540
23
Q7
LX9FF380
400
173
6540
23
V7
LX9FF380
415
218
8460
30
N7
LX9FF415
440
218
8460
30
R7
LX9FF415
500
262
10

300
36
S7
LX9FF500
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 690855 VA, sealed: 6.68.1 VA.
Heat dissipation: 5.97.2 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 2400.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.

0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430

5
6

813189

For contactors LC1F185 and LC1F225

LX9FGppp

48
2.2
60
0.23
E7
LX9FG048
110
10.4
411
1.46
F7
LX9FG110
115
10.4
411
1.46
FE7
LX9FG110
120/127
13
520
1.85
G7
LX9FG127
208
33
1339
4.9
L7
LX9FG200
220
42.1
1680
5.84
M7
LX9FG220
230
42.1
1680
5.84
P7
LX9FG220
240
50.6
2060
7.22
U7
LX9FG240
380
128
4730
16.4
Q7
LX9FG380
400
128
4730
16.4
V7
LX9FG380
415
157
5930
20.6
N7
LX9FG415
440
157
5930
20.6
R7
LX9FG415
500
194
7550
26.3
S7
LX9FG500
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 9501180 VA, sealed: 8.910.9 VA.
Heat dissipation: 89.8 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 2400.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.

0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550

For contactors LC1F265 and LC1F330

48
2.96
72
(2)

LX9FH0482
0.750
110/115
18.7
415
(2)

LX9FH1102
0.750
120/127
22.9
156
(2)

LX9FH1272
0.750
220/230
71.6
1621
(2)

LX9FH2202
0.750
240
88
1968
(2)

LX9FH2402
0.750
380/415
222
5075
(2)

LX9FH3802
0.750
500
345
7990
(2)

LX9FH5002
0.750
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 560660 VA, sealed: 810 VA.
Heat dissipation: 8.410.4 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 3600.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 45 ms, opening = 25 ms.
(1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains
supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures
(mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.).
(2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

8
9
10

5/134

References (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils

for specific applications

References (continued)
Coils with short operating times (at Uc):
- N/O: 60 ms,
- N/C: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side).

Coils with high operating rates (qy70C):

- 3600 operating cycles/hour,
- 1800 for LC1F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.
Control
Average resistance
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
voltage
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V

Inductance Rectifier
of closed Reference
circuit
(1)

Coil Reference

Weight

kg

813190

For contactor LC1F400

LX9FJppp

48
4.03
43
110
25.7
246
127
32.3
302
220/230
99.5
919
380/415
311
3011
440
386
3690
500
478
4380
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 500 VA,
- sealed: 23 VA
Heat dissipation: 11.413.9 W.

0.22
1.3
1.7
5
15
19
23

DR5TF4V
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S

LX9FJ917
LX9FJ925
LX9FJ926
LX9FJ931
LX9FJ936
LX9FJ937
LX9FJ938

0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970

3
4

813191

For contactor LC1F500

LX9FKppp

48
3.73
30.7
110
24
204
127
29.8
250
220/230
89.9
770
380/415
274
2075
440
361
3060
500
448
3750
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 550 VA,
- sealed: 31 VA
Heat dissipation: 1518.3 W.

0.18
1.1
1.4
4
12
16
19

DR5TF4V
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S

LX9FK917
LX9FK925
LX9FK926
LX9FK931
LX9FK936
LX9FK937
LX9FK938

1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080

5
6

813191

For contactor LC1F630

LX9FLppp

48
2.81
20.8
0.17
110
13.5
114
0.77
127
20.8
167
1.2
220
52
425
2.9
220/240
64.5
518
3.6
380/400
163
1360
8.8
415/440
204
1670
11
500
312
2510
17
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 830 VA,
- sealed: 47 VA
Heat dissipation: 22.827.8 W.
(1) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.

DR5TF4V
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4U
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S
DR5TE4S

LX9FL917
LX9FL924
LX9FL926
LX9FL930
LX9FL931
LX9FL935
LX9FL936
LX9FL938

1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450

7
8
9
10

5/135

References

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils

References
Low sealed consumption.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400.
Control
Average resistance
Inductance Voltage
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
of closed code
voltage
circuit
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V
H

Weight

kg

For contactors LC1F115 and LC1F150

813193

Reference

LX4FFppp

24
1.12
177
11
BD
48
4.52
715
42.7
ED
110
21.7
2940
179
FD
125
26.8
3560
223
GD
220/230
84
11100
704
MD
250
105
13000
868
UD
440/460
301
48200
4000
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 543665 W,
- sealed: 3.944.83 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.

LX4FF024
LX4FF048
LX4FF110
LX4FF125
LX4FF220
LX4FF250
LX4FF440

0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430

LX4FG024
LX4FG048
LX4FG110
LX4FG125
LX4FG220
LX4FG250
LX4FG440

0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550

LX4FH024
LX4FH048
LX4FH110
LX4FH125
LX4FH220
LX4FH250
LX4FH440

0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740

LX4FJ048
LX4FJ110
LX4FJ125
LX4FJ220
LX4FJ250
LX4FJ440

0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970

For contactors LC1F185 and LC1F225

24
0.79
169
14.9
BD
48
3.2
662
55.3
ED
110
14.9
2810
241
FD
125
19
3320
289
GD
220/230
57.7
10200
890
MD
250
76
12400
1140
UD
440/460
223
39700
4210
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 737902 W,
- sealed: 4.135.07 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.

4
5
6
7

813192

For contactors LC1F265 and LC1F330

LX4FHppp

24
0.9
192
26.3
BD
48
3.49
707
92.9
ED
110
16.8
3180
424
FD
125
20.8
3840
530
GD
220/230
65.7
11500
1590
MD
250
84
13900
1910
UD
440/460
255
44000
7570
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 655803 W,
- sealed: 3.684.53 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4050 ms, opening = 4065 ms.

For contactor LC1F400

48
2.5
558
56
ED
110
12.7
2660
270
FD
125
15.8
3130
330
GD
220
47
8820
910
MD
250
61
10

500
1200
UD
440
236
33

750
4435
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 9201140 W,
- sealed: 47.5 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms.

8
9
10

5/136

References (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils

References (continued)
Low sealed consumption.
Control
Average resistance
circuit
at 20 C 10 %
voltage
Inrush
Sealed
Uc
W
W
V

Inductance Voltage
of closed code
circuit

Reference

Weight

kg

813194

For contactor LC1F500

LX4FKppp

48
2.35
515
67
ED
110
11.5
2450
280
FD
125
15
2930
400
GD
220
44
8150
1080
MD
250
56
9650
1350
UD
440
225
31300
5270
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 9901220 W,
- sealed: 4.548 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 2400.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms.

LX4FK048
LX4FK110
LX4FK125
LX4FK220
LX4FK250
LX4FK440

1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080

2
3

For contactor LC1F630

48
1.7
353
40.5
ED
110
8.1
1680
180
FD
125
10
2110
230
GD
220
31
5160
650
MD
250
38
6080
815
UD
440
152
23120
2910
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 14201920 W,
- sealed: 6.512.5 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 1200.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 6070 ms, opening = 4050.

LX4FL048
LX4FL110
LX4FL125
LX4FL220
LX4FL250
LX4FL440

1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450

4
5

For contactor LC1F780

110
6.1 (2)
280 (2)
0.26
FD
LX4FX110 (1)
125
7.7 (2)
410 (2)
0.33
GD
LX4FX125 (1)
220
24.6 (2)
1100 (2)
1
MD
LX4FX220 (1)
250
29.8 (2)
1330 (2)
1.25
UD
LX4FX250 (1)
440
92 (2)
4180 (2)
3.5
RD
LX4FX440 (1)
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 19602420 W,
- sealed: 4252 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 7080 ms, opening = 100130 ms.

3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000

For contactor LC1F800

110/120

FW
LX4F8FW
220/240

MW
LX4F8MW
380/400

QW
LX4F8QW
Specifications
Heat dissipation: 25W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 4050 ms.

1.650
1.650
1.650

For contactors LC1F1700 and LC1F2100

110
2.94
734
98
FD
125
3.73
916
122
GD
220
11.5
2450
280
MD
250
15
2930
400
UD
440
44
8150
1080
RD
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 20002200 W,
- sealed: 810 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms.

LX4FK055 (3)
LX4FK065 (3)
LX4FK110 (3)
LX4FK125 (3)
LX4FK220 (3)

1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080

6
7
8
9

(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.

(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
(3) Order 2 coils and connect them in series.

10

5/137

References

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

d.c. supply coils

for specific applications

References
Coils

with

short

operating

times

(at

Uc)
:
- N/O: 60 ms,
- N/C: 20 ms.

Coils

with

high

operating

rates

(q y
70

C):
- 3600 operating cycles/hour,
- 1800 for LC1F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.
Control
Average
circuit
resistance
voltage
at 20 C 10 %
Uc
Inrush
Sealed
W
W
V

Induc- Resistor (1)

tance of Qty
Reference
closed required
circuit

Coil
Reference

Weight
kg

For contactor LC1F400

813194

48
5.11
110
32.3
125
39.4
220
123
440/460
478
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 430

W,
- sealed: 22

W.

4
813196

LX9FJppp

5
LX9FKppp

99
632
760
2320
9080

0.27
1.7
2
6.1
23

1
1
1
1
1

DR2SC0047
DR2SC0330
DR2SC0390
DR2SC1200
DR2SC4700

LX9FJ918
LX9FJ926
LX9FJ927
LX9FJ932
LX9FJ938

0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970
0.970

0.22
1.4
1.7
5.1
19

1
1
1
1
1

DR2SC0039
DR2SC0220
DR2SC0330
DR2SC1000
DR2SC3300

LX9FK918
LX9FK926
LX9FK927
LX9FK932
LX9FK938

1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.080

0.20
0.98
1.2
3.6
14

2
2
2
2
2

DR2SC0047
DR2SC0270
DR2SC0330
DR2SC1000
DR2SC3900

LX9FL918
LX9FL925
LX9FL926
LX9FL931
LX9FL937

1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450
1.450

For contactor LC1F500

48
4.67
110
29.8
125
37.4
220
115
440/460
448
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 470

W.
- sealed: 29

W.

76.7
470
637
1935
7050

For contactor LC1F630

813195

48
3.43
110
17.2
125
20.8
220
64.5
440/460
260
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 733

W.
- sealed:

48

W.
LX9FLppp

8
9
10

5/138

52.9
272
333
1018
4010

(1) Resistor to be ordered separately, weight of resistor: 0.030 kg.

References (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

Wide range d.c. supply coils

for specific applications

References (continued)
Wide range coils: 0.71.25 Uc.
Operating cycles/hour: y 60 (1).
Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 C.
Control
Average resistance
circuit voltage
at 20 C 10 %
Uc
Inrush
Sealed
W
W
V

Inductance
of closed
circuit

Reference

Weight

kg

813198

For contactors LC1F115 and LC1F150

LX4FFppp

24
0.71
48
2.86
72
7.05
110
13.2
125
16.9
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 4151300 W,
- sealed:

39

W.

120
392
1055
1970
2340

7.4
27
66
121
149

LX4FF020
LX4FF040
LX4FF060
LX4FF090
LX4FF100

0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430
0.430

112
359
984
1840
2230

2
3

For contactors LC1F185 and LC1F225

24
0.52
48
2
72
5.07
110
9.66
125
12
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 5801820 W,
- sealed:

3.19.5

W.

9.3
34.4
85
157
196

LX4FG020
LX4FG040
LX4FG060
LX4FG090
LX4FG100

0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.550

17.3
59.5
149
287
353

LX4FH020
LX4FH040
LX4FH060
LX4FH090
LX4FH100

0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740
0.740

813197

For contactors LC1F265 and LC1F330

LX4FHppp

24
0.58
48
2.19
72
5.58
110
11
125
13.8
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 5151600 W,
- sealed:

2.78.5

W.
Oper- Average
ational resistance
voltage at 20 C
10 %
V

129
400
1110
2120
2520

Induc- Coil
Economy resistor
tance
Resistors in //
of
closed
circuit Reference No. W Reference
H

Reference
of the
assembly (2)

Weight

LX2FJW11 3
LX2FJW18 3
LX2FJW21 3

56 DR2SC0056 LX5FJW11
220 DR2SC0220 LX5FJW18
470 DR2SC0470 LX5FJW21

kg

For contactor LC1F400

24
1.05
0.049
48
4.8
0.22
72
9.6
0.44
Specifications
Average consumption:
- inrush: 290860 W,
- sealed:

1647

W.

0.970
0.970
0.970

7
8

(1) The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles.
(2) The set comprises: 1 coil LX2FJ and 3 resistors DR2SC.

9
10

5/139

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

TeSys F contactors

LC1F115 to F330
S

S1

(1)

=
L

J1

J
G1

Z
Q

c

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according

to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
200500 V 6001000 V
LC1
F115, F150
10
15
F185
10
15
F225, F265
10
15
F330
10
15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/126).

3
4

b1

X1

b2

X1

Q1

LC1
F115

a
b
b1
b2
3P
163.5 162
137
265
4P
200.5 162
137
265
F150
3P
163.5 170
137
301
4P
200.5 170
137
301
F185
3P
168.5 174
137
305
4P
208.5 174
137
305
F225
3P
168.5 197
137
364
4P
208.5 197
137
364
F265
3P
201.5 203
145
375
4P
244.5 203
145
375
F330
3P
213
206
145
375
4P
261
206
145
375
f

= minimum distance required for coil removal.

c
171
171
171
171
181
181
181
181
213
213
219
219

f
131
131
131
131
130
130
130
130
147
147
147
147

G
106
143
106
143
111
151
111
151
142
190
154.5
202.5

G1
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
96
96
96
96

J
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106

J1
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120

L
107
107
107
107
113.5
113.5
113.5
113.5
141
141
145
145

M
147
147
150
150
154
154
172
172
178
178
181
181

P
37
37
40
40
40
40
48
48
48
48
48
48

Q
29.5
29.5
26
26
29
29
21
17
39
34
43
43

Q1
60
60
57.5
55.5
59.5
59.5
51.5
47.5
66.5
66.5
74
74

S
20
20
20
20
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
25

S1
26
26
34
34
34
34
44.5
44.5
44.5
44.5
44.5
44.5

Y
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
38
38
38
38

Z
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
21.5
21.5
20.5
20.5

LC1 F400 and F500

56

44,5

(1)

LC1

F400

10

b2

2P
213
206
375
219
3P
213
206
375
219
4P
261
206
375
219
F500
2P
233
238
400
232
3P
233
238
400
232
4P
288
238
400
232
f

= minimum distance required for coil removal.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/140

G1

Q1

120
=

b2

209

G
23,5

180

X1

X1

6xM10x35

f
146
146
146
150
150
150

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

G
supplied
80
80
80
80
80
140

G
min.
66
66
66
66
66
66

G
max.
102
102
150
120
120
175

G1
supplied
170
170
170
170
170
230

References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117

G1 
min
156
156
156
156
156
156

G1 
max.
192
192
240
210
210
265

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according

to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
200500 V 6001000 V
LC1
F400
15
20
F500
15
20
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/126).
J

Q1

19.5
19.5
67.5
39.5
39.5
34.5

145
145
145
146
146
146

181
181
181
208
208
208

48
48
48
55
55
55

69
43
43
76
46
46

96
74
74
102
77
77

25
25
25
30
30
30

Schemes :
page 5/146

TeSys contactors

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys F contactors

LC1 F630 and F800

72

40

64
6xM12x45

180

264

464

304

X1

280

X1

(1)

60,5

155

80

197

80

Q1

J1

181(2)

255

LC1

F630
F630, F800
F630

2P
3P
4P

G
supplied
180
180
240

309
309
389

G
min.
100
100
150

G
max.
195
195
275

J1

Q1

68.5
68.5
68.5

102
60
60

127
89
89

X1

(mm) =

Minimum electrical clearance according to operating

voltage

and breaking capacity.

Voltage
200500 V 6901000 V 200690 V 1000 V
LC1F630
20
30

LC1F800

10
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126).
(2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.

20

LC1F780
=

12xM12x45

26

400

434

348

X1

280

22

X1

26

60

7
191

165

160

183 (1)

160

191
183 (1)

3P=702, 4P=862

X1

(mm) =

Minimum electrical clearance according to operating

voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage
200500 V
6901000 V
X1 (mm)
30
35


(1) Minimum distance required for coil removal.

Fixing centres of LC1F780

127

Fixing centres of LC1F7804

8
127

255

127

127

180

180

90

240

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

190
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

240

102
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117

90

240

240

132

Schemes :
page 5/146

5/141

10

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

TeSys F contactors

LC1F1700 and LC1 F2100

129,7
34

129,7
24x5

3
4

332

X1

210

298

X1

34

14

LC1 F1700 : 84,9

LC1 F2100 : 91

137,3
200 (1)

238,6

(1) Minimum distance required for coil removal.

200 (1)

438

X1

(mm) =

Minimum electrical clearance according to operating

voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage
200500 V
6901000 V
X1 (mm)
90
100

Fixing centres of LC1F1700 and 2100

4x5x15

185

240
50

190

50

49,5

7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/142

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117

Schemes :
page 5/146

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

TeSys F contactors
Accessories

Right-angled connectors LA9Fp981 (set of 3) for rear connection

b1

1
LA9
a
b
b1
c
G
H

FF981
15
18
3
42
24
10.5
6.5

FG981
20
23
3
45
26
13
9

FJ981
25
29
4
55
32.5
16.5
11

FK981
30
35
5
52
26
20
11

FL981
40
48
8
86
45
28
13

2
3

b1

Right-angled connectors LA9Fp979 (set of 3) for side connection

G1

LA9
a
b
b1
c
G
G1
H

FF979
15
54
5
80
24
20
36
6.5

FG979
20
58
5
92
28
22
39
9

FJ979
25
63.5
6
120
37
29
41
11

FK979
30
68
6
120
37
29
42
11

FL979
40
117
10
130
37.5
35
76
13

FG980
40
82.5
45
29
3
20
20
12
72.5
9
9 x 12

FJ980
50
98.5
55
33
5
25
22
14
84.5
11
11 x 14

FK980
60
114
65
33
5
29
26
17
97
11
12.5 x 15

FL980
100
154
85
43
10
53
40
20
132
13
12.5 x 15

Right-angled connectors LA9Fp980 with large surface area (set of 3)

c

a
=

H2

b1

H1

c1

(1)

LA9
a
b
b1
c
c1
G
H
H1
H2

(1)

FF980
35
70.5
40
29
3
18
18
10
60.5
6.5
7 x 10

6
7

Right-angled connectors LA9F2100 (set of 6) for rear connection

5

8
125

13
47

16 34

38

25 25

25

20

34

60

10
References :
page 5/125

5/143

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories

Paralleling links (set of 4)

a
c

H1

= =

b1

LA9FF602, FG602, FH602

2
LA9FK602, FL602

a
c

b1

H2 H1

= G =

LA9
a
b
b1
c
G
H
H1
H2
1
2

FF602
25
45
30
4

37.5
12.5

6.5
11

FG602
30
55
35
5

45
15

9
11

FH602
40
60
40
8

52.5
15

11
13

FK602
50
85
55
10
22
70
14
22
11
11

FL602
60
100
65
10
26
85
17
26
13
14

LA9

FF601

FG601

FH601

FK601

FL601

69
15
3
6.5 x 8.5

100
20
3
8.5 x 10.5

121
20
5
10.5 x 13

140
30
5
11

200
40
8
13

4
Links for "star" connection of 3 poles
LA9Fp601

= =

6
7
8
9
10
References :
page 5/124

5/144

a
b
c

TeSys contactors

Mounting

TeSys F contactors

LC1F115 to F330
On panel

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC

(1)

On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres

DZ5 MF5

=
J

c (2) 3P
4P
G
3P
4P
J
3P
4P
J1 3P
4P

F185
F225
181
181
80
80
29
49
59.5
79.5

110

J1

F115
F150
171
171
80
80
26.5
45
57
75.5

110

110
=

AF1EA6

c
LC1

120

F265

F330

213
213
96
96
44.5
68.5
61.5
85.5

219
219
96
96
44.5
68.5
61.5
85.5

LC1
c (2) 3P
4P
G
3P
4P

LC1F

F115
F150
171
171
80
80

F185
F225
181
181
80
80

F265

F330

213
213
96
96

219
219
96
96

LC1
c (2) 3P
4P
G
3P
4P

LC1F115 to F330

15

F115
F150
171
171
80
80

F185
F225
181
181
80
80

F265

F330

213
213
96
96

219
219
96
96

LC1F400 to F800

On 2 notched rails AM1ECppp

AM1 EC200

AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820

(4)
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10

AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618

AF1 CD061

AF1 VA618
M6

AF1 VA618
M6

AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820

M6

120

110

LA9 F100

G
AM1 EC200

25

7
35

=
c

180

(3)

G
AM1 EC200

G1
G2
G3

LC1
c

F115, F150
F185, F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630
3P 165 (5)
176
207
213
219
232
255
4P 165 (5)
176
207
213
219
232
255
G (M6)
3P 80
80
96
96

4P 80
80
96
96

80
80

G1 ( 8.5) 3P
4P

80
140

180
G2 ( 10.5) 3P
4P

240
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126).
(2) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 5/140 and 5/141.
(3) AF1CDppp and AF1VAppp.
(4) This AM1EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
(5) + 6 mm with time-delay block on LC1 F.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117

F780
255
255

See page 5/141

F800
255

180

9
10

Schemes :
page 5/146

5/145

TeSys contactors

Schemes

TeSys F contactors

Contactors

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

T1/2

T2/4

T3/6

A2

7/L4

A1

5/L3
T3/6

LC1F1700 a or c
LC1F2100 a or c

T4/8

3/L2

1/L1

T2/4

T1/2

T4/8

A2

7/L4

T3/6

LC1F780 a or c

A1

3/L2

5/L3

T2/4

1/L1

7/L4
T4/8

A2

5/L3
T3/6

A1

3/L2

LC1F115 to F630 (coil LX4F c)

LC1F115 to F265 (coil LX9F a)
LC1F800 (coil LX8F a/ c)

T1/2

1/L1

T2/4

03
04

T1/2

A2

A1

2, 3 and 4-pole contactors

LC1F115 to F630
(coil LX1F a)

Coils

Standard a coils
LX1FF, FG, FJFL
LX1FH0422FH3802
03

A1

A2

LX1FH0202FH0362
LX1FH4402FH10002
LX1F8p
A1

LX1FX
Rectifier supplied and fixed on the contactor

A2

+
A1

A2

A1

A1

A2

A2 A1

A2

Standard c coils
LX4FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1), LX4F8p
A1

A2

A1

A2

(1) 2 coils in series.

A1 B1

A2

A1

(2)

A2

LX4F8p

(1)

A2/B2

01

A1

LX9FJ, FK, FL

A2

LX9FHppp2

A1

Special a coils
LX9FF, FG

+
A1

A2

(1) Breaking on a side.

Drop-out time 50 ms .
(2) Breaking on c side.
Drop-out time 20 ms .

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/146

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117

Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142

TeSys contactors

Schemes (continued)

TeSys F contactors

61/NC

53/NO

63/NO

51/NC

61/NC

53/NO

51/NC

71/NC

83/NO

62

54

64

52

62

54

62

72

84

61/NC

71/NC

81/NC

53/NO

61/NC

75/NC

87/NO

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

82

54

62

76

88

54

62

74

84

73/NO
74

72

63/NO
64

62

53/NO
54

53/NO

81/NC
82

54

71/NC
72

51/NC

(94)
61/NC
62

3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

44
(93)

2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LAD C22

53/NO

4 N/C LAD N04

1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

54

4 N/O LAD N40

52

2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

83/NO

2 N/C LAD N02

84

2 N/O LAD N20

41/NC
(92)

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

42
(91)

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

1 N/O LAD N10 (1)
1 N/C LADN01 (1)
43/NO

Add-on blocks

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

31/NC

41/NC

53/NO

63/NO

14

22

32

44

14

22

32

44

32

42

54

64

73/NO

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

74

84

54

62

74

84

57/NO

65/NC

58

66

67/NO

67/NO
68

5
6

68

55/N

On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LADSp

55/NC

53/NO

63/NO
64

63/NO

53/NO
54

64

63/NO
64

2 N/O protected (24-50 V) +

1 N/O + 1 N/C standard

LA1DZ31

54

53/NO
54

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

56

Time delay auxiliary contacts

On-delay 1 N/O +1 N/C LAD Tp

2
3

(1) Items in brackets: See TeSys D contactors.

(2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break.
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 5/122 and 5/123)
1 N/O

1 N/C
1 N/O

1 N/C
2 N/O

2 N/C
2 N/O

2 N/C
LADN11P
LADN11G
LADN22P
LADN22G

Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts

2 N/O (24-50 V)
2 N/O (5-24 V)
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard
LA1DX20
LA1DY20
LA1DZ40

7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113

References :
page 5/123

5/147

Dimensions

TeSys contactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover 
contactor pairs
Horizontally mounted

Pre-assembled

120

X1

b1

110/120

X1

LC2F115 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fixing the device)

Q1

P1

Q1
J1

=
G1

J1

Bar fixing centres

Vertical: 120mm
Horizontal: a2 see table

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1
200500 V
6601000 V
F115, F150
10
15
F185
10
15
F225, F265
10
15

LC2
F115
F150
F185
F225

=
J
a2

f - Minimum distance required for coil removal.

=
G1

F265

3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P

a
345
419
345
422
357
437
357
437
425
521

a2
317
378
317
381
326
390
326
390
386
464

b
162
162
170
170
174
174
197
197
203
203

b1
137
137
137
137
137
137
137
137
145
145

c
171
171
171
171
181
181
181
181
213
213

G1
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
96
96

7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/148

References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121

Schemes :
page 5/151

J
71
108
71
111
78
118
78
118
109
157

J1
57
75.5
57
75.5
59.5
79.5
59.5
79.5
61.5
85.5

L
107
107
107
107
113.5
113.5
113.5
113.5
141
141

M
147
147
150
150
154
154
172
172
178
178

P
37
37
40
40
40
40
48
48
48
48

P1
77
77
71
71
78
78
62
54
100
100

Q1
60
60
57
55.5
59.5
59.5
51.5
47.5
66.5
66.5

S
20
20
20
20
20
20
25
25
25
25

f
131
131
131
131
130
130
130
130
147
147

M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover 
contactor pairs
Horizontally mounted

For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2 x LC1F115 to F330

2 x LC1F400, F500, F630, F800

X1

L
J1

=
G1

=
J

G1

J2

G1

=
b

=
120 (2)
=

J3

J1

180

=
b

110/120

J1

=
G1

(1)

P1

b1

X1

(1)

J1
J3

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1
200500 V
6601000 V
200690 V
1000 V
F115, F150
10
15

F185
10
15

F225, F265
10
15

F330
10
15

F400
15
20

F500
15
20

F630
20
30

F800

10
20

2 x LC1
F115
F150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630
F800

3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P

a
345
419
345
422
357
437
357
437
425
521
447
543
446
542
485
595
636
796
636

b
162
162
170
170
174
174
197
197
203
203
206
206
206
206
238
238
304
304
304

b1
137
137
137
137
137
137
137
137
145
145
145
145
209
209
209
209
280
280
280

c
171
171
171
171
181
181
181
181
213
213
219
219
219
219
232
232
255
255
255

80
80
80
140
180
240
180

G1
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
96
96
96
96
170
170
170
230

J
71
108
71
111
78
118
78
118
109
157
124
172
157
157
156
156
139
139
139

P1

J1
57
75.5
57
75.5
59.5
79.5
59.5
79.5
61.5
85.5
65.5
89.5
64.5
112.5
84.5
79.5
68.5
88.5
68.5

J2

67
67
66
66

J3

19.5
67.5
39.5
34.5

L
107
107
107
107
113.5
113.5
113.5
113.5
141
141
145
145
145
145
146
146
155
155
155

P1
77
77
71
71
78
78
62
54
100
100
107
107
107
107
112
112
137
137
137

5
6
7


(1) Except LC1F630 and F800 : 4 x 10.5.

(2) Except LC1F630 and F800.
For other dimensions: see pages 5/140 and 5/141.

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121

Schemes :
page 5/151

5/149

Dimensions

TeSys contactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover 
contactor pairs
Vertically mounted

(3)
=

(1)

J1

(3)
=

G1

F330 } 120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630
F800

(6)

G3(2)

J1

(6)

(1)
(5)

= =

(4)
J4

J4

80

180

X1

(1) Mechanical interlock shaft.

(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only.
(3) 4 x 6.5 for LC1F115 to F225.
Assembly A (7) - Mechanical interlock reference
G3 3P G3 4P H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P
LA9FF4F 0
0
200
310
80
190
137 155.5
LA9FG4F 3
4
210
300
90
180
139.5 159.5
LA9FG4G 0
0
220
310
100
190
139.5 159.5
J2 3P J2 4P J3 3P J3 4P J4 3P J4 4P
LA9FF4F 137 155.5 48.5 67
48.5
67
LA9FG4F 137 155.5 53
73
54
69
LA9FG4G 139.5 159.5 53
73
53
73
For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights,
please consult your Regional Sales Office
2 x LC1F780

420
1034

10

X1

180

8
9

250

191

160

160

191

702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804)

X1 and fixings, see page 5/141.

(7) Only 3P for F800.
(8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/150

80
J2

J2

References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121

(4) 4 x 6.5 for LC1F265.

(5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.

9
12,5

G4

H1

(1)

(4)
9
G3(2)

G5

F330 } 120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630
F800

120

J1

120

= =

H1

G3
(2)

12,5
(5)
(1)

G1

(6)

(3)
=
=
H

G5

F330 } 120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630
F800

12,5
(5)
(1)

80

H1

J3

(1)

120

For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9F, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1F115 to F630 and F800). See pages 5/118 to 5/121
Assembly A
Assembly B
Assembly C

G2
J2

(6) 4 x 8.5 for LC1F400, F500 or

4 x 10.5 for LC1F630 and F800.

Assembly B (7) - Mechanical interlock reference

G1 3P G1 4P G3 3P G3 4P G5 3P
LA9FH4F 96
96
21
27
60
LA9FJ4F 80
80
45
26
83
LA9FK4F 80
140
45
26
83
LA9FL4F 180
240
35
17
74
LA9FH4G 96
96
19
23
60
LA9FJ4G 80
80
42
22
83
LA9FK4G 80
140
42
22
83
LA9FL4G 180
240
33
13
74
H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P J2 3P
LA9FH4F 110
250
157.5 181.5 137
LA9FJ4F 80
210
144.5 192.5 137
LA9FK4F 100
210
164.5 219.5 137
LA9FL4F 140
210
248.5 328.5 137
LA9FH4G 120
250
157.5 181.5 139.5
LA9FJ4G 90
220
144.5 192.5 139.5
LA9FK4G 110
220
164.5 219.5 139.5
LA9FL4G 150
220
248.5 328.5 139.5
Assembly C (7)
G1 3P G1 4P G2 3P G2 4P G3 3P
LA9FH4H 96
96
96
96
0
LA9FJ4H 80
80
96
96
23
LA9FK4H 80
140
96
96
23
LA9FL4H 180
240
96
96
14
LA9FJ4J 80
80
80
80
0
LA9FK4J 80
140
80
80
0
LA9FL4J 180
240
80
80
9 (8)
LA9FK4K 80
140
80
140
0
LA9FL4K 180
240
80
140
9 (8)
LA9FL4L 180
240
180
240
0
H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P
LA9 FH4H 250
380
130
260
157.5
LA9 FJ4H 260
380
110
230
144.5
LA9 FK4H 280
380
130
230
164.5
LA9 FL4H 330
380
170
220
248.5
LA9 FJ4J 260
380
60
200
144.5
LA9 FK4J 280
380
100
200
164.5
LA9 FL4J 325
380
140
195
248.5
LA9 FK4K 300
380
120
200
164.5
LA9 FL4K 345
380
160
195
248.5
LA9 FL4L 380
380
200
200
248.5

G5 4P
83
83
83
74
83
83
83
74
J2 4P
155.5
155.5
155.5
155.5
159.5
159.5
159.5
159.5

H min. H max.
240
380
250
380
270
380
310
380
250
380
250
380
270
380
310
380
J4 3P J4 4P
48.5 67
48.5 67
48.5 67
48.5 67
53
73
53
73
53
73
53
73

G3 4P
0
0
0
9 (8)
0
0
9 (8)
0
9 (8)
0
J1 4P
181.5
192.5
219.5
328.5
192.5
219.5
329.5
329.5
328.5
328.5

G4 3P
60
60
60
60
83
83
83
83
83
74
J2 3P
157.5
157.5
157.5
157.5
144.5
144.5
144.5
164.5
164.5
248.5

G4 4P
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
74
J2 4P
181.5
181.5
181.5
181.5
192.5
192.5
192.5
219.5
219.5
328.5

G5 3P G5 4P
60
83
83
83
83
83
74
74
83
83
83
83
74
74
83
83
74
74
74
74

Schemes

TeSys contactors

TeSysF
reversing contactors and changeover 
contactor pairs

Reversing contactors for motor control LC2F

2 x LC1F

2 x LC1F

1/L2

1/L3

1/L1
1

L3
5

A2

6
2/L3

2/L2

2/L1

A2

A1
2

L3
L2
L1

A2

A1

3
4

A2

A1

A1

L2
3

Vertically mounted

L1
1

Horizontally mounted

Changeover contactor pairs for distributionLC2F

2 x LC1F

2 x LC1 F

1/L3

1N

2N
7

1/L2

2/L3
5

2/L2
3

2/L1
1

1/L1

1/L1
7

1/L2
5

A2

2N

2/L3

2/L2

2/L1

A2

A1

8
N

6
L3

A1
4
L2

N
L3
L2
L1

A2

2
L1

A2

A1

A1

1/L3
3

1N

Vertically mounted

Horizontally mounted

Electrical interlocking of reversers fitted with mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 F

KM1

A1

A1

KM2

A2

KM2

A2

KM1

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121

5/151

Contacteurs-inverseurs de sources grande puissance

General

TeSys contactors

High power changeover contactor pairs 

for distribution

Circuit de commande en courant alternatif ou continu

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

General

A changeover contactor pair ensures continuity of operation of an installation and

energy management.
It switches between:
b a power supply source M (main) which normally supplies the installation,
b and a power supply source S (standby) which may be an incoming line from an
additional network or a generating set.

The supply sources may be 3-phase or 3-phase + neutral.

Supply - 3-phase

5/2L3

1/2L1

3/2L2

Standby

5/1L3

1/1L1

3/1L2

Main

U/L1

V/L2

W/L3

KM2

KM1

4
Application

Supply 3-phase + neutral

7/2N

5/2L3

3/2L2

1/2L1

Standby

7/1N

3/1L2

5/1L3

1/1L1

Main

V/L2

W/L3

U/L1

KM2

KM1

Application

The 2 contactors must be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent any

paralleling, even transitory, of the two supplies.

CIDESOURCEGPTRIPH-SCH-2-B

9
10
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155

5/152

Schemes :
page 5/155

References

TeSys contactors

High power changeover contactor pairs 

for distribution
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.

Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase

813221

Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
Maximum operational current
Main
Standby
3-phase
3-phase
1600 A
1000 A

Contactors (1)
Main
Reference
LC1F780

Standby
Reference
LC1F6309

1600 A

LC1F780

LC1F780

1600 A

1
Mechanical
interlock (2)
Reference
LA9FX970

LA9FX970

Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly:

3-phase + neutral

Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C

813222

LA9FX970

Maximum operational current

Main
Standby
3-phase + N
3-phase + N
1600 A + 1000 A 1000 A + 1000 A

Contactors (1)
Main
Reference
LC1F78041

Standby
Reference
LC1F63049

Mechanical
interlock (2)

1600 A + 1000 A

1600 A + 1000 A

LC1F78041

LC1F78040

LA9FX970 (3)

1600 A + 1600 A

1000 A + 1000 A

LC1F7804

LC1F63049

LA9FX971

1600 A + 1600 A

1600 A + 1600 A

LC1F7804

LC1F7804

LA9FX971

Reference
LA9FX970 (3)

5
6

(1) Coils to be ordered separately, see pages 5/132 to 5/137.

(2) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power
connecting links. To order the the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LADNp1 required to obtain
electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 5/123.
(3) Neutral connecting link not supplied (to be ordered separately).

LA9FX971

7
8
9
10

Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155

Schemes :
page 5/155

5/153

Dimensions

TeSys contactors

High power changeover contactor pairs 

for distribution

Dimensions

LC1F6309
Common side view

40

306

40

306

204

165
250

LC1F63049

180/190
280
348

Contactors used to assemble high power changeover contactor pairs LC1 F780: see page 5/141

202

160

183
(1)

160

178

204

702

183
(1)

LC1F78040
Common side view

160

160
862

420
180

969

180

LC1F780 + LC1F780 + LA9FX970: see page 5/150

LC1F780 + LC1F6309 + LA9FX970

250

9
10
References :
page 5/153

5/154

702

173

264

191
183
(1)

(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.

183
(1)

40

180/190
280
434

202

165
250

178

60

3-phase changeover contactor pairs

160

60

264

160
862

LC1F78041

40

160

183
(1)

183
(1)

183
(1)

178

178

173

160
862

160

191
183
(1)

TeSys contactors

Dimensions (continued),
schemes

High power changeover contactor pairs 

for distribution

Dimensions (continued)

3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs

180
1034

420

969

420

180

180
250

862

862

250

LC1F7804 + LC1 F7804 + LA9 FX971

5
6

180

420

1034

180
969
3
4

2/L2

2/L3

7
8

A1
A2

A1

A2

A2

N
L3
L2
L1
3

2/L2 4

2/L3 6

2N

A1

A2

A2

A2

A1
2/L1 2

A1

1
2
2/L1

L3
L2
L1
A1

1N

5 1/L3
6

3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs

3 1/L2

3 1/L2

5 1/L3

A1

1 1/L1
A1

3-phase changeover contactor pairs

Schemes

862

250

1 1/L1

862

420
180

250

A2

180

LC1F7804 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX971

A2

LC1F78041 + LC1 F78040 + LA9 FX970

180

LC1F78041 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX970

10
References :
page 5/153

5/155

TeSys contactors

References,
dimensions

Capacitive delayed opening devices

For
TeSys D contactors

References

These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.

Control circuit : d.c. supply
For use with contactor
Type (1)
Contactor
reference
to be
completed
(2)

2
3
4

LAZR90F

Weight

V
110115
120127
220
240
380
415440

s
1.55
2.55
48
510
48
5.513

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

kg
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LC1DppPD
LC1DppQD
LC1DppTD
LC1DppWD
LC1DppXD


110115
120127
220240
380
415440

0.51
0.51.5
12.5
12.5
13

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LC1DppPD
LC1DppQD
LC1DppTD
LC1DppVD
LC1DppWD
LC1DppXD

110120
120127
220
240
380
415440

0.41
0.51
0.52
12.5
12
12.5

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LC1D09,
LC1D12, 
LC1D18,
LC1D25, 
LC1D32
or
LC1D38

LC1DppPD
LC1DppQD
LC1DppTD
LC1DppVD
LC1DppWD
LC1DppXD


LC1D40,
LC1D50 
or
LC1D65

LC1D80

Corresponding delayed opening device

Supply voltage NonReference
50/60 Hz
adjustable
delay time (Tr)

Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices

Application

For use with

delayed
opening
device

LAZR91F

To
double
the delay
time

Operational
voltage

Nonadjustable
delay time

Reference

Weight

LAZR90F

V
110127

s
Tr x 2

LAZR91F

kg
0.165

LAZR90M

220240

Tr x 2

LAZR91M

0.165

LAZR90Q

380440

Tr x 2

LAZR91Q

0.165

(1) These contactors can be supplied as standard for this application or can be adapted by
replacing the coil (except for contactors LC1D09pppp to LC1D38pppp on which the coil is
not replaceable).
(2) Reference to be completed : see page 5/62.

Dimensions

Schemes

LAZR9pp

LAZR9pp + LC1D
D+
(LAZ R)

LAZR9pp + LC1F
L+
(LAZ R)

F1

77

F1

114
L
(LAZ R)

10

Other versions

5/156

1
A1

A1

55

A2

108

L
(LAZ R)

A2

Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

References

TeSys contactors

Capacitive delayed opening devices

For
TeSys F contactors

References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.

Control circuit : d.c. supply (1)
For use with contactor
Type
With coil

LC1F115
or
LC1F150

LC1F185
or
LC1F225

LC1F265
or
LC1F330

LC1F400

LC1F500

LC1F630

LX4FF110
LX4FF125
LX4FF220
LX4FF250
LX4FF375
LX4FF440

Corresponding delayed opening device

Supply
NonReference
voltage
adjustable
50/60Hz
delay time (Tr)
V
s
110
25
LAZR90F
127
25
LAZR90F
220
25
LAZR90M
240
25
LAZR90M
380415
25
LAZR90Q
440
25
LAZR90Q

LX4FG110
LX4FG125
LX4FG220
LX4FG250
LX4FG375
LX4FG440

110
127
220
240
380415
440

25
25
25
25
25
25

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LX4FH110
LX4FH125
LX4FH220
LX4FH250
LX4FH375
LX4FH440

110
127
220
240
380415
440

25
25
25
25
25
25

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LX4FJ110
LX4FJ125
LX4FJ220
LX4FJ250
LX4FJ375
LX4FJ400
LX4FJ440

110
127
220
240
380
415
440

12
12
12
12
12
12
12

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LX4FK110
LX4FK125
LX4FK220
LX4FK250
LX4FK375
LX4FK400
LX4FK440

110
127
220
240
380
415
440

12
12
12
12
12
12
12

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

LX4FL110
LX4FL125
LX4FL220
LX4FL250
LX4FL375
LX4FL400
LX4FL440

110
127
220
240
380
415
440

12
12
12
12
12
12
12

LAZR90F
LAZR90F
LAZR90M
LAZR90M
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q
LAZR90Q

0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

Weight
kg
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215
0.215

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices (1)

Application

To
double
the delay
time

For use with

Operational
delayed
voltage
opening device
V
LAZR90F
110127

Nonadjustable
delay time
s
Tr x 2

Reference

Weight

LAZR91F

kg
0.165

LAZR90M

220240

Tr x 2

LAZR91M

0.165

LAZR90Q

380440

Tr x 2

LAZR91Q

0.165

(1) Dimensions and schemes: see page 5/156.

Other versions
Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

5/157

9
10

TeSys contactors

Presentation

PF537334

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Presentation
In an environment subject to severe mechanical shocks, unwanted closing of a
contactor's poles and the serious consequences of this, is not permissible.
Shockproof contactors LC1 FG150 to FG630 are equipped with an auxiliary electromechanical device which ensures that the contactor is mechanically locked in
the open position when its main electromagnet is not energised.
LC1 FG150

If the contactor is subjected to mechanical impact, from back to front or from front
to back, accidental closing of the poles is then impossible.

PF537336

In addition, accidental opening of the poles (when the contactor is in the on position), is virtually impossible due to the significant pull-in force characteristic of these
contactors.

Applications
b Marine: on-board equipment, windlasses, capstans, winches, etc
b Military equipment: land, sea, launching silos.

b Heavy mechanical handling systems: travelling cranes, cranes, gantries.

b Conveying and handling: lifts, hoists, conveyors.
LC1 FG265

b Equipment for power stations.

b Distribution boards.
-

5
6
7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

5/158

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

Presentation (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Description of shockproof device

Shockproof contactors LC1 FGppp are equipped with:

b A lever 1 that is rotated by the core of the contactors electromagnet.

b An auxiliary electromagnet (EV) for the locking function.
b An RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) to limit overvoltage.

0,30,6

BACK

Direction of impact
2

ON KM1

FRONT
EV

OFF KM1

KM1

Operation
b In the off position (contactor open and not energised) the core 2 of the
electromagnet (EV) locks the lever 1 and therefore the contactor. 

b The coils (KM1) and (EV) are energised simultaneously, the core 2 releases the
lever 1 and allows the contactor to close. 
b De-energisation of the locking electromagnet (EV) is achieved by an auxiliary
contact within the contactor. 
The core 2 rests freely in lever 1.
b On de-energisation of coil KM1, the moving contact drops out. Core 2, under
spring pressure, once again locks lever 1.


a

21

C2

EV

A1
KM1
A2

C1

22

KM1

8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

5/159

TeSys contactors

Selection

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

a.c. supply

According to the utilisation category and required

electrical durability
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Operational current and power (q y 55 C)

Contactors
Operational current
Operational power
Standard power ratings 
of motors)

220/230 V

380/400 V

415 V

440 V

500 V

660/690 V

1000 V

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

150

185

265

400

500

630

kW

40

55

75

110

147

200

hp

54

75

100

150

200

270

kW

75

90

132

200

250

335

hp

100

185

180

270

340

450

kW

80

100

140

220

280

375

hp

110

136

180

300

380

500

kW

80

100

140

250

295

400

hp

110

136

190

340

400

545

kW

90

110

160

257

355

400

hp

125

150

220

350

480

545

kW

100

110

160

280

335

450

hp

136

150

220

380

450

600

kW

65

100

147

185

335

450

hp

85

136

200

250

450

610

Maximum operating rate (operating cycles/hour) (1)

On-load factor

Operational power

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

y 85 %

750

750

750

500

500

500

y 85 %

0.5 P

2000

2000

2000

1200

1200

1200

y 25 %

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 55 C)

100

LC1 FG630

70 80

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG150
LC1 FG185

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG265

Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Millions of operating cycles

10
8
6

1
0,8
0,6

0,4
20

30

40

50

60

200

300

400

500 600

800

1000

Current broken in Amperes

10

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ie) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current of the motor.
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 105 A
4 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG265.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/160

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

TeSys contactors

Selection (continued)

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG 

a.c. supply

According to the utilisation category and required

electrical durability
Use in category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)
Contactors
Connection

mm2

Cable

C.s.a.

Bar

Number
mm

C.s.a.
Maximum operating rate
in operating cycles/hour
Operational current AC-1

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

120

150

240

30 x 5

40 x 5

60 x 5

600

600

600

600

600

600

y 40 C

250

270

350

500

700

1000

y 55 C

220

240

300

430

580

850

y 70 C (1)

170

180

250

340

500

700

2
3

(1) Only for operation with coil supplied at Uc.

Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles

Apply the following multiplying factors to the current values given above. The factors
take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between the 2 poles:
b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6
b 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25
b 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8

Recommended connection scheme to equalise the currents in each pole (see

opposite).

LC1 FG630

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG150

Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)

Millions of operating cycles

10
8
6

1
0,8

0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
20

30

40

50

60 70 80

100

200

400 500 600

300
350
270

800 1000

2000

Current broken in Amperes

Example:
Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95).
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
Ue = 220 V - Ic = Ie = 300 A - q = 40 C.
1 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG400.

9
10

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

5/161

TeSys contactors

Selection (continued)

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG 

a.c. supply

According to the utilisation category and required

electrical durability
Thermal limits in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4

1
2

Contactors

LC1 FG150

Thermal limit
zone

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

Operating cycles/hour (1)

and on-load factor

Maximum current broken according to the duty requirements 

(thermal limit, ambient temperature y 55 C)

From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 %

310

380

560

780

1100

1400

From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 %

280

350

500

700

950

1250

From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 %

240

300

400

600

750

950

From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 %

190

240

320

450

600

720

From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 %

145

170

230

350

500

660

(1) Do not exceed the maximum limit for the mechanical operating cycles.

Counter current braking (plugging)

The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current.
The current made must be compatible with the making and breaking capacities of the contactor.
In most cases, breaking occurs at a current value close to the locked rotor current and contactor selection can therefore be made using the
criteria for utilisation categories AC-2 and AC-4.

Millions of operating cycles

5
6

LC1 FG630

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG185

Electrical durability in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)

LC1 FG150

1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04

0,02

0,01
100

200

300

400

500 600

800

1000

2000

3000

5000
7000 9000
Current broken in Amperes

Example: Contactor selection

For an on-load factor of 10 % at 400 operating cycles per hour, the curve on the left
indicates zone B. If the current broken is 600 A, the above table leads to selection of
an LC1 FG400 contactor. Referring to the electrical durability curves, it can be seen
that the contactor will be able to perform 350 000 operating cycles. Where a higher
value of electrical durability is required, 1 million operating cycles for example, an
LC1FG630 contactor would be recommended.

Operating cycles/hour

8
9

On-load factor as %

10
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/162

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

TeSys contactors

Selection (continued)

For switching 3-phase capacitor banks,

used for power factor correction

Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

Switching 3-phase capacitors

Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to
high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz).
The contactors are used for direct switching. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated below.
An inductor or an early break resistor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary. This must be done when switching multiple step capacitor banks.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature: please refer to our Motor starter solutions - Control and
protection components catalogue.
In addition, in accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54 100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. 
The rated operational powers given in table the below take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by g1 fuses rated at 1.3 to 1.6 In.
.

Operational power at 50/60 Hz

Maximum
peak current

q y 55 C

220 V
240 V

400 V
440 V

600 V
660 V

220 V
240 V

400 V
440 V

600 V
660 V

kvar

Contactor
to be used

kvar

kvar

kvar

kvar

kvar

60

100

135

40

85

90

3200

LC1 FG150

70

125

160

50

100

100

3500

LC1 FG185

90

160

225

75

125

125

5000

LC1 FG265

125

220

300

100

160

200

8000

LC1 FG400

180

300

400

125

220

300

10 000

LC1 FG500

250

400

600

190

350

500

12 000

LC1 FG630

4
5
6

Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the power
ratings shown below.
This current reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner, quickly dropping back down to
its steady state value.

Contactor selection
Operating rate less than 120 operating cycles/hour.
Maximum operational voltages: 1000 V 50/60 Hz.
The value of the peak magnetising current must be lower than the values indicated below.
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C.
Contactor

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

1700

2800

3500

5500

6800

9000

220 V

kVA

25

40

50

75

100

140

380 V

kVA

50

75

90

130

170

225

415/440 V

kVA

55

80

100

140

190

250

500 V

kVA

65

95

110

170

225

280

660 V

kVA

80

120

140

200

270

315

1000 V

kVA

100

150

200

250

375

470

Maximum permissible
current peak at switch-on
Maximum operational
power (1)

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

7
8
9
10

(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

2
3

Maximum operational power of contactors

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.

Electrical durability at maximum load: 100 000 operations.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
q y 40 C

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

5/163

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG 

d.c. supply

Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

Use in category DC-1 (resistive loads; time constant L/R y 1 ms)

Rated operational current Ie

Operational voltage (Ue)

Number of poles
to be wired in series

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

160

220

300

400

600

850

130

170

300

400

550

850

130

170

300

400

600

850

130

170

300

400

600

850

100

150

250

350

450

700

130

170

300

400

600

850

130

170

300

400

600

850

100

150

250

350

450

700

130

170

300

400

600

850

100

150

250

350

450

700

V
24

2
48/75

3
4

125

225

300

460

Contactors

Use in category DC-2 to DC-5 (inductive loads; time constant L/R y 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie
Operational voltage (Ue)

6
7

24

48/75

8
225

300

460

Contactors
LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

140

180

280

350

550

850

100

140

250

350

550

850

120

160

280

350

550

850

120

160

280

350

550

850

80

100

200

280

450

700

100

140

250

350

550

850

120

160

280

350

550

850

80

100

200

280

450

700

120

160

280

350

550

850

80

100

200

280

450

700

125

Number of poles
to be wired in series

10
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/164

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

TeSys contactors

Selection (continued)

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG 

d.c. supply

Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

Electrical durability

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 FG630

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG185

LC1 FG150

Utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

10
8
6
4

2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01

10

20

30

40 50 60

80 100

140

200

300 400

600

Current broken in Amperes

Determining the electrical durability

The electrical durability can be read directly from the curve above, having previously calculated the power broken Pc. The following table gives,
for each utilisation category, the value of Pc according to the operational current Ie and the operational voltage Ue.
Utilisation categories

Pc (Power broken)

DC-1

Non-inductive loads

Pc = Ue x Ie

DC-2

Shunt motors, breaking whilst running

Pc = 0.1 Ue x Ie

DC-3

Shunt motors, reversing

Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie

DC-4

Series wound motors, breaking whilst running

Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie

DC-5

Series wound motors, reversing

Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie

Counter current braking (plugging)

5
6

Pc = 1.5 Ue x 1.5 Ie

Example:
Series wound motor, breaking whilst motor running, category DC-4.
P = 50 kW, Ue = 200 V, Ie = 250 A.
Select contactor LC1 FG265 with 3 poles in series.
The power broken is: Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie = 0.3 x 200 x 250 = 15 kW.
The electrical durability read from the curve is 8 million operating cycles.

Maximum operating rate

The following operating rate used at Ie must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour.

Use of poles in parallel

The electrical durability is equal to the number of operating cycles performed by a pole, multiplied by the number of poles in parallel, multiplied
by a coefficient of 0.70.

9
10

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

5/165

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Control circuit: a.c.

Environment

Contactor type

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)

1000

Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V

1500

Coil not connected 

to the power circuit

kV

8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1

Product certifications

N.A.T.O.
Conforming to IEC 60529

IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F

Conforming to VDE 0106

Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F

Protective treatment

Standard version

TH

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 60+ 80

Operation

- 5+ 55

Permissible at Uc (1)

- 40+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

5
With derating (3)

Not to be used

Shock resistance (2)

12 g, 50 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z

15 g, 11 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z

(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that coils LX9F be used for contactor sizes FG150 to FG265.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc).
(3) Horizontal fixing:
- The operational current AC-1 is equivalent to 80% of the value indicated in the catalogue
- Breaking and making capacities not guaranteed
- Mechanical and electrical durabilities not guaranteed

Derating of pull-in and drop-out voltage

Contactors LC1
Fixing A

10

Fixing A

Fixing B

7
8

LC1 FG185

Conforming to standards

Degree of protection

LC1 FG150
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V

Fixing B

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/166

FG150

FG185

FG265

FG400

FG500

FG630

Pull-in

75%

75%

75%

80%

80%

80%

Drop-out

105%

105%

105%

110%

110%

110%

Pull-in

115%

115%

115%

120%

120%

120%

Drop-out

90%

90%

90%

95%

95%

95%

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

References :
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

1000
1500
8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1

N.A.T.O.
IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F
Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F

TH
- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 40+ 70

3000

12 g, 50 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z

15 g, 11 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z

9
10

5/167

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Control circuit: a.c.

Pole characteristics

Contactor type

Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie)
(Ue y 440 V)

2
3

In AC-3, 
y 55 C

y 70 C

150/150

185/180

In AC-1, 
y 55 C

y 70 C

220/170

240/180

Up to

1000

1000

Frequency limits

Of the operational current

(1)

Hz

25 to 200

25 to 200

Conventional thermal current

y 40

250

275

Rated making capacity

I rms conforming to 
IEC 60947-4-1

Making current: 10 x I in AC-3

Rated breaking capacity

I rms conforming to 
IEC 60947-4-1

Making and breaking current: 8 x I in cat. AC-3

Permissible short time rating

No current flowing for preceding 
60 minutes with y 40 C

For 1.5 or 10 s

1200

1500

For 30 s

700

920

For 1 mn

600

740

For 3 mn

450

500

For 10 mn

350

400

Motor circuit (type aM)

160

200

With thermal overload relay A

(type gG)

200

315

gG fuses

250

315

Average impedance per pole

At Ith and 50 Hz

mW

0.35

0.33

Power dissipation per pole

for the above operational currents

AC-3

12

AC-1

22

25

mm

25 x 3

25 x 3

Cable with lug

mm2

120

150

Cable with connector

mm2

120

150

Bolt diameter

mm

Power circuit connections

N.m

18

18

Fuse protection
against short-circuits
(U y 440 V)

Cabling
Minimum c.s.a.

Bar

No. of bars
Bar

7
Tightening torque

LC1 FG185

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

4
5

LC1 FG150

(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9
10
Presentation:
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/168

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

References:
page 5/174

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 5/180 and 5/181

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

265/250

400/340

500/500

630/630

300/250

430/340

580/500

850/700

1000

1000

1000

1000

25 to 200

25 to 200

25 to 200

25 to 200

350

500

700

1000

1
2

Making current: 10 x I in AC-3

Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3

2200

3600

4200

5050

1230

2400

3200

4400

950

1700

2400

3400

620

1200

1500

2200

480

1000

1200

1600

315

400

500

630

500

630

800

800

400

500

800

1000

0.3

0.26

0.18

0.12

21

42

45

48

37

65

88

120

32 x 4

30 x 5

40 x 5

60 x 5

240

2 x 150

2 x 240

240

10

10

10

12

35

35

35

58

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/169

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Control circuit: a.c.

Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil

Contactor type

Rated control
circuit

voltage (Uc)
Control voltage
limits 
( y 55 C)

50 or 60 Hz
50 or 60 Hz
coils

40400 Hz
coils

2
Average
consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz

LC1 FG150
V

Operation

0.851.1 Uc

Drop-out

0.350.55 Uc

Operation

Drop-out

Inrush

50 Hz coil

VA

550

805

40400 Hz
coil

VA

0.3

0.3

Cos j
Sealed

50 Hz coil

VA

45

55

40400 Hz
coil

VA

0.3

0.3

Cos j

a 60 Hz

Inrush

60 Hz coil

VA

660

970

40400 Hz
coil

VA

0.3

0.3

Cos j
60 Hz coil

VA

55

66

40400 Hz
coil

VA

0.3

0.3

1216

1824

Closing "C"

ms

2335

2035

Opening "O"

ms

515

715

Sealed

Cos j
Heat dissipation

6
7
8

Operating time (1)

Mechanical durability at Uc

In millions of 
operating cycles

10

10

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature y 55 C

In operating cycles 
per hour

2400

2400

Cabling
Min/max c.s.a.

Flexible cable 
without cable end

1 or 2
conductors

mm2

1/4

1/4

Flexible cable 
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

1/4

1/4

2 conductors

mm2

1/2.5

1/2.5

1 or 2
conductors

mm2

1/4

1/4

N.m

1.2

1.2

Solid cable 
without cable end
Tightening torque

Characteristics of the locking electromagnet (shockproof device)

Contactor type

LC1 FG150

LC1 FG185

Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz

48440

48440

Inrush consumption

VA

100

100

ms

Maximum energisation time at Uc

10

LC1 FG185

48440

20

20

Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles 
per hour

2400

2400

Mechanical durability at Uc

In millions of 
operating cycles

1 x 106

1 x 106

(1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

Presentation:
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/170

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

References:
pages 5/178 and 5/179

Dimensions, schemes:
pages 5/180 and 5/181

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

48440

110440

110440

110440

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.350.55 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

0.250.5 Uc

650

1075

1100

1650

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

10

15

18

22

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

650

1075

1100

1650

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

10

15

18

22

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

14

18

20

4065

4075

4075

4080

100170

100170

100170

100200

10

10

10

10

2400

2400

2400

1200

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/2.5

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/4

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

LC1 FG265

LC1 FG400

LC1 FG500

LC1 FG630

48440

110440

110440

110440

100

100

100

100

20

20

20

20

2400

2400

2400

1200

1 x 10 6

1 x 10 6

1 x 10 6

1 x 10 6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/171

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Auxiliary contact blocks 

for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Environment

1
2
3

Contact block type

LAD N

LAD T and LAD S

IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP2X

Ambient air temperature Storage

around the device
Operation

- 60+ 80

- 5+ 60

Permissible for operation at Uc

- 40+ 70

Maximum
operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Cabling

Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or

solid cable with or without cable end

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

4
5
6
7
8
9

LAD R

Conforming to standards

Contact block type

LAD N

LAD T and LAD S

LAD R

Number of contacts

1 or 4

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)

Up to

660

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Conventional thermal
current (Ith)

For ambient temperature y 60 C

10

Frequency of the operational current

Hz

25400

Minimum
switching capacity

U min

17

I min

mA

Short-circuit protection

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and 

VDE 0660.
gG fuse

10

Rated making capacity

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms

a 140; c: 250

Short-time rating

Permissible for

1s

100

500 ms

120

100 ms

140

MW

> 10

Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time

Guaranteed between 
N/C and N/O contacts

ms

1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

Time delay
(LADT, R and S 
contact blocks)
Accuracy only valid for
setting range indicated 
on the front face

Ambient air temperature for operation

- 40+ 70

- 40+ 70

Repeat accuracy

2%

2%

Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles

+ 15 %

+ 15 %

Drift depending on ambient air

temperature

0.25 % per C

0.25 % per C

Mechanical durability

In millions of operating cycles

30

Rated operational
power of contacts
Conforming to 
IEC 60947-5-1

24

48

110/127

220/230

380/400

440

600

1 million operating cycles

VA

150

300

400

480

500

500

500

3 million operating cycles

VA

80

170

250

290

320

320

320

10 million operating cycles

VA

30

65

90

120

130

130

130

Occasional making capacity

VA

1200

2600

7000

13 000

15 000

13 000

9000

10
References :
page 5/175

5/172

Schemes :
page 5/181

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

Auxiliary contact blocks 

for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Environment
Module type

LAD T (On-delay)

Conforming to standards

IEC 60255-5

Product certifications

UL, CSA

LAD R (Off-delay)

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP2X

Ambient air
temperature around
the device

Storage

- 40+ 80

Operation

- 25+ 55

For operation at Uc

- 25+ 70

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

250

Cabling

Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or

solid cable with or without cable end

mm2

Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Control circuit characteristics

Module type

1
2
3

LAD T (On-delay)

LAD R (Off-delay)

Of the input

By varistor

By varistor

Contactor coil suppression

By varistor

By bidirectional peak limiting diode

a or c 24250

a 24250

Permissible variation

0.81.1 Uc

0.81.1 Uc

Control type

By mechanical contact only

By mechanical contact only

connecting cable < 10 m

LAD T (On-delay)

LAD R (Off-delay)

0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500

0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500

3 % (10 ms minimum)

3 % (10 ms minimum)

Built-in protection

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Time delay characteristics

Module type

Timing ranges

4
5

Repeat accuracy

040 C

Reset time

During time delay period

ms

150

225

After time delay period

ms

50

During time delay period

ms

10

20

After time delay period

ms

ms

40

Illuminates during time delay period

Illuminates during time delay period

Immunity to
microbreaks

Minimum impulse duration

Time delay signalling

By LED

Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Module type

LAD T (On-delay)

LAD R (Off-delay)

Maximum power dissipated

3.5

Leakage current

mA

<5

<5

Residual voltage

3.3

3.3

3 kV; 0.5 joule

3 kV; 0.5 joule

30

30

Overvoltage protection
Electrical durability

In millions of operating cycles

Operating diagrams

Electronic On-delay timer LAD T

8
9

Electronic Off-delay timer LAD R

U supply
(A1 - A2)

1
0

U supply
(A1 - A2)

1
0

Time delay output

Contactor coil

1
0

Control
(A2 - B2)

1
0

Time delay output

Contactor coil

1
0

Red LED

40 ms

10

Red LED

References:
page 5/175

Schemes:
page 5/181

5/173

TeSys contactors

References

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

For control of motors and distribution circuits. 

Control circuit: a.c.

PF537334

3-pole shockproof contactors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50-60 Hz in category AC-3

PF537335

LC1 FG150

220 V 380 V
660 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

Rated
operational
current in
cat. AC-3,
440 V/AC-1
up to

kW

Basic reference,
(1) to be completed by
adding the voltage code (3)
DCN
ref.

Screw fixing,
cabling (2)

Weight

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

40

75

80

80

90

100

65

150/250

CR182

LC1 FG150pp

3.430

kg

55

90

100

100

110

110

100

185/275

CR242

LC1 FG185pp

4.650

75

132

140

140

160

160

147

265/350

CR302

LC1 FG265pp

7.440

110

200

220

250

257

280

185

400/500

CR432

LC1 FG400pp

9.100

147

250

280

295

355

335

335

500/700

CR582

LC1 FG500pp

11.350

200

335

375

400

400

450

450

630/1000

CR852

LC1 FG630pp

18.600

Note: These contactors have instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with 2 N/O contacts, 1 N/C contact and one coil maintaining
contact.
LC1 FG185

PF537336

(1) Devices approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
(2) Power terminals can, if required, be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered
separately (see page 5/176).
(3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

110

115

120

208 220 230 240

380

400

415

440

50 Hz (coil LX1)

E5

F5

F5

M5

P5

U5

Q5

V5

N5

60 Hz (coil LX1)

E6

F6

L6

M6

U6

Q6

R6

50/60 Hz (coil LX9)

E7

F7

F7

G6

L7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

LC1 FG265

40400 Hz (coil LX1)

E7

F7

F7

G7

L7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

LC1 FG400FG500

40400 Hz (coil LX1)

F7

F7

G7

L7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

LC1 FG630

40400 Hz (coil LX1)

F7

F7

F7

L7

M7

P7

U7

Q7

V7

N7

R7

LC1 FG 150FG185

5
LC1 FG265

(1)

48

Volt a

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/158

5/174

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/180 and 5/181

TeSys contactors

References

Auxiliary contact blocks for 

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

For use in normal operating environments
Number of
contacts

Max. number of blocks per contactor

Composition

Reference

Weight

Clip-on mounting

kg
LAD Npp

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number of
contacts

LAD N10

(1)

0.020

LAD N01

(1)

0.020

LAD N22

(1)

0.050

LAD N40

(1)

0.050

LAD N04

(1)

0.050

LAD N31

(1)

0.050

Max. number of blocks per contactor

Time delay

Clip-on mounting

Type

On-delay 0.13 (2)

Reference

LAD Tp

LAD Rp

Weight

Range
s

1 N/O
+
1 N/C

kg
LAD T0

0.060

0.130

LAD T2

10180

LAD T4

0.060

130 (3)

LAD S2

0.060

Off-delay 0.13 (2)

LAD R0

0.060

0.130

LAD R2

10180

LAD R4

(1)

(1)

0.060

0.060
0.060

(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
(2) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
(3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 5/172 and 5/173

Schemes:
page 5/181

5/175

TeSys contactors

References

Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors

LC1 FG

Insulated terminal blocks

For use
with contactors

LC1FG150 and FG185

LA9 F103

Set of 2 blocks
Set
reference

1 x 16150 mm2 
or 
2 x 1695 mm2

LA9F103

4 mm hexagonal 
socket key

0.560

Set
reference

LA9F702

(1)

0.250

LC1FG265, FG400 and FG500 6

LA9F703

(1)

0.250

LC1 FG630

LA9F704

(1)

0.250

Shockproof devices (locking electromagnet) (2)

LA9 FGppp

Weight
kg

Number of
shrouds per set

LC1FG150 and FG185

Tightening

Power terminal protection shrouds

For use
with contactors

Cabling

Maximum
energisation
time at Uc

Inrush
consumption

ms

VA

20

Weight
kg

For contactors

Kit reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)

Weight

LC1FG150 and FG185

LA9 FG150603pp (1)

0.200

LC1 FG265

LA9 FG265603pp (1)

0.200

LC1 FG400 and FG500

LA9 FG400603pp (1)

0.200

LC1 FG630

LA9 FG630603pp (1)

0.200

kg

250

(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
(2) Replacement shockproof device, supplied in kit form, comprising:
- 1 locking electromagnet.
- fixings suitable for the contactor rating.
(3) Control circuit voltage:
Volt a

6
7
8
9
10

5/176

48

110

115/120 208

220

230/240 380

415

440

LA9 FG150 to FG265

50/60 Hz

LA9 FG400 to FG630

50/60 Hz

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors

LC1 FG

Sets of contacts

Per pole: 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
For use
on contactors

LA5 FG431

Reference

Weight
kg

LC1 FG150

3 poles

LA5FF431

(1)

0.270

LC1 FG185

3 poles

LA5FG431

(1)

0.350

LC1 FG265

3 poles

LA5FG431

(1)

0.660

LC1 FG400

3 poles

LA5F400803

(1)

2.000

LC1 FG500

3 poles

LA5F500803

(1)

2.950

LC1 FG630

3 poles

LA5F630803

(1)

6.100

Replacement for

Reference

LC1 FG150

3 poles

LA5F15050

(1)

0.490

LC1 FG185

3 poles

LA5F18550

(1)

0.670

LC1 FG265

3 poles

LA5F26550

(1)

0.920

LC1 FG400

3 poles

LA5F40050

(1)

1.300

LC1 FG500

3 poles

LA5F50050

(1)

1.850

LC1 FG630

3 poles

LA5F63050

(1)

3.150

Arc chambers
For use
on contactors

LA5 F40050

Replacement for

Weight

1
2
3

kg

(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/177

References

TeSys contactors

Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Spare or replacement parts
a.c. supply 50/60 Hz

References

Control circuit voltage Uc

50 Hz

60 Hz

Voltage
code

Coil
reference

Weight
kg

Coils for contactors LC1 FG150

2
LX1 FFppp

3
4

48

E6

LX1 FF040

0.430

48

E5

LX1 FF048

0.430

110

F6

LX1 FF092

115/120

G6

LX1 FF095

110/115

F5

LX1 FF110

0.430

120

FE5

LX1 FF120

0.430

208

L6

LX1 FF170

0.430

320

M6

LX1 FF184

0.430

230/240

U6

LX1 FF187

0.430

208

LE5

LX1 FF200

0.430

220/230

M5

LX1 FF220

0.430

240

U5

LX1 FF240

0.430

380

Q6

LX1 FF316

0.430

415

N6

LX1 FF340

0.430

440

R6

LX1 FF360

0.430

380

Q5

LX1 FF380

0.430

415/440

N5

LX1 FF415

0.430

0.430
(1)

0.430

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50

Hz: 550

VA; 60

Hz: 660

VA,
- sealed 50

Hz: 45

VA; 60

Hz: 55

VA, cos j
= 0.32.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

5
6

Coils for contactors LC1 FG185

LX1 FGppp

7
8

48

E6

LX1 FG040

0.550

48

E5

LX1 FG048

0.550

110

F6

LX1 FG092

115/120

G6

LX1 FG095

110/115

F5

LX1 FG110

0.550

120

FE5

LX1 FG120

0.550

208

L6

LX1 FG170

0.550

320

M6

LX1 FG184

0.550

230/240

U6

LX1 FG187

0.550

208

LE5

LX1 FG200

0.550

220/230

M5

LX1 FG220

0.550

240

U5

LX1 FG240

0.550

380

Q6

LX1 FG316

0.550

415

N6

LX1 FG340

0.550

440

R6

LX1 FG360

0.550

380

Q5

LX1 FG380

0.550

415/440

N5

LX1 FG415

0.550

0.550
(1)

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50

Hz: 805

VA; 60

Hz: 970

VA,
- sealed 50

Hz: 55

VA; 60

Hz: 66

VA, cos j
= 0.34.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for
onboard use.

10
Scheme :
page 5/181

5/178

0.550

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Spare or replacement parts
a.c. supply 50/60 Hz

References (continued)
Control circuit voltage Uc
50 and 60 Hz

Voltage
code

Coil
reference

Weight

kg

Coils for contactors LC1 FG265

LX1 FHppp

110/120

F7

LX1 FH1102

208

L7

LX1 FH2002

0.740

220/230

M7

LX1 FH2202

0.740

240

U7

LX1 FH2402

0.740

380/415

Q7

LX1 FH3802

0.740

(1)

0.740

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 600 to 700

VA,
- sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 8 to 10 VA, cos j
= 0.9.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

Coils for contactors LC1 FG400

LX1 FJppp

110/120

F7

LX1 FJ110

208

L7

LX1 FJ200

1.000

220/230

M7

LX1 FJ220

1.000

230/240

U7

LX1 FJ240

1.000

380/400

Q7

LX1 FJ380

1.000

415/440

N7

LX1 FJ415

1.000

(1)

1.000

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1000 to 1150

VA,
- sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 12 to 18 VA, cos j
= 0.9.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

110/120

F7

LX1 FK110

208

L7

LX1 FK200

1.150

220/230

M7

LX1 FK220

1.150

230/240

U7

LX1 FK240

1.150

380/400

Q7

LX1 FK380

1.150

415/440

N7

LX1 FK415

1.150

(1)

1.150

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1050 to 1150

VA,
- sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 16 to 20 VA, cos j
= 0.9.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

Coils for contactors LC1 FG630

LX1 FLppp

4
5

Coils for contactors LC1 FG500

LX1 FKppp

110/120

F7

LX1 FL110

208

L7

LX1 FL200

1.500

220/230

M7

LX1 FL220

1.500

380/400

Q7

LX1 FL380

1.500

415/440

N7

LX1 FL415

1.500

(1)

1.500

Specifications
Average consumption at 20

C:
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1500 to 1730

VA,
- sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 20 to 25 VA, cos j
= 0.9.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 1200.
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for onboard use.

6
7
8
9
10

Scheme :
page 5/181

5/179

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

Dimensions

LC1 FG150, FG185 and FG265

S

S1
FG150 M8x25
F1G85 M8x25
FG265 M10x35

J
=

LC1

Q1

LC1

G1

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according

to operating voltage and breaking capacity.

J1

=
M

b
X1

b2

X1

(1)

b1

200500 V

6001000 V

FG150

10

15

FG185

10

15

FG265

10

15

(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page

5/176).

b1

b2

G1

J1

Q1

S1

FG150

181

170

137

301

180

131

106

80

106

120

116

150

40

26

57.5

20

34

44

13.5

FG185

183.5 174

137

305

190

130

111

80

106

120

122.5 154

40

29

59.5

20

34

44

13.5

FG265

217.5 203

145

375

222

147

142

96

106

120

150

48

39

66.5

25

44.5

38

21.5

178

f = minimum distance required for coil removal.

LC1 FG400 and FG500

56

44,5

(1)

=
=
180

120

=
=

G
23,5

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according

to operating voltage and breaking capacity.

X1

b2

209

X1

6xM10x35

LC1

G1

LC1

Q1

200500 V

6001000 V

FG400

15

20

FG500

15

20

(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page

5/176).

b2

G
G
supplied min.

G
G1
G1
max. supplied min.

G1
J
max.

Q1

FG400

237

206

375

234

146

80

66

102

223

156

192

19.5

160

181

48

75

74

25

FG500

257

238

400

247

150

80

66

120

223

156

210

39.5

181

208

55

78

77

30

f = minimum distance required for coil removal.

9
10
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

5/180

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References :
page 5/174

TeSys contactors

Dimensions (continued),
schemes

Dimensions

3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG

(continued)

LC1 FG630
72

40

64
6xM12x45

180

264

464

304

X1

280

X1

(1)

60,5

155

79

80

197

80

89

180 (2)

282

68,5

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance

according to operating voltage and breaking
capacity.

321

255

LC1
FG630

200500 V

6901000 V

20

30

(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/176).

(2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.

Schemes

Contactors LC1-FG150 to FG630

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

14

22

32

44

C1

13/NO

T3/6

Un y 240 V

C2

3/L2

5/L3

1/L1

T2/4

03
04

T1/2

A2
A1

d 50-60 Hz max

Add-on blocks

81/NC

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

54

62

74

84

74

71/NC

73/NO

64

82

63/NO

54

72

53/NO

84

61/NC

71/NC

83/NO

72

51/NC

51/NC
62

62

53/NO
54

52

41/NC
(92)
42
(91)

3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

83/NO

4 N/O LAD N40

(94)

4 N/C LAD N04

84

2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

43/NO

1 N/C LAD N01

44
(93)

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

1 N/O LAD N10

Time delay auxiliary contacts

55/N

67/NO

57/NO

65/NC

68

58

66

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

56

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp

Coils a
LX1 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK and FL
03

A1

A2

A1

10

A2

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159

Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165

Characteristics:
pages 5/166 to 5/171

References:
pages 5/174, 5/178 and 5/179

5/181

Characteristics

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Environment

1
2
3

Contactor type
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to 
IEC 60158-1/IEC 60947-4
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C

LC1BL
1000

LC1BM
1000

LC1BP
1000

LC1BR
1000

1500

1500

1500

1500

Conforming to standards

IEC 60158-1, IEC 60947-4, NF C 63-110,VDE 0660, BS 5424

Product certifications

CSA, BV, RINA

Protective treatment

Standard version
Special version

Ambient air temperature

around the device
(for operation at Uc)

Storage
Operation
Permissible

C
C
C

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 50+ 60

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

TC
TH

30 occasional, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Pole characteristics

4
5

Number of poles

7
8
9

1, 2, 3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

1000
1250

1500
2000

1800
2750

Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, q y 55 C

(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-1, q y 40 C

A
A

750
800

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to

Frequency limits
Without derating
(sine wave)
Derating coefficient

V
Hz

1000
50/60
100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5

Maximum thermal current (Ith)

Rated making capacity

A
A

800
10 000

1250
10 000

2000
15 000

2750
18 000

A
A
A
A

10 000
9000
8000
4000

10 000
9000
8000
4000

15 000
12 000
9000
5000

18 000
15 000
11 000
6000

Permissible short time rating For 1 s

From cold state, with no current For 5 s
flowing for previous 60 minutes 
For 10 s
at q y 40 C
For 30 s
For 1 min.
For 3 min.
For 10 min.

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

9600
9600
7000
4800
3500
2100
1200

9600
9600
8000
5200
3800
2400
1800

12 000
12 000
9600
6400
5200
3600
2800

15 000
15 000
12 000
8000
6300
4400
3600

Short-circuit protection
by fuses
U y 440 V

Motor circuit (type aM)

With thermal overload relay 
(type gl)
gl fuses

A
A

800
1000

1200
1500

2 x 800 (1)
2 x 1000 (1)

2 x 1000 (1)
2 x 1200 (1)

800

1200

2 x 1000 (1)

2 x 1200 (1)

Average impedance per pole

At Ith and 50 Hz

mW

0.18

0.18

0.13

0.09

Power dissipated per pole

AC-3
AC-1

W
W

88
115

180
280

290
520

360
680

Connection

Number of bars
Bar

mm

2
50 x 5

2
80 x 5

3
100 x5

4
100 x 5

mm

4x8

4 x 10

4 x 10

4 x 10

Rated breaking capacity

1, 2, 3 or 4

q y 40 C
I rms conforming to 
IEC 60158-1 and 60947-4
I rms
up to 440 V
conforming to 500 V
IEC 60158-1 
660-690 V
and 60947-4
1000 V

Bolt diameter
Tightening torque

Power circuit connections

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186

N.m
21
35
35
35
(1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specified by the manufacturer.

10

5/182

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/192 and 5/193

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Control circuit characteristics

Contactor type
Rated control voltage

50/60 Hz
c 1,2 or 3-pole contactors
c 4-pole contactors

V
V
V

LC1BL
110500
48500
48500

LC1BM
110500
48500
48500

LC1BP
110500
48500
48500

LC1BR
110500
48500
60500

Voltage limits

Operation
Drop-out

V
V

0.851.1 Uc
0.300.50 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.300.50 Uc

0.851.1 Uc
0.350.50 Uc

0.851.1 Ucw
0.400.50 Uc

Maximum consumption
(coil + economy resistor)

Number of
poles: 1
Number of
poles: 2
Number of
poles: 3
Number of
poles: 4

VA

Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10

VA

Inrush: 1000 - sealed: 20

VA

Inrush: 1300 - sealed: 31

VA

Inrush: 1600 - sealed: 47

Number of
poles: 1
Number of
poles: 2
Number of
poles: 3
Number of
poles: 4

Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10

Inrush: 800 - sealed: 20

Inrush: 1100 - sealed: 31

Inrush: 1400 - sealed: 47

C
O breaking on a side
O breaking on c side
In millions of operating cycles

ms
ms
ms

100150
50100
2040
1.2

Ambient temperature y 55 C

Op.
120
cycs/h

c (1)

Operating time (2) 

average at Uc 
(in milliseconds)
Mechanical durability (at Uc)
Maximum operating rate in
mechanical operating cycles

1
2
3
4

100150
50100
2040
1.2

100150
50100
2040
1.2

100150
50100
2040
1.2

120

120

120

Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4GMp

Rated thermal current

20

Rated insulation voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947-1

Conforming to VDE, group C

V
V

660
750

Short-circuit protection
gl type cartridge fuses

Conforming to 
IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0660

20

V
VA/W

a supply
110/127 220
2000
4000

380
4000

415/440 500
4000
3500

c supply
110
220
250
250

440
230

500
200

VA/W

14 000

35 000

45 000

1600

400

360

mm2
mm2

1 or 2 x 4 mm2 conductors
1 or 2 x 6 mm2 conductors

Operational power
1 million operating cycles
Making and breaking capacity
Cabling

With cable end

Without cable end

23 000

35 000

800

7
8

(1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an
intermediate relay for control.
(2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/192 and 5/193

5/183

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys
LC1B c
ontactors

Contactors for motor control in category AC-3, from 750 to 1800 A (a or c )

3-pole contactors

522612

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3

LC1BP33

Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
440V
up to

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(1)

Weight

2
3
1
4

2
1
3

LC1BL33p22
LC1BL33p31
LC1BL33p13
LC1BL33p40

kg
58.000
58.000
58.000
58.000

220 V
230 V
kW
220

380 V
400 V
kW
400

415 V
kW
425

440 V
kW
450

500 V
kW
500

660 V
690 V
kW
560

1000 V
kW
A
530
750

280

500

530

560

600

670

530

1000

2
3
1
4

2
1
3

LC1BM33p22
LC1BM33p31
LC1BM33p13
LC1BM33p40

57.000
57.000
57.000
57.000

425

750

800

800

700

750

670

1500

2
3
1
4

2
1
3

LC1BP33p22
LC1BP33p31
LC1BP33p13
LC1BP33p40

election:
94.000
pages 5/194 to 5/217
94.000
94.000
94.000

500

900

900

900

900

900

750

1800

2
3
1
4

2
1
3

LC1BR33p22
LC1BR33p31
LC1BR33p13
LC1BR33p40

4
5

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

129.000
129.000
129.000
129.000

Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum
operational
current
in AC-1 
(q y 40 C)

A
800

7
8
9

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(1)

Weight

kg
32.000
32.000
32.000
32.000
45.000
45.000
45.000
45.000
58.000
58.000
58.000
58.000
72.000
72.000
72.000
72.000

2
2
LC1BL31p22
3
1
LC1BL31p31
1
3
LC1BL31p13
4

LC1BL31p40
2
2
2
LC1BL32p22
3
1
LC1BL32p31
1
3
LC1BL32p13
4

LC1BL32p40
3
2
2
LC1BL33p22
3
1
LC1BL33p31
1
3
LC1BL33p13
4

LC1BL33p40
4
2
2
LC1BL34p22
3
1
LC1BL34p31
1
3
LC1BL34p13
4

LC1BL34p40
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
48
110
120
125
127
220
230
240
380
400
a 50400 Hz

F
K

G
M
P
U
Q
V

415
N

440
R

500
S

RD

SD

ED

FD

GD

MD

UD

For voltages other than those indicated above, replace the p in the reference with the the operational voltage (3 figures) and the
type of current (2 letters: AC for a.c. supply and DC for d.c. supply). Example: 82 V d.c., the reference becomes
LC1BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 5/188 to 5/191.

10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/184

Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183

Dimensions and schemes:

pages 5/192 and 5/193

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

TeSys
LC1B contactors

Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c ) (continued)

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors

Maximum
operational
current in AC-1 
(q y 40 C)

522612

A
1250

Number
of poles

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(1)

2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

LC1BM31p22
LC1BM31p31
LC1BM31p13
LC1BM31p40
LC1BM32p22
LC1BM32p31
LC1BM32p13
LC1BM32p40
LC1BM33p22
LC1BM33p31
LC1BM33p13
LC1BM33p40
LC1BM34p22
LC1BM34p31
LC1BM34p13
LC1BM34p40

kg
31.000
31.000
31.000
31.000
44.000
44.000
44.000
44.000
57.000
57.000
57.000
57.000
71.000
71.000
71.000
71.000

2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

LC1BP31p22
LC1BP31p31
LC1BP31p13
LC1BP31p40
LC1BP32p22
LC1BP32p31
LC1 BP32p13
LC1BP32p40
LC1BP33p22
LC1BP33p31
LC1BP33p13
LC1BP33p40
LC1BP34p22
LC1BP34p31
LC1BP34p13
LC1BP34p40

41.000
41.000
41.000
41.000
65.000
65.000
65.000
65.000
94.000
94.000
94.000
94.000
120.000
120.000
120.000
120.000

2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
1
4

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

2
1
3

LC1BR31p22
LC1BR31p31
LC1BR31p13
LC1BR31p40
LC1BR32p22
LC1BR32p31
LC1BR32p13
LC1BR32p40
LC1BR33p22
LC1BR33p31
LC1BR33p13
LC1BR33p40
LC1BR34p22
LC1BR34p31
LC1BR34p13
LC1BR34p40

52.000
52.000
52.000
52.000
85.000
85.000
85.000
85.000
129.000
129.000
129.000
129.000
160.000
160.000
160.000
160.000

2
LC1BP33
3

2000

2750

Weight

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

(1) See previous page.

10
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217

Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183

Dimensions and schemes:

pages 5/192 and 5/193

5/185

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Accessories and spare parts

813307

Spare parts
Description

Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks
Description

PA1LB89

813306

PA1LB80
(PA1LB76 + PA1LB75)

Composition

Reference

LC1B

1 N/O

ZC4GM1

Weight
kg
0.030

1 N/C

ZC4GM2

0.030

Number of sets
required per
contactor pole
1

Set reference
PA1LB80

kg
0.420

PA1LB80

0.420

LC1BP

PA1LB80

0.420

LC1BR

PA1LB80

0.420

Reference

For contactor

Set of contacts
LC1BL
(1 moving contact, 
1 fixed contact)
LC1BM

813309

813308

ZC4GM1

For contactor

4
5

Description

For contactor

Weight

Moving contact
LC1B
only (for 1 finger)
Fixed contact only LC1B
(for 1 finger)
Blow-out horn only LC1B
(for 1 finger)
Arc chamber
LC1BL
(for 1 contactor pole)
LC1BM

PA1LB75

Weight
kg
0.220

PA1LB76

0.200

PA1LB89

0.120

PA1LB50

3.700

PA1LB50

3.700

LC1BP

PA1PB50

6.200

LC1BR

PA1RB50

8.500

Mounting accessories
Description

PA1LB50

For contactor

Bar support
LC1BL to BR
bracket
for mounting on 120
or 150 mm centres

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

LA9B103

Weight
kg
1.620

813305

Assembly of two vertically mounted contactors by the customer

Description
Mechanical
interlock and
locking device
components

For contactor

Reference

LC1B

EZ2LB0601

Weight
kg
1.280

Specifications
- Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or
different ratings.
- Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side.
- Vertical fixing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm.

8
9
10

EZ2LB0601

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/186

Characteristics :
pages 5/182 and 5/183

Description

Specification

Notched
mounting rails
used as uprights 
and as equipment
support

2 mm steel, 
with zinc chromate
treatment

1/4 turn sliding

clip nut and
corresponding
screw for
assembly of rails
AM1EC

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

AM1EC165

kg
2.460

1850

AM1EC185

2.760

2000

AM1EC200

2.980

M8

10

AF1CD081

0.020

M8 x 18

10

AF1VC820

0.024

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/192 and 5/193

Height
mm
1650

Weight

Adjustment
characteristics

Electromagnet

Electromagnet EB5KB50

TeSys contactors
5

TeSys LC1B contactors

Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel

Moving
circuit

E
e

Coil
Moving
circuit

Return
spring

Poles

Complete pole

N/O pole
Fixed
contact

Moving contact

F
Opening gap adjustment

Pole
spring

Adjustment of
application force

c or a supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type
Electromagnet
Pick-up travel (E)

mm

LC1BL
EB5KB50
30

Pull-in travel (e)

mm

10

10

10

10

Pull-in voltage

WB1KBppp
0.75 Uc

WB1KBppp
0.75 Uc

WB1KBppp
0.75 Uc

WB1KBppp
0.75 Uc

Drop-out voltage

0.30.5 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

0.30.5 Uc

1-pole

daN

30

30

30 (1)

30 (2)

2-pole

daN

30

30

30 (1)

30 (2)

3-pole

daN

30

30

30 (1)

30 (2)

4-pole

daN

30

30

30 (1)

30 (2)

Coil

N/O pole
Adjustment of 
application force (F) 
on the contact per pole
according to contactor
composition

LC1BM
EB5KB50
30

LC1BP
EB5KB50
30

LC1BR
EB5KB50
30

7
8

(1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.

9
10

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/192 and 5/193

5/187

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys
LC1B contactors

Replacement coils and accessories 

for single-pole contactors

References

The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply.

b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 individual rectifier (to be wired),
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current
side.

Operating range
min-max (1)
d.c.
a.c.

522634

3
4
WB1KBppp

5
6

Coil

Economy resistor

V
47-51
52-56
57-64
65-68
69-79
80-87
88-94
95-108
109-136
137-151
152-166
167-189
190-221
222-243
244-267

110-125
126-155
156-173
174-191
192-216
217-256
257-280
281-307

Resistance
at
20 C
10 %
W
5.1
5.9
7.3
9.5
11.6
16.2
19.9
25.5
33.1
50.9
61.36
78.4
94.8
123.9
159.9

I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
A
10.3
9.5
8.9
7.1
6.9
5.3
4.7
4.3
4.2
3
2.7
2.4
2.3
1.9
1.7

Resistor
Unit
reference

268-318

308-365

199.6

1.6

DR2SC1001

319-405

366-463

247.4

1.6

DR2SC1201

406-446
447-500

464-500

382
506.7

1.1 (2)
1 (3)

DR2SC1001
DR2SC1201

DR2SC0270
DR2SC0330
DR2SC0390
DR2SC0560
DR2SC0680
DR2SC0820
DR2SC1000
DR2SC1200
DR2SC1800
DR2SC2700
DR2SC3300
DR2SC3900
DR2SC4700
DR2SC6800
DR2SC8200

Total
resistance
W
270
330
390
560
680
820
1000
1200
1800
2700
3300
3900
4700
6800
4700
+ 3300
5600
+ 4700
6800
+ 5600
20 000
24 000

Contact
Qty Reference

Rectifier
Coil
(for a only)
Reference Reference

Weight

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
LC1DT20LDS135
LC1DT20LDS135

DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1S

WB1KB155
WB1KB132
WB1KB123
WB1KB133
WB1KB121
WB1KB130
WB1KB140
WB1KB134
WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB135
WB1KB136
WB1KB139
WB1KB125
WB1KB137

kg
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

LC1DT20UDS135 DR5TE1S

WB1KB126

1.120

LC1DT20TDS135 DR5TE1S

WB1KB138

1.120

1
1

LC1DT20VDS135 DR5TE1S
LC1DT20RDS135

WB1KB127
WB1KB128

1.120
1.120

Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
- d.c.: inrush 380520 W, sealed 0.150.20 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 450620 VA, sealed 0.150.20 VA
b Time constant when sealed 25 ms
b Economy resistor consumption: 710 W
b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120
b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7.

(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
(2) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 10 000 W.
(3) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12,000 W.

8
9
10

5/188

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Replacement coils and accessories 

for 2-pole contactors

References

The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply.

b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 individual rectifier (to be wired),
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current
side.

522634

Operating range
min-max (1)
d.c.
a.c.

WB1KBppp

Coil

Economy resistor

V
48-51
52-56

Resistance
at
20 C
10 %
W
3.22
4.04

I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
A
15.8
13.8

57-62

4.96

12.5

63-68
69-79
80-85

5.86
7.2
9.6

11.6
11
8.8

86-98

99-113

11.4

8.6

99-108
109-119
120-136
137-173
174-191
192-210
211-238

114-125
126-136
137-156
157-196
197-216
217-238
239-272

16.3
19.7
25.2
32.5
49.7
61
77.2

6.6
6
5.4
5.3
3.8
3.4
3

239-279

273-318

94

280-310
311-341
342-399
400-500

319-359
360-387
388-452
453-500

128
160
197
257

2.4
2.1
2
1.9

Resistors (2 in series)
Unit
Total
reference
resistance
DR2SC0068
DR2SC0082
DR2SC0100
DR2SC0100
DR2SC0120
DR2SC0120
DR2SC0150
DR2SC0180
DR2SC0220
DR2SC0220
DR2SC0270
DR2SC0330
DR2SC0390
DR2SC0470
DR2SC0680
DR2SC1000
DR2SC1200
DR2SC1500
DR2SC1800
DR2SC1800
DR2SC2200
DR2SC2700
DR2SC3300
DR2SC3900
DR2SC4700
DR2SC5600

Contact
Qty Reference

W
2x68
1
82
1
+ 100
100 
1
+ 120
2x120
1
2 x 150 1
180
1
+ 220
220
1
+ 270
2x330
1
2x390
1
2x470
2
2x680
2
2x1000 2
2x1200 2
1500 
2
+ 1800
1800
1
+ 2200
2x2700 1
2x3300 1
2x3900 1
4700   1
+ 5600 

Rectifier
Coil
(for a only)
Reference Reference

Weight

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2

WB1KB141
WB1KB142

kg
1.120
1.120

ZC4GM2

WB1KB155

1.120

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2

WB1KB132
WB1KB123
WB1KB133

1.120
1.120
1.120

ZC4GM2

WB1KB121

1.120

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2

DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U

WB1KB130
WB1KB140
WB1KB134
WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB135
WB1KB136

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

LP1DT20LDS135 DR5TE1S

WB1KB139

1.120

LP1DT20UDS135
LP1DT20TDS135
LP1DT20TDS135
LP1DT20VDS135

WB1KB125
WB1KB137
WB1KB126
WB1KB138

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S

Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
- d.c.: inrush 600800 W, sealed 0.350.5 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 7201000 VA, sealed 0.350.5 VA
b Time constant when sealed 25 ms
b Economy resistor consumption: 1520 W
b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120
b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7.

3
4
5
6
7
8

(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.

9
10

5/189

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Replacement coils and accessories 

for 3-pole contactors

References

The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply.

b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 individual rectifier (to be wired),
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current
side.

Operating range
min-max (1)
d.c.
a.c.

Coil

Economy resistor

Resistance
at
20 C
10 %

I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max

108-113

W
1.85
2.35
3.22
4.04
4.96
5.86
7.2
9.6

A
27
23.5
18.5
16
14.5
13.5
12.8
10.2

99-114

114-132

11.4

10

115-126
127-139
140-159

133-145
146-160
161-181

16.3
11.7
25.2

7.7
7
6.3

160-201
202-222
223-246
247-277
278-327
328-360
361-399
400-469
470-500

182-228
229-255
256-282
283-316
317-372
373-408
409-452
453-500

32.2
49.7
61
77.2
94
128
160
197
257

6.2
4.5
4
3.6
3.5
2.8
2.5
2.4
1.9

522634

V
47-50
51-55
56-60
61-66
67-72
73-79
80-92
93-98

4
WB1KBppp

Resistors (2 in 
parallel or in series)
Unit
Total
reference
resistance
W
DR2SC0150 2x150//
DR2SC0180 2x180//
DR2SC0220 2x220//
DR2SC0270 2X270//
DR2SC0330 2x330//
DR2SC0100 2x100
DR2SC0120 2x120
DR2SC0150 150 
DR2SC0180 + 180
DR2SC0180 180 
DR2SC0220 + 220
DR2SC0270 2x270
DR2SC0330 2x330
DR2SC0390 390 
DR2SC0470 + 470
DR2SC0560 2x560
DR2SC0820 2x820
DR2SC1000 2x1000
DR2SC1200 2x1200
DR2SC1500 2x1500
DR2SC1500 3x1500
DR2SC1800 3x1800
DR2SC2200 3x2200
DR2SC2700 3x2700

Contact

Rectifier
Coil
(for a only)
Reference Reference

Weight

Qty Reference

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2

DR5TE1U

WB1KB154
WB1KB153
WB1KB141
WB1KB142
WB1KB155
WB1KB132
WB1KB123
WB1KB133

kg
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

ZC4GM2

DR5TE1U

WB1KB121

1.120

2
2
2

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2

DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U

WB1KB130
WB1KB140
WB1KB134

1.120
1.120
1.120

2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
LC1DT20LDS135
LC1DT20LDS135
LC1DT20UDS135
LC1DT20TDS135
LC1DT20VDS135
LC1DT20VDS135
LC1DT20RDS135

DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S

WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB135
WB1KB136
WB1KB139
WB1KB125
WB1KB137
WB1KB126
WB1KB138

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
- d.c.: inrush 9001100 W, sealed 0.71 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 11001300 VA, sealed 0.71 VA
b Time constant when sealed 25 ms
b Economy resistor consumption: 2430 W
b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120
b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7.

(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.

9
10

5/190

References

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

Replacement coils and accessories 

for 4-pole contactors

References

The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply.

b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
- 1 individual rectifier (to be wired),
- 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current
side.

522634

Operating range
min-max (1)
d.c.
a.c.

WB1KBppp

V
57-61
62-67
68-73
74-81
82-89
90-102
103-111
112-129
130-143
144-157
158-180
181-226
227-251
252-278
279-313
314-368
369-408
409-448
449-500

105-119
120-128
129-148
149-163
164-179
180-204
205-259
260-288
289-317
318-356
357-418
419-462
463-500

Coil
Resistance
at
20 C
10 %
W
2.35
3.22
4.04
4.96
5.86
7.2
9.6
11.4
16.3
19.7
25.2
32.5
49.7
61
77.2
94
128
160
197

Economy resistor
I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
A
26
21
18
16.3
15
14
11.5
11.3
8.7
8
7.1
6.9
5
4.5
4
3.9
3.2
2.8
2.5

Resistors (3 in series)
Reference
Total
unit
resistance
DR2SC0027
DR2SC0033
DR2SC0039
DR2SC0047
DR2SC0056
DR2SC0068
DR2SC0100
DR2SC0100
DR2SC0150
DR2SC0180
DR2SC0220
DR2SC0330
DR2SC0470
DR2SC0560
DR2SC0680
DR2SC0820
DR2SC1200
DR2SC1500
DR2SC1800

W
3x27
3x33
3x39
3x47
3x56
3x68
3x100
3x100
3x150
3x180
3x220
3x330
3x470
3x560
3x680
3x820
3x1200
3x1500
3x1800

Contact
Qty Reference

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
ZC4GM2
LC1DT20LDS135
LC1DT20UDS135
LC1DT20UDS135
LC1DT20TDS135
LC1DT20VDS135
LC1DT20VDS135
LC1DT20RDS135

Rectifier
Coil
(for a only)
Reference Reference

DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1U
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S
DR5TE1S

WB1KB153
WB1KB141
WB1KB142
WB1KB155
WB1KB132
WB1KB123
WB1KB133
WB1KB121
WB1KB130
WB1KB140
WB1KB134
WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB135
WB1KB136
WB1KB139
WB1KB125
WB1KB137
WB1KB126

Weight

kg
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
- d.c.: inrush 11001400 W, sealed 1.21.6 W
- a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 13001600 VA, sealed 1.21.6 VA
b Time constant when sealed 25 ms
b Economy resistor consumption: 3545 W
b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120
b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7.

3
4
5
6
7

(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.

8
9
10

5/191

Dimensions

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B c
ontactors

4
5

330
365

260

15

44
30
15

Q1

15

51

30

30

M1

P
M2

30

T
LC1BL
1
2
50
50
59
59
16
16
345
445
285
385

121
121
100
100
100
100
122
122
10
10
30
30
9
9

Number of poles
a
b
c
L
M
M1
M2
N
P
Q1
R
S
T

3
50
59
16
540
480

121
100
100
122
10
30
9

4
50
59
16
760

308
392
121
100
100
122
10
30
9

LC1BM
1
2
63
63
55
55
20
20
345
445
285
385

125
125
100
100
100
100
157
157
17
17
30
30
11
11

3
63
55
20
540
480

125
100
100
157
17
30
11

4
63
55
20
760

308
392
125
100
100
157
17
30
11

LC1BP
1
2
100
100
55
55
20
20
385
540
325
480

125
125
150
150
110
110
173
173
20
20
60
60
11
11

3
100
55
20
760
700

125
150
110
173
20
60
11

4
100
55
20
1065

455
550
125
150
110
173
20
60
11

LC1BR
1
2
125
125
50
50
25
25
445
635
385
575

130
130
195
195
130
130
173
173
20
20
60
60
11
11

3
125
50
25
885
825

130
195
130
173
20
60
11

Electrical safety clearance

Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply).

a 3-phase voltage
380/440 V

X1
X2

LC1BL
100
150

LC1BM
100
150

LC1BP
150
200

LC1BR
200
250

500 V

X1
X2

100
150

100
150

150
220

200
250

660/690 V

X1
X2

150
200

150
200

200
250

200
250

1000 V

X1
X2

200
250

200
250

200
250

250
300

Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors

A = (E112) 488

EZ2LB0601

E = 600

Q1

X1

15

7
8

330

290

X2

4-pole contactors LC1Bp34

Single, 2 or 3-pole contactors

LC1Bp31, Bp32 or Bp33

c 85 b c

185

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 B

Common side view

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

5/192

References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186

Schemes :
page 5/193

4
125
50
25
1065

455
550
130
195
130
173
20
60
11

Schemes

TeSys contactors

TeSys LC1B contactors

TeSys LC1B c
ontactors
A1
A2

A1

A1
A1
A2

A2

A2

A1
A2

A1
A1

A1
A2

LC1Bp34p40

A1

LC1Bp34p13

A2

LC1Bp34p31

A1

LC1Bp34p22

A2

A2

LC1Bp33p40

A1

LC1Bp33p13

A2

LC1Bp33p31

A1

LC1Bp33p22

A2

A2

LC1Bp32p40

A1

LC1Bp32p13

A2

LC1Bp32p31

A1

LC1Bp32p22

A2

A1

LC1Bp31p40

A2

LC1Bp31p13

A1

LC1Bp31p31

A2

LC1Bp31p22

1
2
3
4

a.c. control circuit

S1

S3

KM

KM

2-wire
control

KM

S2
3-wire
control

6
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.

d.c. control circuit

S1

S3

7
S1

S3
KA

KM

KM

2-wire
control

S2

KM

3-wire 
control

KM

KM

KM

2-wire
control

S2

3-wire
control

KA

Nota : It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor.
If not, an intermediate KA relay must be fitted and wired as shown.

Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.

10
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217

References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186

Dimensions :
page 5/192

5/193

Selection

TeSys contactors

For utilisation category AC-3

Operational current and power conforming to IEC (q y 60 C)

Contactor size

Maximum operational current

in AC-3
Rated operational power P 
(standard motor power ratings)

2
3

y 440 V

LC1/
LP1
K06
6

LC1/
LP1
K09
9

LC1
K12

LC1
K16

LC1
D09

LC1
D12

LC1
D18

LC1
D25

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A

12

16

12

18

25

32

38

40

220/240 V

kW

1.5

2.2

2.2

5.5

7.5

11

380/400 V

kW

2.2

5.5

7.5

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

18.5

415 V

kW

2.2

5.5

7.5

5.5

11

15

18.5

22

440 V

kW

5.5

7.5

5.5

11

15

18.5

22

500 V

kW

5.5

5.5

7.5

10

15

18.5

18.5

22

660/690 V

kW

5.5

7.5

10

15

18.5

18.5

30

1000 V

kW

LC1
D12
1200

LC1
D18
1200

LC1
D25
1200

LC1
D32
1000

LC1
D38
1000

LC1
D40A
1000

Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1)

On-load factor

y 85%

y 25%

5
6
7

Operational
power
P

LC1
D09
1200

0.5 P

3000

3000

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

1800

1800

1800

1800

1200

1200

1200

Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA

Contactor size

Maximum operational current

in AC-3
Rated operational power P 
(standard motor power ratings 
60 Hz)

(q y 60 C)

y 440 V

LC1/
LP1
K06
6

LC1/
LP1
K09
9

LC1/
LP1
K12
12

LC1
D09

LC1
D12

LC1
D18

LC1
D25

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A

12

18

25

32

40

200/208 V

HP

1.5

7.5

10

10

230/240 V

HP

1.5

7.5

10

10

460/480 V

HP

7.5

7.5

10

15

20

30

575/600 V

HP

10

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 60 C).

8
9
10

5/194

LC1 LC1
D50A D65A







LC1
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F265

LC1
F330

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

50

65

80

95

115

150

185

225

265

330

400

500

630

780

800

750

1000

1500

1800

15

18,5

22

25

30

40

55

63

75

100

110

147

200

220

250

220

280

425

500

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

335

400

450

400

500

750

900

25

37

45

45

59

80

100

110

140

180

220

280

375

425

450

425

530

800

900

30

37

45

45

59

80

100

110

140

200

250

295

400

425

450

450

560

800

900

30

37

55

55

75

90

110

129

160

200

257

355

400

450

450

500

600

750

900

33

37

45

45

80

100

110

129

160

220

280

335

450

475

475

560

670

750

900

45

45

65

75

100

100

147

160

185

335

450

450

450

530

530

670

750

LC1 LC1
D50A D65A
1000 1000

LC1
D80
750

LC1
D95
750

LC1
D115
750

LC1
D150
750

LC1
F185
750

LC1
F225
750

LC1
F265
750

LC1
F330
750

LC1
F400
500

LC1
F500
500

LC1
F630
500

LC1
F780
500

LC1
F800
500

LC1
BL
120

LC1
BM
120

LC1
BP
120

LC1
BR
120

2500

2500

2000

2000

2000

1200

2000

2000

2000

2000

1200

1200

1200

1200

600

120

120

120

120

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

600

600

120

120

120

120

LC1
D80

LC1
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F265

LC1
F330

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1 LC1
D50A D65A




LC1
D80

50

65

80

95

115

150

185

225

265

330

400

500

630

780

800

15

20

30

30

30

40

50

60

60

75

100

150

250

350

15

20

30

30

40

50

60

75

75

100

125

200

300

450

400

40

40

60

60

75

100

125

150

150

200

250

400

600

900

900

40

50

60

60

100

125

150

150

200

250

300

500

800

900

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/195

Selection (continued)

For utilisation category AC-3

LC1 D150

LC1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115

LC1 D65A

LC1 D50A

LC1 D40A

LC1 D32
LC1 D38

LC1 D18
6

LC1 D25

LC1 K16

LC1, LP1, LP4 K12

LC1 D12

6
4

2
1,5
1
0,8

30
55

75

kW

75

45
55

18,5

95 115
150
200
Current broken in A

22
25

37

37
45

30

15

65 80

30

22

22

15

18,5

15

18,5

11

7,5

5,5
11
11

7,5

5,5

7,5

2,2
4

1,5

50
25 30 37
32
40

16 20
18

5,5

440 V

7 8 9 10 12

1,5

400 V

0,75

230 V

1,5

0,55

2,2

2,2

0,75

Millions of operating cycles

10
8

0,6
0,5

LC1-D09

LC1, LP1, LP4 K09

2
3

TeSys contactors

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06

kW

kW

Operational power in kW-50 Hz.

Example:
Asynchronous motor with P=5.5kW-Ue=400 V-Ie=11 A-Ic=Ie=11 A
or asynchronous motor with P=5.5kW-Ue=415V-Ie=11 A-Ic=Ie=11 A
3 million operating cycles required. 
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1D18.

8
9

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 D150

LC1 D95
LC1 D115

LC1 D65A
LC1 D80

LC1 D50A

LC1 D40A

LC1 D32,
LC1 D38

LC1 D25

LC1 D18

10
8

LC1 D12

LC1 D09

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.

6
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6

7 8 10
6,6
9 11

15
17

20
22

50 60
33 40
35 42 48

200
80 90 100
Current broken in A

(1) For Ue = 1000 V, use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V.

10

5/196

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For utilisation category AC-3

LC1 BR

LC1 BP

LC1 BL, BM

LC1 F800
LC1 F780

LC1 F630

LC1 F500

LC1 F400

LC1 F330

LC1 F265

LC1 F225

LC1 F185

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.

Millions of operating cycles

10
8

6
4

2
1,5

(1)

1
0,8

0,6
30

40

50

60

80

100

200

400

600

800

500

kW

400

335

250

200
220

147

1000
2000
Current broken in A

285

110
200

160

75

200

90

132

90

110
132

55

40
45
75

55

75

30

25
45
55

22
45

37

37

18,5

15
30

30

22

22

18,5

11

7,5
15
18,5

440 V

11

380 V
400 V

15

11

220 V
230 V

5,5

90

900

20

750

0,4

kW

kW

Operational power in kW-50 Hz.

Example:

(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.

Asynchronous motor with P=132kW-Ue=380V-Ie=245A-Ic=Ie=245A

or asynchronous motor with P=132kW-Ue=415V-Ie=240A-Ic=Ie=240A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F330.

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V)

LC1 BR

LC1 BP

LC1 BL, BM

LC1 F780
LC1 F800

LC1 F630

LC1 F500

LC1 F400

LC1 F330

LC1 F265

LC1 F185
LC1 F225

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.

Millions of operating cycles

10
8
6
4

2
1,5

(1)

1
0,8

600

800 1000

2000

Current broken in A

900

485
750

400
305 355

670

170 200
220

560

80 90 100 118
129

475

60

355

50

220

40

160

30

129

660 V
690 V

20

110

0,4

335

0,6

kW

Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F330.

10

(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.

5/197

TeSys contactors

Selection

For utilisation category AC-1

Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)

Contactor size
Maximum operating rate 
in operating cycles/hour

3
4
5

LC1/
LP1
K12

LC1
D09

LC1
DT20

LC1
D12
DT25

LC1
D18
DT32

LC1
D25
DT40

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A
DT60A

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Cable c.s.a.

mm2

10

10

35

Bar c.s.a.

mm

Operational current in AC-1 in A,

according to the 
ambient temperature 
conforming to IEC 60947-1

y 40 C

20

20

25

20

25

32

40

50

50

60

y 60 C

20

20

25

20

25

32

40

50

50

60

y 70 C

A (at UC)

(1)

(1)

17

(1)

17

22

28

35

35

42

Maximum operational 
power y 60 C

220/230 V

kW

11

14

18

18

21

240 V

kW

12

15

19

19

23

380/400 V

kW

14

14

15

14

15

20

25

31

31

37

415 V

kW

14

14

17

14

17

21

27

34

34

41

440 V

kW

15

15

18

15

18

23

29

36

36

43

500 V

kW

17

17

20

17

20

23

33

41

41

49

660/690 V

kW

22

22

27

22

27

34

43

54

54

65

1000 V

kW

Connection
conforming to IEC 60947-1

LC1/
LP1
K09

(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles

Apply the following coefficients to the currents or power values given above; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced current
distribution between the poles:
b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6
b 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25
b 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8

7
8

LC1 D115
LC1 D150

LC1 D95

LC1, LP1 D80

LC1 D50A
LC1 D65A

LC1 D40A

LC1 D32, LC1 D38

LC1 D25

LC1 D18

LC1 D12

10
8

LC1 D09

Millions of operating cycles

LC1, LP1, LP4 K12

LC1, LP1, LP4 K09

Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-1 (Ue y440 V)

6
4

2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2

9
10

0,1

10

20

25

32 40

50 60

80 100

125

200 250

400

Current broken in A

Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95).

The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
Example:
b Ue=220 V - Ie=50 Aq y40 C - Ic

Ie

50 A.
b 2 million operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1D50.

5/198

199

LC1
D50A

LC1
LC1/
D65A LP1
DT80A D80

LC1
D95

LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1

D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
LC1
LC1
F1700 F2100 BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

200

200

120

120

120

120

35

35

50

50

120

120

150

185

185

240

2
2
2
30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5

2
2
100 x 5 60 x 5

3
4
100 x 5 100 5

2
2
2
2
50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10

80

80

125

125

250

250

275

315

350

400

500

700

1000

1600

1000

1700

2100
(2)

800

1250 2000

2750

80

80

125

125

200

200

275

280

300

360

430

580

850

1350

850

1450

1750

700

1100 1750

2400

56

56

80

80

160

160

180

200

250

290

340

500

700

1100

700

600

900

1500

2000

29

29

45

45

80

80

90

100

120

145

170

240

350

550

350

570

700

300

425

700

1000

31

31

49

49

83

83

100

110

125

160

180

255

370

570

370

600

780

330

450

800

1100

50

50

78

78

135

135

165

175

210

250

300

430

600

950

600

1000

1200

500

800

1200

1600

54

54

85

85

140

140

170

185

220

260

310

445

630

1000

630

1050

1300

525

825

1250

1700

58

58

90

90

150

150

180

200

230

290

330

470

670

1050

670

1100

1350

550

850

1400

2000

65

65

102

102

170

170

200

220

270

320

380

660

750

1200

750

1250

1550

600

900

1500

2100

80

80

135

135

235

235

280

300

370

400

530

740

1000

1650

1000

1700

2100

800

1100 1900

2700

120

120

345

345

410

450

540

640

760

950

1500

2400

1500

2500

3100

1100 1700 3000

4200

(2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100.

1
2
3
4

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 BR

6
LC1 BP

LC1 BL, BM

LC1 F780

LC1 F630
LC1 F800

LC1 F500

LC1 F330
LC1 F400

LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265

10
8
6

1
0,8

0,6

(3)

0,4

0,2

0,1

20

40

50

60

80

100

200

600
800 1000
300 350
275 315 400 500
700

1600 2000

4000

Current broken in A

Example:
b Ue=220 V - Ie=500 A-qy40 C-Ic=Ie=500 A.
b 2 million operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F780.

10

(3) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1F225.

5/199

Selection

TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4

Maximum breaking current

Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current.

Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current.
Contactor size
In category AC-4 (le max)

Ue y 440 V
le max broken = 
6 x l motor
440 V < Ue y 690V
le max broken = 
6 x l motor

LC1/
LP1
K09
54

LC1/
LP1
K12
54

LC1
D09

LC1
D12

LC1
D18

LC1
D25

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A

LC1/
LP1
K06
36

54

72

108

150

192

192

240

26

40

40

40

50

70

90

105

105

150

Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, q y 60 C (2)

3
4

From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 %

20

30

30

30

40

45

75

80

80

110

From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 %

18

27

27

27

36

40

67

70

70

96

From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 %

16

24

24

24

30

35

56

60

60

80

From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 %

13

19

19

19

24

30

45

50

50

62

From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 %

10

16

16

16

21

25

40

45

45

53

(1) Do not exceed the maximum number of operating cycles..

(2) For temperatures higher than 60 C, use a maximum operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from the tables.

Counter current braking (plugging)

The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current.
The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor.

As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected using the criteria for
categories AC-2 and AC-4.

Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200 000 operating cycles

Operational voltage

6
7

220/230 V

kW

LCp/
LPp
K06
0.75

LCp/
LPp
K09
1.1

LCp
LPp
K12
1.1

LCp
D09

LCp
D12

LCp
D18

LCp
D25

LCp
D32

LCp
D38

LCp
D40A

1.5

1.5

2.2

380/400 V

kW

1.5

2.2

2.2

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

7.5

415 V

kW

1.5

2.2

2.2

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

7.5

440 V

kW

1.5

2.2

2.2

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

7.5

11

500 V

kW

2.2

5.5

7.5

11

660/690 V

kW

5.5

7.5

10

11

11

15

8
9
10

5/200




1
LC1 LC1
D50A D65A

LC1
D80

LC1
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F26

LC1
F330

LC1
F40

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR




300

390

480

570

630

830

1020

1230

1470

1800

2220

2760

3360

4260

3690

4320

5000

7500

9000




170

210

250

250

540

640

708

810

1020

1410

1830

2130

2760

2910

2910

4000

4800

5400

6600

140

160

200

200

280

310

380

420

560

670

780

1100

1400

1600

1600

2250

3000

4500

5400

120

148

170

170

250

280

350

400

500

600

700

950

1250

1400

1400

2000

2400

3750

5000

100

132

145

145

215

240

300

330

400

500

600

750

950

1100

1100

1500

2000

3000

3600

80

110

120

120

150

170

240

270

320

390

450

600

720

820

820

1000

1500

2000

2500

70

90

100

100

125

145

170

190

230

290

350

500

660

710

710

750

1000

1500

1800

2
3
4











5
LCp LCp
D50A D65A

LCp
D80

LCp
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F265

LC1
F330

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

5.5

7.5

7.5

11

18.5

22

28

33

40

45

55

63

63

90

110

150

200

11

11

15

15

18.5

22

33

40

51

59

75

80

100

110

110

160

160

220

250

11

11

15

15

18.5

22

37

45

55

63

80

90

100

110

110

160

160

250

280

11

15

15

15

18.5

22

37

45

59

63

80

100

110

132

132

160

200

250

315

15

15

22

22

30

37

45

55

63

75

90

110

132

150

150

180

200

250

355

15

18.5

25

25

30

45

63

75

90

110

129

140

160

185

185

200

250

315

450

6
7
8
9
10

5/201

Selection (continued)

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 D150

0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03

(1)

0,02

0,01

LC1 D65A
LC1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115

LC1 D32 et D38

LC1 D40A
LC1 D50A

LC1 D25

1
0,8

4
5

For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4

LC1 D18

LC1 D12

LC1 D09

LC1, LP1,
LP4 K09,K12

2
3

TeSys contactors

Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06

8 9 10

20

30 36 40

50 54

72 80

108

150 192 240 300

390 480 570 630

828 1000

Current broken in A

Example:
b Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A
b or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A.
b 200 000 operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D25.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1 K12 contactors.

Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)

LC1 D150

LC1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115

LC1 D65A

LC1 D25

LC1 D32, D38

LC1 D40A
LC1 D50A

LC1 D18

LC1 D09

LC1 D12

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).

8
9

Millions of operating cycles

1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,07
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,02

10

0,01

8 9 10

20

30

40

50

70

90 105 121 150

210 250 300

400 500 540 640 800 1000

Current broken in A

5/202

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 BR

LC1 BP

LC1 BL, BM

LC1 F630
LC1 F800
LC1 F780

LC1 F500

LC1 F400

LC1 F330

LC1 F265

LC1 F225

1
0,8

LC1 F185

Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).

0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04

0,02

0,01
100

200

400

600

800

1020
1470
2220
3360 4260 5000
8000
20 000
6000
10 000
1230
1800
2760
3690
Current broken in A

Example:
b Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue

= 380 V - Ie

= 170

A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020

A
or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A.
b 60 000 operating cycles required.
b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F265.

Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 BR

LC1 BP

LC1 BL, BM

LC1 F780, F800

LC1 F630

LC1 F400
LC1 F500

LC1 F330

LC1 F265

LC1 F225

1
0,8

LC1 F185

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).

0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04

0,02

0,01
100

200

400

600

800 1000

2000

4000

8000 10 000

20 000

10

Current broken in A

5/203

Selection

TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1,
resistive loads: time constant

1
2

Rated
operational
voltage
Ue
V

24

48/75
1 pole

125

250

300
460

2 poles

900
1200
1500

L
__
R

y 1 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C

No. of
Contactor rating (1)
poles
LC1
LC1
LC1
connec- D09
DT20 D12
ted in
DT25
series

LC1
D18
DT32

LC1
D25
DT40

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A

LC1
DT60A

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
4
2
3
4

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
4
25
25
25
1
4
25
25
4
25

32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
7
32
32
32
1
7
32
32
7
32

40
40
40

40
40
40

7
40
40

1
7
40

40
40
40

40
40
40

7
40
40

1
7
40

50
50
50

50
50
50

7
50
50

1
7
50

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
7
50
50
50
1
7
50
50

50

20
20
20

20
20
20

4
20
20

1
4
20

20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4
20
20
20
1
4
20
20
4
20

20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4
20
20
20
1
4
20
20
4
20

Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2

to DC-5, inductive loads: time constant

3 poles

7
8

Rated
operational
voltage
Ue
V
24

48/75

125

250
4 poles

300
460
900
1200
1500

10

L
__
R

y 15 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C

No. of
C
ontactor rating (1)
poles
LC1
LC1
LC1
connec- D09
DT20 D12
ted in
DT25
series

LC1
D18
DT32

LC1
D25
DT40

LC1
D32

LC1
D38

LC1
D40A

LC1
DT60A

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
4
2
3
4

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
2
25
25
25
0,5
2
8
25
2
8

32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
3
32
32
32
0,5
3
32
32
3
32

40
40
40

40
40
40

3
40
40

0,5
3
40

40
40
40

40
40
40

3
40
40

0,5
3
40

50
50
50

50
50
50

4
50
50

1
4
50

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
4
50
50
50
1
4
50
50
3
50

20
20
20

20
20
20

2
20
20

0,5
2
8

20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
2
20
20
20
0,5
2
8
20
2
8

20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
2
20
20
20
0,5
2
8
20
2
8

(1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1 K: please consult your
Regional Sales Office.

5/204

LC1
LC1
LC1
LC1
D50A D65A DT80A D80

LC1
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F265

LC1
F330

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

65
65
65

65
65
65

7
65
65

1
7
65

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
12
100
100
100
2
12
100
100
12
100

100
100
100

100
100
100

12
100
100

2
12
100

12

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
12
200
200
200
10
200
200
200
200
200

200

200
200
200

200
200
200

12
200
200

10
200
200

200

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
210
210
240
240

190
240
240
190
240

190

260
260
260
260
260
260
260
260
230
230
260
260

200
260
260
200
260

200

300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
270
270
300
300

250
300
300
250
300

250

360
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
320
320
360
360

280
360
360
280
360

280

430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
380
380
430
430

350
430
430
350
430

350

580
580
580
580
580
580
580
580
520
520
580
580

450
580
580
450
580

450

850
850
850
850
850
850
850
850
760
760
850
850

700
850
850
700
850

700

1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1180
1180
1300
1300

1000
1300
1300
1000
1000

1000

850
850
850
850
850
850
850
850
760
760
850
850

700
850
850
700
850

700

700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700

1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100

1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750

2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400

LC1
LC1
LC1
LC1
D50A D65A DT80A D80

LC1
D95

LC1
D115

LC1
D150

LC1
F185

LC1
F225

LC1
F265

LC1
F330

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
F800

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

65
65
65

65
65
65

4
65
65

1
4
65

100
100
100

100
100
100

5
100
100

1
5
100

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
10
200
200
200
3
200
200
200
200
200

200

200
200
200

200
200
200

10
200
200

3
200
200

200

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240

160
240
240

140
160
240
140
240

140

260
260
260
260
260
260
260
260

180
240
240

160
180
260
160
260

160

300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300

250
280
280

220
250
300
220
300

220

360
360
360
360
360
360
360
360

300
310
310

280
300
360
280
360

280

430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430

350
350
350

310
350
430
310
430

310

580
580
580
580
580
580
580
580

500
550
550

480
500
580
480
580

480

850
850
850
850
850
850
850
850

700
850
850

680
700
850
680
850

680

1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300
1300

1000
1000
1000

900
1000
1300
900
1300

800

850
850
850
850
850
850
850
850

700
850
850

680
700
850
680
850

680

700
700
700
700
700

700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700
700

1100
1100
1100
1100
1100

1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100

1750
1750
1750
1750
1750

1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750

2400
2400
2400
2400
2400

2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400

65
65
65

65
65
65

7
65
65

1,5
7
65

65
65
65

65
65
65

4
65
65

1.5
4
65

65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
7
65
65
65
1,5
7
65
65
7
65

65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
4
65
65
65
1.5
4
65
65
3
65

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
5
100
100
100
1
5
100
100
5
100

5/205

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Selection

TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

1
2

The criteria for contactor selection are:

b the rated operational current Ie,
b the rated operational voltage Ue,
b the utilisation category and the time constant L/R,
b the required electrical durability.

Maximum operating rate (operating cycles)

The following limits must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie.

Millions of operating cycles

LC1 D115, D150

LC1, LP1 D80

LC1 D95

LC1 D65A, DT80A

LC1 D50A

LC1 D40A, DT60A

LC1 D32,
LC1 D38

LC1 D25

LC1 D18

LC1 D09

LC1 D12

Electrical durability

10
8
6
4
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4

0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02

0,01
0,2

7
8

0,3

0,4 0,5 0,6

0,8
1
0,7 0,9

7
8

20

14
10

16

24

40 50 60 70 90 100
30
80
32 36
Power broken per pole in kW

Example
Series wound motor - P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
b Utilisation category = DC-5.
b Select contactor LC1 D09 with 3 poles in series.
b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW.
b The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW.
b The electrical durability read from the curve is u 3 millions of operating cycles.
Use of poles in parallel

Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel.

With N poles connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical
durability read from the curves x N x 0.7.
Note: 1

When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents
indicated on pages 5/204 and 5/205 must not be exceeded.
Note: 2

Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in
each pole.

10

5/206

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

Determining the electrical durability

The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows: 
P broken = U broken x l broken.
The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories.

Power broken

0.1 Ue

Ie

0.1 Ue x Ie

DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching

Ue

2.5 Ie

Ue x 2.5 Ie

DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running

0.3 Ue

Ie

0.3 Ue x Ie

DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching

Ue

2.5 Ie

Ue x 2.5 Ie

Millions of operating cycles

2
3
4

LC1 BR

DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running

LC1 BP

Ue x Ie

LC1 BL, BM

Ie

LC1 F780

Ue

LC1 F630, F800

DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads

LC1 F400
LC1 F500

P broken

LC1 F330

I broken

LC1 F185, F225

U broken

LC1 F265

Utilisation categories

10
8
6
4

2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02

0,01
2

5 6 7

20
10

30

40 50 60 70 90
100

200

4000
300 400 600 800 1000
2000 3000
500 700 900
5000
Power broken per pole in kW

Example
Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
Utilisation category = DC-5.
b Select contactor LC1 F265 with 2 poles in series.
b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW.
b The power broken per pole is 50 kW.
b The electrical durability read from the curve is 500 000 operating cycles.

8
9
10

5/207

Selection

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

General
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics:
b continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months,
b a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off
simultaneously,
b a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses,
or an unventilated control panel location.
This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty.

Protection

The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant.

In fact:
b it is unlikely that the number of luminaires of an existing circuit will be modified,
b this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration.
It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
This can be provided by:
b gG type fuses, or
b modular circuit-breakers.

Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.

Distribution system
Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V
The tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 are based on a single-phase 220/240V circuit and can
therefore be applied directly in this case.

3-phase circuit, 380/415 V (with neutral)

The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the
220/240 V single-phase tables for a number of lamps equal to N
---- lamps.
3
3-phase circuit, 220/240 V
The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected
N lamps.
from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to -------

Contactor selection tables

For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 give the maximum number of
lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of
contactor.
They are based on:
b a 220/240 V single-phase circuit,
b an ambient temperature of 55 C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see
General paragraph).
b an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days operation per year).
They take into account:
b the total current drawn (including ballast),
b transient phenomena which occur at switch-on,
b the starting currents and their duration,
b the circulation of any harmonics which may be present.

6
7

Lamps with compensating capacitor C (F) connected in parallel

Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switch-on.
To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making characteristics
of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following:
Switching contactor LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
rating
K09 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40A D50A D65A D80
Maximum unit value C












(F) of parallel
7
3
18 18 25 60 96 96 120 120 240 240
connected
compensating capacitor
Switching contactor LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
rating
D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
Maximum unit value C











(F) of parallel
240 300 360 800 1200 1700 2500 4000 6000 9000 10800
connected
compensating capacitor
This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor.
(1) For an ambient temperature of 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2.

8
9

10

5/208

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

Usual values

The tables show the following values:

b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.

These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by
1.2).

Incandescent and halogen lamps

P (W)
60
IB (A)
0.27
Max. no. 35
of lamps 59
according
77
to P (W)
92
129
163
207
296
430
466
710
770
888
1006
1274
1718
2328
2776

75
0.34
28
47
61
73
103
129
164
235
340
370
564
610
704
800
1010
1364
1850
2204

100
0.45
21
35
46
55
77
97
124
177
256
280
426
462
532
604
764
1030
1396
1666

150
0.68
14
23
30
36
51
64
82
117
170
184
282
304
352
400
504
682
924
1102

200
0.91
10
17
23
27
38
48
62
88
126
138
210
228
262
298
378
508
690
824

300
1.40
6
11
15
18
25
31
40
57
82
90
136
148
170
194
244
330
448
534

500
2.30
4
7
9
11
15
19
24
34
50
54
82
90
104
118
148
200
272
326

750
3.40
2
4
6
7
10
13
16
23
34
36
56
60
70
80
100
136
184
220

1000
4.60
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
17
24
26
40
44
52
58
74
100
136
162

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115
D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630
F800

1000
4.50
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
17
26
28
42
46
52
60
76
102
140
166

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115
D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630
F800

Mixed lighting lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

100
0.45
21
35
46
55
77
97
124
177
256
280
426
462
532
604
764
1030
1398
1666

160
0.72
13
22
29
36
48
61
77
111
160
174
266
288
332
378
478
644
874
1040

250
1.10
8
14
18
23
30
38
49
70
104
114
174
188
218
246
312
422
572
680

500
2.30
4
7
9
11
15
19
24
34
50
54
82
90
104
118
150
202
272
326

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/209

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

Usual values
The tables show the following values:
b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.

These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).

Fluorescent lamps with starter. Single fitting

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

3
4
5

Non corrected
20
40
0.39
0.45

24
21
41
35
53
46
66
57
89
77
112
97
143
124
205
177
410
354
492
426
532
462
614
532
696
604
882
764
1190
1030
1612
1398

65
0.70

13
22
30
37
50
62
80
114
228
274
296
342
388
490
662
698

80
0.80

12
20
26
32
43
55
70
100
200
240
260
300
340
430
580
786

With parallel correction

110
20
40
65
1.2
0.17
0.26
0.42

5
5
7
8
56
36
22
13
94
61
38
17
123
80
50
21
152
100
61
29
205
134
83
36
258
169
104
46
329
215
133
66
470
367
190
132
940
614
380
160
1128
738
456
172
1224
800
490
200
1412
922
570
226
1600
1046
648
286
2024
1322
818
386
2728
1724
1104
524
3700
2418
1498

80
0.52
7
18
30
40
50
67
84
107
153
306
368
400
462
522
662
892
1210

With series correction

2x20 2x40
2x65
2x0.13 2x0.24 2x0.39
2x36
2x20
2x12
2x60
2x32
2x20
2x80
2x42
2x26
2x100 2x54
2x32
2x134 2x72
2x44
2x168 2x90
2x56
2x214 2x116 2x70
2x306 2x166 2x102
2x614 2x332 2x204
2x738 2x400 2x246
2x800 2x432 2x266
2x922 2x500 2x308
2x1046 2x566 2x348
2x1322 2x716 2x440
2x1784 2x966 2x594
2x2418 2x1310 2x806

2x110
2x0.65
2x7
2x12
2x16
2x20
2x26
2x32
2x42
2x60
2x122
2x148
2x160
2x184
2x208
2x264
2x356
2x484

110
0.72
16

22
29
36
48
61
77
111
222
266
288
332
378
478
644
874

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

Fluorescent lamps with starter. Twin fitting

P (W)
IB (A)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

6
7
8
9
10

5/210

Non corrected
2x20
2x40
2x0.22 2x0.41
2x21
2x11
2x36
2x18
2x46
2x24
2x58
2x30
2x78
2x42
2x100 2x52
2x126 2x68
2x180 2x96
2x360 2x194
2x436 2x234
2x472 2x254
2x544 2x292
2x618 2x332
2x782 2x420
2x1054 2x566
2x1430 2x766

2x65
2x0.67
2x7
2x10
2x14
2x18
2x26
2x32
2x40
2x58
2x118
2x142
2x154
2x178
2x202
2x256
2x346
2x468

2x80
2x0.82
2x5
2x8
2x12
2x14
2x20
2x26
2x34
2x48
2x96
2x116
2x126
2x146
2x166
2x210
2x282
2x384

2x110
2x1.1
2x4
2x6
2x8
2x10
2x14
2x18
2x24
2x36
2x72
2x86
2x94
2x108
2x124
2x156
2x210
2x286

2x80
2x0.48
2x10
2x16
2x20
2x26
2x36
2x44
2x58
2x82
2x166
2x200
2x216
2x250
2x282
2x358
2x482
2x654

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

Usual values
The tables show the following values:
b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.

These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).

Fluorescent lamps without starter. Single fitting

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

Non corrected
20
40
0.43
0.55

22
17
37
29
48
38
60
47
97
63
102
80
130
101
186
145
372
290
446
348
484
378
558
436
632
494
800
624
1078
844
1462
1144

65
0.80

12
20
26
32
43
55
70
100
200
240
260
300
340
430
580
786

80
0.95

10
16
22
27
36
46
58
84
168
202
218
252
286
362
488
662

110
1.4

6
11
15
18
25
31
40
57
114
136
148
170
194
246
330
448

With parallel correction

20
40
65
0.19
0.29
0.46
5
5
7
50
33
20
84
55
34
110
72
45
136
89
56
184
101
76
231
151
95
294
193
121
421
275
173
842
550
346
1010
662
416
1094
716
452
1262
828
522
1432
938
590
1810
1186
748
2442
1600
1008
3310
2168
1366

80
0.57
7
16
28
36
45
61
77
98
140
280
336
364
420
476
604
814
1104

110
0.79
16

20
26
32
44
55
70
101
202
242
262
304
344
434
586
796

2
LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

2x65
2x0.76
2x6
2x10
2x12
2x16
2x22
2x28
2x36
2x52
2x104
2x126
2x136
2x158
2x178
2x226
2x304
2x414

2x80
2x0.93
2x5
2x8
2x10
2x12
2x18
2x22
2x30
2x42
2x86
2x102
2x112
2x128
2x146
2x184
2x248
2x338

2x110
2x1.3
2x3
2x6
2x8
2x10
2x12
2x16
2x20
2x30
2x60
2x74
2x80
2x92
2x104
2x132
2x178
2x242

With series correction

2x20 2x40
2x65
2x0.14 2x0.26 2x0.43
2x34
2x18
2x11
2x56
2x30
2x18
2x74
2x40
2x24
2x92
2x50
2x30
2x124 2x66
2x40
2x156 2x84
2x50
2x200 2x106 2x64
2x234 2x152 2x92
2x570 2x306 2x186
2x686 2x368 2x222
2x742 2x400 2x242
2x856 2x462 2x278
2x970 2x522 2x316
2x1228 2x662 2x400
2x1656 2x892 2x540
2x2246 2x1210 2x730

4
5

Fluorescent lamps without starter. Twin fitting

Non corrected
P (W) 2x20
2x40
IB (A) 2x0.25 2x0.47
Max. no. 2x19
2x10
of lamps 2x32
2x16
according
2x42
2x22
to P (W)
2x52
2x26
2x70
2x36
2x88
2x46
2x112 2x58
2x160 2x84
2x320 2x170
2x384 2x204
2x416 2x220
2x480 2x254
2x544 2x288
2x688 2x366
2x928 2x494
2x1258 2x668

2x80
2x0.53
2x9
2x14
2x18
2x24
2x32
2x40
2x52
2x74
2x150
2x180
2x196
2x226
2x256
2x324
2x438
2x592

2x110
2x0.72
2x6
2x10
2x14
2x18
2x24
2x30
2x38
2x54
2x110
2x132
2x144
2x166
2x188
2x238
2x322
2x436

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

6
7
8
9
10

5/211

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

Usual values
The tables show the following values:
b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.

These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

3
4
5

Non corrected
35
55
90
1.2
1.6
2.4

6
5
3
10
7
5
12
9
6
15
11
7
21
16
10
27
20
13
35
26
17
50
37
25
100 75
50
140 104 70
152 114 76
174 130 88
198 148 98
250 188 124
338 254 168
496 372 248

135
3.1

2
3
4
6
8
10
13
19
38
54
58
68
76
96
130
192

150
3.2

2
3
4
5
8
10
13
18
36
52
56
66
74
94
126
186

180
3.3

2
3
4
5
7
10
12
18
36
50
54
64
72
90
122
180

200
3.4

2
3
4
5
7
9
12
17
34
48
54
62
70
88
118
174

With parallel correction

35
55
90
135
0.3 0.4
0.6
0.9
17
17
25
36

40
30

50
37
25

63
47
31
21
86
65
43
28
110 82
55
36
140 105 70
46
200 150 100 66
400 300 200 132
560 420 280 186
606 454 302 202
700 524 350 232
792 594 396 264
1002 752 502 334
1352 1014 676 450
1982 1488 992 660

150
1
36

19
26
33
42
60
120
168
182
210
238
300
406
594

With parallel correction

150
250
400
0.84
1.4
2.2
20
32
48

17

22
13
8
30
18
11
39
23
15
50
30
19
71
42
27
142
84
54
200
120
76
216
130
82
250
150
94
282
170
108
358
214
136
482
290
184
708
424
270

700
3.9
96

6
8
10
15
30
42
46
54
60
76
104
152

180
1.2
36

15
21
27
35
50
100
140
152
174
198
250
338
496

200
1.3
36

14
20
25
32
46
92
128
140
162
182
252
312
458

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

High pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

6
7
8
9
10

5/212

Non corrected
150
250
1.9
3.2

4
2
6
3
7
4
10
5
13
8
17
10
22
13
31
18
62
36
88
52
96
56
110
66
124
74
158
94
214
126
312
186

400
5

1
2
3
3
5
6
8
12
24
34
36
42
48
60
80
118

700
8.8

1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
18
20
24
26
34
46
68

1000
12.4

1
1
2
2
3
4
8
14
16
18
20
24
32
48

1000
5.5
120

6
7
10
20
30
32
38
42
54
74
108

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For lighting circuits

Usual values
The tables show the following values:
b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
b C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.

These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).

High pressure mercury vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

Non corrected
50
80
125
0.54 0.81 1.20

14
9
6
22
14
9
27
18
12
35
23
15
48
32
21
61
40
27
77
51
34
111
74
49
222 148 100
310 206 140
336 224 152
388 258 174
440 294 198
556 372 250
752 500 338
1102 734 496

250
2.30

3
5
6
8
11
14
17
26
52
72
78
90
102
130
176
258

400
4.10

1
2
3
4
6
8
10
14
28
40
44
50
58
72
98
144

700
6.80

1
2
2
3
4
6
8
16
24
26
30
34
44
60
88

1000
9.90

1
1
1
2
3
4
6
12
17
18
20
24
30
40
60

With parallel correction

50
80
125 250
0.3 0.45 0.67 1.3
10
10
10
18

40
26
17
9
50
33
22
11
63
42
28
14
86
57
38
20
110 73
49
25
140 93
62
32
200 133 89
46
400 266 178 92
560 372 250 128
606 404 272 140
700 466 312 162
792 528 354 182
1002 668 448 232
1352 902 606 312
1982 1322 888 458

400
2.3
25

6
8
11
14
18
26
52
72
78
90
102
130
176
258

700
3.8
40

5
6
8
11
15
30
44
48
54
62
78
106
156

1000
5.5
60

3
4
6
7
10
20
30
32
38
42
54
74
108

2
LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)
Max. no.
of lamps
according
to P (W)

1000
9.5

1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
18
20
22
24
32
42
62

2000
20

1
1
2
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
20
30

With parallel correction

250
400
1000
1.4
2
5.3
32
32
64

13
9

18
13
4
23
16
6
30
21
7
42
30
11
84
60
22
120
84
32
130
90
34
150
104
40
170
118
44
214
150
56
290
202
76
424
298
112

4
5

Metal iodine vapour lamps

Non corrected
250
400
2.5
3.6

3
2
4
3
6
4
7
5
10
7
13
9
16
11
24
16
48
32
66
46
72
50
84
58
94
66
120
84
162
112
238
164

2000
11.2
140

5
10
14
16
18
20
26
36
52

LC1
K09
D09, D12
D18
D25
D32, D38
D40A
D50A, D65A
D80, D95
D115, D150
F185
F225
F265
F330
F400
F500
F630, F800

6
7
8
9
10

5/213

Selection

TeSys contactors

For heating circuits

Selection
General

A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements
switched by a contactor.
The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally
subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.

Characteristics of heating elements

The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for
the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop
heating circuits, etc.).
The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switchon which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current (In). This initial peak does not
recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled.
The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature.

Protection

The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable.
In fact:
b It is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modified;
b This type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide shortcircuit protection.
This can be provided by:
b gG type fuses, or
b modular circuit-breakers.
Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.

Switching, control, protection

A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or
3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system.
Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3
types of circuit arrangement are possible:
b Single-phase, 2-pole switching
b Single-phase, 4-pole switching
b 3-phase switching

Component selection according to the power switched

The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55C and for
powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged
overloads up to 1.05 Ue.

Single-phase, 2-pole switching

7
KM1

Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.

9
10

5/214

Maximum power (kW)

220/240 V
380/415 V
3.5
6.5
4.5
8
6
10.5
7
13
10
18
13
22.5
16.5
28.5
24
42
44
76
48
83
52
90
60
104
75
130
86
145
116
200
170
290
270
460
140
242
220
380
350
605
480
830

Contactor rating
660/690 V
11
14
18.5
22.5
30.5
39.5
43.5
73
118
130
145
160
200
230
310
450
715
370
580
925
1270

1000 V

48
68
82.5
157
170
185
210
250
300
400
695
945
490
770
1225
1680

LC1, LP1K09
LC1D12
LC1D18
LC1D25
LC1D32, LC1D38
LC1D40A
LC1
D65A
LC1, LP1D80
LC1D115, LC1D150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F4002
LC1F5002
LC1F6302, LC1F800
LC1F780
LC1BL32
LC1BM32
LC1BP32
LC1BR32

Selection (continued)

TeSys contactors

For heating circuits

Component selection according to the power switched

(continued)
Single-phase, 4-pole switching
U

KM1

Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles

parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting
links. This solution enables the control of power values
approximately equivalent to those controlled by the
same contactor on 3-phase.

Maximum power (kW)

220/240 V
380/415 V
4.5
8
7
13
12
21
26
45.5
38
66
70
121
76
132
80
142
96
166
120
205
137
236
185
320
272
470
425
735
224
387
352
608
560
968
768
1328

Contactor rating
660/690 V
13.5
22.5
36.5
79.5
117.5
190
202
230
253
320
363
490
718
1140
590
930
1478
2025

1000 V

109
132
251
270
295
335
400
480
650
950
1520
785
1230
1960
2685

660/690 V
13.5
22.5
30.5
39.5
52.5
68
86
126
206
220
250
275
345
395
530
780
1235
640
1005
1600
2200

1000 V

78
112.5
135.5
275
295
320
370
432
525
710
1030
1650
850
1350
2150
2950

LC1, LP1K09004
LC1DT25
LC1DT40
LC1DT80A
LC1, LP1D80004
LC1D115004
LC1F1854
LC1F2254
LC1F2654
LC1F3304
LC1F4004
LC1F5004
LC1F6304
LC1F7804
LC1BL34
LC1BM34
LC1BP34
LC1BR34

2
3
4

3-phase switching
U
U

KM1

Circuit controlled by 3 poles of the contactor.

Maximum power (kW)

220/240 V
380/415 V
4.5
8
7
13
10
18
13
22.5
18
31
22.5
38
28.5
49
40.5
70.5
76
131
82
143
90
155
103
179
130
225
149
256
200
346
294
509
463
800
242
419
380
658
606
1047
830
1437
Application example

Contactor rating
LC1, LP1K09
LC1D12
LC1D18
LC1D25
LC1D32, LC1D38
LC1D40A
LC1
D65A
LC1, LP1D80
LC1D115, LC1D150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630, LC1F800
LC1F780
LC1BL33
LC1BM33
LC1BP33
LC1BR33

5
6
7

For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating

load of 12.5 kW.
Select a 3-pole contactor LC1D65A.

9
10

5/215

Selection

TeSys contactors

For switching the primaries 

of 3-phase LV/LV transformers

Operating conditions
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C.

When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its
peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to
quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:
b the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the
core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings, ...)
b the performance of the magnetic laminations used,
b the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the
moment of switch-on.

The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the
various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or onload state of the transformer.

Contactor selection

The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the
tables below.
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.
LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
LP1 LP1 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40A D50A D65A D80 D95 D115 D150
K06 K09
160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100 1250 1400 1550 1650 1800 2000

220 V
240 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V

kVA

2.5

8.5

8.5

14

16

18

19.5

19.5 25

25

kVA

3.5

12.5 15

15

24

27

31

34

34

50

50

kVA

5.5

14

17

17

28

32

36

39

39

55

55

kVA

11

16.5 20

20

32

36

40

45

45

65

65

660 V
690 V
1000 V

kVA

8.5

12

12

14

21.5 26.5 26.5

42

48

53

59

59

80

80

kVA

60

70

80

85

95

100 100

LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL
BM BP
BR
2900 3300 3800 5000 6300 7700 9000 12 000 11 000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000

220 V
240 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
500 V

kVA

40

45

50

65

75

100 120 175

145

230

230

300

380

kVA

75

80

90

120

130

170 200 280

245

400

400

530

660

kVA

80

90

100

130

140

190 220 310

270

450

450

560

700

kVA

95

100

110

140

170

225 260 350

315

480

480

600

750

660 V
690 V
1000 V

kVA

120

130

140

170

200

270 350 400

425

600

600

800

950

kVA

150

170

200

225

250

375 470 650

550

700

700

1000 1200

Contactor rating

Maximum permissible 
current peak at switch-on
Maximum operational power (1)

5
6

Contactor rating
Maximum permissible 
current peak at switch-on
Maximum operational power (1)

7
8

(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

5/216

References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/92 to 5/97

Selection

TeSys contactors

For switching 3-phase 

capacitor banks used for 
power factor correction

Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which
can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies
(1 to 15 kHz).
As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when:
b the mains inductances are high,
b the line transformer ratings are low,
b the transformer short-circuit voltage is high,
b the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and
that of the capacitor to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks).
In accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must
be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank
step being switched.
The rated operational powers given in the tables below take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.

Contactor applications
Operating conditions

Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed
the values indicated opposite.
An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the
peak current, if necessary.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.

Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank

The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to
limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.

1
2
3
4

Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank

Select a special contactor as defined on page 5/102.
If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the
three phases of each step.

Maximum operational power of contactors

Standard contactors

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.

Electrical durability at maxiumum load: 100 000 operating cycles.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz
q y 40 C (1)
q y 55 C (1)
220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V
kvAR
kvAR
kvAR
kvAR
kvAR
kvAR
6
11
15
6
11
15
9
15
20
9
15
20
11
20
25
11
20
25
14
25
30
14
25
30
17
30
37
17
30
37
22
40
50
22
40
50
22
40
50
22
40
50
35
60
75
35
60
75
50
90
125
38
75
80
60
110
135
40
85
90
70
125
160
50
100
100
80
140
190
60
110
110
90
160
225
75
125
125
100
190
275
85
140
165
125
220
300
100
160
200
180
300
400
125
220
300
250
400
600
190
350
500
250
400
600
190
350
500
200
350
500
180
350
500
300
550
650
250
500
600
500
850
950
400
750
750
600
1100
1300
500
1000
1000
(1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 60070.

Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55

References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67

Max.
peak
current
A
560
850
1600
1900
2160
2160
3040
3040
3100
3300
3500
4000
5000
6500
8000
10 000
12 000
14 200
25 000
25 000
25 000
25 000

Contactor
rating

LC1D09, D12
LC1D18
LC1D25
LC1D32, D38
LC1D40
LC1D50
LC1D65
LC1D80, D95
LC1D115
LC1D150
LC1F185
LC1F225
LC1F265
LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630
LC1F800
LC1BL
LC1BM
LC1BP
LC1BR

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/92 to 5/97

5/217

6
7
8
9
10

TeSys contactors

Recommended
wiring scheme,
operation,
curves

For auto-transformer starting

Applications

Auto-transformer starting is suitable for starting all types of squirrel cage motors: with 3, 6 or even 9 terminals according to North American
technology.
Starting is performed at reduced voltage and produces maximum torque at minimum line current.
It allows the starting torque (C = f(U)2) to be adapted to the resistive torque of the driven machine by means of the 2 or 3 intermediate voltage
take-off connections on the auto-transformer (0.65 and 0.8 Un or 0.5, 0.65 and 0.8 Un). In general, only one take-off connection is used.

This type of starting is used for high power and/or high inertia machines.
The motor is never disconnected from its power supply during starting (closed transition) and transient phenomena are eliminated.

5/L3

F2
F3
96
95 96
95 14

6
5

21

5 6

S2

1
F1

Q1/2

Q1/6

13

13

KM1

61

14

KM3

A2

A1 14
A2
KM2

KA1

KM3

A1 62

KA1

T3

13

61
A1 62
A2

A2

KM1

KM2

KM1

A1 52

6 W2

4 V2

2 U2

13

KM3

U3
V3
W3

KM3

14

56
51

T1

KM1

KA1

14

5
W1 6

55 14

3
V1 4

U1 2

KM2

F2

KM3

13 2

Q1

13 22

3 4

S1

1 2

Q1

3/L2

1/L1

Recommended wiring scheme

F3

Operation

Operating curves
Current

The auto-transformer used generally has an air gap (adjusted or not) in order to obtain, during the second phase of starting, a series inductance
whose value is compatible with correct starting.

XIN

Torque

Starting is performed in 3 stages:

b star connection of the auto-transformer is made by KM1, then contactor KM2 closes and the motor starts under reduced voltage;
b the neutral point is opened by KM1; part of the auto-transformer winding is switched into each phase for a short moment, constituting a stator
starting inductance;
b KM3 switches the motor to full mains voltage and causes the auto-transformer to be shunted out of circuit by KM2.

ID 6

2,5

XCN

1,5

1
I2 3

CN 1

2
0,5

IN 1
0

0
0

10

0,25

0,50

0,75

1 Direct switching current

2 Current with auto-transformer

5/218

1
Speed

0,25

0,50

0,75

1 Direct motor torque

2 Torque with auto-transformer
3 Resistive torque of the machine

1
Speed

TeSys contactors

Combination starters
for customer assembly

For auto-transformer starting

Auto-transformer starters from 59 to 900 kW up to 440 V (type 1 coordination)

The components recommended in the table below have been determined according to the following characteristics:
b auto-transformer: on 0.65 Un connection with non adjusted air gap,
b 3 starts per hour, of which 2 consecutive,
b Motor starting current: Id/In = 6,
b Iq = 70 kA,
b Transient current on closing of KM3 y 7 2 In,
b Maximum starting time: 30 seconds,
b Ambient temperature q y 40 C.
Switch-disconnector-fuses: operators and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Contactors: 3-pole.
LC1D: see pages 5/62 and 5/65,
LC1F: please consult your Regional Sales Office,
LC1B: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Thermal overload relays:

b LRD: see pages 6/20 to 6/25,
b LR9D: see page 6/23,
b LR9F: please consult your Regional Sales Office.

SwitchaM fuses
disconnector- Size
Rating
fuse
Reference

220/
230 V
kW
30

380/ 415 V 440 V

400 V
kW kW kW
55
59
59

In
max
A
105 GSpK

40

75

80

80

138

51

90

90

100

63

110

110

75

132

90

Contactors
KM3
KM2
LC1
LC1

KM1
LC1

22 x 58

A
125

D115

D115

D3210

GSpL

T0

160

D150

D115

D5011

170

GSpN

T1

200

F185

D115

110

205

GSpN

T1

250

F225

132

150

245

GSpN

T1

250

160

160

185

300

GSpQQ

T2

110

200

200

220

370

GSpQQ

140

250

257

280

460

180

315

355

375

584

Overload relays
Reference
Setting
(1)
range

D5011

LR9D5369
LRD 4367
LR9 D5369
LRD 4369
LR9 F5371

A
90150
95120
90150
110140
132220

D150

D8011

LR9 F5371

132220

F265

F185

D115

LR9 F5375

200330

315

F330

F265

D115

LR9 F5375

200330

T2

400

F400

F330

D115

LR9 F5379

300500

GS2S

T3

500

F500

F400

D115

LR9 F5379

300500

GS2S

T3

630

F630

F400

D185

LR9 F5381

380630

GS2V

T4

F800

F500

F185

TC800/1 +
LRD 05
220
400 425 450 710 GS2V
T4
800
F800
F500
F265
TC800/1 +
LRD 05
250
450 475 500 800 GS2V
T4
800
F800
F500
F265
TC1000/1 +
LRD 05
280
500 530 560 900 GS2V
T4
1000
BM33p22 F630
F330
TC1000/1
LRD 05
315
560 600 630 1000 GS2V
T4
1000
BM33p22 F630
F400
TC1250/1
LRD 05
335
630 670 710 1100 GS2V
T4
1250
BP33p22 F630
F400
TC1250/1
LRD 05
400
710 750 800 1260 On base
T4
2 x 800
BP33p22 F780
F400
TC1500/1
(2)
LRD 05
450
800 800 800 1450 On base
T4
2 x 800
BP33p22 F780
F400
TC1750/1
(2)
LRD 05
500
900 900 900 1600 On base
T4
2 x 800
BR33p22 F780
F500
TC2000/1
(2)
LRD 05
(1) For power ratings greater than or equal to 400 kW at 415 V, use one LRD-05 on the current transformer.
(2) Check with the motor manufacturer whether the fuses should be fitted in parallel.

505800

200

355

375

400

635

2
3

Auxiliary contact blocks:

b for contactors LC1D: one LADN11 (1 N/O + 1 N/C) on KM1,
b for contactors LC1F: one LADN22 (2 N/O + 2 N/C) on KM1, KM2 and KM3.

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3

800

505800
6301000

5
6
7
8

6301000
7901250
7901250
9451500

1001750
2602000

10

5/219

Operation

TeSys contactors

For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors

Applications

These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slipring motors.

The most common application is for starters without inching and without rotor speed
adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ...
In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of
contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please consult your Regional
Sales Office.

For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of
motor duty, the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection,
the ambient temperature, etc.
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Operation

The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do
not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has
disappeared, or virtually disappeared.
They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times
the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are
easy.

Different types of rotor connection

Star connection

Delta connection

V connection

W connection

5
6
7

8
9
10

5/220

Selection

TeSys contactors

For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors

Contactor selection according to the type of connection

Rotor current and voltage coefficients

Coefficients to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below.

Type of connection

Rotor I coefficient

Star

Operational I
1

3-phase rotor Ue (1)

Maximum
LC1 F
2000 V

LC1B
2000 V

With counter-current
LC1 F
LC1B
1000 V
1000 V

Delta

1.4

1700 V

1700 V

850 V

850 V

In V

1700 V

1700 V

850 V

850 V

In W

1.6

1700 V

1700 V

850 V

850 V

2
3

Selection according to the operational current

The selection examples below take into account:

b a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues). This ratio is given in standard
IEC 60947-4,
b a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specified in the above standards.
Time current flowing

Contactor rating
LC1
LC1
D150
F185

LC1
F265

LC1
F400

LC1
F500

LC1
F630

LC1
F780

LC1
BL

LC1
BM

LC1
BP

LC1
BR

Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 30/h

10 s

450 A

550 A

800 A

1100 A

1500 A

2000 A

2500 A

2000 A

2400 A

3750 A

5000 A

30 s

280 A

400 A

550 A

730 A

1000 A

1500 A

2000 A

1200 A

1800 A

2600 A

3600 A

60 s

220 A

300 A

400 A

550 A

750 A

1200 A

1500 A

1000 A

1500 A

2200 A

3000 A

Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 60/h

5s

450 A

550 A

800 A

1100 A

1500 A

2000 A

2500 A

2000 A

2400 A

3750 A

5000 A

10 s

330 A

450 A

620 A

860 A

1250 A

1800 A

2300 A

1600 A

2200 A

3400 A

4500 A

30 s

220 A

300 A

400 A

550 A

750 A

1200 A

1500 A

1000 A

1500 A

2200 A

3000 A

Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 150/h for LC1F and 120/h for LC1B
5s

300 A

420 A

580 A

820 A

1150 A

1650 A

2200 A

1500 A

2100 A

3200 A

4200 A

10 s

250 A

350 A

430 A

600 A

850 A

1300 A

1600 A

1100 A

1600 A

2300 A

3200 A

1000 A

1600 A

800 A

1250 A

2000 A

2750 A

Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor:

with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1F and 120/h for LC1B

200 A

270 A

350 A

500 A

700 A

Electrical durability
For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles.
(1) For use up to 3000 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

9
10

5/221

General

TeSys contactors

Long distance remote control

Voltage drop caused by the inrush current

When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a
voltage drop in the control circuit cable caused by the resistance of the conductors,
which can adversely affect closing of the contactor.
An excessive voltage drop in the control supply cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead
to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to
overheating.
This phenomenon is aggravated by:
b a long line,
b a low control circuit voltage,
b a cable with a small c.s.a.,
b a high inrush power drawn by the coil.
The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power
and the conductor c.s.a., is indicated in the graphs below.
Remedial action
To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on:
b increase the conductor c.s.a.,
b use a higher control circuit voltage,
b use an intermediate control relay.
Selection of conductor c.s.a.
These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct
indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control cable, depending
on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit
voltage (see example page 5/223).

1
2
3
4

Total resistance of the 2 conductors

in the control cable in W (1)

1000

Total resistance of the 2 conductors 

in the control cable in W (1)

1000

6
100

5
4

10

3X
2

100

A
B C
Y
DE
F

10

0,1

1 a 24 V
2 a 48 V

10

100
500
2000
50
200
1000
Inrush power drawn in VA

3 a 115 V
4 a 230 V

5 a 400 V
6 a 690 V

Total resistance of the 2 conductors

in the control cable in W (1)

0,1
10

50

100
500
5000
150
1000
10 000
Length of control cable in m (2)

C.s.a. of copper cables

C 1.5 mm2

A 0.75 mm2
B 1 mm2

D 2.5 mm2

E 4 mm2
F 6 mm2

Total resistance of the 2 conductors 

in the control cable in W (1)

1000

1000

100

100

10

10

9
8

A
BC
DE
F

10

7
0,1

7 c 24 V
8 c 48 V

10

100
500
2000
50
200
1000
Inrush power drawn in W

9 c 125 V
10 c 250 V

0,1
10

50

100

1000
10 000
500
5000
Length of control cable in
m (2)

C.s.a. of copper cables

C 1.5 mm2

A 0.75 mm2
B 1 mm2

D 2.5 mm2

E 4 mm2
F 6 mm2

(1) For 3-wire control, the current only flows in 2 of the conductors.
(2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors. (Distance between the contactor
and the control device).

10

5/222

General (continued)

TeSys contactors

Long distance remote control

Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued)
What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1 D40A, 115V contactor,
operated from a distance of 150 metres?

b Contactor LC1 D40A, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA

On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X.

Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y, 
i.e.: 1.5 mm2.
If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values.

Calculating the maximum cable length
The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by
the formula:

U2
L = ___ .s.K
SA

where:
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in m (length of the
cable),
U : supply voltage in V,
SA : apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA,
s : conductor c.s.a. in mm2,
K : factor given in the table below.

a.c. supply

SA in VA
K

20
1.38

40
1.5

100
1.8

150
2

d.c. supply

Irrespective of the apparent inrush power SA, expressed in W

K = 1.38

200
2.15

5
6
7
8
9
10

5/223

General (continued)

TeSys contactors

Long distance remote control

Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance

When the control contact of a contactor is opened, the control cable capacitance is
effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a
residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will
remain closed.
This only applies to contactors operating on an a.c. supply.

This phenomenon is aggravated by:

b a long line length between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between
the coil control contact and the power supply,
b a high control circuit voltage,
b a low coil consumption, sealed,
b a low value of contactor drop-out voltage.

The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is
indicated in the graph on the page opposite
.

Remedial action
Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed
due to cable capacitance:
b use a d.c. control voltage, or,
b add a rectifier, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c.
operating coil: in this way, rectified a.c. current flows in the control cable.

When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors
into account.
.

5
6

A1

A2

Supply 50/60 Hz

b Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1).

Value of the resistance :
R
(C capacit du cble de commande)
W =
1
___
R W = 103 C (F)

(C capacitance of the control cable)

Power to be dissipated :

U2
PW = ___
R

(1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into
operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact.

10

5/224

General (continued)

TeSys contactors

Long distance remote control

Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued)
These graphs are for a capacitance, between 2 conductors, of 0.2 F/km. They
make it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining
closed due to the power drawn by the coil when sealed, as well as the control circuit
voltage, according to the length of the control cable.

Cable capacitance in F

Cable capacitance in F

100

100

10

1
2

10

2
1

0,1

0,01

A
1

1 a 24 V
2 a 48 V

0,1

5 7 10
50 100
Power drawn, sealed in VA

3 a 115 V
4 a 230 V

5 a 400 V
6 a 690 V

0,01
100

300 500

1000
5000 10 000
Length of control cable in m

7 3-wire control
8 2-wire control

In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there
is a risk of the contactor remaining closed.

Examples
What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1 D12 contactor, operating
on 230 V, with 2-wire control?

4
5

b Contactor LC1D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA.

On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with
the a 230 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the
2wire control curve.

The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m.

In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor
must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil.

Value of this resistance:


1
1
R = __
= ___ = 8.3 W
103 . C 103 . 0.12

Power to be dissipated :
U2
(220)2
P = ___ = ___ = 6 W
R
8300
Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply.

Calculating the cable length
The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is
calculated using the formula:
S
L = 455 . ___
U2.Co
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the
cable),
S : apparent power, sealed, in VA,
U : control voltage in V,
Co : line capacitance of the cable in F/km.

5/225

9
10

Selection guide

TeSys contactors

Variable composition standard and high

performance contactors

Applications

b
b
b
b
b

Type

Standard contactors

Motor switching in categories AC-3

Resistive load switching : heating, etc.
Distribution circuit switching : line contactor
Supply changeover switching : circuit coupling etc
Transformer, capacitor, lighting switching

2
3
4
5

AC-3

80 A

170 A

250 A

350 A

460 A

700 A

AC-4/DC-5

72 A/

145 A/

205 A/

AC-1

80 A

200 A

300 A

290/470 A
(1)
470 A

380/630 A
(1)
630 A

584/1000 A
(1)
1000 A

Rated operational voltage

690 V a

690 V a

690 V a

690 V a

690 V a

690 V a

Control circuit

Standard applications
a.c. supply a

d.c. supply c
A1

Rated operational current

A2

A2

A1

A2

A1

7
8

Contactors

Pages

Type

CV1

Rating

10

5/226

Please consult our catalogue TeSys variable composition contactors.

(1) With PN3 poles.

b
b
b
b


Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5

Inductive circuit switching
High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives
Load switching at high operating rates

1
2
3
4

High performance contactors

80 A

200 A

250 A

320 A

460 A

800 A

1000 A

1500 A

1800 A

80/80 A

170/200 A

208/300 A

250/320 A

380/500 A

720/800 A

830/1000 A

1200/1800 A

1500/2500 A

80A

200 A

300 A

320 A

500 A

800 A

1250 A

2000 A

2750 A

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

1000 V a

Low consumption applications

a.c. supply via economy resistor

KM

A1

KM

A2

A2

KM

CV3
F

d.c. supply via economy resistor

A1

KM

CV3 and LC1B

G

9
10

5/227

Selection

TeSys contactors

Variable composition contactors 

CV1B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3B (80 to 500 A)

Selection

To define a contactor
The criteria required to define the composition of a contactor are:
b the number of N/O and N/C power poles,
b the current and power supply voltage, 
(note: on a d.c. supply, the time constant -L--- of the load must be known in order to
R
define the number of poles to be wired in series to break the arc),
b the control circuit voltage,
b the number of auxiliary contacts.

1
2

To order a contactor
Contactor selectable by code combinations
b Use the symbol combination table on page 5/229.
b Check the maximum number of poles in the selection table on page 5/230.
b Check the operational currents possible below (selection restrictions).

Contactor not selectable by code combinations

b For a composition that cannot be selected using these tables, use order form
CF452, page 5/231.

Selection restrictions

Contactor type
Rated
operational
current

5
6
7
8
9
10

5/228

CV1BG
CV3BG

CV1BH
CV3BH

CV1BJ
CV3BJ

CV1BK
CV3BK

CV1BL

11 A

CV1BF
CV3BF
E

13 A

20 A

40 A

50 A

80 A

125 A

200 A

250 A

300 A

320 A

400 A

470 A

500 A

630 A

1000 A

0
Without arc
chamber

Symbol combination table

TeSys contactors

Variable composition contactors 

CV1B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3B (80 to 500 A)

Reference to be constituted

(see examples on page 5/230)

Type of contactor related to application
a 690 V, c 220 V/pole
a 1000 V, c 440 V/pole
Contactor size AC-1/AC-3
CV1 : 80/80 A
CV3 : 80/80 A
CV1 : 200/170 A
CV3 : 200/200 A
CV1 : 300/250 A
CV3 : 300/285 A
CV1 : 470/350 A
CV3 : 320/320 A
CV1 : 630/460 A
CV3 : 500/460 A
CV1 : 1000/700 A
Number of poles
N/O poles
1 N/O
2 N/O
3 N/O
4 N/O
5 N/O
N/C poles
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 N/C
No main poles
Operational current (determines the blow-out coil size)
11 A
13 A
20 A
40 A
50 A
80 A
125 A
200 A
250 A
300 A
320 A
400 A
470 A
500 A
630 A
1000 A
Without breaking
Control circuit voltage
24 V
48 V
110 V
120 V
127 V
208 V
220 V
230 V
240 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
480 V
500 V
600 V
Operating frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
50/60 Hz (rectifier + economy resistor)
c
c + economy resistor
Auxiliary contacts (type ZC4GM)
N/O instantaneous

CV1B
CV3B
F
G
H
J
K
L

2
1
2
3
4
5

Z
E
M
N
P
Q
F
R
G
S
H
T
U
J
V
K
L
Z

1
2
3
0

3
Z
E
M
N
P
Q
F
R
G
S
H
T
U
J
V
K
L
Z

1 N/O
2 N/O
3 N/O
4 N/O
N/C instantaneous
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 N/C
No instantaneous auxiliary contacts
On-delay
1 C/O
Off-delay
1 C/O
To check whether the symbol combinations are possible, refer to the selection information and guide on pages 5/228 and 5/230.
If in doubt, fill out order form CF 452.

4
5
6

B
E
F
K
G
L
M
P
U
Q
V
N
R
T
S
X

7
8
5
6
7
D
R
1
2
3
4

9
1
2
3
4
0

10
J
N

5/229

Selection

TeSys contactors

Variable composition contactors 

CV1B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3B (80 to 500 A)

Guide to selection of code combinations

CV1 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor
type
Pole type
Number
of poles

CV1BF

CV1BG

CV1BH

CV1BJ

CV1BK

CV1BL

N/O N/C
5
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
2
0
(1)

1
(2)

CV3 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor
type
Pole type
Number
of poles

3
4
5

CV3BF

CV3BG

CV3BH

CV3BJ

CV3BK

N/O N/C
5
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
4
0

N/O N/C
2
0

N/O N/C
2
0



CV1 or CV3 contactors:

Maximum number of auxiliary contacts: 4 + 1 time delay if necessary


Selection restrictions, according to coil type:
(1) 4-pole with economy resistor.
(2) 2-pole with economy resistor.

Examples

b Switching of single-phase capacitor: 400 V - 80 A - 1 N/O main pole. 220 V / 50Hz

control circuit voltage, 1 N/O and 1 N/C auxiliary contacts. 
Reference: CV1BF1F0ZM511.
b Switching of d.c. heating circuits: 800 V - 150 A - 2 N/O main poles - 48 V c
control circuit, instantaneous auxiliary contact 1 N/O + 1 on-delay. 
Reference: CV3BG2W0ZED10J.

Other versions

To obtain a composition with more main poles or with more than 4 auxiliary contacts,
please use order form CF452 (see page 5/231).

8
9
10

5/230

TeSys contactors

Reference constitution
or order form CF 452

Date of order

Editor

Variable composition contactors 

CV1 and CV3

Geog. area

Order n

Required delivery (1)

/
Company: ................................

Customer Order N: ...............................

Activity sector: ................................

Number of contactors: .......

Job n

Application: ..............................
Type - size or symbol combination: ..........

For use by Schneider Electric

For devices with symbol combination: Do not fill out the form below

POWER CIRCUIT

AC
DC

Voltage: .......... V

...... Hz

Poles

Number of N/O main poles:

Rated current: ................... Amp
Number of N/C main poles:
Rated current: ................... Amp
Any special details: .....................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

CONTROL CIRCUIT

AC
DC

Voltage: .......... V
Economy resistor:

Ref:
Ref:

Yes

Electromag:
Coil:
Coil maint. cont:
Rectifier:
Econ. resist. contact:

...... Hz

No

(unless specified, an economy resistor will only be included if necessary)

Econ. Resist.:

Customer marking: ..........

AUXILIARY CONTACTS AVAILABLE

Instantaneous contacts:

Number of N/O

Number of N/C

If a specific type or block of contacts is required, please indicate below.

Number

GM1:

GM2:

GP4:

GP5:

GP6:

LA1:

Note : For mechanical interlocking, a N/C contact must be specified for the interlocking function.

Time delay contacts N/C + N/O :

On delay

or

No. ZC4GM1 :
No. ZC4GM2 :

(N/O)

No. ZC1GP4 :
No. ZC1GP5 :

(N/C)

No. ZC1GP6 :
No. ZC2GG1 :

(N/O+N/O)

No. ZC2GG5 :

(OFF-Del)

(N/C)

(ON-Del)

No. LA1BNp31 :

Off delay

(N/C+N/O)

No. LA1DNpp :
No. LApDTp :

Note: If LA1 is used, a build specification is required.

MOUNTING
Fixing centres L:

Dimensions in catalogue

Standard
Specified

If CV1, specif. n:

Code.:
Build see drwg.
N :

MI bearing

Vertically mounted reversers fixing centres E =.......... mm

Upper position contactor: ...........................
Lower position contactor:
If mechanical interlock specified : Ref: .....................................
Supply linking components for the 2 contactors (Rod, clevis, cranks, lock, etc...) :

Code.:
Bar: L = :

With L = ............

Mechanical interlock MI:

Yes
No

Shaft: C or E =

W1
MI ref
Yes

No

Note : MI components that are part of the contactor such as the bearing, clevis or lock support are factory fitted.

ANY SPECIAL DETAILS

(Comments / Specific requirements / Special MI / Accessories / Etc...)

Launch date

Delivery date

Contactor reference*
.....................................

* 3 possibilities
1) Device with symbol combination (see drwg 1492177)
2) Device n defined on the basis of this form
Type/size/order n/year. E.g.: CV1GB000599
3) Reference defined to specification

(1) Standard delivery time: 3 weeks, from receipt of order. For faster delivery, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

5/231

10

TeSys contactors

Selection,
characteristics

3-pole vacuum contactors

andreversing contactors

Selection
Contactor size

LC1V160

LC1V320

LC1V610

160

320

610

kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW

45
75
110
150
200
280

90
160
220
280
400
600

160
300
400
560
800
930

For utilisation category AC-3

Maximum operational
current in AC-3
Rated operational
power P
(standard power ratings
of motors)

230 V
400 V
525 V
690 V
1000 V
1500 V

For 3-phase motors conforming to CSA standards

Rated operational
power P
(standard power ratings
of 3-phase CSA motors)

200 V
240 V
380 V
480 V
600 V
800 V
1000 V
1500 V

hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp
hp

50
60
100
125
150
200
250
400

100
125
200
250
300
400
500
800

150
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1300

kVAR
kVAR
kVAR
kVAR

47
95
100
250

94
190
200
500

176
356
400
1000

For switching 3-phase capacitors

Rated operational
power P

240 V
480 V
600 V
1500 V

For switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

Rated operational
power P

Environment characteristics
Contactor type
Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave = 11 ms)

208 V
240 V
480 V
600 V

Vibration resistance
Operating altitude


Above sea level
Below sea level

Ambient air temperature

around the device

7
Degree of protection

Contacts closed
Contacts open

10500 Hz

Maximum
Minimum

Storage
Operation
0.8 1.1 Uc
Permissible for
operation at Uc

Conforming to IEC 60529

Control circuit characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

To earth

Inrush
Sealed

Consumption

Permissible control circuit voltage

Closing time (1)
Opening time (1)

10
References :
page 5/234

5/232


Cable c.s.a.
Key for hex. screws
Tightening torque

Dimensions : 
page 5/236

20
23
47
59

41
47
94
117

81
94
188
234

C
C

LC1V160
10 gn
10 gn

2 gn

3600
2500

- 40+ 80
- 5+ 55

LC1V320
10 gn
10 gn

2 gn

3600
4500

- 40+ 80
- 5+ 55

LC1V610
10 gn
10 gn

2 gn

3600
4500

- 40+ 80
- 5+ 55

- 10+ 75

- 10+ 75

- 10+ 75

mm2
mm
N.m


IP 00

Any

70
Allen 4
14


IP 00

Any

185
20
39


IP 00

Any

2 x 185
20
39

m
m

Operating position
Cabling

kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA

2000
2000
2000



VA
300
600
1700
VA
30
20
28



0.81.1 Uc
0.81.1 Uc
0.81.1 Uc



ms
18...22
24...32
24...32



ms
95...115
95...115
95...115
(1) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

Schemes : 
page 5/236

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole vacuum contactors

andreversing contactors

Contactor type

LC1V160

Main pole characteristics

LC1V320

LC1V610

1500

8



1500
1500


8
8

EN 60947-4-1 - IEC 60947-4-1

CSA


160
320


160
320
160
320
130
270


1.2
1
1.6
1.5
0.18
0.15


5
2.5


1200
1200
900
900
900
900
450
450


1900
3800


1600


3200


6100


4500
3750
3200
1920

400


9000
7580
6100
3600

630

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

Conforming to standards
Approvals
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)

Rated operational current (Ie) q y 40 C AC-1

q y 55 C AC-3
q y 55 C AC-4

Electrical durability
AC-1
in millions of operating cycles
AC-3
(400 V at I max)
AC-4

Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles

Maximum operating rate
Mechanical
in operating cycles
AC-1
per hour
AC-3
AC-4

Maximum making capacity
Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947
(lrms)

Maximum breaking capacity Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947
(lrms)

Maximum
For 1 s
permissible current
For 2 s
For 10 s
For 30 s

Short-circuit protection
aM fuse
at Ie in cat. AC-3 max.

A
A
A


2400
2000
1600
960

160

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)


690

Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)


Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15, 230 V
AC-15, 400 V
AC-15, 500 V
DC-13, 24 V
DC-13, 110 V
DC-13, 220 V

Cabling
Cable c.s.a.

Short-circuit protection
gG fuse

Operating time (1)
C
(at 100 % of Uc)
O

A
A
A
A

1
2


630

630
610
540

1
1.5
0.12

2

1200
900
900
450

7300

3
4
5
6

Auxiliary contact characteristics

A
A
A
A
A
A
mm2
A
ms
ms


10

0.78
0.45
0.35
1.1
0.24
0.12

2.5

10

5
5

7
8
9

(1) Operating time in relation to the main contacts.

10
Selection : 
page 5/232

References :
pages 5/234 and 5/235

Dimensions :
page 5/236

Schemes :
page 5/236

5/233

TeSys contactors

References

3-pole vacuum contactors

andreversing contactors
Power and control circuits
a.c. supply
Vacuum contactors
Standard power ratings
50/60 Hz
in category AC-3

105194

Rated
operational
current
Ie

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Control
Basic
Weight
circuit
reference (1)
voltage
(50/60 Hz)

230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1

kW kW
kW
kW
kW
A
A

LC1V320

kg

45

75

110

150

200

160

160

1 (1)

LC1V160pp

3.800

90

160

220

280

400

320

320

1 (1)

LC1V320pp

10.500

160

300

400

560

800

610

630

1 (1)

LC1V610pp

13.000

Reversing vacuum contactors

L3

L2

L1

5 L3
3 L2
1 L1
5 L3
3 L2
1 L1

KM2

0
LC1V61

KM1

ON /

gf

0
LC1V61

0
OFF /
6 T3
4 T2

ON /

2 T1

0
OFF /
6 T3

4 T2
2 T1


The reversing contactor range comprises:
b for 160 A rating, a kit with set of power connections allowing assembly of the
starter,
b for 320 and 610 A ratings, a complete starter, ready for use.
Standard power ratings
50/60 Hz
in category AC-3

Rated
operational
current
Ie

Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts

Control
Basic
Weight
circuit
reference (1)
voltage
(50/60 Hz)

230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1

kW kW
kW
kW
kW
A
A
LC2V610

45

75

110

150

200

160

160

90

160

220

280

400

320

320

160

kg

300

400

560

800

610

630

LA9V974 (2)

1 110-120 V LC2V320FE7

30

380-415 V LC2V320V7

30

1 110-120 V LC2V610FE7

36
36

(1) Basic reference; add code indicating control circuit voltage.

Standard control circuit voltages :
Volts 50/60 Hz
110120 220240 380415 440480 550600
Item
FE7
P7
V7
R7
X7
(2) Kit containing a mechanical interlock, a set of power connections and a fixing plate. To build
a complete reversing contactor, order contactors LC1V160pp separately.

LA9V974

7
8
9
10

5/234

30

220-240 V LC2V320P7

220-240 V LC2V610P7

Selection :
page 5/232

1.200

Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233

Dimensions :
page 5/236

Schemes :
page 5/236

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

3-pole vacuum contactors

andreversing contactors
Power and control circuits
a.c. supply

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1)

500308

Number of contacts

Maximum number of
blocks per contactor

Auxiliary
contacts

Reference

Weight


kg

LA1 VN11

LA1VN11

0.030

LA1VN02

0.030

LA1VN20

0.030

LA1VN11X (2)

0.030

1
2

50/60 Hz coils
Rated voltage
V

Voltage code

Reference

Weight
kg

110120

FE7

LX1V160FE7

0.400

220240

P7

LX1V160P7

0.400

380415

V7

LX1V160V7

0.400

440480

R7

LX1V160R7

0.400

550600

X7

LX1V160X7

0.400

110120

FE7

LX1V320FE7

0.800

220240

P7

LX1V320P7

0.800

380415

V7

LX1V320V7

0.800

440480

R7

LX1V320R7

0.800

550600

X7

LX1V320X7

0.800

110120

FE7

LX1V610FE7

0.800

220240

P7

LX1V610P7

0.800

380415

V7

LX1V610V7

0.800

440480

R7

LX1V610R7

0.800

550600

X7

LX1V610X7

0.800

500310

For contactors LC1 V160

3
4

For contactors LC1 V320

LX1 V320pp

For contactors LC1 V610

(1) LC1V160 : auxiliary contact blocks mounted at the top of the contactor, with no change to the
overall dimensions.
LC1V320 or LC1V610 : 2 auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the RH and LH side of the
contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions.
(2) For LC1V160 : 1 N/C contact for the coil + 1 N/O contact.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Selection :
page 5/232

Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233

5/235

TeSys contactors

Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes

3-pole vacuum contactors

Dimensions, mounting
LC1V160

48
24

168

152

500311

2
151

36,5

36,5

24

123

48

LC1V320

50

156

70

35

2x10,5

500312

3,5

133

2x8

191

203

185

222

2x8,5x19

2x8,5

201

159

63,5

38

9,5

37 63,5

130

48

76
170

15

LC1V610
178
68

203

356

222

2x8,5x19
328

68

500313

127

9,5

2x8,5

95

68
201

Schemes

5/L3

21/NC

14

22

3/L2
4/T2

13/NO

1/L1

13/NO
14

2/T1

03/NO
04

A1

5/L3
6/T3

A2

3/L2
4/T2

21/NC

1/L1
2/T1

22

A1

LC1V320, V610

A2

LC1V160

68

6/T3

32,5

Auxiliary contact blocks

61/NC

33/NO

43/NO

03/NO

62

34

44

04

NC

51/NC
500316
52

5/236

coil

21/NC

LA1VN11X 1 N/O

22

LA1VN20 2 N/O

13/NO

10

LA1VN02 2 N/C

14

LA1VN11 1 N/O & 1 N/C

172

15

TeSys reversing contactors

Dimensions,
mounting

3-pole reversing vacuum contactors

Dimensions, mounting
LA9V974 + 2 x LC1V160

562320

1
2

LC2V320

559
168
536047

107

96

63

41

54

356

463

446

22

16

54

104

63

108

241

63

48

418
616

LC2V610

562322

7
8
9
10

5/237

TeSys reversing contactors

Schemes

3-pole reversing vacuum contactors

Schemes

5
A1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

A1

LA9V974 + 2 x LC1V160

6
W

5/L3

A2

4
V

2
U

3/L2

1/L1

KM2
A2

KM1
2

LC2V320

F1

- KM2
A1

- KM2

- KM2

Start

- KM1

- KM1
A2

- KM1

Start

A1
A2

A2

KM2
2

KM1

(1)

A1

Stop

(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.

8
9
10

5/238

A1

- KM2
A2

- KM1

TeSys reversing contactors

Schemes (continued)

3-pole reversing vacuum contactors

Schemes (continued)

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

LC2V610

F1

Start

Start
- KM1

- KM2

- KM2

- KM2

4
- KM1
- KM2

A1

- KM1

- KM1

A2

A2

A2

KM2
2

KM1

(1)

A1

A1

Stop

A1

- KM2

A2

- KM1

(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.

6
7
8
9
10

5/239

TeSys contactors

General

Magnetic latching contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are fitted with a
special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the On position when the
coil is no longer energised.

Applications
The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large
number of applications.

2
3

Properties

Applications

b Retention of the sequence memory in

automatic control equipment in the
event of loss of control voltage.
b Energy saving, since the source of
supply to the coil does not need to
supply current when the contactor is
latched in the closed state.
b Change of state from Closed to
Open by current signal through the
coil.
b Unaffected by mains interference.

b Refineries, power stations, excitation

circuits.

b Utilisation of contactors beyond their

breaking capacity, as operations are
performed off-load.
b Contactors are silent in the latched
position.
Operation of the electromagnet

b Contactors remaining in the closed

state for long periods. 
Examples: refineries, power supplies,
low voltage distribution
b Selective opening control.
b No unwanted opening and closing of
the main power poles.
b Current carrying at voltages up to
1000 Volts.

CR1F block contactors

CR1F magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a double coil with 3 terminals
comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a
common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching
supply is separate from the unlatching supply.

The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated
must be complied with.

Operating precautions:
v the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously,
v a winding must not be supplied continuously,
v supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts.
Manual opening:
if the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually.

CR1B bar mounted contactors

CR1B magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or
with a.c. through a rectifier.
Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current flow.

Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.

Mechanical latching contactors

LC1D block contactors

For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described on page 5/241 , it is
possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latch block type
LA6DK, which can be mounted on LC1 D contactors (see page 5/80).

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/240

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/260 to 5/267

TeSys contactors

Selection

Magnetic latching contactors

Selection guide for direct on-line starting 

of squirrel cage motors

Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour

Motor (1)
220 V
230 V
P
kW
25
30
33

37
40
45
51
55
59
63
75

80

90

100
110

HP
35
40
45

50
54
60
70
75
80
85
100

110

125

136
150

129
132
140
147

175
180
190
200

380 V
400 V
In
A
85
103
113


126
134
150
170
182
195
203
240

260

295

325
356

P
kW

51
55
59
63
75

80
90

100
110
129
132

140
147
150
160

180
185
200

415 V

HP

70
75
80
85
100

110
125

138
150
175
180

190
200
205
220

245
250
270

In
A

98
105
112
117
138

147
170

188
205
242
245

260
273
280
300

333
342
370

440 V

P
kW

55

59
63
75

80
90
100
110

129
132
140
147
150
160

HP

75

80
85
100

110
125
136
150

175
180
190
200
205
220

In
A

100

105
115
135

138
165
182
200

230
240
250
260
270
280

180
185
200
220

250
257

280
295
300
315
335
355
375
400
425
445
450
475
500
530
560
600

245
250
270
300

340
350

380
400
410
430
450
480
500
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g

320
325
340
385

425
450

475
500
510
535
550
580
610
650
690
730
740
780
820
870
920
978

3-pole
contactor

3-pole differential
thermal overload relay

3 fuses
Type

(2)

Reference

aM

P
kW

59

In
A

97

Reference

HP

80

CR1F150
CR1F150

63

75
80
90
100

110
129
132

140
147
150
160
180
185
200
220
250

257
280

295
300

315
335
355
375
400
425
445
450
475
500
530
560
600
630

85

100
110
125
136

150
175
180

190
200
205
220
245
250
270
300
340

350
380

400
410

430
450
480
500
454
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
g

109

125
131
146
162

178
209
215

227
236
246
256
289
295
321
353
401

412
450

473
481

505
518
549
575
611
650
680
690
730
780
825
870
920
965

Setting
range

BS-88

LR9F5367
LR9F5369

A
60100
90150

Rating
A
A
100
125
100
160

CR1F150

LR9F5369

90150

125

160

CR1F150

LR9F5369

90150

160

200

CR1F185
CR1F185

LR9F5369
LR9F5371

90150
132220

160
200

200
250

CR1F265

LR9F5371

132220

250

315

CR1F265

LR9F7375

200330

250

315

CR1F265
CR1F400

LR9F7375
LR9F7375

200330
200330

315
315

400
400

CR1F400

LR9F7375

200330

315

400

CR1F400

LR9F7379

300500

400

500

CR1F400

LR9F7379

300500

400

500

220 300 408

CR1F500
LR9F7379
300500
500
630
250 340 460
CR1F500
LR9F7381
380630
500
630

CR1F500
LR9F7381
380630
500
630
257 350 475
CR1F630
LR9F7381
380630
500
630

150 205 483

280 380 510
CR1F630
LR9F7381
380630
630
800
160 220 520
295 400 546
180 245 578
300 410 565
CR1F630
LR9F7381
380630
630
800
185 250 595
315 430 584
200 270 626
335 450 620
CR1F630
LR9F7381
380630
800
1000
220 g
700
355 g
635
CR1BL33
LR2F8383
500800
800
1000
375 g
670
400 g
710

250 g
800
425 g
760
CR1BM33
LR2F8383
500800
800
1000
257 g
826
445 g
790
CR1BM33
LR2F8383
6301000 1000
1250
280 g
900
450 g
800
295 g
948
475 g
850
300 g
980
500 g
900
315 g
990
530 g
950
(1) The ratings are for standard 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on
the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal
to or immediately greater than In.
(2) Reference to be completed, see page 5/250.
g There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
420
425
450
472

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/241

TeSys contactors

Selection

Magnetic latching contactors

Selection guide for utilisation category AC-3

Contactor size

1
2

Rated operational current in AC-3 (q y 55 C)

CR1
F400

CR1
F500

CR1
F630

CR1
BL

CR1
BM

CR1
BP

CR1
BR

150

185

265

400

500

630

750

1000

1500

1800

500 V

135

175

245

385

500

540

750

900

1200

1500

660/690 V

130

140

230

365

435

470

700

800

900

1100

1000 V

47

73

95

135

270

330

400

400

500

600

Rated operational power (standard motor power ratings)

380400 V

440 V

500 V

CR1
F265

415 V

CR1
F185

440 V

220240 V

CR1
F150

660/690 V

1000 V

kW

40

55

75

110

147

200

220

280

425

500

HP

54

75

100

150

200

270

300

380

580

680

kW

75

90

132

200

250

335

400

500

750

900

HP

100

185

180

270

340

450

545

680

1000

1220

kW

80

100

140

220

280

375

425

530

800

900

HP

110

136

180

300

380

500

580

720

1100

1220

kW

80

100

140

250

295

400

450

560

800

900

HP

110

136

190

340

400

545

610

760

1100

1220

kW

90

110

160

257

355

400

500

600

750

900

HP

125

150

220

350

480

545

680

810

1000

1220

kW

100

110

160

280

335

450

560

670

750

900

HP

610

760

910

1000

1220

kW

65

100

147

185

335

450

530

530

670

750

HP

136

200

250

610

720

720

910

1000

Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an

on-load factor = 85%: 750 for CR1F150 to F265, 500 for CR1F400 to F630 and 
120 for CR1B.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

5/242

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

TeSys contactors

Selection

Magnetic latching contactors

Selection according to required electrical durability

CR1 BR

CR1 BP

CR1 BL, BM

CR1 F630

CR1 F500

CR1 F400

CR1 F265

CR1 F185

Millions of
operating 
cycles
1
0,8

CR1 F150

Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) (1) (q y 55 C)

The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) drawn by the motor.

0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08

0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
0,008
0,006

0,004
Current 
breaking 
limits

0,002
0,001
0,008

In categories

20

30

40

50 60 70 8090
100

150

200

300

400

600 800 1000

500

1500 2000

3000 4000

AC-3

AC-2
AC4

6000 8000 10 000

Current broken in A

Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A,
Ic = Ie = 100 A
600000 operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1F185.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.

5
6

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/243

TeSys contactors

Selection

Magnetic latching contactors

Selection guide for utilisation category AC-1 

and according to required electrical durability

Maximum operational current (on-load factor u 0.95)

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
Contactor size
Cable c.s.a.

CR1
F150
120

CR1
F185
150

CR1
F265
185

CR1
F400

CR1
F500

CR1
F630

CR1
BL

CR1
BM

CR1
BP

CR1
BR

mm

30 x 5

40 x 5

60 x 5

50 x 5

80 x 5

100 x 5

100 x 5

A
A
A

250
250
170

275
275
180

350
300
250

500
430
340

700
580
500

1000
850
700

800
700
600

1250
1100
900

2000
1750
1500

2750
2400
2000

mm2

Number of bars

Operational current
in category AC-1
at ambient temperature

y 40 C
y 55 C
y 70 C

Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles

Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between
the poles:
v 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6
v 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25
v 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8

CR1 BL, BM

CR1 F630

CR1 F500

100

CR1 F400

80

CR1 F265

Millions of
operating 
cycles

CR1 F185

CR1 F150

Electrical durability (Ue y 440 V) (1)

CR1 BR

Bar c.s.a.

CR1 BP

1
0,8

0,6
0,4

0,2

0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04

0,02

0,01
60

8
9

250

400
275

350

600
500

800

1000

700

2000
1250

4000
2750
Current broken in A

Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - q = 40 C - Ic = Ie = 200 A
600 000 operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1F400.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.

10
Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

5/244

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

TeSys contactors

Selection

Magnetic latching contactors

Selection guide for switching the primaries 

of 3-phase transformers

Operating conditions

Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C

Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V, 5060 Hz
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which
reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely
exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:
v the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area
of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings, ...)
v the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and
saturation inductance),
v the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains
voltage at the moment of switch-on.
The peak current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated
current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is
independent of the no-load or on-load state of the transformer.

1
2
3

The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given
in the tables below.

Contactor selection

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour

Contactor size
Maximum permissible
current peak at switch-on
Maximum
operational power (1)

CR1
F150
1700

CR1
F185
2800

CR1
F265
3500

CR1
F400
5500

CR1
F500
6800

CR1
F630
9000

CR1
BL
18 000

CR1
BM
18 000

CR1
BP
24 000

CR1
BR
30 000

220230 V

kVA

25

40

50

75

100

140

230

230

300

380

380400 V

kVA

50

75

90

130

170

225

400

400

530

660

415440 V

kVA

55

80

100

140

190

250

450

450

560

700

500 V

kVA

65

95

110

170

225

280

480

480

600

750

660 V

kVA

80

120

140

200

270

315

600

600

800

950

1000 V

kVA

100

150

200

250

375

470

700

700

1000

1200

5
6

(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.

7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/245

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Magnetic latching contactors

Contactor type

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

CR1F150

CR1F185

CR1F265

1000

1000

1000

1500

1500

1500

Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60158-1,

BS 775, 60947-4
Conforming to VDE 0110 grC

Protective treatment

Standard version
Special version

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
For operation at Uc

C
C

- 60+ 80
- 15+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

Number of poles

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

Rated operational current (Ie)

(Ue y 440 V)

In AC-3, y 40 C
In AC-1, y 40 C
In AC-4, y 40 C
Up to

A
A
A
V

150
250
138
1000

185
275
170
1000

265
350
245
1000

Frequency limits
(sine wave)
Rated making capacity

Of the opeational current

Hz

25200

25200

25200

I rms

1700

2100

2940

Rated breaking capacity

I rms

A
A
A
A
Permissible short time rating
For 1 s
A
from cold state, with no current
For 5 s
A
flowing for previous 60 minutes 
For 10 s
A
at y 40 C
For 30 s
A
For 1 min
A
For 3 min
A
For 10 min
A
Short-circuit protection by fuses Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM)
A
q y 440 V
AC-1 circuit (type gG, BS 88) A

1500
1200
1100
450
1200
1200
1200
700
600
450
350
160
250

1800
1600
1200
600
1500
1500
1500
920
740
500
400
200
315

2450
2200
1700
800
2200
2200
2200
1230
950
620
480
315
400

Average impedance per pole

At lth and 50 Hz

mW

0.45

0.36

0.32

Power dissipated per pole

for the above operational currents

AC-3
AC-1

W
W

6
18

12
26

22
39

Connection

Number of conductors
Cable with lugs
Cable with connector
Number of bars
Bar c.s.a.
Bolt diameter
Tightening torque

1
120
120
2
25 x 3
8
18

1
150
150
2
25 x 3
8
18

1
240
240
2
32 x 4
10
35

TH

Pole characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

220440 V
500 V
660/690 V
1000 V

mm2
mm2
mm
N.m

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/246

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

CR1F400

CR1F500

CR1F630

CR1BL

CR1BM

CR1BP

CR1BR

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

TH


TC
TH

- 60+ 80
- 15+ 70

- 60+ 80
- 15+ 60

3000

3000

5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

3 or 4

3 or 4

3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

1, 2, 3 or 4

400
500
370
1000

500
700
460
1000

630
1000
560
1000

750
800
700
1000

1000
1250
800
1000

1500
2000
1250
1000

1800
2750
1500
1000

25200

25200

25200

5060

5060

5060

5060

4500

5000

6740

10 000

10 000

15 000

18 000

4000
3500
3000
1200
3600
3600
3600
2400
1700
1200
1000
400
500

5000
4500
3560
2500
4200
4200
4200
3200
2400
1500
1200
500
800

6300
5400
4600
3200
5050
5050
5050
4400
3400
2200
1600
630
1000

10 000
9000
8000
4000
9600
9600
7000
4800
3500
2100
1200
800
800

10 000
9000
8000
4000
9600
9600
8000
5200
3800
2400
1800
1200
1200

15 000
12 000
9000
5000
12 000
12 000
9600
6400
5200
3600
2800
800 x 2 (1)
1000 x 2 (1)

18 000
15 000
11 000
6000
15 000
15 000
12 000
8000
6300
4400
3600
1000 x 2 (1)
1200 x 2 (1)

0.28

0.18

0.12

0.18

0.18

0.13

0.09

45
70

45
88

48
120

88
115

180
280

290
520

360
680

3
100 x 5
4 x 10
35

4
100 x 10
4 x 10
35

1
2

2
2

150
240

2
2
2
2
2
30 x 5
40 x 5
60 x 5
50 x 5
80 x 5
10
10
12
4x8
4 x 10
35
35
58
21
35
(1) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturers recommendations.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/247

TeSys contactors

Characteristics

Magnetic latching contactors

Contactor type

1
2

CR1F150

Rated control
circuit voltage (Uc)

a 50 or 60 Hz

48415

a 400 Hz
c

48220

48220

c low consumption

48220

Control voltage limits

a and c

Latching

0.851.1 Uc

Unlatching

0.851.1 Uc

Maximum operating rate

at ambient temperature y 40 C

In operating cycles per hour

120

Mechanical durability

In millions of operating cycles

Average consumption

Latching

VA

2-pole

VA

3-pole

VA

1100

1600

1650

4-pole

VA

100

1600

1650

1-pole

VA

2-pole

VA

3-pole

VA

7.3

4-pole

VA

7.3

1-pole

VA

2-pole

VA

3-pole

VA

1260

1750

1800

4-pole

VA

1260

1750

1800

1-pole

VA

2-pole

VA

3-pole

VA

10

11

12

4-pole

VA

10

11

12

Latching

3/4-pole

500

500

500

Unlatching

3/4-pole

15

20

40

Latching

ms

3540

3540

4550

Unlatching

ms

50100

50100

50100

Unlatching

400 Hz and c

Latching

Unlatching

c low
consumption
Average operating time
at Uc (1)

(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.

Auxiliary contact characteristics

Type of contacts

LADN for contactors CR1F

Conventional thermal current

CR1F265

1-pole

50/60 Hz

CR1F185

Control circuit characteristics

Rated insulation voltage

(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V

Connection

Flexible or solid conductor

with or without cable end

Operational power of contacts

LADN for contactors CR1F

mm2

10
690
1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max

a.c. supply

d.c. supply

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600

operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making
current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power
broken (cos j 0.4).

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200

operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.

48

115

230

400

600

48

125

250

440

1 million operating cycles

VA

120

280

560

960

1440

90

75

68

61

Occasional making capacity

VA

2600

7000

13 000 15 000 9000

700

400

260

220

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/248

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

CR1F400

CR1F500

CR1F630

CR1BL

48415

110500

48220

110500

48220

110500

48220

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

0.851.1 Uc

120

120

CR1BM

CR1BP

CR1BR

1
2

650

650

650

650

1100

1100

1100

1100

1450

1650

2100

1650

1650

1650

1650

1450

1650

2100

1850

1850

1850

1850

110

110

110

110

125

125

125

125

12

9.5

165

165

165

165

12

9.5

175

175

175

175

600

600

600

600

1000

1000

1000

1000

1600

1800

2300

1500

1500

1500

1500

1600

1800

2300

1700

1700

1700

1700

100

100

100

100

115

115

115

115

16

13

11

150

150

150

150

16

13

11

160

160

160

160

500

550

620

70

60

45

4075

4080

4080

100150

100150

100150

100150

50100

50100

50100

2040

2040

2040

2040

3
4
5

(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
LAD N for contactors CR1 F

ZC4GM for contactors CR1 B

10

20

690

660

1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max

2 min; 4 max

Operational power of contacts

ZC4GM for contactors CR1B

6
7

a.c. supply

d.c. supply

Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400

operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making
current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power
broken (cos j 0.4).

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200

operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.

110
127

220

380

415
440

500

110

120

440

500

1 million operating cycles

VA

2000

4000

4000

4000

3500

250

250

230

200

Occasional making capacity

VA

14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000

1600

800

400

360

8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/249

TeSys contactors

References

Magnetic latching contactors

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply

Maximum thermal
current in category
AC-1
40 C

1
501612_1

A
250

2
CR1F1854

501613_1

5
CR1F500

501614_1

7
8
CR1BP33

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/250

Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
(440 V max)
A
150

Number
of poles

275
185

350
265

500
400

700
500

1000
630

800
750
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1250
1000
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
2000
1500
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
2750
1800
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite.
Characteristics :
pages 5/254 to 5/249

3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
1

Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

2
1

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(1)

CR1F150pp
CR1F1504pp
CR1F185pp
CR1F1854pp
CR1F265pp
CR1F2654pp
CR1F400pp
CR1F4004pp
CR1F500pp
CR1F5004pp
CR1F630pp
CR1F6304pp
CR1BL31p12
CR1BL31p21
CR1BL31p30
CR1BL32p12
CR1BL32p21
CR1BL32p30
CR1BL33p12
CR1BL33p21
CR1BL33p30
CR1BL34p12
CR1BL34p21
CR1BL34p30
CR1BM31p12
CR1BM31p21
CR1BM31p30
CR1BM32p12
CR1BM32p21
CR1BM32p30
CR1BM33p12
CR1BM33p21
CR1BM33p30
CR1BM34p12
CR1BM34p21
CR1BM34p30
CR1BP31p12
CR1BP31p21
CR1BP31p30
CR1BP32p12
CR1BP32p21
CR1BP32p30
CR1BP33p12
CR1BP33p21
CR1BP33p30
CR1BP34p12
CR1BP34p21
CR1BP34p30
CR1BR31p12
CR1BR31p21
CR1BR31p30
CR1BR32p12
CR1BR32p21
CR1BR32p30
CR1BR33p12
CR1BR33p21
CR1BR33p30
CR1BR34p12
CR1BR34p21
CR1BR34p30

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

Weight

kg
3.500
3.800
4.600
5.400
7.400
8.500
9.100
10.200
11.300
12.900
18.600
21.500
32.000
32.000
32.000
45.000
45.000
45.000
58.000
58.000
58.000
72.000
72.000
72.000
31.000
31.000
31.000
44.000
44.000
44.000
57.000
57.000
57.000
71.000
71.000
71.000
41.000
41.000
41.000
65.000
65.000
65.000
94.000
94.000
94.000
120.000
120.000
120.000
52.000
52.000
52.000
85.000
85.000
85.000
129.000
129.000
129.000
160.000
160.000
160.000

TeSys contactors

References

Magnetic latching contactors

Accessories

Accessories for contactors CR1F

501377_1

Description
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Time delay
auxiliary contacts
Contact blocks with
protected terminals
for 3-pole contactors
(for mounting on contactors
with closed arc chamber)
Power terminal
protection shrouds

501616_1

LADN

Number of
contacts or
shrouds
(1)

For use on

Reference

CR1F

LADN (1)

kg
0.050

(1)

CR1F

LADp (1)

0.060

Set of 2 blocks

CR1F150 and
CR1F185

LA9F103

0.300

Set of 6 shrouds 
for 3-pole
contactors

CR1F150 and
CR1F185
CR1F265 to
CR1F500
CR1F630

LA9F702

0.250

LA9F703

0.250

LA9F704

0.250

CR1F1504 and
CR1F1854
CR1F2654 to
CR1F5004
CR1F6304

LA9F707

0.300

LA9F708

0.300

LA9F709

0.300

Set of 8 shrouds 
for 4-pole
contactors

Weight

501617_1

Mechanical interlock
and power connections

Application

Reference

For assembly of 
reversing contactors and 
changeover contactor pairs

See pages 5/252 and 5/253

Accessories for contactors CR1B

Description

Application

Reference

Weight
kg
1.560

Mechanical interlock
For vertical assembly of 
EZ2LB0601
with mounting 
reversing contactors and 
accessories (3)
changeover contactor pairs
Kit containing 2
For mounting on 
LA9B103
1.620
bar mounting brackets 120 or 150 mm centres
(1) For maximum number per contactor and complete reference, see page 5/123.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales
Office):
Volts
48
110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500

501618_1

LA9F70p

2
3
4

LA9F103
Description

5
6

For contactors CR1F

a 50/60 Hz
a 400 Hz
c
c low
consumption

E7
E7
E7
EZ7

F7
F7
F7
FZ7

G7
G7
G7
GZ7

M7
M7
M7
MZ7

M7
M7
M7

U7

Q7

Q7

N7

For contactors CR1B

a 50400 Hz
c

G
M
M
U

Q
V
N
R
S

FD GD
MD
UD UCD

RD SD
(3) Positive mechanical interlocking between 2 vertically mounted contactors of identical or
different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand sides, crank pins on
the pole side.
Vertical fixing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.

8
9

EZ2LB0601

10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/251

TeSys contactors

Mounting

Magnetic latching contactors

Components for assembling reversing contactors 

and changeover contactor pairs CR1F
Horizontally or vertically mounted

Sets of power connections

3 2/L2

5 2/L3

2N

L2

L3

A1

1 2/L1

2
L1

A2
E1

7 1/L1

A1

5 1/L2

A2
E1

A1

1N

3 1/L3

6
W

4
V

1
2
U

L3
5
6

L1

L2
3

A1

3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs

LA9Fp977 or LA9Fp982

Reversing contactors
LA9Fp976

A2
E1

Mechanical interlocks


LA9Fp970 

Reversers assembled 
using 2 contactors of
identical rating, type:
CR1F150
CR1F185
CR1F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1F630

A2
E1

Horizontally mounted

3
Vertically mounted

4
5
6
7
8

Mechanical interlocks

Reversers assembled 
using 2 contactors of
identical rating, type:
CR1F150
CR1F185
CR1 F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1 F630

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G

Assembly A

LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L

Assembly C


Reversers assembled 
using 2 contactors of
different ratings, type:
CR1F150
CR1 F185
CR1F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1F630

LA9FG4F

Assembly A

LA9FH4F
LA9FJ4F
LA9FK4F
LA9FL4F
LA9FH4G
LA9FJ4G
LA9FK4G
LA9FL4G

Assembly B

Reversers assembled 
using 3 contactors of
identical or different ratings

LA9Fp4p4p

9
B

10

5/252

CR1 F500

F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630

F150
F185
F265
F400
F500
F630

Assembly C





Warning: the contactor ratings
must be in decreasing size from
top to bottom.

F150
F185
F265
F400
F500
F630

CR1 F265

CR1 F185

LA9FJ4H
LA9FK4H
LA9FL4H
LA9FK4J
LA9FL4J
LA9FK4K

TeSys contactors

References

Magnetic latching contactors

Components for assembling reversing contactors 

and changeover contactor pairs CR1F

Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

Contactor type

Set of power connections

3-pole
Reference

For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors

for motor control (1)

4-pole
Reference

Mechanical interlock
Weight
kg

Kit reference

Weight
kg

Horizontally mounted
CR1F150
CR1F185
CR1F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1F630

LA9FF976
LA9FG976
LA9FH976
LA9FJ976
LA9FK976
LA9FL976

0.600
0.780
1.500
2.100
2.350
3.800

LA9FF970
LA9FG970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FL970

0.060
0.060
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G
LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L

0.345
0.350
1.060
1.200
1.200
1.220

LA9FF970
LA9FG970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FJ970
LA9FL970

0.060
0.060
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150

LA9FF4F
LA9FG4G
LA9FH4H
LA9FJ4J
LA9FK4K
LA9FL4L

0.345
0.350
1.060
1.200
1.200
1.220

Vertically mounted
CR1F150
CR1F185
CR1F265
CR1F400
CR1F500
CR1F630
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

Horizontally mounted
CR1F1504
CR1F1854
CR1F2654
CR1F4004
CR1F5004
CR1F6304

LA9FF982
LA9FG982
LA9FH982
LA9FJ982
LA9FK982
LA9FL982

LA9FF977
LA9FG977
LA9FH977
LA9FJ977
LA9FK977
LA9FL977

0.460
0.610
1.200
1.800
2.300
3.400

Vertically mounted
CR1F1504
CR1F1854
CR1F2654
CR1F4004
CR1F5004
CR1F6304

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

Contactor type
At bottom

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs

Mechanical interlock
Kit reference
Weight
kg

Vertically mounted (3)

CR1F150 or F1504

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors

At top

CR1F185 or F1854
CR1F265 or F2654
CR1F400 or F4004
CR1F500 or F5004
CR1F630 or F6304
CR1F185 or F1854
CR1F265 or F2654
CR1F400 or F4004
CR1F500 or F5004
CR1F630 or F6304
CR1F265 or F2654
CR1F400 or F4004
CR1F500 or F5004
CR1F630 or F6304
CR1F400 or F4004
CR1F500 or F5004
CR1F630 or F6304
CR1F500 or F5004
CR1 F630 or F6304
Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted)
of identical or different ratings

LA9FG4F
LA9FH4F
LA9FJ4F
LA9FK4F
LA9FL4F
LA9FH4G
LA9FJ4G
LA9 FK4G
LA9FL4G
LA9FJ4H
LA9FK4H
LA9FL4H
LA9FK4J
LA9FL4J
LA9FL4K
Mechanical interlock
Kit reference (4)
LA9Fp4p4p

0.350
0.870
0.930
0.940
0.940
0.860
0.940
0.940
0.950
1.130
1.130
1.140
1.200
1.210
1.210

The contactor ratings must be in decreasing size 

from top to bottom.
(1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover
contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links.
(2) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
(3) With identical or different number of poles. Power connections to be made by the customer.
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the first dot with the code for the upper contactor, the
second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the bottom
contactor.
Contactors
CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630
Code
F
G
H
J
K
L
Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors:
CR1F500 top, CR1F26 middle and CR1F185 bottom: LA9FK4H4G.
Illustrations :
page 5/252

Dimensions :
page 5/260

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/253

6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Coils for contactors CR1F

Standard coils
Usual voltages

50400 Hz 50 Hz, 60 Hz

or c
V
V

Resistance of winding 
at q = 20 C
Latching
Unlatching
W

Reference

Voltage
code

Weight

kg

For contactors CR1F150

501470_1

48
110
127
208
220/230

LX0FF009

240
380/400
415

1.98
9.35
11.61
23.50
37.55
45.16
114.10
139.50

230.8
1453
1788
4098
5139
6544
12 447
16 717

LX0FF005
LX0FF006
LX0FF007
LX0FF020
LX0FF008
LX0FF009
LX0FF010
LX0FF011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440

220
1339
1676
3169
4729
4729
11 885
14 305

LX0FG005
LX0FG006
LX0FG007
LX0FG020
LX0FG008
LX0FG009
LX0FG010
LX0FG011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

0,560
0.560
0.560
0.560
0.560
0.560
0.560
0.560

183.4
1031
1325
2654
4090
5002
11 803
15 006

LX0FH005
LX0FH006
LX0FH007
LX0FH020
LX0FH008
LX0FH009
LX0FH010
LX0FH011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

0.780
0.780
0.780
0.780
0.780
0.780
0.780
0.780

90.5
813
1027
2643
3309
4074
9380
11 763

LX0FJ005
LX0FJ006
LX0-FJ007
LX0FJ020
LX0FJ008
LX0FJ009
LX0FJ010
LX0FJ011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

166
916
1159
2981
3733
4595
10 570
13 256

LX0FK005
LX0FK006
LX0FK007
LX0FK020
LX0FK008
LX0FK009
LX0FK010
LX0FK011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

1.220
1.220
1.220
1.220
1.220
1.220
1.220
1.220

204
1423
1830
2961
4603
5658
10 676
13 003

LX0FL005
LX0FL006
LX0FL007
LX0FL020
LX0FL008
LX0FL009
LX0FL010
LX0FL011

E7
F7
G7
L7
M7
U7
Q7
N7

1.460
1.460
1.460
1.460
1.460
1.460
1.460
1.460

For contactors CR1F185

48
110
127
208
220/230

240
380/400
415

1,42
6.92
8.45
21.30
26.27
32.95
82.29
102.30

For contactors CR1F265

501471_1

48
110
127
208
220/230

240
380/400
415

1.34
6.90
8.56
20.20
25.77
33.03
78.39
102.9

For contactors CR1F400

LX0FH009

48
110
127
208
220/230

240
380/400
415

1.32
8.09
9.79
24.40
30.14
37.02
94.80
121.10

For contactors CR1F500

48
110
127
208
220/230

240
380/400
415

1.57
7.53
9.56
23.60
28.81
35.67
89.56
112.06

For contactors CR1F630

48
110
127
208
220/230

10

5/254

240
380/400
415

0.87
5.20
6.45
20.20
25.36
25.36
60.95
77.97

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Coils for contactors CR1F

Special coils

Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power
sources for latching and unlatching.
501472_1

Coil voltages at 50Hz,

60Hz, 400 Hz or c
Latching
Unlatching
V
V

Resistance of winding 
at q = 20 C
Latching
Unlatching
W
W

Reference

Voltage
code

Weight

kg

For contactors CR1F150

220

24

39.5

LX0FF224

MB7

0.440

19

LX0FG224

MB7

0.560

29.5

LX0FH224

MB7

0.780

23

LX0FJ224

MB7

1.120

29

26

LX0FK224

MB7

1.220

26

41

LX0FL224

MB7

1.460

Reference

Voltage
code

29.5

For contactors CR1F185

220

24

26.5

For contactors CR1F265

LX0FF030

220

24

26

For contactors CR1F400

220

24

30

For contactors CR1F500

220

24

For contactors CR1F630

220

24

Coils with low inrush consumption

Usual voltages
c
V

Resistance of winding 
at q = 20 C
Latching
Unlatching
W
W

Weight

kg

For contactors CR1F150

48
110
127
220

4.56
22.37
35.54
89.85

140.56
706.44
1086.36
3342.51

LX0FF055
LX0FF056
LX0FF057
LX0FF058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

0.440
0.440
0.440
0.440

106.54
536.26
732.64
2378.62

LX0FG055
LX0FG056
LX0FG057
LX0FG058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

0.570
0.570
0.570
0.570

74.26
364.61
458.45
1344.46

LX0FH055
LX0FH056
LX0FH057
LX0FH058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

0.800
0.800
0.800
0.800

36.36
171.49
221.20
648.79

LX0FJ055
LX0FJ056
LX0FJ057
LX0FJ058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150

41
193.36
313.60
918.68

LX0FK055
LX0FK056
LX0FK057
LX0FK058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

1.270
1.270
1.270
1.270

59.17
365.33
452.27
1071.43

LX0FL055
LX0FL056
LX0FL057
LX0FL058

EZ7
FZ7
GZ7
MZ7

1.500
1.500
1.500
1.500

For contactors CR1F185

48
110
127
220

5.19
25.50
32.75
102.44

For contactors CR1F265

48
110
127
220

5.19
25
30.98
97.89

5
6
7

For contactors CR1F400

48
110
127
220

5.05
25.39
31.86
98.19

For contactors CR1F500

48
110
127
220

4.42
22.74
28.25
85.12

For contactors CR1F630

48
110
127
220

3.94
19.36
25.39
74.44

5/255

10

References

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Coils for contactors CR1B

Coils with TC treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)

Usual voltages
c
a
50400 Hz

Resistance
at q = 20 C

Reference

Weight

kg

For contactors CR1Bp31

501473_1

110125

220
250

110120

220240

380400
415440

19.7
25.2
77.2
94
128
197
257

WB1KB140
WB1KB134
WB1KB136
WB1KB139
WB1KB125
WB1KB126
WB1KB138

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

9.6
11.4
19.7
32.5
49.7
77.2
128
160

WB1KB133
WB1KB121
WB1KB140
WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB136
WB1KB125
WB1KB137

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

7.2
9.6
11.4
32.5
61
94
128

WB1KB123
WB1KB133
WB1KB121
WB1KB124
WB1KB135
WB1KB139
WB1KB125

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

5.8
7.2
11.4
25.2
32.5
49.7
77.2
94

WB1KB132
WB1KB123
WB1KB121
WB1KB134
WB1KB124
WB1KB122
WB1KB136
WB1KB139

1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120

For contactors CR1Bp32

WB1KBppp

110
125

220
250

110
120127

220/230
240

380400
415440

For contactors CR1Bp33

110
125
220
250

110
120127

240

380415
440

For contactors CR1Bp34

110
125

250

6
7

110
120127

220/230
240

380
400440

Coils with TH treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)

Add suffix TH to the references selected above. Example: WB1KB140TH.

8
9
10

5/256

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Coils for contactors CR1B

Accessories for use with coils (1)

Coils
(TC or
TH)

Additional resistors (2)

R1
W

Reference

R2
W

Reference

Automatic coil
cut-out contact
(3)
Nb Reference

Rectifier
(4)
Reference

501474_1

For contactors CR1Bp31

501475_1

DR2SC0220

WB1KB140

68

DR2SC0068 47

DR2SC0047

WB1KB134

68

DR2SC0068 68

DR2SC0068

WB1KB136

220

DR2SC0220 180

DR2SC0180

WB1KB139

270

DR2SC0270 220

DR2SC0220

WB1KB125

330

DR2SC0330 270

DR2SC0270

WB1KB126

470

DR2SC0470 470

DR2SC0470

WB1KB138

1000

DR2SC1000 470

DR2SC0470

ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4 GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8
ZC4GM2 or
ZC4GM8

DR5TE1U

DR5TE1U

DR5TE1S

DR5TE1S

For contactors CR1Bp32

501476_1

ZC4GM2

WB1KB133

10

DR2SC0010 33

DR2SC0033

PR4FB0011

DR5TE1U

WB1KB121

47

DR2SC0047 39

DR2SC0039

PR4FB0010

DR5TE1U

WB1KB140

100

DR2SC0100 47

DR2SC0047

PR4FB0009

WB1KB124

120

DR2SC0120 120

DR2SC0120

PR4 FB0007

DR5TE1U

WB1KB122

220

DR2SC0220 150

DR2SC0150

PR4FB0007

DR5TE1U

WB1KB136

330

DR2SC0330 220

DR2SC0220

PR4FB0006

WB1KB125

470

DR2SC0470 470

DR2SC0470

PR4FB0005

DR5TE1S

WB1KB137

680

DR2SC0680 560

DR2SC0560

PR4FB0004

DR5TE1S

For contactors CR1Bp33

WB1KB123

39

DR2SC0039 27

DR2SC0027

PR4FB0012

DR5TE1U

WB1KB133

47

DR2SC0047 39

DR2SC0039

PR4FB0011

DR5TE1U

WB1KB121

56

DR2SC0056 47

DR2SC0047

PR4FB0010

WB1KB124

180

DR2-SC0180 120

DR2SC0120

PR4FB0008

DR5TE1U

WB1KB135

270

DR2SC0270 270

DR2SC0270

PR4FB0006

WB1KB139

470

DR2SC0470 390

DR2SC0390

PR4FB0005

DR5TE1S

WB1KB125

680

DR2-SC0680 470

DR2SC0470

PR4FB0004

DR5TE1S

For contactors CR1Bp34

501477_1

PR4FB0014

DR5TE1U

WB1KB132

33

DR2SC0033 27

DR2SC0027

PR4FB0014 DR5TE1U

WB1KB123

47

DR2SC0047 33

DR2SC0033

PR4FB0012

DR5TE1U

WB1KB121

56

DR2SC0056 56

DR2SC0056

PR4FB0010

WB1KB134

150

DR2SC0150 120

DR2SC0120

PR4FB0008

DR5TE1U

WB1KB124

180

DR2-SC0180 150

DR2SC0150

PR4FB0007

DR5TE1U

WB1KB122

270

DR2SC0270 220

DR2SC0220

PR4FB0007

WB1KB136

390

DR2SC0390 390

DR2SC0390

PR4FB0006

DR5TE1S

WB1KB139

560

DR2SC0560 470

DR2SC0470

PR4FB0005

DR5TE1S

(1) For connections, see page 5/267.

(2) Weight of resistors DR2SCpppp : 0.030 kg.
(3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4GMp : 0.030 kg and PR4FB00pp : 0.600 kg.
(4) Weight of rectifier DR5TE1p : 0.100 kg. The rectifier is for use on a.c. only.

5/257

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1F

References
Description

501478_1

Complete sets
of contacts
for 3 or 4 poles (1)

For contactor
3-pole

2
LA5FG431

4-pole

3
4
501479_1

Arc chambers

3-pole

5
6

4-pole

LA5F40050

Reference
CR1F150

LA5FF431

Weight
kg
0.270

CR1F185

LA5FG431

0.350

CR1F265

LA5FH431

0.660

CR1F400

LA5F400803

0.660

CR1F500

LA5 F500803

0.660

CR1F630

LA5F630803

0.660

CR1F1504

LA5FF441

0.360

CR1F1854

LA5FG441

0.465

CR1F2654

LA5FH441

0.880

CR1F4004

LA5F400804

0.465

CR1F5004

LA5F500804

0.465

CR1F6304

LA5F630804

0.465

CR1F150

LA5F15050

0.490

CR1F185

LA5F18550

0.670

CR1F265

LA5F26550

0.920

CR1F400

LA5F40050

1.300

CR1F500

LA5F50050

1.850

CR1F630

LA5F63050

3.150

CR1F1504

LA5F150450

0.660

CR1F1854

LA5F185450

0.910

CR1F2654

LA5F265450

1.220

CR1F4004

LA5F400450

1.740

CR1F5004

LA5F500450

2.500

CR1F6304

LA5F630450

4.200

(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors,
1back-plate, clamping screws and washers.

8
9
10

5/258

References (continued)

TeSys contactors

Magnetic latching contactors

Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1B

References (continued)
501480_1

Description
Sets of contacts
(1 moving contact, 
1 fixed contact)

Description
Moving contact only
(for one finger)
Fixed contact only
(for one finger)
Blow-out horn only
(for 1 finger)
Arc chambers
(for a single pole)

501482_1

501481_1

PA1LB80
(PA1LB76 + PA1LB75)

ZC4GM1

PA1LB89

501483_1

Auxiliary
contact blocks

For
contactors
CR1BL

Number of
sets required
per pole
1

Unit
reference
of set
PA1LB80

CR1BM

PA1LB80

0.420

CR1BP

PA1LB80

0.420

CR1BR

PA1LB80

0.420

For
contactors

Composition

Reference

All ratings

PA1LB75

Weight
kg
0.220

All ratings

PA1LB76

0.200

All ratings

PA1LB89

0.120

CR1BL

PA1LB50

3.700

CR1BM

PA1LB50

3.700

CR1BP

PA1PB50

6.200

CR1BR

PA1RB50

8.500

All ratings

ZC4GM1

0.030

ZC4GM2

0.030

ZC4GM9

0.030

ZC4GM8

0.030

All ratings

1 N/O contact 
- normal
1 N/C contact 
- normal
1 N/O contact
- gold flashed
1 N/C contact
- gold flashed

PR4FB00pp (1)

0.600

All ratings

PV1FA80

0.035

All ratings

PN1FB50

0.220

All ratings

ET1KB50

10.600

For
contactors

No. of
parts required

Reference

CR1B
(1 pole)
CR1B
(2, 3 or 4 poles)
CR1BL, BM 
or BP
CR1BR

DV1RT292

Weight
kg
0.050

DV1RT292

0.050

1 per pole

DV1RC201

0.020

1 per pole

DV1RC155

0.020

All ratings
All ratings
All ratings
N/C pole
for automatic cut-out coil
Set of moving and fixed
contacts for N/C pole
Arc chamber
for N/C pole
Electromagnet
PA1LB50

Description

501484_1

Return springs 
for moving part 
of electromagnet
N/O pole springs

Weight
kg
0.420

(1) Reference to be completed, see page 5/257.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

PR4FB004pp

5/259

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

Magnetic latching contactors CR1F

CR1F150 to F500
CR1F150, F185, F265

CR1F400, F500

S1

44,5

F150 M8x25
F185 M8x25
F265 M10x35

(1)

6xM10x35
8x8,5

3x6,5

=
Z

G1
G

23,5
Y

5
6
7

Q1

Q1

CR1

G
G1

X1

J
J1

b1

b
b2

120
180

X1

=
=

Common side view

F150
F185
F265
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
a
163.5
201.5
168.5
208.5
201.5
244.5
b
170
170
174
174
203
203
b1
137
137
137
137
145
145
b2
301
301
305
305
370
370
c
171
171
181
181
213
213
f
131
131
130
130
147
147
G
106
143
111
151
142
190
G1
80
80
80
80
96
96
J
106
106
106
106
106
106
J1
120
120
120
120
120
120
L
107
107
113.5
113.5
141
141
M
150
150
154
154
178
178
P
40
40
40
40
48
48
Q
26
26
29
29
39
34
Q1
57.5
55.5
59.5
59.5
66.5
66.5
S
20
20
20
20
25
25
S1
27
27
34
34
38
38
Y
44
44
38.5
30.5
30.5
21.5
Z
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
15.5
15.5
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage in V
200500
CR1F150
10
CR1F185
10
CR1F265
10
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.

6601000
15
15
15

CR1

F400
3P
a
213
G min.
66
b
206
b2
375
c
219
f
146
G supplied 80
G max.
102
G1 supplied 170
G1 min. 156
G1 max. 192
J
12
L
145
M
181
P
48
Q
43
Q1
74
S
25

4P
261
66
206
375
219
146
80
150
170
156
240
60
145
181
48
43
74
25

F500
3P
233
66
238
400
232
150
80
120
170
156
210
32
146
208
55
47
77
30

4P
288
66
238
400
232
150
140
175
230
156
265
27
146
208
55
47
77
30

f = minimum distance required for coil removal.

X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational
voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage in V
200500 6601000
CR1F400
15
20
CR1F500
15
20

CR1F630
40

64
6xM12x45

4x10,5

X1

264

280
304
464

180

X1

72

(1)

60,5

10

155
197
255
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/260

80

80

Q1

181 (2)

J1

CR1F630
3P
4P
a
309
389
G supplied
180
240
G min.
100
150
G max.
195
275
J1
61
81
Q
60
60
Q1
89
89
X1: Min. electrical clearance according to
operational voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage in V
X1
200500
20
6901000
30
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.
(2) Minimum distance required for coil
removal.

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

TeSys contactors

Mounting

Magnetic latching contactors CR1F

CR1F150F265
Panel mounted

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1PA, PB, PC

(1)

3x6,5

On rails DZ5MB on 120 mm centres

110

AF1 EA6

120

110

110

DZ5 MF5

=
J1

c
CR1
c

F150
F185
3P
171
181
4P
171
181
G
3P
80
80
4P
80
80
J
3P
26.5
29
4P
45
49
J1
3P
57
59.5
4P
75.5
79.5
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.

F265
213
213
96
96
44.5
68.5
61.5
85.5

CR1
c
G

F150
171
171
80
80

3P
4P
3P
4P

F185
181
181
80
80

F265
213
213
96
96

CR1
c
G

15
F150
171
171
80
80

3P
4P
3P
4P

F185
181
181
80
80

F265
213
213
96
96

CR1F150F650

On 2 notched uprights AM1ECppp

AM1 EC200

AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2)

AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10

AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618

AF1 CD061

AF1 VA618
M6

AF1 VA618
M6

M6

120

110

LA9 F100

25

8,5

10,5

G
AM1 EC200

35

=
c

AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820

180

(1)

G
AM1 EC200

G1
G2
G3

CR1
c

F150
F185
F265
F400
F500
F630
3P
171
181
213
213
226
250
4P
171
181
213
213
226
250
G (M6)
3P
80
80
96

4P
80
80
96

G1 ( 8.5)
3P

80
80

4P

80
140

G2 ( 10.5)
3P

180
4P

240
(1) AF1CDppp or AF1VAppp.
(2) This AM1EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).

9
10

Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/261

TeSys contactors

Mounting (continued)

Magnetic latching contactors CR1F

Reversing contactors 2 x CR1F150F265

P1

=
120 (2)
=

110/120
=

2
=
J1

=
G1

=
G1

J1
J1

J3

G1

J2

G1

3
4

=
J

2 x CR1
a
3P
4P
b
3P
4P
G1
3P
4P
J
3P
4P
J1
3P
4P
P1
3P
4P

8x8,5 (1)

8x8,5 (1)

180

3x6,5

P1

3x6,5

Reversing contactors 2 x CR1F400F630

Horizontally mounted

J1
J3

a
F150
345
422
170
170
80
80
71
111
57
75.5
71
71

F185
357
437
174
174
80
80
78
118
59.5
79.5
78
78

F265
425
521
203
203
96
96
109
157
61.5
85.5
100
100

2 x CR1
a

3P
4P
b
3P
4P
G
3P
4P
G1
3P
4P
J
3P
4P
J1
3P
4P
J2
3P
4P
J3
3P
4P
P1
3P
4P
(1) Except F630: 4 x 10.5.
(2) Except F630: 180.

F400
446
542
206
206
80
80
170
170
157
157
64.5
112.5
67
67
19.5
67.5
107
107

F500
485
595
238
238
80
140
170
230
156
156
84.5
79.5
66
66
39.5
34.5
112
112

7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/262

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

F630
636
796
304
304
180
240

139
139
68.5
68.5

137
137

TeSys contactors

Mounting (continued)

Magnetic latching contactors CR1F

Reversing contactors

(3)
= =

J1

(6)

(1)

= =

(5)

J4

80

9
12,5

80
J2

J2

(1) Mechanical interlock shaft.

(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only.
(3) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1F150F265.
(4) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1F265.
(5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 mm for CR1F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 mm.
Assembly type
A
B
LA9F
F4F G4F G4G
H4F J4F
G1
3P

96
80
4P

96
80
G2
3P

4P

G3
3P
0
3
0
21
45
4P
0
4
0
27
26
G4
3P

4P

G5
3P

60
83
4P

83
83
H
min.
200 210 220
240 250
max.
310 300 310
380 380
H1
min.
80
90
100
110 80
max.
190 180 190
250 210
J1
3P
133 134 134
149.5 137
4P
145 146 146
164.5 185
J2
3P
133 133 134
183 133
4P
145 145 146
145 145
J3
3P
48.5 53
53

4P
67
73
73

J4
3P
48.5 54
53
48.5 48.5
4P
67
69
73
67
67
(7) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.

G4

H1

G3(2)

(4)
J4

2
3

(1)

J1

F330 }120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630

(3)
120

(1)

(4)
9
G3(2)

G1

(6)

H1

J1

G5

120

= =

H1

G3
(2)

12,5
(5)
(1)

G1

(6)

(3)
=
=

G5

Assembly C

F330 }120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630

12,5
(5)
(1)

80

180

J3
(1)

F330 }120
F265
F400
F500 180
F630

Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9Fppp.

2 contactors CR1F of identical or different ratings (CR1F150F630), see pages 5/252 and 5/253.
Assembly A
Assembly B

G2
J2

5
K4F
80
140

45
26

83
83
270
380
100
210
157
212
183
145

48.5
67

L4F
180
240

35
17

74
74
310
380
140
210
241
321
133
145

48.5
67

H4G
96
96

19
23

60
83
250
380
120
250
149.5
164.5
134
146

53
73

J4G
80
80

42
22

83
83
250
380
90
220
137
185
134
146

53
73

K4G
80
140

42
22

83
83
270
380
110
220
157
212
134
146

53
73

L4G
180
240

33
13

74
74
310
380
150
220
241
321
134
146

53
73

C
H4H
96
96
96
96
0
0
60
83
60
83
250
380
130
260
149.5
164.5
142.5
164.5

J4H
80
80
96
96
23
0
60
83
83
83
260
380
110
230
137
185
149.5
164.5

K4H
80
140
96
96
23
0
60
83
83
83
280
380
130
230
157
212
149.5
164.5

L4H
180
240
96
96
14
9 (7)
60
83
74
74
330
380
170
220
24
321
149.5
164.5

J4J
80
80
80
80
0
0
83
83
83
83
260
380
60
200
137
185
137
185

K4J
80
140
80
80
0
0
83
83
83
83
280
380
100
200
157
212
137
185

L4J
180
240
80
80
9 (7)
9 (7)
83
83
74
74
325
380
140
195
241
321
137
185

K4K
80
140
80
140
0
0
83
83
83
83
300
380
120
200
157
212
157
212

L4K
180
240
80
140
9 (7)
9 (7)
83
83
74
74
345
380
160
195
244
321
157
212

L4L
180
240
180
240
0
0
74
74
74
74
380
380
200
200
241
321
241
312

6
7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/263

TeSys contactors

Dimensions

Magnetic latching contactors CR1B

Contactors CR1B
185

Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole

4-pole

290

4
5

P
M

15

30

30

51

Q1

M2

30

T
CR1BL
1P
2P
50
50
59
59
16
16
345
445
285
385

121
121
100
100
100
100
122
122
10
10
30
30
9
9

a
b
c
L
M
M1
M2
N
P
Q1
R
S
T

3P
50
59
16
540
480

121
100
100
122
10
30
9

4P
50
59
16
760

308
392
121
100
100
122
10
30
9

CR1BM
1P
2P
63
63
55
55
20
20
345
445
285
385

125
125
100
100
100
100
157
157
17
17
30
30
11
11

3P
63
55
20
540
480

125
100
100
157
17
30
11

4P
63
55
20
760

308
392
125
100
100
157
17
30
11

CR1BP
1P
2P
100
100
55
55
20
20
385
540
325
480

125
125
150
150
110
110
173
173
20
20
60
60
11
11

3P
100
55
20
760
700

125
150
110
173
20
60
11

4P
100
55
20
1065

455
550
125
150
110
173
20
60
11

CR1BR
1P
2P
125
125
50
50
25
25
445
635
385
575

130
130
195
195
123
123
173
173
20
20
60
60
11
11

3P
125
50
25
885
825

130
195
123
173
20
60
11

Minimum electrical clearance

Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase a current).

3-phase a voltage
380-415-440 V
X1
X2
500 V
X1
X2
600 V
X1
X2
1000 V
X1
X2

CR1BL
100
150
100
150
150
200
200
250

CR1BM
100
150
100
150
150
200
200
250

X1

Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors

EZ2LB0601

E = 600

P
M1

Q1

A = (E112) 488

15

365

260
c 85 b c

30

X2

15

15

44

350

R
350

Common side view

10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/264

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

CR1BP
150
200
150
220
200
250
200
250

CR1BR
200
250
200
250
200
250
250
300

4P
125
50
25
1065

455
550
130
195
123
173
20
60
11

TeSys contactors

Adjustment
characteristics

Magnetic latching contactors CR1B

501391_1

Complete pole

Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel








1
2
3
4

2
3

Moving circuit
Coil
Moving circuit
Return spring

N/O pole adjustment








1
2
3
4
5

Fixed contact
Moving contact
Pull-in gap adjustment
Adjustment of application force
Pole spring

4
5

N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment

1
b

F
2










1
2
3
4
5

6
Fixed contact
Moving contact
Opening gap adjustment
Adjustment of application force
Pole spring

7
8

4
5

a.c. or d.c. supply with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type
Electromagnet
(EB5KB50)
Coil
(WB1KB)
N/O power pole
(PA1)
N/C automatic
coil cut-out pole
(PR4)

Pick-up travel (E)

Pull-in travel (e)
Pull-in voltage
Drop-out voltage
Application force (F) to contact
per pole
Application force (F)
Opening gap (b) with
electromagnet closed

mm
mm
V
V
daN

CR1BL
30
10
0.75 Uc
0.30.5 Uc
30

CR1BM
30
10
0.75 Uc
0.30.5 Uc
30

CR1BP
30
10
0.75 Uc
0.30.5 Uc
30 (1)

CR1BR
30
10

0.30.5 Uc
30 (2)

daN
mm

0.9
3.5 0.5

0.9
3.5 0.5

0.9
3.5 0.5

0.9
3.5 0.5

9
10

(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267

5/265

TeSys contactors

Schemes

Magnetic latching contactors CR1F

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

7/L4

T1/2

T2/4

T3/6

T4/8

5/L3
T3/6

A2
E1

A1

3/L2
T2/4

A2
E1

A1

4-pole

1/L1

3-pole

T1/2

Contactors CR1F

53/NO

61/NC

71/NC

83/NO

62

72

84

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

62

74

84

61/NC
62

53/NO

51/NC
52
88

76

75/NC

87/NO

54

63/NO

3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31

61/NC

64

2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make

before break LADC22

62

53/NO

2 N/O + 2 N/C LADN22

54

2 N/C LADN02

53/NO

(94)

2 N/O LADN20

54

83/NO
84

81/NC

73/NO
74

82

63/NO
64

71/NC

53/NO
54

72

61/NC
62

81/NC
82

61/NC

71/NC
72

62

53/NO
54

61/NC

51/NC

53/NO

52

4 N/C LADN04

41/NC
(92)
42
(91)

4 N/O LADN40

43 NO

44
(93)

1 N/O + 3 N/C LADN13

62

1 N/O + 1 N/C LADN11

54

1 N/C LADN01 (1)

54

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)

1 N/O LADN10 (1)

(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/123)

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

31/NC

41/NC

53/NO

63/NO

22

32

44

32

42

54

64

43/NO
44

14

31/NC

21/NC
22

32

13/NO
14

2 N/O + 2 N/C
LADN22G

Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

74

84

67/NO

55/NC

68

65/NC
66

2/L3

2N

1/L2

1/L3

1N

1/L1
A2
E1

L3

A1

1/L3
5
6

A2
E1

1/L2
3
4

1/L1
1
A1
2

Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different ratings

Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

5/266

N
L3
L2
L1

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

2/L1

2/L2

2/L3

2N

6
2/L3

A1

4
2/L2

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

A2
E1

2
2/L1

A2
E1

10

A1

L3
L2
L1

Dimensions :
pages 5/260 and 5/263

A2
E1

4
L2

L1

A1

2/L2
3

2/L1
1

1/L2

1/L1
7

1/L3
3

1N
1
2

A1

6
W

A2
E1

4
V

A1
2
U

A2
E1

L3
5
6

L2
3
4

L1
1
2

4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1F1504F6304

A1
A2
E1

On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make

LADSp

56

57/NO
58

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADRp

67/NO

Horizontally mounted

62

84

53/NO

83/NO

74

Time delay auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADTp

3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1F150F630

2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard

LA1DZ31

54

73/NO

64

63/NO
64

53/NO

53/NO
54

63/NO

63/NO
64

2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard

LA1DZ40

54

53/NO

2 N/O (5-24 V)
LA1DY20

54

2 N/O (24-50 V)
LA1DX20

68

2 N/O + 2 N/C
LADN22P

55/NC

1 N/O +1 N/C
LADN11G

56

1 N/O +1 N/C
LADN11P

TeSys contactors

Schemes (continued)

Magnetic latching contactors

Contactors CR1B

A2

A2

A2

CR1Bp32p12

CR1Bp32p21

CR1Bp32p30

A1

A1

A1

A1

CR1Bp31p30

A2

CR1Bp33p30

A2

A2

A1

CR1Bp34p30

A1

CR1Bp34p21

A2

A2

A1

CR1Bp34p12
A1

A2

A1

A2

CR1Bp33p21
A1

A2

CR1Bp33p12

A2

A1

CR1Bp31p21

A1

CR1Bp31p12

Wiring schemes

KM1:5

KM1:5

5 L3
6
5

Connectors CR1B

KM1:1

3 L2
4
3

1 L1
2
1

Contactors CR1F and CR1B Contactors CR1F

with thermal overload relay

R1

14

13 A2

KM 1

13

14

A2

KM1:1

S1

R2

14
A1
E1

M
3a

KM1

14

KM 1

A1 96

98

22

13

F1

97

21

14

98

96

13

S2

S1

(1)

95 2

KM1

S2

F1

F1

13

95

97

KM1

(1) automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4GM or PR4FB00pp

S1: latching pushbutton
S2: unlatching pushbutton

Coils for contactors CR1F

Pushbutton control

Scheme of internal circuit

Start
Latching 
winding

A1

Stop

A2

Switch control
Start/Stop

Unlatching
winding

E1

Warning: terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.

10
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245

Characteristics :
pages 5/246 to 5/249

References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259

Dimensions :
page 5/264

5/267

Selection guide

TeSys modular equipment

Applications

Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors

Functions

GC contactors for standard applications

GY Dual tariff contactors

Rating

1663 A

1663 A

Number of 17.5 mm modules

(variable, depending on size and number of poles)

13

14

Device type

GC

GY

Pages

5/278

5/292

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5/268

Control of lighting heating, hot

water systems, ventilation
systems and small motors

Direct control of motors

Fuse protection

Motor control and protection

1
2

Impulse relays

Rotary switch disconnectors

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers,

with or without neutral

Thermal-magnetic motor 
circuit-breakers

16 A

2580 A

Up to 125 A

0.132 A

2.5

18

2.5

GF 16

VVD, VVE

DF8, DF10, DF14, DF22

GV2 M

4/26

3/46

3
4
5

5/286

Please consult your Regional Sales

Office

6
7
8
9
10

5/269

TeSys modular equipment

Presentation,
standards

Standard contactors TeSys GC

538862

Presentation

TeSys GC contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures.
These contactors feature:

1
2

b Easy installation
v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail,
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten, captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
b Compact size
All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).

GC25

b User safety
v use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards,
v live parts protected against direct finger contact,
v completely safe operation,
v state indication on front panel.

Standards

This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public.
Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.

Applications

4
5

TeSys GC modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase
or 4phase loads up to 100 A.

Power switching
These contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific
supply is required:
b lighting,
b heating,
b ventilation,
b motorised shutters or gates.

6
7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/270

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

TeSys m
odular equipment

Setting-up
precautions

Standard contactors
TeSys
GC

Setting-up precautions
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.

It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space 3 equal to one module, or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules (GAC 5).

4
5

3
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the
enclosure is > 40 C

Contactor rating
40 C
16 A
16 A
25 A
25 A
40 A
40 A
63 A
63 A
100 A
100 A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted

50 C
14 A
22 A
36 A
57 A
87 A

60 C (1)
13 A
20 A
32 A
50 A
80 A

6
7

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

5/271

Contactor selection for

lighting circuits

TeSys m
odular equipment
Modular contactors

Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)

Presentation of installations according to type of supply

L1

230V

Single-phase circuit, 230 V

3-phase circuit, 230 V

230V

L2
L3

The maximum number of lamps

which can be operated per
phase is equal to the number of
lamps in the single phase
230V table divided by 3.

230V 230V

L1

3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)

The maximum number of lamps

which can be operated per
phase is equal to the total
number of lamps in the singlephase 230 V table.

230V

L3

230V

L2

230V

L1

Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole)

Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single
fitting

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Contactor
rating

20
40
50
80
110
0.39 0.43 0.70 0.80 1.2

20
40
58
80
110
0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79
5
5
7
7
16

15
20
40
60

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Maximum 22
number
30
of lamps
70
100

Twin
fitting
P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

13
17
35
56

10
15
30
48

7
10
20
32

15
20
40
60

10
15
30
43

10
15
30
43

5
7
14
20

Non corrected

With series correction

Contactor
rating

2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140
0.44 0.82 1.34 1.64 2.2

2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140
0.26 0.48 0.78 0.96 1.3
3.5 4.5 7
9
18

30
46
80
123

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Maximum 20
number
30
of lamps
50
75

20
28
60
90

11
16
26
42

7
10
16
25

5
8
13
21

4
6
10
16

17
25
43
67

10
16
27
42

9
13
22
34

6
10
16
25

High pressure mercury vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Contactor
rating

50 80 125 250 400 700

0.6 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4

50 80 125 250 400 700 1000

0.35 0.50 0.7 1.5 2.4 4
5.7
7
8
10 18 25 40 60

Maximum 15 10 8
4
2
1
10 9
9
4
3
number
20 15 10 6
4
2
15 13 10 6
4
of lamps
34 27 20 10 6
4
28 25 20 11 8
53 40 28 15 10 6
43 38 30 17 12
IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers

10

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

5/272

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

2
2
5
7

1
3
5

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Contactor selection for

lighting circuits (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
Modular contactors

Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) (continued)

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Contactor
rating

18 35 55 90 135 180
0.35 1.4 1.4 2.1 3.1 3.1

18 35 55 90 135 180
0.35 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9
5
20 20 26 45 40

14
21
40
60

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Maximum 18
number
34
of lamps
57
91

4
9
14
24

5
9
14
24

3
6
9
19

2
4
6
10

2
4
6
10

3
5
10
15

3
5
10
15

2
4
8
11

1
2
4
6

1
2
5
7

High pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Contactor
rating

70
1

150 250 400 1000

1.8 3
4.4 10.3

70 150 250 400 1000

0.6 0.7 1.5 2.5 6
12 20 32 45 100

4
7
13
18

6
9
18
25

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Maximum 8
number
12
of lamps
20
32

2
4
8
11

1
3
5
8

1
2
3

6
9
18
25

2
3
6
9

2
4
8
12

1
2
4
6

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Contactor
rating

35 70 150 250 400 1000

0.3 0.5 1
1.5 2.5 6

39 70 150 250 400 1000 2000

0.3 0.5 1
1.5 2.5 6
5.5
6
12 20 32 45 85 60

12
18
31
50

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

Maximum 27
number
40
of lamps
68
106

16
24
42
64

8
12
20
32

5
8
14
21

3
5
8
13

1
2
4
5

6
9
16
25

4
6
10
15

3
4
7
10

2
3
5
7

1
3
4

1
2
3
5

60 75 100 150 200 300

0.26 0.32 0.44 0.65 0.87 1.3

Maximum 30
number
45
of lamps
85
125

25
38
70
100

19
28
50
73

12
18
35
50

10
14
26
37

7
10
18
25

500 1000
2.17 4.4

Contactor
rating

4
6
10
15

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

2
3
6
8

5
6

Incandescent and halogen lamps

P (W)
IB (A)

3
4

Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps

P (W)
IB (A)
C (F)

7
8

Halogen lamps used with transformer

P (W)
IB (A)

60 80 105 150
0.26 0.35 0.45 0.65

Maximum 9
8
6
4
of lamps 14 12 9
6
27 23 18 13
40 35 27 19
IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Contactor
rating

16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A

9
10

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

5/273

Contactor selection for

heating circuits (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
Modular contactors

Heating (AC-7a)

Single-phase, 2-pole switching

2
3-phase switching

Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators,

heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states
must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on.

Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life

Electrical durability
(in operating cycles)

Single-phase switching
230 V
(2-pole)

3-phase switching
400 V
(3-pole)

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

5/274

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

Maximum power (kW)

100 x 103 150 x 103 200 x 103 500 x 103 106
3.5
3
2.2
1
0.8

Contactor
rating
16 A

5.4

4.6

3.5

1.6

1.2

25 A

8.6

7.4

5.6

2.6

1.9

40 A

13.6

11.6

8.8

63 A

21.6

18.4

14

6.4

4.8

100 A

10

6.5

3.2

2.2

16 A

16

14

10

3.5

25 A

26

22

17

7.5

40 A

41

35

26.5

12

63 A

64.8

55.2

42

19.2

14.4

100 A

Contactor selection for

motor control

TeSys m
odular equipment
Modular contactors

Motor control (AC-7b)

Single-phase circuit, 230 V

L1

M
V

L2

2
3-phase circuit, 400 V

U

L1

L2

L3

Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW

230 V single-phase
capacitor motor
(2-pole)
0.55

400 V 3-phase motor

2.2

Contactor
rating
(Ith)
16 A

1.1

25 A

2.2

7.5

40 A

11

63 A

4
5

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

5/275

TeSys m
odular equipment

Characteristics

TeSys GC standard contactors

Contactor type

GC16

Environment
Rated insulation voltage
(Ui)

Conforming to IEC 61095

Conforming to VDE 0110

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(Uimp)
Conforming to standards

2
3
4

V
V

500
500

kV

4 in enclosure

6
7
8

GC40

GC63

GC100

IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts

Product certifications

NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure)

Protective treatment

Standard version

TC

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation

C
C

- 40+ 70
- 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc)

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 10 ms

Contactor open
Contactor closed

10 gn
15 gn

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

Contactor open
Contactor closed

2 gn
3 gn

Flame resistance

GC25

Conforming to IEC 61095

Pole characteristics
Number of poles

2, 3 or 4

Rated operational current (Ie)

(Ue y 440 V)

In AC-7a (heating)
In AC-7b (motor control)

A
A

16
5

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Frequency limits

Up to

250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors

Of the operating current

Hz

400

Conventional thermal current 

(lth)
Rated breaking and making
capacity

q y 50 C

16

25

40

63

100

Conforming to IEC 61095

(AC-7b) 
I rms 400 V 3-phase
For 10 s
For 30 s

40

68

120

200

A
A

128
40

200
62

320
100

504
157

800
250

Short-circuit protection
by fuse or circuit breaker 
U y 440 V

gl fuse
Circuit-breaker I2t  230 V
(at 3 kA rms
400 V
prospective)

A
A 2s
A 2s

16
5000
9000

25
10 000
14 000

40
16 000
17 500

63
18 000
20 000

100

Average impedance per pole

At lth and 50 Hz

mW

2.5

2.5

Power dissipated per pole

0.65

1.6

3.2

10

Maximum
cabling c.s.a.

For the above 

operational currents
Flexible cable
1 conductor
without cable end 2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
4

6
4

25
16

25
16

35

Flexible cable
with cable end

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
1.5

6
1.5

16
4

16
4

35

Solid cable 
1 conductor
without cable end 2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
4

6
4

25
6

25
6

35
10

N.m

0.8

0.8

3.5

3.5

3.5

Permissible short time rating

no current flowing for preceding 
15 minutes with q y 40 C

Tightening torque

Power circuit connections

10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/276

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

25
8.5

40
15

63
25

100

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
TeSys GC s
tandard contactors

Contactor type

GC16, GC25
single or 2-pole

Control circuit characteristics

GC16, GC25
3 or 4-pole
GC40, GC63
2-pole

GC40, GC63
3 or 4-pole
GC100
2-pole

GC100
4-pole

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Control voltage limits 50 Hz coils
(q y 50 C)

50 or 60 Hz
Operational
Drop-out

12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
0.851.1 Uc
0.20.75 Uc

Average coil
consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Inrush
Sealed

VA
VA

15
3.8

34
4.6

53
6.5

106
13

Maximum heat dissipation

50/60 Hz

1.3

1.6

2.1

4.2

Operating time

Closing C
Opening O

ms
ms

1030
1025

Mechanical durability
Maximum operating rate
at ambient temperature y 50 C
Maximum
Flexible cable
cabling c.s.a.
without cable
end
Flexible cable
with cable end

In operating cycles
In operating cycles per
hour
1 or 2 conductors

mm2

2.5

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

2.5
1.5

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

1.5

N.m

0.8

a 50 Hz

Solid cable
without 
cable end
Tightening torque

1
2
3

106
300

Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Up to

250

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to 
IEC 60947-5
Conforming to
VDE 0110

500

500

Conventional thermal current (Ith)

For ambient q y 50 C

Mechanical durability

Operating cycles

Maximum cabling c.s.a.

Flexible or 
solid conductor

Tightening torque

5
6

106
mm2

2.5

N.m

0.8

7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

5/277

TeSys m
odular equipment

References

Standard contactors
TeSys
GC

526285

Standard contactors, TeSys GC

Maximum
current
rating
category
AC-7a

No. of poles Number of

17.5 mm
modules

Sold in
lots of

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (1)

1
2
3
4
1
2

1
2

1
1
2
2
1
2

12
12
6
6
12
6

GC 1610pp
GC 1620pp
GC 1630pp
GC 1640pp
GC 1611pp
GC 1622pp

kg
0.110
0.110
0.230
0.230
0.110
0.230

25

1
2
3
4
1
2

1
2
2
4

1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2

12
12
6
6
12
6
12
6

GC 2510pp
GC 2520pp
GC 2530pp
GC 2540pp
GC 2511pp
GC 2522pp
GC 2502pp
GC 2504pp

0.110
0.110
0.230
0.230
0.110
0.230
0.110
0.230

40

2
3
4
1
2

1
2
2
4

2
3
3
2
3
2
3

6
4
4
6
4
6
4

GC 4020pp
GC 4030pp
GC 4040pp
GC 4011pp
GC 4022pp
GC 4002pp
GC 4004pp

0.230
0.350
0.390
0.230
0.390
0.230
0.390

63

2
3
4
1
2

1
2
2
4

2
3
3
2
3
2
3

6
4
4
6
4
6
4

GC 6320pp
GC 6330pp
GC 6340pp
GC 6311pp
GC 6322pp
GC 6302pp
GC 6304pp

0.340
0.390
0.390
0.340
0.390
0.340
0.390

100

2
4

3
6

4
2

GC 10020pp
GC 10040pp

0.680
0.780

A
16

526286

GC2520

GC4040

5
6
7

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales
Office):
Volts
12
24
48
110
220/240
50 Hz
J5
B5
E5
F5
M5
60 Hz
J6
B6
E6
F6
M6

GC10020

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/278

Weight

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

References (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
Standard contactors
TeSys
GC

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

533715

Number
of contacts

No. of poles

Reference

Weight

kg
2

526287

GAC05pp

GAC 0521

0.016

GAC 0531

0.016

GAC 0511

0.016

Accessories
Description

Coil
suppression
blocks
comprising 
2 RC circuits

GAP2p

Ventilation
1/2 module
Clips onto
5 rail
Cover plates

GAC5

For use on Number Operational Sold in

contactor of
voltage
lots of
modules
V

1
1248
1

Weight

GAP 21

kg
0.090

110240

GAP 23

0.090

1/2

10

GAC 5

0.015

1/2

10

GA1 C7

0.001

10

GA1 C6

0.001

Set of sealable 16 or 25 A 2
terminal covers 3 or 4
(10 top parts +  contacts
10 bottom parts)
40 or 63 A  2
2 contacts

GW 254

0.040

GW 632

0.040

40 or 63 A  3
3 or 4
contacts

GW 634

0.050

GA1Cp

GW254
GW63p

Unit
reference

2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 5/280 and 5/281

5/279

TeSys m
odular equipment

Dimensions

TeSys GC standard contactors

Dimensions

Contactors

Common side view

GC 1610, 1611, 1620

GC 2502, 2510, 2511, 2520
1 module

GC 1622, 1640
GC 2504, 2522, 2530, 2540
2 modules

81

44,4

17,5

43,7
65

Common side view

GC 4004, 4022, 4030, 4040

GC 6304, 6322, 6330, 6340
3 modules

81

GC 4002, 4011, 4020

GC 6302, 6311, 6320
2 modules

44,4

35

60

43,7

52,5

35

60
65

Common side view

GC 10020
3 modules

GC 10040
6 modules

81

44,4

43,7

54

108

60
65

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/280

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Schemes :
page 5/281

TeSys m
odular equipment

Dimensions (continued)
schemes

TeSys GC s
tandard contactors

Coil suppression blocks

GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521

GAP 21, 22 and 23

8,75

43,7

60

65

65

Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module

Cover plates

GAC 5

GA1 C6

GA1 C7

54

54

44

67

11,5

18

11,5

65

17,5

43,7

12,75

60

81

81

44,4

Auxiliary contacts

44,4

Dimensions

Schemes
Contactors

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

GC pp40

GC pp30

A1

GC pp20

A2

GC pp10

R1

A1

R1

R3

A1

R1

R3

A1

R1

R3

R5

R7

A2

R2

R4

A2

R2

R4

A2

R2

R4

R6

R8

GC pp04

R2

GC pp02

A1

GC pp22

A2

GC pp11

6
7
8

Auxiliary contacts

23/NO
24

12

13/NO
14

13/NO

21/NC
22

GAC 0511

14/NO

13/NO

GAC 0531

14

GAC 0521

10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/276 and 5/277

References :
pages 5/278 and 5/279

Dimensions :
page 5/280

5/281

TeSys m
odular equipment

Presentation

Presentation

PF526284

TeSys GF impulse relays

TeSys GF impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures.

They feature:
b Easy installation
v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail,
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
b Compact size
Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm.

2
3

User safety
live parts protected against direct finger contact,
completely safe operation,
state indication on front panel.

b
v
v
v

GF 1611M7

Standards

This range of modular impulse relays has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 60669-2.
This standard is specific to Impulse relays.
Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.

Functions
Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are
remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained.
These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two
switching points.

Power switching
TeSys GF impulse relays have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific
lighting supply is required:

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285

5/282

References :
page 5/286

Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/287

Selection for lighting

and heating circuits

TeSys m
odular equipment
TeSys GF impulse relays

Lighting circuits

Fluorescent lamps with starter

Single fitting

Non corrected

With parallel correction

Power in W

18

36

58

18

36

58

Number of lamps

70

35

21

50

25

16

Twin fitting

With series correction

Power in W

2 x 18

2 x 36

2 x 58

Number of lamps

56

28

17

Incandescent lamps: filament lamps

Power in W

40

60

75

100

200

Number of lamps

40

25

20

16

Incandescent lamps: halogen lamps

Power in W

300

500

1000

1500

Number of lamps

Incandescent lamps: very low voltage halogen lamps

Power in W

20

50

75

100

Number of lamps

70

28

19

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected
Power in W

55

90

135

180

Number of lamps

24

15

10

High pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected
Power in W

250

400

1000

Number of lamps

Heating circuits

Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole

Power in kW

3.6

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285

References :
page 5/286

Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/287

5/283

TeSys m
odular equipment

Characteristics

TeSys GF impulse relays

Environment

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to 
IEC 60947-1-5
Conforming to 
VDE 0110

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

6
7

kV

4 in enclosure

NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI, VDE

Degree of protection

Conforming to 
VDE 0106
Standard version

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure

TC

Storage

- 40+ 80

Operation

- 20+ 50

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

2000

Operating positions

Without derating

90 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 10 ms

Impulse relay open

Please consult your Regional Sales Office

Impulse relay closed

Please consult your Regional Sales Office

Impulse relay open

4 gn

Impulse relay closed

4 gn

Pole characteristics
Number of poles

1 or 2

Rated operational current (Ie)

(Ue y 250 V)
Rated operational voltage

In AC-7a (heating)

Conventional thermal current (lth)

Permissible short time rating
no current flowing for preceding 
15 minutes with q y 40 C

Short-circuit protection
by fuse or circuit-breaker

16

250

q y 50 C

16

For 1 s

320

For 10 s

96

For 30 s

48

gl fuse

16

Circuit-breaker I2t (at

3kA rms prospective)
At lth and 50 Hz

A 2s

5000

mW

1 conductor

mm2

Min.
0.5

Max.
6

2 conductors

mm2

0.5

1 conductor

mm2

0.5

2 conductors

mm

0.5

1 conductor

mm2

0.5

2 conductors

mm

0.5

Power circuit
connections

N.m

Power dissipated per pole

Maximum
cabling
c.s.a.

Flexible cable 
without cable end

Flexible cable 
with cable end

Solid cable
without cable end

10

400

Product certifications

Average impedance per pole

IEC 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

400

Conforming to standards

Protective treatment

Tightening torque

0.8

Presentation :
page 5/282

5/284

Selection :
page 5/283

References :
page 5/286

Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/287

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
TeSys GF impulse relays

Control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office

Control voltage limits

(q < 50 C)

Operating threshold, 
dual frequency 50/60 Hz

0.851.1 Uc

Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Inrush at 50 Hz

VA

19

Operating time

Closing C

ms

70

Opening O

ms

70

ms

70

Minimum impulse time

Mechanical durability

1
2
3

106 operating cycles

Electrical durability

Maximum operating rate

AC-21

200 000 operating cycles

AC-22

100 000 operating cycles

Operating cycles 
per hour

900

4
5

Maximum
cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable 
without cable end

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

2.5

Flexible cable 
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

2.5

2 conductors

mm2

1.5

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

1.5

N.m

0.8

Solid cable 
without cable end
Tightening torque

6
7

8
9
10
Presentation :
page 5/282

Selection :
page 5/283

References :
page 5/286

Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/287

5/285

TeSys m
odular
equipment

References

TeSys GF
impulse relays

PF526284

TeSys GF impulse relays

Maximum current rating

category AC-1

A
16

Composition

2
3

GF 1611M7

4
5

Coil voltages
a 50/60 Hz c

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

V
12

V
6

12

GF 1610J7

kg
0.110

24

12

12

GF 1610B7

0.110

48

24

12

GF 1610E7

0.110

110

48

12

GF 1610F7

0.110

220

12

GF 1610M7

0.110

230/240

110

12

GF 1610U7

0.110

12

12

GF 1620J7

0.110

24

12

12

GF 1620B7

0.110

48

24

12

GF 1620E7

0.110

110

48

12

GF 1620F7

0.110

220

12

GF 1620M7

0.110

230/240

110

12

GF 1620U7

0.110

12

12

GF 1611J7

0.110

24

12

12

GF 1611B7

0.110

48

24

12

GF 1611E7

0.110

110

48

12

GF 1611F7

0.110

220

12

GF 1611M7

0.110

230/240

110

12

GF 1611U7

0.110

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
page 5/282

5/286

Selection :
page 5/283

Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285

Dimensions, schemes :
page 5/287

Weight

TeSys m
odular
equipment

Dimensions,
schemes

TeSys GF impulse relays

Dimensions

GF 1610, GF 1611, GF 1620

18

44
60

45

81

5,5

64

Schemes

A1

R1

A1

A2

R2

A2

GF 1620

A1

GF 1611

A2

GF 1610

4
5

6
7
8
9
10
Presentation :
page 5/282

Selection :
page 5/283

Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285

References :
page 5/286

5/287

TeSys m
odular equipment

Presentation
standards

TeSys GY
dual tariff contactors

526295

Presentation

TeSys GY dual tariff contactors are designed for use in modular panels and
enclosures.
These contactors feature:

b Easy installation
v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail,
v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.

GY25

b Compact size
All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).
b
v
v
v
v

User safety
use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards,
live parts protected against direct finger contact,
completely safe operation,
state indication on front panel.

Dual tariff contactors are designed for use with Electricity Supply Authority dual
tariffs.
They have a 4-position selector switch on the front panel:
Stop (O)
For switching off the load, e.g. for prolonged periods of
absence.

4
5
6

Off peak
Automatic start (A)

The contactor switches automatically during off peak hours

as set by the Supply Authority remote control and thus
supplies the load, (washing machine, dishwasher, convector
heater, water heater) during this period, at an economy rate to
the user.

Peak time
Manual start (I)

In this position, the contactor supplies the load to cater for

additional requirements for hot water, heating, etc., but at
the standard rate. The contactor returns automatically to the
off-peak position at the start of the off-peak period.

Peak time
Manual override
with lock

Facility for setting the contactor to continuous manual

operation, ignoring the automation system and the Supply
Authority control; setting and locking is achieved by means
of a tool, with manual return to the AUTO position.

Standards

This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public.
Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.

7
8

Applications
Dual tariff modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase
or 4-phase loads up to 63 A.
Power switching
TeSys GY contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific
supply is required:
v lighting,
v heating, ventilation,
v motorised shutters or gates.

9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/288

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

TeSys m
odular equipment

Setting-up
precautions

TeSys GY
dual tariff contactors

Setting-up precautions

The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.

1
2

It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module 3 or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules GAC5

3
4
5

Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the

enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating
16 A

40C
16 A

50C
14 A

60 C (1)
13 A

25 A

25 A

22 A

20 A

40 A

40 A

36 A

32 A

63 A

63 A

57 A

50 A

6
7

(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

5/289

TeSys m
odular equipment

Characteristics

TeSys
GY
dual tariff contactors

Environment

Type

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

GY16
Conforming to IEC 61095
Conforming to VDE 0110

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

2
3
4

V
V

500
500

kV

4 in enclosure

6
7
8
9
10

GY40

Conforming to standards

IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts

Product certifications

NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE

GY63

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure

Protective treatment

Standard version

TC

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation

C
C

- 40+ 70
- 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc)

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

Operating positions

Without derating

30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Contactor open
Contactor closed

10 gn
15 gn

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

Contactor open
Contactor closed

2 gn
3 gn

Flame resistance

GY25

Conforming to IEC 61095

Pole characteristics
Number of poles

2, 3 or 4

Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating)

(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-7b (motor control)

A
A

16
5

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to

Frequency limits
Of the operating current

V
Hz

250 - 2-pole contactors, 415 - 3 and 4-pole contactors

400

Conventional
thermal current (lth)
Rated breaking
and making capacity

q y 50 C

16

25

40

63

Conforming to IEC 61095 

(AC-7b) 
I rms 400 V 3-phase
For 10 s
For 30 s

40

68

120

200

Short time rating

with no current flow for the
previous previous 15 minutes
with q y 40 C
Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker
U y 440 V
gl fuse
Circuit breaker I2t 
230V
(at 3 kA rms prospective) 400V

A
A

128
40

200
62

320
100

504
157

A
A 2s
A 2s

16
5000
9000

25
10 000
14 000

40
16 000
17 500

63
18 000
20 000

Average impedance per pole

At lth and 50 Hz

mW

2.5

2.5

Power dissipated per pole

For the above operational

currents

0.65

1.6

3.2

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
4

6
4

25
16

25
16

Flexible cable 
with cable end

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
1.5

6
1.5

16
4

16
4

Solid cable 
without cable end

1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

6
4

6
4

25
6

25
6

Tightening torque

Power circuit connections

N.m

0.8

0.8

3.5

3.5

Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Maximum cabling c.s.a.

Flexible cable 
without cable end

5/290

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

25
8.5

40
15

63
25

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys m
odular equipment
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors

Control circuit characteristics

Type

GY16, GY25
single or 2-pole

Rated control
50 or 60 Hz
circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits (q y 50 C)
50 Hz coils
Operational
Drop-out

GY16, GY25
GY40, GY63
3 or 4-pole
3 or 4-pole
GY40, GY63
2-pole
12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office

0.851.1 Uc
0.20.75 Uc

Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc

a 50 Hz
Inrush
Sealed

VA
VA

15
3.8

34
4.6

53
6,5

Heat dissipation

50/60 Hz

1.3

1.6

2.1

Operating time

Closing C
Opening O

ms
ms

10 ... 30
10 ... 25

Mechanical durability

In operating cycles

Maximum operating rate

In operating cycles per hour
at ambient temperature y 50 C
Maximum cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable 
1 or 2 conductors
without cable end
Flexible cable 
1 conductor
with cable end
2 conductors
Solid cable 
without cable end
Tightening torque

1 or 2 conductors

106
300

mm2

2.5

mm2

2.5

mm2

1.5

mm2

1.5

N.m

0.8

4
5

Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Up to

250

Conforming to IEC 60947-5

500

Conforming to VDE 0110

500

Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
Mechanical durability

For ambient q y 50 C

Maximum cabling c.s.a.

Flexible or solid conductor

In operating cycles

Tightening torque

106
mm2

2.5

N.m

0.8

7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

5/291

TeSys m
odular equipment

References

TeSys GY
dual tariff contactors

TeSys GY
dual tariff contactors
Maximum
current
rating
category AC-7a

1
526295

A
16

25

GY2520M5

526296

40

4
63

GY6340M5

No. of poles

Number of
17.5 mm
modules

Sold in
lots of

Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (1)

12

GY1620pp

kg
0.110

GY1640pp

0.230

12

GY1611pp

0.110

12

GY2520pp

0.110

GY2530pp

0.230

GY2540pp

0.230

12

GY2511pp

0.110

GY4020pp

0.230

GY4030pp

0.350

GY4040pp

0.390

GY6320pp

0.340

GY6330pp

0.390

GY6340pp

0.390

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts
12
24
48
110
220/240
50 Hz
J5
B5
E5
F5
M5
60 Hz

J6

B6

6
7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/292

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

E6

F6

M6

Weight

TeSys m
odular equipment

References

TeSys GY
dual tariff contactors

526287

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Number of contacts

Description
Coil suppression blocks
comprising 2 RC circuits

522643

GAC5

Reference

Weight

GAC0521

kg
0.016

GAC0531

0.016

GAC0511

0.016

1
2

Accessories

812029

812029

GAP 23

Number of poles

GA1Cp

For use on
contactor

Number
of modules

Operational
voltage
in V
1248

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

GAP21

kg
0.090

110240

GAP23

0.090

Ventilation 1/2 module

clips onto 5 rail

1/2

10

GAC5

0.015

Cover plates

1/2

10

GA1C7

0.001

10

GA1C6

0.001

16 or 25 A
2
3 or 4 contacts

GW254

0.040

40 or 63 A
2 contacts

GW632

0.040

40 or 63 A
3
3 or 4 contacts

GW634

0.050

3
4

GW254

522644

Set of sealable
terminal covers
(10 top parts 
+ 10 bottom parts)

5
6

GW63p

7
8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

Dimensions and schemes :

pages 5/294 and 5/295

5/293

TeSys m
odular equipment

Dimensions

TeSys GY dual tariff contactors

Dual tariff contactors

43,7

17,5

35

64
69

GY4020
GY6320
2 modules

Common side view

GY4030, 4040
GY6330, 6340
3 modules

81

44,4

GY1640
GY2530, 2540
2 modules

81

Common side view

44,4

GY1611, 1620
GY2511, 2520
1 module

5
43,7

52,5

35

64
69

6
7
8
9
10

Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

5/294

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Dimensions and schemes :

page 5/295

Dimensions (continued),
schemes

TeSys m
odular equipment
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors

Dimensions
Coil suppression block
GAP21, 22 and 23

44,4

17,5

43,7

8,75

43,7

60

12,75

60

1
81

81

44,4

Auxiliary contacts
GAC0511, 0531 and 0521

65
Cover plates
GA1C6

GA1C7

67

11,5

18

11,5

65

54

44

Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module

GAC5

54

65

R1
R2

A1
A2

7
8

5
6

3
4

1
2

A1

GYpp11

13/NO

23/NO

13/NO

14

24

14/NO

7
12

21/NC
22

GAC0511

13/NO

GAC0531

A2

5
6

3
4

1
2

GYpp40

14

Auxiliary contacts
GAC0521

A2

A1

3
4

GYpp30

A2

Contactors
GYpp20
A1

Schemes

8
9
10
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275

Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291

References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293

Dimensions :
page 5/294

5/295

Contents

6 - TeSys protection components:

relays and controllers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2

b Motor and machine protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4

TeSys K, thermal overload relays

b Adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10

TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays

b Description, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20
b Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/25
b Dimensions, mounting and schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/26

TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic thermal overload relays

b Description, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/23

b Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/25

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/27
b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/29

TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic thermal overload relays

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/31
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34

b Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/36

b Dimensions, schemes and setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/38

TeSys RM1 XA, single pole magnetic current relays

b Presentation, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/41
b Dimensions and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/43

LT3, thermistor protection units for use with PTC

thermistor probes

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44

b General, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/46
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/50
b Dimensions, schemes and setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/52

b Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/53

10

6/0

TeSys LR97 D and LT47, electronic over current relays

b Presentation,description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54
b Curves, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/55

b References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/58

b Dimensions, mounting and schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/59

TeSys U controllers
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60

b Application example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/62
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/64
b Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/65
b Dimensions and mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/66
b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/67

TeSys T
Motor Management System
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68
b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/70
b Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/75
b Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/79

b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/81

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/86
b Dimensions, mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/90
b Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/92

6
7
8
9
10

6/1

Selection guide

Applications

TeSys protection components

Protection relays and controllers

Motor protection

Thermal motor protection

2
3
4
5
6
7

Protection

- Motor overload
- Stalling
- Phase failure

Tripping class

Class 10 A

Communication

Used with contactor type

Classes 10 A and 20

Classes 10 and 20

LC1 K, LP1 K

LC1 D

LC1 F

Motor current (In)

0.1116 A

0.1150 A

30630 A

Relay or controller type

LR2 K

LRD, LR2 D and LR9 D

LR9 F

Pages

6/12

6/20 to 6/23

6/34 and 6/35

8
9
10

6/2

Protection of slip
ring motors and of
circuits without
current peaks

Protection of
resistors, bearings,
capacitors

Machine protection

Motor and machine protection

Specific motor protection

Protection and control

1
2
3

- Strong overcurrent
- Stalling

- Frequent starting
- Harsh environments

- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks
- Locked rotor
- Phase failure

- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks

- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance
and phase failure
- Motor stalling
- Long starting times
- Earth fault

- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance and
phase failure
- Locked rotor
- Long starting times
- Phase reversal
- Earth fault

Classes 5 to 30

Classes 5 to 30

AS-Interface,
Modbus, CANopen,
Advantys STB

Modbus, CANopen,
DeviceNet,
ProfibusDP,
EthernetTCP/IP

All contactors

0.7630 A

Unlimited

0.338 A

0.360 A

0.35800 A

0.4810 A

RM1 XA

LT3 S

LR97D

LT47

LUTM p0BL

LTM R

6/41 and 6/42

6/50

6/58

6/64

6/86

6
7
8
9
10

6/3

General

TeSys protection components

Motor and machine protection

Introduction

Exceeding the operating limits of an electric motor will lead, eventually, not only to
destruction of the motor itself but also of the mechanisms it drives.

This type of load can be the cause of electrical or mechanical faults.

b Electrical faults:
v overvoltage, voltage drop, imbalance and phase failure which cause variations in
the current drawn,
v short-circuits which can cause the current to reach levels capable of destroying
the load.

b Mechanical faults:
v locked rotor,
v brief or prolonged overload which leads to an increase in the current drawn by the
motor, and therefore overheating.

The cost of these faults must take into account loss of production, loss of raw
materials, repair of the production tool, poor quality of production and delays in
delivery.
These faults can also have dramatic consequences on the safety of persons in direct
or indirect contact with the motor.

To prevent these faults, protection measures are necessary. They make it possible to
isolate the equipment to be protected from the mains supply by measuring
variations in electrical values (voltage, current, etc).
Each motor starter must therefore have:
b short-circuit protection, to detect and break, as quickly as possible, abnormal
currents generally greater than 10 times the rated current (In).

b overload protection, to detect increases in current up to about 10 In and switch

off the starter before overheating of the motor and conductors damages the
insulation.
This protection is provided by specific devices such as fuses, circuit-breakers and
thermal overload relays, or by more integrated devices offering several types of
protection.

6
7
8
9
10

6/4

General (continued)

TeSys protection components

Motor and machine protection

Causes, effects and consequences of various faults

There are two types of fault:

b Internal faults within the motor.
b External faults: these are located outside the electric motor but their
consequences can lead to damage inside the motor.

Faults

Causes

Effects

Consequences on the motor and on the

machine

Contact between several phases, or

between one phase and neutral or
between several turns of the same
phase.

b Current peak
b Electrodynamic forces on the
conductors

Destruction of windings

b Lightning
b Electrostatic discharge
b Operation
Phase imbalance b Opening of a phase
and phase failure b Single-phase load upstream of the
motor
b Short-circuit between the turns of
the same winding
High starting
b Failure of the automation system
frequency
b Too many manual control
operations
b Numerous fault trips

Dielectric breakdown in the windings

Destruction of the windings due to loss of

insulation

High stator and rotor temperature rise

due to the frequent start current

Overheating (1)
Consequences on the process

Voltage
variations

b Instability of the mains voltage

b Connection of heavy loads

b Reduction of usable torque

b Increase in losses

Overheating (1)

Harmonics

b Pollution of the mains supply by

b Reduction of usable torque
variable speed drives, inverters, etc... b Increase in losses

Overheating (1)

Long
starting time

b Resistive torque too high (load too

heavy)
b Voltage drop
b Mechanical problem (crusher)
b Seizures

Increase in starting time

Overheating 1)

Overcurrent

Overheating (1)
Consequences on the process

No-load running

b Pump running empty

b Mechanical break in drive to the
load

Drop in current drawn

Consequences on the process

Frequency
fluctuations

b Overload of a supply powered by

limited independent sources
b Faulty alternator speed regulator

b Increase in losses
b Interferes with synchronous devices
(clock, recorder, ...)

Overload

b Increase in resistive torque

b Voltage drop
b Drop in power factor

Increase in current consumption

Overheating (1)

Loss of machine
excitation

b Significant drop in excitation

current
b Break in rotor winding

b Increase in active power

b Drop in power factor

Significant overheating of rotor and cage

b Overvoltage developed in the mains

supply
b Rise in earth potential (safety of
persons)

Consequences on safety of persons

Short-circuit

Overvoltage

Jamming

Phase-Earth fault b Accidental Phase-Earth contacts

b Accidental Phase-machine casing
contacts (casing connected to earth)

2
3

b Reduction of usable torque, efficiency Overheating (1)

and speed
b Increase in losses
b Starting impossible if phase failure

4
5
6
7
8

(1) Then, in the longer or shorter term, depending on the seriousness of the fault and/or its frequency, short-circuit and destruction of the windings.

9
10

6/5

General (continued)

TeSys protection components

Motor and machine protection

Protection functions

Short-circuit protection
General
A short-circuit results in a very rapid rise in current which can reach several hundred
times the value of the operational current. The consequences of a short-circuit are
dangerous to both equipment and persons. It is therefore imperative to use
protection devices to detect the fault and very quickly break the circuit.

Two types of protection are commonly used:

b fuses (cutout) which break the circuit by melting, which then requires their
replacement,
b magnetic trip circuit-breakers, often more simply called "magnetic circuitbreakers", which only require re-setting to put them back into service.
Short-circuit protection can also be built-into multifunction devices such as motor
circuit-breakers and contactor-breakers.

3
526177

526178

The main characteristics of short-circuit protection devices are:

b their breaking capacity: this is the highest prospective short-circuit current value
that a protection device can break at a given voltage.
b their making capacity: this is the highest current value that the protection device
can make at its rated voltage in specified conditions.
The making capacity is equal to k times the breaking capacity.

4
5

LS1D32
fuse carrier

GS2N3
switch disconnectors

For motor protection, aM type fuses are used. Their design characteristics allow
them to conduct the high magnetising currents that occur when motors are switched
on. They are therefore unsuitable for overload protection (unlike gG type fuses). This
is why an overload relay must be included in the motor power supply circuit.

6
526179

526180

Magnetic circuit-breakers
These circuit-breakers protect installations against short-circuits, within the limit of
their breaking capacity.
Magnetic circuit-breakers provide omnipole breaking as standard.
For relatively low short-circuit currents, the operation of a circuit-breaker is faster than
that of fuses.
This protection conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
The thermal and electrodymanic effects are also limited, therefore ensuring better
protection of cables and equipment.

7
8

Fuses (cutouts)
Fuses provide individual phase protection (single-pole), with a high breaking
capacity in a compact size:
b mounted either in fuse carriers,
b or in isolators, replacing the original links or shunt bars.

GV2L
magnetic circuit-breraker

TeSys U LUB 12 starter with

LUCApp control unit

10

6/6

General (continued)

TeSys protection components

Motor and machine protection

Protection functions (continued)

526181

Overload protection
General
An overload condition is the most frequently encountered fault. The symptoms are a
rise in the current drawn by the motor and thermal effects. A rapid return to normal
operating conditions is important.
The actual operating conditions (ambient temperature, operating altitude and type of
standard duty) are essential to determine the operating values of the motor (power,
current) and to be able to select effective overload protection. These operational
values are given by the motor manufacturer.

526182

LRD02
thermal overload relay

526183

LRD365
thermal overload relay

RM4JA current measurement relay

According to the level required, protection can be provided by:

b overload relays and thermal overload relays (bi-metallic or electronic type) which
protect motors in the event of:
v overload, by monitoring the current drawn by each phase,
v phase imbalance or failure, by their differential mechanism.
b relays with PTC thermistor probes (Positive Temperature Coefficient).
b overtorque relays,
b multifunction relays.
Overload relays
These relays protect motors against overload. They must allow the temporary
overload that occurs on starting and must only trip if the starting time is abnormally
long.
The overload relay will be selected according to the length of the starting time
(tripping class) and the motor rating.
These relays have a thermal memory (except for certain electronic overload relays,
indicated by their manufacturers) and can be connected:
b either in series with the load,
b or to current transformers placed in series with the load.
Bi-metallic thermal overload relays
Combined with a contactor, these relays protect the line and the equipment against
small and prolonged overloads. They must be protected against strong overcurrent
by a circuit-breaker or fuses.
These relays may be used on an a.c. or d.c. system and are generally:
b 3-pole,
b compensated, i.e. insensitive to ambient temperature variations,
b with manual or automatic reset,
b graduated with a "motor FLC" scale: allowing direct setting to the full load current
as shown on the motor rating plate.
They can also be sensitive to phase failure: this is known as 'differential'. This
function conforms to standards IEC 60947-4-1 and 60947-6-2
This type of relay is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device.

526184

Electronic thermal overload relays

Electronic thermal overload relays have the advantage of electronics which allow a
more complex thermal image of the motor to be created.
They can be combined with products having complementary functions, such as:
b temperature sensing via PTC probes,
b protection against jamming and overtorque,
b protection against phase reversal,
b earth fault protection,
b protection against no-load running,
b alarm function.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TeSys U starter with thermal overload

alarm function module

6/7

General (continued)

526185

Overload protection (continued)

Relays for use with PTC thermistor probes
With direct sensing of the stator windings, these relays can be used to protect motors
against:
b overload,
b a rise in ambient temperature,
b a ventilation circuit fault,
b a high starting frequency,
b mechanical shocks, etc...

2
LT3S relays for use with
thermistor probes

Overload (or overtorque) relays

These relays protect the drive line in the event of a locked rotor, seizure or
mechanical shocks. This is an additional protection.
Unlike thermal overload relays, these relays do not have a thermal memory. They
have definite time characteristics (adjustable current threshold and time delay).
The overtorque relay can be used as overload protection for motors with long
starting times or very frequent starting (for example, lifting hoists).

526186

LR97D07
instantaneous electronic
overcurrent relays

Multifunction relays
b Overcurrent relays are limited when it is necessary to take into account problems
associated with voltage, temperature or special applications. New production or
maintenance management needs have prompted manufacturers to offer products
which provide not only adaptable protection, but also complete management of the
motor and its load.
They incorporate:
b current and voltage sensors (TeSys T controllers),
b hybrid analog and digital electronic technology,
b the use of communication buses for data exchange and control,
b powerful motor modelling algorithms,
b integrated application programs whose parameters can be set.
These products make it possible to reduce installation and operating costs by
reducing maintenance and downtime.

526187

526188

5
6

8
9

TeSys U starters:
The multifunction relay is incorporated in the motor starter.
This solution is very compact with reduced wiring. It is limited to 32 A.
TeSys U LUB 32 starter
with multifunction control
unit LUC M

TeSys U controller
LUTM20BL

TeSys U controllers:
The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and reuses the function
blocks from the TeSys U solution. It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to
810 A.
TeSys T controllers:
The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and incorporates inputs and
outputs. It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to 810 A.

526189

Motor and machine protection

Protection functions (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T controller
LTMR08MBD

10

6/8

General (continued)

TeSys protection components

Motor and machine protection

Protection relay selection table

Relay type

Motor protection

Machine
Motor and machine
protection protection

Thermal
overload
relay

Overtorque TeSys U
relays
controller

LR2K,
LRD,
LRD 3,
LR9F,
LR9D (1)
Causes of overheating

Relays for
use with
PTC
probes
LT3 S

(2)

TeSys T
controller

LR97D,
LT47

LUT M

LTMR

(2)

(2)

(3)

1
2

Slight overload
Locked rotor

No-load running
Supply phase failure

LR9 7D

Ventilation fault

With probes

Abnormal temperature
rise

With probes

Shaft bearing seizure

With probes

Insulation fault

Protracted starting time

Severe duty

With probes

Voltage variation

Frequency fluctuations
Loss of machine
excitation

Ideally suited
Possible solution
Not suitable (no protection)
(1) for motor circuit-breaker type GV2ME.
(2) Protection based on current.
(3) Protection based on current and voltage.

7
8
9
10

6/9

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

TeSys K thermal overload relays,
adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC 60947, NF C 63-650, VDE 0660, BS 4941

Product certifications

UL, CSA

Protective treatment
Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60068

(DIN 50016)
Conforming to VDE 0106

TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Protection against direct finger contact

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
For normal operation (IEC 60947)
Operating limit

C
C
C

- 40...+ 70
- 20...+ 55 (without derating)
- 30...+ 60 (with derating) (1)

Maximum operating
altitude
Operating positions

Without derating

2000
Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

Without derating

With derating (1)

3
4
5
6
7
8

Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to NF F 16-101
and 16-102
Shock resistance, hot state Conforming to IEC 60068,
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
N/C contact
Conforming to IEC 60068,
N/O contact
Vibration resistance,
Conforming to IEC 60068,
hot state
N/C contact
5 to 300 Hz
Conforming to IEC 60068,
N/O contact
Safe separation of
Conforming to VDE 0106
circuits
and IEC60536
Cabling
Screw clamp terminals
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end

mm2
mm2
mm2

Minimum
1 x 1.5
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.34

Tightening torque

N.m

0.8

Philips head n 2 - 6

10 gn
10 gn
2 gn
2 gn
VLSV (2), up to 400 V
Maximum
2x4
2x4
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5

Maximum to IEC 60947

1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5

Mounting

Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor

Connections

Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows :

b contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products,
b contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with
3P+ N/O.
When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14,
at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14.

Auxiliary contact characteristics

Number of contacts

1 N/C + 1 N/O

Conventional thermal current

Short-circuit protection

Self-extinguishing material V1
Conforming to requirement 2

Maximum power
of the controlled contactor coils
(sealed) (Occasional operating
cycles of contact 95-96)
Maximum operational
voltage

Conforming to IEC 60947,

VDE 0660. gG fuse or
circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp
a.c.
d.c.

a.c., category AC-15

d.c., category DC-13

10

6 max.

V
VA
V
W

24
100
24
100

V
V

690
250

48
200
48
100

110
400
110
50

(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

(2) Very low safety voltage.

References :
page 6/12

6/10

Dimensions :
page 6/13

Schemes :
page 6/13

220/230
600
220
45

400
600
250
35

415/440
600

600/690
600

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys K thermal overload relays,
adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A

Electrical characteristics of the power circuit

Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

Up to

690

Conforming to BS 4941
Conforming to IEC 60947
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14

V
V
V
V

690
690
750
600

Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)
Frequency limits of the operational current

kV

Hz

Up to 400

Power dissipated per pole

1
2

Operating characteristics
Sensitivity to phase
failure
Reset

Conforming to IEC 60947

Yes

Manual or automatic

Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay

Signalling

On front of relay

Trip indicator

Reset-Stop function
Test function

Pressing the Reset-Stop button :

- actuates the N/C contact
- has no effect on the N/O contact
Pressing the Test button enables :
- checking of the control circuit wiring
- simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts,
and of the trip indicator)
See pages 1/18 and 1/28

By pushbutton

Short-circuit protection and coordination

Tripping curves

Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting (Class 10 A)

Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state
Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state
Time
2h
1h 20 min

Time
2h
1h 20 min
1h

1h
40 min

40 min

20 min

20 min

10 min

10 min

6 min

6 min

4 min

4 min

2 min

2 min

1 min
40 s

1 min
40 s

20 s

20 s

10 s

10 s

6s
4s

6s
4s

1
2

2s
1s

1 1,2 1,5

5 6
8 10
15
X setting current (Ir)

6
7

2s
1s

1 Setting : at lower end of scale

1 1,2 1,5

5 6
8 10
15
X setting current (Ir)

2 Setting : at upper end of scale

9
10
References :
page 6/12

Dimensions :
page 6/13

Schemes :
page 6/13

6/11

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys K thermal overload relays,

adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A

3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals

These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors. They are
compensated and phase failure sensitive. Resetting can either be manual or
automatic.
Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only;
pre-wired terminals, see pages 6/10 and 6/13.
Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7 K0064 (see below).
On the front face of the overload relay:
b selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A),
b red pushbutton: Trip Test function,
b blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset,
b yellow trip flag indicator: overload relay tripped.
Protection by magnetic circuit-breaker GV2LE, see pages 1/18 and 1/28.

1
2

Class 10 A (the standard specifies a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In)
Relay setting
range
106167_1

3
4
LR2 K0307

812559

Reference

A
0.110.16

Fuses to be used with selected relay

Maximum rating
Type
aM
gG
BS88
A
A
A

0.25
0.5

Weight

LR2 K0301

kg
0.145

0.160.23

0.25

0.5

LR2 K0302

0.145

0.230.36

0.5

LR2 K0303

0.145

0.360.54

1.6

LR2 K0304

0.145

0.540.8

LR2 K0305

0.145

0.81.2

LR2 K0306

0.145

1.21.8

LR2 K0307

0.145

1.82.6

10

LR2 K0308

0.145

2.63.7

10

16

LR2 K0310

0.145

3.75.5

16

16

LR2 K0312

0.145

5.58

20

20

LR2 K0314

0.145

811.5

10

25

20

LR2 K0316

0.145

1014

16

32

25

LR2 K0321

0.145

1216

20

40

32

LR2 K0322

0.145

Overload relays for unbalanced loads

Class 10 A: To order, replace the prefix LR2 by LR7 in the references selected from
above (only applicable to overload relays LR2 K0305 to LR2 K0322).
Example: LR7 K0308.

Accessory
Description
LA7 K0064

Terminal block for separate

clip-on mounting of the overload
relay on 35 mm 7 rail

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11

6/12

Dimensions:
page 6/13

Schemes:
page 6/13

Type of connection

Reference

Screw clamp

LA7 K0064

Weight
kg
0.100

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes

TeSys K thermal overload relays,

adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A

Dimensions, mounting
LR2 K

Direct mounting beneath the contactor

35

=
38

Separate mounting with terminal block LA7 K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail

(AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200)

116

50

80

75
58

65

45

45
AM1

DP200
DE200

Schemes
LR2 K

78.5
86

LR2 K + LCp K

13

A1

13

14
95

14

A2

96

98

97

95
96

95

O
96

KM1

A1

96

98

97

Test

95

A2

KM1

A
H

Pre-wiring scheme

LR7 K

Reset/stop

Note: If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.

95

97

96

98

3
4

1
2

A
H

Test

Reset/stop

9
10
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11

References:
page 6/12

6/13

TeSys protection components

Presentation,
description

3-pole thermal overload relays

TeSys D

Presentation

526212

TeSys D thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors
against:
b overloads,
b phase failure,
b excessively long starting times,
b prolonged stalled rotor condition.

LRD08

Power connection
LRD01 to LRD35

LRD 01 to 35 relays are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals.

They can be supplied for connection by spring terminals or by lugs (1).

526213

LRD313 to LRD365

LRD 313 to 365 relays are for connection by BTR screw connectors (hexagon socket
head).
The screws are tightened by means of a size 4, insulated Allen key.
This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (2)
(Schneider Electric patent).
This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque.

3
4

These relays are also available for connection by lugs (1).

LRD365

526215

LRD3361 to 4369, LR2D3561 to D3563

LRD 3361 to 4369 and LR2D3561 to D3563 relays are designed for connection by
screw clamp terminals. They can be supplied for connection by lugs (1).

5
6
7

LRD33pp

Description
1
6
2, 5
4

RESET
3

0 1

3,5

STOP

LRD0135 and LRD313LRD365

41

50

46

37

R
A E
S
E
T

TEST

98

NO

97

95

NC

5
3
4
2

TeSys D 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and
motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling
of the motor.
1 Adjustment dial Ir.
2 Test button.
Operation of the Test button allows:
- checking of control circuit wiring,
- simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts).
3 Stop button. Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact.
4 Reset button.
5 Trip indicator.
6 Setting locked by sealing the cover.
7 Selector for manual or automatic reset.

LRD 01 to 35 and LRD313 to LRD365 relays are supplied with the selector in the
manual position, protected by a cover. Deliberate action is required to move it to the
automatic position.

96

LRD33614369, LR2D35613563

10

(1) Connection by lugs meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for
applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport.
(2) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.

References:
pages 6/20 to 6/22

6/14

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

Schemes:
page 6/29

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

3-pole thermal overload relays

TeSys D

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

ATEX directive 94/9/EC (1)

Product certifications

UL, CSA. CCC, GOST

ATEX INERIS (1).
GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS (2).

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC 60068

TH

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage

- 60+ 70

Normal operation, without

derating (IEC 60947-4-1)

- 20+ 60

Minimum /maximum operating

temperatures (with derating)

- 40+ 70

Operating positions
without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

Any position.
When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop.

Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94

V1

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-7

15 gn - 11 ms

Vibration resistance (3)

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

6 gn

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz

Conforming to IEC 60255-5

kV

Surge withstand

Conforming to IEC 60801-5

kV

Relay type

850

Shock resistance

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

LRD 01 LRD 1508

16,
1532
LR3 D01
16

LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35

LRD 313 LRD 313L

365
365L
LR3
D313
365

LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696

LR2
D3522

3563

LRD
4365
4369

10 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

20

10 A

Tripping class

Conforming to UL 508,
IEC 60947-4-1

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

690

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV

Frequency limits

Of the operating current

Hz

0400

Setting range

Depending on model

0.113

120

240

380

480

500

600

1.5

0.95

0.75

0.72

0.12

125

250

440

0.22

0.1

0.06

Auxiliary contact characteristics

Conventional thermal current

Max. sealed consumption
of the operating coils of
controlled contactors
(Occasional operating
cycles of contact 95-96)

a.c. supply, AC-15

Protection against
short-circuits

By gG, BS fuses.
Maximum rating or by GB2

d.c. supply, DC-13

20

20

1000

2.532

1238

965

965

17140

1780

600
except
LRD
4369

80140

7
8

(1) For relays LRD01 to LRD365.

(2) Pending for relays LRD313 to LRD365.
(3) For relays LRD 313 to LRD 365: 6 gn only with independent plate mounting and 4 gn when
mounted beneath the contactor.

9
10

References:
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

Schemes:
page 6/29

6/15

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole thermal overload relays
TeSys D

Power circuit connection characteristics

Relay type

LRD 01 LRD 1508

16,
1532
LR3 D01
16

LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35

LRD 313 LRD 313L

365
365L
LR3
D313
365

LRD 3322 LR2

33696 D3522
LR3
3563
D3322
33696

LRD
4365
4369

Connection to screw clamp terminals

mm2

1.510

1.510

135

135

435

450

Flexible cable
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

14

16
135
except
LRD 21:
14

135

435

435

Solid cable without

cable end

1 conductor

mm2

16

1.5/10
135
except
LRD 21:
1/6

135

435

450

N.m

1.7

1.85

2.5

125 : 5 125 : 5
35 : 8
35 : 8

Tightening torque
Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.)
Flexible cable
without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

1.54

1.54

Flexible cable
with cable end

1 conductor

mm2

1.54

1.54

Connection by bars or lugs

1 conductor

Flexible cable
without cable end

e
Relay type

L'

LRD 016
166

LRD 216
356

LRD 3136
3656

LRD 313L6
365L6

LRD 3322A66
3365A66

Without spreaders

mm

14.5

17.5

17.5

17.5

21.5

Bars or cables with lugs

N.m

y6

y6

y6

y6

y6

mm

y8

y8

y 13.5

y 13.5

y 16

mm

y 9.5

y 10

y 16.5

y 16.5

y 16

y7

y7

y 10

y 10

y 12

M4

M4

M6

M6

M10

2.3

2.3

11.3

d
Screws
Tightening torque

N.m

Control circuit connection characteristics

Bare cables

Relay type

Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals

Connection to screw
clamp terminals (1)

LRD 01 LRD 1508

16,
1532
LR3 D01
16

Connection to
spring terminals
(Min/max c.s.a.)

LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35

LRD 313 LRD 313L

365
365L
LR3
D313
365

LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696

Solid cable without cable end

mm2

2 x 12.5

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

2 x 12.5

Flexible cable with cable end

mm2

2 x 12.5

N.m

1.7

Solid cable

mm2

12.5

12.5

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

12.5

12.5

Tightening torque

10

Pitch

LR2
D3522

3563

LRD
4365
4369

(1) For relays LRD 313 to 365: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system.
In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used
(reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
References:
pages 6/20 to 6/22

6/16

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

Schemes:
page 6/29

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole thermal overload relays
TeSys D

Operating characteristics
Relay type

LRD 01 LRD 1508

16,
1532
LR3 D01
16

Temperature compensation
Tripping threshold

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

Sensitivity to phase failure

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

- 20+ 60

1.14 0.06 Ir

LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35

LRD 313 LRD 313L

365
365L
LR3
D313
365

LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696

LR2
D3522

3563

LRD
4365
4369

1
2

Tripping current I 30 % of Ir on one phase, the others at Ir.

Tripping curves

Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current

LRD01 to LRD35, LR2D and LRD3322 to LRD 4369

hours

2
1
40

1
40

10

10

minutes

20

1
40

1
40

20

20

10

10

1
2
3

1
0,8
0,8 1

4
2
1
0,8
0,8 1

4
6
10
17 20
x the setting current (Ir)

LRD313L to LRD365L

hours

Class 20

Time

Class 10 A

Time
2

2
1
40

15
10

20

10

minutes

50

1
40

20

20

seconds

10

1
40

3
0,1

1
2
3

4
6
10
17 20
x the setting current (Ir)

LRD313 to LRD365

seconds

hours

20

Class 20

Time

seconds

seconds

minutes

hours

Time

minutes

LRD1508 to LRD32 and LR2 D3522 to LR2 D3563

Class 10 A

10

1
2

4
2
1

6
8 10
14 20
x the setting current (Ir)

3
1

6 8 10
15 20
x the setting current (Ir)

1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, without prior current flow (cold state).

2 2-phase operation, without prior current flow (cold state).
3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).
References:
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

10

Schemes:
page 6/29

6/17

TeSys protection components

Description,
characteristics

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 D

Description

1
2
Ir(A)
127

107

5
4
3

90

150
98

NO

97

95

NC

96

LR9 D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors
LC1 D115 and D150.
In addition to the protection provided by TeSys D thermal overload relays
(see page 6/14), they offer the following special features:
b protection against phase imbalance,
b choice of starting class,
b protection of unbalanced circuits,
b protection of single-phase circuits,
b alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding.

LR9D5367D5569

7
8
2

Class
107

127

10
+

90

5
4
3

Load

Ir(A) 20

24 V - / 103

104

150

Alarm

98

NO

97

95

NC

96

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Adjustment dial Ir.

Test button.
Stop button.
Reset button.
Trip indicator.
Setting locked by sealing the cover.
Class 10/class 20 selector switch.
Selector for
balanced load
/unbalanced load

LR9D67 and D69

Environment

Conforming to standards

5
6
7
8

IEC 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 and EN 60947-4-1

Product certifications

UL 508 , CSA 22-2

Degree of protection

Conforming to IEC 60529

and VDE 0106

Protective treatment

Standard version

Ambient air temperature

around the device
(Conforming to IEC 60255-8)

Storage

- 40+ 85

Normal operation

- 20+ 55 (1)

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

2000

Operating positions
without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

Any position

Shock resistance

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-7

13 gn - 11 ms

Vibration resistance

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

2 gn - 5300 Hz

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz

Conforming to IEC 60255-5

kV

Surge withstand

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5

kV

Resistance to
electrostatic discharge

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2

kV

Immunity to radiated
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3
radio-frequency disturbances and NF C 46-022

V/m

10

Immunity to
fast transient currents

kV

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4

IP 20 on front panel with protective covers LA9 D11570p or D11560p

TH

Electromagnetic compatibility Draft EN 50081-1 and 2,

EN 50082-2

Meets requirements

Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current

9
10

24

48

110

220

380

600

VA

100

200

400

600

600

600

24

48

110

220

440

100

100

50

45

25

By gG or BS fuses
or by circuit-breaker GB2

1 or 2 conductors

mm2

Minimum c.s.a.: 1

Tightening torque

Nm

1.2

Max. sealed consumption

of the operating coils of
controlled contactors
(Occasional operating
cycles of contact 95-96)

a.c. supply

Protection against
short-circuits
Cabling
Flexible cable
without cable end

d.c. supply

Maximum c.s.a.: 2.5

(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

References:
pages 6/20 to 6/21

6/18

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

Schemes:
page 6/29

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 D

Relay type

LR9 D

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Tripping class

Conforming to UL 508,
IEC 60947-4-1

10 or 20

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

1000

Conforming to UL, CSA

600

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(Uimp)

Hz

Frequency limits

Of the operating current

Hz

5060 (1)

Setting range

Depending on model

60150

Power circuit connections

Width of terminal lug

mm

20

Clamping screw

18

- 20+ 70

Alarm

1.05 0.06 In

Trip

1.12 0.06 In

Operating characteristics

Temperature compensation
Tripping thresholds

M8
N.m

Tightening torque

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

Sensitivity to phase failure

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage

d.c. supply

Supply voltage limits

Current consumption

No-load

Switching capacity

Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure

V

24

1732

mA

y5

mA

0150

Protection

Short-circuit and overload

Voltage drop

Closed state

y 2.5

Cabling

Flexible cable
without cable end

mm2

0.51.5

N.m

0.45

Tightening torque

Self protected

(1) For other frequencies and for applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft
starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

LR9 D tripping curves

Tripping time in seconds
1000

Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current

100

1
2

10

8
0

1,12

7
8
9 10 11 12
x the setting current (Ir)

1 Cold state curve

2 Hot state curve

9
10

References:
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

Schemes:
page 6/29

6/19

TeSys protection components

526200

References

TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays

Differential thermal overload relays

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV3 L
b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,
b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c. or d.c.

1
LRD pp

Relay setting
range (A)

Fuses to be used with selected relay

aM (A)

gG (A)

BS88 (A)

For use with

contactor LC1

Reference

Weight
kg

526201

Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

3
4
LRD 3pp

0.100.16
0.160.25
0.250.40
0.400.63
0.631
11.6
1.62.5
2.54
46
5.58
710
913
1218
1624
2332
3038

0.25
0.5
1
1
2
2
4
6
8
12
12
16
20
25
40
40

2
2
2
2
4
4
6
10
16
20
20
25
35
50
63
80

6
10
16
16
20
20
25
32
50
63
80

D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D09D38
D12D38
D18D38
D25D38
D25D38
D32 and D38

LRD 01
LRD 02
LRD 03
LRD 04
LRD 05
LRD 06
LRD 07
LRD 08
LRD 10
LRD 12
LRD 14
LRD 16
LRD 21
LRD 22
LRD 32
LRD 35

0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124
0.124

LRD 313
LRD 318
LRD 325
LRD 332
LRD 340
LRD 350
LRD 365

0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375

LRD 3322
LRD 3353
LRD 3355
LRD 3357
LRD 3359
LRD 3361
LRD 3363
LRD 3365
LRD 4365
LRD 4367
LRD 4369
LRD 33656
LRD 33676
LRD 33696

0.510
0.510
0.510
0.510
0.510
0.510
0.510
0.510
0.900
0.900
0.900
1.000
1.000
1.000

Class 10 A (1) for connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3)

526202

913
1218
1725
2332
3040
3750
4865

25
32
50
63
80
100
100

25
35
50
63
80
100
100

D40AD65A
D40AD65A
D40AD65A
D40AD65A
D40AD65A
D40AD65A
D50A and D65A

Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

6
LRD 33pp

526203

7
8
9

16
20
25
40
40
63
63

LRD 3pp6

1725
2332
3040
3750
4865
5570
6380
80104
80104
95120
110140
80104
95120
110140

25
40
40
63
63
80
80
100
125
125
160
100
125
160

50
63
100
100
100
125
125
160
200
200
250
160
200
250

50
63
80
100
100
125
125
160
160
200
200
160
200
200

D80 and D95

D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D80 and D95
D115 and D150
D115 and D150
D150
(2)
(2)
(2)

Class 10 A (1) for connection by lugs

Select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add one
of the following suffixes:
b figure 6 for relays LRD 01 to LRD 35 and relays LRD 313 to LRD 365.
b A66 for relays LRD 3322 to LRD 3365.
Relays LRD 43pp are suitable, as standard, for use with lug-clamps.

Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads

Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or lugs

In the references selected above, change the prefix LRD (except LRD 4ppp) to LR3 D.
Example: LRD 01 becomes LR3 D01.
Example with EverLinkconnectors: LRD 340 becomes LR3 D340.
Example with lugs: LRD 3406 becomes LR3 D3406.

10
Characteristics:
pages 6/14 to 6/17

6/20

(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR :
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds
(2) Independent mounting of the contactor.
(3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
Dimensions:
Schemes:
pages 6/26 to 6/28
page 6/29

526204

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays

Differential thermal overload relays

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV3 L
b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,
b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c. or d.c.
Relay setting
range (A)

Fuses to be used with selected relay

aM (A)

gG (A)

BS88 (A)

For use with

contactor LC1

1
Reference

Weight
kg

Classes 10 A (1) for connection by spring terminals (only for direct mounting beneath the contactor)
LRD pp3

0.25

D09D38

LRD 013

0.140

0.160.25

0.5

D09D38

LRD 023

0.140

0.250.40

D09D38

LRD 033

0.140

0.400.63

D09D38

LRD 043

0.140

0.631

D09D38

LRD 053

0.140

11.6

D09D38

LRD 063

0.140

1.62.5

10

D09D38

LRD 073

0.140

2.54

10

16

D09D38

LRD 083

0.140

46

16

16

D09D38

LRD 103

0.140

5.58

12

20

20

D09D38

LRD 123

0.140

710

12

20

20

D09D38

LRD 143

0.140

913

16

25

25

D12D38

LRD 163

0.140

1218

20

35

32

D18D38

LRD 213

0.140

1624

25

50

50

D25D38

LRD 223

0.140

0.100.16

2
3
4

Class 10 A with connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors(2) and control by spring terminals
913

16

25

25

D40AD65A

LRD 3133

0.375

1218

20

32

35

D40AD65A

LRD 3183

0.375

1725

25

50

50

D40AD65A

LRD 3253

0.375

2332

40

63

63

D40AD65A

LRD 3323

0.375

3040

40

80

80

D40AD65A

LRD 3403

0.375

3750

63

100

100

D40AD65A

LRD 3503

0.375

4865

63

100

100

D50A and D65A

LRD 3653

0.375

Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads

5
6

Classes 10 A (1) for connection by BTR screw connectors (2) and control by spring terminals
In the references selected above, replace LRD 3 with LR3 D3.
Example: LRD 3653 becomes LR3 D3653.

Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies

Classes 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals

For relays LRD 06 to LRD 35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the
reference becomes LRD 33ppA66.
Example: LRD 12 becomes LRD 3312A66.
Order an LA7 D3064 terminal block separately, see page 6/25.
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR:
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds
(2) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).

7
8
9
10

6/21

526205

References (continued)

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV3 L

b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,
b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c. or d.c.

LRD 15pp

526201

4
LRD 3ppL

526206

5
6

TeSysD, thermal overload relays

Differential thermal overload relays

TeSys protection components

Relay setting
range (A)

Fuses to be used with selected relay

aM (A)

gG (A)

BS88 (A)

For use with

contactor LC1

Reference

Weight
kg

Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals

2.54

10

16

D09D32

LRD 1508

0.190

46

16

16

D09D32

LRD 1510

0.190

5.58

12

20

20

D09D32

LRD 1512

0.190

710

16

20

25

D09D32

LRD 1514

0.190

913

16

25

25

D12D32

LRD 1516

0.190

1218

25

35

40

D18D32

LRD 1521

0.190

1725

32

50

50

D25 and D32

LRD 1522

0.190

2328

40

63

63

D25 and D32

LRD 1530

0.190

2532

40

63

63

D25 and D32

LRD 1532

0.190

Class 20 (1) for connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (2)

913

20

32

35

D40AD65A

LRD 313L

0.375

1218

25

40

40

D40AD65A

LRD 318L

0.375

1725

32

50

50

D40AD65A

LRD 325L

0.375

2332

40

63

63

D40AD65A

LRD 332L

0.375

3040

50

80

80

D40AD65A

LRD 340L

0.375

3750

63

100

100

D40AD65A

LRD 350L

0.375

4865

80

125

125

D50A and D65A

LRD 365L

0.375

Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals

LR2 D35pp

1725

32

50

50

D80 and D95

LR2 D3522

0.535

2332

40

63

63

D80 and D95

LR2 D3553

0.535

3040

40

100

80

D80 and D95

LR2 D3555

0.535

3750

63

100

100

D80 and D95

LR2 D3557

0.535

4865

80

125

100

D80 and D95

LR2 D3559

0.535

5570

100

125

125

D80 and D95

LR2 D3561

0.535

6380

100

160

125

D80 and D95

LR2 D3563

0.535

(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR:
class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds
(2) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).

9
10

6/22

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSysD, thermal overload relays

Differential thermal overload relays

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers NSX
b Compensated relays, with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting(1).
Relay setting
range (A)

Fuses to be used with selected relay

aM (A)

gG (A)

1
For mounting
beneath
contactor LC1

Reference

Weight
kg

Classes 10 or 10A (2) for connection using bars or connectors

60100

100

160

D115 and D150

LR9 D5367

0.885

90150

160

250

D115 and D150

LR9 D5369

0.885

Classes 20 (2) for connection using bars or connectors

60100

125

160

D115 and D150

LR9 D5567

0.885

90150

200

250

D115 and D150

LR9 D5569

0.885

2
3

Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads

b Compensated relays,
b with separate outputs for alarm and tripping.
Relay setting
range (A)

Fuses to be used with selected relay

aM (A)

gG (A)

For mounting
beneath
contactor LC1

Reference

Weight
kg

Classes 10 or 20 (2) selectable, for connection using bars or connectors

60100

100

160

D115 and D150

LR9 D67

0.900

90150

160

250

D115 and D150

LR9 D69

0.900

(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to
be ordered separately (see page 5/84).
(2) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR:
class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds,
class 20 A: between 6 and 20 seconds

Other versions

Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

5
6
7
8
9
10

6/23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6/24

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays

Separate components for relays

Description

Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection

of the N/C contact of relay LRD 0135 or
LR3 D01D35 to the contactor
Terminal block (2)
for clip-on mounting on
35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) or screw fixing;
for fixing centres, see pages 6/26 to 6/28

LAD 7Cp

LAD 7B106

LAD 96570

For use with

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

Weight
kg

LC1 D09D18

10

LAD 7C1 (1)

0.002

LC1 D25D38

10

LAD 7C2 (1)

0.003

LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35

LAD 7B106

0.100

LRD 150832

LAD 7B105

0.100

LRD 33ppp, LR3 D33ppp, LR2 D35pp

LA7 D3064 (3)

0.370

EverLink terminal block

for independent mounting

LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp

LAD 96560

0.087

Size 4 Allen key, insulated , 1000 V

LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp

LAD ALLEN4

0.026

Terminal block adapter for mounting a relay

beneath an LC1 D115 or D150 contactor

LRD 3pp, LR3 D3ppp, LRD 35pp

LA7 D3058 (3)

0.080

Mounting plates (4)

for screw fixing on 110 mm centres

LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD

150832

10

DX1 AP25

0.065

LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp

LA7 D902

0.130

Marker holders,
snap-in 8 x 18 mm

LRD 3pp

100

LAD 90

0.001

All relays except LRD 0135,

LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL
and LR3 D3pp

100

LA7 D903

0.001

Bag of 400 blank legends

(self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm)

All relays

LA9 D91

0.001

Stop button locking device

All relays except LRD 0135,

LR3 D01D35, LR9 D
and LRD 313LRD 365

10

LA7 D901

0.005

Remote Stop or
electrical reset device (5)

LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35

and LRD 313LRD 365

LAD 703p (6) (7)

0.090

Remote tripping or
electrical reset device (5)

All relays except LRD 0135,

LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL
and LR3 D3pp

LA7 D03p (6)

0.090

Block of insulated terminals

LR9 D

LA9F103

0.560

IP 20 cover for lug type terminals

for independent mounting

LRD 31363656

LAD 96570

0.021

IP 20 cover for lug type terminals

LRD 31363656
for mounting with contactor LC1 D40A6D65A6

LAD 96575

0.010

Terminal block for lug type terminals

for independent mounting

LRD 31363656

LAD 96566

0.010

For use with

Sold in Unit
lots of reference

LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35

and LRD 313LRD 365

LAD 7305 (7)

0.075

All relays except LRD 0135,

LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp,
LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp

LA7 D305

0.075

Remote control

1
2
3
4
5
6

Reset function
Description
By flexible cable
(length = 0.5 m)

Weight
kg

"Stop" and/or "Reset" functions

The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products must be ordered
separately:
Adapter for door mounting

LRD 33pp, LR2 D and LRD 15pp.

LA7 D1020

0.005

Operating heads
for spring return pushbutton

Stop

All relays

XB5 AL84101

0.027

Reset

All relays

XB5 AA86102

0.027

(1) These pre-wiring kits cannot be used with reversing contactors.

(2) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct finger contact and screws in the open, "ready-to-tighten"
position.
(3) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7 D30646.
(4) Remember to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay.
(5) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7 D03 or LAD703 can remain energised
depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with
90s rest time; maximum pulse duration 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(6) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating the control circuit voltage.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) :
LAD 96570

LAD 96575

Volts
50/60 Hz

12

24

48

96

110

220/230

380/400

415/440

DD

Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA

c

Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.

(7) Not compatible with 3-pole relays fitted with spring terminals.

6/25

7
8
9
10

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

LRD 0135

LRD 150832

LRD 013223

Direct mounting beneath contactors

with screw clamp connections

Direct mounting beneath contactors

with screw clamp connections

Direct mounting beneath contactors

with spring terminal connections

TeSys D thermal overload relays

45

92
c

70

45

66
LC1

D09D18

D25D38

123

137

See pages 5/92 and 5/93

LC1

a D09 a D25 c D09 c D25

D18
D38
D18
D38

45

LC1

D093D253

90

97

90

97

168

97

96

107

106

See pages 5/92 and 5/93

53

60

53

60

LRD 313 365

LRD 3136 3656

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40AD65A

with screw clamp connections or EverLink connectors

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40A6D65A6 with lugs

LAD 96570

126

123

55

123

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17

6/26

References :
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Schemes :
page 6/29

55

236

LAD 96575
70

192

126

185

115

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

TeSys D thermal overload relays

LR9 D

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150

136

189

174

150

267

255

LRD 4ppp

3
132
132
AM1
d

120

120

d
DL200 and DR200

DE200 and EDppp

2.5

10.5

AM1
d

DP200 and DR200

DE200 and EDppp

2.5

10.5

LRD 0135
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200

Independent mounting on 110 mm centres

46
=

LAD 7B106
35

10

110

125

37,5

50

85

15

LAD 7B106

45

80

DX1 AP25

90

2x6,5

LRD 313 365

Mounting on rail AM1 Dp200 or ED200

Panel mounting

With terminal block LAD 96560

Mounted on plate AM1 P

Outgoing terminal block

not shown

(1)

AF1 EA4

LAD 96560

AM1
d

55

DP200

DE200

ED200

9.5

9.5

116

74

87

72

LAD 96560

43

43
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.2 x 6.

LRD 0135 and LRD 313365

Remote tripping or electrical reset

10

LAD 703 (1)

32
(1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD0135 and LRD313365
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17

References :
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Schemes :
page 6/29

6/27

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

TeSys D thermal overload relays

LRD 15pp
Remote tripping or electrical reset

45
=

35

82
41

LA7 D03 (1)

50/65

LAD 7B105

Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200

100

2x4,5

96

34

17

AM1
d

DP200

DE200

9.5

(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2 D15.

LRD 3ppp and LR2 D35pp

LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp and LR9 D

Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200

Remote tripping or electrical reset

75
LA7 D3064

50

51,5

100

75/87

LA7 D03 (1)

121

21

32
AM1
d

119

23,5

2x4,5

DP200

DE200

9.5

(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp or LR9 D.

LRD 15 and LRD 3ppp

Adapter for door mounted operator
LA7 D1020
c

Stop

Reset

10

7
LA7 D1020
c : adjustable from 17 to 120 mm

LRD, LRD 313365, LRD 15 and LR9 D

Reset by flexible cable
LA7 D305 and LAD 7305
Mounting with cable straight

Mounting with cable bent

9
e

c
e

10

e : up to 20 mm
c : up to 550 mm

Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17

6/28

e : up to 20 mm

References :
pages6/20 to 6/22

Schemes :
page 6/29

M10x1

TeSys protection components

Schemes

TeSys D thermal overload relays

A2
97

Test

95

Man.

98

_KM

Auto

96

1
2

Reset

Pre-wiring kit LAD 7C1, LAD 7C2

A1

LRD pp, LRD 3pp and LR2 Dpp

95
96
_ LRD

Stop

L1

L2

L3

LR9 D5ppp

(3)

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

_ KM1

(4)

95
97
98

96

6/T3

4/T2

(2)

Test
Stop
Man. reset.

2/T1

(3)

u112%

_A

13

M
3

(1) Tripped.
(2) Overload.

A1

(1)
A2

_ KM

14

_ KM

_M

(3) Setting current.

(4) Specialised circuit.

L3
5

L2
3

0V

L1
1

LR9 D67 and LR9 D69

104

103

u105%

(5)

A
13

_ KM

Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17

_ KM
A1

_M

(1)
A2

98

96

6/T3

4/T2

95
97

(1) Tripped.
(2) Overload.
(3) Setting current.

(2)

Test
Stop
Man. reset.

M
3

(3)

u112%

14

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

(3)

(4)

2/T1

(5)

_ KM1

10

(4) Specialised circuit.

(5) Alarm.

References :
pages 6/20 to 6/22

Dimensions :
pages 6/26 to 6/28

6/29

TeSys protection components

Presentation

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 F

Presentation

TeSys LR9 F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating
conditions of motors.
They provide protection against:
b thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits;
b phase failure and large phase unbalance,
b protracted starting times,
b prolonged stalled rotor condition.

1
2

LR9 F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1 F type
contactor. They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings.
The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover.
A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay.
Two versions are available:
b simplified version: class 10: LR9 Fp3pp, class 20: LR9 Fp5pp,
b complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to
EN609474-1: LR9 Fpp.
This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall
tripping by load shedding.

Simplified version: class 10 or 20

1

2
5
4
3

Ir(A)
127

107

90

150
98

NO

97

95

NC

96

Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit

7
8
2
Class
107

127

10
+

90

150

5
4
3

Load

Ir(A) 20

24 V - / 103

104

Alarm

98

NO

97

95

NC

96

9
1
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Ir adjustment dial
Test button
Stop button
Reset button
Trip indicator
Setting locked by sealing the cover
Class 10/class 20 selector switch
Selector switch for balanced load
/unbalanced load
Alarm circuit

10
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

6/30

References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 F

Environment
Conforming to standards

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60255-8, IEC 60255-17, EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660

Product certifications

UL 508, CSA 22-2

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

IP 20

Conforming to IEC 60529

IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9 F103 or LA7 F70p, see page 6/37

Protective treatment

Standard version

TH

Ambient air temperature

around the device
(conforming to IEC 60255-8)

Storage

- 40+ 85

Normal operation

- 20+ 55 (1)

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

2000

Operating positions
without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

Any position

Shock resistance

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-7

13 gn - 11 ms

Vibration resistance

Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz

Conforming to IEC 255-5

kV

Surge withstand

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5

kV

Resistance to
electrostatic discharge

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2

kV

8 (in air)
6 (in indirect mode)

Resistance to radiated
radio-frequency disturbance

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3

V/m

10

Resistance to
fast transient currents
Electromagnetic
compatibility

Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4

kV

EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2

1
2
3
4
5

Conforming

(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/30

References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

6/31

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 F

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

1
2

Relay type
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 60947-4
(Ui)
Rated operational voltage Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C
(Ue)
Rated impulse
Conforming to IEC 60947-1
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated operational current (Ie)

LR9

F5p57, F57

1000

1000

kV

30 to 630

Short-circuit protection and coordination

F7p75, F75
F7p79, F79

F7p81, F81

Frequency limits

Of the operating current

Hz

5060. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1)

Power circuit
connections

Width of terminal lug

mm

20

25

25

M6

M8

N.m

10

18

Conventional thermal current

Short-circuit protection

By gG or BS fuses or by
circuitbreaker GB2 CD10
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor
2 conductors

mm2
mm2

Min.
1 x 0.75
2x1

Max.
1 x 2.5
2 x 1.5

Flexible cable
1 conductor
without cable end 2 conductors

mm2
mm2

1 x 0.75
2x1

1x4
2 x 2.5

Solid cable

mm2
mm2

1 x 0.75
2x1

1 x 2.5

Tightening torque

N.m

1.2

a.c. supply

V
VA

24
100

48
200

110
400

220
600

380
600

600
600

d.c. supply

V
W

24
100

48
100

110
50

220
45

440
25

Tightening torque

40

M10

30 LR9 F7p75
and LR9 F75
40 LR9 F7p79
and LR9 F79
M10

35

35

58

M12

Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics

Control circuit
connections

5
6

F5p71, F71

See pages: 1/18, 1/19, 1/30 and 1/31

Clamping screw

F5p63, F63
F5p67, F67
F5p69, F69

Maximum sealed current

consumption of the coils
of associated contactors
(occasional operating
cycles of contact 95-96)

1 conductor
2 conductors

(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed
drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/30

6/32

References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 F

Operating characteristics
Tripping class

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

Temperature compensation

10, 10 A and 20
C

- 20+ 70

Reset

Manual on front of relay

Fault indication

On front of relay

Test function

On front of relay

Stop function

Actuation of N/C contact, without affecting N/O contact

Tripping thresholds

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

Sensitivity to
phase failure

Alarm

1.05 0.06 In

Tripping

1.12 0.06 In

Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1

2
3

Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure

Adjustment
(nominal motor current)

Setting dial on front of relay

Security sealing

Yes

Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage

d.c. supply

Supply voltage limits

Current consumption

No-load

Switching current

24

1732

mA

y5

mA

0150

Protection

Short-circuit and overload

Voltage drop

Closed state

y 2.5

Connection

Flexible cable without cable end

mm2

0.51.5

N.m

0.45

Tightening torque

4
5

Auto-protected

LR9 F tripping curve

Average operating times depending on multiples of the setting current
Class 10

Class 20

Tripping time in seconds

1000

Tripping time in seconds

1000

100

100

10

1
2

2
10

9
1

1
2
1,12

7
8
9
10 11 12
x times the setting current (Ir)

1
1,12

5
6
7
8
9
x times the setting current (Ir)

1 Cold state curve

2 Hot state curve

Presentation :
page 6/30

10
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

6/33

TeSys protection components

References

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 F for motor protection

Compensated and differential overload relays

Thermal overload relays:

b compensated and differential,
b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1).

Relay
setting range

Fuses to be used
with selected relay
aM
gG
A
A

For direct mounting Reference

beneath contactor
LC1

3050

50

80

F115F185

LR9 F5357

0.885

4880

80

125

F115F185

LR9 F5363

0.900

60100

100

200

F115F185

LR9 F5367

0.900

90150

160

250

F115F185

LR9 F5369

0.885

132220

250

315

F185F400

LR9 F5371

0.950

200330

400

500

F225F500

LR9 F7375

2.320

300500

500

800

F225F500

LR9 F7379

2.320

380630

630

800

F400F630 and
F800

LR9 F7381

4.160

3050

50

80

F115F185

LR9 F5557

0.885

4880

80

125

F115F185

LR9 F5563

0.900

60100

100

200

F115F185

LR9 F5567

0.900

90150

160

250

F115F185

LR9 F5569

0.885

132220

250

315

F185F400

LR9 F5571

0.950

200330

400

500

F225F500

LR9 F7575

2.320

300500

500

800

F225F500

LR9 F7579

2.320

380630

630

Weight

kg

819555

Class 10 (2)

3
4

819556

LR9 F53pp

Class 20 (2)

5
LR9 F73pp

F400F630 and
LR9 F7581
4.160
F800
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F5371 directly beneath the contactor, they
may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is
always necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37).
(2) Standard IEC 60947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In:
- class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
- class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/30

6/34

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

800

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 F for motor protection

Compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm

Thermal overload relays:

b compensated,
b with relay trip indicator,
b for a.c.,
b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1),
b class 10 or 20 by selector switch,
b protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch,
b with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled.

819557

Relay
setting range

LR9 F57

For direct mounting Reference

beneath contactor
LC1

A
3050

Fuses to be used
with selected relay
aM
gG
A
A
50
80

Weight

F115F185

LR9 F57

kg
0.885

4880

80

125

F115F185

LR9 F63

0.900

60100

100

200

F115F185

LR9 F67

0.900

90150

160

250

F115F185

LR9 F69

0.885

132220

250

315

F185F400

LR9 F71

0.950

200330

400

500

F225F500

LR9 F75

2.320

300500

500

800

F225F500

LR9 F79

2.320

380630

630

F400F630 and
LR9 F81
4.160
F800
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F71 directly beneath the contactor, they may
be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is always
necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37).

2
3
4

800

5
6
7
8
9
10

Presentation :
page 6/30

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

6/35

TeSys protection components

References

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 F
Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Control accessories
Description

Sold in
lots of
1

Unit
reference
LA7 D03p (2)

Remote Reset function control

by flexible cable (length = 0.5 m)

LA7 D305

0.075

Remote Stop and/or

Reset function control

Adapter for door

mounted operator

LA7 D1020

0.005

Rod (snap-off end

to obtain required
length, between
17 and 120 mm)
Operating head
for spring return
pushbutton

10

ZA2 BZ13

0.100

ZA2 Bpppp (3)

0.012

Remote electrical reset device (1)

LA7 D03p

2
3

Connection accessories

For mounting an LR9 F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an

LC1F185 contactor
Description

Weight
kg
0.090

Reference

Set of 3 busbars

LA7 D305

LA7 F407

Weight
kg
0.160

For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or

stardelta contactors
Application
For relay

For contactor

LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, LC1 F115

F5p69, F69, F71

6
7

Width of
terminal lug

Set of 3 busbars
Reference

Weight

mm
15

LA7 F401

kg
0.110

LR9 F5p57, F5p63

LC1 F150, F185

20

LA7 F402

0.110

LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71

LC1 F185

25

LA7 F407

0.160

LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71

LC1 F225, F265

25

LA7 F403

0.160

LR9 F7p75, F7p79,

LR9 F75, F79

LC1 F225...F400

25

LA7 F404

0.160

LR9 F7p81,
LR9 F81

LC1 F400

25

LA7 F404

0.160

LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LC1 F500

LR9 F75, F79, F81

30

LA7 F405

0.270

LR9 F7p81,
LR9 F81

40

LA7 F406

0.600

LC1 F630, F800

(1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7D03 can remain energised
depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest
time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of
300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(2) Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code.
Standard control circuit voltages,
(for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):

Volts

12

24

48

96

a 50/60 Hz

B
E

Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA

c
J
B
E
DD
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
(3) Stop: ZA2 BL432 and Reset: ZA2 BL639.

10
Presentation :
page 6/30

6/36

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

110
F

220/
230
M

380/
400
Q

415/
440
N

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 F
Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Mounting plates for overload relay

For use with relays

Reference

LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F5p71,

LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69, F71

LA7 F901

Weight
kg
0.100

LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,

LR9 F75, F79, F81

LA7 F902

0.100

Sets of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole

LA7 F90p

LA9 F70p

For use
with relays
LR9 F5p57,
LR9 F57

Number of
shrouds per set
6

Set
reference
LA9 F701

Weight
kg
0.015

LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,

LR9 F63, F67, F69

LA9 F702

0.015

LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71

LA9 F705

0.015

LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,

LR9 F75, F79, F81

LA9 F703

0.015

Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole

For use
with relays
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69

Reference
LA7 F701

Weight
kg
0.030

LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71

LA7 F702

0.030

LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,

LR9 F75, F79, F81

LA7 F703

0.030

1
2
3
4
5

Insulated terminal blocks

LA7 F70p

For use
with relays
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69

Set of 2 blocks
Reference
LA9 F103

Weight
kg
0.560

Sold in
lots of
100

Unit
reference
LA7 D903

Weight
kg
0.001

LA9 D91

Marking accessories
Description
Clip-in marker holder
LA9 F103

Bag of 400 blank

self-adhesive legends
7 x 16 mm

0.001

7
8
9
10

Presentation :
page 6/30

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

Dimensions, schemes :
pages 6/38 and 6/39

6/37

TeSys protection components

Dimensions

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 F

48

50

120
50

25

50

50

40

(2)

40

LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,

LR9 F75, F79, F81

127,6

P1

5,5

LR9 F7p81 (for mounting beneath LC1 F630 and F800),

LR9 F81

P2

200
80

30

80

20

14
22,1

42,2

62,1
228,8

25
51,5

51,5

66
(1) Terminal shroud
LA9 F70p

40

188,8

82
136,8

44,8

108,8
70

60

96

71

(2) 6.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p57 and F57. 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69

Common side view

(1)

20
115

115

46,8

(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p

60

76

101

44,8

76

48

123,5
56,8
(1) 3

LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67,

LR9 F5p69, F57, F63, F67, F69

5,5

LR9 F5p71, F71

71

Common side view

66

40

150
P1
48
55

LR9 F7p75, F75

LR9 F7p79, F7p81, F79, F81

P2
48
55

76,5

76,5
193

Direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 F

Mounting beneath contactors:

reversing LC2 F or star-delta LC3 F

H3

H3

H2

Mounting plate
for LR9 F

(1)

(2) (3)

H2

H2

LA7 F4

(1)

8
9
10

(2)

6/38

LA7
F901
F902

G
145
190

(3)

Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays

b
F115
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
240
F57, F63, F67, F69
F150
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
246
F57, F63, F67, F69
F185
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
250
F57, F63, F67, F69
F225
F5p71, F71
273
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
308
F265
F5p71, F71
279
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
314
F330
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
317
F400
F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317
F500
F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346
F630, F800
F7p81, F81
510
(1) Relay mounting plate LA7 F90p, see page 6/37
(2) AM1 EC or AM1 DF for LC1 F115 to F630 and LC1 F800
Presentation :
page 6/30

H1

H1

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

H1
30

H2
50

H3
120

30

50

120

30

50

120

40
50
40
60
60
60
70
110

50
58
50
58
58
58
58
58

120
120
120
120
120
180
180
180

Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays

F115
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
F57, F63, F67, F69
F150
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
F185
F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
F225
F5p71, F71
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
F265
F5p71, F71
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
F330
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79
F400
F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81
F500
F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81
F630, F800
F7p81, F81
(3) DZ5 MB for LC1 F115 to F400

References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Schemes :
page 6/39

b
H1
279 60

H2
50

H3
120

283 60

50

120

285 60

50

120

360
332
363
364
364
390
509

58
50
58
58
58
58
58

120
120
120
120
180
180
180

100
90
100
100
100
110
120

TeSys protection components

Schemes,
setting-up

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,

TeSys LR9 F

Schemes

L3
5

L2

104

103

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

(2)

95
97

98

96

13
A1

14

A2

(1)

KM

A2

A1

(1)

KM

KM

14

13

M
3

KM

(1)

6/T3

98

96

6/T3

4/T2

95
97

M
3

Test
Stop
Man. reset

2/T1

(4)

112 %

Test
Stop
Man. reset

4/T2

(3)

(1)

(4)

2/T1

(2)

KM1

(3)

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

KM1

0V

L1

L3
5

L2
3

LR9 F57F81 (with alarm)

L1
1

LR9 F5p57F7p81

(1) Tripped on thermal overload

(2) Overheating alarm
(3) Setting current
(4) Specialised circuit

Setting-up the special functions of TeSys LR9 F thermal overload relays

Setting the relay

b Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings.
b Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in Amperes.
b The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7.

6
LR9 F5369

1
7

TRIPPED

TEST

Ir(A)
105

STOP

RESET

125

90

150
98

NO

97

95

NC

96

6
5
4
3
2

Stop function 3

Test function 2

Stop

Test

PE D

STOP

ED

TRIPP

RESET

TEST

b The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button 3.

b Pressing the Test button:
v actuates the N/C contact,
v has no effect on the N/O contact.
b The STOP button can be locked by fitting a U clip
(reference: LA7 D901).

Presentation :
page 6/30

Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33

Trip indicator

STOP

RESET

ED

TRIPP
TEST

STOP

RES

b The Test function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button 2

with a screwdriver.
b Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and:
v actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts,
v actuates the trip indicator 5.

References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37

Dimensions :
page 6/38

6/39

10

TeSys protection components

Presentation,
characteristics

Single-pole magnetic over current relays

Presentation

The RM1XA electromagnetic relay detects over current peaks in excess of the
maximum permissible current value. It is designed for the protection of circuits which
are not subject to current peaks (starters, resistors) or for controlling starting peaks
on slip ring motors.

1
2
3

It trips instantaneously and is not suitable for frequent operation (12 operating cycles
per hour). It can withstand a continuous current equivalent to 1.25 times the minimum
setting current.

Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards

Standard version NF C 63-650, VDE 0660

Approvals

CSA

Protective treatment

Standard version TC, special version TH

Ambient air temperature

around the device
Maximum operating altitude

C
m

Operating position

Storage: - 60+ 70
Operation: - 40+ 60
3000
15 in relation to normal vertical mounting position

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Maximum rated operational voltage

a or c 600

Frequency limits
of the rated operational current

Hz

060

Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current

Occasional making and
breaking capacities

a.c. supply

d.c. supply

10

Voltage

48

110

220

380

600

Power (1)

VA

4000

12 000

17 000

22 000

Voltage

48

110

220

440

600

Power (2)

240

200

190

180

180

(1) Circuit such as the electromagnet of a contactor - cos j j inrush: 0.7 and cos j sealed: 0.4.
(2) Circuit such as an electromagnet without economy resistor ; time constant varying from 20
ms for 5 W to 200 ms for 100 W or more.

Operating times: because of the numerous applications for RM1XA over current
relays, it is not possible to give precise operating times. The curves shown are
therefore purely indicative.

Time in ms

Operating times

100
90
80
70
60
Setting
points

50
40

4th 25 In

30

3 rd

20

2nd In
1st

10
8

1,6 In

0,9 1

0,8 In

3
4
5 6 7 8
current passing/set current

10
References:
pages 6/41 and 6/42

6/40

Dimensions:
page 6/43

Schemes:
page 6/43

TeSys protection components

References

Single-pole magnetic over current relays

533558

Non-latching

With 1 C/O contact block, non-latching

Recommanded
operating range
(motor In)

0.71.15

A
1.254

Maximum
continuous
current
a or c
A
1.6

1.161.8

26.3

2.5

RM1 XA002

0.990

1.92.9

3.210

RM1 XA004

0.990

34.6

516

6.3

RM1 XA006

0.990

4.77.2

825

10

RM1 XA010

0.990

7.311.5

12.540

16

RM1 XA016

0.990

11.618

2063

25

RM1 XA025

0.990

18.129

32100

40

RM1 XA040

0.990

29.146

50160

63

RM1 XA063

0.990

46.172

80250

100

RM1 XA100

0.990

73115

125400

160

RM1 XA160

0.990

116145

160500

200

RM1 XA200

0.990

146230

250800

315

RM1 XA315

0.990

231360

400 1250

500

RM1 XA500

0.990

361630

6302200

1000

RM1 XA101

0.990

361570

6302000

1000

RM1 XA101

0.990

A
a or c
RM1 XA001

Setting range
(trip current)

Reference

Weight

RM1 XA001

kg
0.990

Accessory (to be ordered separately)

Description
1 C/O contact block, non-latching

Reference
RM1 ZG21

Weight
kg
0.060

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
page 6/40

Dimensions:
page 6/43

Schemes:
page 6/43

6/41

References (continued)

Single-pole magnetic over current relays

Latching with manual reset

533559

TeSys protection components

With 1 C/O contact block, latching with manual reset

Recommanded
operating range
(motor In)

0.71.15

A
1.254

Maximum
continuous
current
a or c
A
1.6

1.161.8

26.3

2.5

RM1 XA0021

0.990

1.92.9

3.210

RM1 XA0041

0.990

34.6

516

6.3

RM1 XA0061

0.990

4.77.2

825

10

RM1 XA0101

0.990

7.311.5

12.540

16

RM1 XA0161

0.990

11.618

2063

25

RM1 XA0251

0.990

18.129

32100

40

RM1 XA0401

0.990

29.146

50160

63

RM1 XA0631

0.990

46.172

80250

100

RM1 XA1001

0.990

73115

125400

160

RM1 XA1601

0.990

116145

160500

200

RM1 XA2001

0.990

146230

250800

315

RM1 XA3151

0.990

231360

4001250

500

RM1 XA5001

0.990

361630

6302200

1000

RM1 XA1011

0.990

361570

6302000

1000

RM1 XA1011

0.990

A
a or c

533560

RM1 XA0011

4
RM1 XA1001
+
ER1 XA2p

533561

5
6
7

Setting range
(trip current)

Reference

Weight

RM1 XA0011

kg
0.990

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description

Reference

1 C/O contact block, latching

RM1 ZH21

Electrical reset (1)

ER1 XA2p
(consumption: inrush, sealed: 500 VA)
(fitted to the relay together with a latching contact block)
Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit
voltage (2)
(1) The impulse duration must not exceed 2 seconds within 10 minute intervals.
(2) Standard coil voltages for electrical reset:
Volts
24
48
110
220
50 Hz
B
E
F
M

RM1 XA0011
+
RM1 ZH21

8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 6/40

6/42

Dimensions:
page 6/43

Schemes:
page 6/43

Weight
kg
0.070
0.240

380
Q

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
schemes

Dimensions
RM1 XAppp,
RM1 XAppp1

Single-pole magnetic over current relays

RM1 XA001XA040
RM1 XA0011XA0401

RM1 XA063, XA100

and XA315
RM1 XA0631, XA1001
and XA3151

RM1 XA160, XA200,

and XA500
RM1 XA1601, XA2001,
and XA5001

RM1 XA101,
RM1 XA1011

Common side view

L1

M12

d1

M4/M5

RM1 ZH2

25

25

110

L
13

27,5 27,5

55

123

RM1 XAppp1 with electrical reset ER1 XA2p

48

155

50

63,5

RM1
XA 063
XA 100
XA 160
XA 200
XA 315
XA 500
XA 101

25

124

25

d1

L1

20.5
20.5
27.5
27.5
35.5
40.5

5.5
5.5

83
87
94
94
74
84

25
25
25
25
44
44
37

40
40
40
40
55
55
64

15
20
25
25
30
40

M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10

4
5

27,5 27,5
55

6
91

1
2

94

92
13

13

14
X1

14
A1

A1

H1

X2

A2

KM1

A2

KM1

A2

KM1

KM1

S2

14

A1 14

14

13

13

13

KM1

12

S1

12

S1

S2

11

94

RM1

94

RM1

93

93

91

3-wire control
(with trip signal)

11

92

94

92

94

92

RM1

2-wire control (with

mechanical latching)

91

93

93

3-wire control (without

mechanical latching)

91

Non-latching
1

Latching
93

RM1 XA

91

RM1 XAppp

RM1 XAppp1

92

Schemes

9
10
Characteristics:
page 6/40

References :
pages 6/41 and 6/42

6/43

Selection guide

TeSys protection components

Thermistor protection units
for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Applications

General protection and protection of motors fitted with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Standards and approvals

IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA

Reset method

Automatic

Fault signalling

Fault memory in the event of a supply failure

Fault test

Rated control circuit voltages

a 50/60 Hz

Single voltage 115 V or 230 V

Rated control circuit voltages c

Single voltage 24 V

Contact type

1 N/C

Protection unit type

LT3 SE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Pages

9
10

6/44

6/50
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

1
2
3
IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA
LROS

Automatic

Manual or automatic

On front panel of unit and remote

Yes

By pushbutton on front panel of unit

Dual voltage 115/230 V

Multivoltage 24230 V

Single voltage 400 V

Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V
Multivoltage 24230 V

Dual voltage 24/48 V

Dual voltage 24/48 V

Multivoltage 24230 V

Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O

Multivoltage 2 C/O

Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O

Multivoltage 2 C/O

LT3 SA

LT3 SM

5
6
7
8

6/50

9
10

6/45

TeSys protection components

General

Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Application

LT3Sp thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the

machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc.) by means of PTC thermistor
probes embedded in the machine windings.

If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid
increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the
machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below).

Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected.

Electromagnetic compatibility

Conforming to Electromagnetic compatibility directive.

Conforming to standard EN 61000-6-2.

3
4

Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC 61000-4-2)

Level 3

Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC 61000-4-4)

Level 3

Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields (conforming to IEC 61000-4-3)

Level 3

Surge resistance 1.2/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC 61000-4.5)

Level 4

Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC 61000-4-11)

Suitable for use with variable speed controllers

Thermistor probes

Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes:

from 90 to 160C, in steps of 10 C.
Curve R = f (q), characteristic of a PTC thermistor probe, is defined by standard
IEC60947-8.
The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends
on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe.
This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who
have all the necessary information.

Application example
Insulation class of rotating
machines conforming to
IEC 60034-11
(S1 duty)

A
B
E
F
H

NOT
Nominal operating
temperature
C

Temperature at which
rapid increase in
resistance occurs
Probes used for
Alarm
Fault
C
C

100
110
120
140
160

100
110
120
140
160

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49

6/46

References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

100
120
130
150
170

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Protection unit type

Reset method

LT3SE
Automatic

LT3SA
Automatic

LT3SM
Manual/Automatic

Fault indication

Fault test

On front panel of unit and

remote

Probe interchangeability

Label Mark A
to IEC60034-11

Label Mark A
to IEC60034-11

On front panel of unit and

remote
By pushbutton on front
panel of unit
Label Mark A
to IEC60034-11

Product certifications

IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660

IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660
LROS

Degree of protection

IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529, VDE 0106

e marking
C

LT3Sp protection units have been designed to comply with the basic
recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC.
Therefore LT3Sp products bear the European Community e mark.
- 40+ 85

- 25+ 60

Environment
Conforming to standards

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-1
and 2-2
Operation

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating
With derating

Vibration resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

Shock resistance

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

Operating positions
without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660

1500 m
Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 C)
must be reduced by 5 C per additional 500 m above 1500 m
2.5 gn (225 Hz)
1 gn (25150 Hz)
5 gn (11 ms)
Any position

Average consumption

4
5

Power supply circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)

a 50/60 Hz
0.851.1 Uc
a 50/60 Hz
0.851.1 Uc
c
0.81.25 Uc
0.851.1 Uc

Single voltage
Dual voltage
Multivoltage

V
V
V

115 or 230

115/230
24230

400
115/230. 24/48
24230

Single voltage
Dual voltage
Multivoltage

V
V
V

24

24/48
24230

24/48
24230

Sealed

a
c

VA
W

< 2.5
<1

< 2.5
<1

< 2.5 except (400 V : 2.7)

<1

6
7

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

8
9
10
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

6/47

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermistor protection units
for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Control circuit characteristics

Protection unit type

Resistance
Maximum number of probes
fitted in series (2)
Voltage at terminals
in the thermistor circuit

2
3
4
5

Thermistor probe
short-circuit detection
Connection of probes
to the LT3

Tripping
Reset
Probes y 250 W at 25

W
W

LT3SE
27003100
15001650
6

LT3SA
27003100
15001650
6

LT3SM
27003100
15001650
6

Normal operation
(R = 1500 W)
Conforming to IEC 60034-11
(R = 4000 W)
Operating threshold

< 2.5

< 2.5

< 2.5

< 7.5

< 7.5

< 7.5

< 20

< 20

Distance

300

400

500

1000 (3)

Minimum c.s.a. of conductors

mm2

0.75

1.5

2.5

Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts

Contact type

Single voltage or dual voltage

Multivoltage

Rated insulation voltage

1 N/C

a 500

Maximum operational voltage

a 250 (a 400 V for LT3SM00V)

Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Conventional thermal current
Operational power

Uimp

kV

2.5

At 220 V

A
VA

5
100 for 0.5 million operating cycles

Breaking capacity

In cat. AC-16

120 V
250 V

A
A

6
3

In DC-13

24 V

mm2
mm2
N.m

2 x 11 x 2.5
1 x 0.752 x 2.5
0.8

Cabling (cage type connector)

for flexible or solid cable

Without cable end

With cable end

Tightening torque

6
7

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 C/O

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 C/O

Thermistor probe characteristics

Probe type
Conforming to standards

DA1TTppp
IEC 60034-11. Mark A

DA1TSppp

Resistance

At 25 C

3 x 250 in series

250

Rated operational voltage

(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage
(Ui)
Insulation

Per probe

c 2.5 V max

c 2.5 V max

kV

2.5

Reinforced

Reinforced

Length of connecting cables

Between probes

mm

250

Between probe and

motor terminal plate

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

(2) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 W at 20 C.
(3) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).

9
10
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

6/48

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermistor protection units
for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

LT3S protection unit/thermistor probe combination

Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at

25C) in series, conforming to standard IEC 60034-11, Mark A.

LT3SE, LT3SA, LT3SM protection units

Resistance
(ohms)

10 000

3100
2700
1650
1500
1000
750

Trip zone
Reset zone

100

20

Trip zone on probe short-circuit

NOT + 15 C

NOT -5 C
NOT
NOT +5 C

-20

NOT -20 C

10

Temperature
(C)

1 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series.

NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature

Protection unit tripped.

Protection unit reset.
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

7
8
9
10
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

6/49

TeSys protection components

References

Protection units (without fault memory)

108694-24-M

Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection

Connection
Cage connectors

Voltage
a 50/60 Hz

115 V

Output
contact
N/C

Reference
LT3SE00F

Weight
kg
0.220

230 V

N/C

LT3SE00M

0.220

24 V

N/C

LT3SE00BD

0.220

Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection

On front panel: fault and voltage signalling indicator.

Cage connectors

108698-24-M

Connection

LT3SE00M

Voltage
a 50/60 Hz

115/230 V

Output
contact
N/C + N/O

24/48 V

N/C + N/O

a 50/60 Hz
or c

24230 V 2 C/O

Reference

Weight
kg
0.220

LT3SA00M
LT3SA00ED

0.220

LT3SA00MW

0.220

Protection units (with fault memory)

Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection

On front panel:
- fault and voltage signalling indicator,
- Test and Reset button.

Connection
LT3SA00M

400 V

Output
contact
N/C + N/O

LT3SM00V

Weight
kg
0.220

24/48 V

N/C + N/O

LT3SM00E

0.220

115/230 V

N/C + N/O

LT3SM00M

0.220

24/48 V

N/C + N/O

LT3SM00ED

0.220

a 50/60 Hz
or c

24230 V 2 C/O

LT3SM00MW

0.220

a 50/60 Hz

108696-24-M

Cage connectors

Voltage

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

7
LT3SM00M

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49

6/50

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

Reference

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

Thermistor protection units
for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

813383

PTC thermistor probes (1)

Description

Nominal
Operating
Temperature
(NOT)
C
Integrated triple 90
probes
110

Colour

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Green/green

10

DA1TT090

kg
0.010

Brown/brown

10

DA1TT110

0.010

120

Grey/grey

10

DA1TT120

0.010

130

Blue/blue

10

DA1TT130

0.010

140

White/blue

10

DA1TT140

0.010

150

Black/black

10

DA1TT150

0.010

160

Blue/red

10

DA1TT160

0.010

170

White/green

10

DA1TT170

0.010

White/grey

10

DA1TS060

0.005

70

White/brown

10

DA1TS070

0.005

80

White/white

10

DA1TS080

0.005

90

Green/green

10

DA1TS090

0.005

100

Red/red

10

DA1TS100

0.005

Surface probes 60

813384

DA1TTppp

Weight

Mounting accessories

Adapter

Application

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

For fixing on 4 rail DZ5MB

10

RHZ66

kg
0.005

3
4

Weight

AB1Rp (2)

0.002

AB1Gp (2)

0.002

Marking accessories
Clip-in markers Strips of 10 identical numbers
25
(maximum of 5
(0 to 9)
per unit)
Strips of 10 identical capital letters 25
(A to Z)

6
7

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

(2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.

DA1TSppp

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description

8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49

Dimensions :
page 6/52

Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53

6/51

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
schemes,
setting-up

Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

Dimensions

LT3SE, SA, SM
Mounting on 5 rail AM1DP200

Mounting on 1 4 rail
(with adapter RHZ66)

100

50

115

50

100

98,4

RHZ 66

22,5

LT3SA dual voltage

(2)

T2

95

T2

Ue

96
(2)

A2

Y1 Test

97

T2

95

Reset

Y2

Rd

Ue

(2)

Reset

Terminal
Voltage

05

A1
48 V
230 V

B1
24 V
115 V

06
98
96
A

K H

08
Fault

Y1 Test
Y2

96
A

95

A1

T1

A2

Rd

Fault

98

06
98

LT3Sp dual voltage

A2

A1
or
B1

T2

(2)

08

K H

LT3SM multivoltage

96

05

(2)

Fault

LT3SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1)

Ue

Ue

T1

T2

95

T1

98
97

Fault

95

A1

T1

A2

96

A2

T1

LT3SA multivoltage

A1
or
B1

LT3SE
Without fault memory
A1

Schemes for no fault operation

K H

K H

Setting-up

Cabling
It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit. This is especially important for long cable runs.
If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit.
Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3S unit
Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3S protection unit.
Measure the insulation value between these terminals and earth using a megger or a flash tester, progressively increasing the voltage to the value defined by the
standards.

9
10

Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation

With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions:
b disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc.,
b using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 2.5 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals,
b depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 C is correct.
Example: motor fitted with 3 PTC thermistor probes with a resistance y 250 W at 25 C.
Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 W indicates a problem.
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
(2) Relay energised: the contacts are shown in the operating position.

Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49

6/52

References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

TeSys protection components

Operation

Thermistor protection units

for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)

LT3SA protection units

L1
A1
or
B1

L2
L3

T1

98

Ue
Fault

97
Ko

95

A2

T2

Starting
The LT3SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised
position.
The motor is started by operating pushbutton M automatically held in by K (3-wire
control circuit).

96

A
M

Thermal fault
The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature
reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3SA unit
and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator
on unit LT3SA.
Contactor K drops out and pressing button M has no effect.

Operating
temperature
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Reset threshold

Reset
As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold, 2 to 3C below the nominal
operating temperature.
The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button M.

Relay Ko

2
3
4

Fault indicator
Contactor K
Pushbutton M

LT3SM protection units

L1

Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following:
A1
or
B1

L2
L3

T1

T2

96

Fault

Reset
After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET
button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Rd) must be pressed to energise the
relay.

98

Ue

97
Ko

95

R1

The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has
dropped to well below the reset threshold.

A2

A
Rd

K H

Signalling circuit
As the relay is fitted with 2 separate contacts, the signalling voltage may be different
from the contactor control voltage.

Test
Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out:
the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator. The unit is
reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again.

Operating
temperature
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Reset threshold
Test/Reset
button
Reset Rd
Relay Ko
Fault indicator

Contactor K

Pushbutton M

10

(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient

Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49

References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51

6/53

TeSys protection components

Presentation,
description

Electronic over current relays

Presentation
LR97D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine
protection requirements.
These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function.
They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high
resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions.
They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting.
The LR97D relay also incorporates two fixed time protection functions, one of 0.5 seconds
against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure.
LR97D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection. In this case, setting the
O-Time knob to minimum will ensure tripping in 0.3 seconds.

510429

1
2

LR97D

510430

Applications
LR97D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines:
b Monitoring function for excessively long starting time on machines with a risk of difficult
starting:
v Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines.
b Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function
v Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time,
v Mechanical failure monitoring,
v Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its
thermal protection It.
b Motor protection for specific applications:
v Machines with long starting times,
v Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour,
v Machine with fluctuating load from a steady state, where the thermal image of a thermal
overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor.
Examples of machines:
v Conveyors, crushers and mixers,
v Fans, pumps and compressors,
v Centrifuges and spin-dryers,
v Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists.

Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97D and LT47 relays can be combined with the
motor-starter function:
D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state.
The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase. During this phase the
overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting. Under steady state conditions,
when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing,
the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time
knob.
The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped.

5
LT47

6
7

The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps:

- Adjust the 3 knobs to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time),
- Adjust the D-Time knob to the value corresponding to the motor starting time.
- When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load knob (turn the knob counter-clockwise
until the red LED starts to flicker).
- Slowly turn the Load knob clockwise until the LED goes out.
- Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time knob.

Description
Description

Status signalling

LR97Dppppp

RESET

TEST/STOP

LT47ppppp

3
4
9
1
8
2

3
4
2
TEST
RESET

A1

A2

2T1

9
10

98

4T2

95

96

1
2
3
4
5
6

RESET knob
TEST/STOP knob
Ready/Run Indicator
Relay tripped indicator
Current setting
Adjustment of starting
time

LED signal

Status

Green LED

Voltage

On

10

7 Adjustment of tripping
time
8 Manual/Auto adjustment
9 Single-phase/3-phase
adjustment
10 Retractable fixing lugs

Red LED
Off

On

Overload

Off

On

OverTrip current
Rotor
locked
Pha
se
failure

LED signal

Condition
Voltage

Green LED
On

Off

Steady
state

On

Off

Overload

On

Off

On

Trip

On

Off

Off
L1 Off
L2

Off

L3 Off

Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56

6/54

Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57

Red LED

Starting

Starting
Steady
state

6T3

5 6 7

LR97Dppppp
LT47ppppp
To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating
status:

References :
page 6/58

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/59

Schemes :
page 6/59

TeSys protection components

Curves

Electronic over current relays

Curves
LR97D

Overload protection
Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
U power supply A1-A2
Starting

Locked rotor
on starting

Mechanical jamming
during steady state
operation

Overload
Brief
overload

3 x I setting
Setting current
Normal steady state operation

Current
D-Time

O-Time

0,5 s

O-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)

Tripping due to locked rotor or

mechanical jamming during
steady state operation

95

Tripping on overload

95

96
98
96
98

Reset: Manual (1)

automatic (2)
or electric (3)

Overload protection
Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation
U power supply A1-A2
Starting

Phase
failure

Overload

Missing
phase

Brief
overload

Setting current
Normal steady state operation

Current
D-Time

O-Time

<3s

O-Time

<3s
Tripping due to 95
phase failure
Tripping on overload 95

96

Reset: Manual (1)

or electric (3)

98
96
98

Reset: Manual (1)

automatic (2)
or electric (3)

Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2

Starting

Overload

8
Setting current
Normal steady state operation
Current

Tripping to due mechanical shock 95

t
D-Time

O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)

96

Reset: Manual (1)

automatic (2)
or electric (3)

98

(1) By Reset button.

(2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I> 3 x I setting) or phase failure.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.

Presentation, description :
page 6/54

Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57

References :
page 6/58

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/59

Schemes :
page 6/59

6/55

10

TeSys protection components

Curves (continued),
characteristics

Electronic over current relays

Curves (continued)

LT47
Overload protection

U power supply A1-A2

Starting

Overload
Brief
overload

Setting current
Normal steady state operation

Current
O-Time

D-Time

Trip 95
on overload 97

O-Time

Reset: Manual (1)

automatic (2)
or electric (3)

96
98

Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2
Starting

Overload

Setting current
Normal steady state operation

Current

5
6

O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)

D-Time

Tripping due to 95
mechanical shock 97

Reset: Manual (1)

automatic (2)
or electric (3)

96
98

(1) By Reset button.

(2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time knob.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.

Characteristics
Environment

7
8
9

Relay type
Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Degree of protection
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
around the device

Conforming to IEC 60529

and VDE 0106
Conforming to IEC 60068
Storage
Normal operation without derating
(IEC 60947-4-1)

Maximum operating altitude

Operating positions
In relation to normal
without derating
vertical mounting plane
Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-7
Vibration resistance
Permissible acceleration
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5
Surge withstand
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5
Resistance to
In open air
electrostatic discharge
In direct mode
Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance
Immunity to fast transient currents
Conducted emissions
Conforming to EN 55011
Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6

C
C
m

kV
kV
kV
kV
V/m
kV
V

LR97Dppppp
IEC60255-6, IEC 60947
UL, CSA
IP 20 (front face)

LT47ppppp
IEC60255-6, IEC 60947
UL, CSA
IP 20 (front face)

TH
- 30+ 80
- 25+ 60

TH
- 30+ 80
- 25+ 60

2000
Any position

2000
Any position

15 gn - 11 ms

15 gn - 11 ms

4 gn

4 gn

2
6
8 (level 3)
6 (level 3)
10 (level 3)
2
Class A
10

2
6
8 (level 3)
6 (level 3)
10 (level 3)
2
Class A
10

10
Presentation, description :
page 6/54

6/56

References :
page 6/58

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/59

Schemes :
page 6/59

TeSys protection components

Characteristics (continued)

Electronic over current relays

Characteristics

Auxiliary contact characteristics

Relay type
Contact type
Conventional thermal current
Maximum hold consumption
of controlled contactor coils
(occasional operating cycles
of contact 95-96)

Conforming to IEC 60947

Short-circuit protection

By gG, BS fuses. Maximum

rating or GB2 circuit-breaker
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable
1 or 2 conductors
Min.
without cable end
Max.
Flexible cable
1 or 2 conductors
Min.
with cable end
Max.
External of lugs
of screw
Tightening torque

A
V
VA
V
W
A

LR97Dppppp
1 NO/NC
3
a 24
a 48
70
140
c 24
c 48
55
55
3

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm
mm
N.m

1 x 0.75
2 x 2.5
1 x 0.34
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
7
M3
0.61.2

a 110
360
c 110
28

a 220
360
c 220
28

LT47ppppp
1 N/O + 1N/C
3
a 24
a 48
70
140
c 24
c 48
55
55
3

1
a 110
360
c 110
28

a 220
360
c 220
28

1x1
2 x 2.5
1x1
2 x 2.5
7
M3.5
0.8...1.7

2
3

Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Relay type
Setting range
Tripping class
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

LR97D38pp

Depending on model

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

Conforming to UL, CSA

V
V
kV

LR97D015pp to
LR97D25pp
0.338
Adjustable
690
600
6

Hz

5060

mm2

mm
mm
N.m

1.5
10
1
4
10
M4
2

A
s

LR97Dppppp
Load knob
0.530

LT47ppppS
Load knob
0.530

LT47ppppA
Load knob

0.2/0.310

0.2/0.310

0.2/0.330

1120

Reset button
120 s fixed
By interruption of power
supply (minimum 0.1 s)
On starting Steady
state
Inhibited
After O-time
during
D-time
After D-time <0.5 s

Reset button
R-time knob: 1-120 s
By interruption of power
supply (minimum 0.1 s)

2 LEDs

Reset button

By interruption of power
supply (minimum 0.1 s)
On starting Steady
state
Inhibited
After O-time
during
D-time
Inhibited
After O-time
during
D-time
Inhibited
After O-time
during
D-time
2 LEDs

No load
Under load
Yes

No load
Under load
Yes

No load
Under load
Yes

Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Frequency limits
Of the operating current
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable
1 conductor
Min.
without cable end
Max.
Flexible cable
1 conductor
Min.
with cable end
Max.
External of lugs
of screw
Tightening torque

mm2

LT47ppppp

0.560
Adjustable
690
600
6
5060
2.5
10
1
6
12
M4
2

Operating characteristics
Relay type
Adjustment

Reset

Current
Time

Manual
Automatic
Electrical

Protection functions
Overload Imax > Isetting

Tripping

Locked rotor, mechanical

jamming I > 3 x Isetting

Tripping

Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping

Status and fault signalling
(see table page 6/54)
TEST/STOP function

Test
Stop

Sealing

Presentation, description :
page 6/54

Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56

D-time
knob
O-time
knob
R-time
knob

<3 s

References :
page 6/58

<3 s

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/59

7
8

After O-time
After O-time

After O-time
2 LEDs

10

Schemes :
page 6/59

6/57

TeSys protection components

References

Electronic over current relays

510429

LR97D electronic over current relays

1
2
LR97D07pp

Usable
range
(1)
A
0.31.3

For use
with contactor
(2)

Relay
supply
voltage

Reference
(3)

LC1D09D38

1.27

1.26

LC1D09D38

525

521

LC1D09D38

2038

2034

LC1D25D38

a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V

LR97D015M7
LR97D015F7
LR97D015B
LR97D015E
LR97D07M7
LR97D07F7
LR97D07B
LR97D07E
LR97D25M7
LR97D25F7
LR97D25B
LR97D25E
LR97D38M7
LR97D38F7
LR97D38B
LR97D38E

Weight
kg
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172
0.172

LT47 electronic over current relays

510430

Relay
setting
range
A
0.31.5

Relay
setting
range
A

Usable
range
(1)
A

Relay
supply
voltage

Reference

Weight
kg

LT47 relay with manual/electric reset

0.56

0.55

330

325

560

550

5
6

LT4730ppp

a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V

LT4706M7S
LT4706F7S
LT4706BS
LT4706ES
LT4730M7S
LT4730F7S
LT4730BS
LT4730ES
LT4760M7S
LT4760F7S
LT4760BS
LT4760ES

0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192

LT4706M7A
LT4706F7A
LT4706BA
LT4706EA
LT4730M7A
LT4730F7A
LT4730BA
LT4730EA
LT4760M7A
LT4760F7A
LT4760BA
LT4760EA

0,192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192

LT47 relay with automatic reset

7
8

0.56

0.55

330

325

560

550

a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V
a 200240 V
a 100120 V
c/a 24 V
c/a 48 V

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description

For
use with

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

kg
LC1D09D18
Pre-wiring kits allowing
10
LAD7C1
0.002
connection of the LR97D
10
LAD7C2
0.003
LC1D25D38
relay N/C contact directly to
the contactor
LR97D
Terminal block for clip-on
1
LAD7B106
0.100
mounting on 35 mm rail
(AM1DP200)
(1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 6/54).
(2) Please see pages 5/46 and 5/47.
(3) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.

9
10
Presentation, description :
page 6/54

6/58

Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56

Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/59

Schemes :
page 6/59

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes

Electronic over current relays

Dimensions
LR97Dpppp

LT47pppp

62,2
10

12

63

67,5

70,3

50,8

20,4

51,5

19,5

13

51

45
77,2

56
71

Mounting
LR97Dpppp
Direct mounting beneath the contactor
c

LT47pppp

4
5
45

67,5
LC1
b
c

D09D18
D25D38
123
137
See pages 5/92 and 5/93

Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail.

Schemes

MCBB

L3

L1

L2

LT47pppp

L3

L2

L1

LR97Dpppp

MCBB

Stop

A1

A2

KM1

A1 A2 97 98 95 96

LT47
M3

Presentation, description :
page 6/54

14

Test/Stop
Reset
A1
KM1

A2

A1 A2 98 95 96

T3

T2

T1

A1 A2 98 95 96

Start

KM1

Test/Stop
Reset

LR 97D

Start

14

L3

L2

L1

13

13

KM1
KM1

Stop

10

M3

Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56

Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57

References :
page 6/58

6/59

TeSys protection components

Presentation,
application example

TeSys U controllers

107226

Presentation
Above 32 A, the TeSys U controller provides a motor starter management solution
identical to that provided by TeSys U starter-controllers.

Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides

a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys U startercontroller
and, in particular, provides the following functions: overload protection, motor starter
control and application monitoring.

It consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary
of current transformers, plus a control base which also allows fitment of a function
module or a communication module.
It requires a c 24 V external power supply.
The secondaries of current transformers, the c 24 V power supply, the 10 inputs and
the 5 outputs are connected by screw terminal block.

3
520973

Application example
Detecting blockage of a rock crusher by monitoring the motor current.

Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b

Power: 90 kW at 400 V.
In: 185 A.
Duty class S1.
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.

Products used
Description

Item

Quantity Reference

Controller

LUTM20BL

Page
6/64

Multifunction control unit

LUCMT1BL

6/64

Modbus communication module

LUL C033

1/93

Current transformer

LUTC4001

6/64

Contactor

LC1F185P7

Circuit-breaker

NS250HMA

523762

Functions performed

2
5

b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 70 kA at 400V.

b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Detection of crusher blockage by monitoring the induced overcurrent. To use the
"overtorque or jam" function, the following parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
above the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 30 s).
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
current. If the ratio remains above this threshold for the time specified in the previous
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 100 to 800 %).
It is possible to set the parameter for an alarm at a preset threshold under the same
conditions as above.

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

6/60

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

TeSys protection components

Application example

TeSys U controllers

(continued)

Application example (continued)

KA1

4 5 8

13

Q6

Q6

A1

To KA1

KM1
A2

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

KA1

KA1

S2

S1

96

24 V 24 V
c Aux COM

D (B)
D (A)
Gnd

LI2

I.7

I.6

I.3

LI1

24 V Aux

S1

KM1
T3

230 V

Modbus Module

From S1/T1, S1/T2, S1/

T3, S2/T1, S2/T2, S2/
T3

S1
S2

LUL C033

Controller

L3

D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

T2

KA1

S2

4 5 8

S1
S2

T1

LUT M20BL

L1
L2

LUCM T1BL
Multifunction Control Unit

Q6

KA1

LO1

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

Scheme

24 V

W1 6T3

V1 4T2

U1 2T1

KM1
KA1

Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03

M
3

Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
Communication module LULC033 also provides a programmable output and two programmable inputs.

5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

6/61

Characteristics

TeSys protection components

TeSys U controllers

Environment

1
2

Control base and control unit type

4
5
6
7
8

LUTM + LUCMT1BL or LULC

Product certifications

UL, CSA, ASEFA

Conforming to standards

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N14

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,

of the outputs
overvoltage category III,
(Ui)
degree of pollution: 3

250

Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 V

250

Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1

voltage of the outputs
(Uimp)

LUTM + LUCBT1BL or LUCDT1BL

without LULC

kV

Degree of protection
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-1
(protection against
direct finger contact)

Front panel (outside connection zone)

IP 40

Front panel and wired terminals

IP 20

Other faces

IP 20

Protective treatment

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

TH

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30

Cycles 12

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11

48

Ambient air temperature Storage

around the device
Operation

- 40+ 85

- 25+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

2000

Operating positions
Without derating

In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane

- 25+ 60

30

90

90

30
Flame resistance

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12

V2
C

960 (parts supporting live components)

650

Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1)

15 gn

Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1)

4 gn

Resistance to
electrostatic discharge

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2

Resistance to
radiated fields

kV

In open air: 8 - Level 3

kV

On contact: 6 - Level 3

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3

V/m

10 - Level 3

Immunity to fast
transient currents

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4

kV

CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4

kV

Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3

Immunity to
radioelectric fields

Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6

10

Control base and control unit relays

Immunity to
dissipated
shock waves

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1

Common mode

Serial mode

Output relays / power line

kV

Inputs

kV

Serial communication

kV

(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.

10
Presentation :
page 6/60

6/62

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys U controllers

Control circuit supply characteristics

Operational voltage

c 20.428.8

Power consumption

2 max

Associated protection

gG fuse. 0.5

Cabling
Connectors

Pitch

mm

Flexible cable without cable end

1 conductor

mm2

0.22.5

2 identical
conductors

mm2

0.21.5

1 conductor

mm2

0.252.5

2 identical
conductors

mm2

0.251

1 conductor

mm2

0.252.5

2 identical
conductors (1)

mm2

0.51.5

1 conductor

mm2

0.22.5

2 identical
conductors

mm2

0.21

Tightening torque

N.m

0.50.6

Flat screwdriver

mm

c 24

Flexible cable with cable end

Without insulated ferrule

With insulated ferrule

Solid cable without cable end

Conductor size

1 conductor

AWG 24 to AWG 12

Input characteristics
Operational voltage
Logic inputs

Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V
Logic state 0: I y 1.5 mA - 5 V

Discrete output characteristics

Base controller type

LUT M10BL

Type

LUTM20BL

Single break volt-free contacts

Load

a.c. supply

C 300

B 300

d.c. supply

24 V/5 A

24 V/5 A

Permissible power in cat. AC-15

For 500 000

operating cycles

VA

180

500

Permissible power in cat. DC-13

For 500 000

operating cycles

30

30

Associated protection

Used with contactor type (2)

gG fuse, 4

gG fuse, 4

Control voltage c 24 V:
LP1K, LC1D09D95.

Control voltage a 100240 V:

LC1K, LC1D, LC1F185F500

Control voltage a 24240 V:

LC1K, LC1D.

Characteristics of external current transformers LUTCppp1

Precision

Class 5P

Precision limit factor

10

Maximum operating temperature

Transformer ratio

70
30/1

50/1

100/1

200/1

400/1

800/1

Diameter of conductor passage hole

mm

28

22

35

32

Maximum wire c.s.a.

mm2

30 x 10

30 x 10

40 x 10

65 x 32

38 x 127

53 x 127

(1) Use a double cable end.

(2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM
and the contactor coil.

9
10

Presentation :
page 6/60

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

6/63

TeSys protection components

References

TeSys U controllers

532083

References

Control bases (auxiliary supply voltage c 24 V)

Connection

For use
with contactor

Reference

Control
Screws

LC1Dpp

LUT M10BL

0.800

LC1Fppp

LUT M20BL

0.800

For motor
type

Setting range

Reference

10

3-phase

0.351.05

LUCB T1BL

0.140

20

3-phase

0.351.05

LUCD T1BL

0.140

3-phase

0.351.05

LUCM T1BL

0.175

Current
transformers
Screws

Weight
kg

Control units
Description Class
Advanced

Multifunction 5 to 30
LUTM + LUCMT1BL + LUTC pp

Current transformers
Operating current
Primary

4
5

Reference

Secondary

LUT C0301

0.550

50

LUT C0501

0.330

100

LUT C1001

0.450

200

LUT C2001

0.590

400

LUT C4001

0.870

800

LUT C8001

1.210

Note : Communication modules LULC07 (ProfibusDP), ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51

(AS-Interface) are not compatible with the TeSys U controller.
Module LUFW10 is only compatible with control units LUCBT1BL and LUCDT1BL.

8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/60

6/64

Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

Weight
kg

30

Function modules and communication modules

The TeSys U controller is compatible with the modules listed below:
b Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10,
b Motor load indication module LUFV2,
b Communication modules:
v Modbus (LUL C033),
v CANopen (LULC08),
v DeviceNet (LULC09),
v Advantys STB (LUL C15).

Weight
kg

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

TeSys protection components

Combinations

TeSys U controllers

Combinations providing type 2 coordination

With circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings

of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3 400/415 V

Circuit-breaker

PkW

Reference

IeA

Rating
A

Irm (1)
A

Contactor

TeSys U
controller

Current
transformers

Reference (2)

Reference

Reference

18.5

35

GV3L40

40

560

LC1 D50A

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C0501

22

41

GV3L50

50

700

LC1 D50A

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

30

55

GV3L65

65

910

LC1 D65A

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

37

66

NS80HMA

80

1040

LC1 D80

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

45

80

NS100HMA

100

1300

LC1 D95

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

55

97

NS160HMA

150

1350

LC1 D115

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

75

132

NS160HMA

150

1800

LC1 D150

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

90

160

NS250HMA

220

2200

LC1 F185

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

110

195

NS250HMA

220

2640

LC1 F225

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

132

230

NS400HMA

320

3200

LC1 F265

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

160

280

NS400HMA

320

4160

LC1 F330

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

200

350

NS630HMA

500

5000

LC1 F400

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

220

385

NS630HMA

500

5500

LC1 F400

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

250

430

NS630HMA

500

6000

LC1 F500

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C8001

Contactor

TeSys U
controller

Current
transformers

Reference (2)

Reference

Reference

1
2
3
4

With fuses
Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3 400/415 V

Circuit-breaker

aM fuses

PkW

Reference

Size

IeA

Rating
A

18.5

35

GSpF

14 x 51

40

LC1 D40A

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C0501

22

41

GSp J

22 x 58

50

LC1 D50A

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

30

55

GSp J

22 x 58

80

LC1 D80

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

37

66

GSp J

22 x 58

100

LC1 D80

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

45

80

GSp J

22 x 58

100

LC1 D95

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C1001

55

97

GSp L

T0

125

LC1 D115

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

75

132

GSp L

T0

160

LC1 D150

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

90

160

GSp N

T1

200

LC1 F185

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C2001

110

195

GSp N

T1

250

LC1 F225

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

132

230

GSp QQ

T2

315

LC1 F265

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

160

280

GSp QQ

T2

400

LC1 F330

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

200

350

GS2 S

T3

500

LC1 F400

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

220

385

GS2 S

T3

500

LC1 F400

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C4001

250

430

GS2 S

T3

500

LC1 F500

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C8001

315

540

GS2 S

T3

630

LC1 F630

LUTM + LUCp

3 x LUT C8001

5
6
7

(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/60

Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

Schemes :
page 6/67

6/65

TeSys protection components

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSys U controllers

Dimensions, mounting
Controllers
LUTMp0BL

Rail mounting

Rail mounting

171

163

173

73

a (1)

45

2x4

a
With Modbus module

135

With Advantys STB, CANopen

or DeviceNet modules

147

(1) Depth with communication module

Current transformers
LUTC03011001

LUTC20018001

a1

b1

b1

4,2

G
c

5,2/6,2

J
LUTC

LUTC

b1

a1

b1

0301

78

108

42

46

28

45

54

2001

94

32

99

55

40

68

52

0501

57

86

31

42

23

45

50

4001

99

38

170

127

40

75

64

1001

78

108

42

46

35

45

54

8001

125

54

170

127

40

95

67

7
8
9
10
Presentation :
page 6/60

6/66

Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

References :
page 6/64

Schemes :
page 6/67

30

TeSys protection components

Schemes

TeSys U controllers

Schemes

Reversing controller LUT M

LUTM

LUTM
S2

24 V Aux.

I.10

I.9

I.8

I.7

I.5

I.4

I.3

I.2

I.1

L3

L2

I.6

S1
L1

LUTM

2
06/NC

05

(1)
98

97/NC

96/NO

95

23/NO

13/NO

LUTM

3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

24 V
24250 V
Any fault

AV

KM1

06

05

98

97

I.9

I.8

I.10

24 V

I.7 SR

I.6 SF

I.5 RST

I.4

Reset
KM2

AR

4
Control unit fault

I.3

I.2

Channel 2

I.1

Channel 1

96

23

95

KM2

13

KM1

Q1
Trip

24 V

External fault

Stop

Control for Modbus communication module LUL C033

KM2

24 V
24250 V

Manu 1

Any fault

Local/remote

Manu 2

KM1

KM2

Modbus
network port

Free

Reset
KM1

Q1
Trip

Q1
On

LI2

LI1

LO1

OA3

COM

AU

Local/
remote

I.10

I.9

24 V
I.8

I.7 SR

Controll unit fault

I.6 SF

I.5 RST

I.4

KM2

Communication
module

06

05

98

97

96

95

23
I.2

I.1
Free

Any
fault

Channel 2

I.3

13

Stop

Channel 1

AU

OA1

KM1

24 V

10

(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition.
Presentation :
page 6/60

Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63

References :
page 6/64

Dimensions, mounting :
page 6/66

6/67

Selection guide

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Applications

Multifunction motor and machine protection

Device type

Controllers

For network/bus

Modbus

Current range

0.4100 A (with internal current transformer)

100810 A (with external current transformer)

Control voltage

c 24 V
a 100240 V

Number of I/O

6 inputs
4 outputs

Measurements

- Current between phases

- Earth fault.
- Motor temperature.

Functions

Protection and monitoring functions:

- thermal overload,
- motor temperature monitoring,
- phase imbalance and phase failure,
- locked rotor,
- long starting times,
- phase reversal,
- earth fault.

Device type

LTMRppMpp

Pages

6/86

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6/68

CANopen

LTMRppCpp

DeviceNet

LTMRppDpp

Profibus DP

Ethernet TCP/IP

LTMRppPpp

LTMRppEpp

1
2
Input extension modules,
for all LTM R controllers

Operator control unit

c 24 V (1)

a 100240 V (1)

Voltage between phases

Monitoring functions:
- voltage,
- power,
- Cos jj (power factor)

Display functions:
- measurements,
- faults and alarms,
- statistics, etc..j.

LTMEV40FM

6/87

Powered via the LTM R controller

or via the LTM E extension module.

4 independent inputs

LTMEV40BD

5
6
7

LTMCU

6/87

(1) Input control voltage. The electronics are powered via the controller.

9
10

6/69

TeSys protection components

Presentation

Presentation

Suitable for the harshest applications, this product range offers:

b high-performance multifunction protection, independent of the automation system,
b a local HMI control unit for reading, displaying and modifying the parameters
monitored, diagnostics, etc.....
b configuration of the application using PowerSuite software,
b connection to the automation system via a communication network (selection
according to various protocols).

2
3

TeSys T is a motor management system that provides protection, metering and

monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase, constant speed, a.c. motors up
to 810 A.

526378

TeSys T Motor Management System

1 LTM EV40BD extension module

2 LTM R08MBD controller

Application
The TeSys T motor management system is used for motor control and protection in
harsh industrial applications, in which downtime must be avoided because it is very
costly: Oil & Gas, chemical industry, water treatment, metal, minerals and mining,
pharmaceutical industry, microelectronics, tunnels, airports etc.
With TeSys T, untimely stoppages of a process or manufacturing, associated with a
motor, are anticipated via predictive analysis of fault situations. Fault tripping is
therefore reduced to a minimum.

Its use in motor control panels makes it possible to:

b increase the operational availability of installations,
b improve flexibility from project design through to implementation,
b increase productivity by making available all information needed to run the
system.
The TeSys motor management system integrates perfectly with Schneider Electric
low voltage equipment, such as Okken, Blokset and Prisma.

5
6

3
4

M
3

10

1
2
3
4
6/70

Magnetic circuit-breaker
Contactor
Controller with extension module
Operator control unit

Presentation (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

526379

Presentation (continued)

LTM R08MBD

Composition of the motor management system

The system comprises:
b an LTM R motor management controller
v with integral current transformer up to 100 A,
v above 100 A, by external current transformer up to 810 A,
b an LTM E extension module,
b an LTM CU operator control unit,
b configuration software incorporated in the PowerSuite software application,
b accessories for system set-up.

1
2

526380

Communication
The LTM R controller is equipped with a communication interface to allow remote
monitoring and control of the motor. All motor information is then available at
automation system level.
The following networks are available:
b Modbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, ProfiBus DP and Ethernet TCP/IP
.
TeSys T system functions

568605

LTM EV40BD

LTM CU

Protection functions:
b against thermal overload,
b against phase imbalance and phase failure,
b thermal motor protection via PTC probes,
b against phase reversal,
b against earth faults,
b against long starting times and motor stalling,
b against automatic load shedding and restarting,
b against load fluctuations (I, U, P),
b against variations of Cos (power factor).

3
4
5

Metering functions
b Measurements (rms values):
v current on the 3 phases,
v voltage on the 3 phases (shedding),
v motor temperature,
v earth fault,
b Values calculated:
v average current,
v frequency,
v Cos (power factor), power, power consumption...

Motor control functions

A motor managed by TeSys T can be controlled:
b locally, using the logic inputs present on the product, or via the HMI terminal
b remotely, via the network (connection by terminal block or connector except for
DeviceNet: terminal block only).,
Motor control modes
5 predefined motor control modes are incorporated in the controller:
b overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the
controller,
b independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors,
b reverser mode: starting of reversing motors,
b 2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by
resistor),
b 2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer).
A 6th Custom mode is available to allow the user to create a specific motor control
mode that is not predefined in the controller.
Statistical and diagnostic functions
b fault statistics: counters per type of protection and history of the last 5 faults,
b motor statistics: saving of motor statistics values,
b diagnosis of faults affecting correct operation of the product.

7
8
9
10

6/71

Description

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Description

The LTM R controller

The controller is the central component in the motor management system.
It manages the basic functions such as:
b measurement of 3-phase current via integral current transformers from 0.4 to
100A (up to 810 A by external current transformers),
b measurement of earth current by external earth fault toroid.
b measurement of motor temperature by PTC probe,
b inputs and outputs for the various motor control modes, fault management and
associated functions.

526381

1
2
3

LTMRpp

Characteristics
As standard, the controller manages the following predefined control mode
functions:
b overload mode,
b independent mode,
b reverser mode,
b 2-speed mode,
b 2-step mode,
b "Custom" mode.
Supply
2 types of controller power supply are available:
b c 24 V,
b a 100240 V.

Current ranges
3 current ranges allow measurement of motor current from 0.4 to 100 A:
b 0.48 A,
b 1.3527 A,
b 5100 A.
For use with external current transformers, choose the 0.48 A range (1 or 5 A
current transformer secondary).

Inputs
b 6 discrete logic inputs.
Outputs
b 3 relay logic outputs (1N/O)
b 1 relay output for fault signalling (1N/O + 1N/C))

Measurements
b connections for a temperature probe,
b connections for an earth fault toroid.
LTM E extension module
The extension module adds the following functionalities to the TeSys T controller:
b voltage measurement on the 3 phases. This enables it to calculate numerous
engine monitoring parameters (power, frequency, Cos j ),
b 4 additional inputs.

Characteristics
Inputs
b 4 discrete logic inputs (independent).

Power supplies
b 2 types of power supply for the inputs: c 24 V and a 100240 V.
A c 24 V controller can be assembled with an a100240 V extension module and
vice versa.
Voltage measurement between phases up to 690 V nominal.

9
10

6/72

Description (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Description (continued)

568605

Human/Machine Interfaces (HMI)

Depending on the application, 2 types of HMI can be used with the LTMR controller.
b The LTMCU operator control unit:
v Entirely dedicated to the TeSys T range,
v Only for control/monitoring of an LTMR controller.
b A Magelis XBTN410 terminal
v For control/monitoring of 1 to 8 LTMR controllers.

LTMCU

LTMCU operator control unit

Dedicated exclusively to TeSys T controllers, control unit LTMCU makes it possible
to:
b Configure the parameters of the LTMR controller
b Display information on controller configuration and operation.
b Monitor the alarms and faults generated by the controller.
b Local control of the motor via the local control interface (keys can be customised).
Three different languages can be loaded into the LTMCU controller at the same
time.
By default, these 3 languages are: English, French and Spanish.
Note: English is the only compulsory language.
A language download utility (LangTool), together with all the other languages, are
available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
This tool allows the languages present in the LTMCU control unit to be adapted.
The LTMCU HMI control unit has an RJ45 port, protected by a flexible cover to
provide a good level of protection (IP54).
This port on the front panel allows connection to a PC, via a connecting cable, in
order to use PowerSuite software.
In this case, the control unit acts as a transmitter and all information can then be
viewed in PowerSuite.
The Magelis XBT N410 HMI terminal
Two applications have been predefined for TeSys T. Depending on the application
loaded, the HMI terminal makes it possible to:
b configure and monitor a motor starter (LTM_1T1_V1.dop).
b monitor and modify certain parameters on up to 8 motor starters
(LTM_1T8_X_V1.dop) (1).
XBT L1000 programming software is needed for loading applications into the HMI
terminal.
These applications are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
(1) Replace the X with an E for the English version, or an F for the French version.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6/73

Description (continued)

LTM R controllers

Modbus
1

Profibus DP
1
2

5
6
7

8
9
10

8
9
10

TeSys T Motor Management System

DeviceNet
3

TeSys protection components

CANopen
1

5
6
7

5
6
7

8
9
10

8
9
10

Controllers feature the

following on their front panel:
1
2
3
4

Controller power supply.

Input connections.
Fault outputs (N/O+N/C).
Port for connection to the
HMI terminal, a PC or an
extension module (RJ45).
5 Controller status LEDs.
6 Network port for
connection to the network
by connector (except
DeviceNet) (1).
7 Test/Reset button.
8 Connection to the network
by terminal block (except
Ethernet TCP/IP).
9 Connection for an earth
fault toroid and
temperature probes.
10 Outputs for motor control
mode function.

Ethernet TCP/IP
1

4
5
6
7
6

(1) Connection using power

extension (daisychaining) is possible for
Ethernet TCP/IP.

9
10

LTM EV40pp extension modules

1
2

LTMCU operator control unit

1

4
3
5

10

Extension modules have the following on their front

face:
1 Inputs for voltage measurement.
2 Port for connection to the HMI terminal or to the PC.
3 Port for connection to the controller.
4 Extension module status LEDs.
5 Connection of additional inputs.
6/74

4
The control unit has the following on its front face:
1 Screen. LCD display
2 Local control interface including control keys and LEDs.
3 RJ45 port on front panel for connection to a PC (protected by a cover).
4 Contextual navigation keys.

Functions

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Thermal and current protection functions

Functions
Description

Thermal overload:
thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption
Motor temperature:
thermal monitoring of the motor using temperature probes
(winding, paper...). Up to 3 sensors in series.
Phase imbalance:
monitors the symmetry of currents. To be used for imbalance
<80% of the average current (1).
Phase failure:
monitors the symmetry of currents. To be used for imbalance
<80% of the average current (1).
Phase reversal:
signals when the phase sequence is different from the defined
sequence (motor running).
Long starting time:
monitors the motor starting time
Locked rotor:
locking detected by a sudden increase in current
after the start phase
Min/max current load limit variations:
monitors motor load through variations of current
around preset thresholds.

Earth fault:
signals internal insulation faults, by vectorial summing
of external currents, via earth fault toroid.

Frequent starting:
Protects the motor against overheating due to frequent starting.

Setting range

Controller
LTMR

Controller
and extension
module
(LTMR +
LTME)

Alarm
threshold

Fault
threshold

Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25,

30.
Inverse ther/definite
time
PTC binary
PTC/NTC analogue:
20 6500 Ohm

1070% I average
0.220 s
0.130 s

A-B-C
A-C-B
100800 % of FLC (2)
1200 s
100800 % of FLC (2)
130 s

min.:
30100 % of FLC (2)
1200 s
max.:
20800 % of FLC (2)
1250 s
internal:
20500 % min FLC (2)
0.0525 s
external:
0.0210 A
0.0525 s
0999.9 s

5
6

Voltage and power protection functions

Phase imbalance:
monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases.
To be used for imbalance < 40 % of the average voltage (3).
Phase failure:
monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases.
To be used for imbalance > 40 % of the average voltage (3).
Phase reversal:
signals when the phase sequence is different from the defined
sequence (motor stopped).
Voltage variations.
Min/max voltage limits:
monitors voltage variations around preset thresholds.

Load shedding:
opens outputs O.1 and O.2 if voltage drops below a preset
threshold.
Power variations.
Min/max power limits:
monitors power variations around preset thresholds.
Variations of Cos j.
Min/max limits of Cos j :
monitors variations of Cos j around preset thresholds.
Function performed.

315 %
0.220 s
0.130 s

A-B-C
A-C-B
min.:
7099 %
0.225 s
max.:
101115 %
0.225 s
68115 %
19999 s

20800 %
0100 s

01025 s

(1) Average current value measured on the 3 phases.

(2) FLC: Full Load Current (setting current).
(3) Average voltage value measured on the 3 phases.

10

6/75

Functions (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Motor control functions

Functions

Operating modes

Overload
Independent
Reverser
2-step
2-speed
"Custom" mode

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

Fault management

Manual reset
Automatic reset
Remote reset

X
X
X

X
X
X

Metering functions and statistics

Measurements (2)

4
5

Description

Measurement range

Current/Phase
Earth current
Average current
Current imbalance between
phases
Thermal capacity level
Motor temperature rise
Frequency
Voltage between phases
Voltage imbalance between
phases
Active power
Reactive power

0.081000 A
0.1633 x CT ratio
0.081000 A
0200 %

Cos j (power factor)

Active power consumption
Reactive power consumption

0200 %
06500 Ohm
0 100 Hz
a 0830 V
0200 %

With controller
LTM R
X
X
X
X
X
X

With controller LTMR

and extension module LTME
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

06553.5 kW
06553.5 kWr
0100
0400 kWh
0400 kWrh

Fault statistics

Protection fault counters

Protection alarm counters
Diagnostic fault counters
Motor control function counters
Fault history

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

Fault diagnostics

Internal watchdog fault

Controller internal temperature
Temperature sensor connection
Current connection
Voltage connection
Motor control commands (start, stop, run check back and
stop check back)
Control configuration checksum
Loss of communication

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

Motor statistics

Number of motor control commands (O.1/O.2 starts)

Operating time
Number of starts/hour
Last start I max.
Duration of last start

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

Thermal overload statistics

Time to trip
Time to restart

X
X

X
X

System operating statistics

Run, ON, Start, alarm, fault.

8
9

With controller LTMR

and extension module LTME
X
X
X

Local, via terminal block

Local, via HMI terminal (1)
Remote, via network

Functions

With controller
LTM R
X
X
X

Control modes

2
3

Description

10

(1) HMI: Human Machine Interface.

See measurement details page 6/82.

6/76

Functions (continued),
Topology

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Service classes offered by the Ethernet TCI/IP version

TeSys T

TeSys T

Class

A 20 ETH10/100 + FTP server

Basic Web server

None

Basic communications services

Ethernet TCP/IP

Modbus messaging (read/write of data

words)

Ethernet TCP/IP
communication
advanced
management services

I/O Scanning

Yes

Global Data

No

Client FDR (1)

Automatic monitoring and updating of

product parameter configuration.
Automatic assignment of IP address and
network parameters.

SNMP network
administrator (2)

Yes

Ethernet: different network topologies

2
3

Star topology

In a star topology, all the peripherals are linked via an intermediate peripheral (hub or
switch)..
In industrial Ethernet applications, the use of full duplex switches (instead of hubs)
as central peripherals is strongly recommended.

TeSys T

TeSys T

Star topology

TeSys T

TeSys T

Daisy chain topology

TeSys T

Power extension (Daisy chain) topology

Power extension (or Daisy chaining), at bus level, is another connection topology
commonly used in traditional, industrial automation system networks. The cable
segments link several peripherals to each other, constituting the peripheral "section"
of the network cable.
Ethernet Power extension (Daisy chain)
Power extension is not yet a very commonly used Ethernet connection topology, but
will quickly become so when a large number of peripherals are made available in the
market.
In an Ethernet power extension topology, the peripherals have:
b 2 Ethernet ports
b and an integrated switch.
Schneider Electric is progressively introducing, into the industrial market, Ethernet
peripherals that can be used in daisy chain type architectures.
Implementation of a power extension topology
No hub or switch is required for using a power extension topology. Each peripheral
must have an integrated switch (two ports).
A port on the peripheral is connected to a port on the neighbouring upstream and
downstream peripherals. These consecutive connections constitute the power
extension (daisy chain).
Ethernet switches may be included in a power extension (daisy chain) topology
when several scan chains are used by the monitoring peripheral.
The Ethernet switch must be installed close to the monitoring peripheral, with
the various scan chains coming from the switch.

4
5
6
7
8

(1) FDR : Faulty Device Replacement.

(2) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.

9
10

6/77

Topology (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Ethernet: different network topologies (continued)

1
2

Ring topology

TeSys T

TeSys T
Ring topology

TeSys T

TeSys T

In a ring topology, all the peripherals or components of the network infrastructure are
connected within a loop.
This type of topology makes it possible to achieve different levels of redundancy of
the network.
Ethernet ring
Ethernet rings are generally the main networks in applications where a high level of
reliability is required. If a ring topology is required, the switches handling this function
must be used.
Redundancy
Redundancy of the network infrastructure is the key to development of applications
with high operational reliability.
Implementing a single or double ring architecture makes it possible to provide
protection against breaks in network segments.
Single ring
The first level of redundancy can be achieved by installing a single ring.
ConneXium switches can be used to establish main network ring configurations.
The ring is created using HIPER-Ring ports.
If a section of the line fails, the ring structure (including a maximum of 50 switches)
converts into a line type configuration in less than 0.5 seconds.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6/78

Programming

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Possible configurations and applications

LTM CU

PLC (automation platform)

TeSys T

or
Network or bus

PowerSuite

LTM CU

TeSys T

4
PowerSuite

5
TeSys T

6
7
8
9
10

6/79

Programming (continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

568609

Configuration with PowerSuite

The TeSys T configurator is incorporated in the PowerSuite software application, as

from version 2.5. (1)
It allows configuration, commissioning and maintenance of motor starters
protected by TeSys T.

A library containing predefined motor control mode functions is available in order to:
b allow standardisation,
b avoid errors,
b reduce motor starter setup times.

536196

Example of TeSys T configurator setup screen

TeSys protection components

5 predefined motor control modes are incorporated in the controller:

b overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the
controller,
b independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors,
b reverser mode: starting of reversing motors,
b 2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by
resistor),
b 2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer).

By using logic functions, a "Custom" mode makes it possible to:

b easily adapt these predefined motor control mode functions to the specific needs
of your applications,
b create a link with the motor starter environment or
b create new functions.

The functions thus defined can be saved and used to build your function library for
future applications.
To create special functions, a logic editor is incorporated in the configurator and
allows a choice of 2 programming languages:
b function block,
b structured text.
Example of logic editor screen.
(1) An update file is available, free of charge, on the website www.schneider-electric.com. It will
enable you to take advantage of the latest functions in the TeSysT motor management
system.

6
7
8
9
10

6/80

TeSys protection components

Characteristics

TeSys T Motor Management System

Environment
Product type
Conforming to standards

LTM R controllers
LTM EV40pp extension modules
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14, IACSE10

Product certifications

UL, CSA,BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos, NOM, CCC, C-TICK, ATEX,
GOST, KERI (1)

Rated insulation voltage

of the outputs (Ui)

Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)

Short-circuit withstand
Protective treatment

Ambient air temperature

around the device
Operating position
without dating

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V

overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution 3
Conforming to UL 508,
V
CSA C222 n 14
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
a 100240 V
supply, inputs and outputs
c 24 V
supply, inputs and outputs
Communication circuits
Current or voltage
measurement circuit
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-4-1

690

690

kV

kV

0.8

0.8

kV
kV

0.8
6

kA

100

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Conforming to IEC/EN 60070-2-11 h
Storage
C
Operation
C
In relation to normal vertical
mounting plane

TH
12 x 24 hour cycles
48
- 40+80
- 20+60
30 in relation to mounting plate, 90

4
5

Flame resistance
Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated
electromagnetic interference
Immunity to
fast transient bursts
Immunity to
radioelectric fields
Immunity to
dissipated
shock waves

Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (2)
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (2)
5300 Hz
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-2
Conforming to
IEC 61000-4-3
Conforming to
IEC 61000-4-4
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-6
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5
Relay outputs and supply
c 24 V inputs
a 100240 V inputs
Voltage inputs
Communication
Temperature sensor
(IT1/IT2)

Altitude derating
Rated operational voltage (Ui)
Max. operating temperature

C
C

960 (for parts supporting live components)

650 (for other parts)
15 gn

4 gn (plate mounted)
1 gn (mounted on 5 rail)
kV
V/m
kV

In open air: 8 - Level 3

On contact: 6 - Level 3
10 - Level 3

On supply and relay outputs: 4 - Level 4

Other circuits: 2 - Level 3
10 - Level 3

kV
kV
kV
kV
kV
kV

Common mode
4
1
2

2
1
2000 m
1
1

Serial mode
2
1
1

0.5
3000 m
0.93
0.93

3500 m
0.87
0.92

7
Common mode

1
2
4
2

4000 m
0.8
0.9

Serial mode

1
1
2

4500 m
0.7
0.88

9
10

6/81

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Controller and extension module characteristics

Product type

Associated protection

3
4
5

LTMRpppFM

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V

Conforming to
V
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
A

Operational voltage

c 24
a 100240
0 for 3 ms
70% of U for 500 ms
gG fuse, 0.5

c 20.426.24

a 93.5264

a 862.8

50/60 Hz

mA

c 56127

Cabling
Connectors

Pitch

mm

5.08

5.08

1 conductor
2 identical conductors

mm2
mm2

0.22.5
0.21.5

0.22.5
0.21.5

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2

0.252.5
0.51.5
0.252.5
0.21
0.22.5
0.21
AWG 24 to AWG 14
0.50.6
3

0.252.5
0.51.5
0.252.5
0.21
0.22.5
0.21
AWG 24 to AWG 14
0.50.6
3

Flexible cable without cable end

Flexible cable with cable end

Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor
2 identical conductors
With insulated ferrule
1 conductor
2 identical conductors
Solid cable without cable end
1 conductor
2 identical conductors
Conductor size
Tightening torque
Flat screwdriver

N.m
mm

Input characteristics
Nominal values

Conforming to IEC/EN 61131-1

Voltage
V
Current
mA
Voltage
Current

V
mA

Voltage
Current
Change to state 1
Change to state 0

V
mA
ms
ms

Logic state 1

Logic state 0
Response time

Type 1 positive logic (c: resistive, a: capacitive)

c 24
a 100240
c 24
c7
a 3.1 for 100 V
c7
a 7.5 for 240 V
15 max
79 < U < 264
15 max
2 min15 max
2 min at 110 V
2 min15 max
3 min at 220 V
5 max
0 < U < 40
5 max
15 max
15 max
15 max
15
25
15
5
25
5

Output characteristics

Type
Load
Permissible power in cat. AC-15
Permissible power in cat. DC-13
Associated protection
Max. frequency
Max. operating level
Response time

a
c

Volt free, single break

250 V / 5 A B300
30 V / 5 A
480 / Ie max: 2 A
30 / Ie max: 1.25 A
gG fuse, 4
2
1800

For 500 000 operating cycles VA

For 500 000 operating cycles W
A
Hz
op.
cycles/h
Change to state 1
ms
10 max
Change to state 0
ms
10 max

Measurement details
Current

Voltage
Earth fault current

Internal measurement
without earth fault toroid
External measurement
with earth fault toroid

10

Current consumption

Logic inputs

Extension modules
LTM EV40BD
LTMEV40FM

Control supply
Operational voltage (U)
Resistance to voltage dips

Controllers
LTMRpppBD

Temperature measurement
Power factor
Active and reactive power
Internal clock

6/82

1 % for the 0.48 A and 1.3527 A ranges

2 % for the 5100 A range
1% from 100 to 830 V
515 % for
current > 0.1 A in the 0.48 A range
current > 0.2 A in the 1.3527 A range
current > 0.3 A in the 5100 A range
< 5 % or 0.01 A
2%
3 % for a Cos j > 0.6
5 % (typical value)
30 min / year

a 100240
a 3.1 for 100 V
a 7.5 for 240 V
79 < U < 264
2 min at 110 V
3 min at 220 V
0 < U < 40
15 max
25
25

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Bus and network characteristics

Type of bus/network
Physical interface

Modbus
2-wire RS 485

CANopen
ISO 11898

DeviceNet
ISO 11898

Addressing
Transmission speeds

1 to 247
1.2 to 19.2 K
bits/s

1 to 64
125 to
500 K bits/s

Connections

RJ45/terminal
block
2 shielded
twisted pairs

1 to 127
10, 20, 50, 125,
250, 500, 800
and 1000Kbits/s
+ Auto baud
9-way SUB-D/
terminal block
4 twisted,
shielded wires

Cables

Terminal block
4 twisted,
shielded wires

Profibus DP
polarised
2-wire RS 485
1 to 125
9.6 K to
12 M bits/s
9-way SUB-D/
terminal block
2 shielded
twisted pairs,
type A

Ethernet
IEEE 802.3
0 to 159
10/100 Mbit/s,
with
automatic
recognition
RJ45
2 shielded
twisted pairs

1
2

LTMCU operator control unit

Environment

Conforming to standards

IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14

Product certifications

UL, CSA, CE, C-TICK, NOM, GOST

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation

C
C

Relative humidity
Protective treatment
Degree of protection
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Flame resistance

-40+80
-20+60

1595 % without condensation

Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Conforming to IEC 60947-1

12 x 24 hour cycles

Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6
530 Hz
Conforming to IEC 60947-1
Conforming to UL 94

15 gn / 11ms

IP 54

4 gn
C

650
V2

Electrical characteristics
Supply to the product

Powered via the controller

Maximum current

mA

140

Maximum power dissipated

Resistance to
electromagnetic discharge

Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-2

kV

In open air: 8. Level 3

On contact: 4. Level 3

Immunity to radiated
electromagnetic interference

Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-3

V/m

10 - Level 3

Immunity to
fast transient bursts

Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-4

kV

2, shielded access. Level 3

Immunity to
radioelectric fields

Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-6

10. Level 3

Immunity to shock waves

Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-5

kV

2, shielded access. Level 3

6
7
8

Physical characteristics
Mounting

Flush mounted

Display

Backlit LCD

Signalling

By 4 LEDs

Cabling

RJ45

9
10

6/83

TeSys protection components

Characteristics(continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

LT6 CTpppp external current transformer characteristics

1
2

Conforming to standards
Precision
Precision limit factor
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

IEC 60185, BS 7626

Class 5P
15
690

Maximum operating temperature

Transformer ratio
Diameter of conductor passage hole
Maximum cabling c.s.a.

C
A
mm
mm2

50
100/1
35
30 x 10

200/1
35
30 x 10

400/1
35
30 x 10

800/1
35
incorporated (1)

Earth fault toroid characteristics

Toroid type

3
4
5

Rated insulation voltage Ui

Operating temperature
Protection index
Transformer ratio
Rated operational current le
Max. conductor c.s.a. per phase

50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 50485

50486

A
mm2

1000
- 35+ 70
IP30 (connections IP20)
1/1000
65
85
160
250
25
50
95
240

250
240

W
V

IEC 60034-11 mark A

3 x 250 in series
c 2.5 max

kV

2.5

mm
m

Reinforced
250
1

V
C

400
2x
185

630
2x
240

85
50

DA1TTpp probe characteristics

Conforming to standards
Economy resistor
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage
(Ui)
Insulation
Length of connecting cables

At 25 C
Per probe

Between probes
Between probe and motor
terminal plate

Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series, conforming to standard EC 60034-11, mark A.

Economy resistor
(ohms)

10 000
4000
Trip zone

1650
1500
1000
750

Reset zone

100

20

Trip zone on
probe short-circuit

10

NOT + 15 C

NOT - 5 C
NOT
NOT + 5 C

-20

NOT - 20 C

1 3 probes type DA1ppp (250 W at 25 C) in series.

Temperature
(C)

NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature.

Protection unit tripped.
Protection unit reset.

(1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.

10

6/84

Tripping curves

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Cold state curves

10 000

t (s)

1000

100

3
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15

10

Class 10
Class 5

1 1,12

1,5

I/Ir

Hot state curves

10 000

t (s)

1000

100

10

Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10

1 1,12

1,5

Class 5
I/Ir

10

6/85

References

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

526387

Controllers
Setting
range
A

Control
voltage
V

Current
range
A

Reference

Weight

c 24
a 100240 V

0.48
0.48

LTMR08MBD
LTMR08MFM

0.530
0.530

27

c 24
a 100240 V

1.3527
1.3527

LTMR27MBD
LTMR27MFM

0.530
0.530

100

c 24
a 100240 V

5100
5100

LTMR100MBD
LTMR100MFM

0.530
0.530

c 24
a 100240 V

0.48
0.48

LTMR08CBD
LTMR08CFM

0.530
0.530

27

c 24
a 100240 V

1.3527
1.3527

LTMR27CBD
LTMR27CFM

0.530
0.530

100

c 24
a 100240 V

5100
5100

LTMR100CBD
LTMR100CFM

0.530
0.530

c 24
a 100240 V

0.48
0.48

LTMR08DBD
LTMR08DFM

0.530
0.530

27

c 24
a 100240 V

1.3527
1.3527

LTMR27DBD
LTMR27DFM

0.530
0.530

100

c 24
a 100240 V

5100
5100

LTMR100DBD
LTMR100DFM

0.530
0.530

kg

For Modbus

2
526388

LTM R08MBD

For CANopen

3
4
526389

LTM R08CBD

For DeviceNet

For Profibus DP

6
526390

LTM R08DBD

c 24
a 100240 V

0.48
0.48

LTMR08PBD
LTMR08PFM

0.530
0.530

27

c 24
a 100240 V

1.3527
1.3527

LTMR27PBD
LTMR27PFM

0.530
0.530

100

c 24
a 100240 V

5100
5100

LTMR100PBD
LTMR100PFM

0.530
0.530

For Ethernet TCP/IP

7
8
526391

LTM R08PBD

9
10

LTM R08EBD

6/86

c 24
a 100240 V

0.48
0.48

LTMR08EBD
LTMR08EFM

0.530
0.530

27

c 24
a 100240 V

1.3527
1.3527

LTMR27EBD
LTMR27EFM

0.530
0.530

100

c 24
a 100240 V

5100
5100

LTMR100EBD
LTMR100EFM

0.530
0.530

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

526380

Extension modules. with voltage measurement on the 3 phases

Input control
voltage

LTM EV40BD

Number of
inputs

Weight

Via the controller

LTMEV40BD

kg
0.210

a 100240

Via the controller

LTMEV40FM

0.210

Supply
Voltage
Supply
via the controller

Reference

c 24 V external

XBTN410

0.380

Length
m
1

Reference
VW3 A1 104R10

Weight
kg
0.065

VW3 A1 104R30

0.140

VW3 A1 104R50

0.210

SUB-D 25-way female 2.5

RJ45

XBTZ938

0.200

Number and type

of connectors

Reference

Weight
kg
0.120
0.045
0.065

HMI terminals
Operator control unit

568605

Reference

V
c 24

Description

Magelis compact display.

Description
Connecting cables
for the LTM CU control unit

LTM CU

Supply to the electronics

Connecting cables
for the XBTN410

Number and type

of connectors
2 x RJ45

LTM CU

Weight
kg
0.400

2
3

Cables
Description
Connecting cables
For connecting the controller
to the extension module

2 x RJ45

Length
m
0.04
0.3
1

LTMCC004 (1)
LU9R03
LU9R10

Replacement connectors
Description
Complete set of
connectors for controllers
and extension modules

Number and type

of connectors
10 screw terminals
(all network versions included)

Reference
LTM9TCS

Weight
kg
0.200

(1) Sold in lots of 6.

7
8
9
10

6/87

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Configuration tools
Description

Connection kit
for PC serial port
for Modbus
multidrop connection
Interface for USB port
(for use with cable
VW3A8106)
Length: 1.8 m

Composition

Reference

VW3A8106
b 1 x 3 m length cable with two
RJ45 connectors,
b 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with
one 9-way female SUB-D
connector and one RJ45
connector.
SR2CBL06
b 1 USB cable, SUB-D 9-way
b Drivers supplied on CD-Rom

Weight
kg

0.350

Current transformers (1)

526392

Operational current
Primary
A
100
200
400
800
LT6CT4001

Reference
Secondary
A
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)

Weight
kg
0.550
0.550
0.550
0.680

LT6CT1001
LT6CT2001
LT6CT4001
LT6CT8001

Earth fault toroids (marketed under the Schneider Electric brand)

Rated operational
current Ie
A

Internal
of toroid
mm

Reference

Weight

30
50
80
120
200
300

50437
50438
50439
50440
50441
50442

0.120
0.200
0.420
0.530
1.320
2.230

46
110

50485
50486

1.300
3.200

kg

Closed toroids, type A

65
85
160
250
400
630

Split toroids, type OA

PTC thermistor probes (3)

510575

85
250

Description

7
8

Triple probes

DA1TTppp

Nominal
Operating
Temperature
(NOT)
C
90
110
120
130
140
150
160
170

Colour

Unit
reference (4)

Green/green
Brown/brown
Grey/grey
Blue/blue
White/blue
Black/black
Blue/red
White/green

DA1TT090
DA1TT110
DA1TT120
DA1TT130
DA1TT140
DA1TT150
DA1TT160
DA1TT170

Weight

(1) The transformers offered for use with TeSys U controllers are suitable (see page 6/64).
(2) For use with LTMR08pp controllers.
(3) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient.
(4) Sold in lots of 10.

9
10

6/88

kg
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010

References (continued)

TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System

Marking accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description
Clip-in markers
(maximum of 5 per unit)

Composition

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Weight

Strips of 10 identical
numbers (0 to 9)

25

AB1Rp (1)

kg
0.002

Strips of 10 identical
capital letters (A to Z)

25

AB1Gp (1)

0.002

Connection accessories
Description

Length

Reference

Weight
kg

For Modbus connection

Cables fitted with
2 x RJ45 connectors

0.3

VW3 A8 306 R03

0.045

VW3 A8 306 R10

0.065

VW3 A8 306 R30

0.125

0.3

VW3 A8 306 TF03

0.032

VW3 A8 306 TF10

0.032

VW3A8306 R

0.012

50

TSX CAN CA50

4.930

100

TSX CAN CA100

8.800

300

TSX CAN CA300

24.560

Elbowed (90)

TSX CAN KCDF 90T

0.046

Straight

TSX CAN KCDF 180T

0.049

Elbowed (90) with

SUB-D 9-way
connector for
connection to
PC or diagnostic tool

TSX CAN KCDF 90TP

0.051

50

TSX CAN CA50

4.930

100

TSX CAN CA100

8.800

300

TSX CAN CA300

24.560

100

TSXPBSCA100

400

TSXPBSCA400

490NAD91103

Without line terminator

490NAD91104

With line terminator

and terminal port

490NAD91105

490 NTW 000 02

490 NTW 000 05

12

490 NTW 000 12

40

490 NTW 000 40

80

490 NTW 000 80

490 NTW 000 02U

490 NTW 000 05U

12

490 NTW 000 12U

40

490 NTW 000 40U

80

490 NTW 000 80U

T-junctions
RS 485 line terminator

For CANopen connection (2)

Cables

IP20 connectors
SUB-D 9-way female
Line end adapter switch

3
4
5

For DeviceNet connection

Cables

For Profibus DP connection

Cables
Connectors

With line terminator

For Ethernet TCP/IP connection

Shielded twisted pair cables to standard EIA/TIA568
Cables fitted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
for connection to
terminal equipment

Straight

Shielded twisted pair cables, UL and CSA 22.1 approved

Cables fitted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
for connection to
terminal equipment

Straight

(1) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
(2) To order other connectors and cables (UL cables for harsh environments, etc.) please consult
our catalogue Machines and installations with CANopen. Performance and flexibility".

6/89

7
8
9
10

TeSys protection components

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys T Motor Management System

LTM Rpp controllers

91

30,2

5,2

(2)

122,5 (1)

61

2
(2)
(2)

(2)

3
LTM EV40pp extension modules
120,7 (1)
5,5

61

30,2

45

Panel mounting, cut-out

117

23

70

92

50

(1) 140 mm with RJ45 connector for connection to extension module and to network,
166 mm with Profibus DP/CANopen connector.
(2) Leave a gap around the device of: 9 mm at 45 C, 9 to 40 mm from 45 to 50 C, 40 mm at 60 C.

9
10

6/90

45

LTMCU operator control unit

TeSys protection components

Dimensions (continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

Current transformers

HMI terminal

LT6CT

XBTN410

42

(2)

25

35

74 (1)

30

35
107

25 5

95

42,5

2,5

42,5

(1) 104 mm with fixing clips (supplied with the product).

(2) 58 mm with SUB-D 25-way elbowed cable XBTZ9680 for Twido, TSX Micro and
Premium or XBTZ998 for Advantys STB.
104 mm with SUB-D 25-way cable XBTZ68/Z9681 for Twido, TSX Micro and Premium

2,5

10 10
20

132

Earth fault toroids

50437 and 50438

50439, 50440 and 50441

c2

21

b2

b1

b1

16

29
c1

Type
50437
50438

b
83
109

b1
53
66

c
30
50

c1
60
87

c2
31
45

H
50
60

Type
50439
50440
50441

50442

a
26.5
26.5
29

c1

a1

a1
44
44
46

b
122
164
256

b1
80
80
120

b2
55
55
90

c
80
120
196

c1
150
190
274

G
35
35
37

H
65
65
104

J
126
166
254

K
40
40
60

50485 and 50486

344

299

29

Type
50485
50486

a
72
78

b
148
224

c
46
110

10

G
57
76

6/91

TeSys protection components

Schemes

TeSys T Motor Management System

Schemes

Overload mode
3-wire local-control
(1)

Stop

34

O.3

33

24

23

13

O.2

14

O.1

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

A1
A2

I.1
C

Start

97
98
95
96

KM1

KM1

O.4

LTM R

(1) Connection of a single-phase motor is possible. In this case, do not use the central current transformer.

Independent mode
3-wire local-control\

5
KM1

Start

7
3

97
98
95
96

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6
34

O.3

33

O.2

23

14

13

O.1

24

A1
A2

I.1
C

Stop

O.4

LTM R

KM1

2-wire local-control

3-wire with switchable local/network control

L ON

L ON
Start/Stop

2-wire with switchable local/network control

Start

O.4

10

L : Local control
O : Stop
N : Network control

6/92

O.4

97
98
95
96

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

I.1
C

97
98
95
96

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

I.1
C

97
98
95
96

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

I.1
C

Stop

O.4

TeSys protection components

Schemes (continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

Schemes (continued)
Reverser mode

3-wire local-control

2
97
98
95
96

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

Stop

O.3

O.4

34

33

24

23

O.2

14

13

O.1

Start
Rev.

I.1
C

Start
Forw.

KM1

A1
A2

KM2

LTM R

KM1 (1)

KM2
KM1

KM2

2-step mode, star-delta application

3-wire local-control

5
KM1

KM3

KM3
KM1

KM3

O.3

KM1
KM2

O.4

34

33

24

O.2

23

14

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

I.1
C

A1
A2

13

O.1

Stop

Start

97
98
95
96

KM2

LTM R

KM1 (1)

KM3

(1) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.

9
10

6/93

TeSys protection components

Schemes (continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

Schemes (continued)
3-wire local-control

KM1

KM1

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

I.1
C

O.2

O.3

33

14

13

O.1

24

97
98
95
96

Stop

Start

O.4

34

KM2

A1
A2

2-step mode, primary resistor application

23

LTM R

KM2

2-speed mode, Dahlander application

3-wire local-control

5
KM3

KM1

24

13

KM2

O.2

23

O.1

(1)

14

Stop

97
98
95
96

High
speed

I.1
C

A1
A2

Low
speed

O.3

KM1
KM2

O.4

34

I.2
I.3
C
I.4
I.5
C
I.6

KM1

33

KM2

LTM R

KM2 (2)
KM3

(1) For a Dahlander application, all the power cables must pass through current transformers. The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactor. In this
case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in "variable torque" mode, all the cables downstream of the contactors must be of identical size.
(2) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.

10

6/94

TeSys protection components

Schemes (continued)

TeSys T Motor Management System

Schemes (continued)

Earth fault toroid and motor temperature probe connection

34

O.3

33

24

O.2

23

14

13

O.1

Z1 Z2 T1 T2

LTM R

3
Connection of outputs for motor control mode function
Without intermediate relay

With intermediate relay

KM1

KM1

KM1

13

14

13
3

LTM R

KA1

14

O.1

O.1

LTM R

KM1

7
8
9
10

6/95

Combinations for customer TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System
assembly

0.37 to 355 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V

Switchdisconnector

aM fuses

Ie

Reference (1)

Size

kW

Rating

Contactor

TeSys T
controller

External current
transformer

Reference (2)

Reference

Reference

0.37

1.1

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.55

1.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.75

1.9

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

1.1

2.7

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

1.5

3.6

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

2.2

4.9

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

6.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

LC1D09

LTMR27pp

8.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

10

LC1D09

LTMR27pp

5.5

11.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

LC1D12

LTMR27pp

7.5

15.5

GS1DD

10 x 38

16

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

10

19

GSpF

14 x 51

25

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

11

22

GSpF

14 x 51

25

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

15

29

GSpF

14 x 51

32

LC1D32

LTMR100pp

18.5

35

GSpF

14 x 51

40

LC1D40A

LTMR100pp

22

41

GSpJ

22 x 58

50

LC1D50A

LTMR100pp

30

55

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D65A

LTMR100pp

37

66

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

LC1D80

LTMR100pp

45

80

GSpJ

22 x 58

100

LC1D95

LTMR100pp

55

97

GSpK

T00

125

LC1D115

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

75

132

GSpL

T0

160

LC1D150

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

90

160

GSpN

T1

200

LC1F185

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

110

195

GSpN

T1

250

LC1F225

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

132

230

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC1F265

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

160

280

GSpQQ

T2

355

LC1F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

200

350

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT8001

250

430

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT8001

315

540

GS2S

T3

630

LC1F630

LTMR08pp

LT6CT8001

355

610

GS2V

T4

800

LC1F630

LTMR08pp

LT6CT8001

(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator.
(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.

10

6/96

Combinations for customer TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System
assembly (continued)

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination

With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
400/415 V

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

TeSys T
controller

External current
transformer

Ie

Icc

Reference

Reference

Reference

Reference

kW

kA

0.06

0.2

130

GV2L03

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.09

0.3

130

GV2L03

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.12

0.44

130

GV2L04

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.18

0.6

130

GV2L04

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.25

0.85

130

GV2L05

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.37

1.1

130

GV2L05

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.55

1.5

130

GV2L06

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.75

1.9

130

GV2L07

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

1.1

2.7

130

GV2L07

LC1D18

LTMR08pp

1.5

3.6

130

GV2L08

LC1D18

LTMR08pp

2.2

4.9

130

GV2L10

LC1D18

LTMR08pp

6.5

130

GV2L14

LC1D18

LTMR08pp

8.5

130

GV2L14

LC1D18

LTMR27pp

5.5

11.5

130

GV2L16

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

7.5

15.5

50

GV2L20

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

18.1

50

GV2L22

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

11

22

50

GV2L22

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

15

29

50

GV3L32

LC1D40A

LTMR100pp

18.5

35

50

GV3L40

LC1D50A

LTMR100pp

22

41

50

GV3L50

LC1D50A

LTMR100pp

30

55

50

GV3L65

LC1D65A

LTMR100pp

37

66

70

NS80HMA

LC1D80

LTMR100pp

45

80

25

NS100HMA

LC1D115

LTMR100pp

45

80

70

NS100HMA

LC1D115

LTMR100pp

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6/97

Combinations for customer TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System
assembly (continued)

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
400/415 V

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

TeSys T
controller

External current
transformer

Ie

Icc

Reference

Reference

Reference

Reference

kW

kA

55

97

36

NS160NMA

LC1 D115

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

55

97

70

NS160HMA

LC1 D115

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

75

132

36

NS160NMA

LC1 D150

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

75

132

70

NS160HMA

LC1 D150

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

90

160

36

NS250NMA

LC1 F185

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

90

160

70

NS250HMA

LC1 F185

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

110

195

36

NS250NMA

LC1 F225

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

110

195

70

NS250HMA

LC1 F225

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

132

230

70

NS400HMA

LC1 F265

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

132

230

130

NS400LMA

LC1 F265

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

160

280

70

NS400HMA

LC1 F330

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

160

280

130

NS400LMA

LC1 F330

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

200

350

70

NS630HMA

LC1 F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

200

350

130

NS630LMA

LC1 F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

220

388

70

NS630HMA

LC1 F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

220

388

130

NS630LMA

LC1 F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

250

430

70

NS630HMA

LC1 F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT6001

250

430

130

NS630LMA

LC1 F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT6001

Substitution table

Old range
LT6P multifunction protection relay

Motor current

Reference

Reference

New range
TeSys T controllers
External current
transformer
Reference

Reference

Reference

External current
transformer
Reference

a 100240 V

c 24 V

a 100240 V

c 24 V

I < 5A

LT6P0M005FM

LT6P0M005S144

LTMR08pFM

LTMR08pBD

5 A < I < 25 A

LT6P0M025FM

LT6P0M025S144

LTMR27pFM

LTMR27pBD

25 A < I < 100 A

LT6P0M005FM

LT6P0M005S144

LT6CT1001

LTMR100pFM

LTMR100pBD

100 A < I < 200 A

LT6P0M005FM

LT6P0M005S144

LT6CT2001

LTMR08pFM

LTMR08pBD

LT6CT2001

200 A < I < 400 A

LT6P0M005FM

LT6P0M005S144

LT6CT4001

LTMR08pFM

LTMR08pBD

LT6CT4001

400 A < I < 800 A

LT6P0M005FM

LT6P0M005S144

LT6CT8001

LTMR08pFM

LTMR08pBD

LT6CT8001

9
10

6/98

Combinations for customer TeSys protection components

TeSys T Motor Management System
assembly (continued)

0.37 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination

With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3

Switchdisconnector
(1)

aM fuses

Ie

Reference

Size

kW

Rating

Contactor

TeSys T
controller

External current
tranformer

Reference

Reference

Reference

0.37

0.64

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.55

0.87

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

0.75

1.1

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

1.1

1.6

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

1.5

2.1

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

2.2

2.8

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

3.8

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

4.9

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D09

LTMR08pp

5.5

6.7

GSpF

14 x 51

LC1D25

LTMR08pp

7.5

8.9

GSpF

14 x 51

10

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

11

12.8

GSpF

14 x 51

16

LC1D25

LTMR27pp

15

17

GSpG

T000

20

LC1D32

LTMR27pp

18.5

21

GSpG

T000

25

LC1D32

LTMR27pp

22

24

GSpG

T000

32

LC1D40A

LTMR27pp

30

32

GSpG

T000

40

LC1D50A

LTMR100pp

37

39

GSpJ

22 x 58

50

LC1D65A

LTMR100pp

45

47

GSpJ

22 x 58

63

LC1D80

LTMR100pp

55

57

GSpJ

22 x 58

80

LC1D115

LTMR100pp

75

77

GSpKK

T00

100

LC1D115

LTMR100pp

90

93

GSpKK

T00

125

LC1F150

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

110

113

GSpKK

T00

125

LC1F185

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

132

134

GSpL

T0

160

LC1F265

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

160

162

GSpN

T1

200

LC1F265

LTMR08pp

LT6CT2001

200

203

GSpN

T1

250

LC1F330

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

220

224

GSpQQ

T2

250

LC1F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

250

250

GSpQQ

T2

315

LC1F400

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

290

292

GSpQQ

T2

355

LC1F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

315

313

GSpQQ

T2

355

LC1F500

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

355

354

GS2S

T3

400

LC1F630

LTMR08pp

LT6CT4001

400

400

GS2S

T3

500

LC1F630

LTMR08pp

LT6CT8001

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator.

6/99

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7/0

Contents

7 - TeSys control relays

TeSys K control relays

b For a.c. or d.c. control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4
b For d.c. control circuit (low consumption). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/5

b Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6

b Mounting and marking accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7

TeSys SK mini-control relays

b Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12

b Mini-control relay with alternating contacts CA2 SKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12

b Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules . . . . . . . . page 7/13

TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks

b Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/21
7

b Add-on blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22

7

b Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/23

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7/1

TeSys control relays

Characteristics

TeSys K control relays

Environment

Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Operating positions

IEC 60947, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 5424

UL, CSA

Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

Without derating

Without derating

Possible positions for

CA2K only, with derating,
please consult your
Regional Sales Office.
Max. to IEC 60947
1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
2 x 1.5
2 x 1.5

2
3
4
5
6

Connection
Screw clamp connections Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Spring terminals
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Faston connectors
Clip
Solder pins for 
With locating device between
printed circuit board
power and control circuits
Tightening torque
Philips head n 2 and 6
Terminal referencing
Conforming to standards 
EN 50005 and EN50011
Protective treatment
Conf. to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016)
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Maximum operating altitude
Vibration resistance
5...300 Hz
Flame resistance

Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
Safety separation of circuits

Storage
Operation
Without derating
Control relay open
Control relay closed
Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to NF F 16-101 
and 16-102
Control relay open
Control relay closed
Conforming to VDE 0106 
and IEC 60536

mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm

N.m

C
C
m

Min.
1 x 1.5
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.34
1 x 0.75
1 x 0.75
2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35
4 mm x 35 microns

Max.
2x4
2x4
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5

0.81.3
Up to 8 contacts
TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Protection against direct finger contact 
(devices with screw clamp terminals or pins for printed circuit board)
- 50...+ 80
- 25...+ 50
2000
2 gn
4 gn
Self-extinguishing material V1
Conforming to requirement 2
10 gn
15 gn
SELV(Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V

Control circuit characteristics

7
8
9

Control relay type

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits
For operation
(y 50 C) single voltage coil
For drop-out
Mechanical durability at Uc
50/60 Hz coil
In millions of operating cycles
Standard c coil
Wide range, 
low consumption c coil
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
Average consumption
Inrush
at 20 C and at Uc
Sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Between coil energisation and
at 20 C and at Uc
opening of the N/C contacts
closing of the N/O contacts
Between coil de-energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts
closing of the N/C contacts
Maximum immunity to microbreaks

CA2 K
a 12...690
0.8...1.15 Uc
y 0.2 Uc
10

CA3 K
c 12...250
0.8...1.15 Uc
y 0.1 Uc

20

CA4 K
c 12...120
0.7...1.3 Uc
y 0.1 Uc

30

10 000
30 VA
4.5 VA
1.3

10 000
3W
3W
3

6000
1.8 W
1.8 W
1.8

ms
ms

5...15
10...20

25...35
30...40

25...35
30...40

ms
ms
ms

10...20
15...25
2

10
15
2

10...20
15...25
2

10
References :
pages 7/4 and 7/5

7/2

Dimensions :
page 7/8

Schemes :
page 7/9

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys control relays

TeSys K
control relays

Contact characteristics of control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts

On CAp K
On LA1 K
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424
Conforming to IEC 60947
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14
Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature y 50 C
(Ith)
Frequency of the operational current
Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240)
I min
Short-circuit protection
Conforming to IEC 60947 
and VDE 0660, gG fuse
Rated making capacity
Conforming to IEC 60947
I rms
Short-time rating
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap distance
CApK and LA1K: linked
contacts conforming to INRS,
BIA and CNA specifications

V
V
V
V
V
A

4
2 or 4 for CA2 K and CA3 K, 2 for CA4 K
690
690
690
750
600
10

Hz
V
mA
A

Up to 400
17
5
10

110

A
A
A
MW
mm

80
90
110
> 10
0.5 (see schemes page 7/9)

1
2
3
4

Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600

operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: 
making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the
power broken (cos j 0.4)
V

24

48

110/
127
48
96
240
17
34
86
7
14
36
1000 2050 5000

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Occasional making capacity

VA
VA
VA
VA

1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for:

b maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals
(power broken = making current x cos j 0.7).

Power broken in VA

3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for:

b maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with
current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle.

220/ 380/ 440 600/

230 400
690
440 800 880 1200
158 288 317 500
66
120 132 200
10 000 14 000 13 000 9000

24

48

110

220 440 600

W
W
W
W

120
55
15
720

80
38
11
600

60
30
9
400

52
28
8
300

51
26
7
230

50
25
6
200

5
6

Power broken in W

16 000
10 000
8000
6000
5000
4000
3000

Time constant
in ms

2 Electrical durability of contacts for:

b 1 million operating cycles (2a)
b 3 million operating cycles (2b)
b 10 million operating cycles (2c).

Electrical durability (valid for up to

1200 operating cycles/hour) on an
inductive load such as the coil of an
electromagnet, without economy
resistor, the time constant increasing
with the load.

2000

1000
800
600
500
400
300
200

4 Thermal limit

100
80
60
40

2b

100
80
60
50
40
30
20

20

24

48

110
120

220 380 500

440 690 V

300

200

50

2c

200

100

700
500

250

140

2a

1000

2a

2c

10
8
6
12

2b

24

48

110

220 440 600 V

10
References :
page 7/6

Dimensions :
page 7/8

Schemes :
page 7/9

7/3

TeSys control relays

References

TeSys K control relays

For a.c. or d.c. control circuit

Control relays for a.c. control circuit

816892

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.

b Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Control circuit
Consumption

Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (1)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

CA2 KN40pp

4.5 VA

4
3
2

1
2

CA2 KN40pp
CA2 KN31pp
CA2 KN22pp

0.180
0.180
0.180

4
3
2

1
2

CA2 KN403pp
CA2 KN313pp
CA2 KN223pp

0.180
0.180
0.180

4
3
2

1
2

CA2 KN407pp
CA2 KN317pp
CA2 KN227pp

0.180
0.180
0.180

4
3
2

1
2

CA2 KN405pp
CA2 KN315pp
CA2 KN225pp

0.210
0.210
0.210

4
3
2

1
2

CA3 KN40pp
CA3 KN31pp
CA3 KN22pp

0.225
0.225
0.225

4
3
2

1
2

CA3 KN403pp
CA3 KN313pp
CA3 KN223pp

0.225
0.225
0.225

4
3
2

1
2

CA3 KN407pp
CA3 KN317pp
CA3 KN227pp

0.225
0.225
0.225

4
3
2

1
2

CA3 KN405pp
CA3 KN315pp
CA3 KN225pp

0.255
0.255
0.255

Spring terminal connections

816891

Auxiliary
contacts

4.5 VA

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

4.5 VA

CA2 KN403pp

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

4.5 VA

Control relays for d.c. control circuit

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.

b Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
819411

Screw clamp connections

3W

6
Spring terminal connections
3W

CA3 KN407pp

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

3W

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

3W

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Control relays CA2 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) (0.85...1.1 Uc)
Volts a 12
20
24(2) 36
42
48
110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500
50/60 Hz
230
240 400
415
Code
J7
Z7 B7
C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
S7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72
Control relays CA3 K (0.8...1.15 Uc)
Volts c 12
20
24(2) 36
48
60
72
100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250
Code
JD ZD BD
CD ED ND SD KD FD GD
LD
MD MPD MUD UD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.
(2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a code Z7,
c code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.

9
10

Characteristics :
pages 7/2 and 7/3

7/4

Dimensions :
page 7/8

Schemes :
page 7/9

660/
690
Y7

TeSys control relays

References

TeSys K
control relays
For d.c. control circuit

Low consumption control relays (d.c. control circuit)

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing.

b Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
816895

Control circuit
Consumption

1
Auxiliary
contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

Weight

kg

Screw clamp connections

1.8 W
CA4 KN40ppp

4
3
2

1
2

CA4 KN40pp
CA4 KN31pp
CA4 KN22pp

0.235
0.235
0.235

4
3
2

1
2

CA4 KN403pp
CA4 KN313pp
CA4 KN223pp

0.235
0.235
0.235

4
3
2

1
2

CA4 KN407pp
CA4 KN317pp
CA4 KN227pp

0.235
0.235
0.235

4
3
2

1
2

CA4 KN405pp
CA4 KN315pp
CA4 KN225pp

0.265
0.265
0.265

Spring terminal connections

1.8 W

2
3

Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

1.8 W

Solder pins for printed circuit boards

1.8 W

4
5

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Control relays CA4 K (Wide range coil: 0.7...1.3 Uc)
Volts c
12
20
24
48
72
110
120
Code
JW3
ZW3
BW3
EW3
SW3
FW3
GW3

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
pages 7/2 and 7/3

Dimensions :
page 7/8

Schemes :
page 7/9

7/5

TeSys control relays

References

TeSys K
control relays

Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

816899

Connection

LA1 KN20

Composition

Reference

Screw clamp terminals

1
4
3
2
1

2
1

1
2
3
4

LA1 KN20
LA1 KN02
LA1 KN11
LA1 KN40 (1)
LA1 KN31 (1)
LA1 KN22 (1)
LA1 KN13 (1)
LA1 KN04 (1)

kg
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

Spring terminals

1
4
3
2
1

2
1

1
2
3
4

LA1 KN203
LA1 KN023
LA1 KN113
LA1 KN403 (1)
LA1 KN313 (1)
LA1 KN223 (1)
LA1 KN133 (1)
LA1 KN043 (1)

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

Faston connectors
1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

1
4
3
2
1

2
1

1
2
3
4

LA1 KN207
LA1 KN027
LA1 KN117
LA1 KN407 (1)
LA1 KN317 (1)
LA1 KN227 (1)
LA1 KN137 (1)
LA1 KN047 (1)

0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045

2
3
4
5

Weight

Electronic time delay contact blocks

b
b
b
b
b

Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum

Control voltage 0.85...1.1 Uc
Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W
Operating temperature - 10...+ 60 C
Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period 0.5 s after the time delay period

816899

Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

Voltage

Type

7
LA2 KT2p

Timing
range

Composition

Reference

V
a or c 24...48

On-delay

s
1...30

LA2 KT2E

a 110...240

On-delay

1...30

LA2 KT2U

Other versions

Electronic timers type RE4.

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) Block of 4 contacts for use on CA2 K and CA3 K.

10
Characteristics :
page 7/3

7/6

Dimensions :
page 7/8

Schemes :
page 7/9

Weight

kg
0.040

0.040


TeSys control relays

References

TeSys K
control relays

Mounting and marking accessories

Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

Mounting
and connection
Clips onto front of relay 
with locating device.
No tools required.

Type

For
voltages

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Varistor (1)

a and c
12...24 V

LA4 KE1B

kg
0.010

a and c
32...48 V

LA4 KE1E

0.010

a and c
50...129 V

LA4 KE1FC

0.010

a and c
130...250 V

LA4 KE1UG

0.010

c
12...24 V

LA4 KC1B

0.010

c
32...48 V

LA4 KC1E

0.010

a
220...250 V

LA4 KA1U

0.010

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

LA4 Kppp

Diode + Zener diode (2)

RC (3)

Weight

Mounting accessories
Description
Mounting plates

LA9 D973

Application

Weight

On 1 4 rail

Clip-on

LA9 D973

kg
0.025

On 2 4 rails

110/120 mm
fixing centres

10

DX1 AP25

0.065

Sold in
lots of

Unit
reference

Marking accessories
Description

Application

1
2
3
4
5

Weight

Marker holder

Clip-on fixing on front face

100

LA9 D90

kg
0.001

Clip-in markers

4 maximum per relay

Strips of 10
identical 
numbers 0 to 9

25

AB1 Rp (4)

0.002

Strips of 10
identical capital
letters A to Z

25

AB1 Gp (4)

0.002

6
7

(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Polarised component.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating
frequency.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.

9
10
Dimensions :
page 7/8

7/7

TeSys control relays

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSys K control relays

Control relays

CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

On panel

On printed circuit board

LA1 K

8,65

A1

= = =

57

35

35

45

53

50

50

58

58

A2

45

58

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)

45

57

LA9 D973

DX1 AP25

On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates

On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates

DZ5 ME5

5
21

35

57

120

50

5
45

57

57

45

27

Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT

On control relay

LA2 KT
27

58

38

38

57

38

Suppressor modules

LA4 K

On control relay

LA4 K

25

110

58

22

10

22

Characteristics:
pages 7/2 and 7/3

7/8

References:
pages 7/4 to 7/7

Schemes:
page 7/9

57

TeSys control relays

Schemes

TeSys K
control relays

With integral suppression device

CA3 K

53/NO

61/NC

71/NC

83/NO

54

62

72

84

83/NO
84

83/NO

73/NO
74

82

81/NC

51/NC

63/NO
64
61/NC

71/NC
72

62

4
5

82

43/NO
44

53/NO

73/NO

31/NC
32

54

84

21/NC
22

54

53/NO

74

13/NO
14

61/NC
62

81/NC

A1
A2

53/NO
54

4 N/C
LA1KN04, LA1KN047
71/NC

43/NO
44

61/NC
62

1 N/O + 3 N/C
LA1KN13, LA1KN137

72

33/NO
34

51/NC
52

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

2 N/O + 2 N/C
LA1 KN22,
LA1KN227

61/NC

21/NC
22

63/NO
64

Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2KT

3 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 KN31,
LA1KN317

62

13/NO
14

4 N/O
LA1 KN40,
LA1KN407

61/NC

A1
A2

1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 KN11,
LA1KN117

62

43/NO
44

2 N/C
LA1 KN02,
LA1KN027

53/NO

For CA2 K, CA3 K

2 N/O
LA1 KN20,
LA1KN207

54

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

_ A2

+ A1

53/NO

33/NO
34

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1 K

+A1

23/NO
24

CA4 K

A2

13/NO
14

2 N/O + 2 N/C

A1

3 N/O + 1 N/C

A2

4 N/O

54

CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

52

Control relays

Suppressor modules
LA4 KC

LA4 KE

18

16

15

A2

A1

1 C/O
LA2 KT2

7
8
9
10

Characteristics:
pages 7/2 and 7/3

References:
pages 7/4 to 7/7

Dimensions, mounting:
page 7/8

7/9

TeSys control relays

Characteristics

Mini-control relays TeSys CAp SK and CA2 SKE

Environment

1
2

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947, 

VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424, 
CSA 22-2 n 14, UL508
Conforming to standards
Product certifications
Protective treatment
Conforming to IEC 60068 
(DIN 50015)
Degree of protection
Conforming to VDE 0106
Ambient air temperature
Storage
around the device
Operation
Maximum operating altitude Without derating

Operating position

Vertical axis

Horizontal axis

Without derating

Without derating

690
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424
UL, CSA
TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)

C
C
m

Protection against direct finger contact

- 50+ 70
- 20+ 50
2000

3
4
5
6
7

Connection by connectors

Tightening torque
Terminal referencing

Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Pozidriv n 1 head
Conforming to standards 
EN 50005 and EN50011

mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m

Min.
1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5
1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35
1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35
0.8
Up to 4 contacts

Max.
1 x 6 or 2 x 4
1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5
1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5

Control circuit characteristics

Control relay
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits
For operation
(y 50 C)
For drop-out
Average consumption
Inrush
at 20 C and at Uc
Sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Between coil energisation and
at 20 C and at Uc
opening of the N/C contacts
closing of the N/O contacts
Between coil de-energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts
closing of the N/C contacts
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil
in millions of operating cycles Standard c coil

CA2 SK
a 24400
0.851.1 Uc
u 0.20 Uc
16 VA
4.2 VA
1.4

ms
ms

816
714

1018
812

ms
ms

68
810
1200
10

46
68
1200

10

8
9
10
References :
pages 7/12 and 7/13

7/10

Dimensions :
page 7/14

Schemes :
page 7/15

CA2 SKE

23 VA
4.9 VA
1.5

CA3 SK
c 1272
0.851.1 Uc
u 0.10 Uc
2.2 W
2.2 W
2.2

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys control relays

Mini-control relays TeSys CAp SK and CA2 SKE

Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Up to 690

Conforming to IEC 96047, 

BS 5424, VDE0110 groupC, 
CSA C 22-2 n 14
Conventional rated
For ambient temperature
thermal current (Ith)
y 55 C
Frequency of the operational current

690

10

Hz

Up to 400

Short-circuit protection

10

Conforming to IEC 60947 

and VDE 0660, gl fuse

1
2

Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making
current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power
broken (cos j 0.4).
V

24

VA
VA
VA
VA

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Occasional making capacity

48

110/
127
48
96
240
17
34
86
7
14
36
1000 2050 5000

220/
230
440
158
66
10000

380/
400
800
288
120
14000

440
880
317
132
13 000

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.
V
W
W
W
W

24
120
55
15
720

48
80
38
11
600

110
60
30
9
400

220
52
28
8
300

440
51
26
7
230

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References :
pages 7/12 and 7/13

Dimensions :
page 7/14

Schemes :
page 7/15

7/11

TeSys control relays

References

Mini-control relays TeSys CA2 SK and CA3 SK

Mini-control relay TeSys CA2 SKE with alternating contacts

Mini-control relays

533664

b Width of mini-control relays 27 mm.

b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail.
b Connection by connectors.
Control circuit supply

CA2 SK20pp

a.c. supply

d.c. supply

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

Weight

CA2 SK20pp

kg
0.132

CA2 SK11pp

0.132

CA3 SK20pp

0.132

CA3 SK11pp

0.132

Mini-control relay with alternating contacts

533665

This mini-control relay with alternating contacts (see function diagram page 7/15) makes it possible to
automatically split the operating time between 2 circuits of a redundant system.
By regularly energising the safety circuits, this device makes it possible to ensure that they are operating
correctly.

4
5

Auxiliary contacts

b
b
b
b
b
CA2 SKE20pp

Width of mini-control relay 45 mm.

Fixing by 4 screws.
Connection by connectors.
Cannot be fitted with front-mounted auxiliary contact block.
Cannot be fitted with coil suppressor module.

Control circuit supply

a.c. supply

Auxiliary contacts

Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)

CA2 SKE20pp

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA2 SKE
Volts a
24
48
110
120
220
230
240
50/60 Hz
Code
B7
E7
F7
G7
M7
P7
U7
Mini-control relays CA3 SK
Volts c
12
24
36
48
72
Code
JD
BD
CD
ED
SD

8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 7/10 and 7/11

7/12

Dimensions:
page 7/14

Schemes:
page 7/15

Weight

kg
0.175

380

400

Q7

V7

TeSys control relays

References

Mini-control relays TeSys CA2 SK and CA3 SK

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and 
coil suppressor modules

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

533666

Clip-on front mounting

For use on
control relays

CA2 SK20

Maximum number
of blocks
per contactor

Composition

LA1 SK20

kg
0.022

LA1 SK02

0.022

LA1 SK11

0.022

LA1 SK11

Reference

Weight

1
2

Suppressor modules
533667

Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on
control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
LA4 SKp1p

Type
Varistor
(1)

Diode
(2)

For
voltages

Sold
in
lots of
10

Unit
reference

Weight

LA4 SKE1E

kg
0.003

a and c 110 V250 V 10

LA4 SKE1U

0.003

c 24 V250 V

LA4 SKC1U

0.003

a and c 24 V48 V

10

(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).

3
4
5

6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
pages 7/10 and 7/11

Dimensions:
page 7/14

Schemes:
page 7/15

7/13

Dimensions, mounting

TeSys control relays

Mini-control relays TeSys CAp SK and CA2 SKE

Dimensions

Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK

55,5

27

84,5
55,5

56

56

2
LA4 SK

3,5
LA1 SK (1)

27

3,5

(1) Only on CA2SK20.

Mounting

Mini-control relays

55,5

27

56

CA2 SK and CA3 SK

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)

5
Dimensions
68

45

58

CA2 SKE

7
4

Mounting
On panel

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)

48-50

68

34-35

10

Characteristics :
pages 7/10 and 7/11

7/14

45

58

CA2 SKE

References :
pages 7/12 and 7/13

Schemes :
page 7/15

TeSys control relays

Schemes

Mini-control relays TeSys CAp SK and CA2 SKE

Schemes

CA2 SK20, CA3 SK20

CA2 SK11, CA3 SK11

A1

13/NO

23/NO

A1

13/NO

21/NO

14

24

A2

14

22

1 N/O + 1 N/C

A2

2 N/O

CA2 SKE

CA2 SKE

13/NO

23/NO

A1

14

24

A1

Function diagram

A2

2 N/O

13

A2

Energised

De-energised

14

Close
Open

23

24

Close
Open

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

2 N/O
LA1 SK20

2 N/C
LA1 SK02

43/NO

31/NC

41/NC

33/NO

41/NC

44

32

42

34

42

33/NO

34

1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 SK11

6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 7/10 and 7/11

References :
pages 7/12 and 7/13

Dimensions, mounting :
page 7/14

7/15

Characteristics

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Control relay type

Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)
Separation of
electrical circuits
Conforming to standards

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Overvoltage category III and
degree of pollution 3
Conforming to UL, CSA

690

690

690

600

600

600

Conforming to IEC 60947

kV

Conforming to IEC 60536 

and VDE 0106

Reinforced insulation up to 400 V

IEC 60947-5-1, N-F C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794,
EN 60947-5
UL, CSA

Product certifications

TH

Degree of protection

Conforming to VDE 0106

Front face protected against direct finger contact IP 2X

Ambient air temperature

around the device

Storage
Operation, conforming to 
IEC 60255 (0.81.1 UC)
For operation at Uc

C
C

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 60

- 60+ 80
- 5+ 60

Protection against direct

finger contact
- 60+ 80
- 5+ 60

- 40+ 70

- 40+ 70

- 40+ 70

Maximum operating altitude

Without derating

3000

3000

3000

Operating positions

Without derating
in the following positions

30



Shock resistance (1) 

half sine wave for 11ms

Control relay open

Control relay closed

10 gn
15 gn

10 gn
15 gn

10 gn
15 gn

Vibration resistance (1)

5300 Hz

Control relay open

Control relay closed

2 gn
4 gn

2 gn
4 gn

2 gn
4 gn

Screw clamp connections

Flexible
1 conductor
conductor
2 conductors
without cable
end
Flexible
1 conductor
conductor with 2 conductors
cable end
Solid conductor 1 conductor
without cable
2 conductors
end
Tightening torque

mm2
mm2

14
14

14
14

14
14

mm2
mm2

14
12.5

14
12.5

14
12.5

mm2
mm2

14
14

14
14

14
14

N.m

1.7

1.7

1.7

12.5

12.5

12.5

7
8

90

Spring terminal connections

1 or 2 flexible or rigid conductors mm2

without cable end

30



180

Conforming to IEC 60068

180

Protective treatment

180

CAD
low consumption

CAD c

90

CAD a

(1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.

9
10
References:
pages 7/21 to 7/23

7/16

Dimensions:
page 7/24

Schemes:
page 7/25

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Control relay type

CAD a

CAD c

CAD
low consumption

12690

12440

c 572

0.81.1 Uc at 50 Hz
0.851.1 Uc at 60 Hz

0.71.25 Uc

0.71.25 Uc

0.30.6 Uc

0.10.25 Uc

0.10.25 Uc

Control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits
Operation
With coil 50/60 Hz

With standard coil,

wide range
Drop-out
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc

Operating time
(at rated control circuit voltage 
and at 20 C)

Short supply failure

Maximum operating rate
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles

Time constant L/R

a 50/60 Hz (at 50 Hz)

VA

Inrush: 70
sealed: 8

With standard coil

Inrush or sealed: 5.4

Inrush or sealed: 2.4

Between coil energisation

ms
and
- opening of the N/C contacts
- closing of the N/O contacts ms

419

55 15 %

67 15 %

1222

63 15 %

77 15 %

Between coil de-energisation ms

and
- opening of the N/O contacts
- closing of the N/C contacts ms

412

20 20 %

27 20 %

617

25 20 %

35 20 %

Maximum duration without

ms
affecting hold-in of the device
In operating cycles 
per second
With coil 50/60 Hz 
(at 50Hz)
With standard coil c
wide range
ms

30

30

30

28

40

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

References:
pages 7/21 to 7/23

Dimensions:
page 7/24

Schemes:
page 7/25

7/17

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Characteristics of instantaneous contacts incorporated in the control relay

1
2
3

Number of contacts

5

Rated operational voltage

Up to
(Ue)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Conforming to UL, CSA

690

V
V

690
600

Conventional
For ambient temperature 60C
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the
operational current
Minimum switching capacity U min
I min

10

Hz

25...400

V
mA

17
5

Short-circuit protection
Rated making capacity
Short-time rating

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

Conforming to 
I rms
IEC 60947-5-1
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms

Insulation resistance

Non-overlap time
Tightening torque

Guaranteed between 
N/C and N/O contacts
Philips head n 2 and 6

Non-overlap distance

Mechanically linked
contacts

gG fuse: 10 A
a : 140, c : 250
A
A
A

100
120
140

MW

> 10

ms

1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)

N.m

1.2
Linked contacts in association with auxiliary contacts LADN

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1

The 3 N/O contacts and the 2 N/C contacts of CADN32 are linked mechanically by one
mobile contact carrier.

6
7
8
9
10
References:
pages 7/21 to 7/23

7/18

Dimensions:
page 7/24

Schemes:
page 7/25

Characteristics (continued)

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such
as the coil of an electromagnet:
making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
V
VA
VA
VA

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles

24
60
16
4

48
120
32
8

115
280
80
20

230
560
160
40

400
960
280
70

440
1050
300
80

600
1440
420
100

Millions of operating cycles

10
8
7
6
5
4

1
2
3

3
2

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5

0,4
0,3
0,2

0,1

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6 0,8 1
0,7 0,9

6
8 10
5
7
9
Current broken in A

d.c. supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the power.
V
W
W
W

1 million operating cycles

3 million operating cycles
10 million operating cycles
Millions of operating cycles

10
8
7
6
5
4

24
120
70
25

48
90
50
18

125
75
38
14

250
68
33
12

440
61
28
10

6
7

24 V
48 V
125 V

3
250 V

1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5

440 V

0,4

0,3
0,2

0,1

References:
pages 7/21 to 7/23

Dimensions:
page 7/24

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6 0,8 1
0,7 0,9

6
8 10
5
7
9
Current broken in A

10

Schemes:
page 7/25

7/19

aa

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
See page opposite for mounting possibilities
according to control relay type and rating

10

7/20

References

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks

Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption

Control relays for connection by screw clamp terminals

Type

Number of
contacts

Composition

Basic reference, to be
completed by adding the
control voltage code (1)

Weight

Standard voltages
a

Instantaneous 5

CAD 50pp

CAD 50pp (3)

B7

P7

BD

LC (2)
BL

kg
0.580

CAD 32pp (3)

B7

P7

BD

BL

0.580

Control relays for connection by spring terminals

Instantaneous 5

CAD 503pp

B7

P7

BD

BL

0.580

CAD 323pp

B7

P7

BD

BL

0.580

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments
Number of
contacts

CAD 32pp

4 (4)

Maximum number per relay

Clip-on mounting
front
side

Composition

Reference

1
1
2
2

2
1
4

3
2

LAD N11
LAD 8N11 (6)
LAD N20
LAD 8N20 (6)
LAD N02
LAD 8N02 (6)
LAD N22
LAD N13
LAD N40
LAD N04
LAD N31
LAD C22

1 on LH side

1 on LH side

1 on LH side

4 (4)
1

Including 1 N/O and 1 N/C make before break.

CAD 503pp

CAD 323pp

1
1

2
2
2
3

4
1
2

2
3

Weight

kg
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050

4
5

With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number of
contacts

Maximum
number per
relay
Front
mounting

4 (4)

Composition

protected (5)
2
2
2 2
2
2

Reference

Weight

LA1 DX20
LA1 DX02
LA1 DY20
LA1 DZ40
LA1 DZ31

0.040
0.040
0.040
0.050
0.050

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

Dimensions :
page 7/24

kg

2
1

This type of connection is not possible for contact blocks LAD 8 and blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other
instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected above.
Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
a.c. supply
Volts a
24
42
48
110
115
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
50/60 Hz
B7
D7
E7
F7
FE7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
d.c. supply (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Volts c
12
24
36
48
60
72
110
125
220
250
440
U from 0.7 to 1.25 Uc JD
BD
CD
ED
ND
SD
FD
GD
MD
UD
RD
Low consumption (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Volts c
5
12
20
24
48
110
220
250
Code
AL
JL
ZL
BL
EL
FL
ML
UL
(2) LC: low consumption.
(3) To order control relays with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of the selected reference.
Example: CAD50pp becomes CAD506pp.
(4) Blocks with 4 auxiliary contacts cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
(5) Product fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(6) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
Characteristics :
pages 7/16 and 7/17

Schemes :
page 7/25

7/21

7
8
9
10

References

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Add-on blocks

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals (1)
Number
and type of
contacts

1
2

1 N/C and 1 N/O

Maximum number
per relay
Front mounting
1

Time delay
Type
On-delay

Off-delay
(Sealing cover: see page 5/85)
LAD T

Reference

Range
0.13 s(2)
0.130 s
10180 s
130 s(3)
0.13 s(2)
0.130 s
10180 s

Weight
kg

LAD T0
LAD T2
LAD T4
LAD S2
LAD R0
LAD R2
LAD R4

0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.060

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

Add the digit 3 to the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03.

Mechanical latch blocks (4)

Unlatching
control
Manual or
electric

Maximum number
per relay
Front mounting
1

Basic reference
to be completed
(5)
LAD 6K10p

Weight
kg
0.070

Suppressor modules

These modules clip onto the top of the control relay and the electrical connection is instantly made. Fitting of an input
module is still possible.
LAD 6K10

RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)

b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference.

b Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400Hz maximum.
b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
For
Operational
Reference
mounting on
voltage
CAD a
a 2448 V
LAD 4RCE
a 110240 V
LAD 4RCU

Weight
kg
0.012
0.012

Varistors (peak limiting)

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage value to 2Uc maximum.

b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
CAD a
a 2448 V
LAD 4VE
a 50127 V
LAD 4VG
a 110250 V
LAD 4VU

0.012
0.012
0.012

Freewheel diode

LAD4pp

LAD4DDL

0.012

Bidirectional peak limiting diode

b Protection provided by limiting the transient overvoltage value to 2Uc maximum.

b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
CAD a
a 24 V
LAD 4TB
a 72 V
LAD 4TS
CAD c
c 24 V
LAD4TBDL
c 72 V
LAD4TSDL
c 125 V
LAD4TGDL
c 250 V
LAD4TUDL
c 600 V
LAD4TXDL

8
9

b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.

b Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time).
b Polarised component.
CAD c
c 24250 V

LAD4DDL or LAD4TpDL

10
Characteristics :
pages 7/16 and 7/17

7/22

0.012
0.012
0.012
0.012
0.012
0.012
0.012

(1) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
(2) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
(3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
(4) Power should not be simultaneously applied or maintained to the mechanical latching block of the CAD N. The duration of
the control signal to the mechanical latching block and the CAD N should be u 100 ms.
(5) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Volts a and c
24
32/36
42/48
60/72
100
110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415
Code
B
C
E
EN
K
F
M
U
Q
(6) CADpp d.c. and low consumption control relays are fitted with a built-in bi-directional peak limiting diode suppressor
as standard. On control relays produced after 15th July 2004, this diode is removable. It can therefore be replaced by
the user (see references LAD4Tppp above). It can also be replaced by a freewheel diode LAD4DDL . If a d.c. or
low consumption control replay is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with a
blanking plug LAD9DL.
Illustrations:
page 7/20

Dimensions :
page 7/24

Schemes :
page 7/25

References

TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Accessories and spare parts

Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description

For marking
Sheet of 64 blank legends,
self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm

For
mounting on

Sold in
lots of

Unit reference

CAD, LAD (4 contacts)

10

LAD 21

0.020

LAD 22

0.020

35

LAD 24

0.200

XBY 2U

0.100

100

LAD 90

0.001

Sheet of 112 blank legends, LAD (2 contacts),

self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm
LAD T

LA9 D901

LAD 9ET1

LXD 1

Strips of blank, self-adhesive All products

legends for printing by plotter
(4 sets of 5 strips)
SIS Label labelling
Multi-language version:
software for legends LAD 21 English, French, German,
and LAD 22, supplied on
Italian, Spanish
CD-Rom
Legend holder, snap-in, 
LC1 D09...38
8 x 18 mm
LC1DT20...40
LADN (4 contacts)
LAD T, LAD R
For protection
Sealing cover
LAD T, LAD R
Safety cover preventing
CAD
access to the moving contact
carrier

Weight
kg

1
2
3

1
1

LA9 D901
LAD 9ET1

0.005
0.004

Spare parts: coils

Specifications
b Average consumption at 20 C: 
- inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 70 VA at 50 Hz, 
- sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8 VA at 60 Hz,
b Operating range (q < 60 C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc
Control circuit
Average resistance
Inductance of Reference (1)
voltage Uc
at 20 C 10 %
closed circuit 50/60 Hz
V
V
H
12
6.3
0.26
LXD 1J7
21 (2)
5.6
0.24
LXD 1Z7
24
6.19
0.26
LXD 1B7
32
12.3
0.48
LXD 1C7
36

LXD 1CC7
42
19.15
0.77
LXD 1D7
48
25
1
LXD 1E7
60

LXD 1EE7
100

LXD 1K7
110
130
5.5
LXD 1F7
115

LXD 1FE7
120
159
6.7
LXD 1G7
127
192.5
7.5
LXD 1FC7
200

LXD 1L7
208
417
16
LXD 1LE7
220/230
539
22
LXD 1M7 (3)
230
595
21
LXD 1P7
230/240
645
25
LXD 1U7 (4)
277
781
30
LXD 1W7
380/400
1580
60
LXD 1Q7
400
1810
64
LXD 1V7
415
1938
74
LXD 1N7
440
2242
79
LXD 1R7
480
2300
85
LXD 1T7
500
2499

LXD 1S7
575
3294

LXD 1SC7
600
3600
135
LXD 1X7
690
5600
190
LXD 1Y7
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) Voltage for special coils fitted in control relays with serial timer module with 24 V supply.
(3) This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
(4) This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.

4
Weight
kg
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070

5
6
7
8
9
10

Characteristics :
pages 7/16 and 7/17

Dimensions :
page 7/24

Schemes :
page 7/25

7/23

TeSys control relays

Dimensions,
mounting

TeSysD control relays and add-on blocks

Dimensions

CAD c or LC (low consumption)

CAD a

1
2
3
4

c
c1

12,5
(LAD8)

45

c2

c2

c3

c3

CAD

32
50

323
503

b
c

without cover or add-on blocks

with cover, without add-on blocks
c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)

77
84
86
117

99
84
86
117

c2 with LAD6K10
c3 with LADT, R, S

129
137

129
137

141

141

with LADT, R, S and sealing cover

45

c1

CAD

32
50

323
503

b
c

without cover or add-on blocks

with cover, without add-on blocks
c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts)

77
93
95
126

99
93
95
126

c2 with LAD6K10
c3 with LADT, R, S

138
146

138
146

150

150

with LADT, R, S and sealing cover

Mounting
CAD

Panel mounted

Mounted on rail AM1DP200 or DE200

60/70

78

(1)

with cover

35

45

CAD a

CAD c or LC

86

95

c
c

(1) 2 elongated holes 4.5 x 9

(AM1DP200) (2)
(AM1DP200) (2)

(2) With cover

Mounted on plate AM1P

AF1 EA4

60/70

8
9
c

10

with cover

Characteristics :
pages 7/16 to 7/19

7/24

35

CAD a

CAD c or LC

86

95

Illustrations:
page 7/20

References :
pages 7/21 to 7/23

Schemes :
page 7/25

CAD a

CAD c or LC

88
96

97
105

TeSys control relays

Schemes

TeSys

D control relays and add-on blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

3 N/O + 2 N/C
CAD32

A1

13/NO

23/NO

33/NO

43/NO

03/NO

A1

13/NO

21/NC

31/NC

43/NO

03/NO

14

24

34

44

04

A2

14

22

32

44

04

A2

5 N/O
CAD50

2
LADN02

163/NC
(174)

151/NC
(182)

161/NC
(172)

51/NC

164
(173)

152
(181)

162
(171)

52

61/NC

LAD8N20 (1)

2 N/C
LAD8N02

153/NO
(184)

62

53/NO
54

63/NO

161/NC
(172)
162
(171)

64

153/NO
(184)

LAD8N11 (1)

2 N/O
LADN20

154
(183)

61/NC
62

54

53/NO

1 N/O + 1 N/C
LADN11

154
(183)

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

(1) The figures in brackets are for the device mounted on the RH side of the control relay.

71/NC

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

71/NC

81/NC

53/NO

63/NO

73/NO

83/NO

51/NC

61/NC

71/NC

81/NC

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

72

84

54

62

72

82

54

64

74

84

52

62

72

82

54

62

74

84

3 N/O + 1 N/C
LADN31

61/NC

4 N/C
LADN04

53/NO

4 N/O
LADN40

62

1 N/O + 3 N/C
LADN13

54

2 N/O + 2F N/C
LADN22

2 N/O + 2 N/C including

1 N/O + 1 N/C
make before break

63/NO

51/NC

61/NC

53/NO

63/NO

53/NO

63/NO

73/NO

83/NO

53/NO

61/NC

73/NO

83/NO

52

62

54

64

54

64

74

84

54

62

74

84

87/NO
88

LA1DZ40

2 N/O protected +
1 N/O + 1 N/C
non protected
LA1DZ31

64

75/NC
76

LA1DY20

2 N/O protected +
2 N/O non protected

53/NO

61/NC

LA1DX02

2 N/O protected (2)

54

53/NO

62

With dust and damp protected contacts

2 N/O protected
2 N/C protected

LA1DX20

54

LADC22

6
7

(2) Product fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

E1

65/NC
66

A1

57/NO
58

LAD6K10

E2

A2

55/NC

67/NO

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C

LADR

68

67/NO
68

LADS

56

55/NC
56

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C

LADT

Mechanical latch blocks

9
10
Characteristics :
pages 7/16 to 7/19

Illustrations:
page 7/20

References :
pages 7/21 to 7/23

Schemes :
page 7/24

7/25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8/0

Contents

8 - Technical information

b Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming

to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2
b Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load . . . . . . . . page 8/3
5

b Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment . . . page 8/4

b Product standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/6

8

b Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8/1

General

Technical information

Tests according to standard utilisation categories

conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie 
and rated operational voltage Ue

Contactors

Electrical durability:
making and breaking conditions

a.c. supply
Typical
applications

2
3
4
5
6

Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions

AC-1

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

cos j
0.95

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

cos j
0.95

Making
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

cos j
0.8

Breaking
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

cos j
0.8

Motors
Slip ring motors: 
starting, breaking.

AC-2

2.5 Ie

Ue

0.65

2.5 Ie

Ue

0.65

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

0.65

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

0.65

Squirrel cage motors:

starting, breaking whilst
motor running.

AC-3
Ie y (1)
Ie > (2)

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

1 Ie
1 Ie

0.17 Ue
0.17 Ue

0.65
0.35

10 Ie
10 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

8 Ie
8 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

Squirrel cage motors:

starting, 
reversing, 
inching

AC-4
Ie y (1)
Ie > (2)

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

6 Ie
6 Ie

Ue
Ue

0.65
0.35

12 Ie
12 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

10 Ie
10 Ie

1.05 Ue
1.05 Ue

0.45
0.35

DC-1

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Making
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

L/R (ms)
1

Breaking
I
U
1.5 Ie
1.05 Ue

L/R (ms)
1

DC-3

2.5 Ie

Ue

2.5 Ie

Ue

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

2.5

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

2.5

DC-5

2.5 Ie

Ue

7.5

2.5 Ie

Ue

7.5

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

15

4 Ie

1.05 Ue

15

Resistors,
non inductive 
or slightly inductive loads

Utilisation
category

d.c. supply
Typical
applications
Resistors,
non inductive 
or slightly inductive loads
Shunt wound motors: 
starting,
reversing,
inching
Series wound motors: 
starting,
reversing,
inching

Utilisation
category

Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability:
making and breaking conditions

Occasional duty:
making and breaking conditions

a.c. supply
Typical
applications

Utilisation
category

Making
I
U

cos j

Breaking
I
U

cos j

Making
I
U

cos j

Breaking
I
U

cos j

Electromagnets
y 72 VA

AC-14

6 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.7

6 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.7

> 72 VA

AC-15

10 Ie

Ue

0.7

Ie

Ue

0.4

10 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.3

10 Ie

1.1 Ue

0.3

Utilisation
category

Making
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Breaking
I
U
Ie
Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Making
I
U
1.1 Ie
1.1 Ue

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

Breaking
I
U
1.1 Ie
1.1 Ue

d.c. supply

8
9

Typical
applications
Electromagnets

DC-13

L/R (ms)
6 P (3)

(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty.

(2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty.
(3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50
W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R.
Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.

10

8/2

General

Technical information

Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors 

at nominal load

3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW

Current values for power in hp

Rated
operational
power (1)

Rated
operational
power (2)

Indicative rated operational current

values at:
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V

kW
A
A
A
A
0.06
0.35
0.2
0.16
0.12
0.09
0.52
0.3
0.24
0.17
0.12
0.7
0.44
0.32
0.23
0.18
1
0.6
0.48
0.35
0.25
1.5
0.85
0.68
0.49
0.37
1.9
1.1
0.88
0.64
0.55
2.6
1.5
1.2
0.87
0.75
3.3
1.9
1.5
1.1
1.1
4.7
2.7
2.2
1.6
1.5
6.3
3.6
2.9
2.1
2.2
8.5
4.9
3.9
2.8
3
11.3
6.5
5.2
3.8
4
15
8.5
6.8
4.9
5.5
20
11.5
9.2
6.7
7.5
27
15.5
12.4
8.9
11
38
22
17.6
12.8
15
51
29
23
17
18.5
61
35
28
21
22
72
41
33
24
30
96
55
44
32
37
115
66
53
39
45
140
80
64
47
55
169
97
78
57
75
230
132
106
77
90
278
160
128
93
110
340
195
156
113
132
400
230
184
134
160
487
280
224
162
200
609
350
280
203
250
748
430
344
250
315
940
540
432
313
355
1061
610
488
354
400
1200
690
552
400
500
1478
850
680
493
560
1652
950
760
551
630
1844
1060
848
615
710
2070
1190
952
690
800
2340
1346
1076
780
900
2640
1518
1214
880
1000
2910
1673
1339
970
(1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz).
(2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).

hp
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500

Indicative rated operational current values at:

110 120 V
A
4.4
6.4
8.4
12
13.6
19.2
30.4
44
56
84
108
136
160
208
260

200 V

208 V

A
2.5
3.7
4.8
6.9
7.8
11
17.5
25.3
32.2
48.3
62.1
78.2
92
120
150
177
221
285
359
414
552

A
2.4
3.5
4.6
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
114
143
169
211
273
343
396
528

220 240 V
A
2.2
3.2
4.2
6
6.8
9.6
15.2
22
28
42
54
68
80
104
130
154
192
248
312
360
480
604
722
828
954
1030
1180

380 415 V
A
1.3
1.8
2.3
3.3
4.3
6.1
9.7
14
18
27
34
44
51
66
83
103
128
165
208
240
320
403
482
560
636

786

440 480 V
A
1.1
1.6
2.1
3
3.4
4.8
7.6
11
14
21
27
34
40
52
65
77
96
124
156
180
240
302
361
414
477
515
590

550 600 V
A
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.4
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
27
32
41
52
62
77
99
125
144
192
242
289
336
382
412
472

2
3
4
5
6
7

Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.

8
9
10

8/3

General

Technical information

Protective treatment of equipment

according to climatic environment

Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is

placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your
requirements.

In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be
remembered:
b the prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion,
b only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be
considered.

All climates treatment TC

This is the standard treatment for Schneider-electric brand equipment and is suitable
for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as
Klimafest, Climateproof.
In particular, it meets the requirements specified in the following publications:
b Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at: 
+ 40 C and 95 % relative humidity.
b DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber:
+ 23 C and 83 % relative humidity,
+ 40 C and 92 % relative humidity.

It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification societies:

BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA.

Characteristics
b Steel components are usually treated with zinc. When they have a mechanical
function, they may also be painted.
b Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical
characteristics.
b Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate
protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking
components).

Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment

b TC treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity:
Temperature (C)
Relative humidity (%)

20
40
50

95
80
50


TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes and in particular tropical and
equatorial regions where the equipment is mounted in normally ventilated industrial
premises. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations
are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is
virtually non-existent.

Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment

In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described
above, or in equatorial regions if the equipment is mounted outdoors, or if it is placed
in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC
treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken:
b The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH
finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping
water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers).
b Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish.
b If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided
(0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), that switches on automatically
when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a
temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby
avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the
equipment itself during normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature
difference).
b Special considerations for Operator dialog and Detection products:
for certain pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use
provided their enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this
case, it is also essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration
of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.

8
9
10

8/4

General

Technical information

Protective treatment of equipment

according to climatic environment

TH treatment for hot and humid environments

This treatment is suitable for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are
regularly subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi.
In addition, plastic insulating components are resistant to attacks from insects such
as termites and cockroaches. These properties have often led to this treatment being
described as Tropical Finish, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in
tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone TH treatment.
On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well
require the use of TH treated equipment (see limitations for use of TC treatment).
Special characteristics of TH treatment
b All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi
or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage
(Standards IEC60112, NF C 26-220, DIN5348).
b Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust
inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge
(1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

1
2
3

Protective treatment selection guide

Surrounding
environment

Duty cycle

Internal
heating of
enclosure
when not in
use

Type of
climate

Protective
treatment
of
of
equipencloment
sure

Unimportant

Not necessary

Unimportant TC

TC

Frequent
switching off for
periods of more
than 1day

No
Yes

Temperate TC
Equatorial TH
Unimportant TC

TH
TH
TH

Continuous

Not necessary

Unimportant TC

TH

Not necessary

Temperate TC
Equatorial TH

TC
TH

Frequent
switching off for
periods of more
than 1day

No
Yes

Temperate TC
Equatorial TH
Unimportant TC

TH
TH
TH

Continuous

Not necessary

Unimportant TC

TH

Indoors
No dripping water 
or condensation
Presence of dripping
water or condensation

Outdoors (sheltered)
No dripping water 
or dew

Unimportant

Exposed outdoors or near the sea

Frequent and regular
presence of dripping
water or dew

These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of

guide UTE C 63-100.

6
7

Special precautions for electronic equipment

Electronic products always meet the requirements of TC treatment. A number of

them are TH treated as standard.
Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable
controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an
enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by standards
IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental
conditions requiring TH treatment.
These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree
of protection to at least IP 20 (provided either by their own enclosure or by their
installation method) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution
does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing
activities, for example).

Special treatments

8
9
10

For particularly harsh industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer

special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) A large number of the Schneider-electric brand products are TH treated as standard and
are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.

8/5

General

Technical information

Product standards and certifications

Standardisation

Conformity to standards

Schneider Electric products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great
Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international
(IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated
products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment).
When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and
correct practices, these products will allow users to build equipment, machine systems or
installations that conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC60204-1, relating to
electrical equipment used on industrial machines).
Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has
chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system.
On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following:
b a declaration of conformity,
b a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG),
b a homologation certificate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for
particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy.

2
3

Code
ANSI
BS
CEI
DIN/VDE
EN
GOST
IEC
JIS
NBN
NEN
NF
SAA
UNE

4
5

Certification authority
Name
American National Standards Institute
British Standards Institution
Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano
Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker
Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique
Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov
International Electrotechnical Commission
Japanese Industrial Standards Committee
Institut Belge de Normalisation
Nederlands Normalisatie Institut
Union Technique de lElectricit
Standards Association of Australia
Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certificacion

Country
Abbreviation
ANSI
USA
BSI
Great Britain
CEI
Italy
VDE
Germany
CENELEC Europe
GOST
Russia
IEC
Worldwide
JISC
Japan
IBN
Belgium
NNI
Netherlands
UTE
France
SAA
Australia
AENOR
Spain

European EN standards

These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the
relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free
Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having member or
affiliated status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European
standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated
into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn.
European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefix
NFEN. At the Union Technique de lElectricit (Technical Union of Electricity) (UTE), the French
version of a corresponding European standard carries a dual number: European reference
(NFEN ) and classification index (C ).
Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively
constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE
classification C 63-110.
This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN
EN 60947-4-1.
Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC).
With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to
complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Schneider Electric brand components
conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.

6
7

Regulations

European Directives

Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each

of the member countries of the European Union.
The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of
goods within the European Union, and it must be applied in all member countries. Member
countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to
simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a
technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved, referred to as
essential requirements.
The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to
the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production.
As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the
Directive(s) for his product by affixing the e mark.
The e mark is affixed to Schneider Electric brand products concerned, in order to comply with
French and European regulations.

Significance of the e mark

b The e mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product
conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern it; this condition must be met to
allow free distribution and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product
subject to one or more of the E.U. Directives.
b The e mark is intended solely for national market control authorities.
b The e mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.

10

8/6

General

Technical information

Product standards and certifications

European Directives (continued)

For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its
designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high
level of quality assurance.
For Schneider Electric brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable,
depending on the product, and in particular:
b the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC: the e mark relating to this Directive has been
compulsory since
16th
January 2007.
b the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC
and 93/68/EEC: the e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since
1st January 1996.

ASEFA-LOVAG certification

The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations dEssais Franaise dAppareils lectriques Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry
out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports.
ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC).
ASEFA is now a member of the European agreement group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement
Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the
authorities which are members of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any
of the member authorities.

1
2
3

Quality labels

When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes

recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity.
Code
Quality label
Country
CEBEC
Comit Electrotechnique Belge
Belgium
KEMA-KEUR
Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen
Netherlands
NF
Union Technique de lElectricit
France
VE
sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik
Austria
SEMKO
Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten
Sweden

Product certifications

In some countries, the certification of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this
case, a certificate of conformity to the standard is issued by the official test authority.
Each certified device must bear the relevant certification symbols when these are mandatory:
Code
Certification authority
Country
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
Canada
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
USA
CCC
China Compulsory Certification
China
Note on certifications issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of
approval:
Recognized (
) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a
workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment
manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the
Underwriters Laboratories.
The component is not approved as a Product for general use because
its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application
possibilities are limited.
A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the certification
symbol.
Listed (UL)

The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification

applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general
use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component
must carry the certification symbol.

Marine classification societies

Prior approval (= certification) by certain marine classification societies is generally required for
electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels.
Code
Classification authority
Country
BV
Bureau Veritas
France
DNV
Det Norske Veritas
Norway
GL
Germanischer Lloyd
Germany
LR
Lloyds Register
Great Britain
NKK
Nippon Kaiji Kyoka
Japan
RINA
Registro Italiano Navale
Italy
RRS
Register of Shipping
Russia

Note

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

For further details on a specific product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this
catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.

8/7

Presentation

Technical information

Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

IP code

Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid

bodies, water and personnel access to live parts

2
3

The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529
(2ndedition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the
degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental
direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water.
This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions
such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin.
Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute
towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices
mounted on an enclosure).
Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example :
enclosure with an opening in the base).
Standard NFC15-100 (May 1991 edition), section512, table51 A, provides a
cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental
conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors.
Practical guide UTEC15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics
required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection),
according to the locations in which they are installed.

IP ppp code

The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel
against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C).
Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB).
1st characteristic numeral:
2nd characteristic numeral:
Additional letter:
corresponds to protection of the equipment against
corresponds to protection of the equipment
corresponds to protection of
penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel
against penetration of water with harmful effects. personnel against direct contact
against direct contact with live parts.
with live parts.
Protection of the equipment

With the back of the hand.

Protected against
vertical dripping water,
(condensation).

With the finger.

Protected against
dripping water at an
angle of up to 15.

With a 2.5 mm tool.

Protected against rain at

an angle of up to 60.

With a 1 mm wire.

Non-protected

Protected against
direct contact with
the back of the
hand (accidental
contacts).

Protected against
direct finger
contact.

Protected against
direct contact with
a 2.5 mm tool.

Protected against
direct contact with
a 1 mm wire.

Protected against
splashing water in all
directions.

Dust protected
(no harmful
deposits).

Protected against
direct contact with
a1 mm wire.

Protected against water

jets in all directions.

Dust tight.

Protected against
direct contact with
a1 mm wire.

Protected against
powerful jets of water
and waves.

7
4

Protected against
the penetration of
solid objects
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to 50 mm
Protected against
the penetration of
solid objects
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to 12.5 mm.
Protected against
the penetration of
solid objects
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to 2.5 mm.
Protected against
the penetration of
solid objects
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to
1 mm.

Non-protected

Protection of
personnel
Non-protected

15

60

15 cm

1m

10

8
m

8/8

min

Protected against the

effects of temporary
immersion.
Protected against the
effects of prolonged
immersion under
specified conditions.

Presentation

Technical information

Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

IK code

Degrees of protection against mechanical impact

The European standard EN50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system
(IKcode) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment
enclosures against external mechanical impact.
Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51A, provides a
cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental
conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors.
Practical guide UTEC15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics
required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection),
according to the locations in which they are installed.

IK pp code

1
2

The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05). 

2 characteristic numerals:
corresponding to a value of impact energy.
h (cm)

Energy (J)

7.5

0.15

10

0.2

03

17.5

0.35

04

25

0.5

05

35

0.7

20

40

30

20

10

40

20

00
01

Non-protected

0,2 kg

02

06

0,5 kg

07

08

1,7 kg

4
5
6

09
10

5 kg
h

7
8
9
10

8/9

Head Office
35, rue Joseph Monier
F-92500 Rueil-Malmaison
France

The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Design: Schneider Electric
Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed by:

ART. 960396

January 2010

MKTED210011EN

www.schneider-electric.com

Schneider Electric Industries SAS